Full text of "The victorian naturalist"

See other formats

The
Victorian

Naturalist

Eas
=< —

eke RPS

Lis nts 44

Volume 113 (1) 19942, ; } February

Published by The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria
since 1884
CTORIA

“wn

From the Editors

Members Observations
As an introduction to his naturalist note on page 29, George Crichton had written:

‘Dear Editors
I was not sure if it was of any relevance, as of late years the Journal has become

very scientific, and ordinary nature reports or gossip of little importance ......

We would be very sorry if members felt they could not contribute to The
Victorian Naturalist, and we assure all our readers that the editors would be more than
pleased to publish their nature reports or notes. We can, however, only print material
that we actually receive and you are encouraged to send in your observations and notes
or suggestions for topics you would like to see published. These articles would be
termed Naturalist Notes - see in our editorial policy below.

Editorial Policy

Scope

The Victorian Naturalist publishes articles on all facets of natural history. Its primary
aims are to stimulate interest in natural history and to encourage the publication of arti-
cles in both formal and informal styles on a wide range of natural history topics.
Authors may submit the material in the following forms:

Research Reports - succinct and original scientific communications.

Contributions - may consist of reports, comments, observations, survey results, bib-
liographies or other material relating to natural history. The scope is broad and little
defined to encourage material on a wide range of topics and in a range of styles. This
allows inclusion of material that makes a contribution to our knowledge of natural his-
tory but for which the traditional format of scientific papers is not appropriate.

Naturalist Notes - short and informal natural history communications. These may
include reports on excursions, talks or noteworthy observations.

Book Reviews - priority is given to major Australian publications on
natural history. Whilst reviews are commissioned, the editors welcome suggestions of
books to be considered for review.

News - any items of news concerning the FNCV.

Obituaries - due to space restrictions please try to limit this to 500 words and one
photograph.

The style shoutd follow the traditional format of scientific papers. Preference will be
given to short articles not exceeding 2500 words.

Review Procedures

Research reports and some contributions are subject to refereeing. The Victorian
Naturalist is not in general a taxonomic journal but will publish taxonomic papers not

provided for in Australian taxonomic journals. The editors reserve the right to accept or
reject material submitted for publication.
Authors Copies

Five complimentary copies of the journal will be sent to authors for their use. Reprints

and additional copies of the journal can be arranged at the time of the final submission
of the paper.

: The
Victorian
Naturalist

Volume 113 (1) 1996 February

Editors: Ed and Pat Grey

Research Reports Negative Effects of Fuel Reduction Burning on Habitat of Grey-
crowned Babbler, by P. Adam and D. RobDINSON ....c.c.c.c.csesc0000s 4
Drifting Sand and Marram Grass on the South-west Coast of
Victoria in the Last Century, by J Heathcote and S. Maroske .. 10

Contributions A Transient Soil Seed Bank for the Yam Daisy, by /.D. Lunt.... 16
The Little Pygmy-possum: An Addition to the Fauna of

SOU - West vVAGlON An ViLs HMCONOLEL,.., gtrdr rte ieee censors 20
Naturalist Notes | Wombat Behaviour, by G.K. Smith .....c.cccccscsessscsesessereteeseseeeees 25
Middle Yarra Timelines: High Summer,
by G. Jameson, Naturalist in Residence ......:ccceceseerreereeieees 26
Greater Glider with Pouched Young, by R.G. Taylor ........::0++++ 29
Magpies, Dy G.A. Crichton ...cceccscsssesssscsesessrarenenesseveseneroensnonoens 29
How to be a
Field Naturalist Photography, Dy W. CLArK .....c.ccsssseesessseeneestststeeneeseanenesennens 31
Book Reviews Saving a Continent. Towards a Sustainable Future,
by David Smith, reviewer Robert Waillisen May tenet ant deen .s 31
The Dingo in Australia and Asia,
by Laurie Corbett, reviewer Brian COMAN.......+.+.ereereiee 32
Wildlife of the Australian Snow-country, by Ken Green and
William Osborne, reviewer Robert WALLIS .......ccccecerereer cess: 34
Kangaroos. The Biology of the Largest Marsupials,
by Terence T. Dawson, reviewer Graeme GOMS OR recs sarcsaxcstat sts 35
The Fauna of Tasmania: Birds, by R.H. Green,
reviewer Peter BroWN.s..s.ecssecssrersscerererersestecenersesennenancentrstenens 37
In Search of the Buttercup - A Ramble, by Frank Shepherd,
reviewer R.J. Fletcher.....csssscscssssecessseevenenerecesenseneseseseneneseansnanens 38
ISSN 0042-5184

Cover: Wombat carrying young. Photo by G.K. Smith. (see page 25)
SS eee eee

Research Reports

Negative Effects of Fuel-reduction Burning on the Habitat of
the Grey-crowned Babbler Pomatostomus temporalis

P. Adam! and D. Robinson’

Abstract

We examined the effects of annual fuel-reduction burning on the roadside habitat of the endan-
gered Grey-crowned Babbler Pomatostomus temporalis in the former Violet Town Shire in north-
em Victoria, Approximately 25% of the Victorian population of the Grey-crowned Babbler is found
in Violet Town Shire, and more than 90% of those birds depend on remnant woodland habitat found
along the roadsides, Conservation of the Grey-crowned Babbler therefore requires appropriate man-
agement of roadside habitat, The numbers of trees, saplings, wattles, Babblers’ nests and Babblers
were recorded along the burnt and unburnt sides of an 11 km section of strategic firebreak road
which supported 14 known groups of Grey-crowned Babblers. With the exception of trees more
than 10 m tall, all other size-classes of trees and wattles were less common on the burnt side of the
road than on the unburnt side, Five times as many Babblers’ nests were recorded in plants on the
unburnt side of the road as on the burnt side, and all Babblers seen during the survey were observed
on the unburnt side. The results thus indicate that fuel-reduction burning is having a considerable
impact on the habitat of the Grey-crowned Babbler and that fire-prevention practices need to be
modified to protect roadside habitat for the Grey-crowned Babbler and other understorey-dependent
species, A range of alternative fire-prevention practices is suggested here. (The Victorian Naturalist

113 (1) 1996, 4-9)

Introduction
The Grey-crowned Babbler Pomatosto-

mus temporalis is a threatened species of

woodland bird in south-eastern Australia,
It lives in family groups of about two to
fifteen birds which occupy permanent ter-
ritories of about ten hectares in size. In
contrast to many species of birds, the
Grey-crowned Babbler sleeps in a nest at
night, the whole family roosting together
in a single nest. The bulky stick nests are
built in eucalypt saplings, small trees or
mature wattles, and several nests are usu-
ally in active use by the same family at
any one time, The Grey-crowned Babbler
has recently become extinct in south-east-
ern South Australia, is endangered in
Victoria (CNR 1995) and is declining in
parts of New South Wales and southern
Queensland (Robinson ef al. in prep.). In
every part of its range, the principal cause
of decline has been extensive habitat
clearing (Robinson and Davidson in
prep.). The other significant cause of
decline has been, and still is, the severe
modification of Babbler habitat by a range
of degrading processes, nolably grazing,
intensified land use, roadside earthworks,

! RMB 2066, Violet Town 3669
2 RMB 1134, Benalla 3673

weed invasion, and fire prevention works
(Robinson et al. in prep.; Robinson and
Davidson in prep.). Predation by cats and
birds may also be a significant cause of
decline in certain districts (Robinson and
Davidson in prep.).

The habitat of the Grey-crowned
Babbler in Victoria comprises five critical
elements: woodland or open-forest vegeta-
tion communities on fertile or heavy soils;
relatively many trees in the immediate
landscape in contrast to sites without
Grey-crowned Babblers; relatively many
trees larger than about 60 cm trunk diame-
ter at breast height (dbh); an understorey
of young trees and shrubs in the 10-25 cm
dbh range for nest sites and shelter and a
relatively sparse ground layer with more
litter and less grass cover than at non-bab-
bler sites (Robinson and Davidson in
prep.), Wherever one or more of these
habitat elements is missing, or is removed,
Grey-crowned Babblers are absent, or
soon disappear (Robinson and Davidson in
prep.).

In northern Victoria, the most signifi-
cant element missing in the remaining
woodland landscape is an understorey of
young trees and shrubs, In the former
Violet Town Shire - the most important

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

locality in Victoria for Grey-crowned
Babblers - 370 km (80%) of the 463 km of
public road surveyed in 1993 had a sparse
understorey or none at all, and 96 km
(93%) of the 103 km of unused reads with
trees had a sparse understorey or none at
all (Robinson er al. in prep.). While graz-
ing is the major cause of death of young
trees and shrubs in the woodland land-
scape, fire-prevention works along select-
ed roadsides in Violet Town Shire have
been a significant, additional cause of the
death of young trees and shrubs. Here we
report on the effects of that control-burn-
ing on the habitat and abundance of the
Grey-crowned Babbler.

Study Area and Methods

The former Violet Town Shire (now
part of Strathbogie Shire) is located in
north-eastern Victoria between the
Strathbogie Ranges and the Broken River.
The Shire contains by far the largest popu-
lation of Grey-crowned Babblers found in
the State (about 90 groups, or 25% of the
known State population) (Robinson er al.
in prep). The Strathbogie Shire is, further-
more, the principal public authority
responsible for the conservation of the
Grey-crowned Babbler in the Violet Town
district; firstly because more than 90% of
Babblers depend on vegetation found
along public roads managed by the Shire
(Robinson and Davidson in prep.), and
secondly because the Grey-crowned
Babbler is listed under the Flora and
Fauna Guarantee Act (1988).
Accordingly, as stated under Part 1, 4(2)
of the Act, ‘a public authority must be
administered so as to have regard to the
flora and fauna conservation objectives’.
These objectives include Part 1, 4(1): (a)
to guarantee that all taxa of Victoria’s
flora and fauna other than the taxa listed in
Schedule 1 can survive, flourish and retain
their potential for evolutionary develop-
ment in the wild; (b) to conserve
Victoria’s communities of flora and fauna,
and (c) to manage potentially threatening
processes.

As in many other Shires, Violet Town
(Strathbogie) Shire and the Country Fire
Authority have identified several roads to

Vol. 113 (1) 1996

be managed as strategic firebreaks for the
prevention of the spread of fire and access
in the event of a fire. However, in contrast
to the situation in most other Shires, two
of these roads also provide habitat for the
Grey-crowned Babbler, altogether sup-
porting some 18 groups (20% of the
Shire’s population and 5% of the State's
population) (Fig. 1). We used one of these
strategic firebreak roads as our study area.

The Violet Town-Dookie Road is a
three-chain-wide (60 m) road reserve
which supports 14 Babbler groups over a
14 km section (Fig. 1), Management of
both sides of the road in the Babbler sec-
tion has been similar over the past 30
years, with the one exception of fire con-
trol (P. Adam, pers. obs). For the last 30
years, the east side of the road has been
burnt every year, whereas the west side
has never been burnt (apart from a 3 km
section burnt three years ago. This was
excluded from our study). On both sides
of the road, a 5-m-wide firebreak is
scraped close to the fenceline.

Three months after the east side of the
Violet Town-Dookie Rd was burnt in late
January, 1994, we travelled 11 km of road
and counted on the east (burnt) side and
west (unburnt) side, the number of euca-
lypts more than 10 m tall, eucalypts
between 6 and 10 m tall, eucalypts
between 2 and 5 m, eucalypts less than |
m, Golden Wattles Acacia pycnantha
more than 1 m high, Golden Wattles less
than 1 m high and other wattles. We also
recorded the number of Babblers’ nests
and the number of Babbler groups sighted.
Because the area burnt is restricted to the
road side of the scraped firebreak, we only
collected information for the approximate-
ly 10 m wide area between the road edge
and the scraped firebreak.

Results

Altogether, there were twice as many
irees and shrubs on the unburnt side of the
road as on the burnt side (Table 1). Trees
more than 10 m tall were more common
on the burnt side of the road. All other cat-
egories of plant were less common on the
burnt side than on the unburnt side
(Table1). In contrast to the well-estab-

Research Reports

KILOMETRES.

Fig. 1. The distribution of Grey-crowned Babblers and strategic firebreak roads in the northern part
of Violet Town Shire. Roads marked ‘to Murchison’ and ‘to Dookie’ are strategic firebreak roads.
Dots indicate localities of known groups of Grey-crowned Babblers. Broad black lines show sealed

roads. Thin lines show unsealed roads.

lished finding that wattles are favoured by
fires (Christensen and Kimber 1975;
Purdie and Slatyer 1976; Gill 1981; Shea
et al. 1981; Hamilton et al. 1991), the
number of Golden Wattles shrubs on the
unburnt side as on the burnt side, and
every Babbler group sighted during the
two-day survey was observed on the
unburnt side (Table 1).More than 50
Varnish Wattles and several hundred of
each of the three other species were count-
ed on the unburnt side, while only 24
Bent-leaf Wattles, 40 Gold-dust Wattles
re-sprouting from roots and 67 Spreading
Wattles were recorded on the burnt side.
No Varnish Wattles at all were recorded
on the burnt side of the road. Significantly,
nearly all of the wattles growing on the

burnt side of the road were growing in
unburnt ‘islands’.

Considering only those trees and shrubs
that represent potential nest trees for Grey-
crowned Babblers (eucalypts between 2-
10 m high and Golden Wattles > 1 m
high), there were 2.5 times as many poten-
tial nest trees on the unburnt side as on the
burnt side (Table 1). Five times as many
babblers’ nests were recorded in trees and-
shrubs on the unburnt side as on the burnt
side, and every Babbler group sighted dur-
ing the two-day survey was observed on
the unburnt side (Table 1).

Discussion

Most studies of the effects of fuel-
reduction burning on landbirds in

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

Table 1. Numbers of eucalypts, wattles and
Grey-crowned Babblers and nests on the
unburnt and burnt roadsides of the Violet Town
Dookie Rd. Potential nest trees comprise
all eucalypts 2-10 m high and all Golden
Wattles > 1 m high.

Category ye ;
urn

Burnt Ubnurnt/

Burnt Ratio
Eucalypts > 10 m high 09
Eucalypts 6-9 m high 1.3
Eucalypts 2-5 m high 5 1.9

Eucalypts < 1 m high

All Eucalypts 2031
Golden Wattles > 1 mhigh 1100
Golden Wattles< 1 mhigh 351
All Golden Wattles 1451
Other Wattles > 1 m high 167
Other Wattles< i mbhigh 1068
All Other Wattles 1235
All Potential Nest Trees 2525
Babbler Nests 40
Babbler Groups 4

Australia have concluded that fuel-reduc-
tion burning either increases species diver-
sity (Kimber 1974; Christensen and
Kimber 1975; Christensen et al. 1985;
McFarland 1988) or else has little long-
term effect on bird populations (Cowley
1974; Loyn et al. 1992) - so long as the
area is not burnt too often.

Our study clearly showed that fuel-
reduction burning is having a consider-
able, detrimental impact on the habitat of
the Grey-crowned Babbler and therefore
on the bird itself. Because of repeated,
annual burning, there were fewer numbers
of saplings and wattles on the burnt side of
the strategic firebreak road than on the
unburnt side. There was consequently less
understorey habitat in which the Babblers
could nest or shelter. As a result, there was
one-fifth the number of babblers’ nests on
the burnt side of the road, Control burning
is thus effectively restricting the Grey-
crowned Babbler population to one side of
the road, and preventing new groups from
establishing in otherwise suitable habitat
along the burnt side of the road. The
induction that fuel-reduction burning gen-
erally increases species diversity or bene-
fits wildlife communities must therefore
be regarded with caution (Wooller and
Calver 1988): it has only been tested in a

Vol. 113 (1) 1996

few environments; it is only applicable to
certain wildlife communities or certain
species and it is only valuable in those
communities or for certain taxa if the land
managers burn the environment according
to ecological principles rather than for
other reasons (Meredith 1988).

Given that

(a) the largest remaining population of

Grey-crowned Babblers in Victoria is

found in Violet Town (Strathbogie)

Shire,

(b) 20% of the Shire’s Babbler popula-

tion is found along two strategic fire-

break roads, and

reducing the area of potential habitat for

the Grey-crowned Babbler,

fire-prevention practices along those two
roads and other strategic firebreak road-
sides within the Grey-crowned Babbler’s
range need to be examined to establish
whether or not changes can be made
which increase the area of potential
Babbler habitat without jeopardising the
safety of human life or property.

The Shire and the Country Fire
Authority have a legal responsibility under
the Country Fire Authority Act 1958 to
minimise the risk of wildfire. They also
have a legal responsibility under the Flora
and Fauna Guarantee Act 1988 to con-
serve the Grey-crowned Babbler. The crit-
ical issue from the perspective of conser-
vation is that roadsides provide the princi-
pal habitat for 98% of all Babbler groups
in Violet Town Shire. Furthermore,
because Grey-crowned Babblers are
dependent on sites with old trees
(Robinson and Davidson in prep.), their
habitat cannot easily be created elsewhere.
Protection of roadside habitat consequent-
ly remains the priority for Babbler conser-
vation for at least another 100 years until
regeneration on private land can provide
alternative, mature woodland habitat for
the birds (Robinson and Davidson in
prep.). :

The Country Fire Authority has already
undertaken the first step towards conserva-
tion of Grey-crowned Babbler habitat by
only burning one side of the strategic fire-
break roads in Violet Town Shire. The

Research Reports

next step is to evaluate whether there is
any need for any fire control measures
within the road reserves with Babbler
habitat; understanding that the strategic
firebreak roads have the dual functions of
preventing the spread of fire and of pro-
viding safe access in the case of fire (Shire
of Violet Town 1993). The understorey
and ground cover along the unburnt side
of the Violet Town-Dookie Rd consists
predominantly of Acacias and native
grasses (mostly Danthonia spp., Stipa spp.
and Elymus scaber) and the fire hazard
may well be low (Meredith 1988). In that
case, no fire-prevention works may be
required, or else works may be needed
only once every 5-20 years.

Even given that some fire-prevention
measures are needed along the roads,
localised fire control could occur within
Grey-crowned Babbler habitat by
means which left some of the under-
storey intact (e.g. by slashing or burning
only areas of vegetation identified as hav-
ing high fuel loads or as being a threat,
Petris and Spittle 1994), or that which
resulted in patches of unburnt and burnt
clumps of understorey vegetation along
the roadsides. Alternatively, if those sec-
tions of roadside with Babbler habitat
were assessed as having high fuel loads,
the CFA could relocate the strategic
firebreaks to other, low conservation-
value roads; although this option requires
the existence of other wide roads that
could provide the dual functions of the
firebreak roads (only partly possible in
Violet Town Shire). Another option might
be to construct alternative access routes
through nearby paddocks to avoid the
roadside habitat with its many trees.
Similarly, it might be better to construct
firebreaks on adjacent farmland rather
than maintaining firebreaks along the
roadside and beneath trees (Oates 1994;
Petris and Spittle 1994),

Without a detailed inspection of the
Strategic firebreak roads by fire-prevention
planners and ecologists, it is impossible to
prescribe the most appropriate means of

fire control for either road. However, -

unless such alternatives as outlined above
are considered soon, the understorey habi-

tat required by the Grey-crowned Babbler
and some other species of wildlife will
continue to disappear, so preventing popu-
lations of those species from increasing in
size or, in some instances, causing those
species’ further decline.

Acknowledgments

This project was part of a three year study con-
ducted by the Royal Australasian Ornithologists
Union with funding from the National Estate
Grants Program, Vic Roads and the Department
of Conservation and Natural Resources. To all
of these organisations, we express our thanks.
Our thanks also to Mr John Dunn, the former
Shire Engineer of Violet Town Shire and to
members of the Sheep Pen Creek Land
Management Group for their support.
Comments by David Baker-Gabb, Ian
Davidson, Pat and Ed Grey, Sally Mann,
Charlie Meredith, Stephen Petris and a referee
improved earlier drafts.

References

Christensen, P.E. and Kimber, P.C. (1975). Effect of
prescribed burning on the flora and fauna of south-
west Australian forests. Proceedings of the
Ecolagical Society of Australia 9: 85-107,

Christensen, P.E.S., Wardell-Johnson, G. and Kimber,
P. (1985). Birds and fire in southwestern forests. In
‘Birds of Eucalypt Forests and Woodlands:
Ecology, Conservation, Management’. Eds A.
Keast, H.F. Recher, H. Ford and D, Saunders,
(RAOU and Surrey Beatty & Sons: Sydney).

CNR (1995). Threatened Fauna in Victoria - 1995.
Department of Conservation and Natural
Resources, Melbourne.

Cowley, R.D. (1974). Effects of prescribed burning on
birds of the mixed species forests of west central
Victoria. /n ‘Proceedings of the Third Fire Ecology
Symposium’,(Monash University; Melbourne).

Gill, A.M. (1981). Adaptive responses of Australian
vascular plant species to fires. In ‘Fire and the
Australian Biota’. Eds A.M, Gill, R.H. Groves and
1,R. Noble. (Australian Academy of Science:
Canberra).

Hamilton, §.D., Lawrie, A.C., Hopmans, P. and
Leonard, B.V. (1991). Effects of fuel-reduction
burning on a Eucalyptus obliqua torest ecosystem
in Victoria. Australian Journal of Botany 39: 203-
217.

Kimber, P.C. (1974). Some effects of prescribed burn-
ing on jarrah forest birds, Jn “Proceedings of the 3rd
Fire Ecology Symposium.’ (Forests Commission of
Vic; Melbourne).

Loyn, R.H., Hewish, M.J. and Considine, M, (1992),
Short-term effects of fuel reduction burning on bird
populations in Wombat State Forest. Jn ‘Ecological
Impacts of Fuel Reduction burning in Dry
Sclerophyll Forest: First progress Report”. Eds K.

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

Tolhurst and D. Flinn, (Dept of Conservation and
Environment, Melbourne).

McFarland, D. (1988). The composition, microhabitat
use and response to fire of the avifauna of subtropi-
cal heathlands in Cooloola National Park,
Queeensland. Emu 88: 249-257,

Meredith, C. (1988). ‘Fire in the Victorian environ-
ment: a discussion paper’. (Conservation Council of
Victoria: Melbourne).

Oates, N. (1994) ‘Draft Roadside Management Plan
for the Shires of Benalla, Euroa, Violet Town’.

Petris, S. and Spittle, J. (1994). ‘Roadside
Management Guidelines for Fire Prevention
Planners’. (Country Fire Authority: Melbourne).

Purdie, R.W. and Slatyer, R.O. (1976). Vegetation
succession after fire in sclerophyll woodland com-
munities in south-eastern Australia. Australian

Journal of Ecology 1: 223-236,

Robinson, D, and Davidson. I. (in prep.). Management
plan for the conservation of the Grey-crowned
Babbler in Victoria (DCNR),

Robinson, D., Davidson, 1. and Lockwood, D. (in
prep.). Inaction equals extinction: a case study with
the Grey-crowned Babbler.

Shea, S.R., Peet, G.B. and Cheney, N.P. (1981), The
role of fire in forest management. Jn ‘Fire and the
Australian Biota’. Eds A.M. Gill, R.H. Groves and
I.R. Noble, (Australian Academy of Science:
Canberra),

Shire of Violet Town (1993). *‘Roadsides Vegetation
Strategy’. (Shire of Violet Town).

Wooller, R.D, and Calver, M.C, (1988). Changes in an
assemblage of small birds in the understorey of dry
sclerophyll forest in south-western Australia after
fire. Australian Wildlife Research 15: 331-338.

Recent Additions to the FNCV Library

Albrecht, D. (1993). ‘Collecting and Preserving
Herbarium Specimens’. (National
Herbarium: Melbourne).

Asian Association for Biology Education. 14th
Biennial Conference, (1992).
‘Environmental Management in Asia’.
(Deakin University, Rusden Campus:
Melbourne).

Augee, M. and Gooden, B, (1993). ‘Echidnas
of Australia and New Guinea’. (NSWUP:
Kensington, NSW).

Backhouse, G. and Jeans, J. (1995). “The
Orchids of Victoria’. (Miegunyah Press:
Melbourne).

Calder, D.M. and Calder, J. (1994). ‘The
Forgotten Forests: a field guide to Victoria’s
Box and [Ironbark Country’. (VNPA:
Melbourne).

Costermans, L. (1994). ‘Trees of Victoria and
Adjoining Areas’. 5th Ed. (Costermans:
Frankston, Victoria).

Cronin, L (1987). ‘Key Guide to Australian
Wildflowers’. (Reed: Chatsworth, NSW).
‘Flora of Australia’. Volume 55. (1994).

(CSIRO: Canberra).

Kemp, B. (1994). ‘Organ Pipes National Park:
A Natural History’. (Friends of Organ Pipes
National Park: Keilor, Victoria).

Klippel, K. (1992), ‘Wildlife Data Search:
Threatened Animal Species of New South
Wales’. (Total Environment Centre:

Sydney).

Vol. 113 (1) 1996

Mansergh, I. and Broome, L. (1994). ‘The
Mountain Pygmy-possum of the Australian
Alps’. (NSWUP: Kensington, NSW).

Morton, S.R., Short, J. and Barker, R.D.
(1995). ‘Refugia for Biological Diversity in
Arid and Semi-arid Australia’. (DEST:
Canberra).

Nachtigall, W. (1974). ‘Insects in Flight’.
(Allen & Unwin: London).

Pescott, T. (1995), ‘The You Yangs Range’.
(Yaugher: Belmont, Victoria).

Rose, D.B. (ed.) (1995). ‘Country in Flames:
Proceedings of the 1994 Symposium on
Biodiversity and Fire in North Australia’.
(DEST: Canberra)

Simon-Brunet, B. (1994). ‘The Silken Web’.
(Reed: Chatsworth, NSW).

Slattery, K.P. and Wallis, R.L. (1993).
‘Threatened Flora in Austalia: a Select
Bibliography’. (Deakin University, Rusden
Campus: Melbourne).

Strickland, K. and Strickland, P. (1994).
‘Peninsula Plants’. Volume 2. (Kareelah:
Balnarring, Victoria).

Tyler, M.J. (1994). ‘Australian Frogs’.
Revised. edition, (Reed: Chatsworth, NSW).

Walsh, N.G. and Entwisle, T.J. (1994). “Flora
of Victoria’, Volume 2. (Inkata: Melbourne).

Sheila Houghton
ENCV, Hon. Librarian

Research Reports

Drifting Sand and Marram Grass on the South-west Coast of
Victoria in the Last Century.

Jill Heathcote! and Sara Maroske?

Abstract

Poor land management from the time of white setthkement quickly resulted in the degradation of
coastal dunes on the south-west coast of Victoria. Local councils sought advice on how to stabilize
the dunes from the Government Botanist, Ferdinand von Mueller. He recommended a combination
of native and exotic species that could be used on the dunes. With colonial government support, and
the success of local experiments by Samuel Avery, Marram Grass soon became the dominant
species planted. Marram Grass Ammophila arenaria was exported to settlements along the
Victorian coast, as well as to other colonies and overseas. Some native species of plants now appear
to be re-establishing themselves on the dunes. (The Victorian Naturalist 113 (1) 1996, 10-15)

Introduction

The coastal dunes between
Warrnambool and Port Fairy (formerly
Belfast) have had more than their fair
share of neglect and exploitation from the
time of white settlement. Residents of both
towns used the dunes for grazing, and
practically all the timber was cut down for
firewood. As the Harbour Master of
Belfast, J. B. Mills, testified in 1858: ‘the
coast for about seven miles to the west-
ward of Warrnambool is composed of
moderately high sand hummocks, partly
covered with brushwood with [a] few bare
sand patches, forming a great contrast with
the coast further to the westward, which is
formed of low grass hummocks’,
(Examiner 9.4.1858), Within a few years
the situation had deteriorated drastically
and it was to be decades before the dunes
were restabilized. Then they were not sim-
ply restored, because solutions favoured
the introduction of exotics rather than
what was widely thought of as ‘native rub-
bish’ (Standard 10.7.1886).

Drifting sand

Complaints about coastal sand drift
were first made to the Belfast Council in
1865, and to that of Warrnambool in early
1866. The problem area for Belfast was
identified as being near Gorman’s Lane
(below Tower Hill), and that of
Warrnambool, between the Hopkins and
Merri Rivers (Fig. 1). Warrnambool was
; 136 Harrington Rd, Warrnambool, Victoria 3280
» The University of Melbourne, Department of
History & Philosophy of Science, The University of
Melbourne Parkville, Victoria 3052 :

also concerned about the build up of sand
around Thornton’s Jetty in Lady Bay, but
this problem was eventually found to be
due to tidal action rather than sand coming
down the river (Gill 1985). Each council
appointed a group ‘to consider the best
means of counteracting the evil’ of drift
sand (BM 23.1.1867), and Warmambool’s
group recommended that stock should be
fenced out of the eroded hummocks
(Examiner 3.4.1866). The Town Clerk of
Warrnambool, Henry Laurie, also suggest-
ed seeking advice from the Government
Botanist, and Director of the Melbourne
Botanic Garden, Ferdinand von Mueller
who had been supplying plants to the
Council’s Botanic Garden since 1859 (WC
16.5.1866).

Independently, an unidentified citizen
also wrote to Mueller for advice and
received a reply which reiterated what the
councils had already been told by their
committees about excluding animals. To
revegetate the sand Mueller recommended
a combination of natives (Allocasuarina
verticillata and Mesembryanthemum sens,
lat.) and exotics (Pinus pinaster and P.
nigra var. corsicana). He also suggested
planting the flats with reedy grasses and
the Sand Tea-tree Leptospermum laeviga-
tum (which may not have been indigenous
to the area)*. Mueller argued that the
native plants were a cheap and efficient
solution to the sand problem because they
could be collected locally at little expense
and were known to be able to grow in
local contions (Examiner 15.2.1867).
More than a year passed before a

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

Tower NY)

1
\
\
a barrens Lane!

Moyne

Belfast

KILOMETRES,

PRINCES N
%

ms Mery,
SS

4
‘Ye,

5
Hopkin
Warrnambool

Lady Bay oN

Fig. 1. Map of Warrnambool and Port Fairy coastline (based on Natmap 1:100,000 series).

Warrnambool Sand Committee inspected
the hummocks, made suggestions about
fencing and urged the Council to obtain
the seeds Mueller had recommended
(Examiner 5.5.1868). No one could accuse
them of acting in haste!

In 1868 the Shire Engineer of Belfast,
Thomas E. Rawlinson, also made a report
on sand encroachment. Rawlinson had
learned from old residents that the sea
coast of Villiers Shire was formerly cov-
ered with bush and scrub consisting of
honeysuckle (probably Banksia
marginata), sheoak, dogwood or, as it was
called locally, ‘Bushy Sloe’ (probably
Bursaria spinosa) (Hannaford 1860), and
grasses on the sandhills. The timber on the
dunes had almost wholly disappeared and
the grass had vanished in extensive areas,
with the remainder rapidly receding.
Rawlinson thought it would only be a mat-
ter of time before the sand advanced on
the adjacent farm land. In a conclusion
that seemed well ahead of his times
Rawlinson proposed that Mounts Eccles
and Napier, with the surrounding stony
country and Tower Hill reserve, should be
included in the list of state forests, with
restrictions for sheep runs and regulations
for the conservation of timber (Examiner
5.5.1868).

In 1875 Mueller visited the south-west
coast in person and was very critical of the
two councils. He thought it was reprehen-

Vol. 113 (1) 1996

sible that the coastal strip had ever been
used for pastoral commons because the
result had been ‘a total annihilation of all
the trees, bushes, sedges, creeping herbs
and grasses’ (Standard 13.7.1875). The
coastal land from the mouth of the Merri
River to Gorman’s Lane was not gazetted
as a reserve until 1873, and 194 acres of
land between the Hopkins and Merri
Rivers was only reserved for public pur-
poses in 1875 (Standard 18.2.1873,
10.8.1875). Echoing his letter of nearly ten
years before, Mueller recommended that
no traffic or animals be allowed on the
dunes. He reproduced his list of suitable
sand-stays and added to it native Couch-
grass (probably Cynodon dactylon now
commonly regarded as exotic), Moonah
Melaleuca lanceolata and for the first time
the exotic Marram Grass Ammophila are-
naria. In his encyclopedic work Select
Extra-Tropical Plants Mueller identified
the coasts of Europe, North Africa and
Middle North America as the home of
‘moram’, ‘marram’ or ‘bent grass’. He
recommended it as one of the most impor-
tant grasses for binding drift sand because
of its long creeping roots (e.g. Mueller
1876, 1895a).

Mueller’s recommendations were publi-
cized by the local press of both
Warrnambool and Belfast. More impor-
tantly they were sent to the Victorian
Government which then sent the first of a

Research Reports

number of seed consignments to
Warrnambool in 1876. Warrnambool
shared them with Belfast, Portland and
Koroit (Standard 28.7.1876). The seed
consignments included Marram Grass
Ammophila arenaria, Lyme Grass Leymus
arenarius, Sandstay Bush Leptospermum
laevigatum, and Sand Coast Tea-tree
Melaleuca lanceolata (Standard
29.5.1879). Sea Rocket Cakile maritima
was also introduced around this time and
its seeds are now eaten by the threatened
Orange-bellied Parrot Neophema chryso-
gaster (RAOU 1985). The gorse Ulex
eruopaeus 18 now a problem weed in
coastal areas at Portland, and Buffalo
Grass Stenotaphrum secundatum grows in
unexpected places in the coastal areas of
Warrnambool. Both were recommended as
sand-stays by Mueller (1876). The dunes
are also host to large numbers of the
European snail (Theba pisana), which was
probably introduced during the trials of
various plants.

Warrnambool’s attempts at revegetation
were plagued with difficulties. By 1879
the Merri River was almost blocked by a
large shifting dune at Levi’s Point (Fig. 2).

Vandals pulled up cuttings and cut the
Couch Grass (Standard 24.6.1879).
Rabbits were a constant nuisance (the
Ranger reported that they were even eat-
ing Boxthorn) (Standard 21.8.1879). Fires
burnt out areas of vegetation**, and stock
were still getting onto the hummocks.
Belfast appears to have been more suc-
cessful and planted between 30-40 acres
(12-16 ha) with Marram Grass. In 1885
the Belfast Parks Committee informed
Mueller of the excellent results they had
achieved in arresting drift sand (Gazette
13.3.1885). Mueller sent them some more
Marram Grass seeds and requested infor-
mation of the results of the planting so that
he could publicize it (e.g. Mueller 1894,
1895a, 1895b, 1895c).

Much of Belfast’s success with Marram
Grass can be attributed to the Ranger,
Samuel Avery, who discovered a reliable
way of establishing it. After propagating
the seeds he transplanted the grass into
rows, the depth of planting depending
upon the nature of the soil (Fig. 3, Anon.
1893). Avery concluded to Mueller, ‘I do
certainly say that if any person has got any
sandy land which is of a shifting nature,

Fig. 2. Levi’s Point Homestead c1873 with bare sand dunes clearly visible in the background

(original watercolour in the possession of Russell Everard, Warrnambool).

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

Port Fairy by Mueller, Gardeners’ Chronicle 16.12.1893).

Fig. 4. Marram grass

and on which they can get nothing to
grow, I would advise them to plant that
grass, and they would soon have the land
covered with vegetation, which would pre-
vent the sand from drifting, and be feed
for cattle, and the more the grass is dug

Vol. 113 (1) 1996

at Rutledge’s Cutting, 1994 (photographed by J.

Heathcote).

out, burnt, or eaten off, the better it
improves’, (Anon. 1894). Mueller was so
impressed with Avery’s efforts that in July
1893 he offered to nominate him as a
Fellow of the Royal Horticultural Society
in England. When the matter was brought

Research Reports

Table 1. Distributions of Marram Grass trom Port Fairy and Warrnambool, 1887-96,

\Year
1887

Request for Sorrento Park, 29 June
Thanks from Queenscliff, 7 July

1889

1892
1893

I ton of seed sent to SA (Gazette 7 July)

18 August)

1894 7 tons despatched (Standard 31 August)

Grass sent to Brazil (Gazette 11 June)

1895
1896

Year
1892

1893
1894

Sydney and NZ, (Standard 29 August)

Port Fairy

H. Zerwonki asks for 10 tons (PM 26 June)

Zerwonki states grass received in unsatisfactory condition (PM 7 July)

Department of Public Works, Melbourne requests 50 tons at 21s per ton (PM 7 July)
Avery receives jewellery from Zerwonki (PM 30 October)

Departinent of Public Works, Melbourne orders 10 tons (PM 6 June)

Mueller requests grass for WA, NZ and Natal (PM 21 June)

Requests received from Robe (SA), Nhill, Agricultural Bureau, Narracoorte (SA), Stockton
(NSW), Adelaide, Stawell, Hobart, Engineer-in-Chief of SA, and Orbost (Standard

M asks for seed und a photograph (Gazette 13 October)
Applications from various parts of the colony, and Harbours & Rivers Department of NSW.

M requests seedlings for India (Gazette, 11 January)
M asks for seed to send to India (PM 15 January)

Warrnambool
Request from Queenscliff (Standard 22 June)
Request from Fremantle, and Van Dieman’s Land Company (Standard 6 July)
Request from J. H. Conner of Barwon Heads (Standard 16 August)
Grass sent to Bellarine Council with man to superintend planting. Small parcels sent to

up at a Port Fairy Council meeting
(Belfast reverted to its original name of
Port Fairy in 1887), the councillors
laughed at the idea of ‘Sam’ being a
FRHS and they ‘but common councillors’
(Standard 1,7.1893),

Once Avery's method of growing
Marram Grass was perfected, it was plant-
ed extensively all along the south western
coast of Victoria (Fig, 4). Joseph Maiden,
botanist and soon to be Director of the
Sydney Botanic Gardens, concluded, ‘It
has proved to be the most effectual sand-
Stay ever planted’, (Maiden 1895), By the
late 1880s Port Fairy, and later
Warrnambool, sold it by the ton around
Australia and overseas (Table 1, Port Fairy
Borough Council [1895]). In 1889, for
example, the Department of Public Works
ordered SO tons at 21 shillings a ton from
Port Fairy (PM 10,7.1889) so it seems that
the Council did very well financially out
of what began, for them, as a problem,

Alter Mueller’s death in 1896 the
Warrnambool Council acknowledged its

debt to him by proclaiming, ‘if it had not
been for him introducing Marram Grass,
the sand dunes would now be overrunning
the country’ (Standard 21.10.1896). Port
Fairy was less grateful and when the ques-
ion of erecting a memorial to Mueller was
raised, one councillor said he could not
see any connection between the benefit
received by the labouring class and the
late Baron, who, he considered, had only
done his duty as Government Botanist,
and had been well paid for his services
(Gazette 10.12.1897),

Conclusion

If, in the early days of settlement, the
inhabitants had had the foresight to leave
the hummocks alone, when the native veg-
elation was providing adequate cover,
none of the subsequent problems would
have arisen. The councils were prompt to
seek advice on how to stabilize the sand
but were very slow to act on it. As late as
1939 the Department of Lands and Survey
proposed to lease the foreshore between

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

Dennington and Gorman’s Lane for graz- References and abbreviations

ing (Standard 28.7.1939). and cattle still © Anon. (1893). Marram Grass. Gardeners’ Chronicle
get into this area today, illegally. Mueller 16 December. 750.

suggested a variety of plants as sand-stays, pest. Sr ree enesieneta Scereaiess
native and exotic, but with the success of Belfast Borough Council Minutes (1865-87)
Avery's work in Port Fairy Ammophila LAbbrev.; BM] iD
arenaria soon became the cure-all. leis Belfast Gazette (1875-87), [Abbrev.: Gazette]

y i Gill, E.D. (1985). Coastal Pracesse d the
he ni 4 _ d astal Processes and the Sanding
artening to see now that in some places of Warrnambool Harbour, (Warrnambool Institute

that indigenous vegetation is slowly taking Press: Warrnambool.)
over from Marram Grass, particularly Hannaford. S. (1860), Sea and Riverside Rambles,
Hairy Spinifex Spinifex sericeus along the (Heath and Cordell: Geelong.) ; ;

x ‘ aiden, J.H. (1895). Marram Grass in Australia.
high-tide mark and Coast Beard-heath Indian Forester 21, 352-58.
Leucopogon parviflorus, and Small-leaf Mueller, F. von (1876). Select Extra-Tropical Plants.
Clematis Clematis microphylla in the (Government Printer: Melbourne.)

Mueller, F. (1894), Marram Grass - Psamma arenaria,
Proceedings and Journal of the Agricultural and
* Importations of Leptospermum laeviga- Horticultural Society of India. 10, 8-10.
tum seed are recorded in: Examiner Mueller, F. von (1895z). Select Extra-Tropical Plants.

‘ (Government Printer: Melbourne.)
5.5.1868, 2.6.1868; Standard 29.5.1879, Mueller, F. von (1895b). What to plant in sandplots. A

dunes.

A 3.3.1881, 3.8.1 892. ‘ valuable recommendation. Journal ef the Bureau of
Coastal fires are recorded in: Standard Agriculture of Western Australia. 2, 494,
16.1.1877, 31.12.1878, 6.1.1886. Mueller, F. (1895c¢). Psamma arenaria, Proceedings

and Journal of the Agricultural and Horticultural

Society of India, 10, 185.
Acknowledgements Port Fairy Borough Council ({1895]). Marram grass.

We would like to thank Neville Walsh and A-wonderfil sand.stay.<Port Fairy.)

Roger Spencer for providing current botanical — port Fairy Borough Council Minutes (1887-96).
names, Betty Beavis, John Williams and the {Abbrev.: PM]

Warrnambool City Library for assistance with — Port Fairy Gazette (1887-97). |Abbrey.: Gazette]
research, and Tom May for comments on our RAOU (1985). Conservation statement on Orange-
drafts. Thanks to Russell Everard for permis- bellied Parrot. re |
sion to reproduce the watercolour in Fig. 2. The Warrnambool Borough Council (1966-83) and Town

3 Council (1883-96) Correspondence. | Abbrev.: WC]
research was supported by the Mueller Project, Warrnambool Examiner and Western District

Department of History and Philosophy of Advocate (1858-75). [Abbrev.: Examiner]
Science, University of Melbourne, and the = Warrnambool Standard (1874-1939), [Abbrev.:
Royal Botanic Gardens, Melbourne. Standard]

Books Available from FNCV

The Club has, over the years, published a number of books on natural history topics which can be
purchased from the Book Sales Officer. It is currently distributing four, as follows:

‘What Fossil Plant is That?’ (J.G. Douglas) sere (
A guide to the ancient flora of Victoria, with notes on localities and fossil collecting.
‘Wildflowers of the Stirling Ranges’. (B. Fuhrer and N. Marchant) ....$7.95
144 magnificent illustrations of the spectacular flora of this region.
‘Down Under at the Prom’. (M. O'Toole and M. Turner) ..... estat
A guide to the marine sites and dives at Wilson’s Promontory
(with maps and numerous colour illustrations).
‘A Field Companion to Australian F ungi’. (B. Fuhrer) $ 19.95 |
A reprint of the earlier book with additional photographs and incorporating name changes.
Alan Parkin
Book Sales Officer
9850 2617 (H), 9565 4974 (B)

15
Vol. 113 (1) 1996

Contributions

A Transient Soil Seed Bank for the Yam-daisy
Microseris scapigera

Tan D. Lunt!

Abstract

An experiment was undertaken to assess the longevity of Microseris scapigera seeds in the soil.
Seeds were buried in small bags of nylon mesh in a long-ungrazed and long-unburnt Themeda
grassland in Canberra. Replicate seed bags were unearthed after 3, 8 and 12 months. M. scapigera
was found to have a transient soil seedbank, since virtually all seeds germinated rapidly, and no
viable seeds persisted for longer than 3 months, The implications of these results for the conserva-
tion management of M. scapigera in remnant grasslands are discussed, (The Victorian Naturalist 113

(1) 1996, 16-19)

Introduction

Two centuries ago, Yam-daisies (Fig.
1), or Murnong (Microseris scapigera),
were abundant across the grassy plains of
south-eastern Australia, providing a nutri-
tious food supply for many Aboriginal
tribes (Gott 1983), One European settler
reported ‘millions of murnong or yam, all
over the plain’, and the wheels of E.M.
Curr’s dray ‘used to turn them up by the
bushel’ (Gott 1983).

However, Yam-daisies proved extreme-
ly palatable to sheep and rabbits
(Farrington and Mitchell 1966;
Cunningham ef al. 1981; Gott 1983), as
noted by Curr; ‘several thousand sheep not
only learnt to root up these vegetables
[murnong] with their noses, but they for
the most part lived on them for the first
year, after which the root began to get
scarce’ (Curr 1886, in Gott 1983).

Microseris scapigera is now uncommon
to rare in lowland grasslands and grassy
woodlands, and most large grassland pop-
ulations occur in ungrazed remnants on
roadsides, rail-lines and cemeteries
(Prober and Thiele 1993; McDougall and
Kirkpatrick 1994), Fortunately, the species
remains common in other, less disturbed
ecosystems, such as dry sclerophyll
forests, Recently, as part of a larger exper-
iment with ten grassland species, I investi-
gated the longevity of M. scapigera seeds
in the soil. Seed longevity is a critical fac-
tor in plant ecology, as long-lived seeds
can form a buried seed bank, which

‘School of Botany, La Trobe University, Bundoora,
Victoria 3083,

enables a population to re-establish after
mature plants are killed (e.g. by fire or
grazing). By contrast, if all seeds germi-
nate quickly, the population cannot recov-
er if all existing plants die before flower-
ing, unless new seeds migrate into:the site.

Methods

Microseris scapigera seeds (propagules
of Microseris scapigera are technically
called ‘achenes’, but are here called
‘seeds’ for simplicity) were collected in
November 1993 from a remnant Themeda
grassland in Canberra, ACT. They were
dried and stored indoors until early 1994,
when they were placed in bags of fine
nylon mesh (mesh size 0.85 mm x 0.95
mm). Twenty filled seeds were placed in
each bag, and broken and unfilled seeds

“i i

Fig. 1. Microseris scapigera (Photograph
courtesy of James Ross).

The Victorian Naturalist

Contributions

were discarded. On 27 May 1994, the bags
were buried in a closed Themeda grass-
land in the Majura Valley next to Canberra
Airport.

The study site supported a long-unburnt
and long-ungrazed natural grassland with
a dense, closed canopy of Themeda trian-
dra. Associated species included Asperula
conferta, Desmodium varians, Eragrostis
trachycarpa, Plantago varia, Tricoryne
elatior and the exotic herbs, Conyza
species, Hypochoeris radicata and
Tragopogon porrifolius, The soil was a
dark brown, silty clay loam of pH 6.1 (S.
Sharp 1995, pers. comm.). Weather condi-
tions during most of the experiment were
extremely dry, as the region was experi-
encing a severe drought.

The bags were arranged (with more
bags containing seeds of other species) at
regular intervals on a grid measuring 19 m
x 19.5 m. Half of the seed bags were
pinned to the soil surface, beneath the
closed grass canopy, and the other half
were buried approximately | cm deep.
Eight surface and eight buried bags were
unearthed after approximately 3, 8 and 12
months. In total, 160 buried and 160 sur-
face seeds were unearthed at each date.

Results and discussion

Virtually all M. scapigera seeds germi-
nated rapidly, and no viable seeds persist-
ed for longer than 3 months (Table 1).
Two intact and visually healthy seeds
were recovered at 3 months (Table 1), but
their viability remains questionable as nei-
ther could be induced to germinate in a

Table 1. Percentage of Microseris scapigera
seeds remaining viable after various periods in
the soil.

Surface Buried
seeds seeds
100.00 100,00

Event

seeds sown

29 August _—_firstrecovery 1.00 0.00
1994 (3 months)
19 January secondrecovery 0.00 0.00
1995 (8 months)
6 May third recovery 0.00 0.00
(12 months)

Vol. 113 (1) 1996

petri dish. A few intact seeds were recov-
ered after eight and 12 months, but all
were brown inside and obviously inviable.

Microseris scapigera germination was
not inhibited by a dense grass cover or
extremely low soil moisture levels. In
August 1994, when the first seeds were
unearthed, the topsoil was completely dry
and dusty, and few seeds of the other
species studied had germinated (Lunt,
unpubl.), Drought conditions persisted
throughout 1994, and there seems little
doubt that all M. scapigera seedlings
would have perished.

Little information is available on seed
persistence in Australian grassland herbs.
M. scapigera was the only species, of the
ten studied in Canberra, for which no
seeds remained viable after a year in the
soil (Lunt, unpubl.). At least 20% of the
seeds of each of the other species
remained viable after 12 months. Indeed,
more than 70% of Vittadinia muelleri
seeds, and over 80% of surface seeds of
Briza maxima remained viable after a year
in the field (Lunt, unpubl.). Seeds of the
grassland daisies, Chrysocephalum apicu-
latum and Leucochrysum albicans, can
remain viable in the soil for at least a year
(Gilfedder and Kirkpatrick 1993; Lunt
1995), whereas most seeds of species such
as Burchardia umbellata, Craspedia vari-
abilis and Rutidosis leptorrhynchoides
rapidly germinate in native grasslands,
with few seeds remaining viable after 6
months (Lunt 1995; Morgan 1995). Like
M. scapigera, R. leptorrhynchoides has
declined dramatically in abundance since
European settlement.

The data presented here were obtained
from seeds from one population, grown at
one place in just one year, and it remains
to be seen whether seeds from other popu-
lations behave similarly. The grassland
habitat at Canberra is structurally similar
to any unburnt and ungrazed grasslands in
south-east Australia (e.g. Lunt 1990;
McDougall and Kirkpatrick 1994).
Microseris scapigera is a variable species
with many distinct forms (Gott 1983), and
seed behaviour may well differ between
populations, as occurs in Leucochrysum
albicans (Gilfedder and Kirkpatrick 1994).

—

Contributions

However, ina Concurrent experiment im
the Melbourne area, Watson (1995) found
that less than 2% of M, scapizera seeds
remained viable after being buried for 6
months ina recently burnt native grass.
land, and no seeds remained viable after
being buried for 6 months in an unburnt
grassland, which accords with the results
found here,

The absence of a persistent seed bank
for M, seapigera has three major implica
tions for conservation management, espe
cially in productive grassland remnants
which rapidly accumulate a thick grass
cover after fire,

1, Uf mature MW. scapigera plants are
absent before a fire or other disturbance,
then no seedling recruitment can be
expected alter the disturbance, unless
seeds are introduced to the site, (Although
M. seapigera seeds have a large pappus, it
is scaly and lacks feathery appendages,
and seeds are unlikely to be dispersed into
isolated remnants by wind),

2, If mature plants do occur at the site,
then substantial recruitment can only
occur immediately after a year of high
flower and seed production, as few (if
any) viable seeds will be present in other
years (Lunt 1994),

4, 1 mature plants do occur at the site,
then seedling recruitment is unlikely to
occur immediately after spring burning, as
most GF not all) seeds will have germinat-
ed earlier in the year. Small seedlings are
likely to be killed by a high intensity fire.
(Seedling recruitment may oceur in future
years though).

If this model proves to be correct, then
the principal impact of fire on grassland
forbs with transient soil seed banks, may
be to enable existing plants to produce
more flowers and seeds, from which new
scedlings can grow in the following year,
This scenario of delayed post-fire recruit-
ment differs from the model of direct, fire-
promoted recruitment from a soil seed
bank, which is commonly reported from
forest ecosystems (e.g. Purdie 1977; Wark
etal, 1987),

The absence of a persistent seed bank in
the soil may provide an additional clue to
the rapid demise of M. scapigera follow-

ing Huropean colonisation. The unearthing
of mature plants, selective grazing of sur-
viving plants, and absence of buried seeds,
led to the irretrievable demise of this once-
abundant species, This scenario echoes the
conclusion of many writers (e.g. Groves
and Williams 1981; Kirkpatrick et. al,
1988), that the most dramatic changes to
grassland ecosystems occurred extremely
quickly, within the first few years of occu-
pation by Europeans and their sheep,

Acknowledgments

This project was funded by the Australian
Nature Conservation Agency, under a grassland
research grant administered by the ACT Parks
and Conservation Service. Considerable thanks
are due to Sarah Sharp, who collected the seeds,
selected the study site and provided accommo
dation and administrative assistance throughout
the project, Pat Tratt and Raz Martin helped
count the initial seed lots and sewed the seed
bags, Gill Earl, John Morgan, Bob Parsons and
Sarah Sharp kindly commented upon the manu-
seriptand James Ross provided the photograph,

References

Cunningham, G.M., Mulham, W.E., Milthorpe, P.L.
and Leigh, JH, (1981), ‘Plants of Western New
South Wales’, (Soil Conservation Service of New
South Wales: Sydney)

Curr, ELM. (1886), ‘The Australian
(Government Printer: Melbourne).

Farrington, P, and Mitchell, A, (1966), The Effeets of
Grazing by Sheep and Rabbits ina Victorian Forest,
(Unpubl, Report, Soil Conservation Authority
Victoria: Melbourne),

Gilfedder, L, and Kirkpatrick, J.B, (1993), Germinable
soil seed and competitive relationships between a
tare native species and exotics in a semi-natural
pasture in the Midlands, Taymanta. Biological
Conservation 64, 11A-119,

Gilfedder, L, and Kirkpatrick, J.B, (1994),
Genevological variation in the germination, growth
ind morphology of four populations of a Tasmanian
endangered perennial daisy, Leucochrysum albi-
cans, Australian Journal of Botany 42, 431-440,

Gott, B, (1983), Murnong « Microseris scapigera: a
study of a staple food of Victorian Aborigines,
Australian Aboriginal Studies 2, 2-18.

Groves, RH, and Williams, O.B, (1981), Natural
grasslands, /a ‘Australian Vegetation’, Ed R.A,
Groves, (Cambridge University Press: Cambridge).

Kirkpatrick, J,, Gilfedder, L, and Fensham, R. (1988),
‘City Parks and Cemeteries - Tasmania's Remnant
Cirasslands and Grassy Woodlands’, (Tasmanian
Conservation Trust; Hobart),

Lunt, LD, (1990), A floristic survey of the Derrimut
Grassland Reserve, Melbourne, Victoria,
Proceedings af the Royal Soctety of Victoria 102,
41-51,

Race’,

The Victorian Naturalist

Contributions

Lunt, 1.D. (1994). Variation in flower production of
nine grassland species with time since fire, and
implications for grassland management and restora-
tion. Pacific Conservation Biology 1, 359-366.

Lunt, I.D. (1995). Seed longevity of six native forbs in
a closed Themeda triandra grassland. Australian
Journal of Botany 43, 439-449,

McDougall, K. and Kirkpatrick, J.B. (eds) (1994),
‘Conservation of Lowland Native Grasslands in
South-eastern Australia.’ (World Wide Fund for
Nature: Sydney).

Morgan, J.W. (1995). Ecological studies of the endan-
gered Rutidosis leptorrhynchoides. I. Seed produc-
tion, soil seed bank dynamics, population density
and their effects on recruitment. Australian Journal
of Botany 43, 1-11.

Prober, S.M. and Thiele, K.R. (1993). The ecology and

genetics of remnant grassy white box woodlands in
relation to their conservation. The Victorian
Naturalist 110, 30-36,

Purdie, R.W. (1977). Early stages of regeneration after
burning in dry sclerophyll vegetation, II.
Regeneration by seed germination. Australian
Journal of Botany 25, 35-46.

Wark, M.C., White, M.D., Robertson, D.J. and
Marriott, P.H. (1987). Regeneration of heath and
heath woodland in the north-eastern Otway Ranges
following the wild-fire of February 1983.
Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria 99, 51-
88,

Watson, S. (1995). Seed Ecology Of Five Native
Forbs. Jn ‘A Basalt Plains Grassland’. (Unpublished
thesis, Victorian College of Agriculture and
Horticulture, Burnley; Melbourne).

Mueller - Commemorative Issue
The Victorian Naturalist
August 1996

1996 is the centenary of the death of Baron Ferdinand von Mueller. A special
issue of The Victorian Naturalist will be published in August 1996 to commem-
orate Mueller’s involvement with the FNCV as a foundation member, and as its
first patron.

For this issue we have invited a number of authors to write on a variety of
topics including Mueller’s collecting work, his and the club’s involvement with
Wilsons Promontory, the FNCV’s contribution towards his monument in St
Kilda cemetery, as well as other aspects of his wider natural history interests.

We invite YOU to contribute to this commemorative issue by writing on any-
thing you know about Mueller. If you do not want to write, perhaps you nove
some suggestions for topics or articles that you would like to see included?
Please let us know, as soon as possible, if you have any suggestions or are able
to write for the journal. Written material will be needed by the end of May

1996.

The editors are looking forward to hearing from you.

All replies to: The Editors, The Victorian Naturalist,
Locked Bag 3,
PO Blackburn 3130,
or phone (home) 03 9435 9019.

Vol. 113 (1) 1996

Contributions

Fauna Survey Group Contribution No. 18

The Little Pyzmy-possum Cercartetus lepidus; An Addition
to the Fauna of South-west Victoria.

Lawrence E. Conole!

Introduction

The Little Pygmy-possum Cercartetus
lepidus, the smallest of all possums, has a
disjunct modern distribution in south-east-
ern Australia, but its prehistoric range
shown in the fossil record was less frag-
mented (Green 1983). Until comparatively
recently, C. lepidus was thought to be con-
fined to Tasmania, but it was found on
Kangaroo Island, South Australia in 1964
(Aitken 1970), The first living records on
the Australian mainland, both in 1976,
were from near Pinnaroo, S.A. (Aitken
1977), and in the Sunset Country of north-
western Victoria (Dixon 1978). A slightly
earlier mainland record from near
Kingston S.E, in South Australia in 1974
has since been documented by Barritt
(1978).

In Tasmania, C. lepidus is found mostly
in dry sclerophyll forest, and to a lesser
extent in wet sclerophyll forest, but not in
rainforest (Green 1983). On Kangaroo
Island it occurs in dry sclerophyll forest
(Green 1983), while in the Sunset Country
and Big Desert of Victoria and contiguous
South Australia it occurs in sandplain
heath and mallee (Dixon 1978; Bennett e¢
al, 1989), The distribution of C. lepidus
spans the climatic range from a maximum

annual rainfall in western Tasmania of

about 1200 mm to a minimum of 300 mm
in the Victorian mallee, In Tasmania, C.
lepidus is sympatric with the Eastern
Pygmy-possum C. nanus, but on
Kangaroo Island and the south-eastern
mainland it is sympatric with the Western
Pygmy-possum C. concinnus (Green
1983).

In this paper, I report the capture of C.
lepidus in dry sclerophyll forest in the
Jilpanger Flora and Fauna Reserve, in the
northern Wannon region, south-western

'2/45 Virginia Street, Newtown, Victoria 3220

Victoria. These represent the southernmost
records, and the first records from dry
sclerophyll forest in Victoria. Cercartetus
lepidus has not previously been recorded
as a component of the fauna of south-
western Victoria (Menkhorst and
Beardsell 1982; Flannery 1994).

Fauna survey at Jilpanger Flora and
Fauna Reserve

Jilpanger Flora and Fauna Reserve is
8,290 ha in size (ERIN 1991) and is in the
northern part of the Wannon region with a
line of sight to the Victoria Range of
Gariwerd (Grampians) National Park. It is
bounded to the north by the Wimmera
Highway, to the south by the Douglas-
Wombelano Road, and to the east and
west by farmland. Jilpanger is an area with
annual rainfall of approximately 550 mm
(Bureau of Meteorology and Walsh 1993).
Most of the reserve is dry sclerophyll for-
est and woodland consisting of Desert
Stringybark Eucalyptus arenacea on low
siliceous dunes with a Desert Banksia
Banksia ornata and heath understorey
(Conn 1993). Small areas of Yellow Gum
E. leucoxylon woodland occur on clay
pans, River Red Gum E. camaldulensis
woodland in wetlands, Manna Gum &.
viminalis on waterlogged sandy soils, and
Grey Box E. microcarpa and Buloke
Allocasuarina luehmanii woodland on
various clay soils (Conn 1993).

Brief descriptions of the initial four pit-
fall trapping sites are as follows:
(i) JP-1. On top of a high, yellow, sand
dune. Area burnt in wildfire during the
summer of 1990/91. Low woodland (c. 4-
5 m high) of E. arenacea, abundant flow-
ering Austral Grasstrees Xanthorrhoea
australis, regenerating Hakea and other
species and colonising ground cover plants
over large areas of bare sand.

The Victorian Naturalist

Contributions

(ii) JP-2. Lower altitude, yellow sand dune
but with dark humic soil development
under heavy leaf litter. Abundant 0.5-0.75
m regeneration of Oyster Bay Pine
Callitris rhomboidea underneath large,
circa 10 m E. arenacea with old fire scars
(last fire 1978, DCNR fire map, Horsham
office per David Venn).

(iii) JP-3. Clay pan with woodland of E.
leucoxylon, with Scarlet Bottlebrush
Callistemon rugulosus scrub and Gold-
dust Wattle Acacia acinacea and Common
Fringe-myrtle Calytrix tetragona ground
cover.

(iv) JP-4. B. ornata scrub with emergent
E. arenacea on low, white sand dune.
Other abundant shrubs include Lavender
Grevillea Grevillea lavandulacea and
Heath Tea-tree Leptospermum myrsi-
noides.

In September 1991 as part of a biologi-
cal survey of the Jilpanger Flora and
Reserve, the Fauna Survey Group of the
The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria
installed four lines of pitfall traps (total =
40 traps) in the south-western corner of
the reserve. During the December 1991-
January 1992 and April 1992 survey work,
a number of Cercartetus were trapped at
three out of the four lines. On 28
December 1991 a small male Cercartetus
sp. was captured at site 3 along with a
male C. concinnus (Fig. 1). After exami-

nation of its dentition, I identified the ani-
mal as C. lepidus by the presence of the
diagnostic fourth molar (not present in C.
concinnus or C. nanus, Merrilees and
Porter 1979; Green and Rainbird 1983).
Additional C. lepidus were captured dur-
ing the December 1991-January 1992 field
trip. The overall survey at Jilpanger is still
in progress and other C. lepidus have sub-
sequently been captured in pitfall traps
there (Russell Thompson pers. comm.).
The first C. lepidus died and will be
lodged with the Museum of Victoria as a
voucher specimen.

Discussion

The capture of the Little Pygmy-pos-
sum C. lepidus at Jilpanger Flora and
Fauna Reserve in 1991 is an addition to
the fauna of south-western Victoria. In
Desert Stringybark E£. arenacea dry scle-
rophyll forest, approximately 13 years
after the last wildfire (site JP-2), it was rel-
atively more abundant than sympatric
Western Pygmy-possum C, concinnus,
Silky Mouse Pseudomys apodemoides and
the introduced House Mouse M. musculus
(Fig.1). However, it was not captured at
the other trap sites.

Green (1983) described C. lepidus as a
species that has contracted in range prior
to European settlement of south-eastern
Australia, and concluded that land clearing

Little Pygmy-possum

Western Pygmy-possum

Silky Mouse
aid House Mouse

Wm yp-) (__]p-2 ESS up-4

Fig. 1. Capture rates of four species

of small mammals at Jilpanger Flora and Fauna Reserve in

19991/92. Capture rate is number of captures per 100 pitfall trap nights.

Vol. 113 (1) 1996

Contributions

172 records

since 1970
1900 - 1969
before 1900
sub-fossil

179 records

since 1970
1900 - 1969
before 1900
sub-fossil

Little Pygmy-possum

28 blocks
0 blocks
0 blocks
1 blocks

149
Source: Adas of Victorian Wildlife.

Western Pygmy-possum

34 blocks
22 blocks
0 blocks
0 blocks

149
Source; Atlas of Victorian Wildlife,

Fig. 2. Distribution maps of (a) Little Pygmy-possum Cercartetus lepidus and (b) Western Pygmy-
possum C. concinnus in Victoria from the Atlas of Victorian Wildlife. The isolated five minute
Square to the south of the main block on the Little Pygmy-possum map shows the position of

Jilpanger Flora and Fauna Reserve.

i
The Victorian Naturalist i

Contribltions

in the time since then has exacerbated the
decline. Flannery (1994) speculated that
the diminutive size and secretive behay-
iour of C. lepidus may have led to it being
overlooked in some areas, and that it may
be more widespread on the mainland than
current records suggest. Emison et al.
(1978) and Menkhorst and Beardsell
(1982) are the only systematic accounts of
mammal surveys in the Wannon Region,
but neither survey employed pitfall traps
(the most effective method for trapping
Cercartetus) at Jilpanger or in other simi-
lar woodland remnants.

Distribution maps produced by the
Atlas of Victorian Wildlife after the inclu-
sion of the captures reported in this paper
show C. lepidus and C. concinnus to be
broadly sympatric in western Victoria,
with an apparent absence of C. lepidus
from the Little Desert (Fig. 2). Woinarski
(1988) claimed to have captured a C. lep-
idus in the Little Desert, but no specimen
was taken and the record was not accepted
by the Atlas of Victorian Wildlife (Peter
Menkhorst pers. comm.). The specimen
backed record from Jilpanger, south of the
Little Desert, makes it likely that C. lep-
idus does indeed occur in the Little Desert.
Barritt (1978) reports C. lepidus from
Fairview and Jip Jip Conservation Parks
near Kingston S.E in South Australia; both
in an area of similar latitude and habitat
range to the Little Desert. Museum of
Victoria specimens of C. concinnus from
the Little Desert probably now need to be
examined for the presence of misidentified
C. lepidus.

At Jilpanger, on the small amount of
1991-92 trapping data, C. lepidus appears
‘more abundant than C. concinnus in E.
_arenacea dry sclerophyll forest, but the
situation is reversed in B. ornata scrub.
This observation is similar to that of Ward
(1992) for the two species in the Big
Desert. Interestingly, analogous Brown
Stringybark E. baxteri forest only about
60-70 km to the east in Gariwerd (the
Grampians) is occupied by the Eastern
_ Pygmy-possum C. nanus (Emison et al.
1978). Wakefield (1963) postulated that C.
oncinnus and C. nanus might be narrowly
attic somewhere near the north end

113 (1) 1996

of the Grampians, but the added presence
of C. lepidus at Jilpanger means that the
three species may be very close to over-
lapping at a point near to that which
Wakefield nominated. The records of C.
concinnus at Jilpanger in 1991-92 are also
the first on the southern limit of its range
since 1961 (Atlas of Victorian Wildlife).
Flannery (1994) has characterised the
conservation status of C. lepidus as vul-
nerable because of the retraction in its
range, although Andrew Bennett (pers.
comm.) and Menkhorst (1995) regard the
species as well represented in the large
conservation reserves of the Sunset
Country and Big Desert in Victoria. The
newly discovered population at Jilpanger
can be seen as significant for the conserva-
tion of the species in Victoria, in that it
broadens both the known geographic and
habitat range of the species in the state.
Much of Jilpanger carries similar vegeta-
tion to the first C. Jepidus trap site, and so
the potential exists for C. lepidus to be
widespread and for the large conservation
reserve to hold a numerically significant
population. Relatively little has been pub-
lished on the natural history of C. lepidus
since early observations in Tasmania
(Hickman and Hickman 1960; Green
1980) and Kangaroo Island (Aitken 1974),
an indication of which is that the species
account in Flannery (1994) merely para-
phrases Green (1983). Ward (1992) pub-
lished limited details of C. lepidus life his-
tory in the Big Desert, and the Department
of Conservation and Natural Resources
has collected abundant data on habitat
usage and body weights in the Victorian
deserts (Andrew Bennett pers. comm,), At
Jilpanger C. lepidus is relatively abundant
and accessible, and this population would
be ideal for inclusion in a study of C. lep-
idus biology on the Australian mainland.

Acknowledgements

David Venn (Horsham Department of
Conservation and Natural Resources
[DCNR]) suggested the Jilpanger survey
as a Fauna Survey Group project. Permits
issued by the DCNR empowered the
Fauna Survey Group to trap and handle
protected species. Barbara Baxter and

Contributions

other staff of the Atlas of Victorian
Wildlife, DCNR Heidelberg, provided
data and distribution maps of Cercartetus
species. Andrew Bennett (DCNR,
Heidelberg) made valuable comments on a
draft of this paper. Peter Menkhorst
(DCNR, Heidelberg) examined the C. lep-
idus specimen and concurred with my
identification.

The first pitfall sites at Jilpanger were
selected by Lawrie Conole, and lines were
dug and installed by Lawrie Conole, Grant
Baverstock, Russell Thompson and Peter
Hansen. FSG personnel for the subsequent
surveys were!

PROJECT MANAGER (1991/92):
Lawrie Conole. SURVEY TEAM
(1991/92): Grant Baverstock, Damien
Cook, Russell Thompson, Peter Hansen,
Andrea Dennis (Equipment Officer), Tom
Sault, Julian Grusovin (Records Officer),
Felicity Garde, Peter Lynch, Mark
Greatorex, Stephen Spillard, Michael
Howes, lan Faithfull, Amy Harris, Sharon
Mason, Peter Maiden, Stacy Malcolm,
Alistair Traill, Alena Glaister, lan
Glaister, John Smith, Bill Farrugia, Mibel
Aguilar, Ray Gibson.

References

Aitken, P.F. (1970), Cereartetus lepidus (Thomas) an
addition to the fauna of Kangaroo Island. Records
of the South Australian Museum. 15(3):575-576,

Aitken, P\F. (1974), The Litthe Pigmy Possum
(Cercartetus lepidus Thomas) on Kangaroo Island,
South Australia, South Australian Naturalist
48(3):36-43.

Aitken, PF, (1977), The Little Pigmy Possum
(Cercartetus lepidus (Thomas)) found living on the
Australian mainland, Seuth Australian Naturalist
51(4):63-66,

Burritt, M.K, (1978). Two further specimens of the
Little Pigmy Possum [Cercartetus lepidus
(Thomas)| from the Australian mainland, South
Australian Naturalist 53(1):12-13.

Bennett, A.F,, Lumsden, L.F. and Menkhorst, P.W.
(1989), Mammals of the Mallee Region of
Southeastern Australia, IN; Noble, J.C, and
Bradstock, R.A. (Eds) Mediterranean Landscapes
in Australia, Mallee Ecosystems and their
Management, (CSIRO; Melbourne).

Bureau of Meteorology and Walsh, N.G. (1993),
Climate of Victoria. pp. 47-60, IN: Foreman, D.B,
and Walsh, N.G. (Eds) Flora of’ Vietoria, Volume 1,
Introduction, (Inkata Press: Melbourne).

Conn, B.J. (1993), Natural Regions and Vegetation of
Victoria, pp, 79-158, IN: Foreman, D.B. and Walsh,
N.G. (Eds) Flora of Vietoria. Volume J.
é Introduction, (nkata Press; Melbourne).

Dixon, J.M. (1978), The first Victorian and other
Victorian records of the Little Pigmy Possum

Cercartetus lepidus (Thomas). The Victorian
Naturalist 95(1):4-7.

Emison, W.B., Porter, J.W., Norris, K.C, and Apps,
G.J. (1978). Survey of the vertebrate fauna in the
Grampians-Edenhope urea of southwestern
Victoria. Memoirs of the National Museum of
Victoria 39;:281-363,

ERIN (1991). Victorian Protected Areas. ASCII file
(16 kb). ERIN Internet Gopher, URL
gopher://kaos,erin.gov,au (Environmental
Resources Information Network; Canberra).

Flannery, T.F. (1994). Possums of the World. A
Monograph of the Phalangeroidea. (GEO
Productions; Sydney).

Green, R.H. (1980). The Litthe Pygmy Possum,
Cercartetus lepidus in Tasmania, Records of the
Queen Victoria Museum,. Launceston 68:1-12.

Green, R.H. (1983), Litthe Pygmy-possum Cercartetus
lepidus, pp. 164-165, IN Strahan, R., The
Australian Museum Complete Book of Australian
Mammals. (Angus and Robertson; Sydney).

Green, RH. and Rainbird, J.L. (1983). Skulls of the
Mammals in Tasmania (Queen Victoria Museum
and Art Gallery: Launceston).

Hickman, Y.¥. and Hickman, J.L. (1960). Notes on
the habits of the Tasmanian doormouse phalangers
Cercartetus nanus (Desmarest) and Eudromicia
lepida (Thomas). Proceedings of the Zoolological
Society, London 135:365-374.

Menkhorst, P.W, and Beardsell, C.M, (1982),
Mammals of south-western Victoria from the Little
Desert to the coast, Proceedings of the Royal —
Society of Victoria 94(4):221-247

Menkhorst, P.W. (Ed.) (in press) Mammals of
Victoria: Ecology, Conservation and Distribution,
(Oxford University Press: Melbourne),

Merrilees, D, and Porter, J.K. (1979), Guide to the
Identification ef Teeth and some Bones of Native —
Land Mammals Occurring in the Extreme South |
West of Western Australia, (Western Australian
Museum: Perth),

Wakefield, N.A. (1963), The Australian Pygmy-pos-
sums. The Victorian Naturalist 80:99-116

Woinarski, J.C,.Z. (1988). The vertebrate fauna of

Broombush (Melaleuca uncinata) vegetation in

north-western Victoria and the environmental

effects of the broombush harvesting industry.

(Conservation Council of Victoria: Melbourne)

Little Pygmy-Possum Cercartetus lepidus,
foro Pelee dete pe

The Victorian Nat

Naturalist Notes

Wombat Behaviour

About noon on the 12 August 1995,
while cross-country skiing in the
Kosciusko National Park (NSW), my
friends and I were privileged to see a
mother Wombat giving a rather large
baby a piggy-back ride across the snow.
When the mother reached a patch of grass
the baby climbed off (Fig. 1) and fed on
grass alongside the mother. It should be
noted that the baby was approximately a
third the size of the mother. The snow was
not particularly soft as the mother only
sank to abut 100 mm in the softest sec-
tions and most of the snow was quite firm.
While the mother was feeding, the baby
strayed briefly onto the snow and did not
appear to have any problems with move-
ment. The wombats showed no signs of
apprehension with the presence of
humans, so I slowly walked down to with-
in 2.5 m of them to take a few photos. The
rest of our group kept a little further dis-
tance. After feeding, the baby climbed
back onto the mother and was carried off
across the snow at a slow walk (Fig. 2).
This piggy-back ride was observed for at
least 20 m before our group had to leave
them to ski to our agreed rendezvous
point for lunch.

This behaviour raised a number of

Vol.113 (1) 1996

questions. Has the baby had trouble fol-
lowing the mother across the soft snow
when it was younger (just out of the
pouch) and now continues the practice out
of habit? Alternatively, does the baby
have a problem with cold feet in the
snow? The other unusual aspect of this
sighting is that the wombats were active at
noon in the heat of a bright sunny day. I
wonder if the scarcity of food due to the
exceptionally heavy snow cover had
forced the normally nocturnal wombats to
feed during the day.

The location of this sighting was not far
from Horse Camp Hut, in a tributary val-
ley of Munyang River, upstream from
Munyang Power Station. The power sta-
tion is abut 6 km from the Guthega Resort
in the Kosciusko National Park. There
were about 8 people who witnessed this
unusual behaviour. Some members from
my group and some from another group of
cross-country skiers.

I wonder if other readers have observed
similar wombat behaviour of adults piggy-
backing their young, or feeding during the
middle of the day. Please send details of
similar observations to the editors.

Garry K. Smith
5 Fourth St. ,SSeahampton NSW 2286

Naturalist Notes

From our Naturalist in Residence, Glen Jameson

The Editors are pleased that the 'Naturalist in Residence' series will con-
tinue in 1996 with Glen Jameson writing a series of six articles on the sea-
sons of the Middle Yarra Valley.

Middle Yarra Timelines

The Middle Yarra Timelines project is being developed by The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria,
Gould League and Yarra Valley Parklands (Melbourne Parks and Waterways), in an attempt to
record and analyse seasonality themes of the natural history of the Middle Yarra area, its rela-
tionships, interactions and sequence of events . The Middle Yarra area is the broad catchment
area that begins at the confluence of Watson Creek and the Yarra River at Kangaroo Ground in
the east and in the west ends at the Burke Road bridge over the Yarra. The project is endeavour-
ing to establish a data base of information that, hopefully, will be essential to land managers,
eco-tourist providers, environmental educationalists and those interested in Natural History.
From the data supplied by naturalists, a six season calendar year has been produced. The sea-
sons are cyclic, regulated by climatic variability and delineated by the occurrence and associa-
tions of natural phenomena.

The idea behind this series of articles is to represent a mythical day for each of those seasons, a
day that incorporates all of the important seasonal indicators and patterns that are characteristic
of that season.

High Summer

High Summer and you wake up with the
sun in your eye, and there it stays all day.
Wander down to the Yarra River under
apricot dawn skies to breathe in the cool,
muddy smells before the day’s heat
destroys it all. On the waters edge in the
riparian forest, River Lomatia Lomatia
myricoides has its last flowers, having
been out fully on the Summer solstice.
Timelonic* moments of truth as the Wood
Duck Chenonetta jubata calls from along
the river. Its call is carried by the steep
river gorge walls for miles.

The shallow, sun warmed river water,
generates a rich benthic plant life growing
on rocks and other plants. The diatoms
especially are actively growing and in
turn support a great variety of inverte-
brates, many of which, in the ideal
conditions, complete successive genera-
tions. Chironomids, Water Pennies
Sclerocyphon Sp., Mayflies
Tasmanocoenis sp., Caddis-Flies
Cheumatopsyche sp. and Ecnomus sp.,
Water-Boatman. Micronecta sp. and
others supply food for small young fish,
only months old, to grow quickly,
Spotted Galaxids Galaxis truttaceus and

Australian Grayling Prototroctes maraena
disperse from estuary breeding grounds to
colonize the river, while Tupong
Psuedaphritis urvillii continue their
upstream migration past the High Summer
period, All take advantage of the rich
feeding opportunities that the low flow
river provides.

River Reed Phragmites australis stimu-
lated by the drop in water levels of the
river, flowers and amongst the thick debris
of its leaves the Buff-banded Rail
Gallirallus philippensis sleuths. Welcome
Swallows Hirundo neoxena gather to glide
above the glassy top of the water on which
a cool layer still sits as the last wifts of
mist evaporate with an almost audible fizz,
Sacred Kingfisher Halcyon sancta in fast
‘hummingbird’ flight, a breath above the
water, skims the only layer of cool air. It
returns to the big Yellow Box Eucalyptus
melliodora on the Riverbank where it has
young in a hollow. Occasional Manna
Gums Eucalyptus viminalis are in flower,
on one an immature Night Heron
Nycticorax caledonicus, perches warily.
Yesterday an adult bird in flight, with its
nuptial feather streaming behind it, fol-

The Victorian Naturalist

Naturalist Notes

lowed the river’s course upstream. The
young of the Dusky Woodswallows
Artamus cyanopterus have already fledged
from nests made in the folds of peeling
bark on Manna Gums. At the feet of the
Manna Gums, Hop Goodenia Goodenia
ovata sports plenty of flowers. Prickly
Coprosma Coprosma quadrifida, full of
sweet red berries, attracts visits from nest-
ing Red-browed Firetails Neochmia tem-
poralis and Blue Wrens Malurus cyaneus.
Pick a few of the dark red, well ripened
ones which are sweet to eat and listen to
the scissoring sounds of the Shining Fly-
catcher Myiagra alecto. The Tree Violet’s
Hymenanthera dentata ripened fruits,
smelling like sultanas, feed an array of
birds. Later, in cool weather, large num-
bers of seeds often germinate under Silver
Wattles Acacia dealbata after being void-
ed by birds. Purple fruits of the
Muttonwood Rapanea howittiana some-
times prolific during the wet summers,
cluster on the bare wood of the branches
above the running river water. In a thicket
of Burgan Kunzea ericoides a nesting
Rufous Fantail Rhipidura rufifrons male,
fusses with caught and offered insects.
Amongst the rocks on the river rapids a
young Eastern Brown Snake Pseudonaja
textilis hunts amongst the crevices for a
few frogs. In the mud built up around the
rapid’s rocks, Pratia pedunculata flowers.
The last few seed cases of the Silver
Wattles float past to new destinations.
Downstream, billabongs and wetlands
are going through a metamorphosis.
Responding to low water levels, quick
growing herbaceous plants run riot on the
drying mud of the expanding littoral edge.
The emergent herbfield is full of
Centipedia cunninghamii, Callitriche son-
deri, Polygonum plebeium and
Amphibromus fluitans. Upon the water of
the wetlands a floating herbfield of Azol/a
pinnata, Azolla filiculoides, Wolffia aus-
traliana, Lemna disperma and Riccia
duplex create a tapestry of red and green.
Along the wetland edge quick move-
ments of Lewins Rail Gallirallus pec-
toralis finishing its hunting along the rich
littoral pickings. Also stalking the fringe 1s
the White-faced Heron Ardea novaehol-

Vol. 113 (1) 1996

landiae, Straw-necked Ibis Threskiornis
spinicollis and the Intermediate Egret
Egretta intermedia. Occasionally a
Latham’s Snipe Gallinago hardwickii
takes off with a great flapping in a twist-
Ing, Weaving flight. Fairy Martins Hirundo
ariel leave their mud nests in culverts to
busily feed upon insects by the waters
edge. Hidden amongst the thick leaves of
Cumbungi Typha domingensis Clamorous
Reed-warblers Acrocephalus stentoreus
give their melodious call and the River
Red Gums Euclayptus camaldulensis
above them begin to flower. Olive-backed
Oriole Oriolus sagittatus and Rufous
Whistlers Pachycephala rufiventris are
still feeding young.

On grassy slopes full of flowering
Yellow Rush-lily Tricoryne elatior morn-
ing sun warms papery wings and Common
Brown Butterflies Heteronympha merape
chase about in the Kangaroo Grass
Themeda triandra. Many Butterflies busy
themselves, Brown-shouldered
Heteronympha penelope, Australian
Admirals Vanessa/Eastern itea, Eastern
Ringed Xenica Geitoneura acantha,
Dingy Swallowtail Papilio anactus and
Imperial Whites Delias harpalyce search
for partners and sip nectar from the pro-
fusely flowering Sweet Bursaria Bursaria
spinosa which provides an important
source of nectar for a range of insects dur-
ing this time.

The seed of most local acacias drop to
the ground providing food for the
Common Bronze-wing Pigeon Phaps
chalcoptera. Many other plants are in
seed, such as the elegant Pomaderris,
Native Hemp Gynatrix pulchella, as well
as the Grasses and the lanky Lomandra
Lomandra longifolia, all helping to pro-
vide food for the migrating birds, down
for the High Summer.

From the ridge tops, the view of the
horizon is distorted by the swaying haze of
the heat waves. Bright pink Hyacinth
Orchids Dipodium punctatum, tropical in
appearance, belie the dryness of the hills.
In fact all is dry. Summer has sloughed off
its last skin of moisture while the grasses
turn brown and crackle underfoot. It is the
peak dry period of the year. Lightwood

Naturalist Notes

Acacia implexa, that handsome tough wat-
tle, shrugs off the heat and thirst with a
profuse flowering amidst its sickle leaves.
Jacky Lizards Amphibolurus muricatus,
with bright orange mouths in vivid con-
trast to the dried colours, hunt on the
rocky escarpments. Dusky Woodswallows
swoop in well-practiced sweeps, catching
insects - the smooth-flying harvesters of
the ridge tops.

A Black-shouldered Kite Elanus nota-
tus pair, after an afternoon stretch of play-
ful aerialism, lock feet together and fall
towards the ground in a fast death defying
spiral, pulling apart at the very last
moment. Cicada orchestras in rhythmic
pulses and swings of momentum, fill the
afternoon with vibrating musical patterns.

Above the Yarra in the Warrandyte
Gorge, a huge flock of White-throated
Needletails Hirundapus caudacutus,
whose first appearance marked the begin-
ning of High Summer, now feast on a
wave of insects using the updraft of the
cool river air to gain height. The
Needletails sweep the airways with long
raking glides, gracefully manoeuvering at
high speed to intercept the insects.
Working each area until the food supply is
exhausted, they move off in front of the
changing weather conditions and herald a
cool change. The change in the weather
marked by the Needletails will become
more frequent towards the end of High
Summer,

The hot weather can often have a bal-
anced, focused power which radiates
through the ecosystem and energizes
everything, although this is not always the
case with High Summer. In the days of
extreme north winds when temperatures
soar and threaten to ingnite every living
thing, there is an awesome terror in their
power.

In the gloaming dusk of an enervating
High Summers day, bats take advantage of
the prolific numbers of insects. Often, bats
seems to be almost as prolific as birds
when they feed in the darkening skies. The
incandescent night is full of the pleasant
chirruping of Long-horned (Katydids)
Grasshoppers Caedicia olivacea and the
lovely whirring calls of the Owlet Nightjar
Aegotheles cristatus, They are interrupted
only occasionally by the harsh rasps of
juvenile Tawny Frogmouths Podargus
strigoides amongst Red Box Eucalyptus
polyanthemos as they find their way
around their home territory.

Once evening has fallen, a few
Southern Brown Tree Frogs Litoria ewingi
and Spotted Marsh Frogs L.tasmaniensis
call from wetlands and occasionally they
are joined by the Pobblebonks
Limnodynastes dumerilii. However they
are all out-called by the maniacal cackle of
the Peron’s Tree Frog Litoria peronii. The
Peron’s Tree Frog marks out the length of
High Summer. It only calls during the
warmest weather, starting on occasional
balmy nights in September and finishing
as High Summer does, when the Yarra
Valley cools and mists return to dominate
the morning sky.

* Timelonic - a particular observation
of a natural phenomenon which gives
insight into the function or nature of an
interaction or association.

Acknowledgements

I would like to thank Malcom Calder, Cecily
Falkinham, Patrick Fricker, Ed Grey, Pat Grey,
Alan Reid, John Reid, Elizabeth Seviour, Ken
Simpson, George Paras, Vin Pettigrove, the
Middle Yarra Timelines Committee and all who

have contributed to the data bank of information —

for the Project so far.
Glen Jameson
PO Box 568, Templestowe, Victoria 3106.

AUTHOR’S COPIES
After publication of an article in The Victorian Naturalist, the author receives five (5) complimenta-
ry copies of that issue. Normally this would be sufficient when combined with photcopying.
However, additional copies of The Victorian Naturalist may be ordered from the editors when a

paper is submitted. Costs for 1996 will be:

25 copies
50 copies

POAd Peewee eeesncatbeevevewsssencese:

wieder /ttpe tether casbiae $30 plus postage
dinate eae $60 plus postage

The Victorian Naturalist

Naturalist Notes

Greater Glider Petauroides volans with Pouched Young

27 September 1995 at 21.35 hours.

Whilst spotlighting in mixed species,
wet sclerophyll forest near Healesville
(Natmap 8022, AMG grid number
71 1Easting, 336Northing, altitude 100 m),
a Greater Glider Petauroides volans was

_ seen with pouched young. The baby’s eye-
shine, although faint, was still quite dis-
tinct under red light and also when viewed
through 8 x 40 binoculars. The form of the
baby could not be distinguished against
the abdomen of the adult.

Movement to the left and right side of
the animal in an endeavour to sight both of
the baby’s eyes was unsuccessful. The rea-
son for this may have been that only one
side of the head was visible, or because
the animal was so small that both eyes

peared as one. I believe the baby would
have been developed (furred) and that the
posture of the adult on the limb was
responsible for the protuberance of the
baby’s head from the pouch. The animals

were observed for 2-3 minutes. Then, to
give one so young a rest from the light, we
diverted our attention to a Yellow-bellied
Glider Petarus australis nearby. On
returning to view the Greater Glider some
five minutes later, the adult’s posture on
the limb had altered slightly and the young
one was not visible.

It seems, from a discussion with staff of
the Department of Conservation and
Natural Resources - Steve Craig, Jerry
Alexander, Lindy Lumsden, Andrew
Bennett (pers. comm.) - that a sighting
such as this is rare, in that of the four peo-
ple spoken to, who between them have
had countless hours of spotlighting experi-
ence, none had been privy to such a sight-
ing. My thanks to each of them for their
comments.

R.G. Taylor

22 Coven Avenue, Bayswater North, Victoria 3153

Magpies

Our fauna as well as our flora seem to
be having a battle to cope with the haz-
ards of our modern technology. The fol-
lowing is a case in point. For years
Magpies, with their young, have appeared
on our back verandah asking for assis-
tance in satisfying the voracious appetites
of their young. Later they would be bru-
tally attacking them, driving them off to
fend for themselves. ’

This year only one lonely adult arrived
to ask for food. This was for its young
still in the nest, presumably somewhere
across the street since it disappeared into
the many large gums amongst the houses
on that side. Last Sunday it arrived but
flew up to the top of a power pole to feed
a juvenile that was fluttering its wings 1n
the usual fashion. It came back to the

Vol. 113 (1) 1996

verandah for more food and then flew
across the street in the usual way. So there
was obviously still young that had not yet
ventured far away from the nest. Shortly
afterwards I drove out onto the street and
there at the bottom of the power pole lay
the bodies of the adult Magpie and the
young one. The power pole carries a
transformer and amidst the host of wires
and insulators the young bird was being
fed. Obviously reaching across from two
neighbouring wires the birds had been
electrocuted. We felt almost as if it had
been a human tragedy

G.A. Crichton
6 Ainslie Park Avenue, Croydon, Victoria 3136

Naturalist Notes

Photography
Wendy Clark’

Introduction

Photography can be a wonderful tool
for a field naturalist, covering anything
from identification, illustrations in both
books and journals, or displays for talks
and meetings, illustration of behaviour,
wall decoration or simply travelling down
memory lane. The hard part is to decide
which to do. The skill level and techniques
for each type can be anything from basic
to expert.

Activities

Photography can be useful on any field
excursion for any of the groups within
Field Nats e.g. photos of fungi for identifi-
cation or illustrations on Botany Group
excursions or surveys, photos of insects,
lizards or mammals at Fauna Survey
camps, just to mention a few. The one
potential problem that could occur is if the
act of photographing takes over, and starts
holding up the excursion too long. If your
interest in nature photography itself
becomes overriding, then maybe separate
photography field excursions would
become necessary.

Books

Designing Wildlife Journals - Joe
McDonald. This book I own and it is
excellent.

Nikon Guide to Wildlife Photography - B.
‘Moose’ Peterson

How to Photograph Insects and Spiders -
Larry West with Julie Ridl. This book is
new and may not be in Australia yet.
Landscape Photography - Kodak

The Backpackers Photography
Handbook - Charles Campbell

Equipment

These days technology has made life
much simpler with auto-flashes, flash
meters, auto-exposure and auto-focus
(sometimes useful) though beware - the
systems can be fooled. Many people still

'2 Cityview Rd, Nth Balwyn, Victoria 3104.

prefer a lot of the manual systems.

Automatic cameras with zoom and
macro (fixed lens) - useful for scenery and
some close-ups ie groups of flowers geo-
logical features and larger animals.

Manual or Automatic cameras (prefer-
ably with manual override) with inter-
changeable lenses. These can be used for
any subject, depending on the lenses you
have:

wide angle lens - \andscape and illustra-
tive;

standard lens - landscape, people, large
animals and objects;

macro lens 50mm - all purpose close up;

macro lens 100mm - great for close ups
without getting too close (like snakes);

telephoto lenses - animals, birds, peo-
ple, landscapes, features etc.
Useful extras - Tripod, flashes, Flash
metre, Extension tubes or diopters, micro-
scope attachments, lens hood are a few of
the useful extras, though they will depend
on your exact field and degree of interest.

Clubs and societies

Local Camera groups for general pho-
tography.

Field Naturalist groups for special
interest photography. The level of infor-
mation and help available will depend on
who is active in each group. Otherwise
these will provide the opportunity and
subject matter for experimentation.

Journals
Nature Photograher
Outdoor Photographer
Australian Camera
Camera and Darkroom
Darkroom Techniques and Creative
Photography

Enquiries
Wendy Clark, 2 Cityview Rd, North Balwyn,
Victoria 3104. Tel: 9859 8091.

Arthur Farnworth, 47 The Boulevarde,
Doncaster, Victoria 3108. Tel: 9848 2229.

The Victorian Naturalist

Book Reviews

Saving a Continent. Towards a Sustainable Future

by David Smith

Publisher: University of New South Wales Press, Sydney, 1994.
185pp. RRP $29.95 (sb)

This is a book about Australia and its
biota and environments. It covers a diverse
range of topics, not only providing a back-
ground to the evolutionary history of
Australian landforms, animals and plants,
but also the environmental threats facing
our biodiversity, and some of the success-
es in overcoming the devastating problems
of overpopulation and over-exploitation of
resources,

Many naturalists will fondly remember
the ABC television series Nature of
Australia which provided the basis for the
book’s first edition; it was originally pub-
lished in 1990 as A Continent in Crisis.
The new version has a much more opti-
mistic title and as the back cover notes
"Australia’s investment in environmental
research is starting to pay off: a great
many Australians are working at solving
the problems and are achieving notable
successes. In a very real sense Australian
research is leading the world towards solv-
ing the problems of overpopulation and
overexploitation of resources. The key to
achieving true ecological sustainability is
to redefine the goals of society by substi-
tuting a model that incorporates two vital
elements missing from current economi-
cally dominated approaches - long-term
strategic thinking and concern for social
well-being.’

On reading the scope and aims of the
book, I immediately had two concerns:

- how can a book of 185 pages possibly
hope to cover such a range of topics in an
informative way?

- will this simply be another product
which comforts us saying that all is well
and there is no need to worry about an
environmental crisis (rather like US econ-
omist Julian Simon who claims we now
have the technology to overcome all our
problems!)

Vol. 113 (1) 1996

My two concerns have indeed been
allayed! Amazingly, the book treats the
description of our land, its environments
and its flora and fauna in a highly enter-
taining, yet very informative fashion. The
writing is clear, well-presented and techni-
cally sound. Smith’s scientific training and
expertise shines through as he dispenses
with the pseudo-scientific values of GAIA
and the positively unscientific creationists.
The examples he uses are up-to-date, topi-
cal and well chosen.

Whereas the first half of the book sets
the scene describing Australia’s geological
and evolutionary history, and some adap-
tations and diversity of our flora and
fauna, it is the second component which is
so relevant. Here Smith addresses some of
the difficulties facing our continent, e.g.
land degradation through overclearing,
introduced species and overpopulation.
His philosophy is not completely that of
'she’ll be right' - the examples used to
illustrate the back cover’s 'notable suc-
cesses’ are used sensitively to show just
what can be done provided we have a
change of political and philosophical out-
look. The overall impression I came away
with was a feeling that there are ways
which can help in solving some of our
problems, but change will only occur if we
are willing to think differently and to shift
our collective mindsets away from policies
designed to maximise immediate econom-
ic gains at the expense of long term eco-
logical sustainability.

Other good features of the book are its
32 colour plates (probably many derived
from the filming of Nature of Australia),
the inclusion of a glossary (fairly neces-
sary for those with a weak scientific back-
ground) and the inclusion of valuable
tables and graphs from scientific articles
which have been included in a reference

Book Reviews

list. Students will find the inclusion of so
much data very valuable.

If I was to make a criticism it would
have to be the degree of scientific detail.
Coming from a practising scientist, this
criticism may seem somewhat odd.
However, I really wonder whether lay
readers need to know about the life cycle
of a moss, the digestive anatomy of the
Koala or the microstructure of the
Platypus electroreceptor? On occasions I
almost had the impression some technical
figures were included to make the book
seem more authoritative, when it may sim-
ply have the effect of turning away readers
who are unfamiliar with scientific jargon.

To whom would this book appeal?
Certainly naturalists with an interest in the
origins and diversity of our biota, but
especially those interested in its future,
This would also be an ideal book for first
year tertiary environmental science and
biology students at university who have a
particular interest in flora and fauna man-
agement. A good value book, well worth
reading!

Robert L. Wallis
School of Aquatic Science & Natural
Resources Management, Deakin
University - Rusden Campus, Clayton,
Vic 3168.

The Dingo in Australia and Asia

by Laurie Corbett

Publisher: University of New South Wales Press, Sydney 1995,
Softcover, 200 pp, RRP $24.95

This publication is the latest in the
University of NSW’s ‘Australian Natural
History’ series, a collection of books
each designed to give a readable but high-
ly accurate picture of a particular
Australian animal.

Laurie Corbett is a CSIRO zoologist of
long standing and I am delighted that he
has put pen to paper to produce this very
readable account of the Dingo. Corbett is
undeniably ‘Mr. Dingo’ and he has spent
the greater part of a scientific career span-
ning 30 years in studying the animal. I am
also particularly pleased to note that the
book is dedicated to the late Geoff
Douglas, former Chairman of the Vermin
and Noxious Weeds Destruction Board in
Victoria and a friend and mentor of both
Laurie and myself.

Corbett’s description generally follows
a logical sequence and begins with an
account of the origin, ancestry and distrib-
ution of the animal, This will provide the
first shock to most lay readers because

most of us were brought up with the
notion that the dingo is ‘Australia’s native
dog’. In fact, the animal is found over vast
areas of Asia and we have no real claim to
sole ownership. Ample evidence for this
is provided in the book,

The second chapter, dealing with meth-
ods of studying dingoes is, in my view,
badly placed and would have been better
situated as one of the Appendices.
Nonetheless, this is a useful account and,
if for no other reason, demonstrates that
an enormous amount of time and effort
has been dedicated to the study of this
animal throughout most of its range in
Australia, This includes not only the work
of Corbett and his CSIRO colleagues, but
a very large and comprehensive study of
the animal in WA by Peter Thompson of
the Agriculture Protection Board.

Then follows a chapter on the charac-
teristics and identity of the animal.
Together with the final chapter on the
future of expatriate dingoes, this is likely

The Victorian Naturalist

| Book Reviews

to raise the ire of the various dingo breed-
ing and dingo protection societies
throughout Australia each of which has a
view on what is a dingo. Here, Corbett
gathers together a good deal of careful
| observation and study to justify the cur-
}| rent scientific name of the animal - Canis
lupus dingo. This tells us that the animal
is a single subspecies of the grey wolf.
| Furthermore, dingo populations are uni-
form throughout their huge distribution in
Asia and Australia. This does not rule out
the existence of regionally distinct popu-
lations which may represent subspecies.

There follows a series of chapters on
the basic biology of the Dingo. These
cover breeding, social behaviour, diet, and
population dynamics, They will be useful
for the student and casual reader alike
although, for the latter, much of the infor-
mation will be too complex. This applies
particularly to some of the figures and
graphs which I found a little too technical.
Spectrographs of howls, for instance, are a
little difficult to translate into real
sounds! The information varies from
highly detailed accounts of social interac-
tions etc. in small captive colonies to
more general accounts of general biology
of the animal in the wild.

Of particular interest to many readers
will be the chapter headed ‘Predator-prey
Interactions’. This, after all, is the reason
| why the dingo has been afforded the sta-
tus of ‘vermin’ in most States and why so
much money has been spent on dingo
contro] and on the erection and mainte-
| nance of dingo fences. In this chapter, I
feel that the author has not really done
justice to the topic of dingo predation on
sheep. While case studies are provided in
the case of cattle predation, sheep losses
are dismissed in a mere half page or so.
| Victoria and South Australia still spend
considerable sums of money to protect
their sheeplands from the depredation’s of
dingoes and some better indication of the
extent of the damage and of control mea-
) sures used would have been in order.
| Electric fencing, for instance is now being
used by a number of pastoralists but this
is not mentioned.

The final chapter heading, “The Future
of Expatriate Dingoes’ is a nice touch and

| Vol. 113 (1) 1996

sets the scene for the following discus-
sion. The author believes that in the more
heavily settled areas, hybridisation is
increasing so that the ‘pure’ Dingo is a
vanishing breed. This conclusion is not
fully shared by some other researchers,
notably Jones (1990 Australian Wildlife
Research 17: 69-81) but such differences
in interpretation are to be expected
when dealing with an animal whose mor-
phology is variable over its range. I am
pleased to see that the author has politely
but firmly put paid to the idea of main-
taining ‘pure’ dingoes by keeping them as
pets etc.

There is a series of 21 colour plates in
the centre of the book which illustrate,
amongst other things, morphological
variations of the animal. | was particularly
impressed by the photo of a dog abattoir
in Thailand for it amply demonstrates that
one person’s mate is another person’s
meal! It also illustrates Corbett’s dedica-
tion to his task.

In conclusion, this is a very readable
and interesting account of a fairly “politi-
cal” animal. From time to time the authors
laconic style and humour (for which he is
well known), peep through and add to the
readability. If I were to pick one major
failing, it would be the fact that the main
body of the text is not referenced so that
the reader is unaware as to the origin of
the particular subject matter being dis-
cussed. This is a great pity because the
serious student will not easily find the
original research paper or book reference
being used. Also, it tends to give the
impression that all of the subject matter is
drawn from the author’s own work. This
is not so. Notwithstanding this, no-one
could deny the author’s knowledge of his
subject, He has, over the years risked life
and limb in remote corners of Asia study-
ing his subject. This book will be a very
useful contribution to our understanding
of the Dingo in Australia and elsewhere in

the world.

Brian J. Coman

Animal Control Technologies of Australia
1/56-60 Export Drive, Brooklyn, Victoria 3025

Book Reviews

Wildlife of the Australian Snow-country

by Ken Green and William Osborne

Publisher: Reed Books, Chatswood, 1994
200pp. RRP 39.95.

This is a book about animals that live in
Australian habitats which are subjected to
a seasonal cover of snow. It rightly points
out that although such habitats occupy a
tiny area of Australia, alpine and sub-
alpine habitats nonetheless support a var-
ied and interesting fauna which has only
recenly begun to be studied scientifically.

One of the book’s great strengths is its
stunning photography. Indeed, I suspect
the publishers may well have toyed with
the notion of making this a ‘coffee-table’
publication instead of a scientific account,
on the basis of the photos alone.

Clearly the authors have a great knowl-
edge and interest in these high altitude
environments and their fauna. With the
wealth of excellent natural history books
around at present, | must admit I was look-
ing forward to an enthralling and stimulat-
ing written account to match the superb
visual presentation. Unfortunately, the
writing is quite laboured at times and pre-
sented in a dry, scientifically sterile man-
ner which I am sure could have been made
more interesting. For instance, | am cer-
tain more stimulating prose could have
been found for:

*..in Australia it is the snow rather than
the altitude which determines the reactions
of many of the animals living in the higher
mountains. It is this theme that attracted
the authors to this topic and it is one which
will recur throughout this book.’

Indeed, I suspect one of the faults of the
book is that the authors do treat it as a sci-
entific work, rather than one of natural
history imbued with science (a la David

Attenborough). The first chapter, although
technically very sound and authoritative,
is far too text book oriented in its
approach and would certainly turn away
‘amateur naturalists’ for whom the book is
written. The authors try, in fact, to pitch
the work at ‘amateurs and specialists
alike’, and rather patronisingly apologize
for the need to use scientific names, the
implication being presumably that natural-
ists would be confused by them. In my
experience, naturalists often have a greater
knowledge of a wider list of scientific
names than the so called experts!

Once the book leaves the rather dry
introduction which describes the physical
aspects of the environment, there is a
marked improvement when we meet the
fauna themselves. Here the authors’ expe-
rience and knowledge shines through as
they describe aspects of the habitats our
alpine animals use and behavioural adap-
tations to such a harsh environment. A
glossary and excellent reference list are
good aids which have been included. The
two chapters on insects and other inverte-
brates are an added bonus - so often these
important groups are ignored, usually
because so little is known about them.

A few minor problems should also be
mentioned, The authors claim bats
“arrived in Australia from Asia about 15
million years ago..”. Most mammalogists
have been aware for some time that fossil
bats have been known from Murgon in
southern Queensland which are some 55
million years old and certainly 25 million
year old bats have been described from

The Victorian Naturalist —

Book Reviews

Riversleigh. The use of references has
been somewhat selective; some important
refernces have been omitted for a couple
of the species accounts. The discussion of
over-wintering strategies ignores daily tor-
por (the authors believe mammals either
hibernate or remain active). Such an omis-
sion is fairly critical in the extensive dis-
cussion of competition between the two
species of Antechinus.

I suspect some editorial changes have
altered the placement of Figures and
Tables to suit spacing requirements with
little thought to where the material is
referred in the text. Early on some pho-
tographs refer to “Main Range’ but it is
some time before the reader is made aware

‘Kangaroos’ is the tenth and latest book
jin the Australian Natural History Series
published by University of New South
Wales Press. Previous books have cov-
ered species such as the platypus, koala,
wombat, dingo, lyrebird and goannas, as
well as the lesser-known mountain pygmy
possum. Now the archetypal Australian
mammals, the kangaroos, have joined the
stable. The aim of the series is to make
wildlife research accessible to a lay audi-
ence. The series has largely been success-
ful, and the first book ("The Platypus’ by
‘Tom Grant) remains a model of how to
‘convey scientific information to the inter-
‘ested but non-technical reader.

There have been surprisingly few books
about kangaroos, aside from an assort-
ment of photographic compilations. Frith
and Calaby’s classic, ‘Kangaroos’, was
published as long ago as 1969. It reported
the first ecological research, conducted

Vol. 113 (1) 1996

of its location. The discussion on the
genus Kosciuscola occurs on p. 152, but
the relevant Table does not appear until p.
171.

These problems aside, I believe the
book serves a very useful purpose in intro-
ducing readers to the Australian alpine
fauna - its diversity, history and adapta-
tions. The photography is excellent and
the factual information in the many tables
and figures most useful.

Robert L. Wallis
School of Aquatic Science and Natural
Resources Management, Deakin Univer-
sity - Rusden Campus, Clayton, Vic 3168,

Kangaroos. The Biology of the Largest Marsupials

by Terence J. Dawson
Publisher: University of New South Wales Press
RRP $25.95

mainly by CSIRO, on free-ranging kanga-
roos in the Australian arid zone. The next
major contribution was ‘Kangaroos. Their
Ecology and Management in the Sheep
Rangelands of Australia’ (edited by
Caughley, Shepherd and Short), which
was a detailed study of kangaroos as part
of grazing system in Kinchega National
Park near Broken Hill. This was followed
by ‘Kangaroos, Wallabies and Rat-kan-
garoos’ (edited by Grigg, Hume and
Jarman), which was a valuable compendi-
um of the burgeoning research in the 20
years after Frith and Calaby, but as a col-
lection of scientific papers was not very
accessible to the general reader, and with
a price tag of $148 was prohibitively
expensive. Terry Dawson's new book has
been long-awaited,

‘Kangaroos’ covers most topics that
would be expected. There are chapters on
classification of kangaroos, social organi-

Book Reviews

sation, population dynamics, reproduction,
life history, feeding, ecophysiology and
interactions with aboriginal and European
humans. Presented in this order they seem
a little disjointed, and repetition occurs in
some places, for example the observation
of 12 Black Wallaroos feeding together
occurs twice (p. 24, 35) and the details of
birth (p.69) are summarised in a subse-
quent chapter (p. 79). A more traditional
approach would have been to deal with the
workings of individual kangaroos, then
their relationships with other members of
their species and ultimately their interac-
tions with humans.

| enjoyed most the chapter on environ-
mental physiology. This is Dawson’s
research speciality and it shows. He nicely
outlines the immense problems faced by
the kangaroos as- they juggle temperature
and water requirements in the extremes of
the arid zone, and the elegant solutions
that have evolved. Some other chapters do
not reach the same standard, This is most
evident in the chapter on social organisa-
tion. There are generalisations that can be
made about the social organisation of kan-
garoos, which at times can be disconcert-
ingly fluid, but these are not drawn out
clearly. In particular, the outline of social
organisation of the Eastern Grey Kangaroo
would have benefited by the inclusion of
some of the work of Peter Jarman and his
colleagues at the University of New
England, as featured in the excellent ABC
television program ‘Faces in the Mob’.

There are a few omissions from the
book. Readers of The Victorian Naturalist
would expect to be told that the Eastern
Grey and Western Grey Kangaroos over-
lap in central and western Victoria and
south-eastern South Australia, as well as
semi arid areas of New South Wales and
South-western Queensland as stated on
p.12. Diseases of kangaroo are discussed
(pp. 59-60), but-there was obviously not
enough lead time to cover the recent epi-
demic of Choroid Blindness Syndrome
that has affected many kangaroo popula-
tions in New South Wales, Victoria and
South Australia. Dawson points out that

kangaroos are unique amongst large ani-
mals in getting around by hopping, and
covers the energetic benefits of this gait in
some detail, but fails to mention the
unique passive breathing system described
by Russell Baudinette at Flinders
University, whereby the viscera act as a
piston that bounces up and down with
each stride, giving even more energy say-
ings.

I detected few serious errors: Dawson
refers to the Family Macropodinae (pp. 4-
5) but Sub-family is the appropriate taxo-
nomic level, and the German word
Flehmen is miss-spelt twice on page 74.
The equations for estimating age from
molar index (p. 100) are unnecessarily
complex — a small table of equivalent
ages (in years) for a set of index values for
the three species would be far more user-
friendly.

‘Kangaroos’ has a strong focus on the
research done by Dawson and his col-
leagues at Fowler's Gap Station north of
Broken Hill. This represents both the
strength and the weakness of the book.
The book is strengthened by its personal
style and obvious familiarity with the ani-
mals, the environment and the researchers
working there. It is refreshing indeed to
tead Dawson’s acknowledgement (p. 120)
that, after more than 30 years of research,
he had only recently appreciated that the
efficiency of forearm licking to dissipate
heat is enhanced by kangaroos holding the
evaporative surface in the shade of their
bodies. The limitation of the personal
emphasis is that important research con-
ducted by others elsewhere is given less
attention. However, we then may be
immersed in too much detail.

The balance is about right. Terry
Dawson has produced a readable and
informative book on an intriguing group
of animals, Kangaroos deserves to sit on
your shelf alongside the others in the
Australian Natural History Series.

Graeme Coulson
Department of Zoology,University of Melbourne

The Victorian Naturalist

Book Reviews

The Fauna of Tasmania: Birds

by R.H. Green

Publisher: Potoroo Publishing, Launceston 1995.
RRP $14.95

This is a substantial and well-presented
soft-backed book comprising 170 pages of
informative text and 192 photographs of
Tasmanian birds. The photographs alone
constitute probably the most comprehen-
sive photographic record of Tasmanian
birds yet published. The quality of some
of the photographs is not good, but they do
represent a fairly full photographic record
of the birds which are likely to be
encountered in Tasmania.

This volume is in many ways a compan-
ion volume to Green's previous work
"Birds of Tasmania’ (1993) which lists
species, status and distribution of all
recorded Tasmanain birds. This latest
work, part 2 of his series on the fauna of
Tasmania, deals with each species in more
detail but in a more anecdotal manner than
in his previous work.

Before addressing the species them-
selves, there is a brief introductory section
on the origins of Tasmanian and another
on the special features of Tasmania and
its birds. here the reader will find listed the
12 endemic species and reference to
another 18 endemic sub-species, although
unfortunately these are not listed.

The main body of the book deals with
the various groups and families in taxo-
nomic order as Green presents information
on each species or group of species in
turn.

If the reader is expecting a field guide,
he/she will be disappointed. it is not for
use in the field and I believe it was never
intended to achieve that end. This book is
really much more a summary of some of
the vase amount of information Dr Green
has accumulated over his lifelong interest
in Tasmanian Wildlife, and in particular,
its birds. The book is festooned with
personal experience and anecdotal infor-
mation based on the author's broad
experience which comes through on every

| Vol. 113 (1) 1996

page and , as such, is a very interesting
read,

I found it refreshing to find some infor-
mation describing breeding habits of on
the majority of the species, information
which is often missing from modern bird
books. Similarly, the numerous references
to the habitats of birds clearly show that
this book has been written by a person
with a great reservoir of personal informa-
tion and very little has been ‘borrowed’
from other literature sources.

I fear the 'essay' form of the text will
somewhat devalue the lasting or long-term
useful value of the book as this format
does not make it an easy-to-use reference
work. I believe the presentation would
have been significantly improved in the
discussion of each species by having a
more formal section with sub-headings for
the various topics under review. However,
having said that it was probably the
authors’ intent to get away from a more
formal format.

I did miss a bibliography for major
works on Tasmanian birds. This would
have provided a valuable reference list for
serious birders.

This is a book aimed at the broader
community, more, I felt, for those with a
very general interest in birds. Whilst there
is a considerable amount of information
that this reviewer, for one, has not seen
published elsewhere, the presentation is
clearly aimed at the ‘generalist’. However,
this does not detract in any way from what
is a very valuable and interesting addition
to Tasmanian bird literature.

Peter Brown
Parks and Wildlife Service, Hobart, Tasmania 7001

Book Reviews

In Search of the Buttercup - A Ramble

by Frank Shepherd
Publisher: Private. RRP 29.95 (plus $5 postage).
Available from PO Box 484, Turramurra, NSW 2074

The title of this privately published, soft-
covered book on A4 paper, is a little mis-
leading. It’s not so much a ramble as an
expedition.

The author is a retired engineer who has
spent over a decade of his spare time in
travel and literature searches to resolve a
personal challenge. The challenge began
with two plants that he knew to be ‘butter-
cups’ but of very different appearance even
though growing together in the same habi-
tat.

The book has 250 pages, of which the
first 148 are a record of the author’s litera-
ture searches, both in Australia and abroad.
There are several sub-sections in this part
of the book dealing with the early expedi-
tions by European botanists to the southern
hemisphere, the botanists involved and the
people who collected for them. Because so
many Ranunculaceae are found at higher
altitudes, there is a section devoted to natu-
ralists in the mountains. Writers of books,
from John Hill, ‘Hortus Kewensis’, 1768,
and his successors, Carl Linnaeus, Banks,
Solander and Dryander with a new book of
the same name; Robert Brown, ‘Prodromus
Florae Novae Hollandiae’ of the early nine-
teenth century; and others up to the present
time, are given due acknowledgement.

Brief but informative sections on the his-
tory of botany, nomenclature, and the
importance of herbariums, both private and
public, are included. These are followed by
an essay on the history and importance of
botanic gardens, beginning with their con-
nection to medical studies in the sixteenth
and seventeenth centuries and including the
founding of the Melbourne Botanic
Gardens in 1846, This section of the book
concludes with a brief look at the geologi-
cal record and the world distribution of the
genus Ranunculaceae. Footnotes represent
a comprehensive bibliography,

The next hundred pages, dealing with the
Species, begin with a very useful glossary
of the terms used in the following descrip-
tions of forty-six species, which include

subspecies and varieties. Each is accompa-
nied by a standard description format from
the root structure to the floral parts, with
notes on habitat and the locations where
they were observed. Line drawings by the
author illustrate quite effectively the gener-
al appearance of each specimen, with addi-
tional details for many of them. All of the
twenty-two native species or varieties cur-
rently recognised in Victoria are included,
but none of the eight introduced species.
This could be seen as an unfortunate omis-
sion, aS in many cases they are the most
likely ones to be seen by the casual observ-
er, especially in the more settled areas.
Most of the introduced species are found
throughout Australia in one area or another.

The descriptions appear to be accurate in
detail, based mainly on those of the Flora of
New South Wales, and are in line with
those of current Victorian publications with
small variations in terminology.
Nomenclature is almost without exception
that in current use. One exception is the use
of R.. ligulatus where the current name is R,
millanii.

Distribution information is generally
restricted to the locations visited by the
author, and this would need to be supple-
mented by reference to other publications.

The observations and line drawings have
mainly been made in situ and reflect the
author’s travels in all States, and especially
the high country of New South Wales and
Tasmania. The book begins with a detailed
table of contents and concludes with a com-
prehensive index.

For an introduction to botanical history
and methodology, with particular reference
to the genus Ranunculaceae, the book
would appear to be good value at the price,
to members of the FNCV., of $29.95 (plus
$5 p. & p.), and is available from the author
at PO. Box 484, Turramurra, NSW., 2074.

R. J. Fletcher
4/48 Newport Rd, Clayton South, Victoria 3169

The Victorian Naturalist

Notice of the Annual General Meeting
The Annual General Meeting of The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria
will be held at 1 Gardenia Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, on

Sunday, 5 May 1996 at 2.00 pm

Agenda
1. To confirm the minutes of the previous Annual General Meeting
held on 10 April 1995
2. To receive and adopt the Annual Report for the year ended 31
December 1995
3. To receive and adopt the Financial Statements and associated
reports
4. To appoint Auditors (remuneration determined by Council)
5. To elect Members of Council
6. To elect Office Bearers
7. To consider, and if thought fit, to pass as special resolutions the following
resolutions:
a) That the Club, which is at present a company limited by guarantee, be autho-
rised to apply for incorporation under the Associations Incorporation Act 1981
b) That the Statement of Purposes circulated to the members at least three weeks
prior to the meeting be approved as a Statement of Purposes to apply from the
date of incorporation under the Associations Incorporation Act 1981
c) That the Rules circulated to the members at least three weeks prior to the meet-
ing be approved as the rules of the Association to apply from the date of incor-
por-ation under the Associations Incorporation Act 1981
8. Any other business of which proper notice has been given in accordance with the
Articles of Association
9. President’s Address

Election of Councillors and Office Bearers
All members of Council and Office Bearers retire annually but are
eligible for re-election. Nominations by two financial members of the Club are required for the fol-

lowing positions:

Council
President 2 Vice-Presidents Secretary
Treasurer Six other members

Office Bearers ;

Assistant Treasurer Editor (Field Nat News) Activities Coordinator

Editor s (The Victorian Naturalist) Excursion Secretary Publicity Officer

Sales Officer (The Victorian Naturalist) Book Sales Officer Conservation Coordinator
Librarian

Nomination and Proxy Forms a
Please carefully consider these positions and arrange a nomination for yourself and/or encourage

4 fellow member to be nominated. Nominations and Proxies should be in the hands of the Secretary
before the start of the Annual General Meeting. Nomination Forms and Proxy Forms are available
from the Honorary Secretary, Geoffrey Paterson on (03) 9571 6436 or from the FNCV Office.

By Order of the Council
Geoff Paterson (Honorary Secretary)
Notes p*,.
I. A member entitled to attend and vote at the meeting is entitled to appoint a proxy
the member. The proxy must be a member of the Club, ; a.
2. A special eeaoliston ie not passed unless it is approved by three quarters of the members voting in person or

by proxy.

to attend and vote instead of

The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria

Established 1880
In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria

OBJECTIVES: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect
Australian flora and fauna.
Membership is open to any person interested in natural history and includes
beginners as well as experienced naturalists.

Registered Office: FNCV, | Gardenia Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130. Phone/Fax (03)9877 9860

Patron
His Excellency, The Honourable Richard E, McGarvie, The Governor of Victoria

Key Office-Bearers June 1995
President: Professor ROBERT WALLIS, School of Aquatic Science and Natural Resources
Management, Deakin University (Rusden), Clayton, 3168. (03)9244 7278, Fax (03)9244 7403.
Hon. Secretary: Mr GEOFFREY PATERSON, 11 Olive Street, South Caulfield, 3162.
AH (03)9571 6436,
Hon. Treasurer: Mr ARNIS DZEDINS, PO Box 1000, Blind Bight, 3980. (059)987 996.
Subscription-Secretary: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, 3130, (03)9877 9860.
Editors, The Vic. Nat.: ED and PAT GREY, 8 Woona Court, Yailambie, 3085. (03)9435 9019.
Librarian: Mrs SHEILA HOUGHTON, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, 3130.
AH (054)28 4097.
Excursion Secretary: DOROTHY MAHLER. AH (03)9435 8408.
Sales Officer (The Victorian Naturalist); Mr D.E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East
Malvern, 3145. (03)9571 2427.
Book Sales: Dr ALAN PARKIN, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, 3130. AH (03)9850 2617.
Publicity: Miss MARGARET POTTER, 1/249 Highfield Road, Burwood, 3125. (03)9889 2779.
Programme Secretary/Newsletter Editor: Dr NOEL SCHLEIGER, | Astley Street, Montmorency,
3094, (03)9435 8408.

Group Secretaries
Botany: Mr JOHN EICHLER, 18 Bayview Crescent, Black Rock, 3143. (03)9598 9492.
Geology: Mr DOUG HARPER, 33 Victoria Crescent, Mont Albert, 3127. (03)9890 0913.
Fauna Survey: Ms FELICITY GARDE, 18 College Parade, Kew, 3101. (03)9818 4684.
Microscopical: Mr RAY POWER, 36 Schotters Road, Mernda, 3754. (03)9717 3511.

The Victorian Naturalist

All material for publication to The Editors, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130

MEMBERSHIP
Members receive The Victorian Naturalist and the monthly Field Nat News free. The Club
organises several monthly meetings (free to all) and excursions (transport costs may be charged).
Research work, including both botanical and fauna surveys, is being done at a number of locations
in Victoria, and all members are encouraged to participate.

SUBSCRIPTION RATES for 1996
(Subscriptions are due on 1 January.)
First Member
WlethOo litany ® Het ee 4, cc tetaeceeeysiazisarssacsdaasageraartabseadecaudassiace HUHEM eagLAsPr oalasthttaedes :
Concessional (pensioner/student/unemployed) ....
Country (more than 50km from GPO)
Junior (under 18)

Additional Members

EU re esc eetlaay eats serv dlhreeae .
Junior

Institutional

Australian Institutions
Overseas Institutions
Schools/Clubs

Printed by Brown Prior Anderson, 5 Evans Street Burwood, Victoria 3125 a

| The
Victorian

Nat

Volume 113 (2) 1996

| ip io :
CF fe Pdr 4 oe He is
ae H

(- 9 MAY 1996 )

Published by The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria
since 1884

“willl
| 36781

Our New Home

Official Opening
Sunday, 7 July, 2 pm

This will be the official opening of our new home at
| Gardenia Street, Blackburn.

The well-known naturalist and broadcaster Alan Reid will be the key speaker. He
will talk about the role of Natural History in creating an environmentally aware
community. This will lead into a discussion of the Club’s role and how it can play
its part in the future.

Entry is free and refreshments will be served

We look forward to a bumper roll-up of members and friends

New Members

The Council of the FNCV extends a warm welcome to the following new members.
Ms Linda Archbold Doncaster East Ms Debora Medcalfe and

Ms Barbara Archer Esperance Mr Greg Dunmill Diamond Creek
Ms Lisa Booth Thornbury Ms Josephine Milne _ Pearcedale

Ms Linda Condon Hawthorn Ms Linda Moon Cranbourne North
Ms Suzanne Holmes — Clayton North Ms K.A. Pantzopoulos Point Cook

Mr Rob Jones Glen Waverley Ms Lisa Pittle Northcote

Mr Clinton Le Page Heidelberg Heights Ms Jill Plowright Surrey Hills

Mr Robert and Mr John Rocke Box Hill

Mrs Mary Lukis East Ivanhoe Mrs Lynn Smith Mitcham

Mrs Deanna Marshall Mitcham Mr Martin and

Mr Gordon McKenzie Hawthorn Ms Natalie White Tatura

Club Badges

The Club has metal and embroidered cloth badges for sale. These are available from
the office or at general FNCV meetings

metal badges ........... $4.50
cloth badges ............ $2.50

Support and advertise your club by wearing one of our badges

| The
Victorian
Naturalist

Volume 113 (2) 1996 April

Editors: Ed and Pat Grey

Index to Volume 112, 1995 is in the centre of this issue
Tribute James Hamlyn Willis, 1910-1995, by Margaret Corrick............ 44

Research Reports Secondary Juvenile Period and Community Recovery of a
Themeda Triandra Grassland, by J.W. Morgan. ....ccceceseseeeees 47
Fauna of the Grantville Gravel Reserve with Reference to
Vegetation and Conservation Significance,

BY ASE RUT ANG JEV AV SOVIET, Soyer tenes eset asesoeccnseo caeesdiee teeeattets 58
Naturalist Notes | Middle Yarra Timelines: Late Summer

by G. Jameson, Naturalist in Residence .....ccccccieiereeieiee 67

An Ibis Rookery and Powerful Owls, by Ellen Lyndon............. 70

An Inlet Lost - An Inlet Regained, by Arthur Farnworth .......... 71

Anointment of a Naturalist, by Bob Taylor ....cccccceseeesreeieees 76
How to bea The Field Notebook - Recording your Observations,
Field Naturalist — Dy Alan Reid .....scscescscsssesseteeeeeteseeseensesseneneaeneenenneanenenaneesensgias 75
Software Review The Bird-Book Book (CD-Room), by Ken Simpson,

reviewer SIMON BeNNEH ..ecccccccccseeeecseseseseeseesetetsetensenesseereneeeeneaes 77
Book Reviews The You Yangs Range, by Trevor Pescott,

reviewer Noel Schleiger.....scccccccecesetreserseesenetereeeneess peseeteeneee 74

Wilsons Promontory, Marine & National Park Victoria,

by Geoff Wescott, reviewer David Meagher ....cccccccccerireeccsees

ISSN 0042-5184
Cover: Jim Willis (right) chatting to John Mitchell on an FNCV tour of the Volcanoes of
South-western Victoria, March 1993,(see page 44)

Tribute

James Hamlyn Willis
1910-1995

Margaret Corrick'

With the sudden death of James Hamlyn
Willis D. Sc., AM on 10 November 1995
The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria lost
one of its long-standing and most revered
members, known to us all simply as Jim.
Above all, those whose lives had touched
Jim in any way, however small, felt that
they had lost a friend. His cheerful person-
ality, friendly greetings and wise counsel
illuminated and enriched any gathering in
which he participated.

Jim was born in Oakleigh on 28 January
1910, the second son of Benjamin James
Willis, then a teller in the Bank of
Australasia (now the ANZ Bank) at
Yarram. In 1913 Benjamin Willis was
promoted to manage the bank’s branch in
Stanley, Tasmania, where Jim had his
early schooling, first from his father and
then at the local primary school. In 1924,
at the age of fourteen, Jim came to
Melbourne to attend Melbourne High
School, After matriculating in 1927 he
was awarded a three year scholarship to
the Victorian School of Forestry at
Creswick, After receiving his Diploma in
1930 he was posted back to the Creswick
district as a cadet Field Officer with the
Forests Commission.

It was in Creswick that Jim met his
future wife Mavis Howie. During October
1932 Jim was appointed Assistant Forest
Officer at Belgrave and a year later, on 13
October 1933, he and Mavis were married
and went to live at Cockatoo.

Jim was elected a country member of
The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria in
December 1932 and in April 1934 his first
papers appeared in The Victorian
Naturalist. Entitled ‘The Agaricaceae or
Gilled Fungi’, ‘Beef Steak’, ‘Punk’ and
‘Blackfellows Bread’ these papers filled
the whole of Part 12 of Volume 50 and
aroused a great deal of interest. A note in
the July 1934 issue refers to the demand
for reprints of the April issue; more than

' 7 Glenluss Street, Balwyn, Victoria 3103

600 copies were required to fill orders
from Melbourne Teachers Training
College and Melbourne University Botany
School, as well as orders from overseas
institutions. These papers formed the basis
of a book entitled Victorian Fungi pub-
lished by the Club in 1941. It was reprint-
ed in 1950 with the new title of Victorian
Toadstools and Mushrooms. Further
reprints appeared in 1957 and 1963.

Jim led his first Club excursion on 30
May 1934 - a ‘Fungus Foray’ to Cockatoo
Creek (June 1934, The Victorian Naturalist
51, 45-48). This was the first of many such
excursions and the ‘Fungus Foray’ became
a regular event in the Club’s calendar.

In 1937 Jim negotiated a transfer from
the Forests Commision ‘to the Lands
Department and in October 1937 began
his distinguished career with! ‘the Royal
Botanic Gardens and National Herbarium
which lasted until his retirement in 1972
when he held the position of Assistant
Government Botanist and Acting Director
of the Royal Botanic’ Gardens and
National Herbarium.

Shortly after Jim began work. in
Melbourne the Willis family moved to
Brighton and Jim commenced part-time
study at Mebourne University, graduating
in April 1940 with the degree of B. Sc.
(Hons.). The move to Melbourne enabled
Jim to take a more active part in the Club.
On 20 November 1937 he led his first gen-
eral excursion to the Frankston area with
Ethel McLennan as joint leader (Jan. 1938,
The Victorian Naturalist 54, 144) and in July
1938 he gave his first talk to the Club
entitled ‘The Alluring World of Fungi’,
illustrated ‘by many colourful lantern
slides and projections by the epidiascope’.
A large collection of fungi was also
displayed contributed by J.H. Willis,
H.C.E. Stewart and A.A. Brunton
(July 1938, The Victorian Naturalist 55, 38).

Following his retirement in 1972 Jim
was able to travel more widely and many

The Victorian Naturalist

Tribute

of these trips became the subject of talks
illustrated with his slides. The lecture hall
was always well filled on these occasions
and the audience was assured of hearing
well chosen words, clearly spoken and
audible throughout the hall without ampli-
fication. Apart from speaking at Club
meetings Jim was in constant demand as a
speaker on a wide variety of topics to
other groups and societies in Melbourne as
well as in country Victoria and interstate.
One of his last talks was delivered on 13
October 1986 to the Botany Group of the
Club, when he spoke for one and a half
hours on his trip to China.

Jim held several official positions in the
Club; the first as a Committee member in
1941-43; Council member 1974-76; Vice-
President 1944, 1971-72 and 1973-74;
acting Editor of The Victorian Naturalist
for 6 months from July 1945, Assistant
Editor 1947-48 and Editor 1948-51. He
was a member of the Plant Names Sub-
Committee from 1943 and its Secretary
1948-1957 and a member of the Natural
History Medallion Award Committee in
the 1960’s and again in 1973-76.

A master of the written as well as the
spoken word, Jim contributed articles on a
variety of subjects to The Victorian
Naturalist as well as to numerous
Australian and overseas journals and local
suburban publications. Apart from botani-
cal subjects Jim was a knowledgeable
historian and wrote widely about carly
Australian explorers and botanists. His
published works numbered over 800
including 452 individual botanical and
biographical entries in The Australian
Encyclopedia (1958). Over 200 of his
papers appeared in The Victorian
Naturalist and he took a modest pride in
having published more papers there than
anyone else. In the first 21 years after
moving to Melbourne he published 150
papers of which all but 25 appeared in The
Victorian Naturalist.

As well as Victorian Toadstools and
Mushrooms Jim was author or co-author
of three other books and published major
revisions of two others. A Handbook to
Plants in Victoria Vol.1 (1962), 2nd edn.
(1973) and Volume 2 (1972) were land-

Vol. 113 (2) 1996

marks in his publishing career. They were
the first comprehensive publications on
the Victorian flora since A.J. Ewart's long
outdated Flora of Victoria (1931). The
two handbooks formed the major part of
his: thesis presented to Melbourne
University for which he received a
Doctorate of Science in 1974. In 1968
Flowers and Plants of Victoria (in collab-
oration with R. Cochrane, E, Rotherham
and B. Fuhrer) was published in associa-
tion with the Field Naturalists Club of
Victoria. The captions to the 543 plates in
the book were entirely Jim’s work. The
royalties from the book made a major
contribution to the Club’s publishing fund.
In 1975, after his retirement, Jim revised
Ferns of Victoria and Tasmania by N.A.
Wakefield, another Club publication. In
1982 Shrubs and trees for Australian
Gardens by the late E.E. Lord, revised 5th
edn, by J.H. Willis was published,

Jim was a great lover of nature in all its
aspects, he delighted in any activity which
took him outdoors and into the country-
side. He was a tireless walker and even in
the city he never lost an opportunity of
walking through the parks. If business
took him from the Herbarium to the City
he preferred to walk through the parks
rather than take a tram. He participated in
an enormous range of botanical and
exploratory trips throughout Victoria and
various parts of every Australian state, to
New Guinea and New Zealand. After his
retirement he travelled with Mavis in
Great Britain, Europe, Iceland and China,
At the age of 81 he made a memorable trip
to Borneo where he completed the arduous
walk almost to the summit of Mt.
Kinabalu. He was very disappointed that,
due to shortness of breath, he was
restrained from attempting the last short,
rocky scramble to the summit.

Jim never drove a car, he did his
forestry work first by bicycle and later on
horse back. He continued to ride his
bicycle to work from Brighton to the
Herbarium until 1960 when Mavis became
worried about his safety in the increasing
traffic. The lack of a car did not affect his
ability to get out on bush trips; to take Jim
as passenger was a sought after pleasure;

Tribute

his wide knowledge of history and local
history as well as botany made him a most
entertaining and informative passenger.

In the early 1980's some of the more
active Club members felt the need for
botanical and general interest weekend
camps which would provide more oppor-
tunity for walking and exploring than was
available on the usual day trips by car or
bus. At first these (Five Good Camp-outs,
1985, The Victorian Naturalist 102, 5,
167-177). were organised by John Milligan
and subsequently by Will Ashburner, Jim,
often accompanied by Mavis, was an
enthusiastic participant. Usually the first
astir in the mornings he would have
returned by breakfast time with a little bag
of botanical specimens to be discussed and
usually pressed for donation to the
Herbarium. Jim always travelled with
a small bundle of newspaper and, as a
passenger mindful of space limits in a
companion’s car, would often travel
sitting on his bundle of pressings. His
collecting notes were always clearly
written in his beautiful handwriting on the
smallest scraps of recycled paper; as a true
conservationist nothing was wasted and it
is doubtful if a search of his many collec-
tions in the Herbarium would reveal that
he ever used new paper for his notes. Jim
also had a keen sense of smell and taste
and both were often employed as an aid to
identification of plants.

Jim had a wide range of hobbies and
interests apart from botany; he was an avid
collector of almost anything unusual or
interesting, including books, minerals,
shells, coins and postage stamps featuring
plant life. He was an accomplished pianist
and had a fine baritone voice. He sang in
the choir and was a local preacher with the
Methodist Church (now the Uniting
Church) near his home in Brighton. He
spoke French and German and, with the
aid of a dictionary and elementary gram-
mar taught himself Latin and Welsh. He
also had some knowledge of Icelandic.

The name of James Hamlyn Willis is
perpetuated in eight plants named after
him:

Acacia jamesiana Maslin (from Great
_ Victoria Desert to Yalgoo and Wiluna);
Epilobium willisii Raven and Engelhorn

(from sub-alpine Victoria and

Tasmania);

Eucalyptus willisii Ladiges, Humphries
and Brooker (from SA and Victoria);
Goodenia willisiana Carolin (from SA,

NSW and Victoria);

Grevillea willisii R.V. Smith and

McGillivray (from north-east Victoria).
Oleanites willisii 1. Cookson (a fossil olive

from Yallourn);

Pottia willisii G.O.K. Sainsbury (a moss
from Standley Chasm, NT), and
Steccherinum willisii M. Geesteranus

(a hydnoid fungus from Lamington

National Park, Queensland).

Jim himself described 64 plant species,
two thirds of these as sole author, several
new varieties and made many new combi-
nations. In 1958-9 Jim held the position of
Australian Botanical Liaison Officer at
Kew. In 1964 he was awarded the
Australian Natural History Medallion and
in 1973 the Royal Society of Victoria
Silver Medal for research. In 1974 the
Faculty of Science, Monash University
appointed him an Honorary Fellow and in
1976 he was appointed a Fellow of the
Linnaean Society of London. In June 1995
he became a Member of the Order of
Australia.

Jim is survived by his wife Mavis, two
sons, three daughters, 15 grandchildren
and four great-grandsons.

The breadth and depth of Jim’s scien-
tific achievements place him in the front
rank of contemporary botanists; he was to
the National Herbarium this century what
Mueller was in the last, but his many
friends and colleagues will remember him
most for the simple things; his cheerful
personality, welcoming smile and sincere
greeting which made one feel a person of
value. From eminent scientist to young
student, all who sought his advice or
help received the same courtesy. With his
passing we have lost a true friend*,

*A more detailed biographical sketch of Jim’s
life and a list of publications was published in
1975 Muelleria 3 (2), 69-88. An updated list of
publications will appear in the 1997 issue of
Muelleria.

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

‘

Secondary Juvenile Period and Community Recovery
following Late-Spring Burning of a
Kangaroo Grass Themeda triandra Grassland

J.W. Morgan!
Abstract
The vegetative regeneration, flowering and community recove /

Themeda triandra grassland was followed for one oti itbes a Pa ahi ar is Tit as
burning was compared to that observed in a grassland that had been burnt six months fevipurt in
autumn. All perennial species present pre-fire were found resprouting in the post-fire eaewvarien:
Four species flowered prolifically in the summer following spring burning whereas 63% of all
perennial species produced zero or few flowers in the same period. This may favour the regenera-
tion by seed of some species over others, although the effect may be moderated by the regeneration
strategy of the species concerned (i.e, seedling versus vegetative). The secondary juvenile period is
extremely short for most species. One year after spring burning, all perennial species other than
Lomandra micrantha had flowered. Themeda cover recovered quickly but differences remained at
one year between the spring- and autumn-burnt grasslands. The effect of a late-spring fire on the
grassland flora is probably minimal from a long-term ecological perspective when compared to the
effects of fires in other ecosystems. Any effect of burning at this time may be magnified as the
frequency of burning increases. Those species with increased post-fire flowering may be favoured
whilst susceptible life stages (e.g. seedlings) may be disadvantaged by burns at this time. (The

Victorian Naturalist 113, 47-57).

Introduction

Great uncertainty exists about the opti-
mum timing of burning in Kangaroo Grass
Themeda triandra grasslands. Some of
this apprehension is probably due to the
differing management objectives of grass-
land fires. On the one hand, fire is crucial
to the maintenance of species diversity by
preventing the dominant grasses from out-
competing smaller, intertussock forbs
(Stuwe and Parsons 1977, McDougall
1989). On the other hand, burning is sug-
gested as a potential means of favouring
native over exotic species in invaded rem-
nants. Stuwe (1986), for instance, postu-
lated that spring burning may favour
native perennial species over exotic annual
species by preventing seed set in the annu-
al grasses, thereby reducing the potential
for recruitment in subsequent years.
Annual spring burning prior to seed shed
for five to seven years may be necessary,
however, to eliminate these species from
grasslands (Hitchmough ef al. 1994). Late-
autumn burning has been shown to favour
germinating annual grasses at a time when
the summer-growing Themeda is unlikely
to provide much competition (Lunt 1990).

' School of Botany, La Trobe University, Bundoora
Victoria 3083

Vol. 113 (2) 1996

As such, late-spring burning in degraded
remnants has been recommended by
Stuwe (1986).

However, despite the importance of
burning, there is little empirical, or even
observational, evidence of its effects on
community functioning in Themeda grass-
lands other than the work of Groves
(1974), McDougall (1989) and Lunt
(1990; 1995), The debate on the optimum
season and frequency of burning cannot be
furthered until the effects of fire are more
widely documented.

One way to consider the effect of burn-
ing is to determine the time that it takes
for resprouting plants to flower after the
fire, i.e. secondary juvenile period,
(Johnson ef al. 1994), Lunt (1990, 1995)
has shown that many herbaceous grassland
species flower prolifically in the spring
after an autumn burn (six to nine months
after burning), presumably because the
fire occurs when most species are vegeta
tively dormant and precedes the normal
growth and flowering period for most
resprouting herbaceous species (i.e, WIn-
ter/spring). The effects of spring burning
at a time when most species are actively
growing or flowering, however, are large-
ly undocumented. Scarlett and Parsons

Research Reports

(1982) suspect that spring-flowering
Fabaceae may have been eliminated from
rail reserves that traditionally have been
burnt in spring/summer, although the high
frequency of burning (i.e. annual) may
have been more important than seasonal
effects (McDougall 1989).

Some information on the recovery of
the plant community following autumn
burning is available, albeit mostly from
grassland remnants that have a history of
grazing by domestic stock and infrequent
burning. Lunt (1990) found that all peren-
nial species at the Derrimut Grassland
Reserve regenerated vegetatively follow-
ing burning and only 19% of native
species recruited by seedlings. There were
no obligate seed regenerators present in
the native flora. Exotic annual grasses
such as Briza spp. and Vulpia bromoides
increased dramatically after this fire. Rates
of biomass accumulation suggest that pre-
fire biomass levels can return in these
grasslands within two to four years
(McDougall 1989) with considerable
regrowth occurring in late-spring when
Themeda triandra is actively growing
(Groves 1965; McDougall 1989). Morgan
and Rollason (1995) found that nine
months after an autumn burn in a species-
rich grassland, Themeda had recovered a
canopy cover of 43%.

A fire in the last week of November
1993 in a diverse Themeda grassland
provided the opportunity to observe and
document the effects of a late-spring fire,
This paper reports the post-burn flowering
responses of native and exotic species and
the rate of recovery of the community in
the year following spring burning, and
compares these features to those observed
in a grassland burnt in autumn, a time that
is usually considered the ‘norm’ for man-
agement burns in grasslands.

Methods
Study Sites

All studies were undertaken in grass-
land remnants on the Melbourne-Geelong
railway line. A feature of these rail reserve
remnants is that they have been burnt
regularly for fire protection and have been
protected from domestic stock grazing.

The two study sites were located in the
vicinity of the old Manor station (37°56°S,
144°35’E), approximately 35 km south-
west of Melbourne. The sites have been
previously described by Stuwe (1986),
McDougall (1987) and the Department of
Conservation and Environment (1990).
Average annual rainfall for the area is
540 mm.

Both remnants are on Quaternary basalt,
on flat to gently sloping terrain and are
dominated by Themeda triandra. The
community is part of the Keilor Plains
association described by Willis (1964).
The intertussock flora consists of a range
of forbs, dominated by species from the
Asteraceae. Four rare or threatened species
are recorded for the area: Comesperma
polygaloides, Pimelea spinescens,
Rutidosis leptorrhynchoides and Senecio
macrocarpus (Gullan et al. 1990). Exotic
annual grasses (e.g. Briza maxima, B.
minor, Vulpia bromoides and Aira spp.) at
November 1993 had a mean overlapping
cover of 18.5 + 2.3% (+ 1SE) (J. Morgan
unpubl. data).

The two remnants discussed in this paper
had the following characteristics:

(i) late November 1993 burnt grassland
(hereafter referred to as the ‘spring-burnt’
grassland). Prior to the fire, this remnant
had been unburnt for three years. Mean
biomass at the time of burning was 2600 +
250 kg/ha. Overlapping cover was 98.5%
and cover repetition was 6.83 + 0.28 (J.
Morgan unpubl. data).

No data exists for the spring fire event
which was undertaken for fuel reduction
purposes. Immediate post-fire biomass
was negligible indicating a thorough fire.
At the time of burning (29 November
1993), most annual grasses were flowering
or developing seed. Many native species
were also flowering, although Senecio
macrocarpus had flowered, shed seed and
had begun to die back to an underground
rootstock.

(ii) late April 1993 burnt grassland
(hereafter referred to as the ‘autumn-
burnt’ grassland). This grassland remnant,
approximately 3 km south-west of the
spring-burnt site, is included here for
comparison as it represents the time of

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports
burning usually undertaken in grasslands.
From casual observations of floristic com-
position, it is assumed to have had the
same characteristics as the above site prior
to being burnt.

No data exists for the autumn fire event
although casual observations again indi-
cate a thorough fire.

Regrowth Flowering

Following spring burning, observations
of regrowth and flowering were made
from January to May 1994. At each visit,
all perennial species were classified
according to the following response cate-
gories:

1) vegetative regrowth only - no post-
fire flowering within six months of burn-
ing.

2) flowering much less than expected
(from prior knowledge of the species) or
from that observed in the autumn-burnt
grassland.

3) flowering similar to that expected
or observed in the autumn-burnt grassland.

4) flowering much greater than
expected or observed in the autumn-burnt
grassland,

Observations of the spring-burnt grass-
land were also made at one year from
burning (October - December 1994) to
determine whether species that had
remained vegetative in the first summer
subsequently flowered at one year from
burning.

Community Recovery
i) Changes in Cover

Twelve 12 m transects were established
in both the autumn- and spring-burnt
grasslands and the percentage of overlap-
ping cover and cover repetition was deter-
mined at April and November 1994
(approximately 4.5 and 12 months from
spring burning) by the point quadrat
method (Kent and Coker 1992). A 3 mm
diameter pin was lowered into the grass-
land at 20 cm intervals along each transect
and all species and the number of touches
per species was recorded. A total of 720
points was recorded for each grassland on
each occasion. Differences in percent
overlapping cover and cover repetition
were compared at November 1994 (one
year from spring burning) using a single

Vol. 113 (2) 1996

classification analysis of variance
(ANOVA) (Sokal and Rohlf 1981).
ii) Changes in Biomass

At April and November 1994, biomass
was determined in each grassland by col-
lecting 12-15, 0,25m* samples of vegeta-
tion harvested to ground level. Samples
were dried at 80°C for 48 hrs before being
weighed. Differences in mean biomass
between the two grasslands at November
1994 was compared using a single classifi-
cation ANOVA (Sokal and Rohlf 1981).
iii) Light Quantity at Ground Level

The amount of light reaching the ground
surface relative to that above the canopy
was determined in both grasslands at April
and December 1994, A total of 15 read-
ings were taken in each grassland using a
LiCor Li 185 light meter with Quantum
sensor. Differences in the percent of light
at ground level were compared at
December 1994 using a single classifica-
tion ANOVA (Sokal and Rohlf 1981).

Results
Species Recovery

A total of 51 perennial species were
observed during this study, comprising 43
native species and eight exotic species. All
perennial species observed prior to the
spring fire were found resprouting in the
post-fire flora. No annual exotic grasses
(four species) were observed in the flora
until winter-spring 1994, approximately
nine months after spring burning.

Post-fire Flowering

Sixty-three percent of perennial species
produced zero or few flowers in the six
months following spring burning despite
exceptionally high summer rainfall (185%
of average; Fig. 1; Table 1). Four species
(8%) produced substantially more flowers
than was observed in the autumn-burnt
grassland (Table 1). 7

Post-fire flowering was initially inhibit-
ed amongst monocots. relative to dicots.
and amongst native species relative to
exotic species (Table 2). All life forms
showed reduced flowering (Table 2).

The four rare and threatened species dif-
fered in their response to spring burning.
The flowering of Comesperma polyga-
loides and Rutidosis leptorrhynchoides

Research Reports

Table 1. Post-fire flowering response grouped according to life-form of the study species in the six
months following a late-spring fire. Life-forms are according to Tremont (1994) and McIntyre et al.
(1995) or based on personal observation. * denotes exotic species.

Key: 1= Vegetative only; 2= Reduced flowering, 3= Unchanged flowering; 4= Pulse flowering

Resp-
onse
Phanerophyte

Chamaephyte

Asperula scoparia Dianella revoluta
Pimelea glauca Calocepha lus citreus

2s Pimelea curviflora

3. Pimelea spinescens

Life- form

Hemicryptophyte Geophyte

Acaena echinata *Romulea rosea
Carex breviculmis
*Cynara cardunculus
Danthonia setacea
Dichelachne crinita
Eryngium ovinum
Goodenia pinnatifida
Leptorhynchos squamatus
Linum marginale
Lomandra micrantha
Minuria leptophylla
*Nassella trichotoma
Plantago gaudichaudii
Poa sieberiana

Podolepis jaceoides
Ptilotus spathulatus
Schoenus apogon

Stipa bigeniculata

Velleia paradoxa
Vittadinia cuneata

Comesperma polygaloides
Danthonia duttoniana
Haloragis heterophylla
Rutidosis leptorrhynchoides
Themeda triandra
Brachyscome dentata Caesia calliantha
Chloris truncata

Chrysocephalum apiculatum

C. semipapposum

Convolvulus erubescens

*Foeniculum vulgare

Homopholis proluta

*Hypochoeris radicata

Oxalis perennans

*Paspalum dilatatum

Pelargonium rodneyanum

*Plantago coronopus

*P. lanceolata

Wahlenbergia luteola

Geranium retrorsum
Glycine tabacina
Senecio macrocarpus
Wahlenbergia communis

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

Fig. 1. Mean monthly rainfall totals for the
period December 1993 to December 1994
versus long-term average recorded at the
Werribee meteorological station (approx. 7-10
km north of the study sites).

was inhibited whilst flowering of Senecio
macrocarpus was substantially promoted.
The winter flowering Pimelea spinescens,
which was only marginally scorched dur-
ing the fire, did not appear to be affected
by the burn.

By one year from burning (December
1994), all species that were initially vege-
tative in the summer after spring burning
were observed to have flowered, with the
exception of Lomandra micrantha. By
contrast, the immediate promotion of
flowering of Geranium retrorsum and
Glycine tabacina and, to a lesser extent,
Senecio macrocarpus and Wahlenbergia
communis, was not sustained into the sec-
ond flowering season.

There appeared to be little difference at
December 1994 in the flowering intensity
between species in grasslands burnt 12
months (spring-burnt) and 18 months
(autumn-burnt) previously.

Community Recovery
1) Changes in Cover

Canopy cover recovered rapidly after
spring burning (Table 3). By April 1994
(4.5 months after burning), the cover had
returned to 84%, almost all of which was
attributable to Themeda (99%). By one
year from burning, the cover of the spring-
burnt grassland was not significantly
different (p>0.05) from the autumn-burnt
grassland that had been burnt six months
previously. Cover repetition was margin-
ally, but significantly, lower in the spring-
burnt versus autumn-burnt grassland at
November 1994 (Table 3; p < 0.05).

Vol. 113 (2) 1996,

Table 2. Post-fire flowering response in the
six months after late-spring burning as influ-
enced by life form, origin and growth form,

1= % of species with reduced flowering,

2 = % of species with unchanged flowering,

3 = % of species with increased flowering.

Flowering Response

Monocots
Dicots

Exotics
Natives

Geophytes
Hemicryptophytes
Chamaephytes
Phanerophytes

The overlapping cover of annual grass-
es one year after burning was 0% in the
spring-burnt grassland, as it was in the
autumn-burnt grassland.

2) Biomass

Biomass accumulation was significantly
lower in the spring-burnt grassland than in
the autumn-burnt grassland at November
1994 (Table 3; p< 0.01). At one year from
burning, the spring-burnt grassland had
attained 36% of its pre-burn biomass.

3) Light Quantity

The amount of light at ground level
declined to 60% in the 4.5 months follow-
ing spring burning but by December 1994
(one year after burning), was 73% of the
amount of light above the canopy. There
was significantly more light at the ground
level in the spring-burnt versus autumn-
burnt grassland at December 1994
(Table 3; p < 0.001).

Discussion

All perennial species found in the pre-
fire flora resprouted vegetatively in the
post-fire flora. Purdie (1977) calls such
species ‘fire-resistant’. There were no
obligate seed regenerators (or ‘fire-sensi-
tive’ species sensu Purdie (1977)). Post-
fire recovery of this grassland, with a his-

‘tory of recurrent fire, appeared to follow

the model of initial floristic composition

Research Reports

Table 3. Community recovery following burning in autumn 1993 and late-spring 1993 at May 1994

and November 1994, All values are means + 1 SE.

Month of Parameter
Observation

May 1994

Total % Cover

Total Cover Repetition
Biomass (g/m?)

% Light at Ground

November 1994
Total % Cover
Total Cover Repetition
Biomass (g/m)
% Light at Ground

(Egler 1954). Lunt (1990) observed simi-
lar patterns of recovery following burning
of a long-grazed Themeda grassland.

Vegetative recovery following spring
burning Is not surprising when it is consid-
ered that 90% of perennial species are
hemicryptophytes or geophytes, with pro-
tected basal meristems/buds at or below
the ground level (Chapman and Crow
1981). The close correlation between the
capacity to resprout and the presence of
protected buds from which shoots can
develop after burning is well known and is
considered to be a characteristic feature of
vegetation in fire-prone environments
(Keeley and Zedler 1978; Frost 1984).

Whilst a spring fire did not lead to a
loss at the species level, the response may
be more significant at the individual or
population level (Daubenmire 1968:
Purdie 1977). The susceptibility of a plant
to fire is partly a function of its phenologi-
cal state at that time (Daubenmire 1968:
Frost 1984),

Plants which are actively growing or
reproducing when burnt will experience a
greater loss of active tissue and, because
of depleted resources, a reduced capacity
for regrowth, than will plants that are
dormant at the time of burning, This may
lead to the production of fewer ramets in
those species that are rhizomatous.
Amongst the grasses, once a tiller begins
lo grow, it becomes progressively more
Susceptible to defoliation (Tainton et al.
1977). One might therefore predict that

Spring-burnt

(6 months since burnt)
84.2 + 1.4

2.7+0.1

115+14

61+4

(12 months since burnt)
90.3 + 2.0

3.1+0.1

9447

7342

Autumn-burnt

(12 months since burnt)
92.5 + 1.0

3.9+ 0.1

138+5

40 +3

(18 months since burnt)
93.5+0.9

3.6+0.1

166 +7

50+3

spring-burning may have a greater influ-
ence on vegetative population dynamics
than would a late-summer or autumn fire.
This remains to be verified.

By far the most obvious impact of late-
spring burning, despite above-average
rainfall immediately after the fire, was its
effect on regrowth flowering potential in
the following summer. Three response
categories were recognised (Table 1):

(i) no or little regrowth flowering possi-
ble in the following six months
(decreasers);

(ii) flowering unchanged relative to
autumn-burnt areas (unchanged) but
greater than would be expected in long
unburnt areas; and,

(iti) pulse flowering (increasers).

The proximate cues for post-fire flower-
ing are poorly understood (Hulbert 1988;
Le Maitre and Brown 1992; Lamont and
Runciman 1993), Changes in daily
temperature fluctuations in the soil follow-
ing fire, increased soil temperatures, better
light penetration, changes in physical and
chemical characteristics of the soil,
reduced competition, increased water
availability, leaf removal per se, a longer
growing season, increased tillering and the
production of ethylene have all been
postulated as being important (Gill and
Ingwersen 1976; Frost 1984; Le Maitre
and Brown 1992; Lamont and Runciman
1993; Johnson er al. 1994). However,
these are most important for stimulated
post-fire flowering that is usually

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

observed in the spring after a summer
or autumn fire. Following late-spring
burning, the ability to flower either
‘unchanged’ or ‘increased’ in the follow-
ing months of summer must also depend
on other more immediate factors. Two
seem appropriate to help explain the
response observed in this Themeda grass-
land: a) phenological development at the
time of burning and, b) growth habit/life
form.

a) phenological development - three of
the four species exhibiting pulse flowering
(Geranium retrorsum, Glycine tabacina
and Senecio macrocarpus) were largely
inactive at the time of burning. Senecio
macrocarpus had already flowered, set
seed and died back to below-ground root-
stock when burnt, and Geranium retror-
sum was also in a phase of returning to
dormant rootstock, as evidenced by the
senescing canopy. Glycine tabacina, it
appeared, had not produced any new
growth for the season. Its pulse flowering
after burning is in contrast to the predic-
tion of Scarlett and Parsons (1982) that
late-flowering Fabaceae are disadvantaged
by late-spring burning, apparently because
flowers are consumed by fire and there is
little regrowth flowering. The reasons for
the response seen may, in part, have been
due to the post-fire climate and the inter-
val since the last fire (i.e. three years),
Alternatively, the reason for the decline in
Fabaceae from regularly burnt rail
reserves may have been the inability of
new season’s seedlings to cope with late-
spring burning. A once-off spring burn,
however, does not appear to have been
detrimental to mature plants of this native
pea.

At the other extreme, decreasers at the
time of burning were largely either flower-
ing or about to flower (with the possible
exceptions of Carex breviculmis, Romulea
rosea and Schoenus apogon). Fire
destroyed flowers or flowering primordia,
and there was either insufficient time to
develop new flowers following burning,
or an environmental control on flowering
(e.g. photoperiod, thermoregulation)
prevented re-flowering (Frost 1984).

Of the species that showed the

Vol. 113 (2) 1996

unchanged flowering response, some
species may have been burnt prior to
Teale and flower formation (e.g.
Pi gonium rodneyanum, Pimelea
spinescens) whilst others, with perhaps
unspecialised flowering initiation require-
ments (e.g. Chrysocephalum apiculatum,
C. semipapposum, Wahlenbergia luteola),
took advantage of the favourable soil
moisture conditions over the summer,
Some may have responded by growing
and flowering over their normal growth
period. The C4 grasses Chloris truncata,
Homopholis proluta and Paspalum dilata-
tum were the only grasses that appeared to
flower ‘normally’ while all C3 grasses
failed to produce any substantial regrowth
flowering. Themeda triandra, whilst a C4
grass, also produced few flowers in the
post-fire environment, possibly because it
had initiated growth earlier (ie. October)
than the other C4 grasses (McDougall
1989).

b) growth habit/life form - some of the
responses observed may be explained in
part by the presence or absence of
substantial subterranean storage organs.
Certainly Caesia calliantha, Convolvulus
erubescens, Geranium retrorsum,
Hypochoeris radicata, Oxalis perennans,
Plantago coronopus and P. lanceolata
would have been able to exploit their
stored energy and nutrient reserves to
flower soon after fire. Some geophytes
of South African fynbos can exploit
below-ground storage organs to flower
within 7-14 days of burning (Frost 1984).
All the above species, except Caesia
calliantha, were flowering within eight
weeks of burning.

Most of the species that do not possess
storage organs of any note (J. Morgan
pers. obs, and unpubl. data) were also the
species with decreased flowering follow-
ing spring burning (e.g. Asperula
scoparia, Haloragis heterophylla,
Leptorhynchos squamatus). Sixty-eight
percent of decreasers possess small
storage organs (relative to plants such as
Geranium retrorsum and Hypochoeris
radicata). By contrast, only 36% of
unchanged species or increasers do not
possess sizeable storage organs.

Research Reports

However, the failure of some species
with storage organs to flower at all (e.g.
Acaena echinata, Podolepis jaceoides,
Ptilotus spathulatus) shows that the
response is clearly more complex than the
mere presence or absence of stored root
reserves. The relationship between storage
organs and phenological development
may be crucial.

By one year from late-spring burning,
all species other than Lomandra micran-
tha had or were flowering at levels far
greater than are usually seen in long
unburnt grasslands (Lunt 1995), The sec-
ondary juvenile period for grassland plants
is therefore extremely short,

The time to secondary flowering is even
shorter for most grassland species after an
autumn fire, presumably because burning
occurs at a time when most species are
dormant and post-fire conditions allow
rapid and substantial accumulation of
carbohydrate for flowering. Lunt (1990)
found that all but 6% of perennial native
species had flowered nine months after an
autumn burn at the Derrimut Grassland
Reserve, Melbourne, whilst all nine herba-
ceous species studied in detail at Munro,
Gippsland by Lunt (1995) flowered six
months after burning, although there were
similar increases and decreases in flower-
ing, as reported here, when compared to
grasslands that had been burnt two years
previously.

The differential species response
observed after spring burning was main-
tained only for the first summer following
burning. One year after the fire, there
appeared to be no difference in either the
number of species flowering or the inten-
sity of flowering when compared to an
area burnt in autumn, six months prior to
the spring fire.

The annual grasses Aira cupaniana,
Briza maxima, B. minor and Vulpia bro-
moides all failed to germinate immediately
post-fire despite above-average summer
rainfall. This may be due to inherent
dormancies of these species that prevents
germination during the hotter months.
Below-average winter rainfall (Fig. 1)
may have caused the subsequent very low
densities observed in both grasslands

during 1994 and contributed to the decline
in annual grass cover from 18.5% at
November 1993 to 0% at November 1994
in the spring-burnt grassland.
Significantly, the autumn-burnt grassland
also had 0% annual grass cover at
November 1994, suggesting that environ-
ment was a greater factor than the time of
burning on the annual grass component.

Anecdotal evidence from annually burnt
grasslands in western Victoria
(McDougall 1989; Hitchmough et al.
1994) suggests that the species most
affected by burning at this frequency in
early summer will be either the larger
seeded species such as Briza maxima that
have not made their way into the soil or
late-flowering species (e.g. Phalaris
aquatica). Most annually burnt grasslands
have an exotic annual grass component
that is dominated by small-seeded species
such as Aira cupaniana and Briza minor.
Briza maxima is largely absent from these
sites. Late-spring burning may kill most
seed either on the plant or on the soil
surface and may reduce the relative
dominance of these species in the
following year. However, in the absence
of follow-up late-spring fires, the reduced
population of survivors could theoretically
produce large quantities of seed so
that pre-burn densities and cover may re-
establish (Daubenmire 1968; McDougall
1989). For this reason, Hitchmough et al.
(1994) suggest that annual burning would
be necessary for 5-7 years to eliminate
many annual grasses from the grassland
community.

Following spring burning, the commu-
nity recovered rapidly. Six months after
the fire, the total overlapping cover had
returned to 84%. This is not unexpected as
the main contributor to cover, Themeda
triandra, is a C4 grass whose normal
growth period is the warmer months of the
year (Groves 1965; McDougall 1989) and
growth would have been possible over the
entire summer period due to above-
average rainfall.

Autumn-burnt grasslands initially
recover a canopy cover much more slowly
than spring-burnt grasslands (Morgan and
Rollason 1995), primarily because the first

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

six months of growth do not coincide with
the dominant species’ growth period. In
this study, the autumn-burnt grassland at
May 1994 had an overlapping cover of
93% compared to 84% in the spring-burnt
grassland despite an extra six months
growth. Total cover repetition, however,
was significantly greater in the autumn-
burnt grassland indicating greater rates of
vegetative regrowth here. This caused
significantly greater shading in the
autumn-burnt grassland relative to the
spring-burnt grassland.

Rates of biomass accumulation were
much slower following burning than has
previously been reported. At 12 months
from spring burning, biomass was 939
kg/ha whilst in the autumn-burnt grass-
land, at 18 months after burning, biomass
was 1660 kg/ha. Groves (1974) recorded
rapid biomass accumulation after
September burning of a Themeda grass-
land; 2500 kg/ha at one year after burning.
Similarly, Lunt (1995) recorded a biomass
of 4600 kg/ha two years after a spring fire.
Productivity therefore varies markedly
from site to site and absolute comparisons
of biomass are perhaps meaningless.
Rather, the rate of regrowth or biomass
accumulation at a single site is of more
significance. At this study site, 36% of
pre-fire biomass had returned by one year
from burning. One would therefore predict
that pre-burn biomass levels will return
within three years of burning.

Immediate post-fire recruitment by
species that do not store seed in the soil is
constrained by the amount of seed pro-
duced in the summer after the spring fire
(Lunt 1995; Morgan 1995). Sixty-three
percent of perennial species did not flower
substantially until one year after the spring
fire, with seedling recruitment potentially
unable to take place until at least 18
months after the fire. The grassland
microsite environment may be largely
antagonistic at this time to seedling growth
(e.g. absence of large canopy gaps and
associated low light levels (Morgan 1996))
given that Themeda has had two growing
seasons to recover from fire. Autumn-
burnt grasslands, that have had only one
growth cycle of Themeda by the time to

Vol. 113 (2) 1996

potential recruitment, may present a less
hostile seedling environment to many
species. This remains to be quantified.

_ However, those species whose flower-
ing was either unchanged or increased
after spring burning may be favoured over
decreasers by potential seedling recruit-
ment only six months after burning in a
grassland environment of lower biomass,
lower shading and lower canopy cover rel-
ative to autumn-burnt grasslands where
recruitment may have to wait until one
year after burning. Repeated late-spring
burning may ultimately fayour species
with rapid summer regrowth flowering
potential over those species that cannot
flower until the following spring. The
effect, however, will be determined
primarily by the regeneration strategy of
the species concerned (Purdie 1977).
Given the apparently low reliance on
seedling regeneration by many grassland
species (i.e. the regeneration strategies
appear to be primarily the obligate vegeta-
tive re-sprouters and auto-regenerating
long-lived sprouters described by Bell et
al. (1984)), this may be of little concern to
all but a few species that are short-lived
and more reliant on seedling regeneration
for turnover (e.g. Leptorhynchos squama-
tus; J. Morgan unpubl. data). Since many
of the most diverse remnants are found on
rail reserves that have a history of late-
spring burning (Scarlett and Parsons
1982), such regimes cannot have been
overly deleterious to the many native
species which are now abundant at these
sites (Lunt 1995). Certainly, the effects of
burning infrequently (e.g. five or more
year intervals) appear to have been much
more detrimental to the richness and
diversity of native grasslands (McDougall
1989: Scarlett and Parsons 1990) than any
effect of frequent late-spring burning.

Summary

All perennial native species resprouted
after a late-spring fire and more than 35%
of species flowered substantially in the six
months immediately after the fire. No
native species were ‘fire sensitive’ oblig-
ate seeders. One year after burning, there
was little difference in the flowering inten-

Research Reports

sity of the spring-burnt grassland relative
to the autumn-burnt grassland. Thus, it
appears that mature plants of most grass-
land species seem to be relatively robust
and insensitive to the effects of fire sea-
son. Regular late-spring burning (e.g. at
intervals of two years or more) is unlikely
to harm grassland composition. Many of
the most diverse remnants have been burnt
in spring/summer virtually every year for
decades. By contrast, in productive sites
with rapid Themeda regrowth, far greater
losses to plant diversity are likely to arise
from deferring burns for intervals greater
than 3-4 years due to diminished flower-
ing and seed set, increased seedling mor-
tality and senescence of mature plants due
to competition (primarily for light) with
the grassland dominant.

Acknowledgements

Tamzin Rollason provided assistance in the
field, lan Lunt, Bob Parsons and Neville
Scarlett kindly commented on early drafts of
this paper. This research was supported by an
Australian Post-Graduate Research Award.

Glossary

C3: plants that use the C3 pathway of carbon
dioxide fixation in the process of photosynthesis.
C4: plants that use the C4 pathway of carbon
dioxide fixation in the process of photosynthesis.
Chamaephyte: with perennating buds or shoot
apices borne close to the ground,

Cover repetition: derived from point quadrat
data: Total number of times all leaves of
species A ‘hits’ the pointing pin per
transect/Number of points per transect (in this
case, 60).

Geophyte: perennating buds below ground
level.

Hemicryptophyte: perennating buds at or just
below ground level,

Percent overlapping cover: derived from point
quadrat data: (Number of points at which
species A is recorded per transect/Number of
oe recorded per transect (in this case, 60)) X
Phanerophyte: perennating buds or shoot
apices on aerial shoots.

References

Bell, D.T., Hopkins, A.J.M, and Pate, J.S. (1984), Fire
in the Kwongan. /n ‘Kwongan - Plant Life of the
Sandplain’. Eds, J.S. Pate and J.S. Beard. pp. 178-
204. (University of Western Australia Press:
Nedlands.)

Chapman, R.R, and Crow, G.E, (1981), Application of
Raunkiaer’s life form system to plant Species sur-

vival after fire. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical
Club 108, 472-478.

Daubenmire, R. (1968). Ecology of fire in grasslands.
Advances in Ecological Research 5, 209-266.

Department of Conservation and Environment (1990),
‘Remnant Nalive Grasslands and Grassy
Woodlands of the Melbourne Area.’ (Department
of Conservation and Environment; Melbourne.)

Egler, F.E. (1954), Vegetation science concepts. I,
Initial floristic composition - a factor in old-field
vegetation development. Vegetatio 4, 412-417,

Frost, P.G.H. (1984). The responses and survival of
organisms in fire-prone environments. In
‘Ecological Effects of Fire in South African
Ecosystems’. Eds. P de V. Booysen and N.M.
Tainton, pp. 273-309, (Springer-Verlag: Berlin.)

Gill, A.M. and Ingwersen, F. (1976), Growth of
Xanthorrhoea australis R.Br, in relation to fire.
Journal of Applied Ecology 13, 195-203.

Groves, R.H. (1965), Growth of Themeda australis
tussock grassland at St. Albans, Victoria.
Australian Journal of Botany 13, 291-302.

Groves, R.H. (1974), Growth of Themeda australis
grassland in response to firing and mowing. Field
Station Records, Division of Plant Industry, CSIRO
Australia 13, 1-7.

Gullan, P.K., Cheal, D.C, and Walsh, N.G. (1990),
‘Rare or Threatened Plants in Victoria’.
(Department of Conservation and Environment:
Melbourne.)

Hitchmough, J.D., Kilgour, R.A., Morgan, J.W. and
Shears, 1.G. (1994). Efficacy of some grass specific
herbicides in controlling exotic grass seedlings in
nutive grassy vegetation. Plant Protection
Quarterly 9, 28-34,

Hulbert, L.C. (1988), Causes of fire effects in tallgrass
prairie. Ecology 69, 46-58.

Johnson, K.A., Morrison, D.A. and Goldsack, G.
(1994). Posi-fire flowering patterns in Blandfordia
nobilis (Liliaceae), Australian Journal of Botany
42, 49-60,

Keeley, J.E. and Zedler, P.H, (1978). Reproduction of
chaparral shrubs after fire: a comparison of sprout-
ing and seeding strategies. American Midland
Naturalist 99, 142-161,

Kent, M. and Coker, P.
Description and Analysis’.
Press:London.)

Lamont, B.B. and Runciman, H.V, (1993). Fire may
stimulate flowering, branching, seed production
and seedling establishment in two kangaroo paws
(Haemodoraceae). Journal of Applied Ecology 30,
256-264.

Le Maitre, D.C, and Brown, P.J, (1992). Life cycles
and fire-stimulated flowering in geophytes. /n ‘Fire
in South African Mountain Pynbos’, Eds, B.W, van
Wilgen, D.M. Richardson, F.J. Kruger and H.J. van
Hensbergen. pp. 145-160. (Springer-Verlag:
London.)

Lunt, 1.D, (1990), Impact of an autumn fire on a long-
grazed Themeda triandra (Kangaroo Grass) grass-
land: implications for management of invaded,
remnant vegetations, The Victorian Naturalist 107,
45-51.

Lunt, 1.D, (1995). Variation in flower production of
nine grassland species with time since fire, and
implications for grassland management and restora-
tion. Pacific Conservation Biology 1, 359-366,

(1992), "Vegetation
(Belhaven

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

McDougall, K. (1987). ‘Sites of Significance in the
Western Region of Melbourne’. (Department of
Conservation, Forests and Lands: Melbourne.)

McDougall, K.L. (1989). ‘The Re-establishment of
Themeda triandra (Kangaroo Grass): Implications
for the Restoration of Grassland’. Arthur Rylah
Institute for Environmental Research Technical
Report Series No. 89. (Department of
Conservation, Forests and Lands: Melbourne.)

MeIntyre, S., Lavorel, S. and Tremont, R.M. (1995).
Plant life-history attributes: their relationship to
disturbance response in herbaceous vegetation.
Journal of Ecology 83, 31-44.

Morgan, J.W. (1995). Ecological studies of the endan-
gered Rutidosis leptorrhynchoides. 1. Seed produc-
tion, soil seed bank dynamics, population density
and their effects on recruitment. Australian Journal
of Botany 43, 1-11.

Morgan, J.W. (1996). The effect of grassland gap size
on establishment, growth and flowering of the
endangered Rutidosis leptorrhynchoides
(Asteraceae). Journal of Applied Ecology (in press)

Morgan, J.W. and Rollason, T.S. (1995). Base-line
monitoring of a significant grassland remnant at
Evans Street, Sunbury, Victoria, The Victorian
Naturalist 112, 148-159.

Purdie, R.W. (1977). Early stages of regeneration after
burning in dry sclerophyll vegetation. I.
Regeneration of the understorey by vegetative
means. Australian Journal of Botany 25, 21-34.

Scarlett, N.H. and Parsons, R.F. (1982), Rare plants of
the Victorian plains. Jn ‘Species at Risk: Research
in Australia’. Eds. R.H. Groves and W.D.L. Ride.

illustrated by photographs and maps.

Vol. 113 (2) 1996

New Book
Published jointly by the

Geological Society of Australia (Victorian Division) and

The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria

Roadside Geology

Editor Dr Noel Schleiger

A drive of discovery;
a trip through time;
an explanation of landscape, and
underlying geological structure

Melbourne to Ballarat

i ing the vistas and cut-
It aims to broaden understanding of geology and landscape using
tings along the Western Freeway between Melbourne and Ballarat. This arp
soft cover book is an excellent introduction to geology for both ATES: .
tourists alike. A brief text introduces the geological scenery of this route which Is

Good value at a RRP $18.00. 7.
Available from FNCV Office or the Geological Society of Victoria.

pp. 89-105. (Australian Academy of Science:
Canberra.)

Scarlett, N.H. and Parsons, R.F, (1990). Conservation
biology of the southern Australian daisy Rutidosis
leptorrhynchoides, In ‘Management and
Conservation of Small Population.’ Eds. T.W.
Clark and J.H. Seebeck. pp. 195-205, (Chicago
Zoological Society: Illinois.)

Sokal, R.R. and Rohlf, FJ, (1981). ‘Biometry’, (WH.
Freeman and Co.: New York.)

Stuwe, J. (1986). ‘An Assessment of the Conservation
Status of Native Grasslands on the Western Plains,
Victoria and Sites of Botanical Significance’.
Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmental Research
Technical Report Series No. 48, (Department of
Conservation, Forests and Lands: Melbourne.)

Stuwe, J. and Parsons, R.F. (1977). Themeda australis
grasslands on the Basalt Plains, Victoria: floristics
and management effects. Australian Journal of
Ecology 2, 467-476.

Tainton, N.M., Groves, R.H. and Nash, R.C. (1977).
Time of mowing and burning veld; short term
effects on production and tiller development.
Proceedings of the Grassland Society of South
Africa 12, 59-64.

Tremont, R.M. (1994), Life-history attributes of plants
in grazed and ungrazed grasslands on the Northern
Tablelands of New South Wales. Australian
Journal of Botany 42, 511-530.

Willis, J.H. (1964). Vegetation of the basalt plains in
western Victoria. Proceedings of the Royal Society
of Victoria 17, 397-418.

Research Reports

Fauna of the Grantville Gravel Reserve, with Reference
to Vegetation and Conservation Significance

A.S. Kutt! and J.V. Yugovic?

Abstract

This paper presents a summary of a report titled ‘Flora and Fauna Assessment and Review of
Management Issues, Grantville Gravel Reserve, Victoria’ (Yugovic and Kutt 1995) prepared for the
Bass Coast Shire Council by Biosis Research Pty. Ltd. The flora and fauna of the Grantville gravel
reserve, a remnant of native coastal vegetation on Western Port, were surveyed in 1994. The fauna
survey recorded a total of 134 vertebrate species from primary and secondary sources for the
reserve and surrounding area. Six species are assessed as being of conservation significance: the
Swamp Antechinus Antechinus minimus; Haswells Frog Crinia haswelli; the Common Blue-tongue
Tiliqua scincoides; the Metallic Skink Pseudemoia metallica and the Long-nosed Bandicoot
Perameles nasuta, The vegetation survey recorded seven vegetation communities and a vascular
flora comprising 221 taxa, All vegetation communities are considered to be of state (Grassy
Woodland, Swamp Scrub) or regional (Dry Heathy Woodland, Dry Forest, Riparian Forest, Wet
Heathy Woodland, Wet Scrub) conservation significance. There is a discussion on the flora and
fauna, and the significance of the gravel reserve and surrounding area for nature conservation. (The
Victorian Naturalist 113, 58-66).

Introduction

A preliminary flora and fauna survey
was conducted at the Grantville gravel
reserve (hereafter gravel reserve), 1.5 km

south of Grantville, 85 km south-east of

Melbourne (Map 1). The gravel reserve is
approximately 100 ha in area and is
bounded by the Bass Highway road
reserve to the north-west, by the Stanley
Road road reserve and private residential
land (the Adams Estate) to the north-east,
and by the (proposed) Grantville State
Nature Reserve (hereafter nature reserve)
to the south, Located in the centre of the
study area are three large gravel pits (Shire
of Bass pit, Vic Roads pit, public pit) and
a landfill. The remainder (approximately
half) of the study area supports native
vegetation which is contiguous with the
adjacent, undemarcated nature reserve,
The gravel reserve has a complex topogra-
phy ranging from 18 m in elevation in the
west along the Bass Highway, to 82 m in
the east. A prominent creek runs through
the centre of the study area, while smaller
drainage lines, also running to the west,
occur near the north and south boundaries.

"current address Australian Centre for Tropical
Freshwater Research, James Cook University,
‘Townsville, Queensland 4811, ;

"™~ Biosis Research Pty, Ltd., 322 Bay Street, Port
Melbourne, Victoria, 3207, ]

Methodology

The fauna survey was conducted in
March 1994. Techniques used and survey
effort are as follows: active searching (16
search-hours, 1] predator scats found and
analysed); cage trapping (37 trap-nights);
Elliott trapping (180 trap-nights); hair-tub-
ing (160 tube-nights); bat (harp) trapping
(6 trap-nights); spotlighting (4 spotlight
hours); pitfall trapping (24 pit-nights); bird
census (4 hours), and frog census (1 hour).
Additional records for the study area and

Locality

Melbourne &

Frankston

Map 1: Location of Grantville gravel reserve
(indicated by arrow).

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

surrounding state nature reserve were
obtained from the Department of
Conservation and Natural Resources
(DCNR), Atlas of Victorian Wildlife, the
Western Port Group of the Bird Observers
Club of Victoria and from personal com-
munications with DCNR staff.

The flora survey was conducted in
March, August and November 1994, The
study area was traversed on foot, and the
composition, structure and condition of
the vegetation were examined. The vascu-
lar flora (ferns, conifers, flowering plants)
was recorded. Seventeen 30m by 30m
quadrats were sampled across the range of
vegetation types evident from aerial pho-
tography and ground-truthing (verified on
the ground). Vegetation classification
utilised a computer-based, numerical
procedure followed by manual-sorting of
the computer out-put to further refine
vegetation community descriptions
(Gullan 1978).

Results

A total of 91 terrestrial vertebrate fauna
species (52 native and 3 introduced bird
species, 16 native and 3 introduced mam-
mals, 9 reptiles and 8 amphibians) were
recorded during the present survey. The
Western Port Group of the Bird Observers
Club of Victoria have recorded a further
36 bird species for the study area, while
the Atlas of Victorian Wildlife records an
additional seven species (1 bird, 2 mam-
mals, 2 reptiles and 2 amphibians) from
the local area which includes the adjacent
nature reserve (N 38° 25’, S 389 27°, E
145° 33°, W 145° 30°). Unconfirmed
sightings of a Red-necked Wallaby
Macropus rufogriseus and Lace Monitor
Varanus varius from the nature reserve by
DCNR staff have also been reported. A
composite species list is presented in
Appendix 1. Species recorded from hair-
tubes, scat analysis, pit-fall traps, Elliott
and cage traps, including trap effort, are
presented in Table 1. In reference to
Appendix 1, all species not identified in
Table 1 and not indicated as being record-
ed from the secondary sources listed
above, were observed during the bird
census, frog census or incidentally during

Vol. 113 (2) 1996

the course of the survey.

The recorded vascular flora (ferns,
conifers, flowering plants) comprises 22]
taxa (species and varieties of plants), of
which 182 are indigenous. Given the size
of the area, indigenous plant species diver-
sity 1s relatively high due to the range of
vegetation communities present and the
intact condition of most of the vegetation.
Seven vegetation communities were
detined and their distribution is indicated
in Fig. 1.

1. Dry Heathy Woodland - a widespread,
extensive vegetation community generally
dominated by Narrow-leaf Peppermint £.
radiata from 8 to 18 m with Coast Manna
Gum Eucalyptus pryoriana co-dominant
in places. Below the tree canopy is a 4-6
m high shrub layer of Leprospermum
myrsinoides and L. continentale and a
ground layer comprising a range of typical
heath species adapted to dry and low nutri-
ent conditions such as Xanthorrhoea aus-
tralis, Pteridium esculentum, Epacris
impressa and Amperea xiphoclada.

2. Damp Forest - a scattered and localised
forest community co-dominated by
Narrow-leaf Peppermint and Messmate E.
obliqua, 18-25 m in height. There is rela-
tively little shrub cover and Pteridium
esculentum is prolific in the ground layer,
3. Grassy Woodland - a woodland or
open-forest community is confined to
north-facing slopes above the central creek
and co-dominated by Messmate and
Narrow-leaf Peppermint, 20-25 m in
height. Below the eucalypt canopy L. con-
tinentale and Banksia marginata provide a
patchy shrub layer 4 m tall. The ground
layer is relatively rich in species (e.g. P.
esculentum, Themeda triandra, Stipa mol-
lis, Acrotriche serrulata, Hypericum
gramineum, Lomandra longifolia, L. fill-
formis, Bossiaea prostrata, Wahlenbergia
gracilis, Lepidosperma concavum).

4. Riparian Forest - a forest vegetation
community restricted to the narrow, allu-
vial plain along the central creek and co-
dominated by Messmate and Narrow-leaf
Peppermint, 25-30 m in height. Below the
eucalypt canopy is a patchy layer of smaller
understorey trees, Acacia melanoxylon,
B. marginata, Melaleuca squarrosa,

Research Reports

Table 1. Species recorded from Elliott and cage trapping (E), hair tubes (H), predator scats (S),
pitfall traps (P) and bat (harp) traps (B), including total survey effort and vegetation communities
from which they were recorded. * indicates introduced species. Numbers in parentheses indicate the
total individuals trapped by cages, Elliotts or pitfalls. Vegetation community types corresponding to
numbers are described in the text.

Vegetation Community

4,
Species
Swamp Antechinus Antechinus H E(2) H
minimus
Brown Antechinus Antechinus F(1) E(1) E(2)
stuartit
Common Ringtail Possum E(2), S S
Psuedocheirus peregrinus
Long-nosed Bandicoot Perameles H
nasula
Swamp Wallaby Wallabia bicolor H 5
Bush Rat Rattus fuscipes E(9),S,H E(3),H (2) E(1) (5),H H E(6),H
Chocolate Wattled Bat Chalinolobus — B(2)
morio
Southern Forest Bat Vespadelus B(2)
regulus
Little Forest Bat Vespadelus B(5) B(1)
vulturnus
Lesser Long-eared Bat Nyctophilus B(6) B(S)
geoffroyt
Dog* Canis familiaris S
Fox* Vulpes vulpes 5 S
Striped Marsh Frog Limnodynastes P(1)
peronii
Pobblebonk (Banjo) Frog P(1)
Limnodynastes dumerilii
Common Froglet Crinia signifera P(1)
McCoys Skink Nannoscincus P(2)
maccoyt
Trap/survey effort
Elliott/cage trap-nights 41.00 12.00 20.00 40.00 40.00 24.00 40.00
Bat (harp) trap-nights 3.00 3.00
Pitfall trap-nights 18.00 6.00
Predators scats analysed 7.00 3.00 1.00
Tube-nights 60.00 20.00

40.00 20.00 20.00

A.verticillata, 4-10 m tall and a dense
ground layer (70-90% cover) of species
typical of moist alluvial situations such as
Goodia lotifolia, P. esculentum,
Calochlaena dubia, Todea barbara and
Gahnia radula.

5. Wet Heathy Woodland - a scattered and
localised woodland community on infer-
tile, frequently wet sites, co-dominated by
Messmate and Narrow-leaf Peppermint,

10-16 m in height. Below the eucalypts is
a sparse shrub layer of L. continentale and
Allocasuarina paludosa, 3-6 m tall with
5% cover. The ground layer supports
typical wet heath species such as G. radula,
X. minor, Bauera rubioides, Gonocarpus
micranthus, G. tetragynus, Hibbertia
procumbens, Poa clelandii, Lindsaea
linearis, Selaginella uliginosa and
Schoenus tenuissimus.

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

Grantville 1-5 km

Grantville State
Nature Reserve

F2E54 Dry Heathy Woodland (1)
[e*e®q Dry Forest (2)
Grassy Woodland (3)
§ Riparian Forest (4)
Wet Heathy Woodland (5)
Wet Scrub (6)

Swamp Scrub (7)

Adams Estate

Grantville State
Nature Reserve

Fig. 1. Distribution of vegetation communities in the Grantville gravel reserve.

6. Wet Scrub - a scrub community
restricted to wet, infertile drainage lines
that is co-dominated by L. continentale
and M. squarrosa, 4-5 m in height. The
ground layer comprises a relatively small
range of wet-adapted species such as
Gahnia radula, Selaginella uliginosa, B.
marginata, Leucopogon australis,
Schoenus tenuissimus, Dillwynia glaberri-
ma, Gonocarpus humilis, H. procumbens
and Schizaea asperula. Emergent trees of
Messmate occur in places.

7. Swamp Scrub - a scrub community
confined to the relatively fertile, northern
drainage line and dominated by Swamp
Paperbark M. ericifolia and L. continen-
tale, 10-12 m in height. An emergent layer
of Swamp Gum E, ovata occurs in places.
The ground layer consists of wet-adapted
species such as Lepidosperma laterale, P.
tenera, Gahnia radula, Coprosma quadri-
fida, Gonocarpus humilis, Senecio min-
imus, Viola hederacea, Clematis micro-
phylla, Danthonia semiannularis,
Goodenia ovata and Microlaena stipoides.
Introduced Blackberry Rubus discolor
occurs along disturbed margins.

Vol. 113 (2) 1996

Discussion

The large number of terrestrial verte-
brate fauna species (134) recorded from
all sources represents a rich and diverse
community for such a small area (100 ha)
and a short survey period (5 days). This is
a reflection of the excellent undisturbed
condition of the native vegetation commu-
nities in the area and the diversity of avail-
able habitat types. A survey of The
Gurdies, a similar area of remnant native
coastal vegetation on the eastern shores of
Western Port and located 3.5 km north of
the study area, also highlighted the rich-
ness of the vertebrate fauna (Wilson
1990).

Other species, not found in the
Grantville survey, have been recorded for
the area. Wilson (1990) recorded three
mammals from The Gurdies - the Sugar
Glider Petaurus breviceps, the Koala
Phascolarctos cinereus and the Swamp
Rat Rattus lutreolus. Additionally, the
Atlas of Victorian Wildlife identifies the
Water Rat Hydromys chrysogaster and a
historical record (pre- 1900) of the
Feathertail Glider Acrobates pygmaeus for

Research Reports

the area which includes the gravel and
nature reserve. However, given the low
total spotlight and trap effort in the 1994
study, it is likely that, with a more inten-
sive survey, these species may be recorded
here. There is also the potential for a num-
ber of additional significant, but more
elusive, species to occur within the gravel
and nature reserves including the Swamp
Skink Egernia coventryi, the Glossy Grass
Skink Pseudemoia rawlinsoni, the Eastern
Pygmy-possum Cercartetus nanus, the
White-footed Dunnart Sminthopsis leuco-
pus and the Long-nosed Potoroo Potorous
tridactylus.

Given the short period of
survey, there was an emphasis on indirect
techniques such as hair-tubing and preda-
tor scat analysis to supplement trapping
and observational data. For many genera,
indirect techniques are generally criticised
for not providing an acceptable level of
surety in identification or location. Lobert
and Lumsden (1991) attempted to quantify
the accuracy and reliability of the micro-
scopic examination of mammalian hair,
and grouped Victorian taxa into reliability
categories: reliable; possible, and unreli-
able. With reference to the present survey,
three species recorded by hair analysis are
regarded as reliably identified: Long-
nosed Bandicoot Perameles nasuta,
Swamp Wallaby Wallabia bicolor and
Bush Rat Rattus fuscipes (Lobert and
Lumsden 1991). The latter two species
were also observed or trapped and though
the Long-nosed Bandicoot was not
trapped, numerous diagnostic diggings
were also present in the habitat in which
the hair samples were recorded,

The Swamp Antechinus Antechinus
minimus is considered to be unreliably
identified by hair samples and easily
confused with the Dusky Antechinus A.
swainsonii (Lobert and Lumsden 1991).
Two Swamp Antechinus were trapped in
Riparian Forest and confidently identified
as such. However, two hair samples
collected in Dry Heathy Woodland and
the Swamp Scrub and identified as A.
minimus/swainsonii (B. Triggs pers.
comm.) represent problematic records.
Dusky Antechinus are typically found in

damp, high rainfall and altitude environ-
ments with a dense ground vegetation
coyer to 1 m (Menkhorst 1995). Disjunct
coastal populations also exist in wet heath
habitat in the south-east Wannon region,
the Otway Range, the Mornington
Peninsula and Wilsons Promontory, and in
coastal wet heath, Banksia woodlands and
coastal forest in East Gippsland
(Menkhorst 1995). Both the available
habitat types and the ambiguous hair-tube
result suggests that the Dusky Antechinus
may occur in the gravel and nature
reserves.This further highlights the need
for additional suryey in the site and the
overall significance of this area of remnant
coastal vegetation.

The bird community recorded from the
gravel reserve 1s reasonably species rich,
and includes a number of interesting
records for the Western Port region. The
Eastern Whipbird and the Red-browed
Treecreeper represent isolated populations
that are approximately at the western limit
of their coastal range, while the Southern
Emu-wren, Beautiful Firetail and White-
browed Woodswallow are all uncommon
species along the coast of Victoria
(Emison et al. 1987). A number of bird
species recorded in Appendix | are more
typically associated with open wetlands,
beaches and intertidal areas (e.g. Pacific
and Silver Gull, Sacred and Straw-necked
Ibis, Pacific and White-faced Herons,
Australian Pelican, Little Pied Cormorant,
Maned Duck, Hoary-headed Grebe). The
gravel reserve does not naturally provide
habitat for these species, however, the
presence of the landfill and permanent
standing water in the previously quarried
extraction area has created both an artifi-
cial food source and wetland habitat for
these species.

Of the vertebrate species recorded, one
species of state conservation significance
(Swamp Antechinus Antechinus minimus)
and five species of regional conservation
significance (Haswells Frog Crinia
haswelli, Common Blue-tongue Tiliqua
scincoides, Metallic Skink Pseudemoia
metallica, Long-nosed Bandicoot
Perameles nasuta) were identified.
Significance was assessed according to

The Victorian Naturalist

EE EEEEEE'=~'S S$

Research Reports

current documented accounts of regional
(the Western Port Catchment) and state
distribution and conservation status
(Andrews et al. 1984; DCNR 1995),
These are discussed briefly below.
Swamp Antechinus - this species is
classified as rare in Victoria (DCNR
1995), and has been recorded in a range of
habitats ranging from near-coastal dense
wet heath, wet tussock grassland and
sedgeland and Brown Stringybark forest
with a wet heath understorey (Menkhorst
1995). In the Western Port area it is
considered to be very rare and restricted
(Andrew et al. 1984), with the most recent
record being one individual trapped in
dense heathy shrubland at The Gurdies in
1984 (Wilson 1990). Two individuals
were trapped in Riparian Forest, a vegeta-
tion type that has many structural and
floristic similarities to the Brown
Stringybark forest recorded as Swamp
Antechinus habitat by Menkhorst and
Beardsall (1982).

Long-nosed Bandicoot - this species has
been previously unrecorded in the coastal
woodlands and foothills surrounding
Western Port, except the southern tip of
the Mornington Peninsula (Andrew et al.
1984; Menkhorst 1995). Within most of
its Victorian range, the Long-nosed
Bandicoot is restricted to wetter riparian
sites, being more common in high-rainfall
areas such as the Eastern Highlands,
Gippsland Plain, East Gippsland and the
Otway Range (Menkhorst 1995). In the
Western Port catchment it is restricted to
higher altitude forested ranges where it is
considered widespread but uncommon
(LCC 1991; Menkhorst 1995). Two sepa-
rate hair-tube samples were collected from
Dry Heathy Woodland and these are
considered as reliable records for reasons
outlined earlier.

Metallic Skink - in Victoria the Metallic
Skink is almost exclusively confined in
distribution to coastal, woodland and for-
est areas in central and southern
Gippsland (Cogger 1993). Although it is
widespread and moderately common !n
the Western Port region (Andrews et al.
1984; LCC 1991), this species is restricted
in South Gippsland, the islands of Bass

Vol. 113 (2) 1996

Strait and Tasmania (Cogger 1993),
Therefore, all sites in South Gippsland are
important for the conservation of this
skink species in Victoria. Two individuals
were recorded in Dry Heathy Woodland.
Common Blue-tongue - in the Melbourne
region, this large skink is most commonly
found in grasslands and grassy woodlands
associated with the western basalt plains
and is considered to be moderately com-
mon in the Melbourne Area District 2
(LCC 1991), It has not been recorded pre-
viously in the Western Port catchment
(Andrews er al. 1984) and is not expected
to occur in South Gippsland where the
Blotched Blue-tongue Tiligua nigrolutea
is the common species (Cogger 1993).
Therefore, the individual recorded in Dry
Heathy Woodland during the present sur-
vey may either represent a new record for
the local area or could possibly be a speci-
men collected from outside the Western
Port catchment and released into the
reserve.

Haswells Frog - this frog is found in habi-
tats associated with water in wet and dry
forests, woodlands, shrublands and coastal
heath in eastern Victoria (Hero et al.
1991). It is considered to be restricted and
uncommon in the region (Andrews et al.
1984; LCC 1991), being recorded most
commonly from The Gurdies, Hastings
and Grantville areas. Two individuals
were heard calling in Riparian Forest.

The vegetation over most of the study
area, away from the existing pits, is con-
sidered to be in excellent, undisturbed
condition. Large areas have not been burnt
for at least 45 years; this may have led to a
temporary reduction in species diversity.
The forest along the central creek is in
particularly good condition, and appears
never to have been logged. Large, mature
trees are common in this area; one
Messmate has a girth at breast height of
4.9 m. Weed levels are very low, even in
the Riparian Forest and Swamp Scrub,
habitats usually prone to weed invasion.

All vegetation communities within the
study area are considered significant for
nature conservation, due to their depletion
either within Victoria or the Western Port
region. Two communities (Grassy

Research Reports

Woodland, Swamp Scrub) are of state sig-
nificance due to their depletion in Victoria
resulting from land clearance, alteration of
remnants (particularly through weed inva-
sion) and their inadequate reservation.
Five communities (Dry Heathy Woodland,
Dry Forest, Riparian Forest, Wet Heathy
Woodland, Wet Scrub) have regional sig-
nificance due to their depletion within the
region. In addition, several of the commu-
nities recorded in this survey are poorly
reserved in the coastal areas around
Western Port and Port Phillip bays.
Management of these areas of remnant
vegetation to protect flora and fauna is a
priority for conservation in the region.

The gravel reserve is under consider-
able pressure for further development. In
its Final Recommendations for the
Melbourne Area District 2 Review, the
Land Conservation Council recommended
division of the gravel reserve into a north-
ern Grantville refuse area (M14) to
facilitate establishment of a landfill based
on the existing, almost worked-out gravel
pit, and a southern stone reserve (L1) to
facilitate further sand/gravel extraction
(LCC 1994). A regional landfill and trans-
fer station is proposed for M14; these
require relatively little vegetation clear-
ance (<2 ha). Details of the proposed
development and environmental mitiga-
tion measures are given in the site
management plan for the proposed landfill
and transfer station (AGC Woodward-
Clyde 1994), Mineral exploration leases
cover the remainder of the gravel reserve
(Ll).

The detailed report on the gravel
reserve (Yugovic and Kutt 1995), recom-
mends that consideration be given to
transferring the south-eastern section of
the gravel reserve, which includes the
creek environment, to the adjacent nature
reserve. This highly significant 17.5 ha
area supports five vegetation communi-
ties, including Riparian Forest and Grassy
Woodland. The forest along the creek and
adjacent slopes is in particularly good
condition and appears never to have been
cleared, Since gazetting of the nature
reserve has not taken place, this transfer
would be administratively convenient.

The recommended transfer has
been adopted in the draft regional sand
extraction strategy - Lang Lang to
Grantville - prepared for the Department
of Planning and Development through a
public consultative process (AGC
Woodward-Clyde 1995). The draft
strategy addresses conservation issues,
particularly the need to maintain vegeta-
tion linkages between the Grantville
nature reserve/gravel reserve and areas of
native vegetation further north, to
facilitate wildlife movement and enhance
reserve viability.

The Grantville gravel reserve lies
adjacent to, and continuous with, the
(proposed) Grantville state nature reserve
(an area of 378 ha). It is likely that all
vegetation communities and fauna species
recorded in the gravel reserve also occur
in the nature reserve. These reserves
represent the southernmost remnant of
native vegetation in a chain of partially
connected remnants which collectively
comprise most of the remaining native
vegetation in West Gippsland, an area
which is over 95% cleared. Sand mining,
residential development and land manage-
ment are important issues affecting the
future maintenance of these connections.
Given these conflicting land-use
pressures, gazetting this reserve should be
a priority for regional conservation author-
ities. A complete survey and inventory of
the flora and fauna of the entire Grantville
nature reserve is required for a more
confident assessment of the conservation
significance and management potential of
this area.

Acknowledgments

The authors wish to thank Sid Larwill and
Charles Meredith, Biosis Research Pty. Ltd., for
reviewing and editing this manuscript, Barbara
Triggs (‘Dead Finish’ Genoa Vic, 3891), for
hair and scat analyses and Bessie Tyers
(Westerport Bird Observers Club) for additional
bird records. All trapping was conducted under
the terms of Department of Conservation and
Natural Resources (DCNR) wildlife research
permit RP-92-154.

References

AGC Woodward-Clyde (1995). ‘Draft regional sand
extraction strategy - Lang Lang to Grantville’.

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

Report prepared for the Department of Planning
and Development, AGC Woodward-Clyde Pty Lid,
(Richmond: Victoria).

Andrews, D.L., Lumsden, L.F, and Dixon, J.M.
(1984). ‘Sites of zoological significance in the
Western Port region’. Environmental Studies Series
327, (Department of Conservation, Forests and
Lands: Victoria),

Cogger H.G. (1993). ‘Reptiles and Amphibians of
Australia.’ (Reed: Chatswood, New South Wales),

DCNR (1995). ‘Threatened fauna in Victoria’,
(Department of Conservation and Natural
Resources: Victoria).

Emison W.B., Beardsell C.M,, Norman F.1., Loyn
R.H. and Bennett S.C. (1987). ‘Atlas of Victorian
Birds.’ (Department of Conservation, Forests and
Lands and Royal Australasian Ornithologists
Union: Victoria).

Gullan P.K. (1978). Vegetation of the Royal Botanic
Gardens Annexe at Cranbourne, Victoria.
Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria 70,
225-40.

Hero J-M., Littlejohn M. and Marantelli G. (1991).
‘Frogwatch Field Guide to Victorian Frogs.’
(Department of Conservation and Environment:
Victoria).

LCC (1991). ‘Melbourne Area District 2 Review:

Descriptive Report.’ (Land Conservation Council:
Victoria).

Appendix 1

LCC (1994). ‘Melbourne Area District 2 Review:
Final Recommendations.’ (Land Conservation
Council: Victoria).

Lobert, B, and Lumsden, L. (1991 ), Quantitative
assessment of mammalian hair identification using
the technique of Brunner and Corman. In
‘Ecological Survey Report No, 35: Flora and fauna
of the Goolengook Forest Block, East Gippsland,
Victoria’. Eds, B.O. Lobert, G.R, Gillespie, 1.D,
Lunt, R.J. Peacock and D, Robinson, (Department
of Conservation and Environment: Melbourne),

Menkhorst, P.W. (ed) (1995). ‘Mammals of Victoria:
distribution, ecology and conservation.’ (Oxford
University Press: Melbourne),

Menkhorst, P.W. and Beardsall, C. (1982), Mammals
of south-western Victoria from the Little Desert to
the coast. Proceedings of the Royal Society of
Victoria 94, 22|-247,

Wilson C.G, (1990), Mammals of The Gurdies,
Western Port, a proposed flora and fauna reserve,
The Victorian Naturalist 107, 52-57,

Yugovic, J and Kutt, A. (1995). ‘Flora and Fauna
assessment and review of management issues,
Grantville gravel reserve, Victoria.’ (Report pre-
pared for the Bass Coast Shire Council by Biosis
Research Pty Ltd: Victoria).

All fauna species recorded or reported from the Grantville gravel reserve and

surrounding local area. ‘W’ denotes species recorded in the reserve by the Western Port Group of
the Bird Observers Club of Victoria. ‘AVW’ denotes records from from the Atlas of Victorian
Wildlife for the local area (N 38° 25°, S 38° 27°, E 145° 33° W 145° 30°) including the gravel and
nature reserve, ‘Anecdotal’ denotes species reported from the reserve by Department of
Conservation and Natural Resources staff but requiring confirmation,

Native Birds

Hoary-headed Grebe Poliocephalus polio-
cephalu W

Australian Pelican Pelecanus conspicillatus
Litle Pied Cormorant Phalacrocorax
melanoleucos W

Paci fic Heron Ardea pacifica W

White-faced Heron Ardea novaehollandiae
Sacred Ibis Threskiornis aethiopicus
Straw-neck ed Ibis Threskiornis spinicollis W
Maned Duck Chenonetta jubata W

Marsh Harrier Circus aeruginosu W

Brown Goshawk Accipiter fasciatus W
Wedge-tailed Eagle Aquila audax

Whistling Kite Haliaster sphenurus W
Black-shouldered Kite Elanus notatus W
Australian Hobby Falco longipennis W

Brown Falcon Falco berigora

Silve r Gull Larus novaehollandiae

Pacific Gull Larus pacificus :

Purple Swamphen Porphyrio porphyrio AVW
Common Bronzewing Phaps chalcoptera
Yellow-tailed Black-cockatoo Calyptorhynchus

funereus

Vol. 113 (2) 1996

Galah Cacatua roseicapilla

Rainbow Lorikeet Trichoglossus haematodus
Crimson Rosella Platycercus elegans

Eastern Rosella Platycercus eximius

Pallid Cuckoo Cuculus pallidus

Fan-tailed Cuckoo Cuculus pyrrhophanus W
Horsfields Bronze-cuckoo Chrysecoccyx
basalis r
Shining Bronze-cuckoo Chrysococcyx Incidus W
Southern Boobook Owl Ninox novaeseelandiae
White-throated Needletail Hirundapus cauda-
cutus W ‘
Laughing Kookaburra Dacelo novaeguineae
Sacred Kingfisher Haleyon sancta

Welcome Swallow Hirundo neoxena W
Black-faced Cuckoo-shrike Coracina novae-
hollandiae

Whites Thrush Zoothera dauma

Scarlet Robin Petroica multicolor ‘
Eastern Yellow Robin Eopsaltria australis
Jacky Winter Microeca leucophaea W

Crested Shrike-tit Falcunculus frontatus W
Golden Whistler Pachycephala pectoralis

Research Reports

Rufous Whistler Puchycephala rufiventris

Grey Shrike-thrush Colluricincla harmonica
Leaden Flycatcher Myiagra rubecula

Satin Flycatcher Myiagra cyanoleuca

Grey Fantail Rhipidura fuliginosa

Rufous Fantail Rhipidura rufifrons W

Willie Wagtail Rhipidura leucophrys

Eastern Whipbird Psophodes olivaceus
Southern Emu-wren Sripiturus malachurus W
Superb Fairy-wren Malurus cyaneus

White -browed Scrub-wren Sericornis frontalis
Striated Thornbill Acanthiza lineata

Yellow Thornbill Acanthiza nana W

Brown Thornbill Acanthiza pusilla
Buff-rumped Thornbill Acanthiza reguloides
Yellow-rumped Thornbill Acaathiza chrysor-
rhoa W

Varied Sitella Daphoenositta chrysoptera W
Red-browed Treecreeper Climacteris erythrops
W

White-throated Treecreeper Climacteris leu-
cophaea

Brown Treecreeper Climacteris picumnus W
Red Wattlebird Anthochaera carunculata

Noisy Miner Manorina melanocephala W
Yellow-faced Honeyeater Lichenostomus
chrysops

White-eared Honeyeater Lichenostomus leuco-
tis W

White-plumed Honeyeater Lichenostomus peni-
cillatus W

Brown-headed Honeyeater Melithreptus brevi-
rostris

White-naped Honeyeater Melithreptus lunatus
New Holland Honeyeater Philidonyris novae-
hollandiae

Crescent Honeyeater Philidonyris pyrrhoptera
Eastern Spinebill Acanthorhynchus tenuirostris
Mistletoebird Dicaeum hirundinaceum W
Spotted Pardalote Pardalotus punctatus

Striated Pardalote Pardalotus striatus

Silvereye Zosterops lateralis

Beautiful Firetail Emblema bella W
Red-browed Firetail Emblema temporalis
Olive-backed Oriole Oriolus sagittatus W
Australian Magpie-lark Grallina cyanoleuca
White-browed Woodswallow Artamus supercil-
liosus W

Dusky Woodswallow Artamus cyanopterus W
Grey Butcherbird Cracticus torquatus W
Australian Magpie Gymnorhina tibicen

Grey Currawong Strepera versicolor

Australian Raven Corvus cornoides

Little Raven Corvus mellori

Introduced birds

Common Blackbird Turdus merula
European Goldfinch Carduelis carduelis W
House Sparrow Passer domesticus W
Common Myna Acridotheres tristis
Common Starling Starnus vulgaris

Native mammals

Short-beaked Echidna Tachyglossus aculeatus
Swamp Antechinus Antechinus minimus
Brown Antechinus Antechinus stuartii

Southern Brown Bandicoot /soodon obesulus
Long-nosed Bandicoot Perameles nasuta
Common Brushtail Possum Trichosurus vulpec-
ula

Common Ringtail Possum Pseudocheirus pere-
grinus

Red-necked Wallaby Macropus rufogriseus
Anecdotal

Eastern Grey Kangaroo Macropus giganteus
Swamp Wallaby Wallabia bicolor

Common Wombat Vombatus ursinus
White-striped Freetail Bat Tadarida australis
Chocolate Wattled Bat Chalinobus morio
Southern Forest Bat Vespadelus regulus

Little Forest Bat Vespadelus vulturnus

Lesser Long-eared Bat Nyctophilus geoffroyi
Bush Rat Rattus fuscipes

Swamp Rat Rattus lutreolus AVW

Water Rat Hydromys chrysogaster AVW

Introduced mammals

Dog Canis familiaris

Rabbit Oryctolagus cuniculus
Fox Vulpes vulpes

Reptiles

Tree Goanna (Lace Monitor) Varanus varius
Anecdotal

Southern Water Skink Eulamprus tympanum
Eastern Three-lined Skink Bassiana duper-
reyi

Garden Skink Lampropholis guichenoti
McCoys Skink Nannoscincus maccoyi

Grass Skink Psueudemoia entrecasteauxii
Metallic Skink Pseudemoia metallica

Blotched Blue-tongue Lizard Tiligua nigrolutea
Common Blue-tongue Lizard Tiliqua scin-
coides

Lowland Copperhead Austrelaps superbus
White-lipped Snake Drysdalia coronoides
AVW

Tiger Snake Notechis scutatus AVW

Amphibians

Southern Brown Tree Frog Litoria ewingii
Growling Grass Frog Litoria raniformis AVW
Whistling Tree Frog Litoria verreauxti
Victorian Smooth Froglet Geocrinia victoriana
Pobblebonk (Banjo) Frog Limnodynastes
dumerilii

Striped Marsh Frog Limnodynastes peronii
Spotted Marsh Frog Limnodynastes tasmanien-
sis

Haswells Froglet Crinia haswelli

Common Froglet Crinia signifera

Southern Toadlet Pseudophryne semimarmora-
ta AVW

The Victorian Naturalist

Naturalist Notes

From our Naturalist in Residence, Glen Jameson

Middle Yarra Timelines

The Middle Yarra Timelines project is bei
; yect is being developed by The Field Nat i ;
j uralist:
Af ere aes Eevee oye fom Yarra Valley Parklands (Melbourne Parks and Wales
€ seasonality themes - the relationships, interacti d ats
of the natural history of the Middle Yarra area. The proj e Eke eter
i th f project is establishing a data bas infor-
mation that will be of critical i i fi so
rca as eae of value to land managers, eco-tourist providers and environmental
An interim six season calendar year has been i
n Six Ss 1 cale ; produced from this data. The seasons are cycli
sensitive to climatic variability and delineated by the occurrence and associations of daigals oie.
Perv rather ae pig The idea behind this series is to represent a mythical day for each of
ose seasons, a day that incorporates all of the important seasonal indi
Bettie eatin 1p nal indicators and patterns, char-

Late Summer

The coolness of the morning air is
striking as you walk in the thick mist that
traces the journey of the river, mists that
present a new world, shrouded in mystery
and magic. Silver mists that shimmer or
catch golden shafts of morning sun before
they melt and race quickly downstream,
following the flow of water. A chorus of
ten Kookaburras Dacelo novaeguineae
break the morning skies with a seasonal
flocking of the local Kookaburra popula-
tion.

Manna Gums Eucalyptus viminalis,
resplendent after shedding their bark dur-
ing High Summer, with their sleek and
elegant trunks and boughs and lush
canopy of deep green dotted with cream
flowers; they are a commanding presence
along the river. Winding down from the
nights foraging, a female Koala
Phascolarctos cinereus, with a young on
its back, prepares for a quiet doze on a
chosen bough. Last night a male was call-
ing from along the river, marking out terri-
tory. A mixed flock of Yellow-rumped
Thornbills Acanthiza chrysorrhoa
and White-plumed Honeyeaters
Lichenostomus penicillatus work the
Riparian tree leaves for invertebrates.
River Reed Phragmites australis contin-
ues to flower on the river’s edge.

The river level is a little higher, and its
pale creamy chocolate colour describes the
degree of turbidity and suspended materi-
als that have been washed down with the
rains, which have also caused localised
erosion. This in turn affects the biological
productivity of the Yarra River which is

Vol. 113 (2) 1996

largely limited by the degree of turbidity.
The river water is still reasonably clear
and warm enough to support a high
diversity of aquatic invertebrates.
However, the life cycles begin to slow,
with no new instars being formed as the
populations of Chironomids, Mayflies
Tasmanocoensis sp. Caddis_ Fly
Cheumatopsyche sp., Water Boatmen
Micronecta sp. and others, mature and
begin to die off. The invertebrate fauna
over the True Spring to Late Summer
period is dominated by fauna of tropical
region origins. During the cooler, Winter
months, invertebrate fauna with
Gondwana affiliations will dominate.

It is the time for young Platypus
Ornithorhynchus anatinus to emerge from
Riverbank nests for the first time since
hatching in October or November. The
downstream migration of Short-finned
Eels Anguilla australis, known as Silver
Eels in this part of their life cycle, picks
up momentum with a peak in migration of
mainly mature females, between 10 and 20
years old, heading towards the estuaries.
The slower swimming males have been
leaving since True Spring. All the Silver
Eels will now begin a 2 to 3 month swim
towards the Coral Sea to spawn. Tupong
Pseudaphritis urvillii will complete its
upstream migration from estuary breeding
grounds, reduced water flow and higher
water temperature assisting its upstream
migration.

Over the past weeks, the mists have
been slowly building up, especially after
Thunderstorms and subsequent rain. The

Naturalist Notes

Thunderstorms dramatically descend upon
the Yarra Valley after sweeping across the
flat landscape of the western basalt plains,
breaking up the pleasant settled weather
patterns of the late Summer, weather that
is some of the most pleasant and liveable
for the whole year. It is a time for gather-
ings and celebration; a flocking of birds, a
traditional gathering of the Wurundjeri
Tribe and Kulin Nation at Bolin Bolin to
dance the Gaggit and other healing cere-
monies, and marching at Moomba, The
winds preceding the change cause an enor-
mous amount of leaf to fall and carry
flocks of White-throated Needletails
Hirundapus caudacutus that feed on the
abundance of invertebrates swept up in the
updraught caused by the change in weath-
er. However, this is the last season before
they return to Eastern Siberia, maintaining
an eternal Summer (to the envy of the
great Australian beachcomber).

Sacred Kingfisher Todiramphus sancta
having completed their breeding cycle are
often observed relaxing on their favourite
perches before their northern trek.
However, some Rufous Fantails Rhipidura
rufifrons still have young in a nest in a
damp gully and will need to work hard to
be ready for the northward migration to
New Guinea, 10,000 km away. The Pied
Currawongs Strepera graculina have
returned from their secretive mountain
breeding places used over the True Spring
and High Summer. They tour in huge
assemblies, along the river valley with
their whistling, ringing range of calls
announcing their Timelonic* triumphant
return to the lowlands. After this, they
break into smaller groups to forage or to
harass resident birds such as the Collared
Sparrowhawk Accipiter cirrhocephalus,
Gang Gang Cockatoos Callocephalon fim-
briatum have also returned from the
mountains and both they and the Pied
Currawongs take full advantage of the ripe
fruit of the highly invasive pest plant
Hawthorn Crataegus monogyna, which
has become naturalised along the Riverine
environment.

Downstream billabongs and wetlands
metamorphose further; low river levels
and lack of substantial floods during this

past year have meant that the older and
shallower billabongs, such as the Annulus,
are almost completely dry. A scattering of
Carp Cyprinus carpio corpses mark a criti-
cal low water level for these exotic fish.
However, Bolin Bolin Billabong, which
was formed more recently and has a lower
river ingress level, managed to fill during
the last modest rise in river levels in
August last year. Its waters are still fairly
deep and support a range of wildlife
including Darters Anhinga melanogaster
that are breeding further downstream.
Nomadic Black-fronted Dotterels
Elseyornis melanops work the Wetland
margins where Small Mud-mat
Glossostigma elatinoides with pale mauve
flowers, Small Knotweed Polygonum ple-
beium and Spreading Sneezeweed
Centipeda minima try to cover the avail-
able space. There is still an occasional
Latham’s Snipe Gallinago hardwickii to
see before they migrate to Japan during
the next season. The Frogs are generally
quiet and will need a good soaking rain to
re-activate them again. The Peron’s Tree
Frog Litoria peroni, have stopped calling
altogether.

The rains that have fallen have begun
the greening of the grassy valley slopes
where the bright-red, bell flowers of
Cranberry Heath Astroloma humifusum
bloom, and the white orchid Parson’s
Bands Eriochilus cucullatus join the
Autumn Bird-orchid Chiloglottis reflexa
and the Autumn Greenhood Prerostylis
revoluta to mark the change of season.
Occasional flowering of Twining Rush-
lily Tricoryne elatior and Golden
Weather-glass Hypoxis hygrometrica
occurs as more temperate conditions
return. Sweet Bursaria Bursaria spinosa
and Lightwood Acacia implexa will
complete their flowering. Flocks of up to
thirty Eastern Rosellas Platycercus exim-
ius feed on the ground among the native
and exotic grasses. Large flocks of
Sulphur-crested Cockatoos Cacatua
galerita feed on the corms of the well-
established pest plant, Onion Grass
Romulea rosea.

Candlebark Eucalyptus rubida has also
shed its bark over High Summer and now

The Victorian Naturalist

Naturalist Notes

’

gleams white in the afternoon sun. On one
of its boughs a Drooping Mistletoe
Amyema pendulum flowers, a food plant
for the larvae of the Olane Azure Butterfly
Ogyris olane ocela. Silver-leaf
Stringybark E. cephalocarpa is also in
flower and these trees are scattered
throughout the Middle Yarra but are a
more dominant species in the vegetation
towards Ringwood and beyond. A few
clouds have begun to drift over the skies
and are more of a feature of the Late
Summer as more moisture gathers in the
atmosphere.

Excitable family flocks of Australian
Magpies Gymnorhina tibicen sweep the
tree tops, their ranks swollen with the now
aerially able, sub-adults of the last breed-
ing season. Sugar Gums E. cladocalyx, in
flower, provide an important focus for
increasingly larger flocks of Musk
Lorikeet Glossopsitta concinna and
Rainbow Lorikeets Trichoglossus haema-
todus. Over the past few years they have
swept the Yarra Valley in vast flocks,
numbering over a thousand birds as was
observed at Petty’s Orchard in Yarra
Valley Parklands last year. Swift Parrots
Lathamus discolor also take advantage of
this and other nectar feeding opportunities
on the mainland, after their winter migra-
tion from Tasmania.

Long-leaf Box E. goniocalyx is in
flower along the ridge tops. Its wood was
not valued by timber harvesters over the
years, therefore it is often the dominant
remnant tree on the drier hilltops. Snakes
are more often observed now that the very
hot weather has passed, out for the last
feeds prior to inactivity over winter. The
last of the Late Summer generation of
Imperial Whites Delias harpalyce and
some Wood Whites D. aganippe feed on
the flowers of Box Mistletoe A. miquelit,
also a food plant for the larvae of both
species. Common Brown Butterflies
Heteronympha merope are plentiful and
often accumulate on the ridge tops await-
ing breeding opportunities. Some morn-
ings they may be found fluttering help-
Jessly on the ground until their wings dry
out from the overnight dew. Dusky
Woodswallows Artamus cyanopterus have
begun to flock, as a prelude to migration

Vol. 113 (2) 1996

after a busy Late Summer of feeding.
Often a group will sit huddled along a
dead branch, preening and sunning.

: In the mid afternoon heat on a dry rocky
ridge, Sugar Ants Camponotus ‘consobri-
nus’ are in the process of launching
winged reproductive males and females in
anticipation of a change in weather, need-
ing windy days to help their dispersal. A
chain of frenetically busy ‘worker’ ants
are helping the winged ‘Flying Ant’ reach
the top of a small flat rock which will be
the launching pad. An immense amount of
the Sugar Ant colony’s energy is put into
preparing each ‘Flying Ants’ for the
launch. Huge ‘Soldier’ Ants strut around
the perimeter checking security details.
The whole process takes hours and
requires such a high degree of social plan-
ning that it must be the envy of every
Moomba procession organizer.

A Common Myna Acridotheres tristis,
and other birds, will take advantage of
Sugar Ants swarming prior to Late
Summer rainstorms by ‘anting’ them-
selves (that is, using the ants to de-louse
their bodies). They will either take up a
posture over the ant colony entrance, forc-
ing the ants to climb over its body or by
actively picking up ants and placing them
under its wing.

A huge gathering, almost fifty birds, of
Black-faced Cuckoo-shrikes Coracina
novaehollandiae, having radiated out into
the local forests of Warrandyte and
Eltham to feed during the day, are now
returning to their roosting trees in the late
afternoon. After returning from all points
of the compass, they have congregated in
two large Red Box E. polyanthemos on a
commanding ridge overlooking the
Warrandyte Gorge.

Mole Crickets Gryllotalpa sp. ring out
their vibrating calls just prior to a sunset
which has a spectacular range of texture
and colour due to the smog-painted atmos-
phere above Melbourne’s city centre. The
settled Late Summer weather is conducive
to the build up of the smoggy pollutants
produced by the daily routines of industri-
alised cities and, with very little breeze to
blow them to other environments, they
become concentrated . ;

Sugar Gliders Pefaurus breviceps with

Naturalist Notes

some newly weaned young, move into the
flowering Sugar Gums as soon as night
falls, taking advantage of the prolific nec-
tar and pollen production of this non-
indigenous Eucalypt, Unfortunately the
Sugar Gums being well pollinated by their
many visitors have begun to spread into
nearby Bushlands and hybridise with local
Eucalypts. Deep into the darkness of the
starry night, haunting deep calls of the
Powerful Owl Ninox strenua, boom out
from a heavily wooded gully, resonantly
filling the river valley with its mystery and
strength,

* Timelonic - a particular observation of a natural phe-
nomenon which gives insight into the function or
nature of an interaction or association.

Acknowledgements

I would like to thank Malcom Calder, Cecily
Falkingham, Ed Grey, Pat Grey, Alan Reid,
John Reid, Elizabeth Sevior, Ken Simpson, Vin
Pettigrove, the Middle Yarra Timelines
Committee and all who have contributed to the
data bank of information for the Project so far.

Bibliography

Andersen, A.N, (1991). *The Ants of Southern
Australia’. (CSIRO: Australia),

Common, I.F.B. and Waterhouse, D.F, (1981),
‘Butterflies of Australia’. (Angus & Robertson),
Costermans, L. (1983). ‘Native Trees and Shrubs of

South-Eastern Australia’. (Rigby Publishers).

Coventry, A., Robertson, P. (1991), ‘The Snakes of
Victoria’. (Department of Conservation and Natural
Resources: Victoria).

Davis, S. (1989). ‘Man of All Seasons’, (Angus &
Robertson).

Firth, H.J. ed, (1982), "Reader's Digest Complete
Book of Australian Birds’. (Readers Digest
Association; Far East Ltd),

Galbraith, J. (1977). ‘Wildflowers of South-East
Australia’. (William Collins & Sons),

Koehn, J.D. and O'Connor, W.G. (1990). ‘Biological
Information for management of Native Fish in
Victoria’. (Department of Conservation and Natural
Resources; Victoria).

Menkhorst, P.W. ed. (1995), ‘Mammals of Victoria’,
(Oxford University Press; Australia),

Simpson, K. and Day, N. (1989). ‘Field Guide to the
Birds of Australia’. (Penguin Books: Australia).
Society for Growing Australian Plants Maraoondah

Incorporated (1993), ‘Flora of Melbourne’. (Hyland
House; Melbourne).
Williams, W.D. (1994). ‘Australian Freshwater Life’

Glen Jameson
PO Box 568, Templestowe, Victoria 3106.

And from one of our naturalists in the country

An Ibis Rookery

The summer of 1995/6 was a particularly grassy year, Beautiful level crops of Rye
Grass gladdened the hearts of the hay-makers, if not those of the hay-fever sufferers.
Both common species of Ibis worked over the newly-cut paddocks in their thousands.
The country between the township of Mirboo North and the district of Mardan is hilly
with smooth rolling hills and broad-floored valleys, and many of the minor creeks
have been dammed for irrigation purposes. On one of these lakes the Australian
White Ibis Threskiornis molucca has established a rookery. We estimated about 200
birds on nests this past spring/summer, It is quite a spectacular sight in the peak of
their season on this private property. On the paddocks both species of Ibis were inter-
mingled, but only the Australian Whites appeared to be breeding. The nests are on the
flattened tops of the drowned gully vegetation. The colony has apparently been there
for some years.

Powerful Owls

On Australia Day in January of this year we had the pleasure of watching two
Powerful Owls Ninox strenua, temporary visitors 1 think, in Morwell National Park.
They were roosting in thick dark Blackwoods or Pittosporums, and had been under
observation for some days previously, beside the creek track. The big birds suffered
walk, talk and gawk parties with patience and aplomb. Ringtail Possums are a very
plentiful species in Gippsland but we are a little nervous as to the fate of our few
known Greater Gliders. There was no evidence of long-time roosting, so perhaps the

owls were just passing through.
Ellen Lyndon
7 Steele Street, Leongatha, Victoria 3953

70 The Victorian Naturalist

Naturalist Notes

‘4

An Inlet Lost - An Inlet Regained
(with apologies to John Milton)

Arthur Farnworth!

Mallacoota Inlet, well-known to many
FNCV members, has been described as ‘a
quiet little fishing village some 520 km
east of Melbourne near the border of
Victoria with New South Wales’. It is an
estuarine system comprising two rivers
(Genoa and Wallagaraugh) flowing into
the upper of two lakes which are connect-
ed by a narrow strip of water and finally
discharging into the Tasman Sea through a
narrow inlet across a sand bar (Fig. 1).

During the last Ice Age (20,000 years
ago) neither lake existed and the rivers
flowed directly to the sea. As the polar ice
caps melted, the sea-level rose and
drowned the Genoa River Valley. Waves
and currents then deposited sand, creating
dunes and forming a barrier that closed off
the lakes from the sea, apart from a narrow
inlet, the position of which occasionally
changes by short distances, depending on
sea action and river flow.

However, late in 1994 a combination of
low rainfall upstream (which slowed the
flow of the rivers) and rough seas (which
deposited tons of sand) made the sand bar
massive (1.8 m above lake level at its
highest point) and closed the inlet (Fig. 2).
It remained so for over a year. Local histo-
rians believe it is only the third time this
century that this has happened. The first
occasion was in the 1920’s when the inlet
was re-opened after a few weeks by dredg-
ing and carting away the sand by horse
and dray. The next closure was in 1987
and lasted for several weeks, until heavy
storms inland created a river flow suffi-
ciently powerful to break through the bar.

The latest prolonged closure in 1994/95
caused the water level in the lakes to rise
quite markedly and created several prob-
lems and considerable concern because:
-the rivers upstream flooded adjacent
low-lying farms and caused salinity
problems; ]

-the professional fishermen, licensed to

' 47 The Boulevarde, Doncaster, Victoria 3108

Vol. 113 (2) 1996

net in Bottom Lake, claimed the fish
balance was being disturbed because of
the lack of migration between sea and
lake;

-several of the jetties around the lakes
were partially or totally submerged so that
boat owners had to climb up rather than
step down from the jetty into their boat
(fig. 3);

- sections of the road connecting a residen-
tial area with the town were flooded and
became impassable;

- resultant ecological changes either
attracted more water birds to the area or
led the existing already-large population to
congregate in specific locations around the
lake (Fig. 4).

An unexpected outcome of this was an
almost epidemic outbreak of ‘pelican
itch’, a parasitic infection associated with
the combined effects of large numbers of
water birds and low, or no, water move-
ment, and which affected humans making
contact with the water.

In mid-July 1995 the East Gippsland
Shire Council, the Port Authority and the
Victorian Department of Conservation and
Natural Resources joined forces to try and
open a channel using earth-moving equip-
ment, though without too much optimism
because the difference between the water
level on either side of the bar was only
about 0.3 m. In the event a breakthrough
was achieved but produced merely a trick-
le rather that a hoped-for ‘ruddy blush’.
Within hours the inlet was closed once
more, thanks to the movement of sand by
the waves.

By mid-October the situation had
become quite critical and a decision was
taken to bring in a large bulldozer and
again try to excavate a channel across the
bar, This was done on Tuesday, 24
October and by lunchtime a trickle of
water was flowing across a newly-created
wide, low, flat area of sand. Then nature

Naturalist Notes

—

Fig. 1, The normal situation - the lake and sea connected by the inlet/outlet across the sand bar.

Fig. 2. An intact sand bar seals off the lake from the sea.

intervened. Ten centimetres of rain had
fallen upstream over the preceding four
days and this created enough turbulence
downstream to start moving sand. The

steady flow across the flat became increas-
ingly vigorous, cutting a channel, the sides
of which kept collapsing inward to
increase its width. By the following

The Victorian Naturalist

Naturalist Notes

‘

Fig. 3. One of the many jetties around the lakes partially or totally submerged by the rising water,
leaving boats high but far from dry.

rig, discuss th
Fig. 4. The clan gathers - pelicans cong iscuss the
increasing level of the lake.

15-20 cm of rain over the next few days

ensured that the new channel ‘stayed put’.
d!! After being

morning a brand new 50-metre-wide Be
existed and the level of the lake ha
dropped considerably. A further fall of Mafeking had been relieve

73
Vol. 113 (2) 1996

Book Review

‘lost’ for just over a year, Mallacoota’s
inlet had been ‘regained’.

And, as they say in the classics, truth is
stranger than fiction. The local newspaper,
‘The Mallacoota Mouth’, reported that
‘people were carrying off bags of fish
which they hac , wicked semi-stunned
from the shallow sea water near the edges
of the boiling torrent. One lucky local had
managed to wrestle a giant Flathead to
shore bare handed’.

One final reflection on this most unusual
occurrence; the jetties, lying a few
centimetres below the surface of the lake,
provided a golden opportunity for anyone
with delusions of grandeur to practice
walking on water. Rumour hath it that
several MPs of all political persuasions
were occasionally seen at Mallacoota Inlet
during the latter months of 1995!!!

The You Yangs Range

by Trevor Pescott

Publisher: Yaugher Print, 4 Victoria Terrace, Belmont, Victoria 3216.
112 pages, size 21x15 cm. RRP $17.95. Available from bookshops or Yaugher Print.

This well presented book will appeal
to most readers interested in local nat-
ural history. It is divided into 3 parts,
the physical study of the You Yangs
range itself (along with the extremes of
climate that have fashioned it), the
flora and fauna and, for the historians,
the human history of the area.

As you read each, the reader realises
that there has been much detailed
research and experience gone into
developing each section. The book is
essential for the quarter million visitors
per year making day excursions to the
Park.

The You Yangs Range is unique in
that it is a granitic residual projection,
over 300m above the Plio-Pleistocene
basalt plain, Attractively-coloured pho-
tographs throughout the book illustrate
the physical aspects of the range as
well as the flora and fauna. This breaks
up the text, but the photographs then
encourage the reader to search the text
for more detail on a particular topic.

Bird observers are well catered for
as well as those who are keen on the
botany of the area. In a book of this
size it is impossible to specialise in
every topic, but the essentials are there

- orchids, grasses, fungi and flowering
plants.

Finally the history - from Aboriginal
through European settlement to the
present time - is treated from the local
view-point. Pages 101-103 then deal
with species which have disappeared
and the factors which have influenced
this. It is interesting to read what early
field naturalists from Melbourne and
Geelong thought about the You Yangs
when it was explored during the last
century.

There is a two-page reference sec-
tion at the end of the book and most
date from 1950 to the present. A useful
index finishes the document.

Trevor Pescott has clearly made a
most interesting and valuable summary
of scientific and historical information
on the You Yangs, and anyone inter-
ested in the area, perhaps wishing to
explore this region within a limited
time, or wishing to do a local study is
well advised to buy a copy. It is also a
must for field naturalists and day visi-
tors to the area and good value at the
RRP of $17.95.

Noel Schleiger
35/20 Were Street, Montmorency, , Victoria 3094

The Victorian Naturalist

How to be a Naturalist

‘

The Field Notebook
Recording your Observations

Alan J. Reid'

When you are out in the field, whether casually observing or undertaking a systematic
survey, an organised field notebook or standardised recording pad is a must it is obvi.
ously so much easier for transferring your data to your permanent files, if the lay out of
the notebook or pad reflects the nature of your file recording at home. f

A simple lay-out

Up until 1995, I found that the simplest organisation for a notebook page was a two
column format. In the smaller column I placed background details like date, time, place
ee one in the larger, I would record details of the event and include sketches if
needed.

To more easily find a reference to a species whilst browsing through the book, I
would either underline the species name or place it in the first column.

' In the field it was easier to use a simple kind of personal shorthand - omitting preposi-

tions, articles or conjunctions; using initials and abbreviations for the names of
well-known animals and plants; including symbols for weather conditions. Below is an

example:-

Date, Place, etc Event

13/11/94 Kildun 03.0,090 BEFCS nest 10m dead swamp gum N of lake - incubating

f2w0 cloudy 20 10am AJR TA

Translated this meant:- At the Kildun property at Glenburn, on the 13th of
November 1994 at 10am, the weather was cloudy with a
force 2 westerly wind. The temperature was 20 degrees.
At grid reference point 03.0,090, we found the nest of a
Black-faced Cuckoo-shrike, ten metres up in a dead
swamp gum on the north side of the lake. A bird was on
the nest.
The observers were Alan Reid and Tim Anderson

Meaningful recording

The most useful records are those that demonstrate connections between organisms
and between organisms and events. Consider the differences between these two record-
ings of the same observed event:-

‘Today I saw a Yellow Robin sitting ‘4.35pm. Yellow Robin in teatree scrub
on a stump. While I was watching it picked up woolly-bear caterpillar from
flew down to the ground and pecked ground litter. Sorted through litter -

at something in the litter’ found 1_millipede, 2 small centipedes &

4 mould hoppers’.

Note the meaningful follow-up action recorded in the second observation!

Recording for computer ent :
ra : les, rie or filing cabinet folders as the final resting place

If you are using card fi sas th
for ai mine R records, then you will have the task of indexing and cataloguing
your records for easy recovery. You may even have to make double or triple entries to
cope with complex events like those described above.

imeli i ject 1 i Gould League are
that the Timelines Australia Project 1s operating, we at the :
Poitou naturalists to record their observations in a standardised format suitable for

1 RMB 6297, Burns Road, Glenburn, Victoria 3717

113 (2) 1996 75

Naturalist Notes

computer entry into and extraction from local and national databases of seasonal informa-
tion. This reporting requires the use of codes to categorise such information as locality, veg-
etation, weather, behaviour and numbers in addition to the event description.

The cuckoo-shrike observation above would now read as follows in my database file:-.

Date Veg. | Weather | Action
Code Code Code
D

Time

B03 16.00
In this example B03 = low, open forest, FOI = lake, D = Overcast, light breeze, 16 =
incubating, BFCS = Black-faced Cuckoo-shrike, 1AM = one adult male and 1FM = one
adult female.

Details of the codes can be found in the Gould League’s new nature diary, “Banksias &
Bilbies’. Copies of the standardised recording sheets for the Timelines Project can also be
obtained from the League.

But, of course, the basic ingredient is that first observation. If the recording in your
field notebook can be tailored to fit into this scheme, opportunities for combining and
sharing our knowledge of Australian natural history will be vastly increased.

Locality
Lat/Long

131194 | Glenburn
10 am

Anointment of a Naturalist

It is said that one can’t ride a bike until
one takes a fall, an actor doesn’t become
an actor until one breaks a leg, a racing
car driver doesn’t earn his stripes until he
has had a bingle, so there may be some-
thing in why this article is headed as it 1s,
I leave it for the reader to decide.

Whilst surveying with staff of
Melbourne Parks and Waterways (Craig
Lupton) in the Stonyford Creek area at
Silvan on the night of 15.11.95, dull eye
shine in the mid storey was observed at a
distance of approximately 150 m.
Identification with the aid of binoculars
could not be made due to the density of
foliage. As each encountered animal was
being documented, it was necessary to
obtain correct identification. One of the
difficulties in pushing into the scrub for
such a distance towards the animal is that
you lose your bearing somewhat, espe-
cially when the undergrowth is so dense.
Also unless there is some outstanding fea-
ture to hone into, it is very difficult to
recognise the tree you think the animal
was in.

To overcome these problems, the
method used in this instance was for the
light to be held on the animal, or where it
was last seen by person (A). Another per-
son (B) then moves into the scrub for 25-

30 m and spotlights the point where (A)
has his/her beam of light, and (A) then
moves a further 25-30 m. This leap-frog
action is repeated until you reach your
subject. This time when we arrived at the
locality, nothing could be found. We were
confident we were within metres of where
the eye shine was first sighted and cast
around with the light for 2-3 minutes
before we were rewarded with a large
bundle of light grey, soft fur reclining in
the fork of a sapling some 5 m above
ground. We had found the source of the
eye shine - a Koala, who was now fast
asleep. So after all this trivia, we have
reached the reason why this article is
titled as it is.

Looking skywards soft rain began to fall,
the precipitation, at first very light, fell on
my shoulders and down the front of my
jacket - immediately one became aware of
a distinct eucalyptus fragrance and as the
precipitation fell on my face astigmatism
immediately took place. The culprit was
found to be a Greater Glider.

If his happening can be considered as an
induction into the realm of the Naturalist,
it was indeed, a not too unpleasant expe-
rience.

Bob Taylor
22, Coven Avenue, Bayswater North, Victoria 3153

The Victorian Naturalist

Software Review

The Bird-Book Book

by Ken Simpson

Publisher: Natural Learning Pty Ltd, 1995. CD-ROM
eA! Ae RRP $99.00
equires a multimedia personal computer with a minimum requirement of 16mhz CP
SVGA graphics, 30 mb hard disk, 8 bit soundcard, CD-ROM drive ooh 150 Ri ae
transfer. A 456 cpu or better with 8 mb RAM and Windows 3.11] is recommended.

The Bird-Book Book is not a book at
all, rather it is a CD-ROM-based bibliog-
raphy of over 4600 bird books, reports and
monographs from Australia and the
southern Pacific covering the period
1800-1992/3. It does not cover the
general periodical literature i.e. scientific
journals like The Victorian Naturalist.

The package comes with seven pages of
notes covering hardware requirements, the
installation process (which is very
simple), as well as a brief overview of the
program and some key functions such as
searching the database.

Upon starting the program you face a
screaming Barn Owl and some program
options, the main one being Contents. On
selecting it you are presented with a
screen which mimics a book with sections
such as Foreword, Preface, Acknowledge-
ments, Books & Publications and Tutorial.

The main function and purpose of the
program is within the Books &
Publications section. Here there are four
options, the key ones being the related
Bird Publications and Browser. Selecting
Bird Publications presents you with a well
laid-out screen showing details of the first
publication with sections for author, title,
year published, contents and description
(physical) and on a separate page, region
(e.g. Australia, New Zealand, Hawaii),
category (e.g. checklist, field guide,
report, poetry) and topic (c.g. biology,
conservation, genetics, taxonomy). The
Browser presents the same information as
the Bird Publication function, except that
it is arranged as paragraphs rather than
fixed fields. I found Browser the better
way to peruse the data. ;

The publications are arranged alphabeti-
cally by author, and you can move

Vol. 113 (2) 1996

sequentially through them, or click on a
letter to move to the first author whose
name starts with that letter. For each letter
there is also an index of the first three
letters of the author’s name and you can
quickly jump to any of these. There is also
a simple search function that allows you to
query the database by author, title, year,
region, category and topic. While eventu-
ally becoming used to it, I did find the
search definition process to be somewhat
cumbersome and limiting in that you
cannot query all of the fields (e.g. you
cannot select a keyword from the contents
field) and, you can only conduct ‘and’
searches e.g. you cannot retrieve articles
by author Jones or Smith.

Another aspect that confused me is that
there are two databases covering Main and
Undated publications. A search of one
database did not necessarily find listings
in the other. Perhaps they could be
combined.

With many multimedia programs,
finding your way to the section you want
can be likened to navigating a maze, a
good feature in this program is that you
can click on a ‘?’ icon to give you a chart
of all the key functions and clicking on the
desired item takes you straight there.

The bibliography itself is very compre-
hensive (bearing in mind that the periodi-
cal literature is not covered). Overall, I
found the program to be easy-to-use and I
can recommend it to libraries and to any-
one with a need to search the literature on
Australian and Pacific birds.

Simon Bennett
DCNR 123 Brown Street,
Heidelberg, Victoria 3084

Book Reviews

Wilsons Promontory
Marine & National Park Victoria

by Geoff Wescott

Publisher: University of New South Wales Press, 1 995. RRP $24.95.

Geoff Wescott’s enthusiasm for Wilsons
Promontory spills from the pages of this
new book from UNSW Press. There is a
wealth of information about the Park to
keep any reader thoroughly engrossed for
hours: history, geology, vegetation, flora
and fauna, coasts, camping, walking - in
fact, just about everything you can see or
do in the Park. The section on human
impact, (which includes Aboriginal histo-
ry and post-European history) and the
marine life are especially welcome, as this
sort of information about the Park is not
readily available elsewhere. While the
content is clearly oriented to the local
visitor, interstate and overseas visitors are
well provided for with special information
relevant to them. The pages are full of
superb colour photographs that will make
even the seasoned Prom visitor itch to get
there.

Unfortunately, the positive aspects of
the book are marred by a number of
mistakes and surprising omissions. | also
found the layout very crammed and
confusing, but perhaps others may not find
this a problem.

The main map has numerous errors (for
example, it does not show the track
between Roaring Meg and South Point,
and it shows a continuous beach between
Millers Landing and Chinaman Long
Beach where only mangrove swamps and
tidal mudflats exist).

Spelling mistakes and typographical
errors, especially with scientific names of
plants and animals detract from the impact
of the book. There are also mistakes in
some figure captions.

While the major plant and animal
species are well described, there is no
mention of liverworts (at least 50 species),
lichens (other than those on coastal rocks)
or fungi (probably hundreds of species).
Sedges are an important part of the

Promontory flora, yet true sedges (Carex
species) are not mentioned at all. The idea
that Gahnia could be ‘like grasses at first
glance’ is rather interesting. I’ll be more
careful mowing the lawn next weekend.
An odd omission from the descriptions of
common seabirds is the Silver Gull, surely
the most common of the seabirds; it is
mentioned only in passing on page 122.

Walks are well described, with one
important exception. The cut-out track
from Five Mile Road (not Millers
Landing) to Chinaman Long Beach is not
one for inexperienced walkers, as it is
faint and often unmarked and passes
through Chinaman Swamp, which can be
chest-deep in spring: a far cry from ‘the
track can be damp after heavy rain’! A
notable omission is the fact that, during
peak holiday periods, Mt Oberon Road is
usually closed to day-trippers, and a free
shuttle bus runs between Tidal River and
Telegraph Saddle.

To top things off, the errors continue
into the index, including carrying over
spelling errors from the text, such as Poa
poainformis and Tetrahena lunea; and
misordering entries. The matter in tables is
not indexed, and often these contain the
only references to some items, such as
various rare plants and animals. There is
also no cross-indexing.

But perhaps all this can be set aside for
the majority of readers. The book is still
very much an essential addition to the
library for anyone planning a trip to the
Prom, or for anyone who simply wants to
know more about the Park, its history,
what it protects, and what it offers visitors.
Buy this book, but put away your dictio-
nary, buy a good map, and rely on addi-
tional advice from the National Parks
Service.

David Meagher

Department of Conservation and Natural Resources,
123 Brown Street, Heidelberg, Victoria 3084,

The Victorian Naturalist

Periodicals in the FNCV Library

Journals FNC Jour
F n
Australian Journal of Botany Basin a ee tence,
Australian Journal of Zoology Geelong Naturalist :
Australian Plants Junior Naturalist (Hawthorn Junior FNC)
Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural North Queensland Naturalist
History Queensland Naturalist

Fieldiana - Botany South Australian Naturalist
Fieldiana - Geology Western Australian Naturalist
Fieldiana - Zoology
eee for the Conservation of Newsletters

Nature Bulletin Australian i
Journal of the Adelaide Botanic Gardens Australian a ec tee
Journal of the Royal Society of Western Australia Conservation News
Kew Bulletin Environment Victoria
Memoirs of the Museum of Victoria Helmeted Honeyeater Newsletter
Memoirs of the Queensland Museum Heritage Newsletter
Molluscan Research History of Australian Science News
Muelleria Indigenotes
Occasional Papers of the Museum of Victoria In the Spotlight (Frog news)
Pacific Conservation Biology Marine Newsletter
Pacific Science Regent Honeyeater Newsletter
Papers and Proceedings of the Royal Society of | SGAP Newsletter

Tasmania University of Queensland, Department of
Proceedings of the Linnaean Society of New Geology - Papers

South Wales VPNA Newsletter

Proceedings of the Royal Society of New Zealand Whirrakee
Proceedings of the Royal Society of Queensland

Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria Magazines
Publications in Zoology (University of Australian Geographic
California) Country-side
Records of the Auckland Institute and Museum Habitat
Records of the Australian Museum Nature Australia
Records of the Canterbury Museum Outdoors (DCNR)
Records of the Queen Victoria Museum, Parkwatch
Launceston People and the Planet
Records of the South Australian Museum Trees and Natural Resources
The Australian Birdwatcher Tree Society Review (WA)
The Emu Wingspan

The Tattler (Australasian Wader Studies Group) Wildlife Australia
Transactions of the Royal Society of South

Australia
Wildlife Research

From the Editors
Interesting Articles

We feel that our members would appreciate a brief description on articles of interest
found in the journals held in the FNCV library. , ]

Are there cy members who would like to peruse the latest journals in the library a
others elsewhere) and write a few lines on any article that appeals to them?
Alternatively, if any one comes across an interesting article, please write a few lines

about it. Send these to:- oO
‘The Editors’ , The Victorian Naturalist, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130

These would be published in The Victorian Naturalist for the edification of our readers.

The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria

Established 1880
In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria
OBJECTIVES: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserye and protect
Australian flora and fauna.
Membership is open to any person interested in natural history and includes
beginners as well as experienced naturalists.

Registered Office: FNCV, | Gardenia Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130. Phone/Fax (03)9877 9860

Patron
His Excellency, The Honourable Richard E. McGarvie, The Governor of Victoria

Key Office-Bearers June 1995
President: Protessor ROBERT WALLIS, School of Aquatic Science and Natural Resources
Management, Deakin University (Rusden), Clayton, 3168. (03)9244 7278, Fax (03)9244 7403.
Hon. Secretary: Mr GEOFFREY PATERSON, I1 Olive Street, South Caulfield, 3162.
AH (03)9571 6436.
Hon. Treasurer: Mr ARNIS DZEDINS, PO Box 1000, Blind Bight, 3980. (059)987 996.
Subscription-Secretary: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, 3130. (03)9877 9860.
Editors, The Vic. Nat.: ED and PAT GREY, 8 Woona Court, Yallambie, 3085. (03)9435 9019.
Librarian: Mrs SHEILA HOUGHTON, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, 3130.
AH (054)28 4097,
Excursion Secretary: DOROTHY MAHLER, AH (03)9435 8408.
Sales Officer (The Victorian Naturalist); Mr D.E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East
Malvern, 3145. (03)9571 2427,
Book Sales: Dr ALAN PARKIN, FNCY, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, 3130. AH (03)9850 2617.
Publicity: Miss MARGARET POTTER, 1/249 Highfield Road, Burwood, 3125. (03)9889 2779.
Programme Secretary/Newsletter Editor: Dr NOEL SCHLEIGER, | Astley Street, Montmorency,
3094, (03)9435 8408.

Group Secretaries
Botany; Mr JOHN EICHLER, 18 Bayview Crescent, Black Rock, 3143. (03)9598 9492.
Geology: Mr DOUG HARPER, 33 Victoria Crescent, Mont Albert, 3127. (03)9890 0913.
Fauna Survey: Ms FELICITY GARDE, 18 College Parade, Kew, 3101. (03)9818 4684.
Microscopical: Mr RAY POWER, 36 Schotters Road, Mernda, 3754. (03)9717 3511.

The Victorian Naturalist

All material for publication to The Editors, FNCY, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130

SUBSCRIPTION RATES for 1996

(Subscriptions are due on | January.)
First Member
Metropolitan cecsicaiu.iaccusisaecartizscr speatesatrs Paces geyyt OiNers aves faaN Er aE TES Seer ee Pease $40
Concessional (pensioner/student/unemployed) $30
Country (more than 50km from GPO) ....c...c.00 $30
AM uke sh Abe Vol Sal RM YE sx ghey MPTOY Aes RP Oyen nec ccstetuccjhe gens etayeerree ore Renee Eaverivia $15
Additional Members
Palit ibs uve RHO et EUEMER KOC EET Een ROMER MTT Sentry tee curctlcatesie nea wodk $15
VATION sssssccasegpenhcassevaesizestvaecsdeeabaeaatiroctadeveacuf Safa oak ate setae ae a Rcd Cee eR eR $5
Institutional
AUStrAlr sity Ti StiGti OMS ss_2.,,castayscotsecssactsansscoetey eater sorter eenel ter tieett tee aera eRe ane careS $55
Overseas Institutions .. AUD $65

Schools/Clubs ...........00..

’ f i] f 7
Printed by Brown Prior Anderson, 5 Evans Street Burwood, Victoria 3125 i ~* F

Fe Ue eb ves

ele h i/ ae posal yng
e \ ; 9 hin Toe
.\ \ “YL 7100p

Victorian=_
Naturalist

Volume 113 S ee

Published by The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria
since 1884

Errata
Volume 113 (1) 1996, 4-9. Negative Effects of Fuel-reduction Burning on the
Habitat of the Grey-crowned Babbler Pomatostomus temporalis.

Page 6, column 1, line 4 and following should read -
the number of Golden Wattles was 23 times greater on the unburnt side than on the
burnt side of the road and the number of mature Golden Wattles more than | m tall
was 42 limes greater, Other wattle species showed similar patterns. The total number
of four wattle species (Bent-leaf Wattle A. flexifolia, Gold-dust Wattle A. acinacea,
Varnish Wattle A. verniciflua and Spreading Wattle A, genistifolia) was 9.4 times
greater on the unburnt side than on the burnt side, while the total number of these
wattle species more than | m high was 167 times greater on the unburnt side (Table
1). More...

Page 7, Table 1, final column heading should be - Unburnt / Burnt Ratio

Page 7, column 1, lines 4 and 7 - eval. Should be in italics

Page 7, column 1, para 2, lines 6 and 7 should read - ... there were fewer saplings
Page 8, column 1, para 1, lines 12 and 13 - Danthonia, Stipa and Elymus scaber
should be in italics
Page 8 column 1, para 2, line 9 should read - or which resulted in patches of
unburnt and burnt clumps of understorey vegetation

The Editors and Printers apologise for these errors and suggest that readers mark the
changes in their copy of the journal.

Wilsons Promontory Expedition
Friday 26 July - Monday 29 July

To celebrate the 100th anniversary of the death of Baron Ferdinand von Mueller, an
expedition has been organised to revisit sites and document the fungi and bryophytes
(mosses and liverworts) where Mueller collected in the 1850s. Leaders will be Bruce
Fuhrer, Tom May, David Meagher and Arthur Thies and a variety of collecting walks
and learning workshops will be included.

Accomodation is at the lodge at Tidal River or by making your own arrangements.
Contact Noel Schleiger (9435 8408) for bookings.

An Amazing and Lively Week-end is Assured.

Quark Xpress for PC’s

Do you know how to use Quark Xpress for IBM or compatible computers?
Ed and Pat would like to hear from you.

In the near future we will need to prepare The Victorian Naturalist on Quark
Xpress for our printer and we need help.

Please ring us on 94359019

The
ictorian
aturalist

Volume 113 (3) 1996 June

Editors: Ed and Pat Grey

Research Reports The Bryophyte Flora of Wilsons Promontory,

DYDOVIGEMC OBE U rixscccne, pate teal sce teat ate ate ee sence 84

Founder Effects in Some Victorian Wild Rabbit Populations,

by Rosamond Shepherd and J.W. Edmond .......cccccccccccceeees 98

Observations After a Fire in a Degraded Grassland,

Dy SON STCWATL x. coer rete. ta Contd shag tages. (ote re ghee ct aar at ets etes cae esate 102
Contributions Back to the Heart of the Mallee, by RJ. Fletcher ....c.cccccccccee 107
How to bea Marine Invertebrates, by Clarrie Handreck ....cccceeeeeseriiee 115
Field Naturalist
Naturalist Notes Lightning, Dy G.L. HOW1e ........c.ssscesssseeee ee eeee testes tententeitetesess 117

Middle Yarra Timelines, by G. Jameson,

Naturalist in RESidence ..cccccccscccsssscserssessseenecssseserseeseeneeeesensessenes 122
Book Reviews The Mosses and Liverworts of Rainforest in Tasmania and

south-Eastern Australia, by S.J. Jarman and B.A. Fuhrer,

reviewer Arthur Thies ...cccccccsescesecessserecceseeeetenseeesteeeesenenenenenetenss 97

A Field Guide to Australian Butterflies,

120

by Robert Fisher, reviewer Kelvyn DUN...

ISSN 0042-5184
Cover: Funaria hygrometrica under burn

Promontory, photo D. Meagher

t tea-tree near Chinaman Long Beach, Wilsons

Research Reports

The Bryophyte Flora of Wilsons Promontory
David Meagher'

Abstract

Wilsons Promontory was one of the founding regions for bryological studies in southern Australia.
Mosses and liverworts were first collected there by Ferdinand Mueller in 1853, and a succession of
collectors have added to the long list of species found there, This paper reviews the history of
bryophyte collections from Wilsons Promontory and presents the results of the author's recent sys-
tematic survey of bryophytes on the Promontory. The survey confirmed the presence of 122 moss
species and at least 55 liverwort species, Thirty-four mosses and 28 liverworts were recorded for
the first time from the Promontory, and another six mosses and seven liverworts were recorded for
the first time since the 1850s. Eighteen mosses and at least nine liverworts previously recorded
were not found in the 1994-95 survey. (The Victorian Naturalist 113 (3) 1996, 84-96)

Introduction

In the
Victoria's native flora, and especially that
of bryophytes, was in its infancy, despite
the extensive explorations of the region
that had taken place in the preceding 50
years. The few collections that had been
made had invariably found their way to
European herbaria, particularly the Kew
Gardens in London. But in 1852 a young
German botanist came to the Victorian
goldfields trom Adelaide to start a phar-
maceuuical business, fortuitously ata time
when Governor LaTrobe was searching
for a competent botanist to undertake the
first great survey of the Victorian flora
(Willis 1960).

Ferdinand Mueller, a doctor of philoso-
phy from Kiel University, was already
well known in Europe through his writings
on the South Australian flora and through
his donations to various European
herbaria, Thus Sir William Hooker, who
had been impressed by young Mueller’s
competence, did not hesitate to recom-
mend his appointment as Colonial
Botanist to LaTrobe (Willis 1960).
Mueller commenced his duties enthusiasti-
cally in 1853 by almost immediately head-
ing to the Victorian Alps on the first of
many botanical expeditions around the
state. From the Alps he headed south to
Port Albert and from there by ship to
Wilsons Promontory, where he stayed at
Sealers Cove (then the centre of a thriving
timber industry) during May 1853, collect-
ing and describing the flora of the wet
forests in that area,

Mueller must have found the area
particularly interesting, as he returned in
August 1854 and also ordered his assis-
tant, John Walter, to procure wood sam-
"18 Banool Road, Surrey Hills, Victoria 3127

1850s the knowledge of

ples from Sealers Cove in the winter of
1857, for an exhibition. Most of Mueller’s
bryophyte specimens lodged in the
National Herbarium, Melbourne, are
labelled ‘Sealers Cove’, the exceptions
often being labelled merely ‘Wilsons
Promontory’; the precise locations of his
bryophyte collections are thus unknown,
although he is known to have collected
vascular plants from around Sealers Cove,
Mt Hunter and Darby River. His collec-
tions from these trips included what were
probably the first significant collections of
bryophytes in Victoria - collections that
have remained the principal source of
information about Wilsons Promontory’s
bryophyte flora for over 140 years.

History of collections

Mueller’s collections in the 1850s num-
bered 45 moss and 19 liverwort species,
including perhaps some collected by
Walter (Gottsche 1880, Mueller 1882).
After Mueller, more than 70 years were to
pass before the next known collection of
mosses from the Promontory was made in
1925, when J.R. Leslie (Leslie 1925) visit-
ed the area and collected at least 30
species. Garnet (1971) suggested that
there might have been a collection from
the lighthouse area in 1874, but there are
no herbaria collections from that time or
location. In 1951 Jim Willis collected 45
species and further collections were made
by Coralie Skewes in 1953, Mary Gillham
(on Sandy Island) in 1959 and Sophie
Ducker in 1960.

These collections were the basis of the
lists of 85 mosses and 23 liverworts in
Ros Garnet’s ‘The Wildflowers of
Wilson's Promontory’, published in 1971.
The lists prepared by Jim Willis, then
Assistant Government Botanist, were the
result of considerable herbarium research

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

and personal field work, and represented
much more than a mere list of species:
they summarised the only knowledge
available of Promontory bryophytes from
nearly 120 years of collections, commenc-
ing with Mueller in 1853-54.

Another 11 mosses and 4 liverworts
were recorded by various researchers in
the following 20 years: T.M. Howard and
G.S. Hope in 1970 in their study of
Nothofagus forest (Howard and Hope
1970); David Ashton and Rohan Webb in
1976 in their study of granite outcrops
(Ashton and Webb 1976); George Scott in
1982 at Lilly Pilly Gully (MUCV
records); Chris Cargill (Pike) and Bruce
Fuhrer in 1982 in the northern section
(MUCV records); Arthur Thies in 1982
during an FNCV field trip (Thies 1982),
and subsequently (Thies all references),
and Evan Chesterfield et al. in 1990-92 on
the Yanakie Isthmus (Chesterfield ef al.
1995).

Collections have also been made on the
nearby islands, notably by Mary Gillham
in 1959 (Gillham 1961), J.S. Turner.
§.G.M. Carr and E.C.F. Bird in 1962
(Turner et al. 1962) and G.S. Hope and
G.K. Thomson in 1971 (Hope and
Thomson 1971, these records are included
in Appendices | and 2 for completeness).

The 1994-95 survey
Methodology

In early 1994 a systematic survey of
bryophytes on Wilsons Promontory com-
menced. By December 1995, 74 sites had
been surveyed, covering a complete sam-
ple of habitats present on Wilsons
Promontory (Fig. 1). Sites were chosen to
provide representative samples of broad
habitats (open forest, closed forest, fern
gully, granite outcrop, sand dune, sea-
shore meadow, swamp), and to ensure that
microhabitats within those broad habitat
types were sampled. Each site was limited
to an area no greater than 100 square
metres, and within that area all available
microhabitats were surveyed. For practical
purposes, most sites were located close to
tracks and roads, although several were
off-track. Incidental collections were made
of two species not recorded at survey sites:
Sphagnum cymbifolioides and Funaria
salsicola. Identifications were based on
descriptions and keys in Scott, Stone and

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

Rosser (1976), Catcheside (1980), Vit
(1980), Ando (1982), Scott (1985),
Lewinsky (1989), Touw and Falter van
den Haak (1989), Whitehouse and
Crundwell (1991), Beever et al. (1992)
and Frahm (1994),

As well as field surveys, collections in
the three major Victorian cryptogamic
herbaria (at the National Herbarium of
Victoria MEL, University of Melbourne
MELU and Monash University MUCV)
were searched for specimens from
Wilsons Promontory.

The islands of the National Park were
not surveyed, largely because of the diffi-
culty of access. They remain a potential
source of interesting finds for those will-
ing to make the effort.

Collections were made under National
Parks Service permits 934/118 and
945/121, and specimens representing new
records for the area have been lodged with
the National Herbarium, Melbourne.

Taxonomy

Nomenclature follows Streimann and
Curnow (1989) for mosses and Scott and
Bradshaw (1986) for liverworts, with the
following exceptions:

Lethocolea squamata is now Lethocolea
pansa ( Symposia Biologica Hungarica
35, 211) and

Tortula princeps is now Tortula antarc-
tica (Journal of the Hattori Laboratory 65,
81-144).

Because Scott and Stone (1976) is still
the major reference for identifying mosses
in southern Australia, the following
changes to nomenclature since its publica-
tion are given in Table |. Authorities are
given by Streimann and Curnow (1989).

Specimens that could not be determined
to species level (usually because there was
no fertile material) were identified to
genus level only. Groups in which taxo-
nomic difficulty arose were treated as fol-
lows:-

Bryum species. The genus Bryum pre-
sents considerable difficulties for most
bryologists, the distinguishing characters
generally being the colour, shape and size
of microscopic ‘tubers’ attached to rhi-
zoids in the soil. The identities of a num-
ber of Bryum specimens collected during
the survey need further investigation, sev-
eral more species probably occur on

Research Reports

Table 1. Nomenclature changes since Scott and Stone (1976).

Name in Scott and Stone (1976)

Barbula australasiae

Barbula torquata

Campylopus pallidus

Catagonium politum

Dicranaloma billarderii var. robustum
Eurhynchium muriculatum

Funaria gracilis

Funaria microstoma

Grimmia apocarpa

Macromitrium tenue

Macromitrium weymouthii
Rhizogonium mnioides

Rhizogonium parramattense
Sematophyllum amoenum

Tortella calycina

Wilsons Promontory. The spelling of
Bryum billardierei follows Jarman and
Fuhrer (1995).

Campylopus australis. A specimen
collected from the slopes of Mt Bishop
has remarkable similarities to herbaria
specimens of C. umbellatus, a tropical
Queensland species, but Dr Jan-Peter
Frahm (1994), an expert in Campylopus,
has identified the specimen as C. Australis
(pers. comm.). He advised that the species
might intergrade, or one might have
evolved from the other.

Drepanocladus aduncus s.l. This
species was found in a freshwater sea-
shore meadow on Corner Inlet. There
appear to be some differences between the
specimen and the type material of
Hypnum aduncum Hedw. (= D. aduncus).
The genus is soon to be revised, and this
specimen is likely to be placed under a
new name.

Fissidens australiensis. A Fissidens
specimen from a site on Mt Margaret
Track has been identified as F. australien-
sis. Earlier collections of this species are
certain to have been attributed to F. renel-
lus, since the two species are outwardly
similar (Stone 1990),

Hypnum cupressiforme. This species
presents particular difficulties because of
the enormous variation in its morphology.
Ando (1982) has gone a long way to
resolving the confusion by describing the
varieties found in our region, Howard and
Hope (1970) recorded Hypniun cupressi-
forme var. filiforme trom Nothofagus for-
est. on Wilsons Promontory. However, all
Promontory specimens that, on the face of

Name in Streimann and Curnow (1989)

Trichostomopsis australasiae
Didymodon torquatus

Campylopus pyriformis
Catagonium nitens subsp, nifens
Dicranoloma robustum
Rhyachostegiella muriculatum
Entosthodon subnudus var. gracilis
Funaria salsicola

Schistidium apocarpum
Macrocoma tenue subsp, tenue
Macromitrium microstomum
Pyrrhobryum mnioides
Pyrrhobryum parramattense
Rhapidorrhynchium amoenum
Barbula calycina

it, appear to be this variety seem always to
be H. cupressiforme var. mossmanianum.
I have assumed that this is also the case
for their record.

Macrocoma tenue subsp. tenue.
Streimann and Curnow (1989) follow Vitt
(1980) in transferrring Macromitrium
tenue to the new genus Macrocoma, and I
accept this view reluctantly. The erection
of a new genus largely on the basis of the
straightness of the leaves seems rather ten-
uous and unnecessary.

Results

The survey recorded 119 mosses,
including 34 new records for the
Promontory. This brings the total number
of moss species recorded for the
Promontory to 139, about 30% of the
known Victorian moss flora (Appendix 1).
Six of these were found for the first time
since Mueller collected them in the 1850s,
but 18 that were recorded previously were
not found.

Forty-five liverworts were recorded,
including 28 new records for the
Promontory, bringing the total number of
species recorded to 70, about 30% of the
known Victorian liverwort flora
(Appendix 2).

Several records from previous collections
were reviewed during the study, and the
following conclusions were drawn:

- The unconfirmed record of an
Andreaea species (probably from Mt
Oberon summit) listed in Garnet (1971) is
doubtful: the altitude (558 metres) is much
lower than other Andreaea records from
Victoria, the genus being mostly alpine or
subalpine; searches of a number of likely

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

Entrance Point

Tin Mine Point

Tin Mine Cove

Yanakie Beach

A Mt Hunter
A]

7g yanakie
/

x
~

| ~~ ’\ Lighthouse Point
A Mt Margaret

Chinaman Long Beach

Three Mile

‘
\a A Mt Roundback
N

Johnny Souey Cove

Miranda Ck
Couters Lake 3
A Mt Vereker
A Mt Latrobe
illy Pilly Gull eX
Whisky Bay sully py Sealers Swamp Sealers Cove
Picnic Bay
Picnic Point
keene ay We we Refuge Cove
¥

Pillar Point
LEGEND «
)

Norman Point
Wi sSurney Site

y Cape Wellington
Main Road 4 A Waterloo Bay

— =< Minor Road
== == Management Track
seeeseeeeee Walking Track
>—- Stream
<=> Lake
—=—. Swamp
A Mountain Peak es South Point

= = = = National Park Boundary

South East Point

kilometres

Fig. 1. Locations of bryophyte sampling sites, Wilsons Promontory National Park, 1994-95.

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

Research Reports

sites has failed to find any Andreaea
species, and the original specimen cannot
be located. I have therefore chosen not to
include it as a legitimate record for
Wilsons Promontory.

- Campylium polygamum was recorded
for the first time in Victoria by E. Leach
in 1972. The annotation on the original
specimen in MEL is: ‘fen behind Corner
Inlet, Wilsons Promontory National Park’.
However, the duplicate in MUCV is anno-
tated ‘Yanakie Beach, Victoria ... in
drainage channel in sand dunes’, and Scott
and Stone (1976) record the location as
‘not far from Wilsons Promontory’. The
likely location seems to be Yanakie Beach
or Red Bluff Beach, both well outside the
National Park. However, | have chosen to
let the record stand for Wilsons
Promontory, as it might well occur in the
marshy sands around Corner Inlet and
could easily be overlooked as a robust
form of Rhyncestegium tenuifolium.

- Mueller’s record of Sematophyllum
leucocytus is uncertain for the
Promontory, as the original specimen in
MEL 1s labelled merely ‘vicinity of
Wilson's Promontory’. However, I have
chosen to let it stand in the list as it is a
species that is likely to be present in
closed forest.

- A specimen collected by David
Ashton and provisionally identified as an
Andrewsianthus species (Ashton and
Webb 1976) is Cephaloziella exiliflora.
The specimen is in MUCY.,

- Mueller’s record of Blasia pusilla
from Sealers Cove is extremely doubtful.
Scott and Bradshaw (1986) note that the
species is otherwise exclusively found in
the northern hemisphere and this single
collection is therefore extremely improba-
ble, They suggest that the species should
be removed from the Australian list and |
have followed that suggestion here. The
specimen cannot be located.

- Mueller’s record of Riccardia multifi-
da (as Aneura multifida) is also doubtful,
as this is also an otherwise northern hemi-
sphere species, It is likely to have been
Riccardia bipinnatifida. This specimen,
too, cannot be located.

Discussion
Many species that are now common in
the area and easily found were not record-

ed by early collectors. They include sand-
country species such as Barbula crinita
and Didymodon torquatus, forest species
such as Bazzania involuta, Campylopus
clavatus, Fissidens tenellus, Isopterygium
limatum, Lophocolea muricata and
Pogonatum subulatum, widespread
species such as Gymnostomum calcareum,
Kurzia compacta, Triquetrella papillata
and Zoopsis argentea, and rocky outcrop
species such as Grimmia laevigata (Fig.
2), Jamesoniella colorata and
Rhacomitrium crispulum.

The lack of records of now-common
sand-country mosses might be due to the
changes in vegetation that have occurred
on the Promontory in the last 5O years,
particularly on the Yanakie Isthmus. For a
full description and discussion of these
changes, see Chesterfield e al. (1995).
The typically exposed, sandy areas of the
isthmus probably expanded under pressure
from grazing and burning, and the inva-
sion of banksia woodland by Coast Tea-
tree Leptospermum laevigatum may have
further contributed to the increase in
exposed areas, Fires, particularly the
severe fires in 1907 (Ewart 1909, 1910),
the early 1950s and to a lesser extent in
1961, may haye permanently altered many
forested areas, and the construction of
tracks, roads, firebreaks and utilities has
created bare soil and clay banks that can
be colonised by species such as Fissidens
tenellus, Lunularia cruciata and
Pogonatum subulatum, which otherwise
occur mainly on bare soils around the
roots of fallen trees, on the banks of
streams, on landslips and so on. In fact,
the track from Oberon Saddle to Sealers
Cove, along which many of these species

Fig. 2. Grimmia laevigata on southern slopes
of Mt Oberon.

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

are now common, was not constructed
until 1910. Bazzania involuta is very
common, especially in closed forest, and
its absence from early records is thorough-
ly inexplicable. Lophocolea muricata is
similarly common, but its smallness and
superficial resemblance to Lophocolea
semiteres might have led to it being over-
looked.

It is harder to explain the lack of early
records of common rocky outcrop species.
On Wilsons Promontory Grimmia laeviga-
ta is not as common as it is in similar habi-
tats in other parts of Victoria, but it is still
readily found. Rhacomitrium crispulum is
a reasonably common species on the high-
er exposed granite outcrops, and is not
likely to be confused with any other moss.

On the other hand, a number of species
that are commonly found in similar habi-
tats elsewhere in Victoria have not been
found in the present survey. They include
Goniobryum subbasilare, Grimmia
apocarpa, Conostomum pusillum, Crato-
neuropsis relaxa and Hypopterygium
rotulatum. Papillaria flavolimbata is a
moderately common epiphyte in Victorian
rainforests, but it too has not been found
in the current survey despite careful
searches in accessible typical habitat. It is
possible that fires and other more subtle
changes in local conditions (or even
human interference) may have brought
about its demise from these sites, but it is
likely to still occur in protected areas of
less accessible fern gullies and rainforest.
Hypnodendron comosum is a very distinc-
tive species and is unlikely to be over-
looked or mistaken for any other species.
Mueller’s superb specimen is in the
National Herbarium of Victoria (MEL). It
is quite possible that this species still
occurs in unburnt rainforest on the eastern
side of the Promontory, although initial
searches have failed to find it.
Polytrichadelphus magellanicus, normally
a common coloniser of damp clay banks,
seems not to be at all common on the
Promontory. Arthur Thies has recorded it
from the slopes of Mt Oberon and I have
found it at only one site on the east coast.

At least eight liverworts were nol redis-
covered in the 1994-95 survey. They
include Trichocolea mollissima, Gack-
stroemia weindorferi and Schistochila

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

lehmanniana, all liverworts of Nothofagus
forest and thus likely to be present in the
rainforests of the eastern Promontory.
Frullania pentapleura occurs mainly on
tocks in river valleys, Lepidozia obtusilo-
ba is likely to be found on montane rocks,
and Pallavicinia spinosa might be found
on wet open ground in higher areas.

Typical bryophytes of broad vegetation
types

From the sites surveyed it is possible to
describe a set of species that are typical of
broad vegetation types on the Promontory.
These lists should be treated only as
guides to the species most likely to be
found in these habitats; bryophytes rely
for the most part on particular microhabi-
tats for their survival. Vegetation descrip-
tions are derived from CFL (1987) and
personal observations. Vascular nomen-
clature follows Ross (1993) and the
updates of the National Herbarium,
Melbourne.

Granite outcrops

Devonian granite outcrops are very
common throughout the Promontory,
especially above about 160 metres alti-
tude. These outcrops do not carry a typical
vascular flora because they occur in virtu-
ally all broad habitat types. The rocks pro-
vide perhaps the only substratum where
bryophytes can grow without competition
from vascular plants, although they do
compete to a great degree with lichens.
Species marked with an asterisk (*) grow
only (or almost only) on rock. The other
species require some soil, but are still typ-
ical of this habitat.

No species can be said to be dominant
on granite outcrops, but perhaps
Campylopus bicolor is the most common
on large, flat outcrops where water runs
off slowly and there is some soil. On boul-
ders the more common species are
Dicnemoloma pallidum, Frullania pro-
bosciphora, Grimmia tricophylla,
Hedwigia integrifolia and Rhacomitrium
crispulum,

Campylopus species dominate shaded
and lower granite outcrops on the
Promontory, Campylopus bicolor being
noticeably dominant on flat, exposed
rocks. The cover on rocks is sometimes
close to 100 per cent, especially where

Research Reports

Thuidium furfurosum 1s present.
Dicnemoloma pallidum is common on
boulders north of Tidal River, but not
common in southern areas. Grimmia
species occur sporadically but are not as
prominent as they are on and north of the
Great Dividing Range.

Bryophytes found on exposed granite tops

Lophocolea semiteres

Rhacomitrium crisp-
ulum*

Rhacoecarpus pur
purascens*

Sematophyllum homo-
mallum

Thuidium sparsum

Campylopus bicolor

Campylopus clavatus

Campylopus intro-
flexus

Frullania probosei-
phora*

Grimmia laevigaia*

Grimmia tricophylla*

Hedwigia integrifolia*

Bryophytes found on rocks in shade or at lower
altitudes

Dicnemoloma pallidum*

Hedwigia integrifolia*

Lophocolea semiteres

Sematophylhan homo-
mallum

Thuidiun furfurosum

Breutelia affinis
Bryum billardierei
Campylopus bicolor
Campylopus clavatus
Campylopus intro-
flexus

Open forests

Open eucalypt forest dominates the
granitic central spine of the Promontory.
The dominant vascular species are
Messmate Stringybark Eucalyptus obliqua,
Brown Stringybark £. baxteri and Yellow
Stringybark FE. muelleriana. On the
Promontory much of this forest type has
been altered by fires. The tall trees that
once grew in these forests have been
replaced by Prickly Moses Acacia verticil-
lata, Tree Everlasting Ozothamnus ferrug-
ineus, Hazel Pomaderris Pomaderris
aspera and Musk Daisy-bush Olearia
argophylla. Areas of the once-common
Smithton Peppermint E. nitida (previously
thought to have been Shining Peppermint
E. willis, D. Rankin, pers, comm,) and
Mountain Ash £. regnans still occur in less
inaccessible areas, mostly on the eastern
side of the Promontory. Isolated stands of
Drooping She-oak Allocasuarina verticilla-
ta occur on drier granite ridges and slopes.

Closed forests and fern gullies

Closed forests, which were once more
widespread on the Promontory, are now
confined to unburnt areas on the east coast
and to sheltered gullies and alluvial flats
in other areas. Lilly Pilly Aemena smithii
and Blackwood Acacia melanoxylon are
dominant species at lower altitudes, but

Lee

Typical bryophytes of open forests, albeit
occurring in a range of microhabitats.

Acrocladium chlamy-
dophyllum

Bryum billardierei

Campylopus intro-
flexus

Campylopus pyri-
formis

Cephaloziella exili-
flora

Ceratodon purpureus

Dicranoloma bil-
lardierei

Dicranoweisia micro-
carpa

Fissidens oblong-
ifolius

Gymnostomum cal-
careum

Hypnwm cupressi-
forme

lsopterygium limatum

Kurzia compacta

Lophocolea semiteres

Pogonatum subulatum

Polytrichum juniper-
inum

Ptychomnion acicu-
lare

Rhacopilum convolu-
taceum

Rhyncostegium tenui-
folium

Sematophyllum amoe-
num

Sematophyllum homo-
mallum

Symphogyna
podophylla

Tayloria octoble-
pharis

Thuidium furfurosum

Thuidium sparsum

Triquetrella papillata

Zoopsis argentea

Zoopsis leitgebiana

Zygodon menziesii

Metzgeria furcata

Blackwood gives way to Sassafras
Atherosperma moschatum in higher areas
and to Myrtle Beech Nothofagus cunning-
hamii in sheltered catchments and gullies.

Some of the closed forests of the
Promontory represent the southernmost
extension of our warm temperate rain-
forests, and are thus of considerable scien-
tific importance (Howard and Hope 1970;
CFL 1987). Lilly Pilly and Myrtle Beech
are codominant in sheltered sites on the
eastern side of the Promontory, forming
an unusual meld of warm temperate and
cool temperate rainforest. Myrtle Beech
was once widespread on the Promontory,
but in the last 5000 years has contracted to
small, sheltered areas (Howard and Hope
1970). The fires of 1907 left few Myrtle
Beech stands unscathed, and although
most appear to have recovered, the effect
on the bryophyte flora is unknown.

In fern gullies the understorey is usually
dominated by Soft Tree-ferns Dicksonia
antarctica, and Slender Tree-ferns
Cyathea cunninghamii are not uncommon
in some areas. Some easily accessible fern
gullies appear to have been degraded by
the construction of tracks and the unavoid-
able trampling and abrasion to which
bryophytes are particularly susceptible.
Lilly Pilly Gully, in particular, is notice-
ably more depauperate in bryophytes than

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports
the less accessible comparable areas on
the eastern side of the Promontory,

Typical bryophytes of closed forests (other than
fern gullies)

Atrichum androgynum
Bazzania involuta
Breutelia affinis

Lophocolea muricata
Lophocolea semiteres
Metzgeria furcata

Campylopus Plagiochila fasci-
introflexus culata

Cephaloziella exili- Pogonatum subulatum
flora Ptychomnion acicu-

Chiloscyphus argutus | lare

Cyathophorum bulb- | Pyrrhobryum

mnioides
Radula buccinifera
Rhacopilum convolu-
taceum
Rhizogonium dis-

osum

Dawsonia superba

Dicranoloma men-
ziesit

Fissidens asplenioides

Fissidens oblongi- tichum

folius Rhyncostegium
Fissidens tenellus tenuifolium
Hypnum cupressi- Sematophyllum

forme
Isopterygium limatum
Kurzia compacta

amoenum
Sematophyllum homo-
mallum

Lepidozia ulothrix Symphogyna
sp. agg. podophylla
Leptostomum Thuidium furfurosum
inclinans Tylimanthus tenellus

Wijkia extenuata
Zoopsis argentea
Zoopsis leitgebiana

Leucobryum can-
didum
Lophocolea bidentata

Typical bryophytes of fern gullies.
Achrophyllum denta- | Leptostomum incli-

tum nans
Bryum billardierei Leptotheca gau-
Catagonium politum dichaudii
Chiloscyphus argutus | Leucobryum can-
Cyathophorum bulbo- | didum

Lophocolea bidentata
Lophocolea muricata
Lophocolea semiteres
Metzgeria furcata
Plagiochila fasci-

sum

Dicranoloma men-
ziesii

Distichophyllum
microcarpum

Fissidens taylorii culata

Fissidens tenellus Sematophyllum

Hymenodon pilifer amoenum

Hypnodendron Symphogyna
vitiense podophylla

Hypnum cupressi- Thuidium furfurosum
forme

Heaths and heathy woodlands

Heaths and heathy woodlands occur on
infertile soils, in areas exposed to salt
spray and wind, and in areas with little
topsoil. On the western side of the
Promontory these areas occur largely on
calcareous sandy soils, while on the east-
ern side they are mainly on siliceous
sandy soils. In the northern Promontory,
Saw Banksia Banksia serrata is the domi-

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

nant species, although Coast Tea-tree
Leptospermum laevigatum is advancing
across large areas that have not been burnt
for a long time. This advancing tea-tree is
particularly noticeable near Fell Swamp.
Eucalypts, particularly Brown Stringybark
E. baxteri, are scattered through the
heathy woodland.

Typical bryophytes of heaths and heathy wood-
lands.

Barbula calycina
Barbula crinita
Bryum billardierei
Ceratodon purpureus
Didymodon torquatus
Gymnostomum cal-
careum
Kurzia compacta
Lophocolea semiteres

Rhacopilum convolu-
taceum

Sematophyllum homo-
mallum

Thuidium sparsum

Tortula papillosa

Triquetrella papillata

Zygodon menziesii

Grasslands
The southern part of the Yanakie Isthmus
supports extensive grasslands, probably
formed as a result of regular burning and
cattle grazing. The flats behind Oberon Bay
were also once used for grazing, and still
support a population of feral deer.
Introduced grasses and weeds are common
in these areas: Perennial Rye-grass Lolium
perenne, Dog’s Tails Cynosurus spp., Cat’s-
ear Hypochoeris radicata, Suckling Clover
Trifolium dubium and Ribwort Plantago
lanceolata. The dominant native species is
Blady Grass /mperata cylindricata.
Coastal cliffs support a distinctive
grassland dominated by Blue Tussock-
grass Poa poiformis. There are also small
tussock grasslands in wind-blown areas
such as Windy Saddle, usually dominated
by Tussock-grass Poa labillardierei.
Bryophytes are often abundant in grass-
lands, but are mostly pleurocarpous (weft-
forming) because there is little bare soil
for acrocarpous (tuft-forming) mosses to
colonise. Grasslands support the only
known introduced bryophyte on the
Promontory, Brachythecium albicans.
Typical bryophytes of the grasslands.
Brachythecium albi- | Hypnum cupressi-
forme
Lophocolea semiteres
Thuidium sparsum

cans =,
Bryum billardieret

Sand dunes

Wilsons Promontory supports large
areas of sand-dune vegetation. On the
western side these dunes are calcareous,

Research Reports

while on the eastern side they are
siliceous. New dunes are colonised by
Sea-wheat Grass Agropyron junceum,
Hairy Spinifex Spinifex hirsutus and
Marram Grass Ammophila arenaria; the
last species being an introduction to help
stabilise shifting dunes in many coastal
areas in Victoria. Older dunes are
colonised by Coast Everlasting
Ozothamnus turbinatus and Coast Datsy-
bush Ofearia axillaris. Coast Banksia
Banksia integrifolia and Drooping She-
oak Allocasuarina verticillata may
colonise older dunes.

Typical bryophytes of the sand dunes.

Sematophyllum homo-
mallum

Tortula antarctica

Tortula papillosa

Zygodon menziesii

Barbula calycina
Campylopus
introflexus
Ceratodon purpureus
Didymodon torquatus
Lophocolea semiteres

Turner et al. (1962) recorded 11
bryophytes from sand dunes on Sandy
Island in Corner Inlet: Barbula calycina,
Brachythecium salebrosum, Bryum affine,
Bryum — pachytheca, Campylopus
introflexus, Ceratodon purpureus,
Funaria hygrometrica, Hypnum cupressi-
forme, Lophocolea semiteres,
Sematophyllum homomallum and Tortula
antarctica.

Swamps

Swamps were once widespread on the
Promontory, but fires, early timber
harvesting. cattle grazing and altered
drainage patterns have reduced many,
such as Sealers Swamp and Chinamans
Swamp. Swamp Paperbark Melaleuca eri-
cifolia, Scented Paperbark Melaleuca
squarrosa and Woolly Tea-tree
Leptospermum lanigerum dominate the
swamp flora. Bog Gum Eucalyptus kitso-
niana and Swamp Gum E ovata occur
occasionally. Sedges, rushes and reeds
grow in the more permanently water-
logged swamps, such as at Darby River
and Five Mile Swamp. Bryophytes are
generally absent from swamps on the
Promontory, mostly occurring sporadical-
ly as epiphytes (e.g. Hypnum cupressi-
forme, Lophocolea semiteres). Sphagnum
cymbifolioides occurs sporadically in the
northern section of the Promontory, prin-
cipally in or alongside small creeks
emerging from tea-tree thickets.

Sea-shore meadows

A single freshwater sea-shore meadow
is known on Corner Inlet, but others are
likely to occur. It consists of a grassy bog
fed by a spring at the base of the foredune.
Although regularly inundated with saltwa-
ter and permanently exposed to saline
spray, this meadow supports several
bryophyte species.
The most abundant species in the sea-shore
meadows.

Rhacopilum convolu-
taceum

Sematophyllum homo-
mallum

Thuidium furfurosum

Drepanocladus
aduncus s.1.
Hypnum cupressi-

forme

Conservation status of species

Little is known of the conservation sta-
tus of bryophytes in Australia because of
the general lack of distribution and abun-
dance data. There is no published list of
bryophytes that are threatened nationally,
but there is a list of rare species for
Victoria (Stone 1989). Seven mosses and
two liverworts known from Wilsons
Promontory are considered to be rare in
Victoria (Table 2).

In addition, 25 mosses and 18 liverworts
are considered by the author to be locally
rare because (a) they have been recorded
from only one locality on the Promontory,
or (b) they have not been recorded on the
Promontory within the last 50 years (Table
3). This ‘locally threatened’ list perhaps
reflects the paucity of data as much as the
true conservation status of some of these
species, and the local status of some
species will no doubt change as further
records are gathered.

Table 2. Species considered to be rare in Victoria
Mosses
Dicranoweisia micro-
carpa
Distichophyllum micro-
carpum
Echinodium hispidum
Eriopus apiculatus
Eriopus brownii

Fissidens humilis
Weymouthia coch-
learifolia

Liverworts
Fossombronia alata
Lepidozia obtusiloba

Acknowledgements

Iam indebted to Dr George Scott for encour-
aging my interest in bryophytes and for teach-
ing me most of what I know of them. George
helped with field work, identified many of the
liverwort specimens, provided important refer-
ences, and confirmed a number of difficult
mosses.

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

Mosses
Bartramidula pusilla

Brachythecium sale-
brosum
Bryum affine

Bryum sp. aff. alpinum

Bryum dichotomum

Campylium polyga-
mum
Cratoneuropsis relaxa

Drepanocladus adun-
cus 8.1.
Echinodium hispidum

Entosthodon subnudus
var. gracilis
Eriopus brownti

Fissidens humilis

Goniobryum subbasi-
lare

Holomitrium
perichaetiale

Hypnodendron como-
sum

Macromitrium archeri

Macromitrium micros-
tomum
Philonotis scabrifolia

Pohlia nutans

Pseudoleskea imbri-
cata

Rhyncostegiella
muriculatum

Sauloma tenella

Table 3. Species considered to be locally rare.

recorded from one site
since 1853

recorded from one site,
in 1962

recorded from one site
since 1853

recorded from one site,
in 1995

recorded from one site,
in 1972

recorded from one site,
in 1951

recorded from one site,
in 1995

recorded from one site,
in 1960

recorded from one site,
in 1994

recorded from one site,
in 1995

recorded from one site,
in 1953

recorded from one site
since 1853

not recorded since
1925

recorded from one site
since 1853

recorded from one site,
in 1994

recorded from one site,
in 1970

recorded from one site,
in 1994

recorded from one site,
in 1995

Schistidium apocarpa

Sematophyllum leuco-
cytus
Sphagnum cristatum

Liverworts
Anthoceros ?laevis

Asterella drummondii
Chaetophyllospis
whiteleggei
Cheilolejeunea
?mimosa
Chiloscyphus argutus
Diplasiolejeunea pli-
catiloba
Fossombronia alata
Frullania deplanata
Frullania pentapleura
Goebelobryum
unguiculatum
Lejeunea guaniana
Lepidozia obtusiloba
Lophocolea ?minor
Lophocolea ?biciliata
Megaceros gracilis
Pallavicinia spinosa

Riccardia multifida

Riccia sp.

Thanks are also due to: Lucille Turner of the
Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmental
Research (ARIER) for her advice, support, and
help on field trips;

Jane Dickins, Phil

Wierzbowski, Annette Muir, Susie Duncan, Sue
Berwick and Jill Smith (ARIER) and Barry
Traill and Stephen Patterson for their support
on field trips; Vin Wright, Craig McKenzie, Jim
Whelan and Paul McDiarmid of the National
Parks Service for their support and assistance
during the field work; Dr Helen Ramsay of the
State Herbarium of NSW and Dr John Spence
(Canada) for the use of their unpublished keys
to the Australian Bryaceae being prepared for
the Flora of Australia; Dr Lars Hedenas
(Sweden) for identifying Drepanocladus adun-
cus §.l,, Hisa Ando (Japan) for confirming
Hypnum cupressiforme var. mossmanianum; Dt
Jan-Peter Frahm (Netherlands) for identifying
C. australis, Dr H.L.K. Whitehouse (England)

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

not recorded since
1853

recorded from one
site, in 1953

recorded from one
site, in 1995

recorded from one
site, in 1982

recorded from one
site, in 1995

not recorded since
1853

recorded from one
site, in 1994

recorded from one
site, in 1982

recorded from one
site, in 1995

not recorded since
1853

recorded from one
site, in 1995

recorded from one
site, in 1976

recorded from one
site, in 1994

recorded from one
site, in 1995

recorded from one
site, in 1960

not recorded since
1853

recorded from one
site, in 1994

for confirming Gymnostomum calcareum, Dr
David Ashton for his advice about Sphagnum
cymbifolioides at Wilsons Promontory; David
Rankin (ARIER) for advice on Eucalyptus niti-
da, The Botany Department, University of
Melbourne, for access to the cryptogam collec-
tion: The Botany Department, Monash
University, for access to the cryptogam collec-
tion, and especially Chris Cargill for her help:
The National Herbarium of Victoria for access
to the cryptogam collection, and especially Dr
Tom May for his help and advice; The National
Parks Service, Victoria, for permission to col-
lect material within the National Park.

Bibliography
Ando, H. (1982). Hypnum in Australasia and the
southern Pacific. Journal of the Hattori Botanical

Laboratory 52, 93-106. ;
Athlon, DH. and Webb, R.N. (1976). The ecology ol

tte

Research Reports

granite outcrops at Wilsons Promontory. Australian
Journal of Ecology 2, 269-96.

Beever, J., Allison, K.W. and Child, J. (1992), “The
Mosses of New Zealand’. (University of Otago
Press: Dunedin).

Catcheside, D.G, (1980). ‘Mosses of South Australia’.
(Government Printer: Adelaide).

CEL (1987). ‘Wilsons Promontory National Park
Management Plan’. (Department of Conservation,
Forests & Lands: Melbourne).

Chesterfield, E.A., ‘Trumbull-Ward, A., Hopmans, P.
and Whelan, J, (1995). Early changes in vegetation
from a grazing trial on Yanakie Isthmus, Wilsons
Promontory National Park. Flora and Fauna
Technical Report No. 139. (Department of
Conservation & Natural Resources; Melbourne),

Cropper, 8.C., Tonkinson, D.A, and Scott, G.A.M.
(1991), *A Census of Victorian Bryophytes’.
(Department of Conservation & Environment:
Melbourne).

Entwisle, T. (ed.) (1994). ‘Aquatic Cryptogams of
Australia: a Guide to the Larger Fungi, Lichens,
Macroalgae, Liverworts and Mosses of Australian
Inland Waters’, Special Publication No, 10.
(Australian Society for Limnology: Melbourne).

Ewart, A.J. (1909), Biological survey of Wilson’s
Promontory. First report. The Victorian Naturalist
25, 142-49,

Ewart, A.J. (1910). Biological survey of Wilson’s
Promontory. Second report, The Victerian
Naturalist 26, 129-32.

Frahm, J-P, (1994). A new synopsis of the

Campylopus species from Australia, Journal of

Bryology 18, 311-27.
Garnet, J. Ros (1971). ‘The Wildflowers of Wilson's
Promontory National Park’, (Lothian: Melbourne).
Gillham, M.E. (1961), Plants and sea birds of granite

islands in south-eastern Victoria. Proceedings of

the Royal Society of Victoria 74, 21-36.

Gottsche (1880), ‘Fragmenta Phytographiae
Australiae’, Volume IL - supplement. (Government
Printer: Melbourne).

Hope, G,S. and Thomson, G.K. (1971). The vegetation

of Cliffy Island, Victoria, Australia. Proceedings of

the Royal Saciety of Victoria 84, 121-27.

Howard, T.M. and Hope, G.S, (1970). The present and
past occurrence of Nothofagus cunninghamit Oerst
at Wilson's Promontory, Victoria, Australia.
Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria 83,
199-209,

Jarman, S.J. and Fuhrer, BLA. (1995). *Mosses and

Liverworts of Rainforest in Tasmania and South-
eastern Australia’. (CSIRO: Melbourne).
Leslie, J,R. (1925), Mosses of Wilson's Promontory.

Victorian Naturalist 42, 116-17.

Lewinsky, J, (1989). Zygodon Hook. & Tayl. in
Australasia: a taxonomic revision including SEM-
studies of peristomes. Lindbergia 15, 109-39,

Norman, F.L. (1967). The interaction of plants and ani-
mals on Rabbit Island, Wilsons Promontory
National Park, Victoria, Proceedings of the Royal
Society of Victoria 80, 193-200.

Mueller, F. (1882). ‘Fragmenta Phytographiae
Australiae’. (Government Printer: Melbourne).

Ross, J.H. (1993). ‘A Census of the Vascular Plants of

Victoria’. 3rd edn. (National Herbarium:
Melbourne).
Scott, G.A.M. (1985). ‘Southern Australian

Liverworts’. Australian Flora and Fauna Series No.
2, (AGPS: Canberra).

Scott, G.A.M. and Bradshaw, J.A. (1986). Australian
liverworts (Hepaticae): annotated list of binomials
and check-list of published species with bibliogra-
phy. Brunonia 8, 1-171.

Scott, G.A.M. and Stone, I. (1976), ‘Masses of
Southern Australia’. (Academic Press: London).
Stone, I.G. (1989). List of rare and threatened
bryophytes (Appendix 3). Jn ‘Flora and Fauna
Guarantee Procedure Manual’. (Department of

Conservation, Forests and Lands; Melbourne).

Stone, 1.G. (1990). Fissidens, sections Crispidium,
Amblyorhallia and Serridium and subgenus
Pachyfissidens in Australasia; some taxonomic
changes and a key to species.

Streimann, H.G. and Curnow, J. (1989), ‘Catalogue of
Mosses of Australia and its External Territories’.
Australian Flora and Fauna Series No, 10. (AGPS:
Canberra),

Thies, A.W. (1982). The Centenary Expedition of the
FNCV 1-8 November 1980. The Victorian
Naturalist 99, 78. (See also The Victorian
Naturalist for years 1983, 1984, 1986, 1990).

Touw, A. and Falter-van den Haak, L. (1989).
Australasian Thuidaceae (Musci), Journal of the
Hatiori Botanical Laboratory 67, |-57.

Turner, J.S., Carr. S.G.M. and Bird, E.C.F. (1962).
The dune succession at Corner Inlet, Victoria.
Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria 75,
17-34.

Viu, D.H. (1980), The genus Macrocoma I,
Typification of names and taxonomy of the species.
The Bryologist 83, 405-36.

Whitehouse, H.L,K. and Crundwell, A.C. (1991).
Gymnostomum calcareum Nees & Hornsch, and
allied plants in Europe, North Africa and the
Middle East, Journal of Bryology 16, 561-79.

Willis, J.H. (1960). Botanical science in Victoria 100
years ago, Proceedings of the Royal Society of
Victoria 73, 41-45.

Fig. 3. Dicranoloma dicarpum. A new record
for Wilsons Promontory.

Fig. 4. Funaria hygrometrica at Tin Mine
Cove track,

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

Appendix 1. Mosses recorded from Wilsons Promontory National Park

x =not found in 1994-95

nl = new species record for Wilsons Promontory

*= introduced

The following letters refer to records derived from vari ; i j
FA otal se ManGaal Hitec Ree ya various sources, including searches of the the cryptogamic
nies m of Victoria (MEL), University of Melbourne (MELU) and Monash Daivetsiy
V =F Mueller 1853; L = JR Leslie 1925; W = JH Willi
= i pled [ ;W= is 1951; A= DH Ashton 1951+; 5 =S / 7
Boon oe aie pa eyes 1960; B = JS Turner, SGM Carr & ECF Bird ned H Sir tenets
gS ree : if ie ac 1972; X = DH Ashton and RN Webb 1976; P = DC Pike and BA Fuhre 1982
= cott ; T = AW Thies 1982+; C = Chesterfield er al. 1992; M=DA Meagher 1994-95 ¥ r

poorer oo

Acrocladium chlamydophyllum M

Achrophyllum dentatumn VLWSM
Atrichum androgynum VLWTM
Barbula calycina VBXZCM
Barbula crinita TCM
Bartramidula pusilla SM
Brachythecium albicans M
Brachythecium rutabulum ZM
Brachythecium salebrosum B
Breutelia affinis VWSGDXTM
Bryum affine VB
Bryum sp. aff. alpinum M
Bryum billardierei VLWSGDHXTCM
Bryum campylothecium XM
Bryum capillare VM
Bryum ?crassum P
Bryum dichotomum M
Bryum chrysoneuron VM
Bryum pachytheca WSBM
Calyptogon mnioides T™
Camptochaete arbuscula VWSHTM
Camptochaete gracilis $

Campylium polygamum ¥
Campylopus australis M
Campylopus bicolor WSDXM

Campylopus bicolor var. ereciticola AM
Campylopus clavatus AM
Campylopus introflexus VLWSGBXTM
Campylopus introflexus var. muticous

Campylopus pyriformis VLWSATM
Catagonium nitens subsp. nitens VSAXM
Ceratodon purpureus LWSBAM
Conostomum pusillum WS
Cratoneuropsis relaxa W
Cyathophorum bulbosum VLSHM
Dawsonia superba VLWSDM
Dicnemoloma pallidum VWAXTM
Dicranoloma billardierei VLWSPTM
Dicranoloma dicarpum M
Dicranoloma menziesii VSHM
Dicranoloma platycaulon M
Dicranoloma robustum M
Dicranoweisia microcarpa M
Didymodon torquatus CM
Distichophyllum crispulum M
Distichophyllum microcarpum LWSM
Distichophyllum pulchellum SM
Ditrichum cylindricarpum M
Ditrichum difficile LSXTM
Drepanocladus aduncus s.L. M
Echinodium hispidum i M
Entosthodon subnudus vat. gracilis D
Eriopus apiculatus ™
Eriopus brownii M
Fissidens australiensis M
Fissidens asplenioides eu

Fissidens humilis

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

Fissidens leptocladus

Fissidens oblongifolius M
Fissidens pallidus LSTM
Fissidens pungens DM
Fissidens taylorii SM
Fissidens tenellus 7M
Funaria hygrometrica LWSBM
Funaria salsicola M
Gigasperma repens SAM
Goniobryum subbasilare 5
Grimmia laevigata XM
Grimmia pulvinata WM
Grimmia tricophylla M
Gymnostomum calcareum WM
Hedwigia ciliata WDXM
Hedwigia integrifolia LWXTM
Holomitrium perichaetiale VM
Hymenodon pilifer VLWSM
Hypnodendron comosum VL
Hypnodendron spininervium M
Hypnodendron vitiense VLWSHM
Hypnum cupressiforme VWSBHXTM

Hypnum cupressiforme Vat. mossmanianumHM.
Hypnum cupressiforme var. lacunosum
Hypopterygium rotulatum VWs

Isopterygium limatum WM
Lembophyllum divulsum VWSM
Leptostomum inclinans VHM
Leptotheca gaudichaudit LSM
Leucobryum candidum VWSHAPTM
Lopidium concinnum VLWM
Macromitrium archeri VM
Macromitrium hemitrichodes Vv
Macromitrium microstomum M
Macrocoma tenue subsp. tenue VSM
Mittenia plumula STM
Orthodontium lineare ™
Orthotrichum tasmanicum M
Papillaria flavolimbata VH
Philonotis scabrifolia H
Philonotis tenuis SM
Pleuridium nervosum x
Pogonatum subulatum ™
Pohlia nutans M
Polytrichadelphus magellanicus LTM
Polytrichum juniperinum es

Pseudoleskea imbricata
Ptychomitrium australe M
Ptychomitrium mittenii M
Ptychomnion aciculare VLWSHATM
Pyrrhobryum mnioides VM
Pyrrhobryum parramattense M
Rhacomitrium crispulum DHXM
Rhacocarpus purpurascens SDAXTM
Rhacopilum convolutaceum LWSAGCM
Rhapidorrhynchium amoenum VWXM
Rhizogonium distichum VLWM

Research Reports

Appendix 1 cont.

Rhizogonium novaehollandiae
Rhyncostegiella muriculatum
Rhyncostegium laxatum
Rhyncostegium tenuifolium
Sauloma tenella

Schistidium apocarpum Vv
Sematophyllum homomallumVLWGB any

VLM
VWSM
M

Sematophyllum jolliffii
Sematophyllum leucocytus
Sphagnum cristatum
Sphagnum cymbifolioides
Tayloria octoblepharis
Thamnobryum pumilum

Thuidium sparsum
Tortella cirrhata

Tortula muralis

Tortula papillosa

Tortula antarctica
Trichostomopsis australasiae
Triquetrella papillata
Weissia controversa
Weymouthia cochlearifolia
Wijkia extenuata

Zygodon intermedius
Zygodon menziesii
Zygodon minutus

VLWSGTM
M

T™T™
VCM

Thuidium furfurosum

Appendix 2. Liverworts recorded from Wilsons Promontory National Park
x =not found in 1994-95 n= new species record for Wilsons Promontory

The following letters refer to records derived from various sources, including searches of the the cryptogamic
herbaria at the National Herbarium of Victoria (MEL), University of Melbourne (MELU) and Monash University
(MUCV). V =F Mueller 1853; U = Audas & St John 1908; W =JH Willis 1951; S = SC Skewes 1953; G=M
Gillham 1959; D = S Ducker 1960; H = TM Howard and GS Hope 1970; X = DH Ashton and RN Webb 1976; P
= DC Pike and BA Fuhrer 1982; M = DA Meagher 1994-95

mosses of Southern Australia’, (Academic Press:
London).

Scott, G.A.M. (1985). ‘Southern Australian
Liverworts’. Australian Flora and Pauna Series No.

Aneura alterniloba Lepidozia laevifolia XM
n Anthoceros ?laevis M x Lepidozia obtusiloba X
x Asterella drummondii P n_ Lepidozia ulothrix sp, agg. M
n Balantiopsis diplophylla M n Lethocolea pansa M
Bazzania involuta WPM n Lophocolea ?biciliata M
Cephaloziella exiliflora XM n Lophocolea gunniana M
n Chaetophyllopsis whitelegget M n Lophocolea cf. villosa M
n Cheilojeunea sp. M n Lophocolea ?minor M
n Cheilolejeunea ?mimosa M n Lophocolea muricata M
Chiloscyphus sp. H Lophocolea semiteres VBXM
Chiloscyphus argutus VM n Lunularia cruciata M
n Chiloscyphus coalitus M Marchantia berteroana UGM
Chiloscyphus echinellus H n Marsupidium surculosum M
Chiloscyphus fissistipus VM n Megaceros gracilis M
n Chiloscyphus tridentatus HM n Metzgerta decipiens M
Cuspidatula monodon VM Metzgeria furcata VM
n Diplasiolejeunea plicatiloba M Xx Pallavicinia spinosa D
n Fossombronia intestinalis M Plagiochila fasciculata VHM
x Fossombronia alata P Radula buccinifera VM
n Frullania clavata M Riccardia sp. H
n Frullania deplanata M n Riccardia aequicellularis M
Frullania falciloba VXM n Riccardia crassa M
x Frullania pentapleura Vv n Riccardia bipinnatifida M
Frullania probosciphora VM x Riccardia multifida Vv
n Frullania menocera M n_ Riccia sp. M
n Frullania rostrata M x Schistochila lehmanniana VH
xX Gackstroemia weindorferi VHX n Siphonolejeunea nudipes M
nN Goebelobryum unguiculatum M Symphogyna podophylla VHPM
Hymenophyton flabellatum VHM n Telaranea centipes M
nN lsostachis intortifolia M Tylimanthus sp. M
Jamesoniella colorata XM Tylimanthus tenellus H
Kursia compacta XM x Trichacolea mollissima VH
Kursia hippurioides SM n Zoopsis argentea M
I" Lejeunea gunniana M n Zoopsis leitgebiana M
continued back from page 97 2. (Australian Government Publishing Service:
References Canberra).
Scout, G.A.M.,, Stone LG. and Rosser, C, (1976). *The Vitt, D-H. and Ramsay, H.P. (1985), The

Macromirium complex in Australasia, Journal of
the Hattori Botanical Laboratory 59, 325-451.

Arthur W. Thies

25 Davies Street, East Malvern, Victoria 3145

The Victorian Naturalist

Book Reviews

The Mosses and Liverworts of Rainforest in Tasmania
and South-eastern Australia

by S. J. Jarman and B. A. Fuhrer
Publisher: CS/RO 1995. 134 pages, RRP $24.95

Those acquainted with the quality of
Bruce Fuhrer’s published colour photogra-
phy of flowering plants, ferns, fungi and
seaweeds will open this booklet with great
expectations. They will not be disappoint-
ed by his photos of 50 mosses and 70
liverworts, mostly of species found also
outside rainforest. The accompanying text
by the co-author is of matching standard.

The aim of the book, quoting from its
Introduction, is to provide a simple intro-
duction to, and increase awareness of, the
beautiful flora of mosses and liverworts,
without scientific descriptions or identifi-
cation keys.

Four general chapters fill the first 24
pages: ‘A general introduction to
bryophytes’ describes structure, reproduc-
tion, life cycle, evolution and classifica-
tion briefly and clearly without losing sci-
entific accuracy. “The Tasmanian
bryophyte flora’ is essentially an annotat-
ed list of literature for further reading.
‘Bryophytes in Tasmanian rainforest’ pre-
sents a brief survey of that forest’s vegeta-
tion, and the distribution and ecological
role of its bryophytes. ‘Recognising
bryophytes’ is an excellent text on this
non-trivial topic. It is well illustrated with
black-and-white photos, and could help
many field naturalists to tell a fern from a
moss from a lichen from an alga.

The presentation of the various species
is divided into three parts: mosses, thallose
liverworts, and leafy liverworts. The text,
with each species, comments on signifi-
cant features, substrates and other relevant
points. Detail is often presented in addi-
tional close-ups. The scientific names are
given throughout - there are very few ver-
nacular names anyway.

An appendix lists all species recorded in
Tasmania’s rainforests by their full botani-
cal names, e.g. Treubia lacunosa (Col.)
Prosk. A useful glossary of bryological
and some general botanical terms follows.
The explanations combine clarity with

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

accuracy. Two pages then quote literature
for further reading. Finally, there is an
index of the species depicted.

So, of what benefit can the book be to a
Victorian field naturalist, at least one with
a strong bent to botany? Apart from what
has been said before, anyone who can be
lured into a closer study of the bryophytes
will find the book helpful. The majority of
the plants depicted can be found in
Victoria, though often growing in different
habitats, which affects both appearance
and colour. Bryophytes tend to look quite
different when they are wet and when they
are dry, and Thuidium furfurosum e.g.
(Fig. 50) ranges from deep green to orange
according to habitat. Ilumination in the
forest presents formidable photographic
problems. Fuhrer has generally solved
them admirably. The obvious use of flash
on Lembophyllum (Fig 23) e.g. has
brought out well the characteristic branch
tips, but occasionally, as with Arrichum
(Fig 35), the appearance is not as I recall
it.

The scientific names are very much up-
to-date. Unfortunately so, for until the
bryophyte volumes of the Flora of
Australia come out, Scott, Stone and
Rosser (1976) and Scott (1985) will
remain the indispensable references of the
serious amateur. The names used in these
books could well have been added. The
purely scientific literature recognises this,
e.g. Vitt and Ramsay (1985). Also, flag-
ging the Tasmanian endemics as such
would have been helpful.

The book merits special commendation
for giving equal weight to the liverworts
and mosses, a rare feature in the popular
literature. With the limitations stated, it
will be a valuable addition to the field nat-
uralist’s library. One can only hope that it
will encourage a few to take up the study
of the bryophytes, where perhaps they can
still contribute more than in any other
branch of Botany.

cont. on page 96
97

Research Reports

Founder Effects in Some Victorian Wild Rabbit
Oryctolagus cuniculus L. Populations

Rosamond C.H. Shepherd! and J, W. Edmonds?

Abstract

The founding rabbits on most Victorian islands were domestic-types and the domestic character-
istics can still be readily observed. Although Thomas Austin’s releases of agouti rabbits at Barwon
Park near Winchelsea were the main progenitors of the present wild rabbit populations, founder
effects from other local releases can still be detected, Evidence for this is shown by genetic differ-
ences still observable in today’s populations. These genetic differences were introduced with the
original rabbit populations. (The Victorian Naturalist 113 (3)1996, 98-101)

Introduction

This study formed part of the background
research into the myxomatosis/rabbit interac-
lion Continued over the period 1950-1985.
This research was carried out by the staff of
the Keith Turnbull Research Institute,
Department of Crown Lands and Survey
(with its various name changes), and one of

its investigations was the genetic origin of

the wild rabbit Oryetolagus cuniculus L.
populations in Victoria.

Until about 1970 it was generally accepted
that, although island populations of rabbits
often had widely different characteristics,
there was little variation within mainland
populations. This was because their domi-
nant progenitors, especially in Victorian pop-
ulations, were a small number of wild-type
rabbits from Barwon Park near Winchelsea
(Fig. 1) (Rolls 1969). These wild-type rabbits
(agouti, commonly called grey) were part of
a consignment obtained from England by
Thomas Austin which either escaped or were
released in 1860 (Rolls 1969).

The persistence of characteristics of the
original rabbits, founder effects, can be read-
ily observed in island populations, but there
has been no detailed investigation in main-
land populations, In this paper we discuss
some island rabbit populations and consider
some apparent founder effects in mainland
populations and their possible origins,

Island Populations

The first recorded release of rabbits on a
Victorian island was by Commander Stokes
in H.M.S. Beagle in June 1842. About 12
rabbits were released on Deal Island (Fig, 1).
Later releases were made on several other
Bass Strait islands (Edmonds et al. 1976).

Descriptions of these island rabbits refer
mainly to colour and size. A colony of about
20 black rabbits was founded on Doughboy

' @Idon Avenue, Frankston, Victoria 3199.
“S15 Willowite Road, Moriac, Victoria 3240,

Island before 1900, but was apparently
wiped out by myxomatosis (J. Sparkes,
Inspector, Department of Crown Lands and
Survey pers. comm.). From Rabbit Island,
Norman (1970) reported 3000-4000 long-
eared, black-blue rabbits which were the size
of domestic-rabbits, i.e. larger than mainland
rabbits, and a few grey rabbits. Rabbits on
Sunday Island were multi-coloured and also
large; on Saint Margaret's Island, where the
rabbits could travel to and from the mainland
at low tide, there were some black and some
orange rabbits amongst the mostly wild-type
or agouti coloured population (D, Mitchell,
Inspector, Department of Crown Lands and
Survey pers. comm. 1975).

A Mr, Griffith may have released two
agouti rabbits on Lady Julia Percy Island in
1848 (Fig. 1) (the late G.W. Douglas,
Vermin and Noxious Weeds Destruction
Board, pers. comm. 1980). However, Pescott
(1965) reported that wild rabbits were intro-
duced to Lady Julia Percy Island in 1868.
Neither of these reports has been substantiat-
ed. The population on Mud Island in Port
Phillip Bay was thought to have been found-
ed by wild agouti rabbits introduced in about
1926 from the neighbouring mainland (D,.
Venn, Ranger, Department of Conservation
and Environment pers. comm. 1982).

The Churchill Island population is a spe-
cial case. Following a mortality rate greater
than 99% from myxomatosis in 1952-1953,
domestic-type rabbits were released and
maintained as a feral population (Edmonds et
al, 1981). The domestic characteristics of
colour and large size persisted until eradica-
tion programs were carried out by the
Department of Crown Lands and Survey dur-
ing the 1980s,

Mainland rabbits

The first feral rabbits in Victoria were
domestic-type escapees in Melbourne in
1837 (Stead 1935). It is believed that none of
these survived for more than a short time.

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

@ Morton Plains

South Australia

@ Goroke

Portland

Winchelsea@

/
Lady Julia Percy
Island

— — — Approximate southern
limit of b’ allotype

New South Wales

cs
Mud Island

Bass Strait

“— Sunday Island

b
Deal island
(Kent Group)

Fig. 1. Map of Victoria showing rabbit release and collection sites.

The first established population seems to
have been in the coastal dunes between
Portland and Port Fairy during the 1850s
(Woodfield 1967), These rabbits were of
unknown origin. Other recorded feral popu-
lations, which pre-dated the Barwon Park
release, were on the central Victorian gold-
fields, at Morton Plains in the Mallee (Fig. 1)
and in the southern Wimmera near Goroke
(Fig. 1). The rapid spread of wild-type rab-
bits from Barwon Park, Winchelsea, appar-
ently overwhelmed any pre-existing popula-
tions. Some of the spread from Barwon Park
was deliberate for the first 3-4 years. The
next deliberate release in that district was
probably after the myxomatosis epizootics of
the early 1950s when wild-type rabbits were
released in order to maintain a population for
historical reasons (Anon. pers. comm.). We
have no evidence of any other organised
releases on the mainland after 1875.

Data Collection

Coat colour was recorded in the field by
both live observation and from shot samples.
Rabbit size and weight (g) were recorded
from shot samples as part of a wide ranging
investigation of Victorian wild rabbit popula-
tions (Shepherd 1985, Shepherd and

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

Edmonds 1976). A one year study (1979) in
the Mallee (n=357) gave an average weight
of 1470 g for mature rabbits i.e. >110 days
old, whereas, mature domestic rabbits are in
the 2000 g range.

Sera were collected for a study of structural
differences in rabbit antibodies
(immunoglobulins). They were tested for
immunoglobulin (Ig) allotypes whose struc-
ture is controlled by co-dominant alleles (dif-
ferent forms of a gene) of immunoglobulin
structural genes. The alleles tested for were
the Aa locus alleles, a', a° and a’ on the Ig
heavy chain and the Ab locus alleles b*, b’
and b’ on the Ig light chain. All tests were by
antibody antigen reactions in gel as described
by Herd and Edmonds (1977).

Results and Discussion

Although it is generally accepted that
Austin’s release of wild-type rabbits at
Winchelsea provided the main founders for
the present mainland populations (Rolls
1969), it is known that other releases have
been significant contributors in some coastal
areas and on some islands (Edmonds 1977;
Edmonds ef al. 1981; Herd and Edmonds
1977). Differences between island popula-
tions could be the result of either founder

Research Reports

effects or differential selection effects on dif-
ferent islands. The rate of evolutionary
change in the Australian wild rabbit has been
sufficient to allow differences in colour and
body conformation between temperate and
arid zone rabbits, and also in rabbits under
stress of high population density pressure
(Myers 1966; Myers 1970); rabbits from the
arid zone have yellowier coats (Stodart quot-
ed in Myer 1970), and rabbits from warmer
regions have significantly longer extremities,
both ear length and foot length are longer in
sub-tropical and arid zones than in the sub-
alpine and Mediterranean zones (Myer
1970).

Subtropical Subalpine
82.05 77.64
92.01 89.38

Ear length (mm)
Foot length (mm)

In Victoria the most readily apparent
example is selection for black colour in mon-
tane forest fringes, where black favours pro-
tection from predation, This colour was
selected from the genetic pool available in
the wild rabbit population (Edmonds ef al.
1976). The possible occurrence of selection
pressure must be allowed for in any consid-
eration of founder effects (Shepherd and
Edmonds unpubl. data).

The characteristics being considered, coat
colour and size, may be under widely differ-
ent selection pressures, even if the most
severe pressure is thought to be predation by
raptors and foxes. Founder effects for both
colour and size have been recorded for sever-
al Gippsland populations including those on
Churchill Island, St. Margaret’s Island and
Sunday Island and the coastal strip near these
islands (Edmonds e7 al, 1976). We found no
evidence that domestic-type genes for colour
or for weight had spread far beyond the
coastal strip. Populations sampled from agri-
cultural land at Bemm River (n=23),
Seaspray (n=233), Swifts Creek (n=55), Moe
(n=53), Cobungra (n=!104) and Negoura
(n=64), and from Wilson’s Promontory were
wild-type in colour and size.

All rabbits from Lady Julia Percy Island
(128) were agouti but mean weight (1080 g)
was less than that for mainland wild rabbits.
Grasses and other vegetation were sparse and
dry at the time of collection, These rabbits
were also smaller than the mainland rabbits.
The smaller size could be either a selection
or a founder effect. In either case the sugges-
tion that the founding population was two
agouti rabbits could be correct. Although the

100

domestic rabbits available in the 1850s were
large and mixed in colour they generally
failed to establish in the wild (Rolls 1969).
Perhaps Mr. Griffith was a percipient selec-
tor of rabbits and had collected his two
agouti rabbits from the coastal dunes. It is, of
course, possible that there were subsequent
unacknowledged introductions of wild rab-
bits from the mainland.

Of a sample of 60 rabbits from Mud
Island, 52 were agouti, six ginger and two
black. These rabbits were within the weight
range for mainland rabbits. The Mud Island
population could have been founded by the
release of rabbits from the mainland if these
founders had been selected for colours with
subsequent selection not being affected by
terrestrial predators which tend to select out
the more obvious colours. Genes for colour
would then persist in the population.

The only evidence we have found for the
survival of a probable domestic gene for
colour in the agouti rabbits of the northern
and western plains of Victoria, is from
Morton Plains in the Mallee, where the
occurrence of albinism is higher than in any
other population we have observed.
Although a shot collection is inevitably
biased towards albinos our collection of 11%
compares with 2.2% for rabbits collected
near Donald (n=47) and 0.0004% in 6693
rabbits collected over 10 years in other
north-western Victorian districts. There is no
apparent reason why selection for albinism
should have been greater at Morton Plains
than elsewhere in north-western Victoria. It
is likely that its high occurrence there is a
founder effect from the domestic-type feral
population established during the 1860s. We
have found no evidence of any significant
variation in the infrequent occurrence of
colours other than agouti or albino in the
northern or western plains rabbits.

In following up a survey of immunoglobu-
lin allotypes (Edmonds 1977, Herd and
Edmonds 1977) we have found that the order
of frequencies of the Ab locus alleles on
Lady Julia Percy Island, b’>b*>b’, is unique
in Australian rabbits and the b’ frequency
(0.40) is the highest recorded (Edmonds and
Shepherd in prep.). Such an apparent founder
effect could have occurred with a small num-
ber of agouti rabbits but it is most unlikely
that they could have been taken by chance
from a population resembling the present
mainland population. If the founding date,
which is believed locally to be 1848, is cor-

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

rect, then it is also unlikely that the island
population was supplemented with any sig-
nificant number of wild rabbits from the
mainland after the Winchelsea rabbits. These
have a high b allele frequency, and estab-
lished themselves across south-western
Victoria. Only speculation on the origin of
these rabbits is possible now.

A population sampled between Edenhope
and Goroke could be distinguished from
other Wimmera and neighbouring South
Australian populations by a high b* frequen-
cy (0.52), the highest recorded on the main-
land. The next highest b° frequency was 0.38
in a sample collected about 40 km east of
Edenhope (Edmonds and Shepherd in prep.).
The local belief that a wild rabbit population
was established in about 1870 may be cor-
rect but its origins remain unknown. It could
have been a small local release of
Winchelsea rabbits which, by chance, had a
high b*® frequency.

The b? allele was not found in Gippsland
(Herd and Edmonds 1977). We have
attempted to determine the limits of the pres-
ence of the b’ allele (Fig.1) which has not
been found on the mainland east of
Frankston and south of the Dividing Range.
It is now present near Frankston, possibly as
a result of the establishment of experimental
rabbit colonies during the 1970s. It is also
now present on Phillip Island, almost cer-
tainly by migration from Churchill Island
across the causeway connecting the two
islands.

Conclusions

There is no doubt that Thomas Austin’s
wild rabbits, released at Barwon Park and
which included wild rabbits (Rolls 1969),
were the main progenitors of Victoria’s wild
rabbit populations. The massive spread of
rabbits began from there (Rolls 1969), since
it is the only evidence for the release of wild
rabbits in Western Victoria that could have
contributed so greatly to the gene pool.
There is no other supporting data for this
massive spread, beyond the thousands of
wild rabbits seen, and the initial spread
reported from Barwon Park. However, some
of the small releases of rabbits outside that
area have made presistent contributions to
the mainland gene pool.

Acknowledgments :
We thanikall the Technical staff of Keith

Turnbull Research Institute, especially Mr Ivan

F. Nolan, for their help in collecting and pro-

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

cessing the rabbit samples. This work was part-
ly funded by the International Wool Secretariat.

References

Edmonds, J.W,E. (1977). Studies on the occurrence of
Immunoglobulin Allotypes of Wild Rabbits in
south-eastern Australia, M.Sc. Thesis. Monash
University.

Edmonds, J.W., Backholer, J.R. and Shepherd,
Rosamond C.H. (1981). Biological characteristics
of a feral rabbit population of wild and domestic
origin. Australian Wildlife Research 8, 589-596.

Edmonds, J.W., Nolan, LF., Shepherd, Rosamond
C.H., Backholer, J.B. and Jackson, R. (1976).
Rabbits on Gippsland Islands. The Victorian
Naturalist 93, 110-112.

Herd, Z.L. and Edmonds, J.W.E. (1977). Population
genetics for Aa and Ab immunoglobulin allotypes
in wild rabbits of south-eastern Australia. Journal
of Immunogenetics 4, 315-323.

Myers, K. (1966). The effects of density on sociality
and health in mammals. Proceedings of the
Ecological Society of Australia 1, 40-64.

Myers, K. (1970). The rabbit in Australia. In
Dynamics of numbers in Populations. Proceedings
of the Advanced Study Institute, Oosterbeck, pp.
478-506. Eds. J.P. den Boer and G.R. Gradwell.
(Centre for Agricultural Publishing and
Documentation, Wageningen, Netherlands).

Norman, F.I. (1970). Ecological effects of the rabbit
reduction on Rabbit Island, Wilson's Promontory,
Victoria, Proceedings of the Royal Society of
Victoria 83, 193-200.

Pescott, T. (1965). A visit to Lady Julia Percy Island.
The Victorian Naturalist 81, 290-301,

Rolls, B.C. (1969), They all ran wild. The story of
Pests on the Land in Australia. Angus and
Robertson, Melbourne.

Shepherd, Rosamond C.H, (1985). Studies of the wild
rabbit, Oryctolagus cuniculus (L,) populations in
the Mallee region of Victoria, following the release
of the European rabbit flea, Spilopsyllus cuniculi
(Dale). M. Agr. Sc. thesis Melbourne University.

Shepherd, Rosamond C.H. and Edmonds, J.W. (1976).
The Establishment and Spread of Spilopsyllus euni-
culi (Dale) and its Location on the Host,
Oryetolagus cuniculus (L.} in the Mallee Region of
Victoria. Australian Wildlife Research. 3, 29-44.

Shepherd, Rosamond C.H. and Edmonds, J.W, (sub-
mitted). Diversity in some Victorian wild rabbit
populations. Plant Protection Quarterly.

Stead, D.G. (1935). The rabbit in Australia. Publ. by
the author, Sydney. :

Woodfield, B.R.G. (1967). A sociological suryey of
certain Agricultural practices in south-western
Victoria. M.Agr-Sc. Thesis. Melbourne
Agricultural School.

101

Research Reports

Observations After a Fire in a Degraded Grassland

John Stewart!

Abstract

Following a fire, in December 1994, through Broadmeadows Valley Park, ca. 15 km north
of Melbourne, Victoria, observations were made of the recovery of native flora, and then the intro-
duced species, in one area of the park. This was carried out from June to November 1995.

(The Victorian Naturalist 113 (3) 1996, 102-106).

Broadmeadows Valley Park (Melways
map nos. 6 and 179) is a linear open park,
extending about 6 km from Johnstone
Street, Broadmeadows in the south to
Somerton Road, Coolaroo in the north, Set
in the valley of the Yuroke Creek and its
tributary gullies, it is a badly degraded
grassland, having been used for agricultur-
al purposes from the 1830's to the 1950's
and is now surrounded by urban develop-
ment. Before European settlement, judg-
ing by remnants in other parts of the park
it was probably dominated by Kangaroo
Grass Themeda triandra with many
daisies, lilies and other small herbs.
Although it has a long history of European
settlement, 41 genera and 109 species of
indigenous plants have been recorded
throughout its area of over 170 ha (Carr et
al, 1993, Arundell and Kern 1994).

On 7 December, 1994, a grasstire swept
through part of the park and burnt an area
that to the best of my knowledge had not
been burnt for at least four years. This
seemed a good opportunity to see what
indigenous plants, if any, were present
under the cover of the weeds. All plant
names in this article follow Ross (1993)
and Walsh and Entwistle (1994),

The area under study is a spur with a
southerly aspect on the end of a gully
entering the Yuroke Creek valley (Fig. 1).
The angle of slope is approximately 15°
and elevation 90-110 m. The soil is com-
posed of elements of the underlying
Silurian sediments and the late Tertiary
basalt that forms the plateau above the val-
ley with some boulders of sandstone con-
glomerate and quartzite strewn randomly
over the slope,

Before the fire the slope to the north-
west was covered with a thick mass of
Chilean Needle Grass *Stipa neesiana
with a small area of dead Montpellier

"19 Connell Street, Glenroy, Vietoria 3046

102

Broom *Genista monspessulana that had
been poisoned very early in the year. The
north-easterly slope was a mixture of
Canary Grass *Phalaris aquatica and
Artichoke Thistle*Cynara cardunculus.
On the very end there seemed to be a
small area that was moister and had a lot
more herbs including Ox Tongue
*Helminthotheca echioides, Cat’s Ear
*Hypochoeris radicata and Ribwort
*Plantago lanceolata that kept most of the
grasses out. There were a few patches of
Kangaroo Grass Themeda triandra and
Wattle Mat-rush Lomandra filiformis on
the north-west slope a little past the area
under study, and a patch of Common
Raspwort Gonocarpus tetragynus on the
point of the spur. These were the only
indigenous plants evident to the casual
eye.

Immediately after the fire on 10
December, 1995, I walked the area and
found that all in the fire’s path had been
burnt and nothing had survived. There had
been some very hot summer weather at
this time, but then there was some rain: 19
mm on 22 December; 24 mm on 6
January; 18 mm on 9 January; 7 mm
between 10-29 January, then a further 16
mm on 30 January; 25 mm fell in
February; 9] mm in March, and 89 mm in
April - a far better rainfall than was the
case in 1994,

But to get back into sequence.

By 8 January (1995) new growth after
the rain was quite evident and, from a low
angle, the ground seemed almost green -
blades of grass were about 60 mm long
and seedlings of dicots were poking their
leaves up everywhere.

By 22 January (1995) resprouts of
Variable Glycine Glycine tabacina were
scattered all over the slope with some
plants almost in flower, patches of what
looked like Wahlenbergia spp. in various
places, and Bindweed Convolvulus sp.

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

fe 190 20 ~230 ~=—40_=50 «=—Metres

Fig.1. Plan of area under observation, Q1 and Q2 are quadrats. Numbers on lines are metres

elevation

flowers were showing from small plants
all over the lower slope. At one location
on the point of the spur, Solenogyne
dominii covered an area of 2m~ with their
little radial leaves and rayless flowers. I
had only seen this plant in one other part
of the park, so this was a pleasant surprise.

Because of other commitments I did not
make any further observations until 29
April, 1995. By then the Glycine had
flowered, seeded and the pods opened. No
seeds could be seen, taken away no doubt
by the insects that always beat seed collec-
tors, while snails or slugs were feeding on
the leaves so that the plants were hard to
see with only the stalks left amongst the
grass. All snails in the area had been burnt
in the fire, so these herbivores had either
moved into the area from elsewhere or
developed from eggs in the ground. Sweet
Hound’s Tongue Cynoglossum suaveolens
were flowering over a wide area from
small single plants. Patches of Small St.
John’s Wort Hypericum gramineum were
also flowering, although it had now fin-
ished flowering in other parts of the park.
Weeping Grass Microlaena stipoides was
the only native grass to be seen and was
not very common,

On 28 May, 1995, I decided that an area
should be defined if these observations
were to be of any use, so I set about it in
the following way:-

The southern boundary was 100 m,
measured along the fire track at the bottom

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

of the spur, and the western side was a line
up the slope on a bearing of 30° for 60 m.
The north side across the top was a bear-
ing of 120° for 45 m., while a bearing of
155° down the slope picked up the south-
eastern corner 65 m away, this was the
east side. The whole contained area was
about 0.42 ha (Fig. 1).

On the north-west corner and the north-
east corner quadrats of 5 x 5 m were
marked out as data control bases, as these
sites were the most weed infested before
the fire. The north-west quadrat was coy-
ered with *Stipa neesiana and the north-
east one was a tangle of *Phalaris aquati-
ca, *Cynara cardunculus and a scattering
of Wild Sage *Salvia verbenaca.

A survey of vegetation in these quadrats
was made from May, when they were
marked out, until 3 November, by which
time the vegetation had become too thick
for the survey to be of value (Table 1).

June - There were plenty of seedlings
but far too small for identification.
However, some Tall Wallaby Grass
Danthonia sp. plants with the odd
Weeping Grass Microlaena stipoides were
evident. Although there was less bare
ground than the previous month, only the
old plants like thistles and tussocks really
had shown real growth, also the Bluebells
Wahlenbergia spp. and Sweet Hound’s
Tongue Cynoglossum suaveolens had fin-
ished flowering and were withering. Blue
Devil Eryngium ovinum could be identi-

103

Research Reports

Table 1. Percent cover of species recorded in two quadrats, at various dates during the first year

after burning.

‘.’ = not recorded, ‘+’ = < 1% cover. ‘*’ introduced species.

Dates 1995

Species 28/5
North-west Quadrat No. 1
Acaena sp.

* Aira caryophyllea

* Avena fatua

* Briza maxima

* Briza minor

* Cerastium glomeratum

* Cynara cardunculus
Dichelachne crinata

* Galium aparine

* Helminthotheca echioides
* Phalaris aquatica

* Plantago lanceolata

* Romulea rosea

* Rosa rubiginosa

Rumex brownii

* Sherardia arvensis

* Sonchus oleraceus

* Stipa neesiana

* Trifolium sp.

Bare ground

4+e¢ Seti

50%
2%
35%

North-west Quadrat No. 2
Acaena sp.

* Cerastium glomeratum

* Cynara cardunculus

* Galium aparine

20%
2%
* Helminthotheca echioides +

* Phalaris aquatica 35%
* Plantago lanceolata

* Romulea rosea

Rumex brownii

* Salvia verbenaca

* Soncnus oleraceus

* Stipa neesiana

* Trifolium sp.

Bare ground

24/6 22/7 20/8 6/10 4/11

wn
=)

t+te4 4+ Q444+84

10%

10%
+
5%

fied and also Common Woodruff Asperula
conferta.

July - Bare ground had almost disap-
peared, trefoil seedlings were appearing
but too small to identify. Mouse-ear
Chickweed *Cerastium glomeratum
seemed to be growing more on the east
side of the area than all over.

August - No bare ground now, the only
bare spots were where the bedrock out-
cropped. Wall Fumitory *Fumaria murale
was seen with its pink and purple flowers
peeping amongst the green grass and the
bright pink stars of Onion Grass *Romulea
rosea were evident whenever the sun
shone, The flowers of the Short-stem

104

Sedge Carex breviculmis could be seen
amongst its bright green grass-like leaves
while a large patch of Small Riceflower
Pimelea humilis was just coming into
bloom with its tiny massed blooms putting
on a great display. About halfway up the
slope Field Woodrush Luzula meridionalis
plants were blooming and the yellow and
brown flowerheads could easily be seen.
Thus, from having only one specimen pre-
viously recorded in the whole park, there
must have been at least fifty plants here on
the spur.

September - No observations made.

October - Most of the seedlings had
grown big enough to be identified: Field

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

Madder *Sherardia arvensis; Common
Bartsia‘* Parentucellia latifolia; Shivery
Grass *Briza minor, and probably French
Catchfly *Silene gallica. Flowers of the
Pale Sundew Drosera peltata were now
appearing. and flowerheads were also
showing on the grasses, Common Tussock
Grass Poa labillardiera, Soft Tussock
Grass Poa sieberiana, Long-haired Plume
Grass Dichelachne crinata and Quaking
Grass Briza maxima. Sweet Hound's
Tongue Cynoglossum suaveolens was
coming into bloom again, although they
had flowered in April and one of the tre-
foils could now be identified as Suckling
Clover *Trifolium dubium, However, the
weeds were now starting to cover all the
patches of native plants and it soon looked
as it did before the fire.

November - The quadrats were so over-
grown now that the weather was warmer
that it was impractical to continue. The
cycle had neared completion, for, by
December, it would have been a year since
the fire. The north-west quadrat had more
than 70% cover by Chilean Needle Grass
*Stipa neesiana while other weeds made

up the remaining 30% and the height of

the grass was now oyer 50 cms. The
north-east quadrat was no better, with the
Canary Grass *Phalaris aquatica and
Artichoke Thistle *Cynara cardunculus
nearly 80 cms high, and in both quadrats
*Trefoil species were now struggling for
sunlight.

A few more plants could be identified,
Salsify *Tragopogon porrifolius and
Hairy Pink *Petrorhagia velutina , and at
least three Danthonia spp. which were dif-
ferent from the Tall Wallaby Grass that
had appeared in June. During the year
there were areas that had a concentration
of one native species (Table 2) and
although there were other smaller patches,
those mentioned in Table 2 stood out as
places where, over the years, these plants
had grown, flowered and dropped their
seeds. so that with this opportunity after a
fire, native plants could come back, even
in such a badly degraded grassland,

Conclusion ;
As a result of this rough survey It could
be seen that, although the area was COV-

ered with weeds, there were still traces of

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

rable 2. Native species which occupied areas
greater than Im? during the first year after fire.

Lares Species =)
5x2m Acaena sp.
Im’ Cynoglosysum suaveolens
Ix4m Drosera peltate
4x2m Glycine tabacina
4x2m ’

Aypericum gramineum
Hypericum graminewn
Gonocarpus tetragynus
Ayperula conferta
Veronica gracilis
Wahlenbergia communis
Walilenbergia luteola

4x4and3x2m
10x 3and4x3m
4x3m
2x 2and2x2m
6x4and2x 1m
6xlm

the original grassland herbs remaining.
How to manage these exotic invaded areas
is not clear, fire alone is not the answer.
An article by lan Lunt (1990) concluded
with the following thoughts, ‘Degraded.
invaded and isolated remnants should not
be managed solely by burning; burning
should be integrated with other methods
of vegetation control, such as weeding,
poisoning and perhaps manipulated, sea-
sonal grazing by native or introduced her-
bivores.’

Unfortunately interest in grasslands 1s
not very high in the community, and
therefore funds don’t come easily, But to
the few that know what an expanse of
Kangaroo Grass or tall Spear Grass can
look like, we would like everyone else to
see and enjoy It.

References

Arundell M, and Kern L, (1994), Broadmeadows
Valley Park, Managing Grassland Remnants.
Report for City of Broadmeadows.

Carr G.W. et al, (1993). Vegetation, Fauna and man-
agement issues Broadmeadows Valley Park.
Report for the City of Broadmeadows Ecological
Horticulture Pty. Ltd,

Ross JH. (1993). * A Census of the vascular plants of
Victoria’. 4th Edition. (National Herbarium of
Victoria).

Lunt LD. (1990). Impact of an autumn fire on a long-
grazed Themeda triandra (Kangaroo Grass) grass:
land: Implications for management of inv aded,
remnant vegetations, The Victorian Naturalist 107,
45-51.

Walsh N.G, and Entwisle T.J- (1994). ‘Flora of
Victoria’ Volume 2, (Inkata Press).

Willis J.H. (1972). ‘A Handbook of Plants of
Victoria’. Volume II, (Melbourne University

Press).

105

Research Reports

Appendix. A species list of plants seen on the “Spur” since the fire. * introduced species.

MONOCOTYLEDONS

Cyperaceae

Carex breviculmis

Juncaceae

Luzula meridionalis

Iridaceae

* Romulea rosea var.
australis

Liliaceae

Tricoryne elatior

Poaceae

* Aira carophyllea

* Avena fatua

*Briza maxima
*Briza minor

Danthonia spp.

Dichelachne crinata

Microlaena stipoides
* Nassella trichotoma
* Phalaris aquatica
Poa labillardieri

Poa sieberiana
* Stipa neesiana
Themeda triandra

DICOTYLEDONS

Apiaceae

Eryngium ovinum

* Foeniculum vulgare

Asteraceae

* Cynara cardunculus

* Helminthotheca
echioides

* Hypochoeris radicata

Senecio quadridentatus

Solenogyne dominii

* Sonchus oleraceus

* Tragopogon porri-
folius

Boraginaceae

Cynoglossum suave-
olens

Campanulaceae
Wahlenbergia commu-
nis

Wahlenbergia luteola

Caryophyllaceae

* Cerastium glomera-
tum

* Petrorhagia velutina
* Silene gallica

106

Short-stem Sedge
Field Wood-rush

Onion Grass

Yellow Rush Lily

Silvery Hairgrass
Wild Oat
QuakingGrass
Shivery Grass
Wallaby Grasses
Long-haired Plume
Grass
Weeping Grass
Serrated Tussock Grass
Canary Grass
Common Tussock
Grass
Soft Tussock Grass
Chilean Needle Grass
Kangaroo Grass

Blue Devil
Fennel

Artichoke Thistle
Ox Tongue

Cat’s Ear

Cotton Fireweed
Solenogyne

Common Sow Thistle
Salsify

Sweet Hound’s Tongue

Tufted Bluebell
Bluebell
Mouse-ear Chickweed

Hairy Pink
French Catchfly

Clusiaceae
Hypericum
gramineum
Convolvulaceae
Convolvulus remotus
Convolvulus
erubescens
Dichondra repens
Crassulaceae
Crassula decumbens
Droseraceae
Drosera peltata
Fabaceae
Bossiaea prostrata
Glycine tabacina
* Trifolium dubium
* Vicia hirsuta
* Vicia sativa
Fumariaceae
* Fumaria murale
Geraniaceae
Geranium retrorsum

Haloragaceae

Gonocarpus tetragy-
nus

Lamiaceae

* Salvia verbenaca

Oxalidaceae

Oxalis perennans

Plantaginaceae

* Plantago lanceolata

Polygonaceae

* Acetosella vulgaris

Rumex dumosus

Rosaceae

Acaena echinata

Acaena ovina

* Rosa rubiginosa

Rubiaceae

Asperula conferta

* Sherardia arvensis

Scrophulariaceae

* Parentucellia latifo-
lia

Veronica gracilis

Thymeleaceae

Pimelea curviflora
var. sericea

Pimelea humilis

Small St. John’s
Wort

Pink Bindweed
Grassy Bindweed

Kidney Weed
Rufous Stonecrop
Pale Sundew
Creeping Bossiaea
Variable Glycine
Suckling Clover
Tiny Vetch
Common Vetch

Wall Fumitory

Grassland Crane’s
bill

Common Raspwort

Wild Sage
Yellow Wood-sorrel
Ribwort

Sheep Sorrel
Wiry Dock

Sheep’s Burr

Australian Sheep’s
Burr

Common Woodruf
Field Madder
Common Bartsia
Slender Speedwell
Curved Riceflower

Small Riceflower

The Victorian Naturalist

Contributions

Back to the Heart of the Mallee

R.J. Fletcher'

The story of Wyperfeld National Park
really begins with Edward John Eyre, who,
in the process of droving sheep or cattle
(there appears to be some doubt which it
was) from New South Wales to the new
settlement in Adelaide in 1838, ‘rediscov-
ered’ the Wimmera River and traced it as
far north as Lake Hindmarsh. This was
named after Sir John Hindmarsh, the first
Governor of South Australia. It would
appear that he had attempted to reach the
Murray River by way of what is now Pine
Plains, but had to retrace his steps because
of lack of water,

The aboriginal population had regularly
travelled along the course of the Wimmera
River and further north along Outlet
Creek, and by 1847 Europeans had fol-
lowed the same route to establish pastoral
runs. Three of these runs occupied part of
what is now the Wyperfeld National Park,
namely ‘Pine Plains’, ‘Cambacanya’ and
possibly part of ‘Brimin’. The area was of
considerable interest to early naturalists,
and as early as 1861 William Lockhart
Morton took botanical specimens to Baron
Mueller for identification. Some fifty-six
of these specimens are now housed in the
National Herbarium in Melbourne (Table
1). Morton had spent June and most of
July of 1861 carrying out a survey of the
area. His chief interest was in finding suit-
able country for pastoral pursuits, but he
made other valuable contributions to our
knowledge of the area.

By the turn of the century this interest
had stimulated a number of excursions and
the accumulation of considerable know]-
edge of the local flora and fauna. One of
the leading naturalists of the time, Arthur
H.E. Mattingley, had made a study of the
Malleefowl Leipoa ocellata (Mattingley
1909b), during 1907 at “Pine Plains’ as
part of a more extensive study of the avi-
fauna of the Mallee. It is the purpose of
this paper to attempt to retrace the steps of
Mattingley’s 1907 September trip (Fig. 1).

It was very largely due to the efforts of
Mattingley that in 1909, 3,900 ha were

' 4/48 Newport Road, Clayton South, Victoria 3169

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

temporarily reserved as National Park.
Nothing much happened after that for a
while, partly because of the intervening
war years, but in 1921 an additional 2600
ha were added and the Park was gazetted
in October 1921. Additional areas were
gazetted in succeeding years, notably 3000
ha in 1922 and 2600 ha in 1930. In more
recent years, further large areas have been
added extending west as far as the
Murrayville-Yanac Road, making a total
of 356 000 ha

Mattingley’s paper, ‘In The Heart Of
The Mallee’, was published in The
Victorian Naturalist 26, 1909, and his
observations began at Murtoa, which
he described on 13 September, 1907 as
one of a number of ‘more or less dreary
wayside stations’, on the train journey
to Hopetoun. The stop at Murtoa was of
sufficient duration to go for a stroll to a
clump of ‘Buloke’ Allocasuarina
luehmannii, about a mile away, where
nests were found containing young of the
Black-backed Magpie (= Australian
Magpie) Gymnorhina tibicen, Raven
(= Australian Raven) Corone australis
(= Corvus coronoides) and White-faced
Xerophila (= Southern Whiteface)
Xerophila leucopsis ( = Aphelocepha leu-
copsis, while the Red-capped Robin
Petroeca goodenovii (= Petroica gooden-
ovii) and Yellow-rumped Tit (= Yellow-
rumped Thornbill) Acanthiza chrysorrhoa
were busy building their nests. Other birds
observed in the immediate area were
Wood Swallow ( = Dusky Wood-swallow)
Artamus cyanopterus, Galah Cacatua
roseicappilla, White-fronted Chat
Epthianura albifrons, Musk Lorikeet
Glossopsitta concinna, Grass Parrakeet (=
Red-rumped Parrot) Psephotus
haematonotus, Ground-lark (= Richard's
Pipit) Anthus novaeseelandiae, Noisy
Minah (= Noisy Miner) Manorina
melanocephala, Laughing Jackass ( =
Kookaburra) Dacelo gigas and the Kestrel
(= Nankeen Kestrel) Falco cenchroides,

There is now no chance of finding
Mattingley’s ‘clump of Buloke’ within a
mile of the station, and a current bird list

107

Contributions

Table 1, Collections in the Melbourne Herbarium made by William Lockhart Morton between
Lake Hindmarsh and Underbool, Victoria (including Wyperfeld and Pine Plains) during June and
July, 1861. This plant list is after J.H-Willis, ‘Notes of a Tour in the Wimmera District’ 1861,
W.L.Morton (published by National Parks Association, 1966, where it appears as an alphabetical

arrangement of species).

Species
Acacia brachybotria
Acacia calamifolia
Acacia ligulata
Acacia lineata
Acacia oswaldi
Acacia rigens
Acacia spinescens
Acacia trineura
Acacia wilhelmiana
Adriana hookeri
Allocasuarina
muellertana
Arthrocnemum
arbusculum=
Sclerostegia arbuscula
Atriplex stipitata
Baeckea crassifolia
Banksia ornata
Bertya mitchellii
Beyeria lechenaultii
Beyeria opaca

Common Name
Grey Mulga
Wallowa

Small Cooba
Streaked Wattle
Umbrella Wattle
Nealie

Spiny Wattle
Three-veined Wattle
Dwart Nealie
Mallee Bitterbush
Slaty She-Oak

Shrubby Glasswort

Kidney Saltbush
Desert Baeckea
Desert Banksia
Mitchell Bertya

Pale ‘Turpentine-bush
Dark Turpentine Bush

Spiecies
Grevillea huegelii
Grevillea pterosperma
Gyrostemon
australasicus
Hakea leucoptera
Hakea muelleriana
Heteradendron
oleifolium= Alectryon
dleifolius subsp.
canescens
Hibbertia virgata
Humea pholidota =
Haeckeria pholidota
Kochia aphylla =
Maireana aphylla
Lasiopetalum behrii
Leptospermum
myrsinoides
Lomandra leucoceph-
ala subsp. robusta
Melaleuca pubescens

Common Name
Comb Grevillea
Desert Grevillea
Wheel Fruit

Silver Needlewood

Desert Hakea
Cattle-bush

Guinea Flower
Scaly Haeckeria

Leafless Bluebush

Pink Velvet-bush
Silky Tea-tree

Woolly Mat-rush
Moonah

Callitris verrucosa
Calytrix tetragona
Cassia nemophila var.
platypoda = Senna
artemesivides subsp.
petiolaris
Codonocarpus
continifolius
Conospermum patens
Dodonea attenuata =
D, viscosa subsp.
angustissima
Dodonea
bursariifolia
Eutaxia microphylla
Exocarpus sparteus

Scrub Cypress
Fringe Myrtle
Cassia

Bell-truit Tree
Smoke Bush
Wedge-leaved Hop-
bush

Small Hop-bush

Eutaxia
Broom Ballart

would be much more modest. This author
noted at the Murtoa stop, Little Wattlebird
Anthochaera chrysoptera; New Holland
Honeyeater Phylidonyris novaehollandiae,
as well as two birds probably not there in
1907; the House Sparrow Passer domesti-
cus and Common Starling Sturnus vul-
garis,

A much more rewarding place for bird

watching today would be the Murtoa Golf

Course, some distance out of town and
which is also full of botanical interest.
(Fig. 2)

As a leading ornithologist, Mattingley’s
chief interest at Hopetoun was the birdlife
on Lake Coorong, which contained *
excellent fresh water and was the town’s
water supply’. His observations around the

108

= M. lanceolata
Melaleuca uncinata
Micromyrtus ciliata
Olearia lepidophylla
Olearia magniflora
Olearia muelleri
Olearia pimeleoides

Broom Honeymyrtle
Heath-myrtle
Club-moss Daisy-bush
Splendid Daisy-bush
Mueller Daisy-bush
Pimelea Daisy-bush
= Burrobunga
Mallee Riceflower
Gaunt Riceflower
Sweet Quandong
Round Templetonia
bush
Porcupine Grass

Pimelea microcephala
Pimelea stricta
Santalum acuminarum
Templetoniia egena

Triodia irritans =
T. scariosa subsp.
scartosa

lake included those listed in Table 2.

Lake Coorong is still a wonderland for
birdlife, although no longer the town water
supply which now comes to the man-made
Lake Lascelles by channel from Lake
Lonsdale. The channel that would have
carried the water from the lake to the town
in Mattingley’s day is still there. Many of
the birds noted by Mattingley were also
seen by the author as well as the Great
Egret Ardea alba, Black-winged Stilt
Himantopus himantopus, White-necked
Heron Ardea pacifica, Straw-necked Ibis
Threskiornis spinicollis, Australian White
Ibis Threskiornis molucca, Silver Gull
Larus novaehollandiae, Noisy Miner
Manorina melanocephala, and Red-
rumped Parrot Psephotus haematonotus.

The Victorian Naturalist

Contributions

2301¢
i > Hicbsg ts ive
<—F — M22 igte

‘elley Logibut 7 T a |

Me. Observatory

».to Parchewollok

MAP TO INDICATE ROUTE OF

A.W.E MATTINGLEY

* Hopping Mouse
Hill

Lookout +
Dune

Mount* .

sae dtavay Cambacanya -

ese approx, boundary of

Wyperfeld National Park

approx. Lat. & Long.

—— Route of Mattingley. |

4 Lake

\
Places & Features mentioned

Albacuty2 by Mattingley are underlined thus:

Ofaapeet

-Fletcher 1992

Bird-watching on Lake Coorong and its
floodplain demands a good pair of binocu-
lars. The lake is a very extensive sheet of
water formed at the northern end of
Yarriambiac Creek which rises some 120
km to the south, and is crossed many
times on the road up from Murtoa. Also
recommended, is a pair of waders!

The owner of Pine Plains Station in
Mattingley’s time was S. Poulton, a name
still evident in the district. He provided
Mattingley’s party with a buggy and pair
for the drive to Pine Plains via
Cambacanya. Mattingley stated then that
there was a ‘first class road’ from
Hopetoun to Camba Canya (sic). It is now
bitumen for most of the distance. He noted
that the dense Mallee was being cleared in
favour of wheat cropping and that the
stock water from Lake Lonsdale had

ig. 2. [ hi 9 d i
Fig. 2. Caladenia xanthochila, a rare an Aveaae arrived in the area. Apart from

endangered species.

Vol. 113 (3) 1996 109

Contributions

Table 2. Birds observed by Mattingley in 1907
around Lake Coorong

Cygnus atralus
Anas superciliosa

Black Swan
Black Duck

Pacific Black Duck
Tippet Grebe

Great Crested Grebe
White fronted Heron

Podiceps cristatus

Notophoyx nov
hollandiae = lgretta
novaeh landiae
Mgretta gargeta
Haliastur sphenrus

Litthe Lypret
Whistling Haple
Whisthing Kite
Wedge tailed aple Uroaetus audax
Aquila audax
Vulica atra
Aegialitis, melanops
Elseyornis melanops
Chlidonias hybrida

Coot
Black. fronted Dotterel

Marsh ‘Tern
Whiskered Tern

Spiny cheeked Honey. Acanthochoera rufi-
cate! wularis ~ Acanthas
enys rufogularis

Pulotiy penicillata

Lichenostomus

penicillatus

Collurtcincla har
monica

Grallina picata
Grallina cyanoleuca

Vantail = Willie Wage Rhipidura tricolor
tal Rhipidura leucophrys

White-plumed Honey
cate

Harmonious Thrush
Grey Shrike thrush
Mayppie-lark

roadside remnants there is no longer any
‘mmallee scrub’, and this must have affect-
ed the birdlife, Table 3 has been compiled
from Mattingley’s article and many of
these birds were noted by the author in
1995, although by no means all, In addi-
tion, on the roadside near Cambeanya the
Purple-paped Honeyeater Lichenostomus
CrATMAS Was Seen,

The most notable remnants of tree and
shrubs along the verge include Buloke
Allocasuarindg luehmanii (much of it
infested with Buloke Mistletoe Amyena
linophyllium ~ a marvellous example of
plant ‘mimicry’), Umbrella Wattle Acacia
oswaldti, and Desert Cassia Senna arteme-
stoides,

On two of the dunes approaching

Cambacanya were fine examples of
Berrigan Eremophila longifolia, one in
full Mower and the other with very few
bethins but some fruit,

Cambacanya is a large and thriving
concern based on wheat cropping, but the
first impression is that of an extensive
Open-cul gypsum mining project. The

110

grandfather of the present owner took over
the property during World War L He said
that the Poulton family had been hard hit
by the drought of 1914. One year they had
shorn 50 000 sheep but then the drought
forced them to turn the animals loose into
the scrub on a survival-of-the-fittest basis.
The following year they had shorn 10 000!
This means that 40 000 animals perished
during the year and this loss was the end
for the Poultons on Cambacanya. The
stock watering system now in use would
be an insurance against such a thing hap-
pening to that extent again.

One wonders if the ravages of the sheep
at that time have resulted in the lack of
vegetation in some areas to this day, espe-
cially the lack of an understorey in some
of the Black Box areas,

Some of the original buildings still
stand at Cambacanya (Mig. 3), At least one
of the dwellings is the original where the
limestone is clearly visible, although there
are recent additions. Some outbuildings
sill stand, but in ruins, and are no longer
used. But dominating the surroundings
and made of more modern materials is the
present main homestead and the extensive
shedding used to house the machinery
necessary for large-scale cropping and for
operating the open-cut mine. Mattingley’s
vehicle ‘bumped along fearfully’ as he
made his way towards what is now the
south-eastern poruion of the Wyperfeld
National Park. Ours was a less hazardous
trip, although there is no road as such, We
learned that as long as you ‘keep the fence
on your right’ you will eventually come
out on what is now Webster's Road. Apart
from some Mallee fringing the roads in
the distance, as you cross Cambacanya the
view is completely dominated by pad-

Fig. 3 Ruins of Cambacanya Station

The Victorian Naturalist

Table 3. List of birds seen by Mattingley between H and C
#= heard but not actually observed; @ » Not Soaied tee : et
Aboriginal population; * = Recorded as becoming very rare,

of a North Queensland species.

Brown Tree-creeper = Climacteris scandens=
Brown Treecreeper — Climacteris picumnus
*Spotted Bowerbird = Chlamydodera mac-
ulata= Chlamydera
maculata
Brown Fly-catcher=? Pseudogerygone=fusca

Jacky Winter Microeca- fascinans

White-throated Pachycephala_pec-
Thickhead= toralis
Golden Whistler Cinclorhamphus

rufescens=

Rufous Song-lark = — Cincloramphus math-
Rufous Songlark ewsi

Red-throated Pacycephala gilberti=
Thickhead= Pacycephala inornata
Gilbert’s Whistler

Black-breasted Zonifer tricolor=
Plover=Banded Vanellus tricolor
Lapwing

Chestnut-rumped Hylacola pyrrhopygia
Ground-Wren =
Chestnut-rumped
Heathwren

Mountain Duck= Casarca tadernoides=
Australian Shelduck Tadorna tadernoides
Crested Oreoica= Oreoica cristata=

Crested Bellbird Oreoica gutturalis
Pacific Heron= White- Notophoyx pacifica=
necked Heron Ardea pacifica
Scrub Robin= Drymaoedus
Southern Scrub-robin brunneopygius=
Drymodes brunneopy-
ia
White-eared Honey- Ptilotis leucotis= Lich-
eater enostomus leucotis
Golden-rumped Pardalotus xanthopy-
Pardalote= gius = Pardalotus
Spotted Pardalote punctatus
Chestnut-rumped Tit= Acanthiza reguloides
Buff-rumped Thornbill

Chestnut-backed Cinclosoma castanon-
Ground-bird=Cinna- otum= Cinclosoma
mon Quail-thrush castonotum

Spiny-cheeked Honey- Acanthochoera rufigu
eater laris= Acanthagenys

rufogularis
Graceful Honeyeater Meliphega gracilis
(NQ).probably Yellow-
plumed Honeyeater Lichenostomus ornatus
Emu Dromaius novaehol-

landiae
Black-breasted Plover=Charadrius melanops=
Black-fronted Dotterel Elseyornis melanops

Pigeon= ? Crested Ocyphaps lophotes
Pigeon ys
Restless Flycatcher — Sisura inquieta=

Myiagra inquitea
Sulphur-crested Cacatua galerita
Cockatoo

Red-capped Robin Petroeca goodenovil=

Petroica goodenovii

Galah Cacatua roseicapella

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

ambacanya in 1907
eputed to have been known to the
NQ = likely to be a misidentification

Black-backed Wren=
Splendid Fairy-wren
Chough= White-

Malurus melanotus=
Malurus splendens
Corcorax melanoram-

winged Chough phus
Black Cockatoo = Calyptorhynchus
Yellow-tailed funereus ~

Black-Cockatoo
White-browed Babbler Pomatorhinus supercil-
iosus=P omatostomus
superciliosus

Bronze-winged Phaps chalcoptera
Pigeon=Common
Bronzewing

Wedge-tailed Eagle = Uroaetus audax
=Aquila audax

Misocalius osculans=
Chrysococeyx osculan:

Malurus cyaneus

Black-eared Cuckoo

Blue Wren= Superb
Fairy-wren

White-shouldered
Caterpillar-eater =
White-winged Triller

Magpie= Australian

Lalage sueurii

Gymnorhina tibicen

Magpie
Bee-eater= Rainbow Merops ornata=
Bee-eater Merops ornatus

#Curlew= Bush Stone Burhinus magnirostris=
curlew Burhinus grallarius

Brown Hawk = Hieracidia orientalis=
Brown Falcon Falco berigora

"Delicate Owl= Barn — Strix delicatula=

Owl Tyto alba

Kestrel= Nankeen Falco cenchroides
Kestrel

Mopoke, Boobook= = Nonox boobook= Ninox
Southern Boobook novaeseelandiae

Owlet Nightjar= Aegotheles cristatus
Australian
Owlet-nightjar

@Night Parrakeet= Geopsittacus occiden-
Night Parrot talis= Pexoporus occi-

dentalis
Red-rumped Parrakeet Psephotus
=Red-rumped Parrot —_ haematonotus
Many-coloured Para- Psephotus multicolor=
keet=Mulga Parrot Psephotus varius

Mallee Parrakeet= Barnardius barnardi=
Australian Ringneck Barbardius zonarius

Major Mitchell's Cacatua leadbeatert
Cockatoo

Mallee Emu-wren Stipiturus mallee

Orange-tipped Pardalotus affinis=
Pardalote, Yellow- Pardalotus striatus
tipped Pardalote=

Striated Pardalote
Mallee-Fowl=-
Malleefowl
Tree Martin

Lipoa ocellata

Cecropis nigricans =
Hirundo nigricans
White-faced Honey- — Phyliidonyris albifrons

eater=? White-fronted

Honeyeater

111

Contributions

docks of wheat on the grand scale. The
northern end of Websters Road is also the
entrance to the Park, joining the end of
Lowan Track at the locked gate. These
tracks or their predecessors, would proba-
bly have been made by the traffic between
Cambacanya and Pine Plains, and the
problems with deep sand that Mattingley
suffered in several parts can still occur
today.

Mattingley made no particular emphasis
on the plant life along the way, his chief
interest being birds. However, in retracing
what must be very close to his route along
the northern part of Webster’s Rd., Lowan
Track and perhaps Cambcanya Track,
there is a veritable garden awaiting the
keen walker. Plants seen along Webster’s
Road, in the order noted, are listed in
Table 4 and those along the Lowan Track
and Cambacanya Track are listed in
Table 5. It was most noticeable that each
specimen of Thelymitra megacalyptra
seen along these tracks was growing out
from a clump of Triodia scariosa!
Mattingley passed along these tracks, or
very close to them, and noted the changes
in soil types from soft sand to harder flats,
which account for the distribution of
plants in the various areas. He certainly
came to the area now known as the

Table 4. Plants seen along Websters Track,
listed in the order seen.

Acacia brachybotria
Acacia calamifolia Wallowa
Cassytha melantha Dodder Laurel
Cryptandra tomentosa Prickly Cryptandra
Podolepis capillaris | Wiry Podolepis
Olearia tenuifolia Cypress Daisy- bush
Callitris gracilis Slender Cypress Pine
Eucalyptus oleosa Acorn Mallee
Eucalyptus calycogona Red Mallee
Eucalyptus. incrassata Yellow Mallee
Leptospermum Green Tea-tree
corlaceum
Leptospermum
myrsinoides
Zygophyllum
apiculatum leaf
Phebalium bullatum — Silvery Phebalium
Glischrocaryon behrii_ Golden Pennants
Dianella revoluta var Black Anther
revoluta Plax-lily
Clematis microphylla Small-leaved Clematis
Billardiera cymosa Sweet Apple-berry
Melaleuca lanceolata Moonah
Aotus ericifolia Common Aotus

Grey Mulga

Silky Tea-tree

Pointed Twin-

112

Wonga Hut Camping Areas adjacent to
Lake Brimin, possibly from near where
the Ranger Station is now situated. This
would be a logical place to find ‘elongated
plains’ and ‘around their margins huge
Red Gums, Eucalyptus rostrata (sic) rear-
ing their umbrageous heads. We were in
the ancient bed of the Wimmera River.’

There was an ‘iron hut’ here, which
may well have been the one destroyed in
the 1945 bush fires and replaced by the
present similar structure. Unfortunately it
would appear that the vegetation in this
vicinity has suffered greatly from the rav-
ages of grazing, fire, flood, rabbits, and
people. It was the country near here that
prompted Mattingley to comment that it
‘would form an admirable national park
without any further making.’ To see what
Mattingley saw, it is necessary to walk
some of the routes designated in the Park
literature or along any of the management
tracks. The circuit from Lake Brimin to
Eastern Lookout traverses most types of
habitat found in the Park.

Table 5, Plants seen along the Lowan and
Cambacanya Track, listed in the order seen.
* exotic plant

Broom Baeckea
Mallee Bitter-bush
Upright Spider Orchid
Pink Velvet Bush
Slender Velyet Bush
Scented Sun-orchid

Baeckea behrit

Adriana hookeri

Caladenia stricta

Lasiopetalum behrii

Lasiopetalum baueri

Thelvmitra mega-
calyptra

Micromyrtus ciliata) Heath Myrtle

Beyeria lechenaultia Pale Turpentine
Bush

Calytrix tetragona Fringe Myrtle

Calotis erinacea Burr Daisy

Pittosporum philly- Weeping Pittosporum
reoides
Hakea vittata
Ajuga australis
Boronia caerulescens
Olearia pimeleoides
Triodia scariosa Porcupine Grass
Exocarpus sparteus Broom Ballart
Eucalyptus largiflorens Black Box
Eucalyptus camald- | Red Gum
ulensis
*Nicotiana glauca

Hooked Needlewood
Austral Bugle

Blue Boronia
Pimelea Daisy-bush

*Tree Tobacco

Westringia rigida Stiff Westringia
Caladenia tensa Rigid Spider Orchid
Acacia farinosa Mealy Wattle
Millotia tenuifolia Soft Millotia

Erect Guinea-flower
Twiggy Guinea flower

Hibbertia stricta
Hibbertia virgata

The Victorian Naturalist

Contributions

From the Wonga Hut on Lake Brimin,
Mattingley’s route basically followed
Outlet Creek. The areas of open country,
‘verdure clad bays forming the plains’, the
swales between the dunes, making a chain
of ‘lakes’ along the course of Outlet
Creek, impressed him as the grazing
grounds of numerous emus and marsupi-
als, and this is still so,

One item is sadly missing in any quanti-
ty, the nesting mounds of the Malleefowl
Leipoa ocellata, which Mattingley found
to be numerous in the mallee areas in this
section of the Park. In another region a lit-
tle further north, he examined forty-five
mounds in a relatively small area.

Of course Mattingley’s objective was
the Pine Plains Station, still some distance
away, and he proceeded up the Creek to
Lake Brambruk, the destination of one of
the Nature Walks - Lake Jerriwirrip,
called ‘Cherrywhip’ by the locals at the
time, and Wonga Lake. This route took
him through some of the richest bird
observing spots, and many of the species
in his checklist were noted along here. It is
only a matter of a few kilometres to walk
this route, but folk doing so should have a
good map and be able to make proper use
of a compass. As is stated in the Park liter-
ature, any extensive walks should be dis-
cussed beforehand with the Rangers. It is
not always easy to make out which is the
bed of Outlet Creek, and there could be
many false trails.

Perhaps it was fortunate that Mattingley
and his party didn’t divert a little to the
west to try and avoid deep sand on the
ridges between Jerriwirrip and Wonga.
The depression in this area is Lake
Plagianth, and on the occasion of this
1995 visit had, in its central area, an
expanse of ‘glutinous grey glug’ which
enhanced one’s height by a centimetre or
two at each step. If Mattingley’s buggy
and pair had entered they would have been
in more trouble than with the deep sand up
on the dunes.

Growing in this grey mud was a fasci-
nating little plant, not seen before by the
author, *Flax-leaf Alyssum Alyssum lini-
folium. This small crucifer is found in the
drier parts of the state and in similar areas
in other states. At this season It was 1n
fruit, with the seeds visible in the tiny

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

transparent ‘spectacle’ pods.

Mattingley must have had good infor-
mation and also have been a good naviga-
tor. It was dark soon after they left Wonga
Lake and it was still over six kilometres as
the crow flies to his next reference point,
Bracky Well, But of course the crow
would have been stumbling along through
the sand, or if following along the creek
bed, tripping over fallen timber and
becoming confused by the numerous side
branches of the creek,

If the creek bed is followed from where
it crosses the Nine Mile Square Track, one
eventually comes across Emu Flat, and it
is on the edge of this Flat that Bracky
Well stood. There are the remains of a
windmill lying on the ground, chiefly the
tail-vane, and a couple of decayed logs, all
that remains of the hut referred to by
Mattingley. a

Fortunately, somebody has erected a
sign indicating Bracky Well, or it would
be possible to walk past without noticing
very much. From here it was only about
four more kilometres across much easier
ground, the southern bed of Lake Agnes,
to Pine Plains Station.

Mattingley called this spot “Bracke
Well’, and the local opinion at the
moment is that ‘Bracke’ or ‘Bracky” is an
abbreviation of ‘brackish’, referring to the
quality of the water provided,

Apparently the view from the current
Pine Plains homestead, built by the late
Tim O'Sullivan on the site of the original,
hasn’t changed much in nearly ninety
years. There were then, as now, ‘miles of
country without a trace of mallee; large
plains without a vestige of timber, evi-
dently the dried up beds of ancient lakes,
fringed with picturesque Red Gums;
whilst the graceful Murray Pines grow
profusely on the sand ridges.’

The principal ‘large plain’ is of course
Wirrengren Plain, the ultimate destination
of Outlet Creek. It is unusual for the Creek
to run as far north as Lake Brambruk, and
even more so for it to reach Pine Plains,
but it is recorded that in very wet years it
has done so. In 1853 Wirrengren Plain
flooded to a depth of 12 feet (3.6 m), and
in 1945 to 4 feet (1.2 m). It’s very difficult
to visualise such events (Fig. 4).

Mattingley spent the next three days

113

Contributions

exploring around the area. The Lake
Agnes perimeter is still timbered with Red
Gum, Black Box and Cypress Pine, and
bird life abounds. The dunes on the west-
ern side of Wirrengren Plain are timbered
with several mallee and acacia species,
and likewise abound in bird life.
Mattingley’s bird list between Hopetoun
and Pine Plains included 50 species
(Table 3) of the approximately 160 now
on the list recorded for Wyperfeld
National Park.

This author’s list, though not having
quite the same species as Mattingley,
numbered fifty-seven, and included one
not mentioned by Mattingley, the
Peregrine Falcon Falco peregrinus. A pair
were observed at nest (one that had been
abandoned by an eagle), not far from
Bracky Well. The nest was near the top of
a Cypress Pine on the side of a sand dune.
The male was particularly vocal in his dis-
pleasure at our presence, wheeling around
and screaming. An hour or so later, on
returning, the same reception was given.
The female quietly left the nest and
perched a little distance away, presumably
returning when all was quiet. Mattingley
doesn’t specifically mention the
Malleefowl being seen on the journey
from Hopetoun to Pine Plains, although he
mentions the sighting of several nests or
mounds. However, the study of the
‘Thermometer-Bird or Mallee-Fowl’ was
a major part of his work during this time.
The details of this work were published in
Emu 8, Jan.1909. There he describes the
examination of 45 different mounds in the
vicinity of Pine Plains, over a period of
several months in 1907.

One current observation that would

Fig. 4. Bed of Outlet Creek near Pine Plains
Station,

114

have surprised Mattingley, was that of a
mob of camels, including a calf, on
Wirrengren Plain (Fig. 5). These belong to
the O’Sullivan family, and have been used
since 1988 for safaris in various parts of
the country. Another development, begun
by Tim O'Sullivan, and being gradually
completed by Susan O’Sullivan and fami-
ly, is that of accommodation for visitors
to the northern end of Wyperfeld, includ-
ing that part which was previously includ-
ed in Pine Plains. This should be a boon
for folk who don’t wish to camp.

So it is that Mattingley’s dream of a
National Park, the ‘lungs of the city’, has
come to fruition, on an even grander scale
than he imagined. It is possible, without
much difficulty, to traverse most types of
terrain in an ordinary vehicle or with day
walks. For the more adventurous walker,
there is very little limit to what can be
done.

Adequate camping facilities are avail-
able in both the north and south sections
of the Park, and unpowered sites are avail-
able for caravans. Unlike Mattingley’s
problems in deep sand with his ‘buggy
and pair’, access to the major areas is by
well-surfaced roads, including bitumen,
from Rainbow or Hopetoun. Access from
Patchewollock is by gravel road.

The western area of the Park, is accessi-
ble by way of the Yanac to Murrayville
Track, but this is really only suitable for
4WD vehicles, and then only in dry
weather. Unfortunately, some drivers feel
the necessity to barrel along this track,
with the result that it is very cut up in
some sections. The motto of the four-
wheel driver, ‘tread lightly’, has not
always been observed in this area,

aS ie 7
rs) (Ee

Fig. 5. Camels on Wirrengren Plain

The Victorian Naturalist

How to be a Field Naturalist

Acknowledgements
at Mallee. The Victorian Ni i :
Thanks to: Damien Kerr, Principal Ranger, Wyperfeld Mattingley, A.H.E. (19090), Theemorncte Bird
Rarbatal psa at Staff; Bill Roberts, Hopetoun: Mallee Fowl. Emu, 8. Aire
ax Brown, “Cambacanya’; and Susan O'Sullivan, | Mattingley, A.H.E. (1931). The Wyperf i
Mi wn, . , A.HLE. B feld a
Pine Plains’. Park, The Victorian Naturalist a7. i 16. cig
sit W.L. (1966), ‘Notes on a Tour in the
References and Further Reading ae oka! 1861". (Victorian National
non. 3 erfeld National Park, ictori i 6). ‘Fi i
aerate. aes al Park. The Victorian Pizzey, Graham (1986). ‘Field Guide to the Birds of

onan Australia’. (William Collins),
Anon.(1965). The Victorian Naturalist 82, 238. Ross, J.H.(1993). ‘A Gena ct the Vascular Plants of

Backhouse, G, and Jeanes, J. (1995). ‘The Orchids ictoria’ iti i i
Victoria’. (Miegunyah Press, MINE. ied ve ieprermeng” Nesey has aaa
Chisholm, A.H.(Ed.) (1962) ‘The Australian Simpson, K. and Day, N.(1996) ‘Field Guide to th
Encyclopedia’,.3, 596 (Grollier Society). Birds of Australia’. (Penguin Books) j
Garnet, J.Ros, (1965). “Vegetation of Wyperfeld Walsh, N.G. and Entwistle,TJ. (editors) (1994), ‘Flora
National Park’. (Field Naturalists Club of Victoria), of Victoria’. Vol.II. (Inkata Press) > a
Jolly, J.McC.(1968) “Back to Patchewollock’, — Whittell, H.M.(1910). ‘Literature of Australian Birds’
(Wimmera Mail Times: Horsham). (Royal Australian Ornithological Union). «
Mattingley, A.H.E. (1909a), In The Heart of the

Marine Invertebrates
Clarrie Handreck!

Introduction

This item complements Noel Schleiger’s on ‘Shell Collecting’ in The Victorian
Naturalist 112, 105 (April 1995). His lists of activities, equipment, references and clubs
are of course relevant here.

Most people’s observations of marine invertebrates will be confined to intertidal and
shallow subtidal areas. Keep in mind that the entire intertidal zone is exposed to human
activity, with therefore widespread potential for deleterious effects from trampling, habi-
tat disturbance, over-collecting, and exploitation for food and bait. There are no wilder-
ness (‘no-go’) zones within current marine reserves (cf. terrestrial reserves where public
access is mostly restricted to tracks).

Permits are required for collecting or research in all Victorian coastal and marine
reserves.

Collecting live specimens outside reserves for non-research purposes is discouraged,
too. Without immediate effective preservation, body tissue quickly decays. Many, includ-
ing seastars and most nudibranchs, lose all colour when preserved.

Getting Started A, :
The assistance available within a club can speed up your recognition of common species

and the ability to assign specimens to appropriate taxonomic groups, and help you to
develop an eye for the many very small or motionless or camouflaged animals.

Some Tips For Observing a

Move slowly to minimise disturbance and turbidity.

In-situ observation of animals under stones or 1n rock pools,

often increases the range of Sane ae

If you do handle animals, please use discretion:

of Worms will often break, especially if pulled from tubes, holes, or from amongst the
massed small white tube worm ; $5 te ;

— The legs of crabs and shrimps break off easily, especially if lively animals oe
restrained in the hand. Watch out, too, for ‘soft’ ones that have just moultec orc

— Trying to remove sessile species, or those that cling tightly (limpets, etc.), 1s likely to
cause damage or injury. : : ae

— Handling aes reeeaes life’s problems for animals that drop limbs ea discharge
intestines to distract predators, e.g., brittle stars and some sea cucumbers,

respectively.

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

without handling them,

115

How to be a Field Naturalist

— Use soft-action forceps or a small art brush if you need to handle soft-bodied
animals.

In soft-sediment areas, distinguish species that live in various habitats: attached to sea-
grasses or algae, on the surface, in the top few centimetres of sediment, or deeper and
perhaps in burrows. Digging and sieving soft sediments inevitably causes considerable
habitat disturbance,

In rocky-shore areas, turn and replace loose stones carefully to minimise the chance of
animals being injured or washed off (our aim is to see them). Return each stone, right
way up, to its original spot in the hope that the edges will quickly ‘seal’ again with sedi-
ment or shingle. If collecting dead shells, select those without things living on them
(limpets, bryozoa, etc.) or inside them (especially hermit crabs, many of which are in
very small shells).

Literature (additional to Schleiger).

George, D, and J. (1979). Marine Life: An Illustrated Encyclopaedia of Invertebrates of
ihe Sea. Rigby. ISBN 0.7270 1107 3 H/c. 288p. In print?

Coleman, N. (1991): Encyclopaedia of Marine Animals. Angus & Robertson, ISBN 0

207.16429 (). H/c. 324p.

Shepherd, S.A, and Thomas, I.M. (1982,1989): Marine Invertebrates of Southern

Australia. Pt. I: Sponges, Cnidaria, 4 smaller worm groups; Bryozoans, Echinoderms. Pt.

Il; Molluscs. .Handbooks Committee and Govt. Printer of S.A.. ISBN 0 7243 4584

I(Set). S/c. 490 & 410 p.

Underwood, A.J. and Chapman, M,G. (1993): Seashores - A Beachcombers Guide.

NSW Uni. Press. ISBN 0 86840 173 0. S/c. 116p. Sydney species, but many occur in

Victoria.

Wilson, B. (1993;1994): Australian Marine Shells- Prosobranch Gastropods. Odyssey.

(Set of 2 vols.), ISBN 0 646 15225 4 H/c. 408 & 370p.resp.

Willan, R.C. and Coleman, N. (1984): Nudibranchs of Australia. ISBN 0 949 373 01, X.

S/c. 56p.

Jones, D. and Morgan, G. (1994): A Field Guide to Crustaceans of Australian Waters.

Reed. ISBN 0 7301 0403 6. S/c. 216p.

In preparation

Edgar, G. A book for the general reader and naturalist on the marine life of southern
Australia. Over 1000 species described and colour-illustrated. Due to be published by
Reed in the first half of 1996.

Clubs and Societies

Marine Research Group of Victoria (MRGV*): Clarrie Handreck (03) 9870 3647.

Malacological Society of Australasia (Victorian Branch): Edna Tenner (03) 9478 1284.

Port Phillip Bay Shell Group: Christine Bunyard (03) 9439 2147.

Marine and Coastal Society of Victoria: Tim O'Hara (03) 9899 2509 Focus: marine environment
management.

Aquatic Naturalists (*Aquanats’): Glenys Greenwood (03) 9560.6024. Focus: divers’ natural history
group.

Australian Marine Conservation Society (formerly Australian Littoral Society); Brisbane-based,
branches in Qld. and NSW. Focus:research and management (07) 848 5235.

FNCV; Noel Schleiger (03) 9435 8408.

*Participants in MRGV activities can:

— help build a Victoria-wide database:

— _ assist with studies and reports on particular locations;

— support the work of specialist taxonomists;

— _ pursue their own interests or studies

— provide diver support for research (shore and boat Opportunities arise)

— work . volunteers in Invertebrate Zoology, Museum of Victoria (Saturday and weekday
options),

116 The Victorian Naturalist

Naturalist Notes

Lightning

G.L. Howie!

Since my letter headed ‘Lightning
Strikes Again’ was published (Howie
1994), information has been printed which
shows that the published facts, on the for-
mation of thunderstorms and hence light-
ning, if not incorrect, do not show what
really happens or indeed what forces are
present.

Damage to trees shows the effect of the
energy release pulses. While on a Field
Naturalists’ Society Botany Club excur-
sion (10/12/95) to a native vegetation area
within the Kuitpo Forest, which is other-
wise mainly Radiata Pine Pinus Radiata,
30 km south of Adelaide, I noticed a
Eucalyptus obliqua with a strip of bark
removed from the full length of the main
trunk, obviously due to lightning.

Splinters of wood and bark were strewn
all around for a radius of about 15 m
(about the height of the tree), the branch
(60 mm diameter) that had been struck,
complete with leaves which were dry after
2-3 months, was lodged in the fork of the
main and dead trunk.

It appears that the current entered the
branch via a dead stick which was proba-
bly wet and thus acted as a conductor.
About 3 m of the branch was completely
splintered, with one piece about a metre
long stuck vertically in the soil directly
below where it had grown, Down the main
trunk the growing layer acted as the con-
ductor and hence the strip of bark was
blasted off.

Adelaide, on 17/12/95, experienced a
severe electrical storm with most strokes
apparently cloud to ground (the Electricity
Corporation recording about 250 to main
power lines in South Australia). About
110 flashes were recorded in the extended
metropolitan area between 4.30 am and
12.30 pm by the Australia-wide radio
detecting system now partly installed. The
initial receivers are at Wagga Wagga,
Cobar, Mildura and Mount Gambier. I
have a copy of the print-out for 17/12/95,
the first line being

' 53 Gladys Street, Clarence Gardens, SA 5039

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

‘S 34.313 E 139.405 04:09:14. i

DEC-95 -32 KAMB’. ek
Times to 1 MS eastern standard. 116
flashes were recorded for the ‘extended
metropolitan Adelaide’.
It is hoped to be able to associate the trip-
ping of power distribution circuit breakers
(1IKV and over) with the location of par-
ticular flashes so that insulators and con-
ductors can be examined for damage when
supply has not been interrupted.

Thanks to media publicity, I was able
the next day to go and examine the
remains of a Silky Oak Grevillea robusta
which was struck, The trunk (30 cm diam-
eter) 2-4 m above the ground was com-
pletely shattered with the bark totally
removed from that and the section below.
The discharge spreading out in three
branches, one of which damaged a tele-
phone cable abut two metres away.
Unfortunately the trunk was cut up shortly
after the incident.

On New Year’s Eve, Adelaide experi-
enced another severe thunderstorm which
had apparently developed not far to the
north. I was able to examine two houses
that had been damaged by lightning. In
one case about 35 roof tiles were broken
and about 50 clay bricks in the upper part
of a side wall were shattered. Most of the
wiring in the house had to be replaced, not
surprising as the discharge was seen as
three sparks from ceiling to floor in three
rooms.

The damage to the television, microwave
oven, video recorder and washing machine
motor which were plugged in, although
not switched on, illustrates that all electri-
cal appliances should be completely dis-
connected if a thunderstorm is imminent.

I was, therefore, not surprised to be told
by a Field Naturalist member that two
trees (E. obliqua) in the Society’s reserve
at Forest Range, 30 km north-east of
Adelaide, had been struck by lightning on
New Year’s Eve 31/12/95. j

This occurrence is of interest as it was
found that the initial discharge was via one
tree but the return stroke was via a nearby
tree (butts 10 m apart, tops about 5 m

117

Naturalist Notes

apart). The bark of both trees was blasted
off along 6 cm strips right to the top and
reduced to a mass of fibre resembling that
from a coconut (Fig. 1), most of it still
being attached to the remaining bark. The
rest of the fibre and some splintered wood
were spread about on trees, shrubs and
ground for 10 m in all directions (Fig. 2).

As with the other cases, the foliage,
because there was no evidence of burning,
was obviously not part of the discharge
paths. A few small twigs with leaves were
apparently broken off by the force of the
explosions and the condition of these indi-
cated that the incident probably occurred
on 17/12/95.

Another fact about lightning is also
gaining publicity in the media. For many
years I have been of the opinion that light-
ning often extended far above the thunder-
head through the upper atmosphere and
the night of the 2/1/95 provided further
evidence. I was alone in the Cooltong
Conservation Park, a mallee area with
Bare Logania Logania nuda, Skeleton Fan
Flower Scaevola depauperata and particu-
larly Stackhousia megaloptera and domi-
nated by Silver Mallee Eucalyptus
cyanophylla, when an extremely severe
thunderstorm came from the north-west.

Before the rain and high winds
obscured my view , I was of the opinion

Fig. 1. Eucalyptus obliqua Forest Range, South
Australial Lower part of the trunk, bark shred-
ded by lightning,

118

that visible cloud-to-ground strokes were
occurring at about 100 per minute.
Subsequently it was clear that the thunder-
head was very high, possibly 20-30 km,
yet some ground strokes appeared to
extend further upwards as a reddish glow.
A short paragraph published about the
same time, ‘Gamma-Ray Thunderbolts’
(‘News Notes’ 1995) subsequently con-
vinced me that what I had seen as inverted
triangles of light apparently reflection
from below horizon thunderstorms, were,
in fact, upper atmosphere extension of the
lightning flashes, obviously involving
potential differences much greater than
that which could be caused by the thunder-
storm alone.

I had, for over 20 years, been uncertain
as to why light flashes were seen as distant
triangles with the apex always pointing
downwards, when, if they involved direct
reflection of flashes, these should not be
only inverted triangles. The explanation of
the upper atmosphere glows has come in a
number of publications since (Hill 1995;
Davidson 1995; Muir 1995; Kerr 1994b,
1995; Lyons 1995; Holmes 1995).

Many cloud-to-ground strokes and/or
the return strokes apparently extend up to
100 km above the earth in the form of
inverted cones (seen as triangles) within
volumes of up to 10, 000 km3 of air,

None of the published information has
offered an explanation of the cause of
‘Red Sprites’ (salmon-red and carrot-
shaped) and ‘Blue Jets’ (blue and foun-
tain-shaped)(Fig. 3). One hypothesis is
that they are formed from oxygen or nitro-
gen molecules excited by collisions with

Fig. 2. Left, Butt tree of Fig. 1, right, bundle of
dispersed fibre on Acacia pycnantha, 6 m away.

The Victorian Naturalist

EES se

Naturalist Notes

high energy electrons, somewhat similar
to those produced in auroras (Kerr 1994:
Lyons 1995; ‘News Notes’ 1995),

However, questions still arise:-

- Do charges resulting from solar activi-
ty accumulate on earth, and if so, do these
charges subsequently escape into outer
space with the assistance of thunderstorm
activity and hence the ‘Red Sprites’, etc.?
It appears that ‘Red Sprites’ are best
observed from 200-250 km away from the
thunderstorm (below the horizon) and, of
course, well away from cities such as
Melbourne.

- Do the charges accumulated in the
capacitance formed by the earth, together
with the insulating lower atmosphere
(dielectric) and the conducting upper
atmosphere, assist in the formation of
thunderstorms and contribute to their
intensity?

The result is a flash of light between
cloud and earth, a damaged or demolished
tree, a smashed power line insulator, a

broken conductor, a damaged transformer
or a bush fire (an essential for the CXiS-
tence of many Australian plant species),
but what was the precursor high in the
atmosphere and probably unnoticed by
humans?

References
Davidson, K. (1995), Bolts from the blue. Neu

Scientist (August), 32.
Hill,

i, D.K. (1995), Strange Lights Above
Thunderstorms. Pacific Discovery 28 (3),
36

Holmes, B, (1995), Airborne elves caught in the act.
Science (December), 17.

Howie, G.L. (1994). | ighning Strikes Again. The
Victorian Naturalist WA, 44-45,

Kerr, R.A. (1994a), Stalking Flashy Beasts Above the
Clouds. Science 265 (August), 740,

Kerr, R.A. (1994b), Atmospheric Scientists Puzzle
Over High-Altitude Flashes. Science 264 (May),
1250,

Kerr, R.A, (1995). Lofty flashes come down to earth
Seience 270 (October), 235,

Lyons, W.A. er al. (1995). Sprites, ELF Transients,
and Positive Ground Strokes, Science 269 (August),
1088.

Muir, Hazel. (1995), Striking back at Lightning using
Lasers. New Scientist 1998 (October), 26-27,

‘News Notes’. (1995). Gamma-Ray Thunderbolts. Sky
and Telescope (January), 14.

IONOSPHERE

MESOSPHERE
SPRITES

[10 - 100 MS, BRIGHT)

100 KM/SEC ” SPEED

STRATOSPHERE

UPWARD
SUPERBOLTS
(OySce?, Brtliant)

BLUE JETS

(100 - 300 MS, Dim)

*
at

‘

LARGE NIGATIVE.
CLOUDAD-GHOU 100 KM

TROPOSPHERE

Fig. 3. Transient, Luminous Eve
Sprites - Elves - Blue Jets. Drawing courtesy W
Collins, Colorado 80522, USA

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

ELVES ts!

ANVIL CLOUD

CLOUD-TO-GROUND
VLASH

MS, VERY BRIGHT]

BODY (Red)

TENDRILS (Blue/Purple)

TARGE POSITIVE

200 KM

—_ =

Events in the Stratosphere and Mesosphere Induced by Lightning.
alter A. Lyons, ASTeR Inc.,

PO Box 466, Fort

119

Book Reviews

A Field Guide to Australian Butterflies

by Robert Fisher

Publisher: Surrey Beatty & Sons Pty Limited, Chipping Norton NSW. 1995. 254pp.
RRP$29,95

In recent years conservation attention to a
number of rare butterflies, such as the
Eltham Copper in Victoria, has seen an
increase in public awareness of the need to
Jearn more about our fauna, A modern field
guide to assist identification of common
species in the bush and home garden has
become a must for the environmentally
aware. This latest hand book, by a recog-
nised authority on the South Australian
fauna, is presumably directed to a lay or
young audience. Just over 200 butterfly
species of a national total exceeding 400 are
illustrated. The book is hard bound, glossy
covered and sturdy, and its slim shape makes
it very portable.

The introductory section includes general
information on nomenclature, life history,
distribution, butterfly morphology, and a
small component on how to use the guide in
the field. The author recommends initial field
classification to family level, but this would
be difficult for the novice using only the
information provided,

The bulk of the book comprises a family
by family treatment of species in traditional
arrangement. An outstanding feature is the
high quality colour illustrations of early
stages of some 45 species, Each family is
separately introduced, and for each butterfly
species, a description of the adult male and
female, general distribution and some life
history information is given along with illus-
trations of one or more museum specimens.
To aid identification, wing measurements in
millimetres are provided in the text. Very lit-
tle on species biology is included, and more
emphasis on this, rather than descriptions,
would have enhanced the species accounts.
There is a tendency towards technical lan-
guage with emphasis on scientific rather than
common names, but the inclusion of a three
page glossary at the back of the book will
assist the reader. The guide concludes with a
bibliography and separate indexes of com-
mon and scientific names.

Although, perhaps of limited concern to
the novice, the guide does contain a sprin-
Kling of inaccuracies which butterfly special-
ists will detect. Occasionally, incorrect com-
mon names are applied; Paralucia pyrodis-
cus lucida, the famous ‘Eltham Copper’ is
called the ‘Dull Copper’, a name applicable

120

to the eastern subspecies only. Regrettably,
there are at least 10 incorrectly identified
adults in the guide (see appendix). Some
illustrations of hesperiines involve at least
two species under one name, sometimes
comprising members of different genera. The
female depicted for Subera dobboe seems to
be Telicota anisodesma, and the female of
one lycaenid, Candalides absimilis, appears
under four different names. For several
species the sexes have been mistakenly given
(eg. Lampides boeticus). The colour repro-
duction is generally accurate, however some
of the field shots depict adults on unlikely
ornamental flowers, and other ‘live’ butter-
flies appear deceased (eg. Paralucia pyrodis-
cus).

In places the work is up to 12 years out of
date, although most of the new information is
available in the journals cited in the bibliog-
raphy. This has resulted in the use of some
obsolete names (eg. Danis hymetus is a
junior synonym of a New Guinea species,
Psychonotus caelius). There are very few
spelling errors, Those found pertained only
to technical names, eg’s. the mistletoe
Notothixos (see p.102), also the butterfly
Tirumala hamata (see pp.118-9). Some of
the bibliographic details are vague, incom-
plete or erroneous (eg. MecCubbin was not
revised in 1985; this is a reprint of the 1971]
edition). Distribution data has suffered the
most and in some places is wrong - the rare
Barrington Tops subspecies Candalides
heathi doddi does not occur in the Blue
Mountains. Errors are also present in the
descriptions of adults, eg. the female of
Hypolimnas alimena lamina is said to be
without the blue band on the upperside - this
is applicable only to the NT subspecies, dar-
winensis. The Australian life history of
Bindahara phocides, published in 1983, is
stated to be undescribed (p.210).

For me, these inadequacies are a concern,
however the field guide will prove useful for
those who wish to develop a casual interest
in butterflies or are seeking general informa-
tion in a readily accessible form for use in
school projects. For this audience, the glossy
presentation, brief text and simple structure
diagrams will be a major attraction. Indeed,
many common butterflies will be recognised
using the clear colour plates, and for the

The Victorian Naturalist

Book Reviews

more experienced enthusiast the first class
photos of juvenile stages (mostly unavailable
elsewhere) will be appreciated,

Kelvyn L. Dunn
15 Yackatoon Road
Upper Beaconsfield, Victoria 3808

Book Review Appendix:
Annotated list of the 10 mis-identified adult
specimens and the juvenile stage referred to in
this review.

Ocybadistes flavovittatus: (p.53),
Male is Suniana sunias, female is O. walkeri
(It is not possible to confirm the identity of
the underside specimen - it could be either OQ,
walkeri or O. flavovittatus)
O. hypomeloma: (p.55).
Male underside is S. sunias
Neohesperilla xiphiphora (p.40).
Female seems to be N. crocea
Sabera dobboe (p.65).
Female seems to be Telicota anisodesma
Elodina perdita (p.101).
Both sexes are Elodina walkeri (from NE
Qld),
(Refer to generic revision by DeBaar &
Hancock 1993).
Candalides margarita (p.213).
Female is C. absimilis (NQ form)
C. helenita (p.215),
Female is C. absimilis (NQ form)
C. consimilis (p.217).

Female upperside is C. absimiliy (SE -
NSW form). oro

Female underside is C. absimilis

In addition, Lambkin (1995) stated the female
Pelopidas illustrated is P. agna dingo. 1am not
convinced of this and judge this female to be a
variant of P. lyelli. Some years back | exam-
ined similar ambiguous material from north-
western Australia, and the female illustrated
may even be the specimen from Derby in the
SA Museum which | commented on in Dunn &
Dunn (1991). Lambkin also pointed out that the
illustration of Cupha prosope prosope seems to
be C.p. turneri with which I agree.

Mis-identified juvenile stage:
Catopsilia gorgophone pupa (fig.13 p.89)

This is a female pupa of C. pomona (summer
form) (see Dunn 1995).

References:

DeBaar, M. and Hancock, D.L. (1993). The Australian
species of Elodina C. & R. Felder (Lepidoptera:
Pieridae). Australian Entomologist 20, 25-43.

Dunn, K.L. (1995), Notes on the biology and wing
variation in Catopsilia gorgophone gorgophone
(Boisduval), Victorian Entomologist 25, 106-116.

Dunn, K.L, and Dunn, L.E. (1991). Review of
Australian Butterflies; Distribution, Life history
and Taxonomy. Part 2 Family Hesperiidae.
(Published by the authors: Melbourne).

Lambkin, T, (1995), Book Review. Journal of the
Australian Entomological Society 34, 192, 204.

MEMBERSHIP '
Members receive The Victorian Naturalist and the monthly Field Nat News free. The Club
organises several monthly meetings (free to all) and excursions (transport costs may be charged).
Research work, including both botanical and fauna surveys, is being done at a number of locations
in Victoria, and all members are encouraged to participate.

First Member

Additional Members

FVM AN Tacos aces ocavetart tts atekerepeed evyesatsesbe eee 7
Institutiona

Australian Institutions
Overseas Institutions ..
Schools/Clubs ........-.+++

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

SUBSCRIPTION RATES for 1996

(Subscriptions are due on | January.)
Metropolitan ....ccccsssccseeseesrestersssssensenseesreesntcssrenesnseenerses
Concessional (pensioner/student/unemployed) ...
Country (more than 50km from GPO) ........:-+
Furrhior (under DS): yenyscsssssecesvsessscensersssvezenscsescastctosdacegenesnareesistbscacanysenbyeshusaenasgecesesyteetet8*

$40
$30
$30
$15

$55

121

Naturalist Notes

From our Naturalist in Residence, Glen Jameson

Middle Yarra Timelines

This is a season of growth and activity for the bushland and its creatures, there is not the
shutting down procedures of the northern hemisphere’s autumn. The dry Summer spell is
broken with frequent rains from early March to May and there is a sense of renewal and
replenishment, of gearing up for breeding and production. If it is to be a dry year with the
affects of the El Nino Southern Oscillation bringing on drought, it will be in this season, Early

Winter, that the effects will be first suggested.

Early Winter

On a rocky riparian escarpment over-
looking the Yarra River is a stand of
Black She-Oaks Allocasuarina littoralis.
An uncommon plant along the Middle
Yarra Valley, all these are males with pen-
dulous golden flowers casting pollen to
the winds in the hope of reaching the soli-
tary female plant way downstream. It is a
precarious existence and illustrative of the
plight of many plants in this Riparian veg-
etation community, perhaps one of the
most degraded in the Yarra Valley.

Also on this rocky escarpment above
the rapids, grows Rock Correa Correa
glabra covered in bright green bell-shaped
flowers in which Eastern Spinebills
Acanthorhynchus tenuirostris search for
nectar with almost frenzied speed while
Bell Miners Manorina melanophrys, with
chicks in their nest, harass the Eastern
Spinebill at every opportunity, At the base
of the Rock Correa is the fungi Psilocybe
sp. Under thickets of Burgan Kunzea eri-
coides, cryptogams such as Hypnum

122

cupressiforme, Marchantia foliosa and
Cladia aggregata have returned to an
emerald green colour after substantial
rains and illuminate the heavily shaded
areas where Gnat Orchids Acianthus pusil-
lus flower.

On the ground at the base of a Manna
Gum Eucalyptus viminalis, in a hole large
enough to fit your finger, is the larval case
of a Goat Swift Moth, family Hepialidae.
The first heavy showers soften the ground
and send the Timelonic message for these
huge Moths to emerge during that night in
search of a reproductive partner.

Along the Jumping Creek in
Warrandyte State Park and along bush-
land corridors, many of the smaller birds
including White-plumed Honeyeaters
Lichenostomus penicillatus, Brown-head-
ed Honeyeaters Melithreptus brevirostris,
Yellow-faced Honeyeaters Lichenostomus
chrysops, Grey Fantails Rhipidura fuligi-
nosa and Golden Whistlers Pachycephala
pectoralis will flock together and work the

The Victorian Naturalist

Naturalist Notes

trees for invertebrates. Amongst the lower
Vegetation strata the same flocking behav-
iour occurs between Superb Fairy-wrens
Malurus cyaneus, White-browed
Scrubwrens Sericornis frontalis, Eastern
Yellow Robins Eopsaltria australis,
Yellow-rumped Thornbills Acanthiza
chrysorrhoa and Grey Shrike-thrush
Colluricinca harmonica.

Unseasonal major rains have swollen
the river so that Mountain Tea-tree
Leptospermum grandifolium and River
Bottlebrush Callistemon sieberi, half sub-
merged, drag in the fast flowing water,
whilst the curse of the river system,
Willow’s Salix spp. leaves are turning yel-
low. The water is freezing cold so that the
diversity of aquatic invertebrates is con-
siderably lower than during the summer
seasons. However, there are still
Chironomids, Stoneflies Plecoptera,
Mayflies Ephemeroptera and the Elmid
Beetles, family Elmidae, indicators of
good water quality, but many of the inver-
tebrate populations and large amounts of
organic matter have been swept away by
the racing river to be dispersed right down
to the lower reaches of the Yarra. This
scouring of the food-rich riffle areas
depletes the favoured feeding grounds of
Platypus Ornithorhynchus anatinus and
perhaps threatens the survival of dispers-
ing juveniles.

Downstream, Bolin Bolin Billabong
brims to the bank with flooding water and
large emphemeral wetlands in the Yarra
Flats Park are created, to much vocalized
praise by the Common Froglet Crinia sig-
nifera, which have instantly appeared in
their thousands to use the opportunity
afforded by the flood and also during this
season the Victorian Smooth Froglet
Geocrinia victoriana is at its most vocal.
Much of the invertebrate fauna and organ-
ic matter swept downstream spills onto the
floodplains to enrich the wetland ecosys-
tem and a large mob of Cattle Egrets
Ardea alba feed on the sodden grassy
areas of Banksia Park and Yarra Flats
Park. River Red Gums Eucalyptus camal-
dulensis begin to shed their copious pro-
duction of seed as the leaves are attacked
by Lace Lerps family Psyllidae.

The frequent showers of Early Winter
inject a new lease of life into the flora and

fauna. In the morning Sun after a particu-

Vol. 113 (3) 1996

larly heavy rain, the Bushlands appear
drippingly fresh and clean. Even the heav-
ily polluted air has been purified and the
smells of the land are intoxicating.
Eucalypts now put on large amounts of
new growth with each species having its
characteristic young leaf colour. Yellow
Box Eucalyptus meliodora has a golden
colour and Red Box Eucalyptus polyan-
themos is tinged with red. Fungi is grow-
ing everywhere in response to the changed
weather conditions.

Gullies and grassy valley slopes are full
of the fruiting bodies of Fungi which are
a major feature of the Winter seasons us
the food chain of decay gains momentum.
There are Dermocybe aff. sanguinea
amongst leaf litter, Armillaria luteobubali-
na at the base of trees, the Yellow
Staining Mushroom Agaricus xanthoder-
mus which seems to have taken domi-
nance over the much loved, collected and
eaten Field Mushroom Agaricus
campestris, huge boletes such as
Phlebopus marginatus resembling garden
settings and, under the introduced
Monterey Pines Pinus radiata, an import-
ed range of fungi, Fly Agaric Amanita
muscaria and Saffron Milk Caps
Lactarius deliciosus. Splashes of Pink
Heath Epacris impressa adorn the bush
under the increasingly overcast skies and
Pink Robins Petroica rodinogaster which
have moved down from mountain forests
and gullies or across from Tasmania.
enjoy the solitude of Andersons Creek
along the Gold Memorial Gully. The usu-
ally solitary Black Swamp Wallaby
Wallabia bicolor also a resident of quiet
gullies and steeper slopes. gives birth
through the winter seasons and may be
occasionally observed with partners dur-
ing this time. Pecking al the last heritage
variety of apples on the trees at Petty’s
Orchard is a flock of the Tasmanian form
of Silvereye Zosterops lateralis lateralis
over for the Winter. Jacky Winters
Microeca fascinans are observed although
the last sightings of Dusky Wood-
swallows Artamus cyanopterus and Fairy
Martins Hirundo ariel are made as they
join the migration path northward. ’

In flight on the occasional sunny after-
noon is the last of the Cabbage White
Pieris raphae, Common Grass Blue Zizina
labradus, and Imperial White Delias

123

Naturalist Notes

harpalyce Butterflies, although on small
Black Wattles Acacia mearnsii Common
Imperial Blue Butterflies Jalmenus evago-
ras are still emerging. Catching the mid-
afternoon sun is a small mob of Eastern
Grey Kangaroos Macropus giganteus lay-
ing in a clearing on a westerly facing
slope of Laughing Waters Park. Amidst
the tangle of a huge, long fallen branch,
are plentiful juvenile Garden Skinks
Lampropholis guichenoti which have just
hatched and they too catch the sun for
energy. Young Black Crickets
Teleogryllus commodus are also plentiful,
often finding their way into houses as does
the introduced Black Millepede.

Distant views from the ridges and hill-
tops are often prevented as rain clouds
cover the Kinglake, Dandenong and
Healesville Ranges. On the dry ridges are
found the early winter flowering forms of
the Golden Wattle Acacia pycnantha and
Spreading Wattle Acacia genistifolia,
uncommon forms of plants which usually
flower during Spring. Mistletoebirds
Dicaeum hirundinaceum feed on the
ripening fruits of the Drooping Mistletoe
Amyema pendulum growing from a Red
Box which is beginning to flower. Nearby
Long-leaf Box Eucalyptus goniocalyx car-
ries a heavy load of flowers as it tends to
do every second year and at its base the
Drooping Cassinia Cassinia arcuata is in
flower in brown pendulous plumes.
Overhead a pair of Wedge-tail Eagles
Aquila audax, one carrying a European
Rabbit Oryctolagus cuniculus plucked
from the grassy slopes of Longridge Park,
are out circling anti-clockwise with the
high pressure air system to gain a vantage
over the terrain. They scrutinize the
forests carefully, for it is nest building
time and secret gullies must be evaluated
for their potential.

As dusk falls, we watch fifteen Gould’s
Wattled Bats Chalinolobus gouldii leave
in succession from a nest box on a dry
ridge in Yarra Valley Parklands. This
organised exit, may help them avoid pre-
dation by Pied Butcherbirds Cracticus
nigrogularis, Pied Currawongs Strepera
graculina and Owls, Gould's Wattled Bats
will copulate during the Winter seasons,
as will most of the species of Bats that
inhabit the Yarra Valley, although births
will not take place until the Spring.

A staggering array of Moths are drawn
to house lights, their eyes glowing golden
orbs. After the first rains break the
Summer dry, huge platoons of Southern
Army Worm Moths Persectania ewingii
appear. Beside them are Twin Emeralds
Chlorocoma dichloraria, Tiger Moths
Spilosoma glatignyi, Heliotrope Moths
Utetheisa pulchelloides, Urticating
Anthelid Moths Anthela nicothoe, White
Satin Moths Thalaina selenaea and, a
favourite of the Warrandyte football team
because it has a red “W” on each white
wing (the team’s colours), the Clara Satin
Moth Thalaina clara. All of these inverte-
brates contribute to a rich harvest for the
flocks of birds that glean the trees during
the day and night hunters such as Sugar
Gliders Petaurus breviceps and Feathertail
Gliders Acrobates pygmaeus. Foraging in
the dark, under the bark of trunks and
large limbs of trees, or amongst leaf litter
for arthropods, is the endangered Brush-
tailed Phascogale Phascogale tapoatafa.
Keenly alert and as agile as thought itself,
this species will mate this season, after
which all the males of the population die,
to leave ecological room for the offspring.

Night skies are dominated by bright
stars of Achernar, Sirius, Procyon, Pollux
and Alderaran. Spurred on by the flush of
new growth on the local Eucalypts,
Brushtail Possums Trichosurus vulpecula
show little decorum by creating copious
amounts of noise as they copulate on tin
roots. The females will be giving birth this
season and carry pouch young for the fol-
lowing four to five months, Ringtail
Possums Pseudocheirus peregrinus also
begin their breeding this season which is
fortunate for the Powerful Owl Ninox
strenua which depends largely on
Ringtails for food. Carried across the val-
ley, where saw-edged formations of mist
mark the river like the vertebrae of an
ancient creature, is the falsetto double
hoot calls of the Southern Boobook Owls
Ninox novaeseelandiae. They are in coun-
terpoint to the deep, resonant double hoot
of the Powerful Owl, which is more often
heard as the largest bird of the Owl family
contemplates the approaching breeding
season,

Glen Jameson
PO Box 568, Templestowe, Victoria 3106

The
Victorian

;
iS

Published by The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria

since 1884 Department of

Supported by the Department of Natural sesounees
1 ENVIRONMENT
Resources and Environment PORTA

MOF V CTORIA

Wi)

38330

From the Editors

Mueller and the FNCV

It is a measure of his greatness that Baron Ferdinand von Mueller found time
in a busy and energetic life to encourage and be involved with the small group
of amateur field naturalists who had recently formed The Field Naturalists Club
of Victoria, as well as supplying articles to actively support the development of
its journal, The Victorian Naturalist. We are sure that Mueller would be pleased
to see that the club is still strong and vital and embarking on a new phase of
growth and activity following the purchase of its own premises at Blackburn.

This edition of The Victorian Naturalist is to acknowledge and remember the
Baron, and while it deals with the wider aspects of Mueller's involvement with
natural history, the central issue is his association with the club, and we begin
with three articles dealing with this aspect.

Thank you

The editors would like to thank all the authors who have given freely of their
time to meet almost impossible deadlines in providing the material for the jour-
nal, and special thanks to Sara Maroske who helped to arrange and co-ordinate
this issue, as well as check the printers page proofs. Behind the scenes the
anonymous referees and proof readers have provided invaluable help with their
conscientious efforts and timely comments. Our editorial team, Gill Earl, Ian
Endersby, Ian Lunt, Ian Mansergh and Tom May, have provided support and,
given of their time, we are especially grateful for their checking of printers page
proofs.

The success of the issue is entirely due to all the hard work of these people.

Aknowledgements

We gratefully acknowledge the substantial finacial assistance provided by The
Department of Natural Resources and Environment towards the additional
costs of this issue. Without their help we would not have been able to publish
the numbers of papers or to cover such a wide range of topics.

Registered Office: FNCV, 1 Gardenia Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130
Telephone/Fax: (03) 9877 9860
Mail: Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130

ISSN 0042-5184

The Victorian Naturalist

‘olume 113 (4) 1996 August

Editors: Ed and Pat Grey
| Mueller Articles
Ui Eempa NCT At Int EVE CFI. CODIVELATHDN CCl es MES ace acted 4sacepea scar taeatdneqstaseciasae avastecsontsobtessescessets 128
breed Yc mepreT eter 0 Pe ery oe erry Rade Perey eeictey ss ties Eeeriva ved cosmcceveasasorsivestesaeiVprege? 130
‘Turon von Mueller in the Field Naturalists Tradition, by Angela Taylor... 131
‘Ihiron von Mueller at Adelaide, by Ruth Dwyer ...cececcsssseesueeieseeseens 139
‘Tron von Mueller and The Victorian Naturalist, by Sheila Houghton 140
wdinand von Mueller, Exhibitioner Extraordinaire, by T. May and S. Maroske ...... 143
‘Te Legacy of Mueller’s Collections, by JH. ROSS .s.sscescssssssssessseeeeteennetetennnscins 146
|Wlarsia - One of Mueller’s Puzzles, by Helen AStON w.ccccscccsceerceeeiesseetereeteeeaneenes 151
|} weller’s Excursions in the Murray Scrub 1848-1851, by R, Grandison 1... 152
eller and the North Australian Exploring Expedition, by Helen Cohn .......-101-00- 163
ueller and the North Australia Expedition, by Alan Parkin .....cesssssecsesresrensieescescens 169
len Revisited ... Mueller’s 1860 Journey .. Twofold Bay-Genoa District,
Dry D. AIDE CHE sssessecsssssnesssessnensessenssessssneen sn eesehsttOennetennesen nett Rete ANU TITS 171
eller’s Oceanic Island Plants, by Jan Endersby .....-:.seresverreeieeeereenesessenettencnens 181
Hueller and his ‘Lady’ Correspondents, by Susan Martin swore 185
rah Brooks - Plant Collector for Ferdinand Mueller,
by B. Archer and S. Maroske ..s..sssssssesssss ieee ES 188
Weller and Personal Names in Zoology and Palaeontology, by Tom Darragh «11.1 195
| Wueller - Champion of Victoria’s Giant Trees, by Bernard Mace 198
1h» Honour a Noted Botanist, by Ruth Dwyer .....-sesseserecrrseessereetencerste seen i 208
Bie Mueller Memorial Medal, by Alan Parkin ......::0sssssseererssssennnnnsnnes i. 208
Mae Baron and the Goldfield, by Ray Wallace ....ssssssssecvrescteencesn ett ei 211
ueller, Acclimatiser and Seed Merchant, by Alan Parkinr ....ccssssessersrseeeeenn 213
eller’s Magpies and Marsupial Wolves ... . by R.N. Paddle stnrnernnnrnnennenen 215
ueller’s naming of Places and Plants in Central Australia - Victorian Eponyms, i
by L, Gillbannk sosessesceseterseseesenenenerneenes ssn stnsertasencrntenntt be
1e Botanist at Como: Mueller and the Armytage Family, by C. McPhee --..-+--e---- 3
k reviews a
| agrant Eucalypts: Gum Trees as Exotics, by Robert Zac a lteter bi
[iewer PA PCUPHLI © naga coeecntettvanbicctekerdoven chp Cranes taere essa etter tts i $0

Natural Art of Louisa Atkinson, by Elizabeth Lawson,

ver: Baron Ferdinand von Mueller. The photo carries the aoe ee ieee
churmann the most exalted of the Lutheran preachers in Australia. In kind ©
erd. von Mueller. March 1982.’ Photo. courtesy Richard Schurmann.

Mueller Issue

Introduction

Sara Maroske'!

At time of the death of Baron Ferdinand
von Mueller on 10 October 1896 The
Field Naturalists Club of Victoria (FNCV)
placed a notice in the daily newspapers
calling on Club members to join with
other mourners in Mueller’s funeral pro-
cession (French 1896), The Club subse-
quently bought the grave-plot adjoining
the one donated to Mueller by the Trustees
of the St Kilda Cemetery, thereby dou-
bling the area that could be devoted to his
memorial (Mezger, B. 1989, pers. comm.).
It was Mueller’s wish that this grave be
tended (Mueller 1884 unpubl.), and over
the years The Field Naturalists Club sur-
rounded the memorial with Australian
plants and kept it in order (e.g. Willis
1957). These actions placed the Club in a
interesting position of intimacy with
Mueller. No family member was nearly so
involved in his funeral proceedings (Wehl
1896 unpubi.).

Mueller called himself one of the earli-
est naturalists in the colony. As such it is
no surprise that he felt at home in the
FNCV. He was one of the ‘original’ mem-
bers and later a Patron of the Club. His
was a familiar face at meetings where he
exhibited extensively, and he also pub-
lished numerous papers in The Victorian
Naturalist. Many Club members had
cause to feel grateful for the personal
encouragement which Mueller gave them.
As W.B. Spencer observed in an obituary
in The Victorian Naturalist, probably
every member of the Club had come into
contact with Mueller. ‘It is hard, indeed,’
Spencer declared, ‘to realize that a
younger generation must arise to whom
the presence of the Baron, so familiar to
us, will only be a tradition.’ (Spencer
1896),

Mueller, however, was no ordinary nat-
uralist. As Government Botanist of
Victoria and Director of the Botanic
Garden, Melbourne he was internationally
renowned for his knowledge of the
Australian flora. First and foremost he was

‘National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra,
Victoria 3141

128

a botanical taxonomist but he also made
significant contributions in the related
fields of geography, agriculture, horticul- |
ture, forestry, palaeobotany and pharmacy.
It is easy to feel overwhelmed and incred-
ulous when attempting to summarize his
achievements, His capacity for work was
phenomenal. This special issue of The
Victorian Naturalist, which commemo-
rates the 100th anniversary of Mueller’s
death, conveys something of the richness
of his endeavours in natural history, many
of which in later life involved the FNCV.

In ‘The Legacy of Mueller’s
Collections’, Jim Ross provides a broad
context for many of the other papers. As a
fellow taxonomist, and one who uses
materials accumulated by Mueller, Ross is
in a good position to assess Mueller’s
botany. He points out that in order to
undertake taxonomic work in Australia’
Mueller had to acquire the means to do so,
which were not initially at hand. The
Government provided Mueller with a
salary and ever-diminishing grants for
books, specimens and equipment. This he
extended with his own funds, with the
dedication of his small staff, and through
the efforts of a large network of collectors.
Even with these resources Mueller could
not unravel all the taxonomic problems he
encountered. Helen Aston’s paper on
Villarsia indicates that there is still plenty
left for other botanists to do.

In his first decades in Australia, Mueller
was able to make substantial plant collec-
tions himself and several papers explore
aspects of what this involved. Ralph
Grandison traces four excursions which
Mueller carried out in the Murray scrub of
South Australia, before he was appointed
Government Botanist of Victoria, Helen
Cohn’s and Alan Parkin’s papers detail
Mueller’s most ambitious journey as the
botanist on the North Australian Exploring
Expedition, 1855-6. Despite losing some
specimens at sea Mueller was able to add
numerous species to the Australian flora
from this venture. David Albrecht’s paper
describes Mueller’s botanizing in the

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Twofold Bay/Genoa district and thereby
reveals that while Mueller may have had
obstacles to overcome in his travels, so do
researchers trying to uncover his tracks.

Although he visited every Australian
colony, Mueller relied on collectors to
give him an overview of the entire coun-
try’s flora. Thus as Ian Endersby’s and
Linden Gillbank’s papers show, Mueller
was able to make a contribution to the tax-
onomy of Lord Howe and Norfolk Islands,
and central Australia without ever visiting
these areas himself. Susan Martin reflects
on the nature of the relationship between
botanist and collector and suggests that,
although it was mutually beneficial, it was
also unequal, especially in respect of
women, who had limited access to educa-
tion and professions for most of the nine-
teenth century. Barbara Archer and Sara
Maroske present a detailed case study of
one individual woman collector, Sarah
Brooks, who clearly got a great deal out of
her relationship with Mueller even if it
was not the same kind of thing as he did.

The scientific rewards to be reaped
from the labours of Mueller’s network
were the discovery of new species, locali-
ty information which helped to set the
geographical limits of species, and obser-
vations on plant biology. Several of the
papers in this edition are preoccupied with
the process of naming. Mueller named
plants and geographical features after indi-
viduals variously to acknowledge a collec-
tor, a patron or a colleague, or simply to
curry favour with a politician. Thomas
Darragh has been able to identify
instances in which this honour was
returned to Mueller in names in zoology
and palaeontology. Ruth Dwyer adds a
race-horse and an insect to the list of
Mueller’s eponymy, Bernie Mace a giant
specimen of Eucalyptus regnans, and
Alan Parkin a medal which is awarded
annually by ANZAAS.

Mueller’s research on Australian plants
is better known than his work on exotics.
Nevertheless, as Ray Wallace demon-
strates in ‘The Baron and the Goldfield’
Mueller’s communication with many
areas was on the subject of non-Australian
plants. Carmel McPhee shows that this
was also the case with individual families

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

such as the Armytages whose Western
District and Queensland properties bene-
fited from Mueller’s importation of pas-
ture grasses such as Panicum spectabile.
Australia’s plants in turn become exotic
when they were exported overseas. Alan
Parkin sketches Mueller’s very significant
role in the acclimatization of Eucalypt
species in countries like California and
Italy where they were prized for their tim-
ber, oils and sanitary vapours.

Current assessment of these ventures is
no longer unequivocally positive.
Mueller’s operations took place in a pre-
ecology era where scientists were not fully
cognizant of the inter-relatedness of
species. In their articles on Thylacines and
tall trees R.N. Paddle and Bernie Mace
tease out some of the complexities of
Mueller’s environmental position. Paddle
asserts that Mueller was not a ‘hardline’
acclimatizer because he was concerned
about the extinction of native species and
did not automatically favour exotics over
natives. Mace laments what has been lost
because Mueller’s position on forestry
was unpopular and indicates some of the
problems in identifying truth in a subject
where writers are rarely disinterested.

Mueller had many like-minded com-
panions in the FNCV and he co-operated
with the Club in its campaigns to preserve
Wilsons Promontory and the Cabbage
Palms (Livistona australis) of East
Gippsland. The Club no doubt benefited
from the prestige and authority Mueller’s
support gave to its activities. In return it
supplied an interested audience and a
record of Mueller’s work. The papers of
Tom May and Sara Maroske, and Sheila
Houghton trace Mueller’s use of Club
exhibitions and The Victorian Naturalist
to publicize and publish, with surprising
speed, his new findings. Consequently the
Naturalist is the place where the type
descriptions of such exciting species like
Rhododendron lochae and Thismia rod-
wayi are to be found. ' '

It is interesting when surveying this
volume to note how many individuals
have been attracted to make a closer
inspection of Mueller’s life and work, and
to submit a written contribution based on
their research, Some authors call him with

129

Mueller Issue

affection and familiarity ‘the Baron’
others make a more critical appraisal of
his work. All are responding to an extraor-
dinary individual, In her paper “Baron von
Mueller in) The Field Naturalists
Tradition’, Angela Taylor argues that
Mueller’s relationship to the Club has
been built into its folklore. It is a process
in which the fact that Mueller was impor-
tant in Club history has tended to be better
remembered than the actual details of his
involvement. While this volume continues
to place Mueller in the centre of Club tra-

ditions, it does so in a way that illuminates
as well as appreciates his contribution.

References

French, C, (1896), [Notice]. Argus 13 October,
Mueller, F, (1884). [Last will and testament). (unpubl.
manuscript, Public Record Office of Victoria, file
62/802, unit 256, VPRS 7591/P2).

Wehl, C. (1896), [Letter to H. Sinclair, 20 October
1896]. (unpubl, manuscript, Library, Royal Botanic
Gardens, Melbourne, RB MSS M106),

Spencer, W. B, [as W.B.S.] (1896), Baron von
Mueller, The Victorian Naturalist 13, 87-92.

Willis, J. H. (1957), Pilgrimage to Baron von
Mueller’s Grave, The Victorian Naturalist 74, 110-
14,

[825
dom of Mecklenburg.
[847
on the flora of south-west Schleswig,
1848
River.
1849
Mueller,
River, SA,
18S

1852
1853

January.
1855-6

Gregory.
1857

[858

1860
l8ol
1863-78
Australiensis.
1865
1869
1871
1873
1876

lished.
1879

1880
1884
1885-8

1886
1891

1896

the St Kilda Cemetery on 13 October,

130

Mueller Time-line

Ferdinand Jakob Heinrich Miiller is born on June 30th in Rostock in the German king-

Miiller arrives in Adelaide on 16 December with his two sisters, Bertha and Clara,
In this year he is also made a Doctor of Philosophy by the University of Kiel for a thesis

In April, Mueller tours the Murray Scrub to Lake Alexandrina, SA with Carl Schedlich,
In December he makes a second trip to the Murray Serub and his first trip to the Murray

Miller is naturalized in South Australia and changes the spelling of his surname to
Between February and March Mueller makes a second botanical trip to the Murray

In February, Mueller makes his third botanical excursion to the Murray River, SA, He
also travels to the Flinders Ranges in this year.

Following the discovery of gold Mueller moves to Victoria,
On 26 January Mueller is appointed Government Botanist of Victoria by Lieut Governor
Charles La Trobe. He leaves for his first major collecting trip in eastern Victoria on 29

Mueller accompanies the North Australian Exploring Expedition led by Augustus

On 13 August Mueller is appointed Director of the Botanic Garden, Melbourne.

In this year Mueller is also made a Doctor of Medicine by the University of Rostock.
The collections at Phytologic Museum of Melbourne (now National Herbarium of|
Victoria) number about 45,000 specimens.

Mueller botanizes in the Twofold Bay/Genoa River district, NSW.

Mueller is elected a fellow of the Royal Society, London.

With Mueller’s assistance, George Bentham publishes the seven volume work Flora

Mueller donates his botanical library to the Government of Victoria.

The King of Wiirttemberg bestows on Mueller the title ‘von’.

The King of Wiirttemberg raises Mueller to the hereditary title of Freiherr (Baron).
Mueller is removed from the Directorship of the Botanic Garden, Melbourne,

The first edition of Mueller’s encyclopedic work, Select Extra-Tropical Plants, ts pub-

Queen Victoria confers on Mueller the title of Knight Commander of the Most
Distinguished Order of St Michael and St George (KCMG).

Mueller joins the Field Naturalists’ Club of Victoria (FNCV) as member number 36.
Mueller has « paper in the first and January issue of The Victorian Naturalist.

On the suggestion of FNCV President, Dr F, Dobson, Mueller publishes the Key to the
System of Victorian Plants in two volumes,

Mueller is made a patron of the FNCV.

The collections at Phytologic Museum of Melbourne (now National Herbarium 0
Victoria) number about 750,000 specimens.

On 10 October Mueller sutfers a fatal stroke at his home in South Yarra. He is buried at

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Baron von Mueller in the Field Naturalists’ Tradition

Angela Taylor'

Abstract

Baron Ferdinand von Mueller was an ‘original’ member (1880) and Patron - 5 ie
Naturalists’ Club of Victoria (FNCV), who valued his pa his familiar aie ni ‘< Fe
tige his association lent the Club, After his death in 1896, the FNCV ritually commemorated
Mueller as a pioneer of science on the main anniversaries of his death, birth and arrival in Australia
The high point of this tradition was reached in the inter-war years, when natural history had become
marginalised by professional science. One outcome of FNCV tradition was that Mueller had his
first published biography written by Charles Daley, an amateur naturalist-historian in the Club.
Another outcome is that the lingering aura of tradition has clouded some perceptions of Mueller’s
historical relationship with the FNCV. (The Victorian Naturalist 113 (4), 1996,131-139 )

Introduction

A.H.S. Lucas, the first editor of The
Victorian Naturalist (1884-92) recalled in
his autobiography how, on the very after-
noon he landed in Melbourne in 1883, he
was taken by his brother Dr T.P. Lucas
(FNCV Vice-President 1880-81) to South
Yarra to pay a visit.

In a small cottage, in a room littered
with books and papers and specimens,
a short elderly gentleman, with grizzled
hair, an ancient comforter about his
neck, and a strong German accent,
received us with an effusive welcome.
It was the famous Baron Sir Ferdinand
von Mueller, still, as we perceived, a
most active Government Botanist
(Lucas 1937).

Lucas’ enthusiasm (indecent haste, per-
haps) to meet the famous ‘Baron’ reflected
the way amateur science was practised last
century. Field naturalists saw themselves
doing useful work for scientific special-
ists, in the hope of discovering something
new, by making inductive observations in
the field. Written almost fifty years later,
Lucas’ story is emblematic of the way the
Field Naturalists’ Club of Victoria
(FNCV) has nurtured a sense of history,
an awareness of continuity with a distin-
guished natural history past which Mueller
exemplified.

In his obituary of the Baron, Professor
Baldwin Spencer wrote, ‘his name has
been a household word amongst us ... It 1s
hard, indeed, to realize that a younger gen-
eration must arise to whom the presence
of the Baron, so familiar to us, will only
be a tradition’ (Spencer 1896), Only a tra-

\ Master of Arts in Public History student, History
Department, Monash University, Clayton, Victoria
3168.

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

dition? FNCV tradition has commemorat-
ed Mueller - ‘he was the pioneer botanist
in its truest sense’ (Willis 1949) - on every
major anniversary of his death, birth and
arrival in Australia. Through repetition of
memorial practices over the past one hun-
dred years, Mueller has become a hal-
lowed symbol of the Club’s links to the
pioneers of science in Australia, a source
of inspiration and example (Topp 1897).

An invented tradition is a set of ritual
practices which, by repetition, seeks to
inculcate certain values and implies conti-
nuity with an appropriate historic past.
The problem is that such a tradition, as
Hobsbawm and Ranger (1984) argue, can
obscure our understanding of the past. The
FENCV’s enduring Mueller tradition has
contributed to enhancing the history of the
Baron’s relationship with the FNCV.
Thus, it is believed that Mueller was the
founder (Grey 1996), that he was Patron
from the Club’s inception (Spencer 1896),
and that he promoted the popularisation of
natural science (Mueller 1885).

Mueller was an ‘original’ member, one
of 56 ‘gentlemen’ elected at the first two
monthly meetings of the Club, not the
founder. Before Mueller was elected
Patron in 1886, on his own suggestion, his
status in the Club is best described as
primus inter pares, first among equals. A
self-proclaimed prophet of the popularisa-
tion of the natural sciences, Mueller’s con-
tribution was constrained by the fact that
he was a systematic botanist, not a teacher
ora populariser (Mueller 1885; Spencer
1896). In the nineteenth century there
were limits to the meaning of ‘popularisa-
tion’. Specialist science and amateur nat-
ural history were not, in fact, sharply

divided.
131

Mueller Issue

Tradition was first planted and ritually
fertilised at Club conversaziones, meetings
and Wild Flower exhibitions, and in obitu-
aries, papers and histories published in The
Victorian Naturalist. Commemoration fol-
lowed the same forms with different
expressions as each generation refurbished
the past with a new duster of interests and
values. Thus, in ‘pilgrimages’ to Mueller’s
St Kilda grave, the laying of wild flower
wreaths in 1897 gave way to the memorial
planting of Australian shrubs in 1938. For
in 1931 the Wild Flower Protection Act, an
FNCV initiative, had come into force, and
commemorative tree planting became
established on excursions during the years
of the Great War. FNCV tradition was
reinforced by the power of collective
memory in the inter-war years. On com-
memorative occasions Club historians
spoke about Mueller’s possessions, quoted
from his letters, shared anecdotes and
wrote sketches of his life and work.

So strong had tradition become that
Mueller, ‘the prince of Australian
botanists’ (Pescott 1922) had his first biog-
raphy written, not by a scientist or profes-
sional historian, but by an amateur histori-
an and naturalist, a member of the FNCV.
Charles Daley’s Baron Sir Ferdinand von
Mueller, Botanist, Explorer, and
Geographer (1924) remained the only
published biography of Mueller until 1949.
In the decades when popular natural histo-
ry was being nudged towards the margins
of science (as amateur historians were
being ignored by professionals), FNCV
historians were memorialising Mueller as a
Great Man of Science. This year’s cente-
nary is an appropriate occasion to place in
historical perspective Mueller’s relation-
ship with the Club and its ‘Mueller’ tradi-
tion,

From primus inter pares to patron,
1880-96

The story of the FNCV’s beginnings has
been told by Club historians, Francis
Barnard and Edward Pescott (Barnard
1906; Pescott 1940). It bears retelling, if
only to dispel the misconception that
Mueller was the founder.

The FNCV had its genesis in the infor-
mal gatherings of a small band of young
field naturalists whose interests were ento-

132

mological. Charles French Snr. (1842-
1933), Dudley Best (1843-1928), David
Kershaw (1844-1883), Francis Barnard
(1857-1932) and J.E. Dixon (1852-1939)
met frequently during the 1870s to talk
about natural history and discuss the
results of their weekend rambles in ‘the
scrub at Brighton, the bush at
Sandringham, and the tree country at Kew’
(Pescott 1933, 1940). They gathered on
Sunday mornings at French’s home inside
the Royal Botanic Gardens, where he had
worked since 1864 as propagator and man-
ager of the glass-houses. It was here that
they talked about establishing a natural
history club (Pescott 1933).

It is not inconceivable that Charles French,
who had worked closely with the Baron at
the Gardens, discussed with Mueller the
group’s idea of starting a club. Had he
done so, Mueller would have given his
enthusiastic encouragement. He was, after

all, one of Victoria’s earliest field natural- }

ists of the solitary kind. But there is no evi-
dence that the original idea came from
him,

The natural history field club was a
transplanted British tradition. It was a
hybrid which had grown by the mid nine-
teenth century from two distinct stocks: the
informal sociable field clubs of
Berwickshire, Ayrshire and the middle
west of England and the rule-bound ‘acad-
emic’ natural history societies of the indus-
trial cities (Allen 1976). In Melbourne the
organisation of collective endeavour began
on May 6 1880 when Charles French and
Dudley Best called a preliminary meeting
at the Athenaeum to form the Field
Naturalists’ Club of Victoria (FNCV
Minutes 6.5.1880). Dr Thomas Lucas
chaired this meeting and explained the
aims and practices of a Field Naturalists’
Club from his experience of such clubs in
England (FNCV Minutes 6.5,1880,
Barnard 1906). Growing up as the sons of
a parson-naturalist who travelled the
Wesleyan country circuits for 40 years,
Thomas and Arthur Lucas had excellent
opportunities for studying nature and
learning of the operations of naturalists’
clubs (Lucas 1937).

The FNCV was formally inaugurated on
May 17 1880, when rules were adopted
and office bearers elected (FNCV Minutes

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

17.5.1880). Entomology was the most pop-
ular branch of natural history among those
present. This led to Frederick McCoy
(1823-1899), Professor of Natural Science
at Melbourne University being elected first
president (1880-83). The FNCV minute
book does not record either Mueller or
McCoy being among the 30 or so ‘gentle-
men’ present at the Athenaeum meetings
of 6 and 17 May. Mueller was No. 36 on
the ‘Original Members’ list of 56 gentle-
men who were elected at the first two
monthly meetings of the Club in June and
July 1880, and who were afterwards
termed ‘original members’ (FNCV
Minutes ‘Original Members’ list 1880;
Barnard 1906).

The support of Melbourne’s two leading
scientists Mueller and McCoy was a neces-
sary but not sufficient condition to launch
and sustain a successful club. By 1880
‘Marvellous Melbourne’ possessed the
other essential conditions: strong public
institutions of learning; a period of buoy-
ant economic growth; a nucleus of knowl-
edgeable and enthusiastic amateur natural-
ists, who included a number of Australian
born; and, most importantly, the close
proximity to the city of fairly open coun-
try, only a few miles by rail in any direc-
tion, where every branch of natural history
could be studied (Cornwall 1889).

The FNCV was conceived as a popular
scientific club, ‘a body of people anxious
to help one another study what lay around
them’ (Hall 1902). When Mueller praised
the Club’s progress at the 1885 annual
conversazione, he recalled that in about
1860, while chairing a meeting of the
Royal Society, ‘he had prophesied the
growth and increased popularity of the
study of the Natural Sciences in the
colony’ (Mueller 1885). Exactly how he
had expected his prophecy to be fulfilled,
Mueller did not say. Popularising science
would not have come about through a
learned colonial society, such as the Royal
Society of Victoria, which practised ‘high
science. It had to wait upon the establish-
ment of popular scientific clubs like the
FNCV, which aimed to describe for
| Victorians, not scientists in London, the
characteristics of their colony’s natural
history (Hall 1902), Nevertheless, the fact
that in the 1880s and 90s the most dedicat-

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

ed naturalists in the FNCV perceived it as
a ‘learned society’, and some were also
members of the Royal and Microscopical
Societies, indicated that there was still a
mutually beneficial dialogue between spe-
cialist and popular science.

‘Popularising’ science generated lofty
rhetoric more often than practical action.
To the Rev. J.J. Halley, FNCV President
(1884-87) and Congregational minister,
popularisation meant the ‘domestication of
science’ and the intelligent use of leisure
in the open air. By studying a little natural
science alongside their menfolk in the
field, mothers and sisters could be the
instruments of mental and moral improve-
ment in “happy homes’, thereby weaning
the youth of Melbourne from the glorifica-
tion of cricket, football and rifle shooting
(Halley 1885).

For Mueller, the ‘domestication of sci-
ence’ embodied not just a moral but a reli-
gious imperative. He applauded Halley's
thetoric, just as he welcomed Halley and
other ‘divines’ in the Club: ‘for the more
he and others worked amongst the wonders
of Nature, the more impelled they were to
recognise a First Great Cause” (Mueller
1885).

Rhetoric aside, Mueller welcomed
women in the Club but would not have
encouraged them to be anything more than
collectors. By 1880 he already had an
extensive network of women correspon-
dents, most of whom collected for him
(Maroske 1993). The *hand-maiden of sci-
ence’ attitude must have irked Flora
Campbell (1845-1923), an indefatigable
collector of Victoria's macro-fungi for
Kew, a self-taught yegetable pathologist,
an investigator of the destructive hop ‘spi-
der’ (an acarid) for the Department of
Agriculture, and the entrepreneur for the
colonial funding of Dr. M.C. Cooke’s
1892 Handbook of Australian Fungi
(Berkeley and Broome 1886; Pearson
1888, 1890). At the ‘learned’ end of the
amateur spectrum, Campbell was the only
female amateur in the FNCV to have her
papers published in The Victorian
Naturalist in the nineteenth century
(Campbell 1886, 1887, 1895). As Mrs
Flora Martin, her paper on “Diseases of
Plants’ to the 1890 Australasian
Association for the Advancement of

133

Mueller Issue

Science (AAAS) conference in Melbourne
was also the first by a woman (Anon
1890).

Relations between Mueller and Campbell
were strained. The Baron ‘bitterly com-
plained’ of Campbell's daring to send
fungi specimens for naming to her mentor,
Queensland Government Botanist
Frederick Manson Bailey, which she had
been doing since 1879 (Campbell 1885).
Mueller angered Bailey and Campbell by
‘publishing as indigenous’, without con-
sulting Bailey, plants collected by Dr T.P.
Lucas on ‘a flying visit’ to Queensland in
1885, plants which Bailey insisted were
‘naturalized weeds or strays from the gar-
dens’ (Campbell 1885; Mueller 1885a).
Campbell backed her loyal support of
Bailey with the authority of Father Julian
Tennison Woods (1832-1889), with whom
she had travelled in Queensland in the
1870s and who had deeply regretted to her
on several occasions the speed with which
introduced plants spread (Campbell 1885).
This was a skirmish between two people
with strong opinions and forthright person-
alities about loyalty, expertise, and spheres
of botanical influence.

If it were to be a popular scientific club,
the FNCV needed to take practical steps to
attract women. Although Halley boasted
that the FNCV was the first of the
‘learned’ societies to admit women, the
opening of the Club’s doors to them hap-
pened by default (Halley 1885). The first
woman joined in September 1881 because
her husband wanted her to accompany him
on excursions, ‘if that is not against the
rules’ (Dobson 1881). Having elected the
parliamentarian Dr F.S. Dobson in July
1881 without his prior knowledge, to lend
the Club social prestige, the FNCV was
hardly likely to refuse his request to admit
Mrs Dobson (Dobson 1881; Evans 1982).
In 1885 there were 20 ‘sisters of science’
in the FNCV, compared to 140 men
(Halley 1885; Barnard 1906).

Dr Frank Dobson, FNCV President in
1884, believed that more ‘ladies’ would
join the Club to study botany if they had a
handy field guide for identifying Victoria’s
plants. It was in this context that he urged
the compilation of a ‘Dichotomous Key’, a
handbook to the plants of Victoria, and
suggested that Mueller undertake the work

134

(Dobson 1884), He had in mind a key sim-
ilar to the Rev. W. Spicer’s A handbook of
the plants of Tasmania. Dobson never took
a walk in the bush in Victoria ‘without my
Spicer in my pocket’ (Dobson 1884).

As a Member of Parliament, Dobson
probably exerted some pressure on
Mueller the Government Botanist to write
the Key to the System of Victorian Plants,
which resulted in two volumes, 1885,
1887-8 (Dobson 1884a; Barnard 1906a).
Mueller did not relish the laborious task on
which he expended much ‘mental toil’
(Mueller 1888a; Spencer 1896). Victoria’s
flora was ‘doubly as rich in species’ as
Tasmania’s, and the dichotomous method
of Lamarck disrupted ‘the chain of affini-
ty’ which linked the orders, genera and
species naturally together (Mueller 1888).

Many aspiring field botanists in the
Club found Mueller’s Key ‘more of a
stumbling block than a help in elucidating
the plants they had collected’ (Barnard
1906). Baldwin Spencer conceded that as a
field guide it was unsuccessful, partly
because the Baron ‘with his profound}
knowledge’ was an investigator, not a
teacher (Spencer 1896a). Many years later,
Edward Pescott was more generous in his
appraisal. In 1922 he asked, ‘What student
of to-day can say that it may be done with-
out?’ (Pescott 1922). Until the publication
in 1931 of Professor Alfred Ewart's The!
Flora of Victoria, Mueller’s pioneering
Key of 1888 was the only descriptive
Flora, albeit abridged, available for the
amateur botanist (Sutton 1931). For almost
a century after its publication, no botanist
was able to improve on Mueller’s seminal
field guide.

Mueller the scientific botanist was no
pedagogic populariser on the issue of ver-
nacular names for plants. He believed
‘these superfluous appellations... are
vague, carry not beyond one language, and
are almost useless burdens to the memory”
(Sutton 1909). His Key to the System of
Vietorian Plants included a short list of
some vernacular names, but many were’
‘almost as awkward as the scientific
names’ (Barnard 1906a).

Ten years after Mueller’s death, the:
FNCV addressed the issue of the lack of
popular names for native plants.
Ornithologists (a select committee of the

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

AAAS) had already chosen vernacular
names for Australian birds in 1898 (Anon
| 1898). The burgeoning nature study move-
y}} ment in schools in the 1900s provided the
impetus for botanists in the Club to do the
same for plants (Barnard 1906a). The labo-
rious task of inventing popular names for
} Victoria’s indigenous plants was entrusted
to a Plant Names Committee of the FNCV
in 1907. It took until 1923 to produce A
Census of the Plants of Victoria, which
listed all the known plants with their
selected vernacular names (Anon 1923).
| The FNCV’s popular spring Wild
Flower Shows, which began in 1885, gave
Mueller the opportunity of bringing botany
to a wider audience. A familiar figure at
these annual shows, the Baron assisted
enthusiastically in naming plants and
} securing exhibits from country friends
(Anon 1896; Topp 1897). A down-to-earth
comment from George Coghill (1864-
} 1957), the Club's keenest collector of wild
flowers and organiser of these shows,
reveals that Mueller’s enthusiasm could
occasionally be irritating. At the 1886
Wild Flower Exhibition “Baron von
Mueller helped with the naming and his

) remarks on the flowers was [sic] most

interesting though rather delaying to those
who had a lot to do’ (Coghill nd).
) Mueller was offered but declined the

Club presidency on five occasions between
} March 1883 and April 1886, citing either
his many commitments or poor health
| (Mueller 1883, 1884, 1884a, 1885b, 1886).
Perhaps not wanting to disappoint the
FNCV, Mueller suggested in 1886 that he
and McCoy be made Patrons of the Club,
thereby representing ‘the two great branch-
es of animated natural history’ (Mueller
1886). By his own rhetoric Mueller
became the symbolic embodiment ot
botany.

The FNCV Committee passed a resolu-
tion to invite McCoy and Mueller to
| become Patrons. Mueller accepted and was
elected in June 1886. McCoy either
declined or failed to respond; FNCV
| records are silent on this point, Perhaps he

was still smarting from the Club’s critr-
cism in 1885 of the National Museum
iB (McCoy 1885). He was, however, elected
as Patron in August 1889 to serve along-
) side Mueller, and accepted (FNCV

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

Minutes 12.8.1889; McCoy 1889). When
McCoy died in 1899, he received a con-
ventional obituary in The Victorian
Naturalist (Anon 1899). When Mueller
died on 10 October 1896, the FNCV
mourned him as an ‘old friend’, a ‘familiar
figure’ and a ‘beloved Patron’ (Topp
1897).

From a household word to a tradition

The first move to establish the Mueller
tradition was made quite decisively in
October 1897, when the annual spring
Wild Flower Exhibition was held over to
commemorate the very first anniversary of
the Baron’s death (Anon 1897), Wild
flower wreaths and native flowers sent
from friends in Victoria, New South Wales
and Western Australia were afterwards
laid on Mueller’s grave. Charles Topp’s
address urged the FNCV ‘to treasure the
fine example’ Mueller set in his devotion
to science for the benefit of his fellow
colonists, and ‘to cherish [his] memory’
(Topp 1897).

Memory sustained the tradition for as
long as there were field naturalists alive
who remembered the Baron. The founding
generations of the FNCV_ included
botanists who had worked under Mueller
at the Herbarium or the Royal Botanic
Gardens, and for whom his name was,
indeed, a household word. They shared
vivid recollections. Charles French’s first
sight of Mueller riding his white pony
along the Burwood road at the start of one
of his botanical expeditions to Victoria's
high country in the late 1850s or early
1860s became a treasured memory
(Pescott 1933). Percy St John (1872-1944),
ENCV President in 1929-30, who had reg-
ularly collected wild flowers as a young
boy in the early 1880s for the “benevolent
Baron’, attributed his lifelong study of
eucalypts to Mueller’s personal encourage-
ment (Anon 1930). The death of James
Audas in 1959 ‘snapped’ the last personal
link with Mueller and the former
Melbourne Herbarium (Willis 1961).

Example and memory combined to
strengthen tradition during the inter-war
years as naturalists grew older and
searched the past for sources of moral
inspiration. Mueller was their exemplar.
To commemorate the 25th anniversary of

135

Mueller Issue

Mueller’s death, Club historians organised
a ‘Mueller evening’. Charles Daley (1859-
1948) presented ‘A Sketch of Mueller’s
Life’, Edward Pescott (1872-1954) ‘Notes
on Mueller’s Published Works’ and
Francis Barnard ‘Mueller’s Botanical
Exploration of Victoria’ (Anon 1921).
Pescott’s talk was published in The
Victorian Naturalist as “Notes on
Mueller’s Literary Work’ (Pescott 1922),
He asked, ‘Are we ever to see a published
biography and bibliography of the greatest
botanist Australia has ever seen?’

Charles Daley (Club President 1922-4)
accepted Pescott’s challenge and wrote a
memoir of the Baron’s life for the
Historical Society of Victoria and the
FNCV. Daley's Baron Sir Ferdinand von
Mueller, Botanist, Explorer, and
Geographer (1924) was printed as a book-
let in time to mark the centenary of
Mueller’s birth in 1925 (Daley 1924, 1927;
Pescott 1948). The FNCV sold it at the
Club’s popular Wild Nature Shows in the
1930s for 1 shilling (Daley 1933). Thus,
Mueller the ‘prince of Australian
botanists’ (Pescott 1922) had his first biog-
raphy written by an amateur historian, It
long remained the standard work of refer-
ence and reached a popular audience
(Pescott 1948),

Daley also wrote “The History of Flora
Australiensis’ (the story of Mueller’s col-
laboration with the Hookers, William and
Joseph, and George Bentham at Kew),
which first appeared in eight parts in The
Victorian Naturalist, and was later repub-
lished as a booklet (Daley 1927-8; Pescott
1948), So vital a part of Daley’s literary
life had the Baron become that, even as he
lay dying in hospital, Daley sent a letter
drawing attention to his Memoir and his
long correspondence with Mueller to the
FNCV’s centennial commemoration in
1947 of Mueller’s arrival in Australia
(Anon 1947).

For Victoria’s Jubilee celebrations
1834-1934, the FNCV organised another
‘Baron von Mueller’ evening in March
1934 with the same cast. Daley reminisced
on the Baron’s life and work, Pescott
spoke about some possessions of Mueller,
Thomas Hart quoted from letters relating
to the Baron, and Charles French followed
with anecdotes (Anon 1934).

136

On this occasion the FNCV gave their
Mueller tradition a fresh lease of life by
establishing a fund to restore the Baron’s
neglected grave at St Kilda Cemetery
(FNCV Minutes 27.2.1934). Edward
Pescott also suggested that the Club erect a
plaque in memory of the Baron in the new)
Herbarium (FNCV Minutes 27.2.1934). As,
a result of these FNCV initiatives, a
memorial plaque to Mueller was erected in
the entrance hall of the Herbarium in 1936,
and the Baron’s grave was put in order by
1938 (Anon 1936; Stewart 1938). At ay
commemorative pilgrimage to Mueller’s:
restored grave in 1938, the FNCV was
joined by representatives of the German
Club in planting Australian shrubs at the
base of Mueller’s memorial. The Club also;
purchased a plot adjacent to the grave to)
plant with suitable species named after the
Baron (Stewart 1938).

Charles Daley and Edward Pescott were,
outside the FNCV, among the energetic
leaders of patriotic local movements to
Australianise the teaching of history, to
preserve Australian flora and fauna, estab-,
lish national parks and to erect monuments
to Australian explorers (Davison 1988).
Daley, by 1924 a retired school teacher,
was a member of the Historical Memorials
Committee of the Historical Society of
Victoria, which inspired the erection of
cairns and plaques to explorers around
Victoria between 1910 and the early 1930s
(Griffiths 1996). Pescott, formerly
Principal of the Burnley School of
Horticulture, led the FNCV campaign for
legislative protection of Victoria’s flora
which resulted in the Wildflower
Protection Act 1931. Through the Wattle’
League, he promoted the wattle as
Australia’s national flower (Hyam 1955).
Both men wrote histories of Victorian’
places and pioneers.

The FNCV’s Mueller tradition presents
an apparent paradox. Daley and Pescott -
amateurs engaged in the sociable co-opera-
tive practice of natural history - in their lit-
erary memorials to Mueller wrote popular
history about a Great Man of Science.
Their inspiration was, in part, a nostalgic
looking back to the time when a mutually
helpful dialogue took place between spe-
cialist scientists and amateur naturalists in
the Club. The high water mark of the

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

FNCV’s Mueller tradition was reached by
the late 1940s, about the same time the
amateur tradition found itself stranded in
the shallows. By the mid 1950s the Club
had fallen on lean times because, in the
view of one prominent member, the pro-
fessional scientists had no need, as in days
gone by, to belong to a natural history club
(Garnet 1955).

In the broader cultural context, Daley

|| and Pescott were local history enthusiasts

wanting to foster a patriotic sentiment
towards Australia, her pioneers and her
flora and fauna. They shared with others

| ‘the antiquarian imagination’ about which

Tom Griffiths has written so eloquently
(Griffiths 1996). Their curiosity about the
past grew out of intimate knowledge and
memory of places, the landscape and peo-
ple. The ‘pioneer-explorer’ was central to
their history: while looking forward to

| future progress, they searched the past for

sources of inspiration and example
(Davison 1988). Mueller, ‘the last of the
great botanical explorers’ was one source
(Pescott 1922). Science shares with

| Australian culture the legend of the ‘pio-

neer’.

The late Dr Jim Willis, Victoria’s distin-
guished botanist and most recent of FNCV
historians made such a link between
Australian and botanical pioneers when, in
1949, he disputed an historian’s claim that
‘there were no Australian pioneers after
1850’ (Willis 1949). Such an arbitrary
date-line would exclude ‘the greatest p1o-
neer’ of Victorian botany - Baron Sir
Ferdinand von Mueller. In his series on
‘Botanical Pioneers in Victoria’ for The
Victorian Naturalist, Willis’ portrait of
Mueller exemplifies the “Great Man of
Science’ approach: d

_.before he had been in

Victoria three years, this amazing man

had collected and named some 1,700

flowering species and about 800 cryp-

togams, too. In the same period he
had travelled nearly 5,000 miles
throughout the Colony--in Mallee
deserts, heavy rain forests, remote and
lofty mountains, jungles, and along
the sea coasts. Papers on botanical
subjects flowed from his facile pen,
the published works exceeding 800 in
number to the time of his death

| Vol. 113 (4) 1996

(Willis, 1949),

Willis went on to point out that, during
Mueller’s long term of office as
Government Botanist (1852-96), he left
surprisingly little for others to discover:
‘most of the State’s novelties introduced
by subsequent workers have been rather
the result of ‘carving up’ old species than
in discovering entirely new entities which
he missed’ (Willis 1949),

In 1946, the 50th anniversary of
Mueller’s death, Willis had suggested a
commemorative postage stamp with
‘attractive floral motif’ to mark the 1947
centenary of Mueller’s arrival in Australia
(Willis 1946). The FNCV and the
Victorian Council of Scientific Societies
supported the Government Botanist’s
request for a commemorative stamp to the
Postmaster General (FNCV Minutes
28.1.1947: 25.2.1947; 25.3.1947;
29.4.1947). Although too late to mark the
1947 centenary, a twopence halfpenny
stamp was issued on 13 September 1948
(Fig. 1). It featured Mueller’s head and a
sprig of gum leaves of ‘that noble, useful
tree Eucalyptus Muelleriana ‘|Yellow
Stringybark E. muelleriana) (Willis 1949).
A postage stamp was an appropriate tribute
to a man who had been such a prolific cor-
respondent. In 1893 alone Mueller claimed
to have written ‘by his own hand’ about
6000 letters (Tadgell 1934). Mueller was

AUSTRALIA

Fig. 1. The Mueller Commemorative Stamp.
1948.

137

————

Mueller Issue

thus commemorated in a popular philatelic
form, perishable but collectable, like the
plants he spent his life among.

During his lifetime the FNCV valued
Mueller’s expertise and the prestige
bestowed by his association as an ‘origi-
nal’ member, an enthusiastic participant
and kindly Patron (1886-96), Such was the
high esteem in which he was held that,
after his death, the FNCV initiated a com-
memorative tradition which helped to
invest Mueller with almost mythical
stature. He became a symbol of the Club’s
links to the pioneers of science in
Australia. His first biography was written
by an amateur naturalist in the Club, The
enduring tradition has, however, tended to
obscure a clearer understanding of some
important aspects of Mueller’s relationship
with the FNCV during his lifetime.

Acknowledgements

I wish to thank Sheila Houghton for her
generous assistance with the FNCV
Archives, and also Linden Gillbank and
Sara Maroske for their comments.

References

Unpublished letters, manuscripts,

minute books and theses

Campbell, P.M, (1885). FNCV Archives 002-026:
Campbell to Barnard, October 1885.

Coghill, G. (nd), FNCV Archives Series 0032 uncat,
MS:"History of Wild Flower Exhibitions |885-
1929", nd.

Daley, C, (1933). FNCV Archives 035-029; Daley to
Colliver, 31 March 1933.

Dobson, F.S, (1881). FNCV Archives 001-011:
Dobson to Best, 22 July 1881.

Dobson, F.S. (1884a), FNCV Archives 016-043/3:
Dobson to Barnard, 12 September 1884.

Evans, M.W, (1982), “Taking to the Bush: Australian
Landscape as a Condition of Practice for the FNCV,
1880-1900", (unpubl. BA Honours thesis, Melbourne
University).

Garnet, J.R. (1955), FNCV Archives File 7 uneat:
Garnet to Lothian, 18 February 1955,

Grey, E. (1966), FNCV Archives wnedt.: ‘Mueller
Commemorative Issue, The Victorian Naturalist,
Authors and Subjects’, Grey to Taylor, 4 March
1996,

MeCoy, F, (1885). FNCV Archives 002-004; MeCoy
to Barnard, 20 May 1885.

McCoy, F. (1889), FNCV Archives 014-032; McCoy
to Barnard, 22 August 1889.

Mueller, F. (1883), FNCV Archives 012-015: Mueller
to Best, 17 March L883.

Mueller, F. (1884). FNCV Archives 011-020; Mueller
to Best, 8 March 1884.

Mueller, F, (1884a). FNCV Archives 016-003: Mueller
to Best, 30 April 1884.

Mueller, F, (1885b). FNCV Archives 002-008: Mueller
to Barnard, 10 April E885,

Mueller, F, (1886). FNCV Archives 002-049: Mueller

138

to Barnard, 9 April 1886,
Mueller, F. (1886a), FNCV Archives 035-015; Mueller
to Barnard, 17 June 1886,
Mueller, F. (1888). FNCV Archives 022-030; Mueller
to Barnard, 8 October 1888-_
ENCV Minutes (1880). FNCV Archives 006: Minute
Book 1880-83.
FNCV Minutes (1934). FNCV Archives 062 : Minute
Book 1932, 37
FNCV Minutes (1947), FNCV Archives 073: Minute
Book 1941-1954,
VPRS 7593/P1, Vol.1. Outwards correspondence of
the Chemist for Agriculture, Department of
Agriculture, Correspondence Book 2, Public Records
Office, Laverton, Victoria: A.N. Pearson to F.M.
Campbell, 6 February 1888.
VPRS 7593/PL, Vol.2. Outwards correspondence ofl
the Chemist for Agriculture, Dept, of Agriculture,
PRO, Laverton; A.N. Pearson to F.M. Martin, 28
March 1890,

Published sources

Allen, D.E. (1976), The Naturalist in Britain, A Social
History (Allen Lane: Great Britain)

Anon (1890). Annual Report. The Victorian Naturalist
4 MD

Anon (1896), Exhibition of Wild Flowers. The
Victorian Naturalist 13, 85.

Anon (1897). Address, The Victorian Naturalist 14,
98-100.

Anon (1898), Review: List of Vernacular Names for
Australian Birds. The Victorian Naturalist 15, 98.

Anon (1899). Obituary of Professor Sir Frederick
McCoy. The Victorian Naturalist 16, 19.

Anon (1921). Papers Read. The Victorian Naturalist
38, 58-60.

Anon (1923). Book Notice: A Census of the Plants of
Victoria. The Victorian Naturalist 40, 119-20,

Anon (1930), The Father of the Eucalypts, Mr, P.R, St.
John, Botanist-Ornithologist. The Gum Tree U1, 7.

Anon (1934). Baron von Mueller Evening. The
Victorian Naturalist 50, 262; 51, 26.

Anon (1936). Report, Memorial Plague to Baron yon
Mueller. The Victorian Naturalist 53, 38.

Anon (1947), Report of Centennial Address by J.-H.
Willis. The Victorian Naturalist 64, 150.

Barnard, F.G.(1906). The First Quarter of a Century of
the Field Naturalists’ Club of Victoria, The Victorian
Naturalist 23, 643-68.

Barnard, F.G, (1906a). Are Popular Names for our
Native Plants Desirable? The Victorian Naturatist 23,
136-139, q

Berkeley, MJ. & Broome, C.E, (1886). List of Fungi
from Queensland and other parts of Australia, UL,
Transactions of the Linnean Society, London, Bot, 2,
217-224.

Campbell, P.M, (1886), Notes on Edible Fungi. The
Victorian Naturalist 2, 137.

Campbell, F.M. (1887). Vegetable Pathology. The
Victorian Natyuralist 4, 124-5.

Cornwall, E.M. (1889), Collecting Near Home. The
Victorian Naturalist 6, 98. .

Daley, C. (1924), Buron Sir Ferdinand von Mueller
K.C.M.G., M.D., F.R.S, Botanist, Explorer, and
Geographer, Reprinted from The Victorian
Historical Magazine X, nos. 1,2, May and
December,

Daley, C. (1927-8). History of Flora Australiensis, The
Vicrorian Naturalist 43, 44.

Davison, G, (1988). “The Use and Abuse of Australian
History’, in Making the Bicentenary; Australian
Historical Studies. Eds. S. Janson and S, Macintyre,
23, 55-76.

Dobson, F.S. (1884). President’s Address. The

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Victorian Naturalist 1, 42-44,

Griffiths, T. (1996). Hunters and Collectors: The
Antiquarian Imagination in Australia (Cambridge
University Press:Cambridge).

Hall, T.S. (1902). President's Address. The Victorian
Naturalist 19, 44-48,

Halley, J.J. (1885). President’s Address. The Victorian
Naturalist 2, 4-5,

Hyam, G. (1955). The Late Edward Edgar Pescott,
F.L.S. The Victorian Naturalist 71, 166-8.

Hobsbawm, E. & Ranger, T. (1984). The Invention of
Tradition, Eds. E. Hobsbawm and T. Ranger.
(Cambridge University Press: Cambridge).

Lucas, A.H.S. (1937). A.H.S. Lucas, Scientist: His Own
Story. (Angus & Robertson: Sydney).

Martin, F.M. (1895). A Ramble Amongst
Fertilizers. The Victorian Naturalist 12, 87-91.

Maroske, S. (1993). ‘The Whole Great Continent as a
Present’: Nineteenth-Century Australian Women
Workers in Science. In On the Edge of Discovery:
Australian Women in Science. Ed, F. Kelly. (Text
Publishing Co.: Melbourne).

Mueller, F. (1885). Reply to President's Address. The
Victorian Naturalist 2, 14-15,

Mueller, F. (1885a). Additions to the Queensland Flora
by Dr. Lucas: Recorded by Baron von Mueller. The
Victorian Naturalist 2, 74-76

Mueller, F. (1888). Key to the System af Victorian
Plants, Vols. I & II. (Government Printer:

. Melbourne).

escott, E.E. (1922). Notes on Mueller’s Literary

Work. The Victorian Naturalist 38, 98-102. ae

Pescott, E.E. (1933). Charles French. The Victorian
Naturalist 50, 57-60.

Pescott, E.E. (1940), Story of the FNCV, Year by
Year. The Victorian Naturalist 87, 4-7. :

Pescott, E.E. (1948). Notable Naturalists Die: Charles
Daley. The Victorian Naturalist 64, 202.

Spencer, B. (1896). Baron von Mueller. The Victorian
Naturalist 13, 87-92,

Stewart, H.C. (1938). Visit to Baron von Mueller
Memorial. The Victorian Naturalist 55, 69.

Sutton, C.S, (1909), Progress Report of the Plant
Records Sub-Committee. The Victorian Naturalist
26, 105.

Sutton, C.S. (1931). The New Flora of Victoria. The
Victorian Naturalist 48, 80.

Tadgell, A. (1934). Notes on the Rasp Ferns. The
Victorian Naturalist 51, 87.

Topp, C-A. (1897). Address. The Victorian Naturalist
14, 94-97.

Willis, J.H. (1946). *Muelleri Memoria Floret’, The
Victorian Naturalist 63, 6.

Willis, J.H. (1949), Botanical Pioneers -
Victorian Naturalist 66, 87-88,

Willis, J.H. (1961). The Passing of a Great Piantsman -
James Wales Clarendon Audas. The Victorian
Naturalist 77, 273-5.

I, The

‘Baron von Mueller’ at Adelaide

At the Adelaide Racing Club’s Meeting
on the birthday of she who was not
amused, 24 May 1881, a certain horse,
apparently a chaffburner, was placed
eighth in the Park Handicap. Heavy rains
had fallen during the night; the rain clouds
began to shift as morning broke, and by
midday only fitful sunshine had broken
through’. The horse was a chestnut colt
recorded in The Australian Turf Register
as being the property of Sir Thomas
Elder, businessman, pastoralist, public
benefactor and M.L.C.’ It was a three-
year-old, and in the Park handicap carried
6 st. 10 lbs. with Williams aboard. Mr
W.E. Dakin was the trainer’.

Baron Ferdinand von Mueller was
delighted to have a quadrupedal name-
sake, ‘I may go to the Races where I never
was before all my life”.

If Dakin had followed the procedure

used a little later, on another inclement
occasion, and given the good Baron a stiff
shot of whisky, the result in the Park
Handicap may have been a win over the
mile, and the 60 sovs. stake gained!"
With or without, as a four-year-old, the
horse went on to sustain the fair name of
his renomee. Baron von Mueller, by Gang
Forward out of Hippona, continued racing
in the distinctive colours of Dakin - black
body, yellow sleeves and white cap. He
first won The Suburban Plate, weight for
age, and then The Yan Yean Stakes
(Handicap) in Melbourne on Cup Day in
1881, The Grand Stand Stakes at
Geelong, The Flying Handicap in
Adelaide and The New Stand Handicap,
another event of Adelaide Racing Club.
The horse continued to race until the
1885/6 season, but ran unplaced*
Acknowledgement to Sara Maroske.

Collection, State Library of Victoria.

| Adelaide Advertiser, 25 May 188), p Gt rise 78 Collins Street East, Melbourne, 1880-1881, 217,

2 The Australasian Turf Register, V-R.C., Stillwell
Library, Victoria Racing Club,
3 Adelaide Advertiser, ibid.
+Mueller to Louise Wehl (niece), 8
October 1881, Barr Smith Library,
* A. Lemon, The History of Australian

* Mueller to Ralph Tate, | July 1881,
Australian Turf Register, Stillwell &

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

Epsom Road, Flemington; Australian

July 1880, Library, Royal Botanic Garde
University of Adelaide.
Thoroughbred Racing,
Australia, 1990, vol 2, 321; Adelaide Advertiser, ibid.
12 Octoaber 188
Co., 78 Collins Street, Melb

{, Barr Smith Library, University

Dictionary of Biography, vol 4, 133.

ns, Melbourne; to Ralph Tate, 12
Southbank Communications Group, Melbourne,
of Adelaide, The
Ruth Dwyer

75 Wattle Road, Hawthorn, Victoria 3122

ourne, 1880's, various.

139

Mueller Issue

Baron von Mueller and The Victorian Naturalist

Sheila Houghton’

At a meeting in December 1883 the
Committee of The Field Naturalists Club
of Victoria, having lost patience with the
dilatoriness of Mr J. Wing in publishing
the Club's proceedings in the Southern
Science Record, decided to publish their
own journal (FNCV Minutes 2.12.1883).
They wasted no time in implementing this
decision, and the first modest issue, of
eight pages, appeared in January 1884.
Two of the Club’s most famous members
contributed articles: Charles French, who
supplied the first of his series of papers on
Victorian orchids, and Baron Ferdinand
von Mueller, with Contributions to the
Phytography of Australia, dealing with
Podopetalum ormondi, a species which he
had dedicated ‘to the honorable Francis
Ormond, M.L.C., whose almost boundless
munificence for raising ecclesiastic and
educational institutions in this colony, was
meriting a permanent token of apprecia-
tion also in botanical science’ (Mueller
1884).

Mueller was an enthusiastic supporter
of The Victorian Naturalist. In proposing
a vote of thanks to the President and lec-
turers at the 5th Annual Conversazione in
April 1885 he said ‘that as one of the ear-
liest naturalists in the colony, it gave him
great pleasure to witness the advance and
prosperity of the Field Club. A quarter of
a century ago ... he had prophesied the
growth and popularity of the study of
Natural Sciences in the colony’ (Mueller
1885a), and he evidently saw the Club’s
journal as one of the means to this end.

The Victorian Naturalist, price six-
pence, was not intended primarily for
members of the Club. It was to be sold
through booksellers, and, if members
wanted it, they had to subscribe to it, in
addition to their Club subscription. The
journal was soon in financial difficulties.
In the annual report for 1884 the Hon.
Secretary pointed out that the journal was
not repaying the cost of printing, but that
if members would subscribe this would
easily be rectified, leaving a surplus which

']2 Scenic Court, Gisborne, Victoria 3437.

140

would enable them to increase the size
from 8 to 16 pages, which was ‘urgently
desirable’ (Barnard 1884). Members must
have responded because the July issue
contained 12 pages, and Mueller offered
to pay for printing at the rate of 5/- (five
shillings) per page (FNCV Minutes
4.8.1884). This apparently gave the
Committee ideas, because at their
September meeting they passed a resolu-
tion that authors whose papers had not
been read before the Club would be
charged 5/- per page for printing (FNCV
Minutes 1.9.1884). The system evidently
worked well. Two years later the
Committee, no doubt as a mark of grati-
tude for past assistance, offered Mueller
“two pages free of cost in each number of
the Naturalist for the publication of your
descriptions of new plants, also one or two
more as the Editor can spare them’
(Barnard 1886). Pages in excess of this
allowance were to be paid for. Mueller
replied that he was ‘much beholden to the
Committee ... for the ample concessions
made’ (Mueller 1886a) and enclosed a
cheque for £1 5/- for 5 of 7 pages in the
previous number.

Mueller contributed 87 articles to The
Victorian Naturalist between 1884 and
1896, varying in length from seven pages,
Observations on some Papuan and
Polynesian Sterculiaceae, in yolume 3
August 1886, to which he referred in his
letter, to a brief note on Antholoma which
occupied a mere quarter of a page in vol-

ume 8 February 1892. Volume | con- |

tained six articles by Mueller, dealing
mainly with plants from Papua and New
Guinea, with two brief notes on species
from Queensland and Western Australia.
The series Descriptions of New Australian
Plants began in volume 3 November
1886, and appeared monthly until April
1887. It was resumed in July 1890 and
continued on a fairly regular basis for the

rest of Mueller’s life, the last article being ©

included in volume 12, January 1896.
After his death J.G. Luehmann (who suc-
ceeded Mueller as Government Botanist)

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

continued the practice, reading four papers
under the title Religuiae Muellerianae to
the Club, which were duly published in
volume 13 1897. This series dealt with
plants from all over Australia - as J.H.
Maiden remarked Mueller was ‘not a
Victorian botanist, but an Australian one’
(Willis 1949) - and included the discov-
ery, which caused great excitement, of
Rhododendron lochae, collected by W.
Sayer and A. Davidson on the summit of
Mount Bellenden-Ker. Mueller was partic-
ularly gratified by this collecting expedi-
tion, and his article in volume 3, April
1887, on Hypsophila halleyana (named
after the Reverend J.J. Halley, President of
the Club) is followed by a list of the plants
which he exhibited at the March meeting,
collected by Mr W. Sayer from Mount
Bellenden-Ker, ‘the ascent of which (par-
ticularly in the interest of the geography of
_ plants) the Baron wished to be effected
| since many years ......’ (Anon 1887).
Notes appeared on other new discover-
ies, a Victorian fern, Adiantum diaphanum
(Mueller 1886b), the very localised, rare
Flannel-flower Actinotus schwarzii from
Central Australia, and the small slender
daisy Athrixia croniniana from Western
Australia, named for Miss Cronin, one of
Mueller’s lady collectors (Mueller 1888a).
He was always very ready to examine and
describe specimens provided by Club
members: Lepistemon lucae, collected by
Dr T-P. Lucas in north Queensland, while
‘seeking restoration of his health’
(Mueller 1885b); Prasophyllum frenchii
(Maroon Leek Orchid), collected between
the Yarra and the Dandenong Ranges by
George French, and named by the Baron
after this ‘youthful collector, who has fil-
ially inhered from one of the principal
founders of The Field Naturalists Club his
ardour for forming, by searches of his
own, ... phytologic collections’ (Mueller
1889). If there was a long-winded way of
putting things, the Baron was likely to
employ it! In volume 7, Mueller published
a note on another Victorian orchid,
Corysanthes unguiculata (=Corybas
unguiculatus, Small Helmet-orchid), ‘this
rare floral gem’ discovered by Charles
French, jnr, between Oakleigh and
Cheltenham (Mueller 1890). He was also

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

ready to supply lists of plants collected on
major Club expeditions, that to the Kent
Group Islands (Mueller 1891), and to the
Furneaux Group (Mueller 1894).

While Mueller was keen to support The
Victorian Naturalist, he also found it use-
ful for his own purposes as evidenced by
his explanation accompanying A
Supplementary List of Australian Lichens,
that it had been intended to be part of the
Fragmenta Phytographiae Australiae, but
as volume 12 could not be completed due
to pressure of other literary work, he had
offered it to the Editor of The Victorian
Naturalist (Mueller 1887a). A similar situ-
ation applied to Brief Notes on some New
Papuan Plants (Mueller 1892), and vol-
ume 5 contained a Supplement to the
Enumeration of Victorian Plants, compris-
ing the species added since Part II of the
Key to the System of our Native
Vegetation was published (Mueller
1888b). In the introduction to Notes on
Victorian Fungs (sic) (Mueller 1885c) he
said that this material also was intended
for volume 12 of Fragmenta Phyto-
graphiae Australiae, but Mueller explains
at length why he was unable to proceed
with this publication, and the list of his
commitments is formidable. There are
undertones of professional sensitivity
here, too. Mueller observes that Dr M.C.
Cooke, ‘the celebrated mycologist’, had
published ‘an enumeration of all fungs
(sic) from Australia known to him up to
1883’ (Mueller 1885d), and hastens to
point out that it was his Department which
had supplied many of these plants
(Mueller 1885d). There follows a list of
the Victorian fungi, and Mueller hoped to
publish an Australian list in the next num-
ber of The Victorian Naturalist. This did
not happen.

It is not entirely clear how many of
Mueller’s papers were read before the
Club. Those on the fern Adiantum
diaphanum and the rare Victorian fungi
Cyttaria gunnit and Cordyceps taylori cer-
tainly were. One of the series Descriptions
of New Australian Plants was read by J.G.
Luehmann in July 1890, but it seems that
none of the others were. The agenda for
the October 1887 meeting lists a paper by
Baron von Mueller, K.C.M.G. Notes on a

141

Mueller Issue

Remarkable Fungus from the Wimmera,
but is was not published, nor was it report-
ed that it was read. Perhaps the Baron was
unable to attend, or perhaps by the time
Flora Campbell had finished her paper on
a variety of parasitic fungi, members felt
that the evening had been sufficiently
‘fungaceous’.

In the distribution lists Mueller
acknowledged various collectors. When
describing species he typically supplied
details of the history and nomenclature.
Some of these plants received the collec-
tor’s name but Mueller also used this
means of paying tribute to people.
Rhododendron lochae was dedicated to
Lady Loch, wife of the Governor, in “spe-
cial recognition of the patronage given by
her to Victorian horticulture’ (Mueller
1887b), not to the intrepid Mr Sayer who
endured so much in its collection. He was,
however, acknowledged in Helicia sayeri-
ana (family Proteaceae) and Dracophyllum
sayeri (family Epacridaceae). Similarly,
the cycad collected by Will E. Armit, the
‘emissary of the Argus for itinerations in
New Guinea’ (Mueller 1885e), was named
Cycas scratchleyana, after the first ruler
of British New Guinea, General
Scratchley (Mueller 1885f).

An example of Mueller’s extensive
interests appeared in The Victorian
Naturalist volume 4 , December 1887,
where the Editor printed a letter from Sir
Richard Owen thanking the Baron for an
embryo of Ornithorrhyncus (=O.
anatinus, Playtpus), which had convinced
him that the Monotremes were ovo-vivip-
arous. The ensuing comments indicate that
Mueller had been of the same view for
some years, his opinion being reinforced
by this specimen before he dispatched it
(Mueller 1887c).

Baldwin Spencer, in his obituary of
Mueller, referred to his ‘quaintness of
speech and manner’ (Spencer 1896). As
an active member of The Field Naturalists
Club of Victoria and as its patron, Mueller
was frequently called upon to make
speeches. In his articles his notes were
generally ‘succinct’ as he described them,
but in speaking Mueller gave full rein to
his rotund and stately periods. The two
eulogies which he gave on Alphonse de

142

Candolle (Mueller 1893) and Louis
Pasteur (Mueller 1895) are splendid exam-
ples of his rhetorical style, and one can
imagine his audience being elevated to a
plane of reverential emotion. Though his
style was naturally influenced by the cus-
tom of the time, he combined a flair for
invention with the exact use of the English
language, using words which, though
unfamiliar today, had, in some cases, been
in use for centuries.

Although it is evident that as the Club
increased in numbers and adventurous-
ness, and there were more discoveries and
expeditions to report, the early Editors of
The Victorian Naturalist did not want for
material, they still had reason to be grate-
ful to the Baron for his cooperation and
generosity, both financial and literary.

References

Anon (1887). The Plants of Mt Bellenden-Ker. The
Victorian Naturalist 3, 169.

Barnard, F.G.A. (1884). Fourth Annual Report. The
Victorian Naturalist 1, 48-49.

Barnard, F.G.A. (1886). Letter to Baron von Mueller.
11.8.1886. FNCV Archives 035-029.

The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria, Minutes (1883,
1884). Minute Book 1883-1887. FNCV Archives
007.

Mueller, F. v. (1884). The Victorian Naturalist
(January) 1, 5.

Mueller, F.v. (1885a). The Victorian Naturalist 2,14-
15,

Mueller, F. v. (1885b). The Victorian Naturalist 2, 74.
Mueller, F. v. (1885c). The Victorian Naturalist 2, 76.
Mueller, F. v. (1885d). The Victorian Naturalist 2, 77.
Mueller, F. v. (1885e). The Victorian Naturalist 1,168.

Mueller, F. v. (1885f). The Victorian Naturalist 2, 19.

Mueller, F. v. (1886a). Letter to Barnard 3.8. 1886.
FNCY Archives 035-030

Mueller, F. v. (1886b), The Victorian Naturalist 3, 73.

Mueller, F. Vv. (1887a). The Victorian Naturalist 4, 88.

Mueller, F. v.(1887b). The Victorian Naturalist 3, 158.

Mueller, F. v.(1887c). The Victorian Naturalist 4, 120.

Mueller, F, v. (1888a). The Victorian Naturalist 5, 54,
76.

Mueller, F. v. (1888b). The Victorian Naturalist 5, 14-
16

Mueller, F. v, (1889). The Victorian Naturalist 6, 127,

Mueller, F. y. (1890). The Victorian Naturalist 7, 50,

Mueller, F. v. (1891). The Victorian Naturalist 7, 137-
139, (erroneously numbered 8).

Mueller, F. v. (1892). The Victorian Naturalist 9, 111.

Mueller, F. v. (1893). The Victorian Naturalist 10, 22-
25.

Mueller, F. v.(1894). The Victorian Naturalist 10, 184.

Mueller, F. v.(1895). The Victorian Naturalist 12, 74-
TS:

Spencer, W.B. (1896) Baron von Mueller. The
Victorian Naturalist 13, 92.

Willis, J.H. (1949), Botanical Pioneers in Victoria 1.
The Victorian Naturalist 66, 87.

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Ferdinand von Mueller, Exhibitioner Extraordinaire

Tom May' and Sara Maroske*

Abstract

Exhibits of natural history specimens were a feature of meetings of The Field Rint te Club of

Victoria in the nineteenth century. The exhibits provided by Baron Ferdinand von Muell

T are typi-

cal of those of the time, He used exhibits to illustrate his current activities, often soon after discoy-
eries had been made. Exhibits also served as a way of recognising the contribution of Mueller’s net-
work of collectors. Various other information can be gleaned from the reports of exhibits, including
the time of introduction of exotic plants and the date of publication of Mueller’s works. (The

Victorian Naturalist 113, (4) 1996, 143-145)

Exhibits of natural history specimens
and other objects were a feature of clubs
and learned societies in the nineteenth
century. The Field Naturalists’ Club of
Victoria excelled in this regard. Novel,
unusual or bizarre exhibits were a promi-
nent part of its meetings and on any
evening could include insects, birds and
other animals, fungi, plants, wood sec-
tions, rocks, fossils, books, paintings and
Aboriginal artefacts. Some exhibits were
illustrative of papers read to the meetings,
but others were by Club members for
whom such presentations were their only
public participation in Club activities.
Lists of the exhibits were provided in the
reports of the Club meetings printed in
each monthly issue of The Victorian
Naturalist. Under the name of the
exhibitor the ‘principal’ exhibits were
given. Each ‘exhibit’ could itself consist
of numerous individual items. Exhibits
were also a prominent feature of the year-
ly Conversazione and were integral to the
annual wildflower show,

The centre piece at the Conversazione
of 1887, at which 750 people were pre-
sent, was a 250 Ib giant clam shell from
Singapore, provided by D. Le Souéf, who
also showed a tiger (dead) and a diamond
snake (alive). Among the other numerous
animal, vegetable and mineral specimens
(only the ‘more important’ were listed)
were ‘a large case containing lyre birds,
with nests, ground thrush, robins, etc.”
(A.J. Campbell); ‘an orang-outang, a red
wallaby, a platypus, an alligator’ (A.
Coles); ‘some fine walking-stick insects

' National Herbarium of Victoria, Birdwood Avenue,
South Yarra, Victoria 3141.

? Mueller Correspondence Project, Department of
History & Philosophy of Science, Universily of
Melbourne, Parkville, Victoria 3052.

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

(C. French); ‘Victorian crabs, star-fish
and sea-eggs (A.H,S. Lucas); ‘slides of
transverse sections of the petioles of
Eucalypts, under microscope’ (D.
McAlpine); and ‘rare African and
American mosses; foreign micro-fungi;
European algae (mostly fresh-water)’ (F.
Reader) (Victorian Naturalist 4, 17-18,
28-31). There were also 750 at the 1888
Conversazione, where those attending
would have seen ‘a wedge tailed eagle
killing rabbit’ and ‘a laughing-jackass
killing snake’ (A.W. Coles); ‘a collection
of about 100 species of dried plants from
King Island’ (C, French Jnr), ‘specimens
of insect architecture, also geological
specimens, and, under microscopes a vari-
ety of interesting objects’ (P.H.
Anderson); and numerous others of which
Baron Ferdinand von Mueller, Patron of
the Club, remarked that it ‘seemed a pity
that’ ‘exhibits so skilfully brought togeth-
er by the members of the Club should
only be on view for the one evening.’
(The Victorian Naturalist $, 20-22).
Mueller himself was a prolific exhibitor
at meetings and other activities of the
FNCV especially after he became Club
Patron in 1886. In the reports of the
monthly meetings of the Club in The
Victorian Naturalist Mueller was noted as
providing exhibits at 87 of the 152 meet-
ings held between January 1884 and
September 1896, and at only 19 of the 92
meetings during the period from January
1889 to September 1896 did Mueller not
provide exhibits. It is sometimes evident
from the reports that Mueller was present
at the meetings because he was noted as
having made comments on papers read, or
having presented a paper himself or intro-
duced a visitor. There are only a handful
of occasions where Mueller was noted as

143

Mueller Issue

present at a meeting but did not exhibit.
Mueller presumably attended most of the
meetings at which he did exhibit, although
in some cases his exhibits may have been
presented by others in the Club. He cer-
tainly made some effort to attend Club
meetings. In January 1894 it is recorded
that he ‘attended at considerable risk, suf-
fering as he was from indisposition’ (The
Victorian Naturalist 10, 151), and in
October 1895 Mueller managed to deliver
an address on the late Louis Pasteur
despite having ‘been detained by another
engagement’ (The Victorian Naturalist 12,
74).

Principally Mueller exhibited examples
of new or interesting plants. These served
the purpose of illustrating plants in an age
where photography was still little used. In
addition, the plants exhibited had often
recently been received from one of
Mueller’s Australia-wide network of col-
lectors - whose contribution was thereby
acknowledged in a more accessible and
immediate way than through his scientific
monographs. For example, at the
December 1893 meeting of the Club
Mueller exhibited ‘a specimen of the
extremely rare [sopogon Fletcheri, recent-
ly discovered by J. Fletcher, Esq., on the
Blue Mountains’, New South Wales (The
Victorian Naturalist 10, 134). At the fol-
lowing meeting Mueller exhibited also
from New South Wales a variety of
Grevillea asplenifolia ‘from Cole River,
near Jervis Bay, where it was discovered
by a son of Mr P. L. C. Shepherd’ along
with a new species of Helipterum com-
memorating the collector J. D. Batt from
near Lake Lefroy, Western Australia and
the first record of the exotic Soliva sessilis
collected by J. B. Williamson from near
Port Fairy, Victoria (The Victorian
Naturalist 10, 151).

The information mentioned in the
reports of exhibits may supplement that
provided with the formal description. For
instance, Helipterum fitzgibbonii was
described by Mueller (1890a) from vari-
ous localities including ‘Nullarbor-Plains;
J. Batt’, but is more specifically noted as
having been ‘collected about 100 miles
north of Eucla, W.A., by Mr. J.D. Batt’ in
the list of exhibits for the meeting of June

144

1890 (The Victorian Naturalist 7, 31):
Whereas novel Australian species would
be formally published elsewhere, mention
of the newly recorded exotic plants often
occurs only in the reports of exhibits.
When Mueller published new species in
The Victorian Naturalist it is often
remarkable how little time elapsed
between the collection of the new species,
its exhibition and formal description.
George French collected a novel orchid on
the 9th November 1889 at Dandenong,

and the species was also observed on the |

Club excursion to Tooradin on the same
day (The Victorian Naturalist 6, 121). On
the following Monday, two days later,

French exhibited the orchid at the FNCV |

monthly meeting (The Victorian
Naturalist 6, 122), and Mueller formally
described it as Prasophyllum frenchii in
the December issue of the Naturalist, the
very issue in which the exhibit was noted
(Mueller 1889).

The same sense of immediacy occurred |

when Mueller and others dealt with the
results of explorations further afield. On
Mueller’s suggestion W.A. Sayer climbed
Mt Bellenden-Ker in Queensland and col-
lected plant specimens. These were exhib-
ited by Mueller at the March 1887 meet-
ing of the Club (The Victorian Naturalist
3, 162 and 169-170) and described, mostly
in The Victorian Naturalist, at about the
same time (Mueller 1887a, 1887b).
Sayer’s narrative of the arduous expedi-
tion was read before the April 1887 meet-
ing of the Club (Sayer 1887). Plants
described by Mueller from Bellenden-Ker
included Rhododendron lochae which
commemorated Lady Loch (who knitted
his muffler). Not only was it the sole
Rhododendron known from Australia at

that time, but also a species which Mueller |
had predicted would be found on Mt.

Bellenden-Ker when he sailed by ‘that
locality en route to northern Australia in
1855 (Mueller 1887a). Also described
from from Bellenden-Ker was the new
genus and species Hypsophila halleyana
of which Mueller wrote: ‘I have connected
with this tree - one from the highest
mountain of tropical Australia - the name
of the Rev. J. J, Halley, who, as President
of the Victorian Field-Naturalists’ Club,

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

has amidst the onerous duties of his eccle-
siastic position, still also advanced ener-
getically the studies of living nature
among us.’ (Mueller 1887b),

As Mueller worked on his multifarious
publications he often kept the FNCV
informed of progress by exhibiting various
works, sometimes at the proof stage. Thus
in July 1889 he showed advance proofs of
a new edition of his Census of Australian
Plants (The Victorian Naturalist 6, 74)
and in April 1893 he placed before the
club proof plates of thistles drawn by Mr
Ashley (The Victorian Naturalist 10, 3),
which later appeared in J/l/lustrated
Description of Thistles ..., a pamphlet
brought out by the Department of
Agriculture (Mueller 1893). When recent-
ly published works were displayed, the
reports of exhibits give a definite date by
which the book or part thereof must have
been published, as is the case for the
fourth decade of the Iconography of
Australian Salsolaceous Plants (Mueller
1890b) which was exhibited at the Club
meeting of October 13th 1890 (The
Victorian Naturalist 7, 102). This is useful
for taxonomic works where date priority is
of importance. The list of books received
for the Club library is another source of
information on publication dates.

Mueller occasionally brought to Club
meetings books by other authors, and the
records of these exhibits help to establish
a picture of the development of Mueller’s
library. He also occasionally shared with
the Club interesting letters from his volu-
minous correspondence with fellow
savants.

The exhibits provided by Mueller at the
last Club meeting which he attended
(September 14th 1896) are a typical mix
of the new and the interesting, and were
recorded as follows: ‘Galium murale, as
an introduced plant from South Europe:
Cryptandra bifida, new for Victoria, col-
lected at the Wimmera by Mr. F. Reader;
Cyrtostylis reniformis, with green flowers,
collected by Mr. J. Paul at Grantville; also
the following plants as new for extra trop-
ic Western Australia:- Bassia divaricata,
from near Coolgardie, collected by Mr. F.
Wehl: Perotis rara, traced by Mr. Js
Cusack towards Shark’s Bay, where he

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

also collected Lythrum hissopifolia and
Vallisneria spiralis.’ (The Victorian
Naturalist 13, 71). A list of these exhibits
also exists in Mueller’s handwriting
(Royal Botanic Gardens, Melbourne, RB
MSS M76) with a few minor differences.
It would have been one of the last things
that Mueller wrote for the Club, because
he died on the 10th October, although he
did contribute flowers to the annual exhi-
bition of wild flowers on the 28th
September, obtained through ‘country
friends’ St Eloy D’Alton of Nhill and
Miss Wise of Sale (The Victorian
Naturalist 13, 86).

The records of Mueller’s exhibits and
those of numerous other members serve
not only to help us understand what being
a field naturalist encompassed, but also
conjure up the atmosphere of past meet-
in.s. Mueller’s regular presence must
have brought a sense of excitement at the
sharing of recent discoveries, and he no
doubt commented on the botanical
exhibits of other members, In Mueller’s
case the records of exhibits also provide
important details of his professional scien-
tific work.

References

Mueller, F. von (1887a). Descriptions of new
Australian plants. The Victorian Naturalist 3, 157-
160.

Mueller, F. von (1887b). Descriptions of new
Australian plants. The Victorian Naturalist 3, 168-
169.

Mueller, F. von (1889). Description of an orchid new
for Victoria. The Victorian Naturalist 6, 126-128.
Mueller, F. von (1890a). Descriptions of new
Australian plants, with occasional other annotutions.

The Victorian Naturalist 7, 38-39.

Mueller, F. von (1890b). Jconography of Australian
Salsolaceous Plants. Fourth Decade. (Robert S.
Brain, Government Printer: Melbourne).

{Mueller, F. von] (1893). MMustrated Dexeription af
Thistles, etc., Included Within the Provisions of the
Thistle Act of 1890. (Robt. S, Brain, Government
Printer: Melbourne). :

Sayer, W.A. (1887). First ascent of Mount Bellenden-
Ker. The Victorian Naturalist 4, 37-44.

145

Mueller Issue

The Legacy of Mueller’s Collections
J. H. Ross’

Abstract

The National Herbarium of Victoria dates from the appointment of Baron Ferdinand von Mueller as
first Government Botanist for Victoria on 26 January 1853, Mueller worked tirelessly until his
death on 10 October 1896 to build a world-class collection of herbarium specimens and a botanical
library. The means by which he did so are outlined and an assessment is made of his contribution
and the legacy he left for future generations. (The Victorian Naturalist 113,(4) 1996, 146-150).

Introduction

One of the tasks assigned to Baron
Ferdinand von Mueller when he took up
his appointment as Victoria’s first
Government Botanist on 26 January 1853
was a survey of the botanical resources of
the colony. Although more than sixty
years had passed since the first European
settlement in Australia, the flora of
Victoria was very poorly known, this
knowledge being based on opportunistic
collections gathered by visitors during
brief landfalls or overland travels.
However, few, if any, of these specimens
remained in the colony, As was customary
at the time, early collections invariably
went to institutions or private collections
in Europe. On taking up his appointment,
there was no nucleus of a collection for
Mueller to build on, apart from his own
private collection of specimens from
Europe and South Australia and a small
personal library.

Charles Moore, Director of the Gardens
in Sydney, was confronted with a similar
situation. Despite the activities of collec-
tors such as Allan Cunningham, Charles
Fraser, Franz Sieber and others, Moore
reported in 1855 that until 1853 the
Garden lacked a herbarium and ‘there was
not a single specimen’ (Gilbert, 1986).

Building the Collections

Mueller had to start from scratch in
building a collection of specimens and
books. This was a challenge that Mueller
enjoyed and he worked tirelessly to this
end, Within days of his appointment, he
set off on his first collecting trip to parts
of eastern Victoria during which he trav-
elled some 2500 kilometres (Mueller,

'National Herbarium of Victoria, Birdwood Avenue,
South Yarra, Victoria, 3141

146

1853a). On 5 September 1853, in his First
General Report of the Government
Botanist, Mueller wrote: ‘In accordance
with His Excellency’s instructions, a col-
lection of dried specimens of plants has
been commenced for the Government.
This Herbarium will be at all times acces-
sible to the public.” The National
Herbarium of Victoria (MEL), or, as
Mueller called it, the ‘Phytologic Museum
of Melbourne’ had been founded. After
fifteen months Mueller had covered 6,400
kilometres and collected 1,459 species not
previously recorded for Victoria, many of
them undescribed (Mueller, 1854). Not
only had Mueller plans to document the
flora of the colony of Victoria, but his
ambition was to write what he termed ‘an
universal Australian Flora’ (Mueller,
1853b), In 1855/56 Mueller participated in
the North Australia Expedition under the
command of Augustus Gregory during
which he collected 2000 species, 800 of
them new to science or new records for
Australia (Willis, 1949).

Mueller was conscious of his isolation
from other professional botanists and the
need to establish contacts. In October
1853 in a letter to Sir William Hooker,
Director of the Royal Botanic Gardens,
Kew, England, he wrote: ‘... I confidently
hope that I shall enjoy the indulgence of
the botanists, as I stand here perfectly
alone, without any aid, only scantily pro-
vided with books, without access to
authentic specimens and even without a
magnifying glass, powerful enough to
examine the anther appendices of
Angianthea.” (Mueller, 1853c).

Mueller knew that to carry out his job
efficiently he had to familiarise himself
with the current state of knowledge of the
Australian flora. He knew that the means

The Victorian Naturalist

III EE

Mueller Issue

to accomplish this was to have access to
the published work of those who had gone
before him and of contemporaries who
had described native species, and access to
a comprehensive herbarium containing
authentically named specimens for com-
parative purposes (Lucas, 1995). Many of
the early descriptions were insufficiently
diagnostic to enable the species in ques-
tion to be identified with certainty from
the description alone. Details of Mueller’s
books and his endeavours to build his
library are well documented (Maroske et
al, 1992; Cohn, 1995). He expended a
substantial portion of his own money on
purchasing books and in 1865 donated the
library that he had established to the gov-
ernment (Mueller, 1865).

Mueller devoted much of his energies to
building the collection of specimens
through a combination of his own collect-
ing activities, encouraging others to col-
lect on his behalf, exchange with other
herbaria, and the purchase of private
herbaria. He knew that one of the best
means to acquire authenticated material
for comparative purposes was to purchase
existing herbaria. Duplicates of some of
Robert Brown’s Australian collections
were obtained from Sir William and Sir
Joseph Hooker of Kew. Mueller was very
adept at harnessing the energy of count-
less collectors and he established a net-
work of collectors around the country.
Among these collectors were a number of
women such as Anne McHard of
Blackwood River, and Sarah Brooks of
Israelite Bay, both of Western Australia,
who made important contributions.
Mueller paid some collectors out of his
own pocket but others were pleased to
donate specimens and many were rewarded
by having species named in their honour.

Mueller was one of the most fervent and
eloquent advocates of exploration that the
country has known (Ericksen, 1978).
Mueller sponsored some of the early expe-
ditions of Ernest Giles to Central Australia
(Barker and Barker, 1990), was an active
member of the committee that organised
the Burke and Wills Expedition in 1860,
sent out relief expeditions the following
year, and was chairman of the Ladies
Leichhardt Search Expedition of 1865. To

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

varying degrees he was associated with all
of the exploration activities of the 1870s.
He did this out of his interest in explo-
ration but the prospect of more specimens
from remote parts of the continent for his
herbarium was always in his mind.

Mueller’s endeavours to purchase
herbaria are well documented (Short,
1990). The National Herbarium of
Victoria library possesses an account book
covering the period 1868-1872. From this
book we learn that Mueller purchased
specimens from numerous collectors
including Joseph Nernst from Queensland,
George Maxwell from Western Australia,
Samuel Hannaford from Tasmania, and
J.P. Fullager from Lord Howe Island, A
complete list is reproduced by Short
(1990). Amongst the most important pri-
vate established herbaria purchased by
Mueller were those of Joachim Steetz and
Otto Sonder (Short and Sinkora, 1988,
Short 1990), Mueller received the Steetz
herbarium in December 1863 and the con-
tents of this herbarium are detailed by
Short and Sinkora (1988).

The number of specimens in Steetz’s
herbarium is not known but Mueller noted
that it consisted of 15 large packing cases
(Mueller, 1863b). The Steetz herbarium
was the first large private herbarium from
Europe purchased by Mueller and its
importance to Mueller cannot be over
emphasised. The herbarium contained
many specimens gathered by early collec-
tors in Australia that had been returned to
Europe, among them specimens collected
by Franz Wilhelm Sieber in eastern
Australia. Of particular interest to Mueller
was the good set of specimens collected
by Johann Ludwig Preiss in Western
Australia. These supplemented the set of
specimens collected by James Drummond
to which Mueller (1867) made reference,
the ‘late meritorious James Drummond,
from whose enlightened son the
Melbourne botanical museum received the
whole normal collection of plants secured
by his father during a long series of years
in West Australia, many of the plants
being solely contained as yet in this col-
lection.’ Mueller acquired more
Drummond specimens in the Steetz
herbarium (Short, 1990).

147

Mueller Issue

By far the largest herbarium purchased
for the Melbourne herbarium was the Otto
Wilhelm Sonder herbarium. The Sonder
herbarium probably contained in excess of
250,000 specimens. Mueller (1859)
claimed that the Sonder herbarium was
‘the richest of all private botanical collec-
tions in existence.’ Details of its contents
and purchase are discussed by Short
(1990). Suffice it to say that it took more
than twenty years for Mueller to pursuade
the government to provide the necessary
funds to purchase this important herbari-
um. Mueller was at pains to point out to
the government the benefits of acquiring
the herbarium: *....1 pointed out that such
acquisition, altho’ in first instance a costly
one, would save the expense of ime and
money in accumulating gradually such
herbarium, whilst the possession of such is
after all everuseful, ....(Mueller, 1859),
Mueller (1888) pointed out that “Through
Sonder’s herbarium, original specimens
from the collections of several disciples of
Linnaeus were obtained, coming from
Professor Lehmann’s herbarium.’ The sig-
nificance of the acquisition of the Steetz
and Sonder herbaria was that they con-
tained authentically named material and
many type specimens collected by early
European collectors to visit Australia.
These specimens became available in
Australia for the first time and were of
inestimable value to Mueller.
Unfortunately, Mueller’s attempts to pur-
chase the Lindley herbarium were thwart-
ed by Government indifference.

Mueller’s herbarium grew in size rapid-
ly. He was the focal point of botany in
Australia for almost forty years and mater-
ial poured in from every corner of the con-
tinent. In 1858 he estimated that the
herbarium consisted of 45,000 specimens:
‘It comprises one of the most important
series of Australian plants anywhere in
existence, which will probably be consult-
ed centuries hereafter, and which amounts
to about 6,000 well-marked species in
very numerous varieties’ (Mueller, 1858).
By September 1868 Mueller estimated the
collection at approximately 350,000
(Mueller, 1869). In 1888 halt a million
specimens were said to be present
(Mueller, 1888) and in 1891 Mueller

148

noted that the collection contained
750,000 specimens (Mueller, 1891).

Assessment of Mueller’s contributions

Any assessment of Mueller’s contribu-
tions must take into account the circum-
stances that prevailed at that time. This
was about a hundred years before the era
of instant gratification conferred by such
facilities as the facsimile machine, com-
puters and e-mail. Communications were
poor. To send a letter to Europe and
receive a response took at least three
months. Field work was very demanding
and in parts of Australia often dangerous.
Transport was by means of ship from one
coastal point to another and overland it
was often by horse or on foot. There was
no possibility of pulling into a motel or a
caravan park at the end of a day, enjoying
a good meal, the comfort of a good night's
sleep, and certainly no fast food.
Distances that we to-day easily accom-
plish in one day in a vehicle took Mueller
weeks; air travel was unknown.
Specimens had to be carried on a pack
horse, often for weeks on end, during
which time they were often damaged.
Paper for pressing specimens in the field
was always in short supply.

During Mueller’s years the herbarium
lacked sufficient funds or staff to cope
with many of the basic curatorial activi-
ties. None of the specimens was mounted.
This was unfortunate because of the ease
with which a label may become separated
from the specimen to which it belongs.
Two possible outcomes of this are that the
wrong label becomes associated with a
specimen or that a specimen ends up with-
out any label. In either eventuality, the
specimen has practically no utility.
Although mounting of specimens has been
underway at the herbarium for over forty
years, Mueller’s acquisitions policy was
so successful that a century after his death |
it is estimated that almost half a million
specimens are still waiting to be mounted,
many of them collected by Mueller him-
self, This is an unfortunate legacy which
Mueller could not prevent.

Mueller did not number his collections
as did other early collectors such as J.
Drummond, L. Preiss and F,W, Sieber,

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

The reason given by Mueller is that he
used names, many of them manuscript
names, rather than numbers because of the
potential for inaccuracies when using
numbers. In a letter to William Hooker
written on 5 April 1855 Mueller wrote: ‘It
is sad to me also, to see against all my
remonstrations, nearly all of my old apel-
lations now in print: most of these names
have been years ago replaced by more cor-
rect ones; they were originated mostly
when I was very inexperienced here and
much more in want of books than now and
should only serve instead of numbers
which by a slight inaccuracy lead at once
into mistakes.’ (Mueller, 1855). It is a
matter of regret that Mueller did not use
collecting numbers as it would have obvi-
ated a great deal of confusion and prevent-
ed the publication of countless manuscript
names. In particular, had the specimens
been numbered it would have made it far
easier to trace the type specimens of many
of the taxa Mueller described. Mueller had
a tendency, no doubt occasioned by the
lack of time and any mechanical means of
copying labels, to abbreviate label data on
duplicates and sometimes to use different
wording. Mueller’s handwriting is some-
times scarcely legible which does not help
matters! A consequence of this is that it is
often difficult to determine whether a
specimen in another herbarium is a dupli-
cate of a sheet in MEL or whether the
sheet in another herbarium is unique. As
Mueller did not number his own collec-
tions, it is difficult to estimate the number
that he collected himself. It seems proba-
ble that he collected between 10,000 and
20,000 specimens.

Mueller surrendered his ambition to
write a universal flora of Australia in
favour of George Bentham who produced
the 7-volume Flora Australiensis (1863-
1878). Nevertheless, Mueller assisted
Bentham to the extent of sending to Kew,
family by family, the entire holdings of
the Australian material in the herbarium.
Two enduring benefits accrued to
Australian botanists from this arrange-
ment, Firstly, Bentham saw a wider range
of material than would otherwise have
been possible and cited many of the
Melbourne specimens in the Flora, thus

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

enabling one to gain a better appreciation
of his taxonomic concepts. Secondly, the
verso of the label of each specimen that
was sent to Kew was marked with a ‘B’
on its return to Melbourne to indicate that
it had been examined by Bentham (Ross,
1995). This greatly enhanced the utility of
these specimens to later generations of
botanists.

Mueller was very liberal with his speci-
mens and dispersed many to other
herbaria around the world. Indeed, there is
scarcely a major herbarium in the world
that does not possess some of Mueller’s
specimens. J.H. Maiden, in a letter to
Alfred Ewart on 4 May 1917 wrote: ‘1
know of Mueller’s feverish idea to get rid
of his duplicates. He used to tell me that
he would distribute his duplicates during
his own lifetime and leave no man to do it
after he was dead. The consequence has
been, in the present case (Acacia delibrata
and A. oligoneura), that crucial specimens
have disappeared from the Melbourne
Herbarium.’ (Maiden, 1917). Of course
this dispersal occurred prior to the type
concept as we know it to-day, but one of
the legacies of Mueller’s generosity or
enthusiasm to disperse his collections
partly explains why many types that one
would expect to find here are not here.
This is most unfortunate. Undoubtedly
many of the alleged duplicates would in
fact not have been duplicates in the strict
sense as we use the term today but speci-
mens of taxa of which Mueller had other
examples in his collection.

One means of evaluating Mueller’s con-
tribution is to examine what happened to
the herbarium in the years subsequent to
his death in 1896. When Mueller was
alive he dominated the herbarium to the
extent that there was no natural successor
of equivalent scientific calibre. Mueller’s
death left a vacuum and almost immedi-
ately the herbarium ran out of impetus and
4 decline set in. The flood of new material
that had poured in to Mueller for naming
from around the country dried up and
material tended to be sent instead to other
botanists such as F.M. Bailey in Brisbane
or J.H. Maiden in Sydney. Mueller was
succeeded in the position of Government
Botanist by J.G. Luehmann who in turn

149

Mueller Issue

was succeeded by W. Laidlaw and A.J.
Ewart. A.J. Ewart was part-time
Government Botanist, his duties as
Professor of Botany at The University of
Melbourne occupying most of his
energies. By and large the herbarium lan-
guished for about fifty years following
Mueller’s death and only after the second
world war did a new vitality appear. It is
doubtful whether the number of specimens
in the collection has increased by more
than 200,000 during the hundred years
since Mueller’s death.

It is remarkable that despite all of the
difficulties, Mueller succeeded in building
such a rich collection that ranks in impor-
tance with some of the great herbaria of
Europe and North America. The collec-
tions are worldwide in their coverage and
all plant groups and fungi are represented,
It says much about Mueller’s tenacity of
purpose. Mueller left a wonderful resource
from which subsequent generations have
derived, and continue to derive, enormous
benefits. His legacy is overwhelmingly
positive.

References

Barker, R.M. and Barker, W.R, (1990). Botanical con-
tributions overlooked: the role and recognition of
collectors, horticulturists, explorers and others in
the early documentation of the Australian flora. In
‘History of systematic botany in Australasia’, 37-
86. Ed P.S. Short. (Australian Systematic Botany
Society: Melbourne).

Cohn, H.M. (1995), Australian Plants, the Garden and
Botany in the nineteenth century Periodical.
Naturae 5, 1-24,

Ericksen, R. (1978). ‘Ernest Giles Explorer and
Traveller’ 1835-1897. (William Heineman:
Melbourne).

Gilbert, L. (1986). ‘The Royal Botanic Gardens,
Sydney - A History 1816-1985". (Oxford University
Press: Melbourne).

Lucas, A.M. (1995). Letters, Shipwrecks and
Taxonomic Confusion: Establishing a Reputation
from Australia. Historical Records of Australian
Science 10, 207-221,

Maiden, J.H. (1917). Letter to A. Ewart, 4 May 1917,
Archives, Royal Botanic Gardens, Melbourne.

Maroske, S., Sinkora, D.M. and Cohn, H. M. (1992).
Ferdinand von Mueller’s Library. Botanic Magazine
4, 17-23.

Mueller, F.J.H. (1853a). First general report of the
Government Botanist on the vegetation of the
colony, Victoria-Parliamentary papers-votes and
proceedings of the Legislative Council 1853.1 (A.
No, 26a and b):1-22 (Govt. Printer: Melbourne).

Mueller, F.J.H (1853b). Letter to W. Hooker dated 3
February 1853. Royal Botanic Gardens Kew,
Directors’ letters, vol. 74, Australian letters 1851-8,
letter no. 135.

Mueller, F.J.H. (1853c). Letter to W. Hooker dated 18
October 1853. Royal Botanic Gardens Kew,

150

Directors’ letters, vol. 74, Australian letters 1851-8,
letter no, 137.

Mueller, F.J.H. (1854). Second general report of the
Government Boranist on the vegetation of the
colony. Victoria-Parliamentary papers-votes and
proceedings of the Legislative Council 1854-5.1 (A.
No, 18):1-20 (Govt. Printer: Melbourne).

Mueller, F.J.H. (1855). Letter to W. Hooker, 5 April
1855, Archives, Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew,
England, Director's letters, volume 74, Australian
letters 1851-1858, letter no. 149.

Mueller, F.J.H. (1858). Annual report of the
Government Botanist and Director of the Botanic
Gardens. Victoria-Parliamentary papers-votes and
proceedings of the Legislative Assembly 1858-59.
2: 1-27 (Govt. Printer; Melbourne).

Mueller, F.J.H. (1859), Unpublished memorandum to
the Chief Secretary’s office, | November 1859. Box
747, VPRS 1189, PROV,

Mueller, F.J.H. (1863b). Unpublished memorandum to
the Undersecretary, 8 October 1863, Victorian
Public Records Office, correspondence to Chief
Secretary. 63/8177, VPRS 1189, PROV.

Mueller, F.J.H. (1865). Annual Report of the
Government Botanist and Director of the Botanic
Garden, pp. 18-23 (Govt. Printer: Melbourne).

Mueller, F.J.H. (1867). An undescribed Casuarina
from west Australia. Journal of Botany 5: 211-212.

Mueller, F.J.H. (1869). Report of the Government
Botanist and Director of the Botanic Garden.
Victoria-Parliamentary papers-votes and proceed-
ings of the Legislative Assembly 1869. 3: 1-21
(Govt, Printer: Melbourne).

Mueller, F J. H. (1888). The Melbourne herbarium.
The Gardeners Chronicle 4, 211-212.

Mueller, F.J.H. (1891). Unpublished letter to H.G.A.
Engler, dated 14 December 1891. Staatsbibliothek,
Preussischer Kulturbesitz, Berlin.

Ross, J. H. (1995). Some insights into F.J.H, Mueller’s
Modus Operandi. Australian Systematic Botany
Society Newsletter 84, 4-6.

Short, P.S. and Sinkora, D.M. (1988). The Botanist
Joachim Steetz (1804-1862). Muelleria 6, 449-494.

Short, P.S. (1990). Politics and the purchase of private
herbaria by the National Herbarium of Victoria. In
‘History of systematic botany in Australasia’, 5-12.
Ed P.S. Short.(Australian Systematic Botany
Society: Melbourne).

Willis, M. (1949). ‘By their fruits: a life of Ferdinand
Mueller, botanist and explorer’. (Angus &
Robertson; Sydney).

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Villarsia - One of Mueller's Puzzles

Helen I. Aston!

In December 1856, J.F. Carl Wilhelmi
collected material of Villarsia, Marsh-
flower, from ‘Banks of the Wannon’ in
south-western Victoria. His collection was
lodged with Baron Ferdinand yon Mueller
and today is still extant in the National
Herbarium of Victoria. It is one of the
many specimens gathered by early explor-
ers and collectors which proved puzzling
to the botanists of the era, and which have
had to wait until more recent times for sat-
isfactory taxonomic placement. Mueller
was a great botanist, with a fine observa-
tional eye, but even he was limited by the
often meagre material on which he had to
found his judgements. I offer this little
story as an example.

Mueller was obviously puzzled by
Wilhelmi’s material and was uncertain of
it’s identity. Herbarium annotations indi-
cate that he first allied it with V. parnassi-
folia of Western Australia, but later he
placed it under the widespread and com-
mon south-eastern Australian species V.
reniformis. In each case he noted signifi-
cant differences from the usual collections
of the species concerned. Thus in his
Fragmenta Phytographiae Australia 6,
140 (1868), under V. reniformis, he was
referring to Wilhelmi’s collection when he
wrote ‘A fluvio Wannon habeo plantam
seminibus minoribus ovatis turgentibus
estrophiolatis asperis saltem a forma legit-
ima diversam.’ That is, he noted the dif-
ferent seed characters of the Wannon
material and considered that, although he
was placing it under V. reniformis, he
thought it was worthy at least of being
considered a distinct form of that species.

Current day botanists will appreciate
Mueller’s dilemma. With only one collec-
tion showing those puzzling seeds avail-
able to him in 1868, he was wise to be
conservative in his approach. The elucida-
tion of such taxonomic puzzles requires
more data from more collections and
preferably also personal observations of

' ¢/o National Herbarium of Victoria, Birdwood
Avenue, South Yarra 3141

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

plants in the field. In 1868 Mueller could
not simply hop in a car and whizz off on a
quick trip to the Wannon area. He neces-
sarily left his puzzle unresolved.

There the matter rested for almost 100
years until 1965, when my attention
focussed on plants of Villarsia growing in
a swamp at Cranbourne, south-east of
Melbourne. There were two distinctly dif-
ferent species present although Victorian
botanists were then recognising the pres-
ence of only one species within the State.
Feeling somewhat elated at this chance
discovery, I returned to the National
Herbarium of Victoria and examined the
Villarsia collections it held. As I sorted all
of the Victorian specimens I became
aware of Mueller’s puzzle of long ago. All
except the Wannon collection and one
from the “Lower Glenelg River’, into
which the Wannon River runs, were readi-
ly sorted into two groups corresponding to
the two species seen at Cranbourne.
Victoria therefore had not only two good
species (which later proved to be the real
V. reniformis and V. exaltata), but also the
Wannon/Glenelg exception to be account-
ed for.

Mueller’s puzzle thus passed on to
myself. It became part of field and herbar-
ium studies which resulted in a full revi-
sion of the genus Villarsia within
Australia, published in Muelleria 2,1-63
(1969). In this, the differences which
Mueller had noticed were confirmed and
the Wannon material proved to be the first
Victorian collection of a new species V.
umbricola.

Poor Mueller! In this example he had to
wait almost 113 years for the entity which
he tentatively felt was distinct to be given
formal specific recognition. Is that a sigh
of satisfaction I hear Mueller? Or are you
sighing for other puzzles of yours which
still remain unresolved?

151

Mueller Issue

Mueller’s Excursions in the Murray Scrub 1848-1851

R. Grandison'

Abstract
This paper outlines four botanical excursions carried out by Mueller and associates in the Murray
Scrub of South Australia between 1848 and 1851. The account is supplemented by three appendices
covering ‘Where is Dr. Schulzen?’ ‘People and Places’ and S.T.Gill’s second visit to Moorundie.
(The Victorian Naturalist 113, (4) 1996, 152-162

Fig. 1. Mueller's Hut, Wistow, near Mt. Barker (October 1995).

Introduction

On 16th December 1847, a twenty one
year old Dr. Ferdinand Mueller with two
younger sisters Clara and Bertha arrived
off Largs Bay, South Australia, on the bar-
que Hermann von Beckerath, Almost
immediately Mueller began to collect
plants, an activity which dominated his 4
1/2 year stay in S.A. He wasted no time in
covering the botanical novelties close to
Adelaide and in the Mt. Lofty Ranges,
particularly near Macclesfield. Nearby at
Wistow he soon purchased land and in a

' R.Grandison, 44 Mataro Road, Hope Valley.
S. A. 5090,

152

small hut (which still stands) he set up a
base for further explorations (Fig.1). His
zeal for collecting was matched by an out-
ward gregarious nature in befriending a
host of settlers or new-comers, whether
English or German. By early April of
1848 he had expanded botanical opera-
tions to the Barossa Valley and made a
trip to Kapunda. All of this was quite an
achievement considering his short resi-
dence in the colony and that most excur-
sions were on foot. During the same
month he decided to make a short
exploratory trip to Lake Alexandrina, a
view of which he had looking to the S.E.

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

from the elevated position of his hut.

Mueller left an account of some of his
travels in the Murray Scrub in the newspa-
per, Stid australische Zeitung pt.9, p.1 of
6/6/1850 with an article titled, ‘Der
Murray Scrub, botanisch skizziert’.
Unfortunately, as Sinkora in Churchill et.
al. (1978) points out, ‘No copies of the
references to publications in Australian
newspapers listed (below) exist in
Australian libraries today. These refer-
ences were obtained from various pub-
lished and unpublished sources, and their
accuracy cannot be guaranteed’, Since that
time the status of the above reference does
not seem to have changed. Verification of
dates, places and sometimes clear identifi-
cation of plants (due to nomenclatural
change) can frequently be difficult where
limited sources of information may be dis-
pensed in the literature and perhaps even
then quite imprecise. Some clues to the
botanical conduct of these trips by
Mueller can be gleamed from the inclusive
work of others such as Miquel (1856).
Here is mentioned the occasional specific
place name (often with variant spelling) or
the name of a person. Herbarium sheets
such as those at MEL can provide useful
fragments of information which taken
together may finally approach a reason-
ably reliable and sequential account. The
similarly-placed travels of Mueller’s asso-
ciates who did leave a record of one kind
or another for the area, have been helpful
in providing supportive background of the
frontier where one cultural group was
investigating or using the natural
resources of another group.

In this paper, the Murray Scrub under
consideration is that area of country east
of the Mt.Lofty Ranges to the River
Murray, bound in the north by the over-
land track between Truro and McBean
Pound. The southern boundary is taken to
be the northern most limit of Lake

Alexandrina (Fig. 2).

First Trip through the Murray Scrub -
A Hike to the Lake, late April 1848
About 1900, Carl Gustav (Gus)
Schedlich, a man then aged in his late sev-
enties, recorded his memoirs as a young
emigrant from Bremen having arrived in

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

S.A. late in December 1847, only a week
after Mueller. In his reminiscences,
(Schedlich c.1900) it is stated by the
author that he left Bremen on 20/7/1847
and that the ship was at Cape Borda
(Kangaroo Island) on 18/12/1847. The fol-
low up voyage to Port Adelaide therefore
corresponds to the arrival of the Gellert
(Sexton 1990) about four days later.
Interestingly amongst the other 250 pas-
sengers aboard the ship Gellert was a
young surgeon named Dr. Ludwig
Schulzen. Schedlich says Mueller was
present to welcome them to S.A. so it
would appear perhaps a case of renewing
acquaintances.

Late in April 1848, Schedlich accompa-
nied Muller to Lake Alexandrina (then
called Lake Victoria) and it is through his
latter-day reminiscences that we have an
account of the trip.

‘At this time I made an excursion with

Baron von Miiller to the lakes and we

came the first night as far as

Strathalbyn where we stayed at Mr.

Donald Gallons, (Gollan) who kept

the public house. Mr. Gallons never

forgot Baron von Miiller who was not
satisfied with the accommodation
compared with that to which he had
been accustomed at home, and when
afterwards saw Mr, Gallons he always
asked me how the Baron was. Baron

Miiller was delighted with the

Australian flora which was perfectly

new to him. '

The second night we slept at a station

of Mr. Gilbert, (south-east) from there

to the lake where Langhornes Creek
enters the lake, had a bath and
returned by way of Langhornes

Creek, the Baron being delighted with

a variety of water plants. [see Wood

(1972) p.36 where there is a reference

to the collection in 1848 by Mueller

of the branched alga Chara baueri at

Lake Victoria].

Instead of going to Strathalbyn we

went via Tinpot. The Baron was sure

we were wrong and I had to climb a

tree when I convinced myself we

were right as I could see Mt. Barker
hill quite plainly, also the Bugle

Ranges. He would insist on being

153

Mueller Issue

THE MURRAY SCRUB

SPECIEIC
LOCALITIES

MOORUNDIE

KEY

=" SPRING

TRIP Jom
TRIPs" oy ur
' ee

TRIP 3 e+e eH

“WASON'S HSE.

Fig. 2. Map showing Mueller’s routes and locations mentioned in text.

right and as I was quite sure I was
quite right he left me just where now
the Morning Star public house is situ-
ated. He soon found himself to be on
the wrong road and come back to me,
when in a very short time came to the
section then occupied by old Mr. John
Hall and were regaled by Mr. John

154

Hall with a cup of tea and a snuff,
enjoying the tea after the long walk
and were regaled by Mr. John Hall
with a cup of tea and a snuff, enjoying
the tea after the long walk. We were
soon at home now and rested from our
adventures.’

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Second Trip through the Murray Scrub
- First Trip to the Murray River -
December 1848

Mueller had been in S.A. just one year
yet had already carried out numerous col-
lecting expeditions in the Mt. Lofty
Ranges from Tanunda to Macclesfield in
the south, along with a lengthy hike to the
shores of Lake Alexandrina with Gus
Schedlich (Schedlich c.1900). During
October of the same year he spent several
weeks on Samuel Davenport’s property at
Rivoli Bay seeking a plant cause for what
today is known as Coastal Disease (Glen
c.1900).

This time, Mueller’s route may have
originated at Klemzig from where he trav-
elled to Hope Valley. There he intercepted
the bullock track from Reedy Creek Mine
which passed down Grand Junction Road
to the Yatala Smelter at Rosewater. The
track led up Anstey Hill through the Chain
of Ponds settlement (old Morning Star
| Hotel) then to the S.A. Company’s
Ludlow House. It then weaved about until
the Mt. Torrens Inn could be
reached.(Sketched by Walter Light). This
was a well known bullocky staging point
for the teams. Judging from the siting of a
Gill painting of McVitties’ Station bearing
a contemporary signature style, a slight
detour may have been made to the NE of
Mt. Torrens. As pointed out by Butler
(1993), McVittie had a well-established
merino stud sheep farm. In association
with the South Australian Company John
Baker imported large numbers of sheep
from his former home colony of
Tasmania, in order to improve herd quali-
ty (Pastoral Pioneers Vol 1) This is the
most likely source of McVittie’s stud
Merinos and is suggestive of business
dealings between the men. The circum-
stance is enhanced by Gill’s painting of
the station displaying the sheep. From the
station, a trek to the SE soon would cause
the party to pick up the bullock track to
Reedy Creek Mine. Baker not only had his
own Terlinga Station at nearby Tungkillo,
but was one of the local directors for the
Australian Mining Company’s operations
at Reedy Creek Mine (Butler 1993),
Nearing the scarp face the hilltops are fol-
lowed to the last, before the track drops

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

steeply into the copper mining complex
nestled amongst the enclosing hills.
Nearby on a creek of the same name,
which periodically manages to flow to the
Murray River, Mueller collected Cassia
culliantha (syn. C. vittata). At this point
the River Murray is as close as it gets to
the Mt.Lofty Ranges and the 15 km along
the Reedy Creek to Caloote and Baker's
Station on the Murray could be easily
accomplished (Fig. 1). The trip, following
the nearby cattle track from the station,
allowed an inspection of the Murray Scrub
without the usual concerns over the lack
of surface water. Baker's Station, like a
number of other stations about the Murray
River, was an area held by a tenure of an
annual occupation licence from the
Crown, Botanical collections at this time
are also evident in Willis’ List of Mueller
collections held at MEL which relate to
this time, Whether by arrangement or
chance, it would appear from associative
paintings done at the time by Gill, (Figs. 3
and 4) that the party may have accompa-
nied Baker in his boat downstream
towards the lakes. Baker had another sta-
tion on the southern side of Lake
Alexandrina near the channel that links it
to Lake Albert. One of the paintings show-
ing a river bank with an outcropping rock
is labelled as being on Cooke’s Station,
about 3km south of Wellington near
Mason’s house (Fig. 5). At this point it
would be convenient to leave the river in
order to return to Wistow rather than sail
on across the lake to Baker’s other station.

on a
fe) ae

i ill’s painting site fe Site
Fig. 3. S.T. Gill's painting site for Camp Site,
River Murray close to Baker's Station and
viewed to the west of north where Reedy Creek
‘oins the Murray. Caloote landing in mid fore-

ground. (July 1996).

155

Mueller Issue

Fig. 4. S.T. Gill’s painting site for River
Murray Scene, about 1km south of Tailem
Bend. (May 1996).

Second Trip to the Murray River,
February- March 1849

This trip appears to have had its origins
at Wistow and followed the deeply incised
Mt. Barker Creek down to its confluence
with the Bremer River. Mueller was
accompanied by his friend and neighbour
Ludwig Fischer. Mueller attributed the
collection of the small dark blue flowered
Eremophila gibbifolia (syn. Duttonia
gibbifolia) to Fischer from the Mt. Barker
Creek area. The genus Duttonia, named
after the Colonial Secretary, Francis
Dutton, was established by this plant name
being published in the German botanical
journal, Linnaea xxv, 409 of 1851. One
specimen, MEL 77670 has been designat-
ed the holotype, and another, MEL 77671
isotype.

Alongside the Mt. Barker Creek,
Mueller is listed by Miquel (1856) to have
collected Melaleuca pubescens. Near the
junction of Mt, Barker Creek with the
Bremer River, Fischer collected Acacia
rupicola (Flora Australiensis I, 333). As
indicated by Whibley(1980), this collec-
tion is close to the northern extent of the
species in the Murray Scrub.

Once across the Bremer River and out of
the hills it was only about a 30 km walk
through the Murray Scrub to Samuel
Davenport’s Station on the Murray. On
this march they passed to the north of the
present Ferris-McDonald Conservation
Park but collected Exocarpos sparteus,
dated February 1849 but its locality was
merely listed as ‘Murray’, MEL 1606.
Davenport’s Station held by occupational
licence from the Crown, had an area of
about 70 square miles and extended from
about present day Murray Bridge to south

156

of Tailem Bend. In charge of the station
was Davenport’s young (step) brother-in-
law, Thomas Glen (Baldwin 1980). It was
Mueller’s second visit in less than two
months, On this previous trip. S.T.Gill
made a painting of the downstream view
of the Murray River from an elevated spot
just south of present day Tailem Bend,
showing a portion of Davenport's holding
(Fig. 3).

From the station Mueller and Fischer
turned downstream to reach Wellington.
For the Ist March, the Willis List records
a collection at Wellington. The circuit was
completed by skirting Lake Alexandria
through familiar country to Wistow.

Third Trip to the Murray
February 1851

During his second visit to South
Australia Dr. Hans Behr botanically
explored the eastern side of the Mt. Lofty
Ranges out from Truro and into part of the
Murray Scrub late in 1848 (Kraehenbuehl
1981). He most likely had been staying at
the home of August Fiedler,(Grandison
1985, 1990) a prominent settler at
Tanunda. During March of the following
year he ventured from Truro across the
Murray Scrub to Moorundie on the River
Murray. In his subsequent letter to
Professor Kuntze in Leipzig, quoted at
length by (Kraehenbuehl 1981), Behr
related ‘ the tortures of thirst’ and the
‘desolate flats’ but left a good description
of the Murray Scrub landscape and many
of its plants. About October 1849 Behr
left South Australia but his influence on
Mueller appears to have remained. During
February of 1851, as suggested by the
Willis List and specimens observed at
MEL, Mueller organised another trip to
the Murray River. From Tanunda he
passed through Truro to the old overlan-
der’s track through the Murray Scrub,
rather south of the present highway to
Moorundie on the river. This was, up to
this point, a copy of Behr’s trip of two
years before.

It is likely that Mueller was accompa-
nied by travelling companions, but at this
stage their presence is indicated by
circumstance. At Moorundie, by this time
abandoned, S.T.Gill made a number
of paintings, several features of which

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

r
pe,
f
/
| é +
te
7 ' ; 2
i

Fig. 5 S.T. Gill’s painting of On the River Murray at Mr. Cooke’s Station (Private Collection).

suggest a date of 1851.

At about this time, an associate of
Mueller’s, a Dr. Ludwig Schulzen, by
somewhat mysterious means, was absent
without leave from his medical post at
Robe and may have travelled with him
(Appendix 1). A few known collections of
this time outline the route. From the Willis
List come place names such as the Wheal
Barton (Mine near Truro). From sheet
MEL.1610 an undated specimen of
Exocarpos sparteus labelled, “Murray
Scrub, Mr Irwin’ supplies another clue to
his whereabouts (Appendix 2). Another
specimen, MEL 2541 Santalum acumina-
tum (Quandong) dated February 1851, has
a locality of, ‘Low hills towards the
Murray’. This locality is taken to be the
rise from the flats not long before the river
is reached. Another specimen of the same
plant MEL 2519 was described as taken at
‘Morunda’ (Moorundie), also in February
1851. Yet a third specimen MEL 2533,
carries the Aboriginal name ‘Weria’ and
Murray Scrub, though it is not dated, A
mixed sheet, MEL 1677 of Exocarpos
aphylla lists the collection from, ‘near
Morundie, February 1851’. The Willis
List also mentions a collection at
McBean’s Pound near present day

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

Blanchetown.

Not a great deal is known directly of
Mueller’s downstream trip along the River
Murray from Moorundie to Wellington,
however another German botanist pro-
ceeded him by about 3 weeks. This adven-
turer was Carl Wilhelmi, who with a
friend made the trip on foot from Tanunda
to Moorundie, then downstream to
Wellington. In a series of articles pub-
lished in newspaper Der Kosmopolit in
September 1859, Wilhelmi related a num-
ber of interesting aspects of his journey
and this gives an understanding of what
Mueller may have faced, Like Behr before
him, Wilhelmi discovered the perils of
summer travel in a waterless landscape.

‘On the third day, equipped with

water and provisions, they (search

party) followed his (Sievers) track,
found first of all his gun leaning
against a bush and him lying uncon-
scious under a thick scrub, when they
were just about to search further.
After the searchers moistened his face
and chest with water and also poured
some in his mouth, he recovered
again. Since no drop of water is to be
found in this scrub, which extends
occasionally 40 to 50 miles on both

157

Mueller Issue

sides of the Murray, we provided our-
selves with a water flask and set off
on our way, warned by many on no
account to pass the night in the scrub’.
‘In the night, however, such a thirst
overcame me that I gently took away
the flask from my friend, who had the
custody of it and took a hearty swig
out of it’.

At Moorundie he described the place as,
‘This township consisted of five hous-
es, namely an accommodation house,

a half-fallen in stone house for the
police and three huts without roofs’.

This circumstance relates well to Gill’s

painting of the same scene (Appendix 3).

The travel downstream from Moorundie

was sometimes anything but a stroll along

the river.
‘Soon the river on both sides became
so enclosed by the high vertically ris-
ing cliffs, that we were compelled to
climb them, which for my somewhat
heavy companion was no slight task’,
‘Still following the Murray straight
on, we found our way barred by a
large lagoon densely covered with
reeds in a right bend of the river, so
that we had to make a large detour.
After many fruitless attempts to pene-
trate through it, we found at last a
place where the ground was able to
bear us and with great exertion we
forced through the 6 to 8 foot high
reeds’.

The Mueller party eventually made its

way to Baker’s Station previously visited

back in December 1848. According to the

Wilhelmi account, the station was about to

be deserted, and this may well have been

the case upon Mueller’s arrival several

weeks later.
‘On our arrival of the cattle station of
Mr. Baker, the people were just occu-
pied in loading an old, defective boat
with cooking utensils, cattle branding
irons and so forth, to send these
objects 50 miles down the Murray by
five Aboriginals, because there was
no more feed for the cattle on this sta-
tion and the latter were also to be dri-
ven there’.

At nearby Taylor’s Station there was

already a ferry for crossing the river.

158

‘Reached Taylor’s Ferry-Station in
good time, where we remained the
next day and did the washing’.
‘The following day we made an
excursion in the neighbourhood of the
station and I was so fortunate to find a
new species of the genus Acacia,
which Dr Mueller was so kind to
name after me’.
From this vicinity on Metcalfe’s Station,
Gill, produced a painting entitled ‘King’s
Hut Cattle Station of the Lower Murray’
(Fig. 6). This run had been held for several
years by Henry Metcalfe on occupational
licence. From a site located across the
river from Mypolonga, Gill once more set
to work and produced 2 paintings simply-
called ‘Melcalfe’s Station, River Murray’.
From here the remaining downstream area
was known and presumably quickly coy-
ered until Thompson’s Station was
reached (previously Davenport’s Station).
Wilhelmi says of it, ‘Mr. Thompson was
away, but we were heartily welcomed by
his overseer and his German stockrider’ .It
is possible the Mueller party made a simi-
lar contact, before making its way to
Wellington, where Schulzen may well
have continued southwards and returned
to Robe! (Appendix 1).

Summary of Mueller’s Travels in the
Murray Scrub

Mueller’s excursions in the Murray
Scrub represent a phase in his energetic
phytogeographical travels in South
Australia, later to be developed in Victoria
and other parts of Australia. It was a time
too when he developed associations with
many people, some of whom became long

Fig. 6. S.T. Gill’s painting site for King's Hut
Cattle Station of the Lower Murray, about
10km S.S.E, of Mannum.(May 1996).

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

standing friends. Names such as Samuel
Davenport (later Sir), Charles Stuart, Carl
Wilhelmi, August Fiedler, S.T. Gill,
William Blandowski, Ludwig Schulzen
belong to this group. The Murray Scrub
was an area of risk to the traveller, espe-
cially in the northern sector eastwards of
Truro, due to the general absence of sur-
face water. Here overlanders leaving the
Murray River near Blanchetown had to
drove their stock for several waterless
days until they arrived at Accommodation
Spring on the eastern flanks of the ranges.
The supply of water, whether the source
was considered in the ranges or at the
Murray River, dictated that the scrub east
of Truro was to be traversed smartly rather
than loitered in. It’s rather interesting to
note that this route was covered by Dr.
Behr, then Carl Wilhelmi who was fol-
lowed by Mueller, all travelling during the
summer months. If the Murray Scrub was
a challenge then the area about Moorundie
was an attraction. The artists S.T. Gill
(Appleyard 1986), George French Angas
(Angas 1846) and von Guerard (Carroll
and Tregenza 1986) all visited the area
(along with others) and recorded their
impressions. Additionally Angas (1861)
investigated the Hairy Nosed Wombat,
Lasiorhinus latifrons (Qwen 1845) and
Alfred Sievers almost lost his life there in
collecting birds for Sturt.

From this it can be gauged that Mueller
was not the only scientific investigator in
this region. He may well have been influ-
enced by Behr to try the track to
Moorundie, after all Kraehenbuehl (1981)
pointed out the unfulfilled desire of Behr
to investigate the upper Spencer Gulf area,
which was subsequently achieved by
Mueller in company with Gill (Grandison
1996 in press) in October of 1851.

Without any direct list of collections in
the Murray Scrub by Mueller, it is diffi-
cult to be exhaustive about what was col-
lected. Investigations into listings men-
tioned throughout the volumes of Flora
Australiensis and known collections by
Behr, act as a starting point to accumulate
information from selected specimens held
at MEL. Doubtlessly other specimens
probably exist at Kew and other localities.
In a few cases specimens collected by

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

Behr near Moorundie carry a Mueller
name as well, but this may be due to a ren-
dering of the Sonder collection as there is
no evidence to suggest they were at this
site together. Perhaps due to the time of
the year of his travels in the Murray
Scrub, little material appears as a novelty.
A new species of Acacia collected near
the river south of Mannum was named in
honour of his friend Carl Wilhelmi.

These excursions to the Murray Scrub
represent a deepening resolve to widen at
every opportunity his phytogeographical
terms of reference to the flora of his
adopted land, taken with a young man’s
sense of adventure concerning risks
involved and the stamina required.
Acknowledgments

The author wishes to record his thanks to the
following persons who have supported this pro-
ject. Mr. Keith Borrow of Erindale South
Australia who has assisted with aspects con-
cerning the works of S.T. Gill and Walter Light
along with valuable discussions about collateral
issues. Dr. Thomas Darragh of Melbourne who
supplied me with a translated copy of
Wilhelmi’s narrative published in Der
Kosmopolit 18-25/9/1857, Darrell
Kraehenbuehl for data obtained by his glean-
ings at MEL. The staff at MEL past and present
who assisted in my search through the collec-
tion. The late Dr. J.H. Willis, a friend and men-
tor who sowed the seeds of Mueller’s collecting
places and dates he had noted in his time at
MEL. Mrs. Vick of Wistow South Australia for
allowing me access to Mueller’s Hut. Freda
Grant who transformed a script into a final
typed manuscript.

Fig. 7. ‘The only community where you could
have interaction with intelligent people was the
German coffee place of Pohlman’s (Hamburg
Hotel) at Rundle Street where well educated
Germans found a kind of club and where under
the leadership of Herr Linger you could hear
some good singing’. (Schedlich c.1900).

159

Mueller Issue

Appendix 1 ‘Where is Dr.Schulzen?’

Dr, Ludwig Schulzen arrived in South
Australia aboard the ship Gellert on 23/12/1847
from Bremen. From an address on a letter there
is some evidence that he may have resided at
Pohlman’s Hotel on the corer of Gawler Place
and Rundle Street. This locality was well
known as a cultural spot (Fig.7) and was also
mentioned in these terms by Schedlich in his
reminiscences. In a letter dated 7/8/1848
(P.R.O. Adelaide) from the Colonial
Secretary's Office, Schulzen was appointed
medical officer at Guichen Bay (Robe). He was
directed to the Government Resident, through
whom he was instructed he should direct all
communications. His appointment was consid-
ered provisional on the basis he produced his
Diploma within 18 months. The pay was 50
Pounds per annum and he was to report to the
Government Resident, Capt. Butler at Robe as
soon as possible.

By December 1848, not long after his arrival,
he applied for leave of absence in order to trav-
el to Adelaide. He was directed that his absence
would be without pay unless he could organise
a replacement! During October 1848 Mueller
had visited nearby Mayura Station of Samuel
Davenport for about three weeks, and probably
called in on Schulzen at Guichen Bay.
Subsequent collections made by Schulzen and
forwarded to Mueller include (Kraehenbuehl
1995 pers. comm.) Leptomeria aphylla from
Guichen Bay, near end of 1848, Brunonia aus-
tralis also from Guichen Bay’, and dated
December 1848, and Pimelia humilis listed as
from Guichen Bay and Cape Jaffa and dated
February/March 1849. Another interesting col-
lection by Schulzen noted by Kraehenbuehl
(1995) was Lomandra effusa MEL 20848 from
the town of Mt. Gambier, June 1849, The date
coincides with the arrival in the town of Dr.
Wehl, Mueller’s future brother-in-law. In
another letter dated Robe 18/10/1850, Schulzen
applied through the new Government Resident
Chas Brewer for another leave of absence in
order to travel to Adelaide for ‘health reasons!”
This time the leave was enacted. Schulzen may
have spent some time at the German and British
Hospital in Adelaide as in late March of 1851
he applied for a remission of fees (P.R.O.
Adelaide). In this letter he made reference to his
limited salary. Altogether he doesn’t appear to
have been very happy about the job, its salary
or location.

In a letter dated 24/1/1851, (P.R.O. Adelaide)
from the Government Resident, Brewer to the
Colonial Secretary, Charles Sturt, it was report-
ed that Schulzen was overdue on his overland
journey from Adelaide to Robe. Sturt alerted
the police, but a report of 5/3/1851 still showed
no sign of Schulzen. Where was Schulzen? If in
Adelaide the question would not have arisen as
he would have been sighted, so what was he
doing for 3 1/2 months? The suggestion is that

160

he possibly travelled to the Barossa Valley to
the home of August Fiedler at Tanunda.
(Grandison 1985). Here in the Barossa Valley
he could enjoy a cultural respite while the
authorities in Adelaide and Robe pondered his
whereabouts or fate. As the police were making
enquiries about him, this news probably made
him aware that it would be unwise to return to
Adelaide, As events were to unfold, Mueller
was already preparing a trip from the Barossa
Valley to Moorundie on the Murray, then
downstream to Wellington. This was the oppor-
tunity Schulzen required, and accordingly in the
new year he accompanied Mueller to the
Murray, eventually leaving the party at
Wellington in order to travel along the Coorong
back to Robe. Using this route would avoid
returning to Adelaide and being recognised.
The return to Robe meant travel along the
Coorong. Once again he would pass Cantara
Station, south of Salt Creek where it is known
he collected for Mueller in July 1850
(Kraehenbueh! 1995 pers.comm.). A number of
undated and unlocated specimens from the
same site and listed in Flora Australiensis, hint
at the possibility that he may have once again
collected for Mueller. An apparently gratefully
Mueller named Lasiopetalum schulzenii after its
collector.

It is not known what excuses Schulzen
offered for his apparent disappearance, but he
didn’t last long at the job for in the following
August he resigned. From here he seems to
have spent some time with Dr.Wehl at
Mt.Gambier before joining the exodus to the
goldfields at Mt. Alexander. (Bowden 1974)

Appendix 2. People and Places

Accommodatian Spring A critical watering
place located on the eastern flank of Mt. Lofty
Ranges, east of Truro, Discovered by E.J, Eyre
1839,

Baker's Station John Baker arrived in South
Australia during 1838. He imported stock into
Adelaide from V.D.L. Properties were acquired
along the Lower Murray River near Caloote and
Murray Bridge, as well as the southern flank of
Lake Alexandrina. A small portion of the latter
eventually became the Pt. McLeay Mission
Station of Taplin.

Dr. Hans Behr Born 18/8/1818 Koethen in
Saxony-Anhalt died 6/3/1904 San Francisco
U.S.A. Paid two visits to South Australia, one
in 1844-45 (pre Mueller) the other 1848-49.
Made extensive botanical and entomological
collections. Frequented the home of August
Fiedler. Made an excursion through the Murray
Scrub from Truro to Moorundie in the summer
of 1848-49.

August Fiedler Born 21/2/1796, Klemzig,
Brandenberg Prussia, died Langmeil South
Australia 19/9/1880. Arrived onboard Prince
George 26/12/1838. Veteran of Waterloo,
orchardist winegrower, whose home acted as a

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

centre of early Barossan art and science. Head
layman of the Lutheran Church under Pastor
Kaval.

Ludwig Fischer Bom 14/3/1809 in Holstein.
Worked in a number of Botanic Gardens. As
such he met Mueller at the University of Kiel.
Emigrated to South Australia in 1848 and set-
tled in Bugle Ranges where once again he was
botanically associated with Mueller,

Gilberts's Station Located on the lower
reaches of the Angas River within few km. of
Lake Alexandrina.

S.T. Gill (1818-1880) As an artist he frequent-
ly portrayed an accurate record of the colonial
frontier, especially in South Australia where he
accompanied Mueller on several expeditions.

John Hall's Sections John Hall, a tennant
farmer on sections 2895, 2896 of Macclesfield
Special Survey taken out by Samuel Davenport.
Located about 2 km. east of Wistow close to
Mt. Barker creek.

Thomas Irwin Arrived in Sydney by the ship
Royal Saxon in 1844. Probably joined an over-
landing group to South Australia, being subse-
quently employed on the station of the Disher
Brothers or Lachlan McBean in the Murray
Scrub adjacent to Accommodation Springs.
Mentioned on a herbarium label MEL. 1610 for
Exocarpos sparteus as collected in the Murray
Scrub,

Langhorne Creek Name of a locality on the
lower reaches of the Bremer River which flows
into Lake Alexandrina.

Walter Light_with brother Arnold, arrived in
South Australia on board the William Hyde
from Plymouth in May 1849. Arnold was an
architect, Walter later returned permanently to
England.

Ludlow House Is one of the oldest surviving
houses in South Australia, Its building com-
menced in 1840 for the South Australian
Company which had extensive pastoral interests
in the area. Until, 1852 the main track between
Gumeracha and Chain of Ponds passed by this
substantial building.

MeVitties Station William McVittie had a
Merino stud sheep station a few km. south east
of Mt. Torrens between 1846 to mid 1851. A
Station scene was painted by S.T. Gill in the
summer of 1848/49 period.

Mt. Torrens Inn Existed as of 1848. Sketched
by Walter Light in the following year. On the
copper road from Reedy Creek Mine.

Metcalfe's Station Henry Metcalfe held an

area on the River Murray flanking both banks
by occupational licence until July 1851. The
station boundary south of present day Caloote,
extended downstream towards Murray Bridge.
Moorundie An Aboriginal Station established
by EJ. Eyre in October of 1841 at a site on the
River Murray about 5 km. south of present day
3lanchetown, following clashes between
erlanders and Tribesmen at the Rufus River
branch. Eyre departed in November 1844.

113 (4) 1996

Morning Star Inn Chain of Ponds (Timnath).
Existed 1847 to late 1978 when demolished.

Murray Scrub a name variously applied to a
tegion between the Mt. Lofty Ranges and the
River Murray. It is characterised by being
underlaid by limestone and where there is a
scarcity of surface waters.

Reedy Creek Mine Operations began in 1847
after the purchase of a Special Survey in the
previous year by the Australian Mining
Company. After a revival of the mine in the
1860's the company surveyed the nearby town
of Palmer, naming it after Colonel Palmer the
Chairman of Directors of the company.

Carl Gustav ‘Gus’ Schedlich born Dresden,
Germany 22/4/1821 died Mannum South
Australia 8/8/1847. Associate of Mueller and
for a time engaged to his sister Bertha.

Dr.Ludwig Schulzen MD from Leipzig who
arived in South Australian onboard the Gellert
23/12/1847 from Bremen. Appointed MO Robe
in August 1848, resigned position August 1851.
Collected for Mueller along the Coorong. At
the Mt.Alexander Goldfields for 2 1/2 years
until early 1855.

Taylor’s Station located between Mannum
and Chuka Bend on River Murray. Mentioned
by Wilhelmi (Feb. 1851) that David Taylor
operated a ferry across the river.

Thompson's Station Located between Murray
Bridge and Tailem Bend on the River Murray.
Also known for a stock crossing of the river al
the present site of the Swansport Bridge.

Tin Pot A small settlement about midway
between Wistow and Wellington. Now known
as Woodchester. Originally a part of the Angas
Special Survey of 1841 when the name Tin Pot
was already in use. ;

Wheal Barton Mine A copper mine started in
1849 a few km. south east of Truro, along with
a township named Barton.

Appendix 3. A possible date for S,T. Gill’s
painting titled, Old Police Station of
Morunda held by AGSA and illustrated in
Appleyard et al. (1986). _

Gill appears to have visited Moorundie a cou-
ple of times. Dr. Tregenza in one of his compi-
lation folders about S.T. Gill, held by the
Mortlock Library, Adelaide states, Gill visited
Eyre at Moorundie in February 1842. At this
time the Government cutter Waterwitch was
tied up to the riverbank (Fig. 1) and portrayed
as such in one of his contemporary paintings
(Appleyard ef al 1986). In January 1842 the
Police Station was built, (Eyre Letters) thus if
Gill visited the place in 1843 it could hardly be
described as ‘old’. In December 1842 the
Waterwitch sank at her moorings with the upper
masthead left showing. The 1843 date inscribed
on the front of the painting must therefore be in
doubt as accurate, as it does not show the mast.

‘As outlined by Appleyard er al.. (1986), Gill
periodically changed his signature style. The

Mueller Issue

style shown on the lower left of the painting is
identical to that of another painting called
Arrival of the Geelong Mail at Ballarat dated
1855. This signature on the Moorundie painting
is suggestive of a subsequent completion, per-
haps with a lapse of accuracy for the inscribed
date. As Gill left S.A. early in 1852 and there
are 1851 signature styles on his paintings of
Metcalfe's Station, it is suggested a probability
exists for considering that the Moorundie paint-
ing mentioned above was made in 1851 while
in the company of Mueller and associates. From
Wilhelmi’s description of 1851 (see text) the
Police Station could by then be described as
‘old’ and ‘run down’.

References

Angas, G.F. (1846) South Australia Illustrated. facsim-
ile edition A.H. and A.W.Reed 1967.

Angas, G-F. (1861) Notes on the Broad-fronted
Wombat of South Australia (Phascolomys latifrons
Owen). Proceedings of the Zoological Society
(London) 29, 268-271.

Appleyard, R.,.Fargher, B., Radford, R.(1986).
‘S.T.Gill, The South Australian Years 1839-1852"
(A.G.S.A.)

Baldwin, B.S. (ed,1980), Letters of Samuel Davenport
1842-49 part VIII. South Australiana 19(2)
Libraries Board of S.A.

Bentham, G., Mueller, F., Reprint 1967, ‘Flora
Australiensis’. 7 Volumes. (A.Asher and Company
with L, Reeve and Company).

Bowden, K.M. (1974). ‘Doctors and Diggers on the
Mt.Alexander Goldfields’. (Published by the
author),

Broxam, G., Nicholson, I. (1988). ‘Shipping arrivals
and departures. Sydney 1841 to 1844’. (Roebuck
Society).

Butler, R.(1993). ‘The Quiet Waters By. The
Mt.Pleasant District 1843-1993’. (District Council
of Mt.Pleasant: S.A.).

Carroll, A.,Tregenza, J, (1986). ‘Eugene von
Guerard’s South Australia’. (Art Gallery of South
Austfalia),

Cockburn,R. (1925). ‘Pastoral Pioneers of South
Australia’. 2vol, (Lynton Publications. reprint n.d.).

Churchill, D.M., Muir, T.B.,Sinkora, D.M, (1978).
The published works of Ferdinand J.H.Mueller
(1825-1896). Muelleria 4,(1).

Cross, E.A. (19927). ‘Old Woodchester (Tin Pot) and
Onaunga District Council Area.1842-1992’,
(Published by the author).

Eyre, E.J. ‘Reports and Letters to Governor Grey
From Moorunde’. (Published in Adelaide in 1985
by Sullivan’s Cove).

Gemmell, N.(1975). Some notes on Ferdinand von
Mueller and the early settlement of the Bugle
Ranges. The South Australian Naturalist 49,(4).

Gemmell, N. (1987). ‘The Native Vegetation of the
Strathalbyn Plains’, (Strathalbyn and District Tree
Committee),

Glen, G. (c.1900) ‘Baron von Mueller’. (unpublished

162

m.s. Millicent District Council Library).

Grandison, R.E. (1985). Dr.Ferdinand Mueller and his
influence in early scientific communities in South
Australia. Proceedings of the Royal Geological
Society 85.

Grandison, R.E. (1990). The 1851 botanical excursion
of Ferdinand Mueller to the Flinders Ranges, In
“History of systematic botany in Australasia’.
P.S.Short (ed.). (Australian Systematic Botany
Society Inc.).

Grandison, R.E. (in press 1996). “The 1851 botanical
excursion of Ferdinand Mueller to the Flinders
Ranges,S.A.‘(revised). (Historisches Institut,
Universitat Stiittgart).

Hoad, J,L. (1986), ‘Hotels and Publicans in South
Australia’. (Australian Hotels Association,
S.A.Branch, and Gould Books).

Kraehenbuehl, D.N. (1981). Dr.H.H. Behr’s two visits
to South Australia in 1844-45 and 1848-49. Journal
of the Adelaide Botanic Gardens 111,(1).

Kraehenbuehl, D.N. (1995) pers. comm.

Miquel, F.A.G. (1856). Stirpes Novo-Hollandas a
Ferd. Mullero collectas. Determinavit F.A.Q.
Miquel Nederandisk Kruidkundig Archief iv, 98-
150.

Muller, F.J.H. ‘Der Murray-Scrub, botanish skizziert’
Sudaustralische Zeitung. Adelaide pt 9, 1, 6th June
1850.

National Parks and Wildlife Service. Dept. of
Environment and Planning (1984). ‘Conservation
Parks of the Murraylands’. (Western Plain)
Management Plans. (Published by Dept. of
Environment and Planning).

Schedlich, C.G. (c.1900). Reminiscences of Carl
Gustav (‘Gus’) Schedlich (unpublished m.s.
Mortlock Library Adelaide).

Schulzen, L, (1848-51). Correspondence P.R,O.
Adelaide,

Sexton, R.T.(1990). ‘Shipping arrivals and departures
South Australia 1627-1850". (Gould Books and
Roebuck Society).

State Heritage Branch, Dept. of Environment and
Planning. (1987). ‘The Waterwitch Wreck Site’.
(Government Printer: Adelaide),

Whibley, D.J.E. (1980). “Acacia of South Australia’.
(Government Printer :Adelaide).

Wilhelmi, C. (18/9/1857 to 25/9/1857) ‘Travels in
Australia’.

Der Kosmopolit. Translated from the newspaper by
Dr.Thomas Darragh April 1987.

Willis, J.H.(nd.). Chronological List of F.J.H.
Mueller’s Collection Localities in South Australia,
1847-52, (voucher specimens in Herb.MEL. unpub-
lished m.s.)

Wood, R-D. (1972). ‘Characeae of Australia’,

(J.Cramer).

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Botanical Researches in Intertropical Australia:
Ferdinand Mueller and the North Australian Exploring
Expedition

Helen M. Cohn’

On 17 July 1855 Baron Ferdinand von
Mueller sailed out of the harbour of
Sydney on board Monarch. He was
embarking on an exploration of the
unknown, an expedition into the centre of
the Australian continent where no
European had been before. His compan-
ions on this great adventure included A.C,
Gregory, the expedition’s leader, and his
brother Henry, both experienced explorers
and bushmen. Artist Thomas Baines, hav-
ing endured the rigours of the South
African bush, was about to get his first
taste of the Australian outback. The com-
plement of scientific personnel included
J.R. Elsey, surgeon and naturalist, J.S.
Wilson, geologist and J. Flood, collector
and preserver. Stockmen, a farrier, a har-
nessmaker and a carpenter completed the
expedition’s membership. Horses and
sheep were taken on board in Brisbane.
The North Australian Exploring
Expedition was under way (Cumpston
1972; Birman 1979).

Embarkation

Mueller’s appointment as botanist to the
expedition was made almost at the last
minute and his decision to join caused him
some anguish. In the early part of 1855
Mueller found his position of Government
Botanist in Victoria increasingly precari-
ous. The colony was sinking further into
the depths of a depression such that the
government was obliged to make drastic
reductions in expenditure. Mueller expect-
ed to hear at any time that he was without
a job since, as he reported to William
Hooker at Kew, ‘the abolishment of the
scientific institutions’ had been decided
upon, and retrenchments were being made
in every direction (Mueller to Hooker, 5
April 1855). In May approval of the bud-
get for his department gave Mueller hope
that he would escape the fate of his col-

' Royal Botanic Gardens, Melbourne

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

leagues in the Geological Survey (Darragh
1987). However, the blow fell the next
month. On instructions from the
Governor, Charles Hotham, the Colonial
Secretary informed Mueller that ‘the
reduced state of the finances of the Colony
will compel His Excellency to abolish the
office of Government Botanist at the end
of the present month’ (Moore to Mueller,
13 June 1855).

Mueller had determined that if this fate
awaited him he would pursue his dream of
preparing a ‘universal flora of Australia’
by travelling, using only his own slender
resources, in various regions of the eastern
part of the continent. A more congenial
alternative presented itself, however.
Unexpectedly, he received a letter from
A.C. Gregory who was at that time in the
last stages of preparation for an extended
expedition into the unexplored regions of
north Australia, William Hooker's nomi-
nee for the position of botanist, the elderly
James Drummond of Perth, had declined,
much to Gregory’s relief. He needed
strong young men who could withstand
the rigours of travel in unknown territory.
It was at the instigation of William
Harvey, an Irish botanist then making a
botanical tour of the colonies, that
Gregory wrote to Mueller indicating that
an application from him to join the party
would be given immediate consideration
(Gregory to Mueller, 11 May 1855).

Without waiting for Mueller’s reply,
Gregory recommended to the Governor
General, William Denison, ‘the expedien-
cy of accepting the services of Dr Mueller
in the capacity of Botanist to the
Expedition, as | imagine that the position
he now holds as Government Botanist in
the Colony of Victoria. added to the
strong recommendation of Professor
Harvey, are a sufficient guarantee of his
ability to perform the duties required
(Gregory to Thompson, 24 May 1855).

163

Mueller Issue

Mueller was delighted that Harvey, with
whom he had scoured the shores of Port
Philip Bay for algae, had put his name for-
ward (Mueller to Gregory, 13 May 1855).
Here was an unsurpassed opportunity for
him to study the flora in areas where no
botanical collections had previously been
made. He wavered, however. ‘I ought not
to embark in a dangerous enterprise’, he
remarked to Gregory, ‘in which my con-
stitution may be brok [sic] altogether, and
to return perhaps breadless home’
(Mueller to Gregory, 26 May 1855), The
dreadful fates of the last two expeditions,
those of Edmund Kennedy and Ludwig
Leichhardt, preyed on his mind. He feared
that a prolonged absence would materially
affect his prospects for re-employment
with the Victorian government, unless ‘the
elaboration of any discovered plants as the
reward for my labours would be entrusted
to myself’ (Mueller to Hooker, 11 January
1857).

Mueller sought the unprecedented con-
cession of being able to retain part of his
collections for his own study and evalua-
tion. On other such expeditions all collec-
tions, journals and notes were deemed to
be government property, not permitted to
be published without official sanction. ‘I
alone could reconceal [sic] myself to the
manyfold dangers’, he wrote to Gregory,
‘which we have to brave in such a country
as we intend to explore, by having the
reward of publishing my own botanical
discoveries from the collected material; as
I otherwise would sink to the position of a
mere collector’ (Mueller to Gregory, 4
June 1855).

Ultimately Mueller sought Gregory’s
support in applying for leave of absence
from the Victorian Government. This
being granted, Mueller travelled to
Sydney in July intending to consult
Gregory and Denison, ‘whether my physi-
cal strength will be sufficient to partici-
pate in the general duties of the explo-
ration’ before actually accepting the posi-
tion of botanist with the expedition
(Mueller to Gregory, 23 June 1855).
Mueller embarked in Sydney without
receiving any assurances with regard to
his retaining a duplicate set of his collec-
tions, his enthusiasm for studying the

164

northern flora outweighing the fears he
held on other grounds.

On the trail

The expeditionary party reached the
mouth of the Victoria River in northern
Australia in September 1855. Here the real
work began. The party worked its way
upstream, some by river in the schooner
Tom Tough, while Gregory led a small
group, including Mueller, by an overland
route reconnoitring as they went. A depot
camp was established on the river in
October, the place being determined in
part because the schooner had run aground
and resisted all efforts at refloating. The
surrounding country offered plentiful
grass for the horses and sheep but present-
ed a somewhat dreary aspect. It was,
wrote Gregory in his journal, ‘very rough
and stony, thinly timbered with white gum
eucalyptus of small size, and nearly desti-
tute of leaves; and though the whole coun-
try was grassy, it was so much parched by
the intense heat that it presented a very
sterile aspect.’ (Gregory 1884). The stony
ground proved difficult for the horses and
caused them to go lame. Drying grass pre-
sented a further problem. A grass fire
broke out from ‘want of due precaution in
clearing the grass around the fire at the
camp, though the cook had been cautioned
on the subject’. The party lost a night’s
sleep in trying to prevent the fire consum-
ing all the grass for the animals (Gregory
1884).

From here, on January 3 1856, Gregory
set off towards the inland accompanied by
his brother Henry, Mueller, Baines, Flood,
overseer G, Phibbs, farrier R. Bowman,
harness-maker C. Dean and stockman J.
Fahey. This was towards the end of the
wet season and the men daily noted the
drying of the countryside. Rivers that in
the wet would run in torrents became mud
flats deeply fissured by the scorching rays
of a tropical sun, Gregory deemed much
of the country through which they passed
quite worthless and noted that the surface

of the ground was often covered with a |

thin crust of salt.

Mueller, in writing to William Hooker,
painted a vivid picture of the daily routine
for the men on the expedition.

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

‘We were roused precisely at four o cl.
a.m. by the last sentry on watch, fin-
ished our simple breakfast in 4 of an
hour, went at once in search of our
horses, and managed generally to have
them caught, driven in saddled and
packed a little past sunrise. We trav-
elled hardly ever less than 8 hours,
often 10, at the rate of about 3 miles an
hour, but when grass or water was not
conveniently found sometimes consid-
erably longer. Unloading, going
through our little domestic duties,
repair of cloaths and saddlery, atten-
dance to our noble animals, [without]
which we would have been helpless
beings in the wilderness, pitching our
calico-sheets and refreshing ourselfes
by a hasty meal would occupy us for
less than an hour, the rest of the day,
about 2 hours at the average, was allot-
ted to the special duties of our respec-
tive departments. I would employ
myself examining the plants round our
camp, in attending to the specimens
and seeds snatched up on the way or
writing botanical notes. At night we
stretched ourselfes on our blanket, and
generally in full cloaths, to be ready
for defence at a seconds notice, the
gun alongside us, the revolver under
our head.’ (Mueller to Hooker, 11
January 1857).

For two months they travelled in a south
:and westerly direction, following a water-
course Gregory named Sturts Creek, for
inearly 300 miles. In doing so they pene-
itrated far into the level tract of country
;which Gregory termed the Great
Australian Desert. Hopes that the Creek
‘would lead to some important outlet to the
waters of the Australian interior came to
nothing. Gregory knew the signs of
impending drought and decided to retreat
to the Victoria River ‘while it was practi-
cable, as the rapid evaporation and
increasing saltiness of the water in this
arid and inhospitable region warned us
that each day we delayed increased the
difficulty of the return, and it was possible
that we were cut off from any communica-
tion with the party at the depot by an
impassable tract of dry country’ (Gregory
| 1884).

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

The heat proved a trial. Gregory fre-
quently recorded midday temperatures of
over 100°F, When on the move, the party
often stopped travelling in the middle of
the day and resumed later in the afternoon
when the sun had lost some of its strength.
A thermometer was lost when the heat
caused the scale to warp and the tube
broke. Flies were a persistent bother, espe-
cially to the horses, getting in their eyes
and making them restless. On returning to
the depot camp Gregory found that the salt
pork had reduced to ‘4 its original weight,
the heat having melted the fat. It became,
said Mueller, ‘rancid and indigestible’
(Mueller to Hooker, 1] January 1857).
Gregory found an alternative by making
‘experiments in the preparation of meat
biscuits by mixing the preserved fresh
beef with flour in equal proportions, with
satisfactory results.’ (Gregory 1884).

Some provisions were in short supply,
having been water-damaged in landing
from Tom Tough, Rats and white ants
attacked the food stored under cover at the
camp. To supplement their diet the men
shot game whenever possible. Emu,
ducks, catfish and even a tortoise found
their way into the pot. They also made use
of the local plants. Among the most
important of these was Portulaca oleracea
which very easy to gather and required no
cooking (Mueller to Hooker, 11 January
1857). It was to this widespread anitscor-
butic plant that Mueller ascribed the con-
tinued good health of the party. The
Australian spinach, Chenopodium erosum,
was of similar benefit but more time-con-
suming to prepare. The roots of both the
giant water-lily and Typha, a small kind of
cucumber, a species of rose-apple, the ten-
der parts of the stem of the orchid
Cymbidium canaliculatum, the clustered
fig, a native mulberry and the yam all pro-
vided variety in an otherwise very restrict-
ed diet. Palm-cabbage was obtained from
several species of Livistona and
Pandanus, although even after boiling the
taste was still acidic. Mueller noted in par-
ticular the berries of Leichhardt’s bread-
tree, a species of Gardenia, and
Leichhardt’s nonda fruit (Mueller to
Hooker, 20 May 1857). ;

Not all the native plants were edible,

165

Mueller Issue

however. Some of the horses died from a
virulently poisonous plant. Mueller was
unable to determine which plant caused
the damage, although he thought it proba-
bly akin to Gompholobium. The expedi-
tion could not afford to loose any of its
horses. Yet these animals showed a
remarkable propensity for straying from
camp even up to 10 miles distance. Much
manpower was spent rounding them up. It
was not only the horses that strayed. ‘Dr
Miiller having wandered away into the
rocky hills and lost himself’, Gregory
noted, ‘I halted at the first convenient
spot, having detached several of the party
to search for him, but it was not until 4
p.m. that the Doctor reached the camp’
(Gregory 1884). It was a ‘frequent occur-
rence’ that, absorbed in collecting plants,
Mueller became detached from the rest of
the party.

Perhaps the most extraordinary part of

the expedition was the overland journey.
Leaving Baines in charge of the depot
party with instructions regarding supplies
and the carriage of letters and Mueller’s
precious inland specimens, Gregory set
out on 21 June. He was accompanied by
Henry Gregory, Mueller, Elsey, Bowman,
Dean and Melville. They marched across
Arnhem Land to the Gulf of Carpentaria,
then followed the Gilbert and Burdekin
Rivers to cross the Great Dividing Range,
returning to Brisbane on 16 December
1856. In all the party had travelled 5000
miles by land (Waterson 1972). They were
greeted as heroes.

Not a mere collector

For Mueller, of course, the most impor-
tant aspect of the long and arduous jour-
ney was the botanical collections he made.
It was, after all, ‘for the sake of the plants
alone’ that he ever wanted to join the
expedition (Mueller to Gregory, 23 June
1855). Mueller took every chance that
offered to collect as much as he could, and
paid tribute to Gregory for affording him
every possible opportunity to pursue his
collecting (Mueller 1858a), Indeed,
between Mueller and Gregory there was
obviously a great deal of mutual respect.
Gregory might have twitted Mueller on
wearing out more horses than anyone else,

166

but had Mueller not been a competent
bushman he would not have been chosen
as a member of the overland party. For his
part Mueller stated that the success of the
expedition was due entirely to Gregory’s
incomparable experience, unabating exer-
tions and unwearied attention to all
aspects of the expedition (Mueller to
Gregory, 4 June 1857).

Mueller’s specimens did not reach the
herbaria at Kew and Melbourne without
difficulty. The necessity of carrying as
much food as possible greatly limited the
amount of drying paper Mueller could
carry into the inland or on the overland
section, Everything had to be carried on
horseback. With high temperatures and
being jolted over distances of hundreds of
miles ‘many of my specimens have suf-
fered frightfully, particularly such brittle
kinds as Eucalyptus, Loranthus, Capparis
&c. of which I was obliged in many
instances to place the remaining fragments
into paper capsules.’ (Mueller to Hooker,
6 March 1857).

The onset of the rainy season brought
different problems. ‘I lost many speci-
mens or damaged them in drying’, he
wrote to William Hooker, ‘a process
which after our long daily stages was in
the humid evening air not easily accom-
plished, particularly as we could not load

our poor packanimals in such a climate |

with large heavy tents at the outset from
the Victoria River’ (Mueller to Hooker, 11
January 1857). As the party approached
the east coast, Mueller found ‘the plants
increased to such a number for the collec-
tion, that I was unable to describe from
fresh specimens at all, but during the earli-
er part of this section of the expedition, I
found particularly on Sundays time for
writing detailed descriptions of the more
interesting plants, which as regards the
gay colours of Hibiscus, the tender flow-
ers of Stylidium and Mitrasacme, or the
easily forgotten habitual characters of
Eucalypti, was, I think, of some impor-
tance’ (Mueller to Hooker, 11 January
1857).

It was impossible for Mueller to carry
overland with him to Moreton Bay the
collections from the inland section of the
of the expedition. Being the first botanical

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

collections made in this remote and inac-
cessible region, they included a great
number of rare and unknown plants.
Instead they were placed in the care of
Thomas Baines for transportation by sea,
and finally reached Sydney in April 1857
four months after the return of the over-
land party. To Mueller’s dismay they were
damaged. In some distress Mueller report-
ed to Gregory that ‘one of the most valu-
able parts of the botanical collections
obtained principally in Central Australia
and the Upper part of the Victoria River,
arrived by Messenger, has been destroyed
by water to the amount of nearly 3000
specimens and from 2-300 kinds of seeds’
(Mueller to Gregory, 6 April 1857).

Baines ascribed the damage to one of
two possibilities: either to a mishap in
trans-shipment of cargo in Java from the
derelict Tom Tough to Mermaid; or to the
long continuance of hot dry weather
which caused the deck seams to leak into
the hold where Mueller’s specimens had
been stowed (Baines to Gregory, 7 April
1857). Mueller, in his disappointment,
found neither possibility compensation for
his loss (Mueller to Hooker, 6 April
1857). He began the task of unpacking the
damaged plants with a heavy heart. With
these specimens now remaining only in
fragmentary form, Mueller remarked to
William Hooker that the notes made at the
time of collection would render this
mishap a not irretrievable loss (Mueller to
Hooker, 6 April 1857).

Flora of tropical Australia

Mueller did not know when he left
Sydney in July 1855 whether he would be
permitted to retain for his own purposes a
duplicate set of the specimens.
Throughout the expedition he collected
and wrote his notes in the hope that this
would be the case. It was not until the
party returned to Sydney in December
1856 that Mueller learned that William
Hooker’s representations on his behalf to
the Secretary of State for the Colonies had
been successful (Hooker to Labouchere,
18 December 1855). His dearest wish with
regard to the North Australian Exploring
Expedition had been granted.

Mueller spent from January to May

1
pee (4) 1996

1857 sorting, labelling, naming and
describing the collections, and packing the
best specimens for shipment to Kew.
When Elsey returned to London in March
he took with him Mueller’s first consign-
ment of 1500 specimens comprising 300
species from the overland section of the
trip (Mueller to Hooker, 13 March 1857).
By the middle of May Mueller had fin-
ished his sorting and packing. Five cases
with approximately 6000 specimens
awaited shipment, while notes relating to
400 rare or undescribed plants were to be
sent separately to ensure against loss at
sea (Gregory to Thompson, 15 May
1857).

In his report to Gregory on the botanical
results of the expedition, (Mueller 1858a).
Mueller estimated that he had observed
nearly 2000 species in 160 natural orders
and 900 genera. He summarised his obser-
vations on the predominant families and
most numerous genera, and the relative
distribution of families in different geo-
graphic areas. These areas he categorised
as: dense coast forests, Brigalow scrub,
open downs, desert, sandstone tableland,
sea coast, and banks and valleys of rivers.
The collections from the Victoria River
and Arnhem Land represented, he
believed, a ‘nearly perfect flora’ of those
areas. In particular he noted the plants
which had proved edible or of some other
benefit to the expedition members.

Mueller’s letters to William Hooker dur-
ing the course of the expedition, in which
he made tentative identifications and
recorded his observations to date, were
edited by Hooker for publication (Mueller
1856a, 1856b, 1856c). As Mueller steadily
worked through the collections in Sydney
his letters to Hooker continued to include
detailed discussions of the plants he exam-
ined. Ultimately Mueller’s descriptions
and notes of the Eucalyptus and Acacia
species from the expedition were pub-
lished in London with the help of the
botanists at Kew (Mueller 1858b, 1859).
Mueller preferred, however, to publish his
results in Australia and many can be found
in the early volumes of his Fragmenta
Phytographiae Australiae.

“The North Australian Exploring
Expedition was among the most success-

167

Mueller Issue

ful expeditions mounted in Australia.
Mueller certainly made the most of his
opportunity. In his comprehensive collect-
ing, detailed descriptions of the plants and
wide-ranging botanical observations
Mueller was indeed no mere collector.
The expedition, in Mueller’s estimation,
was one ‘which in its wise arrangements,
in the rapidity of its movements and in its
multitude of detail[ed] discoveries will
ever stand unparalleled in the history of
Australia Geography’ (Mueller to
Gregory, 4 June 1857).

Postscript

In April 1996, as part of the celebrations
marking the centenary of the death of
Ferdinand Mueller, the Royal Botanic
Gardens, Melbourne in conjunction with
the Darwin Herbarium, organised a col-
lecting trip to revisit some of the sites
where Mueller collected in 1856. The
party concentrated its efforts in the
Gregory National Park which straddles the
Victoria River. In less than two weeks,
2500 specimens were collected in dupli-
cate. This was accomplished with the aid
of modern equipment such as helicopters,
satellite navigators which give accurate
latitude and longitude readings, portable
gas plant driers, and refrigerators for stor-
ing food and drinking water. The party
was not afflicted with drought, did not
sleep with guns at hand, and reported feel-
ing the presence of Mueller’s spirit at the
depot camp.

Acknowledgements

Transcripts of some letters quoted here were
supplied by Sara Maroske of the Mueller
Correspondence Project.

References

Unpublished letters

Colonial Secretary’s Office, 4/3351 letters received,
no. 55/4828; Gregory to Thompson 24 May 1855.

Public Record Office, London, CO 201/488, New
South Wales original correspondence, vol. 1, f. 357:
Hooker to Labouchere 18 December 1855.

Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, Director’s letters vol.
74, Australian letters 1851-8: Mueller to William
Hooker 5 April 1855; 11 January, 6 March, 13
March, 6 April, 20 May 1857.

State Library of New South Wales, Dixson Library,
Gregory papers, MS Q429: Gregory to Mueller 11
May 1855. Mueller to Gregory 13 May, 26 May
1855 (MS Q423); 4 June, 23 June 1855 (MS Q424);
6 April 1857 (MS Q426); 4 June 1857 (MS Q427).
Baines to Gregory 7 April 1857 (MS Q426).

168

Gregory to Thompson 22 May 1857 (MS Q430).
Victorian Public Record Office, Colonial Secretary's
Office VA 856, VPRS 3150, unit 2, no, 494: Moore

to Mueller 13 June 1855.

Published sources

Birman, W. (1979). ‘Gregory of Rainworth: a man in
his time’. (University of Western Australia Press:
Perth).

Cumpston, J.H.L. (1972). ‘Augustus Gregory and the
inland sea’. (Roebuck Society: Canberra).

Darragh, T.A. (1987) The Geological Survey of
Victoria under Alfred Selwyn, 1852-1868,
Historical Records of Australian Science 7:1-17

Gregory, A.C. (1884). Journal of the North Australian
Exploring Expedition. Jn ‘Journals of Australian
explorations’ by A.C. Gregory and F.T. Gregory,
(Government Printer: Brisbane).

Mueller, F. (1856a). Dr Ferdinand Mueller and the
North Australian Exploring Expedition, Hooker's
Journal of Botany and Kew Garden Miscellany 8,
11-16.

Mueller, F, (1856b). Note on the voyage of the North
Australian Exploring Expedition, from Sydney to
the Mouth of the Victoria River. Hooker's Journal
of Botany and Kew Garden Miscellany 8,46-52.

Mueller, F. (1856c). North Australian Botany, obser-
vations on, by Dr Frederick [sic] Mueller, botanist
to the N.W. Australian Government Expedition,
under the command of Mr Surveyor Gregory.
Hooker's Journal of Botany and Kew Garden
Miscellany 8, 321-331.

Mueller, F, (1858a). Botanical report on the North
Australian Exploring Expedition under the com-
mand of A.C. Gregory, esq. Journal of the
Proceedings of the Linnean Society, Botany 2, 137-
16

Mueller, M. (1858b), Monograph of the Eucalypti of
tropical Australia, with an arrangement for the use
of the colonists according to the structure of the
bark. Journal of the Proceedings of the Linnean
Society, Botany 3, 81-101.

Mueller, F. (1859). Contributiones ad Acaciarum
Australiae Cognitionem. Journal of the Proceedings
of the Linnean Society, Botany 3, 114-148.

Waterson, D.B. (1972). Gregory, Sir Augustus Charles
(1819-1905). Australian Dictionary of Biography 4,
293-295.

The Victorian sat

Mueller Issue

Roper R. ms
| Victoria R.
ieee

0 200 400 kilometres

Traveller’. Heineman, 1978

This extraordinary adventure with the
Gregory brothers (A.C. and H.T.) com-
menced with embarkation from Sydney on
18 July 1855, sailing in the Monarch and
Tom Tough via Brisbane to an initial land-
ing at Pt. Pearce at the northern extremity
of the Victoria Estuary two months later.
For added excitement, include the ground-
ing and near loss of the Monarch on a reef
just out of Darwin (28 Aug), with the loss
of some horses, plus the subsequent
grounding and holing of Tom Tough near
Entrance Island (27 Sept), entailing water
damage to a significant part of the stores,
loss of many sheep and many months of
repairs (Tom Tough being their lifeline to
the world after the departure of Monarch).

There followed a period of four months
(in what is not normally regarded as the
northern tourist season) of base camp
establishment a little below Timber Creek,
and repairs to the Tom Tough. In this time,
we read of Baron Ferdinand von Mueller’s
involvement in herding sheep (of which

only 40 out of 200 reached base camp)

and in the search for suitable timber for

ship repairs (mainly the River Paperbark,
“Melaleuca leucadendron), as well as his

articipation with the Gregorys in a 3

Route of the North Australia Expedition (extracted from R.Eriksen, ‘Emest Giles:Explorer and

Mueller and the North Australia Expedition

week reconnaissance up valley as far as
the Baines River.

Serious exploration began (3 Jan) with a
three month foray to the head of the
Victoria River and down the full length of
Sturt Creek to its termination in Lake
Gregory, taking advantage of the ‘wet’
season. Their route also passed Mt
Mueller (one of four in Australia, others
being in Arnhem Land, Baw Baw Plateau
and SW Tasmania*). The return in late
March (following the Wickham River
through Victoria River Downs) was
already quite dodgy in respect of water.
Only then (21 June) did the main act
begin, travelling via Mataranka (surgeon/
naturalist J R Elsey leaving his famous
name behind) to Albert River on the Gulf
of Carpentaria (now Burketown). The
planned rendezvous with Tom Tough (and
a relief party under Baines) failed to even-
tuate for reasons not recorded. Leaving the
Albert River a few days later (3 Sept), the
party of 5 continued via Croydon and
Charters Towers (Burdekin Valley) to a
first encounter with civilization on the
Dawson River, near Rockhampton, in late
November 1856. Even from here, it was
still another three weeks ride to Brisbane

169

Mueller Issue

(16 Dec). During the course of this jour-
ney, they succeeded in finding two of
Ludwig Leichhardt’s camps, one on the
Elsey River and another on reaching the
Burdekin.

If Mueller was not already a horseman,
he must have learnt something after 16
months nearly every day in the saddle,
However, Gregory records on 29 July,
from somewhere in the region of
Borroloola:

‘About three miles before we reached
camp, Dr Mueller had fallen some dis-
tance behind the party; but as this was
a frequent occurrence in collecting
botanical specimens, it was not
observed until we reached the creek,
when he was out of sight; after unsad-
dling the pack-horses I was preparing
to send in search of him, when he
came up to the camp, the cause of his
delay being that his horse had knocked
up (sic), This was unfortunate, as the
load of one of the pack-horses had to
be distributed among the others in
order to remount the doctor, who
requires stronger horses than any other
person in the party, having knocked up
four since January, while not one of
the other riding horses had failed,
though carrying heavier weights.’

Only a week earlier, two of the pack-
horses had cracked up and died, probably
from eating a poisonous plant, giving
Elsey and Mueller the joy of conducting a
post-mortem! Mueller, however, was per-
haps fortunate not to be present with
Gregory on a reconnaissance foray to the
east of the Victoria when he records (on
12 April):

‘The water (Victoria River) was run-
ning strong twenty yards, and one to
two feet deep; in examining the ford
my horse trod on the back of a large
alligator, which seemed to be equally
astonished as the horse at this unex-
pected meeting.’

Nevertheless, he was a member of the
party that overlanded the horses from Pt
Pearce to base, over the Macadam Range
and Fitzmaurice River, where crocodiles
mauled three horses in the night.

We also find recorded, on only the sec-
ond day out from base on the Sturt Creek

170

tour (4 Jan):
‘Started at 7 am and followed up the
creek; but Dr Mueller having wan-
dered away into the rocky hills and
lost himself, I halted at the first con-
venient spot, having despatched sev-
eral of the party to search for him, but

it was not until 4 pm that the Doctor

reached camp." '

It is perhaps notable that Mueller man-
aged to be present on nearly every journey
undertaken, and even undertook his own
private excursion (with Wilson the geolo-
gist, and Elsey) by longboat up the Baines
River. This continued into a lifelong rap-
port with the Gregorys. In contrast,
Wilson, who seemed to have personality
clashes, was ultimately sacked from the
expedition and Flood (the collecter/pre-
server) also fell from grace, while Baines
(the artist) mostly ended up as base com-
mander and missed the main action.
Surprisingly, the Gregory journal makes
negligible reference to Mueller’s activities
(such as his doubtless excitment at discoy-
eries such as Eucalyptus ptychocarpa and
E, phoenicea), despite being meticulous in
its descriptions of route and countryside,
nor is there an appendix as with so many
other explorations. Mueller’s own report,
involving observations on 3000 species
from 800 genera, is to be found in the
Journal of the Linnean Society of 1858
and in Vol. 2 of his Fragmenta (for those
who read Latin). It should hardly surprise
that Mueller retained an intense interest in
exploration activities thereafter and that
his name is linked to very many of them.
Amazingly, Mueller was obliged to take
18 months unpaid leave from the
Victorian Government for the purpose of
this journey.

This article draws on the journals of the
Gregory Expedition.

*There might have been yet another, as
bestowed in 1873 by Ernest Giles on what he
beheld as one of the most remarkable moun-
tains on earth, in honour of the patron and a
major financier of his expedition (and featured
on the cover of his journal). Mueller, however,
promptly renamed it Mt. Olga, which it remains
to this day.

Alan K Parkin

2 Hazel Drive, Templestowe, Victoria 3107.

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Eden Revisited -
Following the Scent of Mueller’s 1860 Journey through the
Twofold Bay-Genoa District.

D.E. Albrecht!

Abstract

Ferdinand von Mueller travelled through the Twofold Ba i

t rough th y - Genoa River area (south-eastern Ne
South Wales/ far east Gippsland, Victoria) in September 1860, collecting many plant species, Main
by “Pe y any ine 5 wee is aCe in detail, and plants collected at the localities visited
t eller are discussed. A list is provided of species based on types collected by Muell i
journey. (The Victorian Naturalist 113, (4) 1996, 171-180) és 2 fii

Introduction

In the mid 1980’s I was among a small
group of botanists who were involved in
extensive field work in south-eastern New
South Wales and far east Gippsland. My
surprise at finding a number of unde-
scribed taxa and disjunct populations
raised a number of questions about the
history of collecting in the region. Had
collectors simply missed some of the par-
ticularly interesting areas or was the area
poorly collected generally? Not surpris-
ingly, Baron Ferdinand von Mueller is a
prominent figure in the history of botani-
cal exploration in the region. Allan
Cunningham had collected specimens
from the coastal vegetation of Twofold
Bay (centred on present day Eden) as
early as 1818, but Mueller was the first
botanist to penetrate the hinterland of this
region.

On his journey through the region,
which lasted for most of September 1860,
Mueller travelled some 300 miles and col-
lected in excess of 250 taxa. Regrettably
there is no surviving journal of his expedi-
tion and it is only in the official govern-
ment reports that Mueller mentions the
course of his journey. The most informa-
tive account is found in his Annual Report
of the Government Botanist ... for 1860-
61:

‘During the month of September I was
engaged in elucidating the vegetation
along the south eastern frontiers of the
colony, crossing the country from
Twofold Bay to the Genoa, along which
river I travelled to the coast, deviating to

'Northern Territory Herbarium, Parks and Wildlife
Commission of the Northern Territory, P.O. Box
1046, Alice Springs, N.T. 0871. Australia.

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

Cape Howe and to the adjoining freshwa-
ter lake, and ascended again the Genoa
River to near its sources, examining the
adjacent elevated country and the
Nungatta mountains on my way ...’
(Mueller 1861).

The late Norman Wakefield published
three articles (Wakefield 1952; 1958;
1969) that mention, albeit briefly, aspects
of Mueller’s September 1860 expedition.
This contribution, in the form of a potted
chronology, aims to supplement
Wakefield’s work, particularly with regard
to Mueller’s route, collecting localities
and the significance of the expedition.

The locality data accompanying
Mueller’s specimens, though often very
imprecise, are a major source of informa-
tion for establishing his route (Fig. 1).
Many of the specimens collected on the
expedition are housed at the National
Herbarium of Victoria (MEL); a number
are also cited in Flora Australiensis
(Bentham 1863-1878). The task of finding
all specimens from the expedition in MEL
and extracting the locality data accompa-
nying each specimen is physically an
enormous task. I began this task, search-
ing at least those species known to have a
restricted distribution in the region, but
finally became frustrated by the enormity
of the undertaking. When all of the collec-
tions at MEL are finally databased, which
at current projections may take well over a
decade, we may be in a position to con-
clude with more certainty the finer details
of his route. Fig. 2 shows the localities
discussed in the following text. An anno-
tated list of type collections made on the
expedition is presented in Appendix 1.

171

Mueller Issue

ee
Romie =

PHYTOLOGIC MUSEUM OF MELBOURNE,

ld lid L078

40.

ime

| i yy, Ge :
| Bove ye es.

COCE

SEE?

BARON FEKD, VON MUELLER, PH. & M.D.

Fig. 1, Two kinds of labels commonly accompanying Mueller’s September 1860 specimens. Labels

are in Mueller’s hand.

A preliminary list of taxa collected during
the journey is housed in the library of the
National Herbarium of Victoria.
Nomenclature follows Ross (1993) and
Harden (1990-1993)

The expedition

Mueller departed from Melbourne on
the 6th September 1860 on the steam ship
Rangatira, arriving at Snug Cove,
Twofold Bay the following day. His
arrival was noted in the local tabloid
newspaper The Twofold Bay and Maneroo
Telegraph on the 11th of September: ‘An
old friend, andthe friend, of science and
mankind Dr. Mueller, the curator of the

172

Botanical Gardens in Melbourne, arrived
here on Saturday (7th) last in the
Rangatira, and on Sunday (8th) morning
left this town on an expedition overland to
the west of Cape Howe. Unlike the crowd
of people who are rushing in the face of
commerce, his persuit is amidst the
regions of science. His object is to procure
the best botanical knowledge of this unex-
plored district.’

When Mueller arrived at Eden the town
was prospering. Gold was discovered at
Kiandra in November, 1859 and hundreds
of prospectors came by sea, disembarking
at Eden and making their way westwards

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

River

0
K woe Ws
White Rock ‘\_--3 .
AMt © => hLPericoe 7”
Wog WogMt _“>@--2"

Nungatta Station
*

‘

as
Genoa Peak *--~~,,

Fig. 2. Collecting localities and probabl

of the Twofold Bay-Genoa district. Dashed line: tracks as sho
able but route not accurate. Arrows: pro!

presence of track prob
uncertain

to the goldfields. In a letter to William
Hooker (Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew)
from the Genoa River on the 17th
September 1860 (Hooker 1860 unpub.),
Mueller indicated that from Eden he pro-
ceeded southward towards the Genoa
River.

A considerable proportion of Mueller’s
collections from the expedition were gath-
ered in the vicinity of Twofold Bay. On
the coastal dunes, sedimentary coastal
cliffs and adjoining headlands of Twofold

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

e route of Mueller’s Septem!

Yowaka River

% jimall Hill
pe

%
Last
%

8 :

Eden 17
—.Towamba ot *

W Ne ¢f Twofold Bay
2 +3 Boyd Town

ty Ves. Al ©

Narabarba
ome Ludwigs Swamp

sy
Lake Wau Wauka

Lake Baracoa f Cape Howe

a eK

? ey
— “{Mallacoota Gabo Island

Inlet

ber 1860 botanical exploration
wn on maps c. 1860. Dotted line:
bable route of Meuller. ?: route

Bay he collected characteristic species
such as Alyxia buxifolia, Senecio lautus,
Zieria cytisoides, Apium prostratum,
Westringea fruiticosa and Banksia integri-
folia (Fig. 3). In the near-coastal ridge for-
est he collected common species such as
Eucalyptus gummifera, E. sieberi, E.
longifolia, Patersonia sericea, Leptomeria
acida, Pultenaea daphnoides, Platylobium
formosum and Pimelea linifolia.

The views from the higher ridges near
Eden would have enabled Mueller to

173

Mueller Issue

survey the country to the south. From this
vantage point Mt Imlay is a prominent
landmark, and one we would expect to
have been alluring to Mueller. Although
several of his collections are labelled Mt
Imlay, they are all relatively widespread
species that were probably gathered on the
lower slopes of the mountain or further
east. The species with restricted distribu-
tions known to occur in the vicinity of the
summit, namely Eucalyptus imlayensis,
Hibbertia saligna, Eriostemon virgatus,
Prostanthera walteri, Tetratheca suba-
phylla and Persoonia brevifolia were not
collected by Mueller and it is unlikely that
he explored the summit of this interesting
mountain.

The two Mt Imlay collections of
Elaeocarpus holopetalus, a species
restricted to sheltered gully heads towards
the summit of the mountain (Fig. 4), are
somewhat confusing, as both Mueller’s
and Lockhart Morton’s name appear on
the labels, which are undated. As Mueller
described this species in 1861 and did not
cite a specimen from Mt Imlay, one
assumes that the material was not collect-
ed by Mueller as he did not revisit the area
subsequent to his 1860 trip. Morton col-
lected Oxylobium ellipticum, Hibbertia
saligna and Actinotus helianthi from the
summit of Mt Jmlay and it seems logical

to suppose that he also collected
Elaeocarpus holopetalus sometime after
1861. Morton collected several other
interesting taxa near Twofold Bay, namely
Pomaderris brogoensis and Boronia
anemonifolia var. variablis. Unfortunately
no dates are given on his labels. Mueller
sent Morton’s Twofold Bay-Mt Imlay col-
lections to Bentham and they appear in his
Flora Australiensis, volume 4 onwards.
Morton’s collections of taxa treated in
volume 3 (published in Jan. 1867) are not
cited, and assuming they would have been
cited by Bentham had he examined them,
it is probable that Morton visited the area
sometime between the publication of vol-
umes 3 and 4. A Mr Morton is listed in the
Argus dated April 23rd 1867 as arriving in
Melbourne on the steamship City of
Melbourne from Sydney (via Twofold
Bay). This date corresponds with the phe-
nological state of his specimens, however,
in the absence of a christian name the evi-
dence is not conclusive (Fig. 5).

As Mueller progressed southwards he
collected in several vegetation communi-
ties between the Towamba and Womboyn
Rivers. In the dry sclerophyll woodlands
dominated by Eucalyptus sieberi he col-
lected a number of heathy understorey
plants including Poranthera corymbosa,
Phebalium diosmeum, Xanthosia pilosa,

errr

Fig. 3. Senecio lautus in full bloom on the rocky coastline surrounding Twofold Bay.

174

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Fig. 4 View into a patch of cool temperate rain-
forest below the summit of Mt Imlay. It is here
that Morton collected specimens of
Elaeocarpus holopetalus.

Platysace lanceolata, Hakea dactyloides,
Coopernookia barbata and Bossiaea het-
erophylla (Fig. 6). It is difficult to pin-
point from his collections exactly where
they were gathered as most species are
widely distributed. Similarly it is difficult
to pinpoint where he collected species
such as Gymnoschoenus sphaerocephalus,
Schoenus lepidosperma, Restio complana-
tus, Baeckea linifolia and Pultenaea palu-
dosa, as they are all characteristic species
of the lowland swamps in this vicinity
(Fig. 7). The label accompanying
Pultenaea paludosa reads ‘moory heaths
near the Womboyn’, which suggests that
he may have collected near Ludwigs
Swamp.

Mueller made several collections from
‘granite rocks on the Womboyn’.
Although there is no granite on the
Womboyn River, the river passes through
an area of rhyolite to the east of
Narabarba, and it is probable that Mueller
included rhyolite in his concept of granite.

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

Fig. 5. Portrait of W. Lockhart Morton. He col-
lected specimens from Twofold Bay and Mt
Imlay c. 1867. :

Fig. 6. Understorey vegetation in forests domi-
nated by Eucalyptus sieberi between the
Towamba and Womboyn Rivers

His collections of Dodonaea triquetra,
Crowea exalata, Schoenus imberbis,
Chrysocephalum baxteri and Pseudanthus
divaricatissimus are likely to have come
from the shrubland that occurs on the
more exposed rhyolite. It is perhaps sur-
prising that Mueller did not collect the
endemic Acacia constablei that grows in
the vicinity.

Mueller’s route from the Womboyn
River to the Genoa River is uncertain and,
to date, specimens have not provided any
clarification. There are conflicting stories

175

Mueller Issue

Fig. 7. Lowland swamp vegetation south of the
Towamba River.

regarding the existence of a track between
the Towamba and Genoa Rivers. Similarly
it is debatable whether a track existed
between Timbillica and Mallacoota
(which at that time was situated on the
north side of the Genoa River). According
to C. Allen (pers. comm.) and Alan
Piesley (pers. comm.), both descendants of
early settlers in the region, the open forest
vegetation was lightly stocked with trees
and had an open understorey, which made
travel by horse feasible in the absence of a
track, Unfortunately this section of his
journey remains a mystery. At Mallacoota
Inlet he collected a suite of specimens
including Correa alba, Phylloglossum
drummondii and Spyridium cinereum.
Travelling north from the mouth of the
Genoa River Mueller collected
Chorizandra australis from the fresh
water lake near Cape Howe. Whether he
was referring to Lake Barracoota or Lake
Wau Wauka is at present uncertain. The
vegetation through this area is dense and it
is likely that he travelled principally on
the consolidated beach sands. Wakefield
(1969) mentioned two of Mueller’s speci-
mens from ‘abreast Gabo’, namely
Conospermum taxifolium and
Helichrysum elatum. Apparently there was
sporadic access to the island by means of
a sand bar. The only collection made by
Mueller from Gabo Island cited in Flora
Australiensis is referred to Pterostylis
mutica. This collection is not housed at
MEL and it would be worth searching fur-
ther herbaria to ascertain whether the
Pterostylis specimen is correctly attributed
to Mueller. The specimen may have been
collected by Maplestone, who made a
number of collections on Gabo Island in

176

1861. Although Mueller claims to have
visited Cape Howe I have yet to encounter
a specimen supporting this claim.

Returning to the northern side of
Mallacoota Inlet, Mueller may have
crossed to the southern side of the Genoa
River by boat, which means of transport
was apparently much used in that location
at the time. Alternatively he may have
forded the Genoa River upstream of
Mallacoota Inlet at Goodwin Sands and
the Narrows. Once on the southern side of
the Genoa River, he probably followed a
horse track towards Genoa. Wakefield
(1969) mentioned that the Genoa-
Mallacoota track passed over the shoulder
of Genoa Peak. However, I been unable to
determine the exact alignment of this
track. Mueller probably deviated from the
track to the summit of Genoa Peak (Fig. 8)
where he collected Dendrobium striola-
tum, Lycopodium varium, Pomaderris
lanigera, Dodonaea triquetra,
Prostanthera hirtula var. angustifolia and
several other species.

From Genoa Peak he returned to Genoa
and ascended the Genoa River valley
along the Old Wangarabell track. Mueller
collected a considerable number of speci-
mens labelled ‘Genoa River’. Wakefield
(1969) suggested that many of the collec-
tions thus labelled were collected about
the mouth of the granitic gorge about two
miles upstream from the present township
of Genoa, at the point where the Old
Wangarabell track swung westerly away
from the river. Many of these species were
probably also collected near Wangarabell,
where the track crossed the Genoa River
(Fig. 9). It was either at Wangarabell or
further along the Wangarabell track at
Nungatta Station that Mueller commenced
a letter to William Hooker. This was dated
the 17th September, only nine days after
setting out from Eden.

From Wangarabell Mueller travelled
north to Nungatta Station homestead (Fig.
10), at that time occupied by Alexander
Weatherhead. The original description of
Telopea oreades indicated that Mueller
was accompanied in the field by
Weatherhead when the type collection was
gathered. In his letter to Hooker, Mueller
referred the Nungatta populations to the

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Fig. 8. The view from Genoa Peak over the
Howe Range, lower Genoa River, Mallacoota
Inlet and Gabo Island.

Tasmanian Telopea truncata, but at that
time he had not seen good flowering mate-
rial. Mueller collected in the riparian envi-
ronments of Nungatta and Nina creeks (on
the east side of Nungatta Mountain) where
he discovered Elaeocarpus holopetalus in
cool temperate rainforest. Other species
collected in this environment were
Scutellaria mollis and Adiantum hispidu-
lum. The locality data on his specimens of
Persoonia brevifolia reads “common on

Fig. 9. Riparian vegetation on the Genoa River
near Wangarabell.

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

the summit of Nungatta Mountains and
White Rock Mountain’ and ‘granite
declivities of the upper Genoa River’. A
brief search for this species around the
sandstone summit of Nungatta Mountain
was unsuccessful. Doug Binns (pers
comm.) has also looked on the Nungatta
Range without success. It is probable that
Mueller’s specimens were all gathered on
the granite outcrops on White Rock
Mountain.

From Nungatta Mueller travelled north
to White Rock Mountain. His specimen
locality data are vague for this tract of
country and it is presently uncertain
whether his route was via Bondi home-
stead. Localities mentioned on specimen
labels typically read ‘sources of the Genoa
River’ or ‘upper Genoa River’. A collec-
tion of Eucalyptus stellulata has such a
label. This species presently occurs in the
vicinity of the old Nungatta-Bondi track,
just south of the former Bondi homestead.
I have not observed E£. stellulata growing
further east and, although it is tempting to
argue that this evidence indicates that he
would have visited Bondi homestead, the
species may have occurred further east on
Nungatta Station prior to extensive clearing.

On the summit of White Rock Mountain
Mueller collected Epacris robusta (Fig.
11), Oxylobium arborescens, Persoonia
confertifolia, P. silvatica, P. brevifolia,
Eucalyptus sieberi, Kunzea ericoides and
Tetratheca subaphylla. The Nalbaugh
plateau between White Rock Mountain
and Wog Wog Mountain to the east sup-
ports a number of species with regionally
restricted distributions. Several of these
species, such as Acacia costiniana, occur

Fig. 10. The original ‘Nungatta’ (or
‘Nangutta’) homestead. Mueller is likely to

have spent at least one night here.

177

Mueller Issue

quite abundantly on the plateau, and one
would assume that Mueller would have
collected these species had he crossed
Nalbaugh Plateau.

The route by which he returned to Eden
is Uncertain. It seems logical that he would
have proceeded from White Rock
Mountain eastward to Pericoe via the
track that follows the upper part of the
Wog Wog River. From Pericoe the track
would be followed to Towamba, Boyd
Town and finally Eden. This was a well
established route. Unfortunately the only
specimens that perhaps support at least
part of this route are those he gathered on
the Towamba River viz Dodonaea trunca-
tiales, Melaleuca armillaris, Pomaderris
intermedia and Westringea eremicola.
However, these species may have been
collected when he first crossed the
Towamba River on the way southwards
towards the Genoa River.

Prior to sailing for Melbourne, Mueller
collected to the north of Eden. In the
moist, sheltered gullies around Bimmil
Hill he collected warm temperate rainfor-
est species including Acmena smithii,
Pittosporum undulatum, Ficus coronata,
Marsdenia rostrata, Rapanea howitiana,
Cissus hypoglauca, Pteris umbrosa and a
host of other species. It was probably here
that he discovered Prostanthera incisa
var. pubescens and Polyscias murrayi.
The latter species was named in honour of
Patrick Murray, the chief magistrate of the
district, who apparently assisted Mueller
with some of the logistic aspects of the
expedition. This aid was doubtlessly in the
form of ‘local’ knowledge regarding
tracks, accommodation and assistance in

Te ke NE aia: ak Pt :
Fig. 11. Epacris robusta growing in shrubland
on large granite expanses near the summit of
White Rock Mountain.

178

procuring horses for his expedition.

Mueller also collected specimens from
the Yowaka River, probably near, or
downstream of, Nethercote Falls, The
geology here is rhyolite and a characteris-
tic scrub or shrubland develops on areas of
exposed rock (Fig. 12). Phebalium ral-
stonii, Lasiopetalum ferrugineum,
Muehlenbeckia rhyticaryia, Crowea
exalata, Pseudanthus divaricatissimus,
Rulingia dasyphylla, Hibbertia monogyna
and Dodonaea truncatiales are all charac-
teristic species of this vegetation type that
he collected. Rhyolite shrubland occurs in
scattered patches further west than
Nethercote Falls but, in considering the
species Mueller collected and did not col-
lect, it is likely that he travelled no further
west than approximately Nethercote Falls.

Mueller returned to Eden and boarded
the steam ship Wonga Wonga on the 30th
of September. His arrival at Hobsons Bay,
Melbourne was reported in the Argus on
the 2nd October 1860.

Conclusion
Mueller’s expedition was the first signifi-
cant botanical collecting trip within the
south-eastern New South Wales-far east
Gippsland region. He collected a
respectable number of specimens (currently
estimated to be about 20% of the known
flora of the region) and discovered about
20 species previously unknown to science.
His collections provided useful material
for his work on the flora of Victoria and
were used extensively by Bentham during
his preparation of Flora Australiensis.
Considering the short duration of the
expedition and the considerable distance
traversed, Mueller managed to sample
from a surprisingly large percentage of the
habitats present in the region. He collected
in a number of botanical ‘hot spots’ and
came remarkably close to several others
(e.g. Mt Imlay summit and Nalbaugh
plateau). No doubt it was with consider-
able reluctance that he had to pass by
some of these interesting-looking sites.
The gratification of future generations of
botanists was probably the last thing on
this mind when deciding whether to
botanise a particular area.

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Fig. 12. Shrubland on rhyolite outcropping near
the Yowaka River. Acacia subtilinervis (domi-
nant) and Phebalium ralstonii were discovered
by Mueller in this area.

Acknowledgments ;
The following are sincerely thanked for their
help, particularly with historical information
and distribution data - Ed Mitchell, Tom May,
Margaret Parris, David Keith, Doug Binns,
Carole Helman, Phil Gilmour, C. Allen and
Alan Piesley, along with staff of the State
Library of Victoria, and the library, Royal
Botanic Gardens, Melbourne.

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

References

Bentham, G. (1863-1878). Flora Australiensis; a
description of the plants of the Australian territory.
7 vols. (Reeve, London.)

Harden, G.J. (ed.) (1990-1993). Flora of New South
Wales. 4 vols. (Royal Botanic Gardens, Sydney.)
Mueller, F. (1860). [Letter to William Hooker 17th
September]. (unpubl. manuscript, Royal Botanic
Gardens, Melbourne, Australian Joint Copying

Project).

Mueller, F, (1861). Annual Report of the Government
Botanist and Director of the Botanic and Zoologic
Garden. (Government Printer, Melbourne).

Ross, J.H. (ed.) (1993). A Census of the vascular
plants of Victoria. 4th edn. (Royal Botanic Gardens,
Melbourne.)

Wakefield, N.A. (1952). Premature and erroneous
records of plants for Victoria. The Victorian
Naturalist 69, 80-89.

Wakefield, N.A. (1958), F.N.C.V. excursion to Genoa
district - Dec. 1957. The Victorian Naturalist 75, 3-
18.

Wakefield, N.A. (1969). Botanical Exploration of East
Gippsland. Proceedings of the Royal Society of
Victoria, new series, 82, 61-67.

Fig. 13. Pseudanthus divaricatissimus. Mueller
collected this along the Womboyn and Yowaka

Rivers.

179

Mueller Issue

Appendix 1

List of TYPES collected by Mueller in the Twofold Bay-Genoa District, September 1860.

1.Taxa described by Mueller

Acacia subtilinervis F.Muell., Pl. Victoria 2:
32 (1863). Type: On granite declivities
around Mt Imlay. A. subtilinervis has never
been relocated on Mt Imlay despite quite
extensive searching. The geology of Mt
Imlay is of sedimentary origin and likely
A. subtilinervis habitat appears to be absent
on Mt Imlay. The nearest known popula-
tions to Mt Imlay occur in the vicinity of
the Yowaka River near Nethercote, an area
collected over by Mueller. The geology of
this area has been mapped as rhyolite,
which appears to have included within
Mueller’s concept of granite. Unless A.
subtilinervis is discovered closer to Mt
Imlay, the Yowaka River should be con-
sidered the type locality of this species.

Dodonaea truncatiales F.Muell., Fragm. 2:
143 (1861). Syntypes: In wooded valleys
and gravelly banks of the Towamba,
Yowaka and Genoa Rivers.

Elaeocarpus holopetalus F.Muell., Fragm.
2: 143 (1861). Syntypes: In wooded val-
leys of the Nungatta Mountains and head-
waters of Nina Creek.

Eriostemon ralstonii F.Muell., Fragm, 2:
101 (1861). Type: On granite rocks against

the Yowaka River, towards Twofold Bay.
Current name: Phebalium ralstonii
(F.Muell.) Benth,, F/, Austral. 1: 339
(1863)

Tonidium vernonii F.Muell., Pl. Victoria 1:
223 (1862), Syntypes: On barren plains
and ridges near the Genoa River; also near
Twofold Bay. Current name: Hybanthus
vernonii (F.Muell.) F.Muell., Fragm. 10:
81 (1871)

Panax murrayi F.Muell., Fragm. 2: 106
(1861). Type: In valleys of wooded ranges
towards Twofold Bay. Current name:
Polyscias murrayi (F.Muell.) Harms, Nat.
Pflanzenfam, 3(8): 47 (1898).

Telopea oreades F.Muell., Fragm. 2: 170
(1861). Type: Towards the headwaters of
Nungatta Creek in the alpine tract behind
the Nungatta Mountains. Weatherhead and
Mueller.

Tetratheca ericifolia var. aphylla F.Muell.,
Pl. Victoria 1: 183 (1862). Syntypes:
Granite rocks at the White Rock Hill,
3000’; sources of the Genoa River. Current
name: T. subaphylla Benth., Fl. Austral. 1:
132 (1863)

2.Taxa described by botanists other than Mueller

Correa lawrenciana var. genoensis Paul
G.Wilson, Trans, Roy. Soc. South
Australia 85; 50 (1961). Type: Flooded
banks of the lower Genoa River.

Epacris robusta Benth., Fl. Austral. 4: 237
(1868). Type: Granite rocks at the summit
of White Peak Mountain, at the head of
the Genoa River.

Grevillea victoriae var. leptoneura Benth.,
Fl. Austral. 5: 468 (1870). Type: Sources
of the Genoa River.

Isopogon anemonifolius var. tenuifolius
F.Muell. ex Benth., Fi. Austral. 5: 347
(1870). Type: Twofold Bay, Current
name: /. prostratus McGill., Telopea 1; 32
(1975)

Persoonia myrtilloides var. brevifolia
Benth., Flora Austral. 5: 401 (1870).
Syntypes: Upper Genoa River; Nungatta
Mountains. Current name: P. brevifolia
(Benth.) L.A.S.Johnson & P.H.Weston,
Telopea 4: 275 (1991).

180

Pomaderris cinerea Benth., Fl. Austral, 1:
420 (1863). Type: Mt Imlay, Twofold
Bay.

Prostanthera hirtula var. angustifolia
Benth., Fl. Austral. 5: 97 (1870). Type:
Genoa Peak.

Prostanthera incisa var. pubescens F.Muell.
ex Benth., Fl. Austral. 5: 96 (1870). Type:
Forest rivulets near Twofold Bay.

Pseudanthus divaricatissimus var. orbicu-
lare Benth., Fl. Austral. 6: 60 (1873).
Syntype: Granite rocks on the Yowaka
River.

Pultenaea altissima F.Muell. ex Benth., Fi.
Austral. 2: 123 (1864). Syntypes: Genoa
River; Twofold Bay and Genoa River.

Pultenaea benthamii var. elatior F.Muell.
ex Benth., Fl. Austral. 2: 114 (1864).
Syntype: Yowaka River.

Pultenaea viscosa R.Br. ex Benth., Fl.
Austral. 2: 127 (1864). Syntype:
Womboyn Range.

The Victorian Naturalist
{

Mueller Issue

Mueller's Oceanic Island Plants
Ian D. Endersby'

Abstract

Ferdinand von Mueller never visited any of the oceanic islands to which Australi i

was associated with the naming of plants from some of those localities. His ee acs Rae aye
the description of endemic species from Lord Howe Island collected by staff from Sydney and
Melbourne Botanic Gardens. He also revised genera that included species named by Endlicher from
Norfolk Island and named species in Australia and New Guinea which were subsequently intro-
duced to Norfolk and Christmas Islands and the Coral Seas Island Territory. Taentophyllum muel-
leri (Orchidaceae) from Norfolk Island was named after him. (The Victorian Naturalist 113, (4) 1996,

181-184).

Introduction

Although Baron von Mueller never visit-
ed Lord Howe or Norfolk Islands he
played a substantial role in the naming of
their plants, particularly those of Lord
Howe Island.

These two islands are both of volcanic
origin occurring on submarine ridges in
the western Pacific Ocean. Each has a
flora with a high degree of endemism and
a subsequent history of degradation and
the introduction of alien plants. Table 1,
according to Green (1994), shows the cur-
rent status of the floras.

Table 1. Current status of the floras

Norfolk Lord Howe

Island Island
Endemic species 47 105
Indigenous species 124 136
Naturalised species 274 218

459

TOTAL species

Australia also lays claim to a number of
other Oceanic Islands; Christmas, Cocos
(Keeling); Ashmore Reef and Cartier;
Coral Sea Islands Territory; Macquarie;
Heard and McDonald Islands. Mueller’s
name is also associated with plants from
two of these.

Early Collectors
Norfolk Island was discovered by

Captain James Cook on his second Pacific
voyage and was settled as a penal colony
in 1788 - a Satellite to the First Fleet
settlement at Sydney Cove. Cook’s com-
plement included Johann Forster and his
son Georg as naturalists, and they collect-

156 Looker Road, Montmorency , Victoria 3094

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

ed some plants (Forster 1777; 586-587).
However, their visit was short and the first
major collection was made by Ferdinand
Bauer during his visit in 1804-1805 (Norst
1989). He lodged his collection and
sketches with the Natural History Museum
in Vienna and provided specimens to the
German botanist Stephan Endlicher
enabling him to prepare the first
comprehensive account of the flora of the
island in his Prodromus Florae
Norfolkicae.(Endlicher 1883). Allan
Cunningham collected extensively on
Norfolk Island in 1830 during which
expedition he was marooned on nearby
Philip Island by escaping convicts (Daley
1926), and J.H. Maiden, while director of
the Sydney Botanic Gardens visited the
island in 1902 and published the next flora
(Maiden 1904).

Lord Howe Island was sighted during the
voyage of H.M.S Supply to establish the
settlement on Norfolk Island (Fidlon &
Ryan 1980: 41), and Lieutenant Ball land-
ed and took possession of it on the return
journey. Settlement occurred gradually
from 1833 as whalers and others estab-
lished homes and gardens and sought to
grow sufficient food for their own needs
and to barter with passing ships. Botanical
collections were made by naturalists
MacGillivray and Milne, from the H.M.S.
Herald, in 1854 and submitted to George
Bentham for naming. However, it was
Charles Moore, Director of the Sydney
Botanic Gardens, who visited the island in
1869 and provided the first of the
endemics to be classified by Mueller (Hill
1870), some of which they jointly named
(see Table 1). In 1873 and 1874, J.P.

181

Mueller Issue

Fullagar, the plant collector from the
Melbourne Botanic Gardens added to the
earlier collections of Moore and it is pre-
dominantly these two collections which
Mueller (1875) used to list the Island’s
flora.

Mueller described and named plants that
occur on Norfolk, Lord Howe, and
Christmas Islands and the Coral Sea
Islands Territory. His major contribution
was to the flora of Lord Howe Island.

Lord Howe Island

Mueller was involved in the naming of
37 of the 105 endemic species currently
listed for Lord Howe Island, predominant-
ly from the collections made by Moore
and Fullagar (Table 1). He and Moore also
named the Island Pine Panax cissoden-
dron (which was later transferred to
Polyscias) from a Lord Howe specimen, a
species which is native to New Caledonia
and Vanuatu as well. His other contribu-
tion was to transfer the Norfolk Island
Hoya Hybanthera biglandulosa from the
genus Tylophora which Endlicher had
used when he named the type from
Norfolk Island; it, also, is known from
New Caledonia, Vanuatu and Fiji.

Of the 38 species which were initially
named by Mueller, 19 were described in
conjunction with Charles Moore, in fact
Moore was the senior author, publishing
in Mueller’s Fragmenta. The nomencla-
ture of 21 of their species has survived to
the present day.

Norfolk Island

Endlicher had named Hybanthera
biglandulosa (Asclepiadaceae), Devil's
Guts Busbeckia nobilis (Capparaceae) and
Sia’s Backbone Morus pendulinus
(Moraceae) from specimens that Bauer
collected on Norfolk Island. In subsequent
revisions Mueller moved them to the gen-
era Tylophora, Capparis and Streblus
respectively.
Mueller does have one Norfolk Island
species to his credit: Crispy Bird’s Nest
Fern Asplenium robinsonii collected by a
Sydney Botanic Gardens’ resident agent,
Isaac Robinson, and published in the

182

Journal of Botany in 1884 (22: 289). It
was relegated to Asplenium australasicum
f. robinsonii by P.S. Green in 1988.

Mueller also named the Broad-leaved
Ironbark Eucalyptus fibrosa which he
collected himself from a locality on the
Brisbane River, Queensland. This has
since been introduced to Norfolk Island
and is reproducing itself in a limited area.
As a recently planted species perhaps this
is a somewhat spurious Mueller associa-
tion but is included for completeness as it
appears in the island’s flora (Green 1994).

While all of the species discussed so far
have been named or revised by Mueller,
one of his contemporaries, John Lindley,
named the Minute Orchid Taeniophyllum
muelleri in his honour (ex Benth. Fl.
Austral. 6: 291, 1873). This is a rare and
local epiphyte found growing on the
undersides of the branches of the Norfolk
Island Pine. It is poignant that it was also
in 1873 that Mueller was dismissed from
the directorship of the Melbourne Botanic
Gardens.

Christmas Island

D’Albertis’ Creeper Mucuna albertisii
(Fabaceae) was named by Mueller from a
specimen collected on the Fly River, New
Guinea, by L.M. d’Albertis in 1876.
While listed for the Christmas Island flora
it has been found at only one place and is

assumed to have been introduced through —

cultivation. Another species found only in
areas of cultivation is Lindernia crustacea
(Scrophulariaceae) which was originally
named by Linnaeus from a specimen col-
lected in China. Mueller’s contribution
was to transfer it from the genus Capraria
to Lindernia.

Coral Sea Islands Territory

Comb Finger Grass Digitaria ctenantha
was collected by Mueller from the Sturt
and Hooker Creeks in the Northern
Territory and originally described by him

in the genus Panicum. This species is ©

widespread across tropical Australia and is
listed for two cays in the Coral Sea
Islands.

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller has his name associated with the
botanical nomenclature of 47 species that
are found on the oceanic islands to which
Australia lays claim. One of these was
named after him, with 42 of them he was
sole or joint author, and four were revisions
to the prior work of others. Except for one
subspecies of fern on Norfolk Island the
species from islands other than Lord Howe
were introductions or references to revised
genera. It was Lord Howe Island which
was the foremost locality and this occurred
because Mueller’s collectors and contem-
poraries were involved.

In the centenary anniversary of his death
it is of interest to collate Mueller’s contri-
bution to our offshore islands; a contribu-
tion perhaps overshadowed by his own
extensive terrestrial expeditions.

Acknowledgments
This note benefited greatly from the comments
of an anonymous referee.

Bibliography
Almost all of the information in this review came from
Volumes 49 and 50 of the Flora of Australia, the two

volumes covering the Oceanic Islands [Volume 49
(1994) and Volume 50 (1993), Australian Government
Publishing Service, Canberra], Table 2 was extracted
from the work of P.S. Green (1994) in volume 49.

References

Daley, C, (1926). Notes from a diary of Allan
Cunningham. The Victorian Naturalist 43, 163-169.

Endlicher, S. (1883). Prodromus Florae Norfolkicae
sive Catalogus Stirpium que. In ‘Insula Norfolk
Annis 1804 et 1805 a Ferdinando Bauer collectae et
depictae’. Ed. F, Beck. (Vienna).

Fidlon, P.G. and R.J, Ryan (eds.) (1980). ‘The Journal
of Philip Gidley King 1787-

1790’. (Australian Documents Library: Sydney).

Forster, J.G.A. (1777). ‘A Voyage round the World, in
His Brittanic Majesty's Sloop RESOLUTION,
Commanded by Captain James Cook, during the
Years 1772, 3, 4 & 5’. 2 vols. (London: B. White, J.
Robson, P. Elmsly and G. Robinson).

Green, P.S, (1994), Norfolk and Lord Howe Islands.
Flora of Australia 49, 681 + xxiii pp. (Australian
Government Publishing Service: Canberra).

Hill, E.S. (1870), Lord Howe Island - Official Visit by
the Water Police Magistrate and the Director of the
Botanic Gardens, Sydney; together with a description
of the Island. Votes and Proceedings of the
Legislative Assembly of New South Wales 1870: 635-
654.

Maiden, J.H. (1904). The flora of Norfolk Island Part 1.
Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South
Wales 28: 692-785.

Mueller, F.J.H. (1875). ‘Fragmenta Phytographiae
Australie’ 9,76-79.(Government Printer, Melbourne).

Norst, M.J. (1989). ‘Ferdinand Bauer: the Australian
Natural History Drawings’.(Lothian, Port
Melbourne).

Table 2. Mueller’s Lord Howe Island Plants. e = endemic; | = original genus; 2 = collector.

SPECIES

MONOCOTYLEDONAE

ARECACEAE

e Howea belmoreana (C. Moore & F, Muell.) Becc.
e Howea forsteriana (C. Moore & F, Muell.) Becc.

e Hedyscape canterburyana (C. Moore & F. Muell.) H. Wendl. & Drude Kentia

» e Lepidorrachis mooreana (F. Muell.) O.F. Cook

* CYPERACEAE
€ Uncinia debilior F. Muell.

| IRIDACEAE
\ e Dietes robinsoniana (C. Moore & F. Muell.) Klatt

ORCHIDACEAE
» e Dendrobium moorei F. Muell.

PANDANACEAE
e Pandanus forsteri C. Moore & F. Muell.

|
/BLECHNACEAE
¢ Blechnum fullagarii (F. Muell.) C. Chr.

CYATHEACEAE
¢ Cyathea macarthurii (F, Muell.) Baker

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

C. Moore & W. Carron

C. Moore

C. Moore & R.D.Fitzgerald
C. Moore

Kentia
Kentia

Kentia

J.P. Fullagar & Lind

C. Moore

C. Moore & J.P, Fullagar

Lomaria Lind & J.P. Fullagar

Hemitelia W. Carron & C. Moore

Mueller Issue

Table 2. cont.

SPECIES

DICOTYLEDONAE

APOCYNACEAE

¢ Alyxia lindii F. Muell.

e Alyxia squamulosa C, Moore & F, Muell.

ARALIACEAE
Polyscias cissodendron (C. Moore & F, Muell.) Harms

ASCLEPIADACEAE

e Marsdenia tubulosa F. Muell,

Tylophora biglandulosa (Endl.) F, Muell.
ASTERACEAE

e Brachyscome segmentosa C. Moore & F. Muell.
¢ Olearia ballii (F. Muell.) Hems!.

e Olearia mooneyi (F. Muell.) Hemsl.

EPACRIDACEAE
e Dracophyllum fiztgeraldii C. Moore & F. Muell.

FABACEAE

e Carmichaelia exsul F. Muell.
GESNERIACEAE

e Negria rhabdothamnoides F. Muell.

GROSSULARIACEAE
e Corokia carpodetoides

LOGANIACEAE
e Geniostoma petiolosum C. Moore & F. Muell.

MYRSINACEAE
e Rapanea platystigma (F. Muell,) Mez

MYRTACEAE
e Cleistocalyx fullagarii (F. Muell,) Merr, & L.M. Perry
e Metrosideros nervulosa C. Moore & F, Muell.

OLEACEAE
e Chionanthus quadristamineus F. Muell.

PITTOSPORACEAE
e Pittosporum erioloma C. Moore & F. Muell.

RUBIACEAE

e Atractocarpus stipularis (F. Muell.) Puttock
e Coprosma lanceolaris F, Muell.

e Coprosma putida C, Moore & F. Muell.

e Psychotria carronis C, Moore & F, Muell.

RUTACEAE
e Melicope contermina C. Moore & F. Muell.

e Melicope polybotrya (C. Moore & F. Muell.) T.G, Hartley

SANTALACEAE
e Exocarpus homalocladus C. Moore & F. Muell.

THYMELEACEAE
e Pimelea congesta C. Moore & F, Muell.

ULMACEAE

e Celtis conferta subsp. amblyphylla (F. Muell.) P.S. Green

URTICACEAE
Boehmeria calophleba C. Moore & F, Muell.

WINTERACEAE
e Zygogynum howeanum (F, Muell.) Vink

184

Panax

Colmeiroa

Myrsine

Acicalyptus

Euodia

Lind & J.P. Fullagar
C. Moore

2C. Moore

J.P. Fullagar
Bauer (Norfolk Island)

C. Moore; J.P. Fullagar & Lind
J.P. Fullagar & Lind
Lind & J.P, Fullagar

R.D. Fitzgerald

C. Moore

C .. Moore

J.P. Fullagar & Lind

C.Moore; J.P. Fullagar & Lind
J.P. Fullagar & Lind

C.Moore; Lind &J.P. Fullagar

not designated

C. Moore

Lind & J.P. Fullagar
C. Moore & W. Carron
C, Moore & W, Carron

C. Moore
C. Moore & W. Carron

C. Moore

C, Moore

C. amblyphylla C. Moore & J.P.Fullagar

C. Moore

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Baron Ferdinand von Mueller and his ‘Lady’ Correspondents

Susan K, Martin*

Abstract

There were many women in nineteenth-century Australia involved in botany. Almost all were ama-
teurs, though some took their study very seriously. Their correspondence with Baron F. von
Mueller reveals some interesting issues, particularly around the amateur status of women in this and
other sciences, (The Victorian Naturalist 113, (4) 1996, 185-187)

By the nineteenth century, botany was
regarded as an acceptable ‘accomplish-
ment’ for young ladies of the middle and
upper classes, along with embroidery,
music and flower painting. Many young
women took a professional and systematic
approach to their study, often in resistance
to the trivialisation that might be implied
by ‘accomplishment’ and sometimes using
those very notions of genteel leisure as a
smokescreen for a serious and passionate
pursuit. Nevertheless the increasing pro-
fessionalisation of botany across the nine-
teenth century tended to relegate more
serious ‘lady’ botanists to amateur status
whether they liked it or not, until the very
end of the century.

In Australia, as in some other colonies
of the period, the division between profes-
sional and amateur, serious student and
accomplished lady was more blurred
because of the special access to species
and whole botanical zones formerly inac-
cessible to Europeans yet now available to
some early women settlers (and some of
their male counterparts). Georgiana
Molloy’s work in collecting and sorting
seeds and specimens for James Mangles in
Britain is an example of this (Hasluck
1990; Lines 1994).

For many women botanists later in the
century Baron Ferdinand von Mueller was
an invaluable resource. The women bene-
fited from Mueller’s expertise and his
willingness to correspond, and to take
their endeavours seriously. Mueller bene-
fited by adding a number of women to his
considerable network of amateur and pro-
fessional collectors. With the notable
exception of Amalie Dietrich, most of the
women botanists with whom Mueller cor-
responded were from the middle and
upper classes - women with the leisure
“School of English, La Trobe University, Bundoora,
Victoria 3083.

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

and opportunity to study botany, collect
plants, to buy books and par‘icipate in
amateur societies. It is notable that in
Australia some of these societies, such as
the Royal Society of South Australia
(Kraehenbuehl 1981) and the Royal
Society of Tasmania (Rae-Ellis 1979),
were open to women in the nineteenth
century, while their most prestigious
British counterparts, the Royal Society
and the Linnean Society, did not allow
women members until well into the twen-
tieth century (Allen 1980),

Louisa Atkinson, in New South Wales,
and Louisa Meredith, in Tasmania, both
corresponded and associated with Mueller
as Director of the Melbourne Botanic
Garden and compiler of the First Census
and Second Census of Australian plants.
Mueller’s Census and some of his corre-
spondence, illustrate the vexed position
most of these women botanists still occu-
pied - partaking of some of the Imperial
power of European science, but still dis-
empowered by the status of women in the
nineteenth century.

Mueller was fastidious in his replies to
correspondents (Robertson 1986), but
some of his replies to women seem a little
double-edged in the way that they reposi-
tion his collectors as amateurs, whose true
profession lies elsewhere. To Louisa
Hussey he wrote in 1896: “My pride is to
demonstrate for all classes of Australian
plants the geographical distribution; but if
you incurred special toil for that it would
disturb your happiness and might with-
draw you from filial and domestic duties’
(Kraehenbuehl 1981: letter from Mueller
25 June 1896, published in Garden and
Field November 1896 Melbourne). This
solicitude does not fully accord with
Mueller’s other correspondence with
Hussey: ‘Kindly send some seeds of any
of the Droseras later in the season’.

185

Mueller Issue

Veronica Distans: “Has this any scent?
What is its greatest height? Are the flow-
ers always white?’ (Kraehenbuehl 1981).
In the former letter Mueller positions
Hussey’s professional interest and practice
of botany as an aside to primary domestic-
ity, and by publishing the letter in Garden
and Field spreads the message clearly to
other young lady botanists. At the same
time his avuncular tone might be taken to
imply that collecting is part of their filial
duty, which again removes it from the
public sphere.

Hussey may have had the last word in
this exchange, however, it is impossible to
know, as Hussey’s letters to Mueller,
along with correspondence from a number
of other women botanists, including
Amalie Dietrich, were blithely recycled
for the war effort by the Director of the
National Herbarium of Victoria in the
1940s (Kraehenbuehl 1981; Moyal 1981).

Less personally Mueller’s ‘Census’
demonstrates the way in which the contri-
butions of ‘amateurs’, male and female, of
whatever class, could be obscured by the
very structures of their discipline. Though
to all intents and purposes some of these
‘lady botanists’ engaged in the practices
and demonstrated the skills of professional
botanists, they did not have access to one
of the quintessential features of the
Colonial botanist in the nineteenth century
- the power of naming’. While Mueller’s
‘Types’ - the dried herbaria samples which
serve as guarantee for the identification of
a species - generally note the name of the
collector and the site of collection as well
as the genus and species attribution, his
‘Census’, which for the nineteenth century
was literally the last word on the naming
of Australian plants, lists, not the
discoverer or preparer of the species or
specimen, but the publisher of the official
name and description, and the place of
publication’.

That at least some of the women
botanists were frustrated by this lack of
access to the language of their science, is
evident in their writing. Concerns about
naming surface in Louisa Atkinson’s first
newspaper column, ‘A Voice from the
Country’, which appeared in the Sydney
Morning Herald in the 1860s. She

186

discusses the importance of common |
names, as opposed to Latin ones, in estab-
lishing familiarity with plants, and propos-
es to list or even invent vernacular names
for the flora she describes in the column
(Atkinson 1978).

Amalie Dietrich, who was a paid collec-
tor of botanical and other natural history
specimens in northern Australia from
1863-73, was a notable exception to the
majority of Australian lady botanists. She
was acknowledged as a professional and
colleague in a number of ways not extend-
ed to them by such men as Mueller
(Moyal 1981). As a woman of working-
class background, and a foreigner whose
English was poor, she travelled freely
around Australia, collecting for her
European employer. Sara Mills argues that
women travellers in the nineteenth century
could behave eccentrically, even ‘being
treated as honorary men’ (Mills 1994),
Dietrich is also in a different class from
the other lady botanists described here
because she was able to obtain a paid
position as a collector - a fact described as
‘bizarre’ by Moyal. But like the other
women here, and because she was
employed as a collector, had a working
class background and a limited education,
she did not publish or name her collected
specimens.

A number of women botanists, includ-
ing Dietrich, though deprived of the power
of naming, had species, and in Louisa
Atkinson’s case a genus (Arkinsonia ligus-
trina named by Mueller 1858) named after
them. While this was, of course, both hon-
our and acknowledgment, there is some
level of objectification and memorialising
potentially involved in it.

Louisa Meredith expressed gratitude at
having a species named after her: “My
esteemed friend of many years, the emi-
nent Australian botanist, Baron F. Von
Mueller, has done me the honour of giving
to the small ‘immortelle’ found on Mount
Olympus, in Tasmania, my name as its
specific title’ (Meredith 1891). This grati-
tude reads differently in the light of her
comments on her status in 1878: ‘I believe
that no other woman resident in the
colonies has done so much in art, science
and literature for her adopted country, and

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

I think forty years of active work deserve
their reward’(Rae-Ellis 1979). She seems
to have relished the £100 pension she
eventually extorted from the Tasmanian
government more than the ‘small’ remem-
brance offered by von Mueller (Rae-Ellis
1979). She was probably right in this, as
along with a great number of plants named
after women in the nineteenth-century, the
so called ‘imortelle’ has disappeared from
the current ‘Census of Australian Vascular
Plants’ *.

']T have so far been unable to locate an
Australian plant named by a woman in the
nineteenth century. I would be grateful to hear
from anyone who has information to the con-
trary. For information on nineteenth-century
plant taxonomy see Lumley and Spencer
(1990).

? This remains current practise.

> The most likely reason for this would be
reclassification, but it is not listed even as a
previous species name.

References
Allen, D.E. (1980). The Women Members of the

Botanical Society of London, 1836-1856, The
British Journal for the History of Science 13, 240-
254.

Atkinson, L. (1978 [1860s]). A Winter’s Garland. Jn
“A Voice From the Country’. (Mulini: Canberra).

Carr, D.J. (1981), The Contribution of Women to
Australian Botany. Jn ‘People and Plants in
Australia’. Eds D, J. and G. M. Carr. (Academic
Press: Sydney),

Hasluck, A. (1990). ‘Portrait with Background’.
(Fremantle Arts Centre Press: Perth).

Kraehenbuehl, D, N. (1981). Jessie Louisa Hussey. Jn
‘People and Plants in Australia’. Eds DJ. and G.M
Carr. (Academic Press: Sydney). ‘

Lines, W.J. (1994). ‘An All Consuming Passion:
Origins, Modernity and the Australian Life of
Georgiana Molloy’. (Allen & Unwin: Sydney).

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

Lumley, P. and R. Spencer. (1990). ‘Plant Names: A
Guide to Botanical Nomenclature. Ornamental
Plants 2’. (Royal Botanic Gardens of Victoria: South
Yarra.)

Meredith, L.A. (1852). ‘My Home in Tasmania, dur-
ing a Residence of Nine Years’. (John Murray:
London).

Meredith, L. A, (1860). ‘Some of My Bush Friends in
Tasmania: Native Flowers, Berries and Insects:
Drawn from Life, Illustrated in Verse and Briefly
Described by Louisa Anne Meredith’. (Day & Son:
London).

Meredith, L.A. (1891). ‘[Last Series of |Bush Friends
in Tasmania, Native Flowers, Fruit and Insects,
Drawn from nature with Prose Descriptions and
Illustrations in Verse by Louisa A Meredith’.
(Macmillan and Co: London and New York).

Mills, S. (1994). Knowledge, Gender, and Empire. Jn
“Writing Women and Space: Colonial and
Postcolonial Geographies’. Eds A. Blunt and G.
Rose (Guilford: New. York).

Moyal, A. (1981). Collectors and Illustrators. Women
botanists of the nineteenth century. Jn ‘People and
Plants in Australia’. Eds D. J. and G. M. Carr.
(Academic Press: Sydney).

Mueller, Baron F. Von. (1889). ‘Second Systematic
Census of Australian Plants, with chronologic, liter-
ary and geographic annotations: Part | Vasculares/
By BFVM. Melbourne’. (Melbourne: Printed for the
Victorian Government by McCarron, Bird & Co).

Rae-Ellis, V. (1979). ‘Louisa Anne Meredith: a
Tigress in Exile’. (St Davis Park Publishing:
Hobart).

Robertson, E. L. (1986). ‘Botany’. /n ‘Ideas and
Endeavours: The Natural Sciences in South
Australia’. Eds C.R. Twidale, M. J. Tyler and M.
Davies. (Royal Society of South Australia: Adelaide.

Sumner, R. (1993). ‘A Woman in the Wilderness. The
Story of Amalie Dietrich in Australia’. (University
of New South Wales Press: Kensington, New South
Wales).

Swann, M. (1929). Mrs Meredith and Miss Atkinson,
Writers and Naturalists. Royal Australian Historical
Society Journal and Proceedings XV, 1-29.

Windschuttle, E. (1988). ‘Taste and Science: The
Macleay Women’. (Historic Houses Trust: Glebe,
New South Wales).

187

Mueller Issue

Sarah Theresa Brooks -
Plant collector for Ferdinand Mueller

Barbara Archer' and Sara Maroske?*

The Brooks family were pioneers of the
Israelite Bay and Mt Ragged region in
Western Australia. They were like other
European pioneers in that they were will-
ing and able to endure great hardships in
pursuit of their dreams for a better life, but
the Brooks were set apart from their peers
by the fact that at least one member of the
family, Sarah, made time, amid what must
have been arduous and demanding daily
chores, to collect plants. She was in fact a
member of the great network of collectors
established around Australia in the last
century by the Government Botanist of
Victoria, Baron Ferdinand von Mueller.
This detail is barely if ever mentioned in
accounts of Brooks's life, and yet surely it
makes her story as a pioneer all the more
remarkable,

Sarah Theresa Brooks was born in the
ship Harpley, while it was tied up at
Plymouth Harbour, England. The date was
19 September 1850, just days before the
Harpley's departure for Australia on 24
September, On board were Sarah’s par-
ents, Henry Ferby Brooks and Emily
Henrietta née Donovan, and her brother
John Paul who was nearly three, They
were also accompanied by Mrs Brooks,
sister, Mary Jane Donovan (Willis. n.d.a
unpubl., South Australian Register 1851).

The Harpley arrived at Melbourne (via
Adelaide) on 31 January 1851 (Syme
1987), The family settled at Geelong and
Mr Brooks travelled to Melbourne to pre-
sent letters of introduction in order to gain
employment, Unfortunately he contracted
malignant typhoid on this journey and
died at the age of 24 in April 1851 leaving
his young widow with two children to
support. Mrs Brooks’s sister married in
1854 shrinking the family circle still fur-
ther (Oldham 1974),

Undaunted, Mrs Brooks opened a day
school in Pakington Street, Geelong, and
Sarah herself commenced classes there on
‘POB 1030, Esperance, WA 645

‘Department of History & Posey of Science, The
University of Melbourne, Parkville, Vie, 3052,

188

10 August 1855, Later the school was
conducted at 39 Skene Street, Geelong in
partnership with a Mrs Edgar. It may have
been in the classrooms of this school that
Sarah's interest in botany was first awak-
ened. Her brother, John, attended Geelong
Grammar School when it first occupied its
central Geelong site in 1863. The earlier
site was in Skene Street opposite the
Brooks's family home, John may have
attended a private school prior to that date.
Sarah also attended drawing lessons with
Edmund Sasse the art master of Geelong
Grammar School for a number of years
(Oldham 1974),

After an unsuccessful dairy-farm ven-
ture near Lilydale east of Melbourne the
family moved to Western Australia in
1873. They were influenced in their deci-
sion by the generous land offers made in
this year by the Western Australian
Government which was eager to attract
new settlers. John Brooks had also heard
from a sailor that the land about Esperance
was ‘beautiful, grassy country’ and unoc-
cupied (Canberra 1927).

From an initial base at Albany, John
Brooks applied for a free lease of 100,000
acres at Esperance Bay in March 1874
(Erickson 1978, Rintoul 1964). He and his
family then determined to set out for their
new home by foot, It was such a remark-
able proposition, even for the tough days
of early European settlement, that it
received notice in the Albany Herald:

‘A somewhat extraordinary expedi-

tion left here lately with the intention

of making the overland journey to

Esperance Bay. The party consisted

of a man named Brooks with his

mother and sister. ... The women and
the man intend walking the whole
distance - about 300 miles - with an
occasional lift in the cart. ... It is
hoped they may succeed in accom-

plishing their undertaking, but I

should not be surprised to learn of a

police party sent to search for and

succour them,’ (Albany Herald

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

.
Balbinia
Pine Hill Station
. oe

pussell

e
Mt Ragged

Lynbourne Station
e

Fig. 1. Map of part of the south coast of Western Australia.

1874).

The Brooks family successfully
reached Esperance Bay in early May and
walked along the coast to Thomas River.
The two women rested near Campbell
Taylor’s home station, Lynbourne, while
John took a small party and walked on to
Eucla. He found the Muir family already
established on pastoral leases and
returned, disappointed in his venture, to
Lynbourne Station. Later in 1874 the
Brooks moved on to Point Malcolm where
they settled and built ‘Marlburnup’ a few
miles west of Point Malcolm (Fig.1)
(Oldham 1975, Esperance Municipal
Museum n.d. unpubl).

In 1877 John became the first lineman
at the Israelite Bay Telegraph Station and
the family relinquished its pastoral leases.
They moved into a stone house named
Waratah which was built at Israelite Bay
and lived there until 1883 when John and
Mrs Brooks moved to Balbinia Station
which they had taken up a year earlier
(Dimer 1989, Esperance Municipal
Museum n.d. unpubl., Stevens 1933).
Balbinia was a watering place 97 km (60
miles) inland at which Alexander Forrest

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

had bivouacked during his exploring expe-
dition of the Hampton Plains in 1871 (Fig.
2) (Forrest 1872, Brooks 1888, Esperance
Municipal Museum n.d, unpubl.).

Sarah remained at the Israelite Bay
settlement, a popular figure with the
Telegraph Station officials and their
wives. She painted landscapes, played the
piano and sang. She is also reputed to
have been fluent in seven languages which
may have been deduced from the fact that
she painted a prayer scroll in oils giving

Fig. 2. Balbinia station ruins, remains of fire-
place.

189

Mueller Issue

the Lord’s Prayer in this number of lan-
guages (Brooks n.d. unpubl.). Mr Karl
Dimer (formerly of Nanambinia Station)
recalled that her journal was written in
either Greek or Hebrew. Unfortunately
this journal was mislaid in the early 1950s
(Dimer, K. 1996 pers. comm. 29
February). With youth and such talents on
her side she must have been attractive to
the young men of the district and she evi-
dently received several proposals of mar-
riage, but declined to accept any of them
(Esperance Municipal Museum n.d.
unpubl.).

In 1883 Sarah happened upon an offer
in the West Australian which she was
happy to accept. It was an appeal by
Baron Ferdinand von Mueller to settlers in
outlying districts to assist in his botanical
researches. The West Australian felt it
could do no better than to print the
Baron’s own words, which begged the
newspaper to:

‘urge inland and northern and far
eastern settlers to induce the natives
to bring, in baskets, specimens of all
sorts of plants, to be dried at the sta-
tions and forwarded to me by post.
The small expenditure required for
barter articles I would gladly refund.
The minutest annuals should not be
overlooked on such occasions.
Perhaps I may not live many years to
carry on my investigations and |
should like so much to give the fin-
ishing stroke for the elaboration of
the rich and varied flora of Western
Australia before I pass away.’ (West
Australian 1883).

Mueller was the Government Botanist
of Victoria but his true field of endeavour
was the whole of Australia. He made
extensive collecting trips himself, includ-
ing two visits to Western Australia in
1867, 1877-8, but relied heavily on col-
lectors to be his eyes and hands in remote
areas (Willis 1949). Mueller placed a
number of advertisements in Western
Australian newspapers (Hamersley 1981)
and through these and other means was
successful in building up a substantial net-
work of Western Australian collectors.
Mueller’s women collectors in Western
Australia included; Mary Wilkins née
Adams (1873-1931), Ellen Best (1842-

190

1918), Diana Bunbury (1811-98), Mary
Walter née Cronin (1871-1971), Nellie
Davey, Louisa Clarke née Franklyn, Mrs
Gale, Clara Ryan née Graham, Margaret
Forrest née Hamersley (1844-1929), Mary
McHard née Jones (1826-1912), Ann
Knight née McKail (1840-1904), Amelia
(Mildred) Bunbury née Pries (1863-1956),
Geraldine Sewell (1861-1900), Julia
Sewell (1847-1914), Miss Toll, Alice
Heal née Eaton (1870-1932), Martha Heal
née Eaton (1868-1941), and Mary Rogers.
née Warburton b. 1851 (Pearson and
Davis n.d. unpubi.).

Sarah’s interest must have been
pricked by Mueller’s words in the Wesr
Australian, and his plea was given
urgency by the sense he had of imminent
demise (as it happened he lived for anoth-
er 13 years). As Sarah read on, however,
she could have been forgiven for thinking
that the West Australian had her in mind
when it added:

‘There are already many ladies living
in these far distant parts of the
colony, bereft, to a great extent, of
those intellectual resources to which
many of them have been accustomed.
And upon these ladies, in particular,
we would impress the interest they
might derive from actively aiding our
great Australian botanist in his valu-
able scientific researches. Much has
been done in this way by the ladies in
the settled districts and a still larger
field for similar work is opened for
those who have followed husbands
and brothers into the remote and less
known portions of this vast territory.’
(West Australian 1883).

Mueller’s advertisement was timed to
coincide with the start of Spring flowering
and Sarah was able to begin collecting
immediately. On 5 November she had
enough specimens prepared to send a
batch to Mueller. Her letter was a brief
almost terse document, and oddly stilted
by being written in the third person.
Perhaps she lacked confidence in how her
efforts would be received.

‘Miss Brooks presents her compli-
ments to Baron Sir Ferdinand von
Mueller and begs to state that in con-
sequence of a paragraph in the West
Australian newspaper she has dried

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

and now forwards some plants she
hoped may prove useful.’ (Brooks
1883 unpubl.).

Mueller replied in person on 9
November and judging by the number of
collections at the National Herbarium of
Victoria (see Appendix) this letter was the Ap
first in what must have been a long and | : 7
regular correspondence with Sarah. |y AAA ECA z:
Unfortunately her initial letter is the only 7H MRE Ti © MD,
part of it known to survive.

From 1883 Sarah collected plants :
(incuding algae), and fungi in the region _ Fig. 4. Scaevola brooksiana specimen label
of Israelite Bay and Russell Range (Mt (Royal Botanic Gardens, Melbourne).
Ragged) of far SE Western Australia (see 1884). The second was Hakea brooksiana
Appendix). The old labels on her speci- F.Muell. which Sarah found at or towards
mens at the National Herbarium of Mt Ragged (Fig. 5, Mueller 1886).
Victoria mis-spell her name as ‘Brooke’, Mueller sent Sarah’s algae collections to
an understandable error given the appear- the famous Swedish phycologist J.G.
ance of the ‘s’ she formed at the end of Agardh and he named Rhodophyllis
words (Fig. 3). brooksiana J.Agardh in her honour

The value which Mueller placed on (Agardh 1890). The mis-spelling of
Sarah’s work is in part revealed by the fact Sarah’s name on herbarium labels was
that he named two plants for her. The first _ repeated in the original spelling of the spe-
was Scaevola brooksiana F.Muell. which cific epithets erected in her honour (i.e.
Sarah discovered in the vicinity of ‘brookeana’).
Israelite Bay. Mueller called it a ‘pretty Like-minded companions must have
and remarkable plant’ (Fig. 4.,Mueller been few for Sarah in the remote Israelite

: Bay region, but in her brother and mother
| 4 .
TAT We
'# ;

she had at least two people to share her
scientific curiosity. Both Mrs Brooks and
John seem to have collected plants for
Mueller although not in the same quanti-
ties as Sarah. Some of the specimen labels
at the National Herbarium of Victoria des-

Habeas Browkeuna P.¥. M3 A Mamas tfonifer, B Flos, © Perianthll xeg
bony uvarinn, 5 Styli putes superior. A” Ratuas fructifor. as

Fi 3. Sarah Brooks’s letter Baton Fig. 5. Hakea brooksiana (Diels and Pitzel
"8: srdinand von Mueller, 5 November 1883. 1904).

191
Vol. 113 (4) 1996

Mueller Issue

ignate ‘Mrs Brooks’ as the collector rather
than ‘Miss Brooks’ (e.g, Lander 1988),

John also made a number of exploratory
sorties in the SW of Western Australia,
ostensibly in search of grazing country,
but also clearly with his eyes open to sei
entific phenomenona, In 1875 he travelled
inland from Israelite Bay to Mt Brooks
und eventually beyond Lake Roe, This
journey was accomplished with the aid
only of a poeket compass and the com-
pany of a local farmer, Stephen Ponton,
and an aboriginal guide, Black Ben,
According to Sarah, Brnest Giles came
upon their tracks when crossing the WA
desert in 1875 (Brooks 1888, Hamersley
1981), A comparison of the routes of John
and Giles indicates that their paths must
have crossed somewhere between Victoria
Spring and Lake Roe (Fig, 1.) (Giles
1889, Brooks 1888, Hamersley 1981).

In 1886 Sarah joined John on an expedi-
tion, It was a remarkable feat for her
because since arriving in the district she
‘had not journeyed further than Mt
Ragged’. The brother and sister team set
out from Israelite Bay towards a peak in
the Hampton Range known as ‘The
Cliffs’, noting the abundance of poison
plants all the way up to the top of the hill,
From here they headed to Mt Ragged
which the local Aborigines never climbed
for fear of being struck down by invisible
spirits, After being told of the Brooks’
successful ascent the Aborigines
explained it by saying that the spirits
would only attack black people, From Mt
Ragged Sarah and John travelled to Pine
Hill, then eastward through Eucalypt
woodland to Balbinia, and north through
increasingly arid country, finally ending in
flat salt-bush country broken up with only
occasional specimens of Pittesporum
phylliraeoides (Brooks 1888, Hamersley
1981),

Sarah's observations on this and John's
earlier 1875 trip were published along
with a detailed map in Pefermann’s
Geographixsche Mitteilungen, a German
geographical magazine (Brooks 1888,
Hamersley 1981), August Petermann was
a long-time correspondent of Mueller and
no doubt Mueller facilitated the publica-
tion and possibly even translated Sarah's
account into German,

192

John was also clearly a competent
author, and in 1894 he wrote a very long
and detailed letter to Mueller on the natur-
al features of Israelite Bay ‘I have,’ he
declared, ‘through Miss Brooke [sic],
‘your assurance that this spot has special
interest to the botanist, and | have my own
conviction that it must have an equal inter-
est to the geologist, the meteorologist, and
perhaps the geographer.’ Mueller submit-
ted the letter to the sixth meeting of the
Australasian Association for the
Advancement of Science held in Brisbane
in 1895, and it was published as part of
the proceedings for Section on Geography
(of which Mueller was the President)
(Brooks 1895),

Like many of Mueller’s collectors, Sarah
seems to have ceased collecting plants
after his death in 1896, It is a testimony to
Mueller’s energy and enthusiasm that no
one was able to take his place in managing
the network of his collectors,

In 1898 fire destroyed Waratah and
Sarah moved to Balbinia Station, She
shared a limestone cottage with her moth-
er while John lived nearby in a granite
home, Mrs Brooks died in 1911 after
being confined to a sofa for many years
and was buried in the orchard (Dimer
1989),

Sarah continued to express her interest
in plants into old age (Fig. 6), In a record
of her impressions on a trip to Perth in
1927 she observed:

Fig, 6. Sarah Theresa Brooks, n.d, (Esperance
Municipal Museum).

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

“Coming back to civilisation after 50
years I was frequently asked what
struck me most and I always replied,
the beauty of the flowers. We first
met them along the railway as we
app-roached Perth the lovely blue
lace flowers and the gorgeous orange
plumes of the Christmas trees.’
(Brooks 1928).

She suffered a stroke in 1928 and was
hospitalized in Norseman, On a visit to the
district, Premier Collier called in to see
her and was met with the remark, ‘Well, I
suppose you have come to see the last of
the dinothoriums’, She died on 23
September 1928 aged 78 and was buried
in the Norseman Cemetery. In 1974 a
Memorial Tablet was placed on her grave
by the Royal Western Australian
Historical Society and the Norseman
Historical and Geological Museum.

John lived to 20 May 1930 when he
died of exposure after being found in the
bush a couple of kilometres from his
home. He was buried in the orchard at
Balbinia, In 1975 the Lions Club of
Esperance restored and marked his resting
place.

The Dimer family won the tender for
John’s stock, equipment and possessions,
Many of these items have been carefully
preserved. Some of the furniture is used to
this day, Balbinia was abandoned and
reverted to the crown. In 1975 a bronze
memorial was placed on the homestead by
the Royal Western Australian Historical
Society and the Esperance Municipal
Museum (Dimer 1989).

Mrs Crocker of Balladonia Station has
written ‘Miss Brooks came to the district
as a charming and accomplished young
woman and truly wasted her sweetness on
the desert air’ (Crocker 1954), This state-
ment could only be taken as true if Sarah's
collecting was completely disregarded.
Sarah was a woman of wide interests and
talents which made her receptive to
Mueller’s request for assistance in his
botanical research. She in fact became one
of his most prolific plant collectors in
Western Australia, and her collections
made a lasting contribution to knowledge
of the Western Australian flora. Mueller
was not in a position to pay for more than
the small expenses of a collector like
Sarah but he could and did honour her in

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

plant names, and possibly, as he did with
other collectors, also made her gifts of
garden seeds (Hamersley 1981), Remnants
of the orchard at Balbinia include a fig
and mulberry tree, and the Brooks's rose
“‘Konigen yon Denmark’ still flourishes.

Acknowledgments

We thank Jim Ross for encouraging us to
undertake this project and for providing infor-
mation on the Brooks specimens at the National
Herbarium of Victoria. Dorothy André (Curator
Esperance Municipal Museum) assisted us with
Brooks records and photographs, The
Esperance Shire Council granted us permission
to use the photographs and notes. Karl Dimer
generously shared his knowledge about the
Brooks family and gave permission to photo-
graph material in his possession. Susan Mildred
(Mortlock Library, Adelaide), and Fred
Atherton provided information on the Harpley,
Thanks also to William Archer for the use of
photographs and visits to Balbinia Station, and
to Tom May for his encouragement and com-
ments on various drafts.

References

Agardh, J. G, (1890). ‘Till Algernes Systematik.’
(Berlingska Bokrtyckeri: Lund),

Albany Herald (1874). 11 April,

Brooks [given as Brooke], J.P. (1895). Natural fea-
tures of Israelite Bay. Report of the sixth meeting of
the Australasian Association for the Advancement af
Science. 561-69.

Brooks, S. (1883). (unpubl. letter to F, Mueller, 5
November 1883, RB MSS M1, Library, Royal
Botanic Gardens, Melbourne),

Brooks [given as Brooke}, S, (1888). Ein Ausflug in
die westaustralische Wuste, Petermann’s
Geographische Mitteilungen, 26-28.

Brooks, S. (1928). Sunday Times, 29 April.

Brooks, S. (n.d.). Prayer scroll. (unpubl. scroll in pos-
session Karl Dimer, Kalgoolie, WA).

Canberra (1927) Sunday Times. 27 November. f

Crocker, A. B, (1954). The early history of Bulladonia,
The Western Australian Historical Society Journal
and Proceedings. 4 (6), 11.

Diels, L. And Pritzel, E, (1904). Fragmenta phy-
togruphiae Australiae occidentalis. Botanische
jahrbiicher fiir Systematik Pflanzengesshichte und
Pflanzengeographie 35, 55-062, i

Dimer, K. (1989). ‘Elsewhere Fine.’ (K. Dimer:
Kalgoolie). oe

Erickson, R. (1978), ‘The Dempsters.’ (University of
Western Australia Press: Perth),

Esperance Municipal Museum (n.d), Notes, (unpubl.
notes, Esperance Municipal Museum, Esperance),
Forrest, A, (1872). ‘Journal of Proceedings of an
Exploring Expedition to the Eastward and
Southward of the Hampton Plains (...).

(Government Printer: Perth). j

Forrest, J. (1875), ‘Journal of Proceedings of the
Western Australian Exploring Expedition (...).
(Government Printer: Perth). : ,

Giles, B. (1889). ‘Australia Twice Traversed. 2 vols.
(Sampson Low, Marston, Searle & Rivington:

ndon). i's

Hanaaey; M. J. (1981). Botany and society in the
Swan River Colony. /n ‘People and Plants in
Australia’. Eds D.J, Carr and $.G.M. Carr.

193

(Academic Press; Sydney), 259-79.

Lander, N. S. (1987). Collections of Lawrencia Hook,
destroyed by fire, April 1984. Kingia. 1 (1), 1-8.

Mueller, F. (1884). Brief record of a new Scaevola.
The Victorian Naturalist 1, 122-4.

Mueller, F. (1886). New Australian plants.
Australasian Journal of Pharmacy 1, 429-31,

Mueller, F. and Tate, R. ([1896]). Botany.
(Phanerogams and Vascular Cryptogams.
Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia,
16, 333-86.

Oldham, R. (1974). The Brooks family of Israelite Bay
and Balbinia Station. Part 1. Early Days Journals
and Proceedings the Royal Western Australian
Historical Society. 7 (5).

Oldham, R. (1975). The Brooks family of Israelite Bay
and Balbinia Station. Part 2. Early Days Journals
and Proceedings The Royal Western Australian
Historical Society. 7 (6).

Orchard, A.E, (1993). Gonocarpus pycnastachus
(F.Muell.)Orch, (Haloragaceae) rediscovered.
Muelleria, 8, 27-29.

Pearson and Davis (n.d.) ‘Pearson/Davis Biographical
Collection’ (unpubl., Library, Royal Botanic
Gardens, Melbourne).

Rintoul, J. (1964), ‘Esperance Yesterday and Today.’
(Esperance Shire Council: Esperance).

South Australian Register (1851). 16 January.

Stevens, G. P. (1933) The East West Telegraph 1875-
7. The Western Australian Historical Society
Tournals and Proceedings. 2 (8), 30-31.

,me, M.A. (1987). ‘Shipping Arrivals and
Departures. Victorian Ports.” 2: 1846-1855.
(Roebuck Society Publication No, 39: Melbourne).

West Australian (1883), 24 July.

Willis, J.H. (n.d,a). Brooks, Miss Sarah Theresa C.
(unpubl. biographical notes, Pearson/Davis
Biographical Collection, Library, Royal Botanic
Gardens, Melbourne).

Willis, J.H. (n.d.b). Leg. Miss Brooks. (unpubl. notes,
Library, Royal Botanic Gardens, Melbourne).

Willis, M. (1949). ‘By their Fruits. A life of Ferdinand

von Mueller (...).’” (Angus and Robertson: Sydney).

Appendix: A select list of Sarah Brooks’ plant and fungi collections at the National
Herbarium of Victoria (MEL), based on (Willis n.d.b unpubl.) with additions.

Plants

Acacia osswaldii F.Muell,

Acacia ‘salicina’ Lindl. Israelite Bay.

Athrixia multiceps (A.Gray) Benth. Israelite
Bay.

Atriplex cinerea Poir, Israelite Bay.

Atriplex stipitata Benth. Half-way between Mt
Ragged and Victoria Spring, 1886 (MEL
608065).

Atriplex vesicaria Benth. Half-way between Mt
Ragged and Victoria Spring, 1886 (MEL
608112, MEL 608113).

Atriplex vesicaria Heward ex Benth. ssp vari-
abilis Parr-Smith. Half-way between Mt
Ragged and Victoria Spring, 1886 (MEL
608130, MEL 608133).

Bossiaea preissii Meisn. Israelite Bay, Dec.
1884, 1885, 1893. Near Israelite Bay, Dec.
1884 (MEL).

Callitris drummondii (Parl.) F.Muell. NW base
of Mt Ragged, Israelite Bay, 1894 (MEL
226799, 226800).

Callitris roei (Endl.) F.Muell, Israelite Bay.

Codonocarpus cotinifolius (Desf.) F.Muell. N
of Mt Ragged.

Conospermun distichum R.Br, Israelite Bay
(Mueller & Tate [1896]).

Darwinia diosmoides (DC) Benth. Israelite Bay
(Mueller & Tate [1996]).

Dodonaea ceratocarpa Endl. Mt Ragged.

Dodonaea lobulata F.Muell. Beyond Mt
Ragged.

Eucalyptus angulosa Schauer. Israelite Bay,
1885 (MEL 1607395).

Eucalyptus angustissima F.Muell. Israelite
Bay, 1885 (MEL 1607517).

Eucalyptus eremophila (Diels) Maiden, North
of Mt Ragged, 1889 (MEL 1613484).
Eucalyptus kruseana F.Muell. Hampton Plains,

1890 (MEL 708038).

Eucalyptus litorea Brooker & Hopper, Israelite

Bay, 1884 (MEL 1607276).

Eucalyptus scyphocalyx (F.Muell. ex Benth.)
Maiden & Blakely. N of Mt Ragged, 1889
(MEL 1008919).

Eucalyptus tetraptera Turcz. Israelite Bay,
1884 (MEL 706096).

Eucalyptus uncinata Turcz. Israelite Bay, 1885
(MEL 705705).

Gonocarpus pycnostachys (F.Muell.) Orch.
Near Israelite Bay. Type collection
(Orchard 1993).

Goodia medicaginea F.Muell. N of Mt Ragged,
1889 (MEL 1058265), near Mt Ragged,
1890 (MEL 1058272).

Hakea brookseana F.Muell (Mueller 1886).

Helipterum hyalospermum F.Muell. ex Benth.
Mt Ragged.

*Lawrencia glomerata Hook. Israelite Bay,
1883, 1884.

*Lawrencia squamata Nees ex Miq. Israelite
Bay, 1885.

Nematolepis phebalioides Turcz. Near Mt
Ragged.

Neurachne alopecuroidea R.Br. Israelite Bay.

Microlepidium pilosulum F,Muell. Israelite
Bay, 1885 (MEL 10936).

Millotia tenuifolia Cass. Near Israelite Bay.

Phebalium lepidotum (Turez). NW base of Mt
Ragged.

Podolepis capillaris (Steetz) Diels. Half-way
between Mt Ragged and Victoria Spring.

Scaevola brookseana F.Muell. (Mueller 1884).

Swainsona oliveri F.Muell. Half-way between
Mt Ragged and Victoria Spring.

Templetonia battii F.Muell. N of Mt Ragged,
1889 (MEL).

Vittadinia blackii N.Burb. Half-way between
Mt Ragged and Victoria Spring.

Fungi

Polyporus basilapiloides (McAlpine & Tepper)
Lloyd. Eyre Botanical District, Israelite
Bay, 1893 (MEL 2015815).

* Collections of Sarah Brooks from the National Herbarium of Victoria, which were destroyed by

fire in a road accident in 1984 (Lander 1987).

194

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Mueller and Personal Names in Zoology and Palaeontology

Thomas A. Darragh’

Abstract

This paper discusses the naming of species after Ferdinand M i
é } ueller in zoology and palacontology
and Mueller’s role in naming fossil plants. (The Victorian Naturalist 113, 1996,195-197) ‘ 7

The use of personal names in botanical
and zoological nomenclature goes back to
the beginnings of the naming of animals
and plants. Species have been named after
persons for all kinds of reasons, It is tradi-
tional to name a species after its collector,
or to honour some other scientist, particu-
larly one who has made substantial contri-
butions in that particular discipline.
Sometimes names are given to species to
honour one’s friends. In many cases, the
recipient of such an honour reciprocated
when the chance came. Though it is
frowned upon as lacking in taste, some
egoists have even named species after
themselves. Some taxonomists have used
names for political purposes to enhance
their own status or position. In this, Baron
Ferdinand yon Mueller was no exception.
As a taxonomist describing new species
he was in a position to dispense honours
through naming and, of course, he was in
a position to receive them through others
naming species after him. The epithet
muelleri is a common one, so tracking
down all those that pertain to Mueller is
not an easy task. This brief survey has
covered most of the Australian sources but
the species mentioned here are certainly
not all that bear his name.

Zoology

Though Mueller was a very famous sci-
entist in his time and in contact with many
non-botanical taxonomists, there are few
species outside botany described by
Australian scientists which bear his name.
Long after Mueller’s death, William M.
Bale, a fellow member of The Field
Naturalists Club of Victoria, named a liv-
ing hydroid, Sertullaria muelleri, which
Mueller had collected at Encounter Bay,
South Australia, and gave to Bale (Bale
1913). In 1889, Professor Ralph Tate of
the University of Adelaide, a talented
» Museum of Victoria, Box 666E Melbourne, Victoria
3001.

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

botanist as well as a palaeontologist, after
whom Mueller named seven plants, dedi-
cated Semicassis muelleri, a gastropod
from the Lower Pliocene of Victoria, to
‘Baron Sir F. von Mueller as a public
mark of recognition of his contributions to
the phytology of the Australian Tertiary
Period’ (Tate 1889). Mueller appreciated
‘most highly the honor of your connecting
my name now with conchology’ and *
most gratefully recognize the sentiments
which induced this dedication’ (Mueller
1889). Mueller’s phytological contribu-
tions will be mentioned below. This seems
to be the only example of a mollusc, either
fossil or living, named after him, and the
only other invertebrate named for Mueller
seem to be the insect described by P.
Dattari in 1886, Phalacrognathus muelleri
(see Dwyer this volume), perhaps because
he did not himself collect anything new or
because he made no contributions in other
disciplines. Possibly his fellow scientists,
though respecting him, did not particularly
like him. For instance, his colleague
Professor Frederick McCoy, who named
many fossils, including fossil plants, after
collectors and other scientific colleagues,
did not so honour Mueller, even though
Mueller named a fossil fruit after him.

In one instance Mueller is alleged to
have collected an important mollusc speci-
men but the name it received from McCoy
was not Mueller’s. The circumstances sur-
rounding the origin of this specimen,
named Voluta roadnightae, are unusual
and worthy of remark, In 1881 McCoy
named Voluta roadnightae, which was
‘found by Mrs Roadnight, to whom I have
had the pleasure of dedicating it, three
years ago... it somewhat resembles the
fossil Voluta Hannafordi, McCoy, a fact
which did not escape Mrs Roadnight’s
notice’ (McCoy 1881). No mention of
Mueller here, yet in 1899, Mrs Agnes

Kenyon recorded:

195

Mueller Issue

‘The first and type specimen of this
rare and beautiful Volute came to
light in a very curious and unexpect-
ed manner, as it was discovered by
chance by the late Baron Sir
Ferdinand von Mueller, the
Government Botanist for Victoria,
who, when holiday-making at the
Lake’s Entrance, Gippsland, south
coast of Victoria, happened to notice
a shell which was being used for the
purpose of propping up his bedroom
window at the hotel. Although in a
broken and mutilated condition it
appeared new to him, and he there-
fore obtained possession of it, and
ascertained that it had been found by
Mrs. Roadnight, the landlord’s moth-
er, some years previously, in the
vicinity of Red Bluff on the Ninety-
mile beach. Upon his return to
Melbourne, he placed the shell in the
hands of the late Sir Frederick
McCoy...’ (Kenyon 1899).

If one can judge from the errors in the
article (Spencer 1901) and in the localities
from which Mrs Kenyon, a-shell collector,
alleged some of her shells came, this story
may have been exaggerated or erroneous
and it does not agree with McCoy’s
remarks (McCoy 1881). It is extremely
unlikely that Mueller would have recog-
nised the shell as new, though he may
very well have conveyed it to Melbourne
for Mrs Roadnight. Unfortunately there
are no records in the Museum concerning
its acquisition which throw light on its ori-
gin, except that they show McCoy himself
was in Gippsland at The Narrows on the
Gippsland Lakes in November 1878 and
could have been given the shell during his
visit.

In July 1891, an attempt by Mueller’s
fellow Club members and associates,
Charles French and J.G. Luehmann, to
honour Mueller by naming a new species
of the Tree Kangaroo Dendrolagus failed.
The skin was exhibited and a brief note
with the name mentioned was read at the
meeting of The Field Naturalists Club of
Victoria held on 13 July 1891 and report-
ed in the Argus next day (page 6). Mueller
proudly informed Edward Ramsay of the

196

Australian Museum that “They generously
named the animal after me... Nevertheless
it may only be a variety of D.
Lumholtzii... You will see the full notes in
the next issue of the Victorian Naturalist’
(Mueller 1891). Alas for Mueller! The
specimen must have proved to be of the
existing species because when the report
of the meeting was published in
September in The Victorian Naturalist
(vol. 8, no. 5, p. 66) the note including the
name was omitted and it was merely
reported that the note was read and the
skin exhibited.

It is not surprising that German speaking
scientists were among those who named
species for Mueller, particularly because
he sent so much zoological material to
German museums. As part of his efforts to
secure his Wurtemberg titles, Mueller sent
enormous collections to the Stuttgart
Natural History Museum. At least three
species of Australian fish
(Pseudorhombus muelleri Klunzinger
1872; Synaptura muelleri Steindachner
1879; Leptobrama muelleri Steindachner
1878) and three species of reptiles
(Phaneropis muelleri Fischer 1881;
Hoplocephalus muelleri Fischer 1885;
Hinulia muelleri Fischer 1882) from these
collections were named after him.

Palaeobotany

In the field of palaeobotany, there are
several species that bear Mueller’s name.
R.M. Johnston (1885) named a rather
problematic fossil which he alleged to be a
cone of Lepidodendron as Lepidostrobus
muelleri, and
Henry Deane (1902a, b) named Sterculia
muelleri, Mollinedia muelleri, Eucalyptus
muelleri and Tristenites muelleri in papers
in which he honoured a number of
palaeontologists and geologists. Both
these workers had their names used for
plants by Mueller.

The Austrian palaeobotanist, Constantin
Ettingshausen, who monographed the
Tertiary plants of New South Wales,
named three taxa, Elaeocarpus muelleri,
Fagus muelleri and Anomozamites muel-
leri (Ettingshausen 1888). He also named
Alnus muelleri (1883), and in turn,
Mueller named a Gentian after

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Ettingshausen. August Schenk of Leipzig
University described Phyllocladus muel-
leri from specimens of fossil wood sent to
him by Mueller (Schenk in Schimper and
Schenk 1890). The collector of the wood,
Ferdinand Krause of Ballarat, was not
mentioned or honoured.

Mueller was not a palaeontologist, nev-
ertheless, when large collections of fossil
fruits were found in the deep leads of the
Haddon district near Ballarat, at Chiltern,
Beechworth and Tanjil, and sent to the
Mining Department, Robert Brough
Smyth, Secretary for Mines turned to
Mueller to describe them. They were
described in a series of papers published
in the Reports of the Mining Surveyors
and Registrars from 1871 to 1874 and
then in a collected work in 1874,
Observations on new vegetable fossils of
the Auriferous Drifts, using the same
plates. A further series of papers dealing
with Victorian and New South Wales fos-
sil fruits appeared from 1875 to 1879 and
were republished using the same plates in
1883 as Decade 2 of the previous title
(Mueller 1874, 1883).

Of the 16 names given in the 1873 pub-
lication, one was for R.B. Smyth, and four
were for politicians who had occupied the
office of Minister of Mines. In the 1883
publication, there were 15 names, one of
which was for the then Secretary of
Mines, Thomas Couchman, and one for
the then Minister of Mines, W. Collard
Smith. When dedicating Trematocaryon
mclellani, Mueller (1873) wrote that it
was dedicated to :

‘the Honorable William McLellan,

MLL.A., for several years Minister of

the Mining Department, under whose

authority this unpretensive essay has
passed to publicity. This dedication is
also intended as a public mark of
recognition of the support, which this
respected gentleman in his legislative
position has always accorded to the
labours of the writer.’
Mueller’s dedications to other the
Ministers were equally obsequious. As
these publications were written just before
and just after Mueller’s removal as
Director of the Botanic Gardens in 1873,
it is possible that he made the dedications

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

to shore up his position as Government
Botanist or, at least, to curry favour and
support for his activities.

Acknowledgments

I thank Sara Maroske, Helen Cohn and David
Holloway for commenting on the manuscript,
and John Coventry for providing reptile refer-
ences.

References

Bale, W.M. (1913). Further notes on Australian
hydroids. 2. Proceedings of the Royal Society of
Victoria 26, 114-147, pls. 12-13. ?

Deane, H. (1902a), Notes on the fossil flora of Pitfield
and Mornington, Records of the Geological Survey
of Victoria 1, 15-20, pls. 1-2. ‘ F

Deane, H. (1902b). Notes on the fossil flora of
Berwick. Records of the Geological Survey of
Victoria 1, 21-32, pls. 3-7.

Ettingshausen, C. von (1883), Beitriige zur Kenntniss
der Tertiar-flora Australiens. Denkschrift der
kéniglichen Akademie der Wissenschaften Wien
(Math-nat, Cl.) 47, 101-148.

Ettingshausen, C. von (1888), Contributions to the
Tertiary Flora of Australia. Memoirs of the
Geological Survey of New South Wales.
Palaeontology 2.

Johnston, R.M. (1885). Discovery of a cone, probably
of a species of Lepidostrobus in the sandstones of
Campania. Papers and Proceedings of the Royal
Society of Tasmania for 1884, 225, pl.

Kenyon, A, (1899). Note on Voluta roadnightae
McCoy. Proceedings of the Malacological Society 3,

267.

McCoy, F. (1881). Description of a new volute from
the South Coast of Australia. Annals and Magazine
of Natural History series 5, 8, 88-9, pl. 8.

Mueller, F. (1874). Observations on New Vegetable
Fossils of the Auriferous Drifis. (Geological Survey
of Victoria: Melbourne).

Mueller, F. (1883). Observations on New Vegetable
Fossils of the Auriferous Drifts. Second Decade.
(Geological Survey of Victoria: Melbourne).

Mueller, F. (1889). Letter to Ralph Tate, Barr Smith
Library, University of Adelaide (transcript kindly
provided by Sara Maroske). :

Mueller, F. (1891). Letter to Edward Ramsay, Mitchell
Library, Sydney, ML MSS 562 (transcript kindly
provided by Sara Maroske).

Schenk, A. in Schimper, W.P. and Schenk, A. (1890)
Palaeophytologie. In K.A. Zittel Handbuch der
Palaeontologie 2. (Miinchen, Leipzig). 1
Spencer, W.B. (1901). On the fate of the Type-spect-
men of Voluta roadnightae, Proceedings of the

Malacological Society 4, 184. ;

Tate, R. (1889). The gastropods of the Older Tertiary
of Australia (part Il). Transactions of the Royal
Society of South Australia, 11, 116-174, pls. 2-10.

197

Mueller Issue

Mueller - Champion of Victoria's Giant trees

Bernard Mace!

In the year 1895, botanist A. D. Hardy
(Hardy 1921) accompanied by the famous
photographer J, M. Lindt led a party of
people to the location of an enormous
specimen of Australia’s tallest tree, the
Mountain Ash Eucalyptus regnans, on
Mount Monda near Healesville. The party
consisted mainly of members of the
Geographical Society, and world famous
botanist Baron Ferdinand von Mueller.
Hardy respectfully named it the ‘Mueller
Tree’ in honour of his colleague, even
though ‘the Baron’ had wandered off on
his own private botanical excursion and
was not present to witness the occasion.

This magnificent tree was later mea-
sured accurately - 64 feet (19.7 metres)
circumference at 6 feet (1.8 metres) above
ground level, and height of 307 feet (94.5
metres). In the 1930s this same tree was
‘rediscovered’ by Mr Harold Furmston, an
employee of the Melbourne and
Metropolitan Board of Works, and was
renamed the ‘Furmston Tree’ by the
Healesville Progress Association. The
same tree is still standing and very much
alive today, although now reduced in
height by decay and wind damage.
Nevertheless, it exudes an atmosphere of
mystery and silent dignity, reflecting its
great age, immense proportions and moss-
covered convolutions of its buttressed root
system, thus remaining a fitting tribute to
the great botanist after whom it was origi-
nally named.

In his work on the identification and
classification of the flora of Victoria,
Mueller made a particular study of the
Mountain Ash and was responsible for
naming and classifying the species. In his
‘Second Census of Australian Plants’
(Mueller 1870), he gives the following
description:

‘Eucalyptus amygdalina, Lindl, - In

our sheltered springy (containing

water springs) forest glens attaining
not rarely a height of over 400 feet,
there forming a smooth stem and
broad leaves, producing a foliage dif-
ferent to the ordinary state of Euc.

'785 Myers Creek Roud, Toolangi, 3777

198

amygdalina as occurs in more open

country. This species or variety,

which might be called Euc. regnans,
represents the loftiest tree in the

British territory, and ranks next to the

Sequoia Wellingtonia in size any-

where on the globe.’

Later events persuaded him to revise this
size ranking and to claim giant specimens
of the Mountain Ash to be the tallest trees
in the world. Mueller was an unabashed
enthusiast for the giant Mountain Ash, but
he was also acutely aware that they were a
rapidly disappearing feature of the
Australian landscape. The plight of the
forests in general was already a cause for
concern in the late 1800s.

From the earliest days of European set-
tlement in Victoria, the forests were
exploited with unprecedented energy and
indecent haste. This was particularly true
of those tall eucalypt forests that clothed
the hills in close proximity to Melbourne,
such as the Dandenongs and Kinglake
Ranges which are now known collectively
as the ‘Central Highlands’. The early
explorers commented on the extraordinary
height of the ‘tall gums’ that grew in these
areas, but very few had the botanical train-
ing or interest to realise the significance of
what they were observing. The Mountain
Ash Eucalyptus regnans, which is the
tallest of the eucalypts, predominates
throughout most of this region, and until
the end of the 19th century, the tallest
specimens in specific locations providing
ideal conditions, may well have been the
tallest trees in the world. However, this
was not recognised until it was too late,
and the exploitation proceeded unrelent-
ingly, with very little consideration that
the forests were being robbed of their
crowning glory, the giants of the old
growth forest.

The first wave of destruction resulted
from the activities of the ‘paling splitters’
who scoured ‘the scrub’ to find the tallest
and straightest timber, that, once felled
with axe and cross-cut saw, would split
cleanly and easily, yielding huge volumes
of palings and shingles. These were items

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

desperately needed and essential to the
development of housing in the new
colony. It was lucrative business for these
forerunners of the timber industry and a
popular occupation amongst pioneers.

This rapidly became a competitive busi-
ness, and the ‘splitters’ searched far and
wide for the biggest trees that would yield
the highest returns for the hard work of
cutting them down. Thus it was that sto-
ries began to filter through to the commu-
nity about the huge size of some of the
trees.

There was precious little interest, and
the scantest of records from the early
1800s, but a few scientists began to take
reports seriously of exceptionally tall
trees. The appointment of Mueller as State
Botanist of Victoria in 1853, and later as
Director of the Botanic Gardens, placed
him in the ideal position to review reports
of these enormous trees and he was proba-
bly the first to fully recognise their
majesty and botanical significance. He
enthusiastically embraced the process of
documenting evidence of the colossal size
of the largest specimens of eucalypts.
Mueller soon perceived that a precarious
situation had arisen. He was receiving
sawmillers and surveyors accounts of
giant Mountain Ash of immense propor-
tions, while at the same time the universal
preoccupation of the timber workers was
to seek out and fell the largest trees they
could find. Consequently, it was evident
that a wonder of nature was being
destroyed at the same time that its
existence was beginning to be validated.

In 1866 Mueller (Mueller 1866-7)
wrote:-

‘In a philosophical contemplation of
the nature of any country and the his-
tory of its creation, our attention 1s
likely to be in the first instance
engaged in a survey of the con-
stituents of its pristine forests. Greatly
is to be feared that in ages hence,
when much of the woods will have
sunk under ruthless axes, the deduc-
tions of advanced knowledge thereon
will have to be based solely on evi-
dence early placed on record.

The marvellous height of some of
the Australian, and especially
Victorian trees, has become the sub-
ject of closer investigation since of

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

late, particularly through the miners’

tracks, easier access has been afforded

to the back-gullies of our mountain

system. Some astounding data, sup-

ported by actual measurements are
now on record. The highest tree previ-
ously known was a Karri (Eucalyptus
colossea) measured by Mr Pemberton

Walcott in one of the delightful glens

of the Warren River of Western

Australia, where it rises to approxi-

mately 400 feet high. Into the hollow

trunk of this Karri three riders with an
additional packhorse, could enter and
turn in it without dismounting. On the
desire of the writer of these pages, Mr

D. Boyle measured a fallen tree of

Eucalyptus amygdalina (now known

as E. regnans - mountain ash) in the

deep recesses of Dandenong, and
obtained for it the length of 420 feet,
with proportions indicated in a design
of a monumental structure placed in
the exhibition; while Mr G. Clein
took the measurement of a Eucalyptus
on the Blacks’ Spur, 10 miles from

Healesville, 480 feet high!’

This information is highly significant,
coming from the botanist who classified
Eucalyptus regnans and spent so much
time studying and documenting these
magnificent trees. It should be noted that
Mueller was a meticulous and indefatiga-
ble scientist whose collecting expeditions
traversed the length and breadth of
Victoria. By 1868, his collections in the
Herbarium reportedly exceeded 300,000
specimens, many of which were new to
science (Willis and Cohn 1993). He
became deeply concerned about the fate of
the few remaining giant examples of
Mountain Ash in our forests, and sought
to highlight their importance by compar-
ing them to the giant sequoias of
California. As the evidence accumulated,
he came to believe that the Mountain Ash,
particularly those growing in parts of
Victoria, were in fact the tallest trees in
the world, sometimes attaining the aston-
ishing height of 500 feet (154 metres), and
thus exceeding the greatest height ever
claimed for the giant sequoias by at least
100 feet (around 30 metres). This
assertion was well founded, being based
primarily on professional surveyors
reports, although anecdotal evidence no

199

Naturalis

lan

ictori

>
ve
=
al

early 19

’

Mueller Issue
Mueller’ Tree

Mueller Issue

‘Mueller’ Tree today. Photo courtesy Ern Mainka.

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

Mueller Issue

doubt played a part. Sometimes standing
trees were measured using a theodolite or
clinometer, but even more convincingly,
some enormous specimens were accurate-
ly measured by ‘tape line’ on the ground,
where they had either fallen by chance or
been felled by the axeman.

Contemplating an explanation for the
superior size of Mountain Ash found in
Victoria, compared to interstate locations,
Mueller wrote (Mueller 1866-7):

‘The enormous height attained by not

isolated, but vast masses of our timber

trees in the rich diluvial deposits of
sheltered depressions within Victorian
ranges, finds its principal explanation,
perhaps in the circumstances that the
richness of the soil is combined with
the humid geniality of the climate,
never sinking to the colder tempera-

ture of Tasmania, nor rising to a

warmth less favourable to the strong

development of these trees in New

South Wales.’

In other words, Victoria had the unique
combination of climatic and environmen-
tal factors that enabled the forest giants to
reach their full potential after centuries of
development. Largely because of
Mueller’s dedicated investigative work,
considerable efforts were made to find and
record the largest surviving specimens in
the late 1800s. Surveyors, forestry work-
ers and timber mill operators measured
and recorded the largest trees they encoun-
tered and submitted their records to the
Herbarium. Several prominent photogra-
phers travelled far and wide to secure pho-
tographic records of the most impressive
specimens they could find, Nicholas Caire
(Caire 1905), in particular, became devot-
ed to the quest for images of the rapidly
disappearing giants, to confirm their exis-
tence for future generations. Unfortunately
the extraordinary giants amongst
the Mountain Ash were the first to be
eliminated.

It is not surprising that claims of
Eucalyptus regnans attaining such stupen-
dous heights were vigorously challenged
from various quarters. For instance, in
1888 a reward of £600 was offered to any-
one who could prove the existence of a
tree 400 feet or more in height. The

202

desired affirmative result was intended to
be highlighted at the Centennial
International Exhibition in Melbourne.
The size claimed had to be validated by a
qualified surveyor, but this proved to be a
tall order in more ways than one. The fact
that strenuous efforts to produce the evi-
dence that would reap the reward failed, is
often quoted as evidence that Mueller’s
claims were invalid. In fact a professional
photographer, J. Duncan Pierce and a sur-
veyor, C. R. Cunningham were employed
to photograph and measure as many of the
known giant trees as possible before the
1888 exhibition. The largest tree they
could find was ‘The Neerim Giant’ which
stood 326 feet high (100 metres) and 48
feet (14.8 metres) girth at chest height.
Located on a spur of Mt Baw Baw, this
was undeniably a huge tree as the photo-
graphic records show, but it was still 75
feet short of the desired 400 foot mark.
However, E. J. Dowey (Hardy 1923), the
timber cutter who led the party to this tree,
reported that freezing conditions and the
poor health of Pierce, meant that rather
than search out the largest tree in the area,
they had merely located the closest large
specimen and measured it alone before
returning quickly to civilisation. He also
asserted that he had found and cut down
much larger trees in the same area some
time afterwards! The record of the search,
in the lead up to the 1888 exhibition can
be found in ‘Giant Trees Of Australia,’
(Anon 1888), the superb compilation of
photographs with minimal text that
resulted from the efforts of Pierce and
Cunningham.

It is easy to criticise an assertion that
stretches the limits of our credulity or
imagination, but there was little justifi-
cation for claims that Mueller was prone
to exaggerate. He was not alone in report-
ing the extraordinary height of Victoria’s
Mountain Ash. Botanist A. D. Hardy also
documented accounts of giant examples of
the species, sometimes without embarking
on exhaustive analysis of the reports
(Hardy 1921). Most of the tallest trees
recorded by Mueller were measured by
surveyors, and although there were some
notable inconsistencies, there is no justifi-
cation for doubting the veracity of all

The Victorian Naturalist .

Mueller Issue

reports. None the less, criticisms did arise,
and one polite detractor was the State
Botanist of New South Wales, J. H.
Maiden who took the more conservative
view point. In The Forest Flora of New
South Wales, No. 72, (Maiden 1904-25),
he wrote:

Eucalyptus regnans F, V. M. ‘The

Giant Gum Tree

A large tree, the largest indeed in

Australia, though inferior in size to

the Redwood, Sequoia sempervirens

and the ‘Big Tree’ Sequoia

Wellingtonia of Western America.

Trees about 300 feet high are known

in Victoria..’

Later in the same publication he referred
to Mueller as follows:

‘The greatest claims to possess the
tallest trees of the world have been
made on behalf of Victoria, most of
them from Gippsland. In 1862
Mueller wrote to the Seaman’s
Journal of Botany that Mr. D. Boyle,
of Nunawading, near Melbourne, has
measured a fallen tree in the recesses
of Dandenong and found it to be 420
feet.’

Surveyor Boyle was apparently discred-
ited at a later date after a tree he measured
at 466 feet was allegedly remeasured at
219 feet. This might have been good fuel
for the sceptics and reflected badly on
Mueller, but it defies comprehension that
a qualified surveyor could produce an
error of more than 100 percent in a simple
measurement. Even an amateur could
expect to get within 10 percent with a cli-
nometer. Perhaps they remeasured the
wrong tree? Maiden sought to discredit
Mueller by highlighting conflicting claims
of extraordinary heights which appeared
to relate to the same trees. Obviously dis-
agreeing with Mueller, he rather disparag-
ingly quoted him as saying (Mueller
1885):

‘the tallest tree of the globe, surpass-

ing even the renowned California

Sequoia and Wellington pines 1n

height, reaching to 400 feet and even

more.’
Maiden called for constructive action to
settle the argument (Maiden 1904-25,): ‘T t
will be best, if possible, to take a standing
tree, measured by a surveyor, and we
should have at least two independent mea-

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

surements.’ A sound proposal, but by the
early 1900s it was apparently already too
late. He expressed doubts about the size
claimed for the ‘Neerim Giant’, 326 feet
high, and made dismissive comments
about an even bigger specimen that came
to be known as the ‘Thorpdale Tree,’ mea-
sured by Government certified surveyor
George Cornthwaite in 1880. This giant
from South Gippsland was measured with
a theodolite at 370 feet high, and then
shortly after was cut down by
Cornthwaite’s pastoralist brother and
more accurately remeasured with a tape
line on the ground. The result was 375 feet
confirmed. This was reported in The
Victorian Naturalist, July 1918. Currently
this vanquished monarch is remembered
with a pathetic pole, topped with a sign
reading ‘THE WORLD’S TALLEST
TREE.’ This tree has been referred to in
the Guinness Book of Records (erroneous-
ly) as the tallest hardwood tree in the
world at 115 metres (375 feet) high. If it
was still standing, it would be at least 4
metres higher than the largest Redwood
still standing in California. The tallest cur-
rently accepted record of a Californian
Redwood Sequoia sempervirens is 368
feet (113 metres) and 66 feet (20 metres)
girth at chest height. This fine tree fell
during a storm in 1992.

Significantly, there was a giant
Mountain Ash produced for the 1888
Exhibition in Melbourne, ‘obtained
through the kindness of Mr S. Willis of
Prahran,’ (Hardy 1912, 1921) and its enor-
mous butt was displayed for all to see. The
tree was provided by a sawmiller from
Menzies Creek, and was claimed to have
been measured with a tape line by the mill
owner prior to being sectioned. It was
reported to be 400 feet long, but was not
confirmed by a licensed surveyor, so it did
not warrant payment of the £600 reward.
However the butt was laboriously
sectioned into thirteen pieces, each
approximately fifteen feet high, transport-
ed to the Exhibition Building grounds
and reassembled into a stunning exhibit. It
was reported to be 72 feet (22 metres) in
circumference at ground level. idles

Despite the opposition to the notion that
Victoria once harboured the tallest trees
on earth, ‘the Baron’ was finally vindicat-
ed. One of his contemporaries by the

203

Mueller Issue

name of William Ferguson, who was a
licensed surveyor and in fact the
‘Inspector of State Forests of Victoria’,
was assigned the task of assessing the tim-
ber reserves of the Watts River catchment
near Healesville and to report on its suit-
ability for proclamation as a State Forest.
Ferguson investigated ‘areas that had not
been penetrated by the timber splitter or
the wood cutter.’, and reported to Mr
Clement Hodgkinson, Assistant
Commissioner of State Forests in 1872,
(Simpfendorfer 1982) that...
“Some places, where the trees are
fewer and at a lower altitude, the tim-
ber is much larger in diameter, aver-
aging from 6 to 10 feet and frequently
trees to 15 feet in diameter are met
with on alluvial flats near the river,
These trees average about ten per
acre; their size, sometimes, is enor-
mous. Many of the trees that have
fallen through decay and by bush fires
measure 350 feet in length, with girth
in proportion. In one instance I mea-
sured with the tape line one huge
specimen that lay prostrate across a
tributary of the Watts and found it to

x / $7 FEET DIAMETER, 11) CIRCUMFERENCE WILL
Sf WOLD ELEVEN ORSES INSIDE

204

TTY YA GANT FOREST TREE BULSA VICTOR

The “Bulga Stump’. The largest girth ever measured in Australia.

be 435 feet from its roots to the top
of its trunk. At 5 feet from the
ground it measures 18 feet in diam-
eter. At the extreme end where it
has broken in its fall, it (the trunk)
is 3 feet in diameter. This tree has
been much burnt by fire, and I fully
believe that before it fell it must
have been more than 500 feet high.

As it now lies it forms a complete

bridge across a deep ravine.’

This, the ‘Ferguson Tree,’ may well
have been the tallest tree ever accurately
recorded by mankind. Ferguson’s report
was secreted away in Government files for
many years and apparently never came to
the notice of Mueller. This record has
recently been investigated by Dr A. C.
Carder, a retired forester from Canada
who has investigated tall tree records
world wide, and it is currently listed in the
Guinness Book of Records. The biggest
girth ever recorded in Australia was the
‘Bulga Stump’ a Mountain Ash from the
Tarra Bulga region of South Gippsland. It
measured 111 feet (34 metres) girth at
chest height, and its hollow interior could
‘comfortably’ house 11 _ horses,

COMTnigHr

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Photographed in 1888, it was already
dead and broken off, so we can only
speculate how tall it may have been in its
prime, and unfortunately, it was burned
soon after.

On balance, it appears that official
efforts to confirm the existence of
Mountain Ash upwards of 400 feet tall,
in the latter part of the 19th century, were
poorly executed and perhaps 20 to 30
years too late. The evidence shows that
Mueller was correct in his assertions and
well aware of the environmental factors
that enabled Mountain Ash to reach
exceptional heights in Victoria. He and
some of his contemporaries were of the
opinion that most of the great trees had
already been destroyed by the paling
splitters, or by the fires that followed
European settlement, by as early as 1860
(Mueller 1885). Subsequent timber
harvesting practices and policies gave
neither recognition nor protection to the
tallest trees in the world. Even those
giants that may have survived in protect-
ed water catchments were probably
destroyed by bushfires, which increased
in frequency and intensity as a
consequence of human activities and
modifications to the environment.
Consequently, the most magnificent
botanical feature of Australia’s wilder-
ness was effectively lost by the turn of

the century. The present status of that
formerly ideal forest ecosystem is now
so greatly modified that the grandeur of
the past may never be seen again.
Thankfully, the published notes of
Mueller and a few other dedicated indi-
viduals were preserved to inform us of
the extraordinary tall trees that once
characterised Victoria’s Mountain Ash
forests.

References:

Anon, (1888). Giant Trees of Victoria.

Caire N. J. (1905). Notes on the Giant Trees of
Victoria. The Victorian Naturalist 21,122-128.
Hardy, A. D. (1921),Giant Eucalypts of Victoria. The
Gum Tree, June, 15-16, (Official organ of the

Australian Forest League).

Hardy, A. D. (1923). The Measuring of Tall Trees.
The Victorian Naturalist 39, 166-175.

Hardy, A. D, (1935), Australia’s Giant Trees. The
Victorian Naturalist 51, 231-241.

Maiden, J. H. (1904-25)Forest Flora of N. S. W.,
Part 72.

Mueller, F. V. (1870). 2nd Census of Australian
Plants.

Mueller, F. V. (1866-67). Australian Vegetation. Part
5 of the official record, Intercolonial Exhibition,
Melbourne.

Mueller, F. V. (1889). Letter to ‘The Argus’, May
25.

Mueller, F. V. (1885). Select Extra Tropical Plants.

Simpfendorfer, K. J. (1982). “Big Trees in Victoria’.

Willis, J.H. and Cohn, H.M.(1993). Botanical

Exploration of Victoria Jn “Flora of Victoria’. Vol. 1.

Eds D.B. Forman and N.G. Walsh. (Inkata Press:

Melbourne),

I regard the forest as an he
spoil or to devastate, bu

and carefully maintaine
oe aan : of us only for transient care during

surrendered to posterity again as an
th increased riches and augmented
ed patrimony from generation to

gift, instrusted [sic] to any
a short space of time, to be
unimpaired property, W1
blessings, to pass as a sact
generation.

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

FOREST CONSERVATION

ritage given to us by nature, not for
t to be wisely used, reverently

‘Forest culture in its relation to industrial pursuits’ . (Samuel Mullen:Melbourne).

d. I regard the forests as a

F. Mueller (1871).

Mueller Issue

90x} IS9]IP}

SPHOIIA SP PoIst] [TMS ATTRIOUJO “GGG Ul WEY pum Aq uayorg doy “(YF 1O€) Ut Z6 A[snoraarg

S¥IO MM JO plvog ‘UeULIeYD JOULIOJ Joye PoUeN *99) SUTAT] ISATIE} S,BLO}OIA, A[Quqoig

“(Wr gg) 1995 LEZ 1B pomnseouos pue UO\sULINy

PoroAoosIpar CEG] UT *(YBIY 1997 OYE J0A0 Udy) ZOGT Ul ‘ApreH “C “V 3STUR}0g Aq punoy ISILy

“aly Aq pokorsaq ‘aie sejoysIN Aq 06] UI poydessojoyg

-arly Aq paXkoysap 12}e] ‘ggg -c1d poydesso0j0yg

-Anquao styq Aprea ony Aq paXoysag do} usyoig “IoAaAIng JUSUTUIBAOD Aq poses

(0061 240J0q) 190UIsUY amYS (WI LT) SkeMIQ DeJOD Aq pomseaut ‘eq pal[>j
6£61 ‘AyeLIAD “DH “y ‘s}so10j Jo (WI /Q[) 2af0on 4sa10,4 10j99dsuy Aq poinsesul 394) UdT[ey

O88I ‘Pelle ‘aWeMIWIOD “DH “IOA2AIns Aq poinseour Ayo}eINIDV

“Y OZb JO 1YSt10y [RIO] B BurA1d doy
UdYOI S}I IO} Yf OE Poppe 2H “798 Ul a[Aog prAeq JoAaAIng Aq posnsesul 30y) UdT[ey

QRQI 0} JOLIg “Surpjoy Joye Jayjrumes Aq painsesyy

6881 0} JOG ‘wosUIgOY’ M’D (WISp]) 10Xaaing Aq posnsesyy]

ZLB Ul paprosay “Yea1g 3 Yoryy 1995 € “(112 Aq uoxo1q)

do} 0) 1995 ¢¢p 30) UDT[e ‘WosN319,4 (WIS '/[) (+ WS) WeI]IMA JoA2AIng Aq pomnsesyy
s[lvjoq JUSUIANsBayA]

soz) Gsla

we9 WwW 8
GOLD Hse)
w¢’g W 16

(ur9) (user)

DAIBSIY S301],
TRL puepequing
quowlysye>
4e2ID AQeiTEAA

epuoyy IW

sal Sig O4L
dosso¢ IN

(do} ye uayxo1g)
“201[, S,UO}SULINY
se uMoUy ospy Aq
201] JOTjONY

supusaa snjdAjpang ysy uleyunoy{ - $991], SUNSIX|

¥ 88 ‘VN AaqieA puepoquing

w 161 Ww 09
(W/Z)
(w pg)

HII VN

(WLI) (woOor)

¥ sr YSzE
VN ¥ LvE
VN ¥ Sve
(mw ¢TT)

VN Y SLE
(uw 071)

VN YU C6E
(w7z) (mw ¢zI)
YU TZL ¥ 00r
“WN ¥ OL
YS'9S YOOS 1940

yy Wyse

purjsddin ynog
easing

IIA prempg Sury

duis esing

AjUo syuawieanseau YjII5y

meg Meg IA
jso10.j yooog
osu0I00]
(puejsddin yynog)
ojepdioy

ssuouspueq

YIoIQ soizusjy
Meg MEG IA

STIEASOTeOH
u0neI07T

JURID WILIZaN,
ddI], Yejosuo[Q
doi Ayeian

20) ajepdioy

[eruuajuad
poweu j0N,

dol], uosns134
owe

supusad snjddjvang ysy ulejuNoy] - Sp10I3yy Seq

S391], ISOSIL'T S,PLIOM PUL JO UoHeRngey

The Victorian Naturalist

206

(yssp) (991) jso10,j Enodie
“tne y BUIAT] JSABIET “Plo siv9k YYZ] 19A0 ‘Zulaq] [0S WI wie{¢ aroyesN eINyeyy ue], ney
S901], puvleaZ MIN
(wy'9T) (weEzI) 1isaizuaul DSnsjopnasq
(1apreD “O'V 1G Jou) usutoeds yseq yes ¥ 00r u0Sd1I0 IL sejsnog
- (wg9'9Z) (WLOT) wnajups13 uoApuappionbag
(19preQ ‘O'V AC Jou) uourtoods ysed ¥ C8 YU LYE SUBD [eUED suid UOYBUTTISM,
(WIT) BIULOFTED 01,
‘Ppiom oy} Ur SuIpUR]s [[4S 9933 UMOUY 3S9dIeT HY O9E Ayunog yoqumny, Agar] premoy
(woz) (Welt) suasiasaduas nionbag
“7661 Ut Ted B99 YU 89¢ SUOISAI [EISVOD, POOMPOY ULIUIOFITe)

ystq pue juese1g - S901], UBTIOUTY

39) ( €8z) vruRUUse |, (do} ye usyo1g)

"JUDOAI - SJUSWOINSKI| “UOIILIYE JSLINO} PoySTA YON] ul [Z Wl 18 WO}SIAD9H) ddI], UO\SOADAH)
(362) (00) prueUse |

-g01} JSa]]RI S,BITRSNY se postusoda AT[eIOUSH) W6 W 76 Age A XMS soll Sig
Qysz¢) (AayeA sunuer0y 4)

“PouLIIJUOd 9q OT, "S901 JO puv}s poyiodai Ajjusc9y “VN 4+W00I (Se) peoy sonbors poureu JON)

S901], UBIUBUISE |,

(Surddiyopoom s0y pousop Apuezms = OS) «= TID) AQUIOIA BIPUNULLA

dnoo e uy) ‘onbygo “7 ayeulssoy yuRID “(doy usyoig) “Aurepjog ‘Jorg Aq poylsta Afussoy UW ST Ww 0S yearn A1][9, 201L Awreypog

odanzoyadao q-- = (Or) = IID wns

Koad v 107 o81e] AIA (andg yovjq) (win Ao1H uleyUNOY{) ‘ISNA, [PUTIN 94} Aq posoysisoy wW I wi ¢9 oBeyUIOH Sy]. dL SIg
Qzos) (xosdde) soduey APM

pnbygo ‘7 ayewssoyl -YsV uleyUNOW PLIqdy “doy usxosq puke Joys MOTTOH UG *S | w¢ ATIND eQTeyL aall Sig

‘supuSaa ‘g BULAT Ul UMOUY YUTS ysodie] “doy usyoIg “Puss Hg Aq poinseour Ayyu900y W {Z W Sr purjsddin yynog aay, onsney WA

Surpurys AuoLND “sjustWomsvoul yus0Nys UW S|

Mueller Issue

WOL SAO] UMOTJOMOG da1L PPV

207

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

Mueller Issue

To Honour a Noted Botanist

Ruth Dwyer

Baron Ferdinand von Mueller was
honoured in many ways, noble titles, dec-
orations and through living species being
named after him. Most of these were
botanical, but as Darragh shows in this
issue there were also fossils and insects,
One of the more spectacular is the King
Stag Beetle, Phalacrognathus muelleri.
On the 14 June 1886, The Field
Naturalists Club of Victoria held their
monthly meeting, as usual, at the Royal
Society’s hall. A relevant paper was read
by Mr. Paolo Dattari’.

Dattari presented his paper, ‘Notes on
the new Australian beetle,’ outlined the
history of ‘this splendid insect’ and in dis-
tributing the paper, illustrated with
enlarged coloured drawings, expressed his
opinion that the specimens exhibited
would probably be found to be more than
one species. Lithographic plates of the
beetle were also distributed. It was found
to be a new genus, and was named
Phalacrognathus muelleri in honour of his
friend and mentor, the Government
Botanist, Baron Sir Ferdinand Jakob
Heinrich von Mueller. A copy of the
paper, with coloured plate, was presented
to the library of The Field Naturalists Club
*, It cannot now be found. However anoth-
er copy was located in the collection of
the National Museum of Victoria.

Paolo Dattari, a cultured Italian gentle-
man, had emigrated from London in 1877
as an unassisted passenger aboard the
Somersetshire*. Dattari, born c1850 in
Leghorn near Florence, the son of Luigi
Dattari, gentleman, and Enrichetta, for-
merly Maneschit, was professionally an
architect*. Unfortunately no buildings in
Victoria can be attributed to him, but
evidences of his involvement in associated
disciplines are varied. He contributed two
pen-and-ink drawings to the Adelaide
Exhibition of 1881, one being an allegory
for Punch, the other a frontispiece for a
scientific publication. Both were well
designed and delicately executed*. The
handsome and costly gold and silver

* 75 Wattle Road, Hawthorn, Victoria 3122.

208

presentation casket of 1880 for Captain
Standish, Chief Commissioner of Police in
Victoria, was of Dattari’s’ manufacture®.
and showed a distinct Italianate influence.
Dattari was also to apply for the registra-
tion of at least two patents in Victoria, the
first being in 1882 for a Parallel Ruler
combining ruler, protractor and scale, and
the other in 1883, in conjunction with
J.E.Edwards, an Electro ‘Control’’. His
interest in the scientific is further
evidenced by the existence of a letter from
Professor McCoy (7 August 1886) identi-
fying a species of fish found locally’.

In June 1880, Dattari had been elected
to The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria,
one of the original members, and
remained as such until 1886, after which
time there is an inexplicable absence until
his re-admission on 13 July 1891°. A letter
from Mueller ( 7 September 1886 )
enclosed a map of New Guinea possibly
indicating a field trip by Dattari to that
northern area'’.The birth of a son, Paolo,
to Dattari and his wife, the former
Margaret Elizabeth Victoria Yeomans,
indicates a possible presence in Carlton in
1887". The last Sands and McDougall
directory entry is for Station Street, North
Carlton in 1888. It is believed that Dattari
returned to the Florentine area some time
after 1891,

Baron von Mueller had presented to
Dattari a copy of his ‘Description and
illustrations of the myoporinous plants of
Australia, vol. 2,’ inscribed ‘To P. Dattari
Esqr & c with regardful remembrance
from his sincere friend Ferd. von Mueller.
Sept. 1886’"*. Other relevant correspon-
dence, including advice on the termin-
ology to be used when documenting
botanical specimens," is held at the library
of the National Herbarium of Victoria and
by The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria.

Acknowledgements

Dr. Thomas A. Darragh, National Museum of
Victoria, for assistance including the location of
the McCoy letter. Sara Maroske, Joint Editor of
The von Mueller Project, for provision of tran-
scripts of letters from The Correspondence of
Ferdinand von Mueller.

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

- Argus 15 June 1886 p.6. Collection State Library of
Victoria,

2. The Victorian naturalist, July 1886 p. 26.

1886 p. 37. i oe fois

3. P.R.O.V. V.P.R.S. 7666 Unit 358.

4, Index to Marriages in Victoria, 1881,Certificate
No.2513.

5. M. Lewis, Australian Architectural Index Edn.2
sArgus 20 July 1881 p.5. Collection State Library of
Victoria.

6.The Australasian Sketcher, 28 May 1881, in
J.B,Hawkins, Nineteenth Century Australian Silver,
Antique Collectors’ Club, Woodbridge, Suffolk,
England, 1990, Vol.1. p.258.

7. Index to Patents Registered in Victoria, 1856 -

1904. Collection State Library of Victoria.

8. National Muscum of Victoria, letter book no. 7.
p.430.

9. Personal communication, Sheila Houghton to Ruth
Dwyer, 17 August 1995.

10. Mueller to Dattari, 7 September 1886, copy
National Herbarium of Victoria.

11. Index to Births in Victoria, 1887, Certificate
No.18015.

12, Library of The Huntington, San Marino,
California.

13. Mueller to Dattari, 14 April 1886, copy National
Herbarium of Victoria.

The Mueller Memorial Medal
Alan K. Parkin!

Soon after Baron Ferdinand von
Mueller’s death, we read in The Victorian
Naturalist (14, 8) that

‘a fund has been started to establish a
permanent national memorial to the
late Baron von Mueller. An influen-
tial general committee, with the

Mayor of Melbourne as its chairman,

and an executive committee, under

the chairmanship of Sir John Madden,
have been formed, while Professor

Spencer (then Past President, FNCV)

and Mr. W. Wiesbaden have consent-

ed to act as joint hon. secretaries’,

with the then secretary, Mr G. Coghill,
soliciting support from Club members.
This initiative is similarly recorded in the
Australian Journal of Pharmacy, which
indicates that ‘the thinking was to fund a
‘statue or scholarship which should keep
his memory green always’, and that a sum
of 55 pounds was subscribed at the inau-
gural meeting.

The matter appears to have languished a
little until being taken up at the 7th
Congress of the Australasian Association
for the Advancement of Science (January
1898), where the Baron von Mueller
Memorial Fund Committee was estab-
lished and soon accumulated 450 pounds
to invest, This was considered sufficient
to fund the award of a Medal biennially

‘to the author of the most important

contribution, or series of contribu-

tions, to natural knowledge, published

'2 Hazel Drive, Templestowe, Victoria 3107.

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

originally within His Majesty’s

Dominions, within a period of not

more than five years or less than one

year of the date of the award, prefer-
ence to be given to work referring to

Australia, The portion of the interest

remaining after the purchase of the

medal was to be awarded as a prize to

accompany the medal.’
to be administered by AAAS (The
Victorian Naturalist 17, 11). The Medal,
as illustrated by Daley (Victorian History
Magazine, 2, 1924), was designed by J.T.
Fryer of Melbourne and cast, at least ini-
tially, in Paris in silvered bronze. It shows
on one side the Baron, who was AAAS
(now ANZAAS) President in 1890, at
work with a specimen, and on the other a
Waratah (presumably Telopea oreades
FyM) with inscription.

The list of recipients of the Mueller
Memorial Medal below (largely from
M.Willis, By Their Fruits) will contain
many names familiar to Club members:

1904 Howitt, A. W. (VN* 20, 128)

1907 Hill, Prof. J. P.

1909 David, Prof. T.W.E.

1911 Etheridge, R.

1913 Howchin, Rev. W.

1921 Baker, R.T. & Chilton, Prof. C.
(2 awards)

1923 Maiden, J.H.

1924 Maitland, A.G.

1926 Wood-Jones, Prof. F.

1928 Cockayne, L.

1930 Mawson, Sir D.

1932 Black, J.M.

209

Mueller Issue

1935 Tillyard, R.J. 1955 Bull, L.B.
1937 Skeats, Prof. E.W. 1957 Elkin, Prof. P.E.
1939 Johnston, Prof. T.H. 1958 Marston, H.R.
1946 White, C.T. & Andrews, E.C. 1959 Browne, W.R.

(2 awards, VN 63,164) 1961 McKerras, I.M.
1949 Dakin, Prof. W.J. (VN 65, 262) 1962 Burnet, Sir F. McF.

1964 Fenner, Prof. F.J.
1965 White, Prof. M.J.D.

Strangely, very few of these awards gain 1967 Hill, Prof. Dorothy

a mention in The Victorian Naturalist, 1968 Taylor, N.H.
with no further references after 1949. — j 969 Beauglehole, J.C.
Around this time, the award conditions 1970 Robertson, Sir R.N.

appear to have been broadened by 1971 Stanner, Prof. W.E.H.
ANZAAS, such that the Medal has ee Shenae SR
become somewhat overshadowed by the rte Boe

5 : z 1975 Ringwood, Prof. A.E.
Australian Natural History Medallion, at 1976 Pryor, Prof. L.D.
least as far as this Club is concerned. It 1977 McIntyre, Prof. A.K.
may be of interest that C.T. White was the 1979 McFarlane, Prof. W.V.
grandson of F.M. Bailey, whom he suc- ed ha ae ae
ceeded as Government Botanist of PSDi TOL aa,
5 ; d 1982 Bennett, Isobel
Queensland. The first presentation to 1983 Webb, LJ.
A.W. Howitt (The Victorian Naturalist 1983 Webb, L.J.
21, 4) was made by Prof. Baldwin 1984 Johnson, L.A.S.
Spencer at a joint meeting of FNCV and 1985 Woodall, R.

4 ; : ‘ ‘ 1987 Womersley, H.B.S.
the Royal Society of Victoria, of which he 1988 Quirk, Prof’ J.P.

was then President. 1990 Main, Prof. A.R.
Awards made by ANZAAS, subsequent 199] Mitchell, Prof. G. F.
to 1950, are listed below: 1992 Clarke, Prof. Adrienne E.
‘ 1993 Twidale, Prof. C.R.
1951 Benson, W.N. 1994 Archer, Prof. M.
1952 Longman, H.A, 1995 Curtis, Winifred

1954 Prescott, Prof. J.A.

* The Victorian Naturalist.

f ‘

The Mueller Medal. From The Victorian Naturalist 21, 5, on the occasion of the presentation to Mr
A.H. Howitt, F.G.S. 1904.

210 The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

The Baron and the Goldfield
Ray Wallace!

The great Bendigo goldfield eventually
matured into a fine provincial city.
Prominent towns such as Inglewood and
Castlemaine, both within thirty miles of
Bendigo, had enjoyed the bonanza of their
own gold production and Bendigo’s
neighbour and erstwhile rival, Eaglehawk,
was also founded on gold. Civic pride was
high and by the 1870s botanical and pub-
lic gardens were well established in the
aforementioned towns.

If the botanical gardens were under-
pinned by the philosophy of the
Enlightenment then the movement and the
time, in Victoria, was ripe for someone of
Baron Ferdinand yon Mueller’s stamp.
Enlightenment thought was based on the
belief that, as scientific knowledge
expanded and truth was revealed, society
would correspondingly progress, as exem-
plified by the Industrial Revolution.

This type of thinking led to the concept
of the botanical garden being a place
where the marriage of genteel learning and
utility took place. One could observe the
wonders of nature with the aim of unravel-
ling its secrets.

The four gardens in the towns mentioned
above, although perhaps unknown to the
majority of their councillors, were ina
way trial grounds for Mueller, here his
conifers could be subject to empirical
observation and experimentation. One of
the Baron’s primary focuses was the
search for suitable species for the estab-
lishment of a softwood timber industry
and naturally conifers were a prominent
part of his distributions (Almond 1996).
The botanical gardens at White Hills
(Bendigo) and Castlemaine and the public
gardens of Eaglehawk and Inglewood cer-
tainly give testimony to the wider state
picture, while the cemeteries of
Eaglehawk and White Hills are rich in
superb specimens of coniferous species a&
well, and were established in that period
when Mueller was distributing huge num-
bers of plants throughout Victoria.

His legacy is found even in the small

‘19 Haggar Street, Eaglehawk, Victoria 3556

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

Canterbury Park, Eaglehawk, public gar-
dens which holds lovely specimens of
Bunya Bunya Pine Araucaria bidwillii,
Hoop Pine Araucaria cunninghamit,
Canary Island Pine Pinus canariensis,
Deodar Cedar Cedrus deodara and
Western Yellow Pine Pinus ponderosa.

In the same area at the Eaglehawk ceme-
tery, as well some of the above species,
there are specimens of the sombre
Monterey Cypress Cupressus
macrocarpa, along with Monterey Pine
Pinus radiata and Norfolk Island Pine
Araucaria heterophylla.

At White Hills gardens too is the rare
Soledad Pine Pinus torreyana which is
included on the National Trust Register of
Significant Trees, also at White Hills gar-
dens, and on the Register, is a superb
specimen of African acacia, Karoo Thorn
Acacia karoo,

A lot of Mueller’s distributions in the
Bendigo gardens reflect his involvement
with the Zoological and Acclimatisation
Society of Victoria of which he was a
board member. A man of boundless ener-
gy, Mueller, with contacts throughout the
world which must have numbered hun-
dreds if not thousands, actively sought
more work. In the 1860s he was writing
to the Borough of Eaglehawk offering his
services.

Council records of the then Borough of
Sandhurst (Bendigo) note that in the
1860s and 1870s Mueller was supplying
seeds and plants along with advice to the
public gardens in Bendigo.

As well, in a letter dated 7 May 1872,
Mueller was recommending a fellow
German, Mr Homeyer, as a very suitable
man to take over the curatorship of the
botanical gardens at White Hills upon the
retirement of Curator Fletcher. The
Baron’s petition was unsuccessful, howev-
er, for soon after the name of Curator
Gadd appears in the records and indeed
appeared for many years to follow.

In 1873 Mueller was supplying aquatic
plants for the Eaglehawk Borough Council
and that same year the Botanical Gardens

211

Mueller Issue

Fig. 1. Karoo Thorn Acacia karoo at White Hills Botanical Gardens

were supplying the Eaglehawk gardens
with trees. However, Mueller was not
Eaglehawk’s sole source of plant material
for in 1873 the Council was also purchas-
ing plants from Joseph Harris’s South
Yarra nursery a month before Mueller was
replaced as Director of the Botanical
Gardens. Trees for the White Hills
Botanical Gardens were also purchased
from B. and S. Johnson at Preston.
Curator Fletcher was also inquiring for
Araucaria seeds from Law Sumner and
Co., Melbourne.

So prominent a role did Mueller play in
the supplying of free plants to regional
gardens that there is strong evidence that
the professional nursery lobby had some
influence in his dismissal as Director of
the Botanical Gardens (Daily Telegraph
1872).

It seems, however, that this did not stop
Mueller from performing what he obvi-
ously saw as a public duty for he was still
supplying the Castlemaine Botanical
Gardens with plants as late as 1880, a
practice he had established in 1860.

Perhaps an indirect influence of Mueller
on the Bendigo and district gardens,
through his involvement with the
Acclimatisation Society, was the estab-

212

lishment of aviaries in places such as the
Eaglehawk and White Hills gardens, and
shortly after the artificial Lake Neangar at
Eaglehawk was completed in 1883, the
Acclimatisation Society offered to stock it
with fish.

A striking example of Mueller’s indefati-
gable attention to detail was illustrated in
his capacity as Government Botanist. As a
man who must have written possibly thou-
sands of letters a year in a voluminous
correspondence he found time to write to
the committee of the Eaglehawk
Mechanics Institute inquiring if they had a
complete collection of his works and if not
he would donate those the library lacked.
The Eaglehawk Mechanics Institute was a
substantial edifice and serviced a popula-
tion of some 8,000 people (Minute Book
1877a).

Even more striking is the fact that he
made the same offer to the little California
Gully Mechanics Institute, situated
between Eaglehawk and Bendigo, and ser-
vicing some few hundred people. Such
was the Baron’s zeal (Minute Book
1877b).

Whilst Mueller had much to do with
Bendigo, and its surrounding areas, as
Government Botanist and Director of the

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Botanic Garden through his vast corre-
spondence, surprisingly, he seemed to do
little botanical work in such places as the
floristically rich Bendigo Whipstick or the
equally interesting box-ironbark forest
country around Inglewood.

Walter Bissill from Big Hill, a science
graduate from the University of
Melbourne and pioneer naturalist, had
done extensive work in the southern areas
of Bendigo but little to the north, but as
far as I am aware there is little evidence of
much communication between Mueller
and him and Richard Nancarrow at
Neilborough, another pioneer naturalist,
although Bissill did send Mueller speci-
mens and had Hannafordia bissillii named
for him,

The Victorian Field Naturalists visited
the Whipstick quite often prior to 1920 but
little systematic work was carried out
before the pioneering efforts of Charles
Daley, David Paton and Alfred Tadgell.

One early Bendigo naturalist that
Mueller did have extensive contacts with
was Walter Froggatt who had spent his
childhood in Eaglehawk and later became
Government Entomologist for New South

Wales. His early development as a natu-
ralist had been nurtured by Richard
Nancarrow. As a young man, Froggatt
collected plants on the Flinders River,
Queensland, and sent material to Mueller.

Not one to forget either slight or favour,
the Baron used his influence in 1885 to
have Froggatt appointed special zoologi-
cal collector and assistant zoologist for the
New South Wales branch of the (Royal)
Geographical Society of Australasia’s
expedition to New Guinea. Froggatt per-
formed his duties so well that his career
prospered, thanks to the initial impetus
supplied by the Baron.

Thus the influence of the Baron is still
tangible and seen, even today, through
Bendigo and district’s gardens and his
philosophy is made concrete through the
superb conifers that adorn them.

References

Almond E., (1996). A Garden of Views. Victorian
Historical Journal 67, 40-.

Daily Telegraph, 12 July 1872.

Minute Book 1877a. Minute Book Eaglehawk
Mechanics Institute and Public Library, 6 October
1877

Minute Book 1877b. Minute Book California Gully
Mechanics Institute Public Library, 20 October
1877.

Mueller, Acclimatiser and Seed Merchant

It could well be said that Baron von
Mueller’s principal interest lay in the
genus Eucalyptus, and he lavished praise
on these remarkable trees throughout his
writings. Not least, he extolled their sani-
tary virtues by dint of his own training
with a PhD in botany from Kiel (where he
first encountered Euc globulus in the
University garden), and because eucalyp-
tus oil was already well established in
medicinal use*. He it was who persuaded
a Richmond chemist, Joseph Bosisto, to
commence commercial production of
eucalyptus oil in 1853.

From his appointment as Government
Botanist in that year, Mueller engaged in
prodigious correspondence with botanists
around the world (and it is said that it
needed two postmen to deliver his mail).
One of the most noteable correspondents
was Elwood Cooper of Santa Barbara

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

College, California, who received seed of
some 50 species of Eucalyptus from the
Baron and planted more than 50,000 trees
on some 100 hectares of the College
Campus. From here, and another experi-
mental planting by Abbot Kinney at
Rustic Canyon, Blue Gum in particular
has come to be synonomous with the
landscape of southern California, even to
spawn the “Eucalyptus School’ of painting
(focussed around Hanson Duvall Puthuff).
Cooper ultimately published his book
‘Forest Culture and Eucalyptus Trees’ in
1876, consisting mostly of reprinted lec-
tures of Mueller’s - and in one edition
even reprinting the whole of ‘Select Extra
Tropical Plants’, in what has been termed
an outrageous act of plagarism (Pescott
1922). However, there is no indication
that Mueller was ever unduly perturbed
by this.

213

Mueller Issue

Mueller, of course, received a vast quan-
tity of seed in exchange - much of which
went into the development of our Royal
Botanic Gardens, including an experimen-
tal patch of opium. It is well known that
he took Blackberry seed, Rubus fruticosus,
wherever he went on his travels in
Victoria - to sustain weary travellers of the
future! (Wakefield 1959; 1961). In one of
his lectures, he relates taking Dewberry
(Rubus canadensis) seed on a journey up
the Yarra to Mt. Baw Baw, scattering it in
the alpine bogs. In fact, his dreams for
acclimatisation of plants and animals
(alpacas roaming the High Plains, etc.), as
espoused lyrically in his various lectures,
would horrify many of us today.

Mueller was not the first to send seed
overseas. Maiden (1903) records that
Messmate Euc. obliqua was planted in the
botanic garden of the Count of Camalduli,
near Naples, some time before 1829,
under curator Frederick Dehnhardt. Red
Gum seeds must have arrived also around
the same time, which resulted in this
species acquiring the quite inappropriate
name of Euc. camaldulensis (Dehn).

In discussions with the then Catholic
Archbishop of Melbourne, Dr Goold (as
recorded by J S Duke, Melbourne Argus
22.8.31), Mueller learnt something of the
problems of the malaria ridden swamps of
the Campagna di Roma. His solution was
to plant Euc globulus, not only to lower
the water table, but also to clarify the air
and disinfect the soil from the falling
leaves. Dr. Goold duly left for the Vatican
Council of 1869 with a packet of seed
from the Baron, who passed it to the
Superior of the Trappist monks at the Tre
Fontane Monastery, in the heart of the
fever stricken region. The monks then
undertook the raising of some 55000 trees,
planted out in regular early morning for-
ays (perhaps when the air was deemed to
be fresh) over some years. The transfor-
mation was evidently profound, ultimately
enabling farming operations to be estab-
lished. When Mueller was advised of this
in an1879 letter from Dr Goold, he was so
flattered that the whole of his Lordships
letter was quoted in Eucalyptographia
(6th Decade), with his own extravagant
comments on the solution of a problem

214

that had defied all the rulers of Rome from
Appius Claudius to the present.**

Blue Gum seed went to many lands, and
established itself so well that in some
(such as Portugal) it has virtually dis-
placed much of the natural vegetation.
Mueller sent Acacia dealbata and A. mol-
lissima to South Africa where they flour-
ished so well away from the copper butter-
fly that we were soon importing wattle
bark from there. Saltbush (Atriplex)
species went to California and Arizona,
and in return he received Marram Grass
(Psamma arenaria), first planted at Port
Fairy, and Monterey Pine Pinus radiata, a
tree recorded by Ewart (Handbook of
Forest Trees... 1925) as being not abun-
dant, nor of any real commercial signifi-
cance, in California. Early reports of the
Royal Botanic Gardens contain lengthy
lists (pages!) of seed donors but little spe-
cific detail on what they sent.

* Mueller’s sensitvity to such matters was
undoubtedly hightened by losing both his par-
ents to TB, and his own brush with the disease .
He always remained something of a hypochon-
driac and was noted for muffling his neck with
a scarf, even at important social gatherings.

** R.F.Zacharin Emigrant Eucalypts p 58
records an entirely different story, wherein the
seed originated from Alfred Howitt, responding
to his father William who retired to Rome in
1870.

References

Pescott, E.E. (1922). Notes on Mueller’s Literary
Work. TheVictorian Naturalist 38, 102.

Maiden, J.H. (1903). ‘Critical Review of the Genus
Eucalyptus’ Part 1.

Wakefield, N. (1959), Baron von Mueller gave us
Blackberries, The Victorian Naturalist 76, 33.
Wakefield, N. (1961). Baron von Mueller and the
Blackberries, TheVictorian Naturalist 77, 258.

Alan Parkin
2 Hazel Drive, Templestowe, Victoria 3107.

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Mueller’s Magpies and Marsupial Wolves:

A Window into ‘What Might Have Been’.
R.N. Paddle'

Abstract.

Mueller is most often associated with the development of the sci in Victoria
However, he had an active interest in the dsvelogiasnt of Melbourne Zoo at c a aghted view of
Australian ecology. His concern and actions over the problem of foreign introductions (the
European magpie) and the extinction of the native fauna (the Thylacine), indicate that Mueller was
amongst the first scientists to appreciate the threat to the Australian environment from European
settlement. (The Victorian Naturalist 113, (4) 1996, 215-218)

At the request of Victoria’s Chief
Secretary, Baron Ferdinand von Mueller
convened the first meeting of the
Committee appointed to administer
Melbourne’s proposed Zoological
Gardens on 24th July 1858 and was duly
elected Secretary (Jenkins 1977). The
position of ‘Secretary’ was the title con-
firmed upon the curator of the zoo, until
the designated position of ‘Director’ was
established in 1882 (Zoological and
Acclimatisation Society 1884). An initial
land grant of 33 acres for the Zoological
Gardens was situated on the north side of
the Yarra river, but these ‘Richmond
Paddocks’ proved to be too swampy and
the collection was moved across the river
to within the Botanical Gardens. The early
zoological collection consisted of
Victorian native mammals and birds,
together with deer and camels and repre-
sentatives of other more unusual domesti-
cated ruminant species, foreign songbirds
and a few monkeys. As curator, Mueller
effectively ran the zoo for the first four
years of its existence. He not only con-
cerned himself with daily care, he organ-
ised the international exchange of animals,
building up the zoo’s display through
exchanging specimens with zoological,
botanical and acclimatisation societies in
Calcutta, Cologne, Copenhagen, Java,
London and Paris (de Courcy 1995).

In 1861 the English Magpies (Pica pica)
imported by the zoo committee member
Thomas Embling escaped from their cage
in the Botanical Gardens. Unable to effect
their capture, Mueller kept his eye on the
escapees. He noticed how very destructive

IPsychology Department, Australian Catholic
University, Christ Campus.

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

they were to the smaller native bird
species, so, in order to prevent the
Magpies from reproducing and spreading
beyond the gardens, he shot them. Even
though the objects of the Acclimatisation
Society - the designated body then in con-
trol of the development of the zoo - were
only meant to be for ‘the introduction,
acclimatisation and domestification of _
innoxious animals’ (Acclimatisation
Society minutes, August 1861, cited in
Jenkins 1977, p61), and the English
Magpies had proved themselves, on the
contrary, quite noxious, Embling was
incensed and his acclimatisation col-
leagues on the zoo committee turned
against Mueller. From their perspective,
the real reason for the importation of
English Magpies was to acclimatise, breed
and then release them in large numbers to
replace the unwanted native birds as
quickly as possible. Animosity towards,
and rumour against, Mueller was spread
by the hard-line acclimatisers on the zoo
committee (de Courcy 1995). The animal
collection was removed from the
Botanical Gardens, and an attempt made
to re-establish the zoo on the ‘Richmond
Paddocks’ site. But this again proved
unsuccessful and, after some political agi-
tation, the granting of a replacement 55
acres at Royal Park in 1862 saw the
Zoological Gardens, under W.G. Sprigg as
secretary-curator, finally separated from
their botanical counterpart.

Melbourne Zoo did not exhibit a
Thylacine or Marsupial Wolf (Thylacinus
cynocephalus) until after it had moved to
the Royal Park site. The Thylacine was
obtained from an unknown Tasmanian
source on 4th November 1864. The

215

Mueller Issue

specimen adapted well to captivity and
survived until 12th January 1869. Shortly
after its arrival Mueller, in the course of
his usual botanical correspondence with
the Launceston naturalist Ronald
Campbell Gunn [FRS], wrote inquiring
about the possibility of obtaining
Thylacine specimens.

Gunn had kept Thylacines as pets and
supplied specimens to different institu-
tions for zoological display. He had suc-
cessfully sent a pair of Thylacines to the
Zoological Society of London in 1849, for
display at Regent's Park Zoo (Gunn
1850). Intrigued by the species’ behaviour
and potential he set out - as others had
before him - to domesticate a specimen. In
1851 he had noted: ‘My living Thylacine
is becoming tamer: it seems very far from
being a vicious animal at its worst, and the
name Tiger or Hyzna gives a most unjust
idea of its fierceness’ (Gunn 1851). In
1854 he provided a Thylacine for Richard
Propsting’s animal collection on public
display in Hobart (Propsting 1854), and he
despatched a family of four Thylacines to
Regent’s Park Zoo in 1863. Only two of
these specimens survived the voyage and
they were to be the last Thylacines to
enter London Zoo for 21 years (Gunn
1863; Sclater 1884; Zoological Society of
London 1872). Gunn may also have been
the unidentified source supplying
Melbourne Zoo’s 1864 specimen.

In May 1865 Gunn wrote to Mueller,
offering him a family of Thylacines, a
mother with three young. Mueller grate-
fully accepted the offer on the 20th May
(1865a) and received the specimens on the
16th June:

I received your very kind letter of the

14th together with the 4 Thylacini in

excellent health. It is indeed a pre-
cious gift and I trust to fulfil now the
wish of the Parisian Savants, who
were so eager to secure this rare crea-
ture for the Jardin des Plantes. I shall
not fail to render known who is the
real donor. (1865b)
Mueller recognised the increasing rarity of
the species, and the value of the donation,
expressing the hope that :‘As these ani-
mals most probably would breed in not
too confined a state, the species, ere long

216

perhaps extinct, might be kept up in
menageries from your importation’
(1865b). Mueller’s prediction of the future
for the species was well placed: the last
known Thylacine died in Hobart Zoo on
7th September 1936, Unfortunately the
conditions for successful Thylacine breed-
ing in captivity - the isolation of an unre-
lated adult pair - were rarely met; the only
confirmed instance of captive breeding
took place at Melbourne Zoo in 1899.

Concerned about the loss on board ship
of half the Thylacines Gunn sent to
London in 1863, Mueller questioned Gunn
as to whether the young should be separat-
ed from their mother (1865a). The family
was kept together but the decision was
made to overwinter the Thylacines in the
botanical gardens.

The weather is now too cold to send

the animals around Cape Horn. I shall

probably wait til spring when the

Yorkshire goes & when I can place

them together with the sheep on board

under the care of a very trustworthy
man. (1865b)
In a further letter to Gunn, Mueller noted
that “The Thylacini...continue in good
health’ (1865c).

The Yorkshire duly set sail for London
on 14th November 1865. How the
Thylacine family fared on the journey,
how many survived and where they went
to on arrival in 1866 are, at present,
unknown.

Examination of the historical records of
the Jardin des Plantes has failed to locate
details of the arrival of their first
Thylacine specimen on display. Heinz
Moeller who has published extensively on
Thylacine anatomy and records of
Thylacines in European zoos, notes that
two or more Thylacine specimens were
held in the Jardin des Plantes. The last
known specimen died in 1891. Details of
the very first specimen remain, at present,
unknown (Claude 1996; Moeller 1993),
but could conceivably date from 1866.

It is also possible that members of the
family were separated on their arrival, and
donated to other learned individuals and
institutions, Mueller may therefore have
been responsible for the only live
Thylacine presently known from continen-

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

tal Europe at this time. When the Berlin
Zoo received a second Thylacine in 1871
(it received its first in July 1864 but it had
lived only four months) the next edition of
the zoo guide suggested it was the only
Thylacine now alive in Europe as the
Vienna animal had died in 1866 [‘das
Wiener Tier war 1866 gestorben’], (cited
in Klés 1988). This casually mentioned
Thylacine living in Vienna in 1866 may
well have originated from Mueller.

Mueller began supplying the Stuttgart
Natural History Museum with zoological
and botanical specimens in the 1860’s. His
vertebrate donations alone totalled 2,269
specimens, covering 837 species, one of
which was a Thylacine (Kéning 1991).
However, the registration date for this
specimen - a whole skin mount plus skull
- (Fig 1) is recorded as September 1889
(Joan Dixon, pers. comm), and its most
likely provenance was from deceased
stock at Melbourne Zoo, which is known
to have purchased six Thylacine speci-
mens from northern Tasmania between
1883 and 1886.

It is difficult to imagine how Mueller
could have filled his life with any

Fig. 1. Th ,
donated by Mueller in 1889.

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

additional professional responsibilities and
activities. But his presentation of
Thylacine specimens, both alive and dead,
to European scientific institutions is mere-
ly one expression of his zoological inter-
ests; the depth of which may be gauged by
the extent of his donations to the Stuttgart
Natural History Museum. His prediction
of extinction for the Thylacine and con-
cern over the introduction and release of
exotic species demonstrates how finely
attuned he was to the entirety of
Australian ecological relationships. Were
it not for internal acclimatisation politics
within the committee overseeing the zoo,
he would, in all likelihood, have continued
as curator. Mueller’s environmental con-
cerns were denigrated by the economic
rationalists of his time, the acclimatisers
who saw little of tangible value in the
Australian environment and sought, with
the concept of ‘progress’ in mind, to alter
its unfamiliar wildness as rapidly as possi-
ble, and replace it with economic produc-
tivity and familiar faces. Having removed
Mueller as curator, the Acclimatisation
Society of Victoria went on to play its pre-
eminent role in the destruction of the

Switole skin ae of an adult male Thylacine in the Stiittgart Natural History Museum,

217

Mueller Issue

Australian environment. For example,
members of the Association helped spread
Rabbits, release Foxes, import and release
Hares, five species of Deer, two species of
Sparrow, Starlings, Blackbirds, Pigeons,
Doves, Indian Mynas, European
Waterfowl and Californian Quail all of
which became established within Victoria.
They also supplied specimens for release
by individuals and societies in other
Australasian colonies (Jenkins 1977; Rolls
1984),

How great has been the environmental
destruction in the 100 years since
Mueller’s death, and how significant the
decrease in Australian biodiversity! One is
forced to contemplate how different the
Australian environment would be today if
only Mueller had been retained as curator
of the Melbourne Zoological Gardens.

Acknowledgments

Thanks are expressed to Prof. A.M. Lucas,
King’s College, University of London, for his
continuing attempts to locate European-based
records of Mueller’s Thylacines in 1866; to Dr
Wirth of the Stuttgart Natural History Museum
for the photograph, to Joan Dixon, Museum of
Victoria, for access to her personally obtained
records of Thylacines held in overseas muse-
ums, and to John Lowe for his services as trans-
lator. The professional advice and assistance
from archivists and librarians at the Mitchell
Library, Sydney, Public Records Office,
Melbourne, and Museum of Victoria was
invaluable, as well as the assistance provided
by Chris Larcombe, Chief Executive Officer at
Melbourne Zoo. The continuing encouragement
and support of Prof. Rod Home, University of
Melbourne and Prof. Graham Mitchell,
Commonwealth Serum Laboratories is also
appreciated.

References

Claude, C, (1996). ‘Der Beutelwolf. (Thylacinus,
Harris 1808). Leben und Sterben einer Tierant’,
(Zoo- logisches Museum der Universitat Zurich:
Zurich),

de Courcy, C. (1995). “The Zoo Story’. (Penguin:
Australia).

Gunn, R.C. (1850). “Letter to the Secretary, Zoological
Society of London, 29/12/1849’. Proceedings of the
Zoological Society of London, 90-91.

Gunn, R.C. (1851). Proceedings, 9/7/1851, Papers and
Proceedings of the Royal Society of Van Diemen's
Land, 157.

Gunn, R.C. (1863). ‘Letter to the Secretary, Zoological
Society of London, 19/1/1863", Proceedings of the
Zoological Society of London, 103-104,

Jenkins, C.F.H. (1977). ‘The Noah's Ark Syndrome’.
(Zoological Gardens Board of Western Australia:
Australia).

Klés, U. (1988). Die Kleinsaugerhaltung im Zoo

218

Berlin, Teill II: Beuteltiere. Bongo 14, 19-32.

Koning, C. (1991). Forschungsreisende und ihre
Verdienste um den Aufbau der zoologischen
Sammlung. Stuttgarter Beitraége zur Naturkunde 3,
21-25.

Moeller, H.F. (1993). ‘Beutelwélfe (Thylacinus cyno-
cephalus) in Zoologischen Garten und Museen’.
Zeitschrift des Kélner Zoo 2, 67-71.

Mueller, F.v. (1865a). Letter to R.C. Gunn, 20/5/1865.
R.C. Gunn Correspondence, Mitchell Library, State
Library of New South Wales, Sydney.

Mueller, F.v. (1865b). Letter to R.C. Gunn, 16/6/1865.
R.C. Gunn Correspondence, Mitchell Library, State
Library of New South Wales, Sydney.

Mueller, F.v. (1865c). Letter to R.C. Gunn, 2/7/1865.
R.C. Gunn Correspondence, Mitchell Library, State
Library of New South Wales, Sydney.

Propsting, R. (1854). Letter to R.C. Gunn, 10/1/1854.
R.C. Gunn Correspondence, Mitchell Library, State
Library of New South Wales, Sydney,

Rolls, E.C. (1984). ‘They All Ran Wild’ (second edi-
tion). (Angus and Robertson: Australia).

Sclater, P.L. (1884). Additions to the Society’s
Menagerie during the month of November 1884.
Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London,
561-562.

Zoological and Acclimatisation Society of Victoria.
(1884). *Fifth Minute Book of the Zoological and
Acclimatisation Society of Victoria, 1880 - 1884’.

Archives of the Royal Melbourne Zoological and
Acclimatisation Society, Public Records Office,
Laverton, Melbourne.

Zoological Society of London. (1872). ‘Revised List
of the Vertebrated Animals Now or Lately Living in
the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London’.
Sth ed, (Longmans, Green, Reader and Dyer:
London).

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Mueller’s naming of Places and Plants In Central Australia
- Victorian Eponyms

Linden Gillbank'

Abstract

Mueller was largely responsible for determinin i

D E y ¢ the shape of European botanical k

inland Australia during the second half of the nineteenth century. In tins aierota Gale.
iographic features, Mueller honoured fellow Victorians including explorers, doctors and politicians

(The Victorian Naturalist 113,1 996, 219-226).

Introduction

Floral and physiographic features of the
arid interior of Australia bear the names of
nineteenth century residents of the colony
of Victoria. Some names are well-known:
for example Victoria’s governor La Trobe
and government astronomer Ellery -
whose names are attached to a species of
Eremophila and a tributary of the Finke
River. Other names are of less well-known
Victorians. The person who was largely
responsible for these names was Baron
Ferdinand von Mueller. As Victoria’s
government botanist from the begining of
1853 until his death in 1896, he provided
names for places as well as plants in cen-
tral Australia, many of them commemo-
rating fellow Victorians.

This paper describes how Victoria's
Government Botanist wielded such extra-
colonial naming power over part of the
Australian landscape which was never part
of Victoria and which he never visited;
and reveals some of the Victorians whom
Mueller chose for phytological and phys-
iographical commemoration. Mueller’s
plant names are presented as he record-
ed them - with specific names commem-
orating people begining with capital let-
ters, as was the custom in the nine-
teenth century.

Mueller and Exploration

Exploration was an integral part of
Mueller’s early botanical work. During
the 1850s he trekked extensively across
the Australian landscape in search of
plants. His first substantial floral foray in
Australia - from Adelaide along the
Flinders Ranges in 1851 - introduced
Mueller to Australia’s desert flora in the
wild. Following his appointment as

‘History and Philosophy of Science Department,
nivernity of Melbourne, Parkville, Victoria 3052.

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

Victoria’s Government Botanist in
January 1853, Mueller carried out exten-
sive botanical expeditions in Victoria and
participated in the British government’s
North Australian Exploring Expedition led
by Augustus Gregory (Cohn, this volume).
With Gregory, Mueller used the Victoria
River and Sturt Creek as he had used the
Flinders ranges four years earlier - to
explore and botanize into the undocument-
ed interior of the continent (Gillbank and
Maroske 1996). As botanist to the North
Australian Exploring Expedition, the
young Mueller enhanced his skills and
reputation in both exploration and botany.

Mueller never reached the arid centre of
Australia but maintained a continuing
interest in its exploration and botany.
After Gregory’s expedition, Mueller
increasingly enjoyed the role of Australian
botanical authority, and plants collected
during several waves of inland exploration
were sent to him to document - including
expeditions led by Babbage, Stuart, Burke
and Giles (Gillbank and Maroske 1996).
Mueller documented many of these plants
in Latin in his journal Fragmenta
Phytographiae Australiae [Fragments of
Australian Botany], and in English in The
Victorian Naturalist (after its establish-
ment in 1884).

Mueller did not sit idly waiting for plant
specimens to reach him. He argued pub-
licly for further exploration of the interior,
helped initiate the expedition now known
as the Burke and Wills expedition, and
helped Giles plan, publicize and fund his
expeditions.

Desert Lovers

Mueller was fascinated by the remark-
able flora of the arid interior, commenting
in 1858 that:

219

Mueller Issue

‘A traveller in the extensive desert-
tracts of Australia is often well
rewarded for his toils and privations
by the enjoyment which the sight of
the varied works of the Creator must
ever cause to contemplative minds;
more especially when it is observed
that, with the increase of the country’s
barrenness, variety and beauty in the
vegetation increase in proportion.’
(Mueller 1860)

He was particularly impressed with the

diverse beauty of plants whose generic

name Eremophila means desert-loving:

‘Prominent amongst the attractive

plants to be met with in the solitudes
of the interior are those of the
Myoporinous order .,. [including the
genus] Eremophila, ... comprising
forms exquisitely ornamental.’
(Mueller 1860)
Mueller received the plants collected dur-
ing Benjamin Herschel Babbage’s 1858
exploration north of Lake Torrens, South
Australia. In his botanical report Mueller
(1859) suggested that
‘the most interesting and certainly the
most ornamental portion of the vegeta-
tion in the territory lately explored is
constituted by the numerous and gor-
geous species of Eremophila. The addi-
tions to this genus now obtained
induced me to review once more all the
species with which I am acquainted’.

In reviewing the genus Eremophila
R.Br., Mueller honoured Victoria’s first
governor, Charles Joseph La Trobe, who
had created the position .of Government
Botanist and appointed Mueller to it.
While trekking down Sturt Creek with
Gregory, Mueller had collected a ‘magnif-
icent’ Eremophila which he wanted to
name after La Trobe, whose ‘unlimited
kindness’ was ‘in the desert vividly
retained’ in his mind, hoping that it would
‘never sink in oblivion’ (Mueller to
Hooker, April 6, 1857). Mueller (1858-9;
1859) expressed his indebtedness to La
Trobe by naming and describing
Eremophila Latrobei in the first volume of
his Fragmenta and in his botanical report
of the Babbage expedition. Mueller (1859)
noted that this ‘noble species’ was
‘well worthy of bearing the name of the

220

excellent Charl. Jos. La Trobe, a great
patron of Botany, and to whose love for
science the botanical department under my
administration owes its origin.’

Mueller did provide a lasting botanical
memorial to La Trobe. That attractive
desert lover, with its bright-red pendulous
floral bells, still carries his name - both its
formal scientific name, E. latrobei, and its
common name, Latrobe’s Desert Fuchsia.

Of explorers, living and dead

In the 1860s Mueller named many plants
collected in the arid interior during several
expeditions - John McDouall Stuart’s
expeditions, the Victorian Exploring
Expedition and its subsequent relief
expeditions.

Mueller was an active and enthusiastic
proponent of a plan for the Philosophical
Institute of Victoria (later the Royal
Society of Victoria) to send a Victorian
scientific expedition across Australia. A
foundation member of its Exploration
Committee, Mueller supported the com-
mittee’s eventual choice of route but not
leader (Bonyhady 1991). On the Victorian
Exploring Expedition, which was renamed
the Burke and Wills Expedition, and two
relief expeditions, three medical officers -
Beckler, Wheeler, and Murray - doubled
as plant collectors and sent specimens to
Mueller. In the early 1860s Mueller used
specimens they collected to botanically
commemorate people connected with the
expedition and several other Victorians.
Their specimens are type specimens which
are still housed in Melbourne’s National
Herbarium.

The main expedition’s medical officer
and botanist, Dr Hermann Beckler, who
had previously collected plants for
Mueller, was the only expedition member
to collect plants. However he did not
accompany Burke and Wills north of the
depot camp on the Darling River (near
Menindie), but remained in charge of that
camp. From December 1860 to June 1861,
while caring for the sick, Beckler collect-
ed plants in the north-west corner of NSW
and just across the border into Queensland
(Bonyhady 1991; Willis 1962). At the
Royal Society’s monthly meeting in May
1861 Mueller exhibited several plant

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

specimens which Beckler had collected
near the Darling River while searching for
two members of Burke’s exploring party
(Argus 28 May, 1861).

Although Mueller had previously
received plant specimens from the vicinity
of the Darling River, Beckler’s collection
contained many plants still awaiting scien-
tific names. In naming them in the second
and third volumes of his Fragmenta,
Mueller commemorated people who had
supported the expedition and his Botanic
Garden (Table 1). They included three
Victorian residents - Hopwood, Docker
and Greeves - all of whom Mueller
acknowledged in his annual reports as
donors of plant material - seeds, living
plants, and dried herbarium specimens.

Mueller (1860-1) named Anthocercis
Hopwoodii in honour of Henry Hopwood,
former convict, entrepreneur and founder
of the town of Echuca, who donated £100
in return for being accepted as a member
of the Philosophical Institute - the most
enthusiastic response to the Institute’s
appeal for £2000 (Bonyhady 1991).
Mueller later transferred this alkaloid-rich
‘Pituri’ plant to the genus Duboisia.
Mueller (1860-1) named Acanthocladium
Dockeri to commemorate the Reverend
Joseph Docker of ‘Bontharambo’ on the
Ovens River (near Wangaratta), who
donated £100 to the Victorian Exploring
Expedition so that he would not seem
lacking in either public spirit or gratitude
to his ‘adopted country’ (Bonyhady 1991).
Later Mueller (1862-3) named a woolly
herb which Beckler collected near the

Barrier Range Millotia Greevesii (Fig.1),
after the multifaceted Augustus Greeves,
M.L.A., surgeon, politician, businessman
and former Mayor of Melbourne.

When Burke and his three companions
did not return to Melbourne, relief expedi-
ions were sent out in search of the miss-
ing explorers. Alfred Howitt’s first relief
party reached the depot camp in August
1861. Their medical officer, Walter Frank
Wheeler, later collected plants beyond
Beckler’s most northerly collections -
between Stokes Range and Cooper’s
Creek (Willis 1963). Wheeler is commem-
orated in the names of two plants he sent
Mueller. One was among the herbarium
specimens of Australian legumes which
Mueller sent to George Bentham to deter-
mine. In his Flora Australiensis Bentham
(1864 II) described and named Jsotropis
Wheeleri. Mueller sent his collection of
Australian members of the Euphorbiaceae
to the French botanist, H, Baillon, for tax-
onomic enumeration. Baillon (1866,p.286)
named one Euphorbia Wheeleri after its
collector.

The surgeon and plant collector on
Howitt’s second relief expedition, James
Patrick Murray, on leave from the
Melbourne Hospital, relieved Wheeler on
New Year’s Day 1862 at the depot camp
on the Darling River. From March to
October 1862 Murray collected extensive-
ly in the vicinity of Cooper’s Creek. A
July trek across Sturt’s Stony Desert to the
Diamantina River yielded many ‘new’
species for Mueller to name (Willis 1962).
In naming two of them Prilotus Murrayi

Table 1. Plants collected during inland expeditions in the early 1860s, which Mueller named (or
sent to others to name) to commemorate Victorians.

Original name

Acacia Murrayana
Acanthocladium Dockerii
Anthocercis Hopwoodii
Elachopappus Rudallii
Eremophila Willsii
Euphorbia Wheeleri
Eurybia Ferresii
TIsotropis Wheeleri
Millotia Greevesti
Prilotus Murrayi
Swainsona Burkei
Zygophyllum Howittit

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

Current name [APNI]
Acacia murrayana Benth,
Acanthocladium dockeri F,Muell.
Duboisia hopwoodii (F.Muell.)F.Muell.
Myriocephalus rudallii (F.Muell.) Benth.
Eremophila willsii F.Muell.

Euphorbia wheeleri Baillon

Olearia ferresii (F.Muell.)Benth.
Isotropis wheeleri Benth.
Millotia greevesii F.Muell.
Ptilotus murrayi F.Muell.
Swainsona burkei Benth.
Zygophyllum howittii F.Muell.

221

Mueller Issue

Fig. 1. Illustration accompanying Mueller’s
description of Millotia Greevesti |Fragmenta 3:
plate 19]

and Zygophyllum Howittii Mueller (1862-
3) botanically commemorated Murray and
Howitt. Among the specimens which
Mueller sent Bentham was a wattle whose
flowers Murray had collected near
Cooper’s Creek. In his Flora Australiensis
Bentham (1864, II) named it Acacia
Murrayana to commemorate its collector.

Mueller used a small daisy which
Murray collected near Cooper’s Creek to
commemorate another early Melbourne
medical man - James Thomas Rudall.
Mueller (1862-3) named it Elachopappus
Rudallii the year before Rudall named his
baby son James Ferdinand.

It is a sad irony that two plants collected
during Stuart’s successful expeditions
allowed Mueller to commemorate Burke
and Wills who, unlike Stuart, died during
their transcontinental expedition. Both
plants have purple flowers. After Howitt’s
news of their death reached Melbourne,
Mueller (1862-3) named an Eremophila
with striking lilac-purple flowers, which

222

Stuart collected near the Finke river,
Eremophila Willsii (Fig. 2) to commemo-
rate the young William Wills. Its common
names include Sandhill Native Fuchsia
and Wills’ Desert Fuchsia. Robert O’ Hara
Burke is commemorated in the name of a
legume which Stuart collected and
Mueller forwarded to Bentham. In his
Flora Australiensis Bentham (1864 IT)
described and named Swainsona Burkei.
Mueller also used a daisy collected dur-
ing Stuart’s expedition to commemorate
Victoria’s Government Printer, John
Ferres. His name appears on Mueller’s
annual reports and other publications
some of which were in Latin. Mueller was
pleased to have them printed at the
Government Printing Office where ‘men
of classical knowledge are engaged as
readers and compositors’ (Cavanagh
1988). Mueller (1862-3) named a sticky,
scented, shrub with large daisy flowers
which Stuart collected on Brinkley’s Bluff
in the MacDonnell Ranges Eurybia
Ferresii (Fig.3). He also dedicated early

Fig. 2. Illustration accompanying Mueller’s
description of Ermophila Willsii [Fragmenta 3:
plate 20]

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

4 .
volumes of his Fragmenta to ‘Joannis
Ferres’.

Mueller and Giles
; During the 1870s, the overland telegraph
line stretched northward across the
continent. Its telegraph stations greatly
facilitated European access to the interior
on both sides of the telegraph line,
prompting a new wave of exploration still
driven by the hope of finding water, pas-
tures and minerals. Mueller anticipated
new botanical wealth from this wave, and
was keen to support Ernest Giles and other
explorers. As he explained in his introduc-
tion to Giles’ Geographic Travels in
Central Australia, which he also edited,
Mueller publicized Giles’ expeditions and
sought and provided financial support. He
helped plan Giles’ expeditions and provid-
ed maps. Giles (1875) mentioned ‘a small
German map of Australia, given me
amongst numerous others by my kind and
generous patron, the Baron von Mueller’.
In 1872 Giles applied many European
names to physiographic features in central
Australia. Some were the names of
Mueller’s European correspondents, col-
leagues and patrons, In the published
report of his first expedition, Giles (1875)
recorded some of these - peaks in the
MacDonnell Ranges named after Dr Otto
Sonder, Count Zeil and Baron von
Heuglin; ranges after Baron Justus von
Liebig and Professor Ehrenberg; a bluff
after Dr Haast: a watercourse after
Professor Augustus Petermann; Kata Tjuta
after Olga, Queen of Wuerttemberg (the
year after Mueller received the hereditary
title of Freiherr from the King of
Wuerttemberg); and a salt-lake after
another patron of science - Amadeus,
King of Spain.
Victorians were also commemorated.
Giles (1875) named ‘a charming little
oasis’ Glen Edith after his Melbourne
niece, and a range after her father, Giles’
brother-in-law, George Gill, who, like
Mueller, had provided funds for the expe-
dition. Two tributaries of the Finke River
were named after Mueller’s associates.
Giles (1875) named ‘Ellery’s Creek’ after
Mueller’s fellow public servant, ‘our well-
known and esteemed astronomer, Mr.

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

Fig. 3. Illustration accompanying Mueller’s
description of Eurybia Ferresii |Fragmenta 3:
plate 18]

Ellery, F.R.S.’, and ‘Rudall’s Creek’ ‘in
honour of an eminent surgeon and
promoter of science in the Victorian
metropolis, and a friend of Baron Mueller’
- James Rudall. This was a decade after
Mueller had attatched his name to the
small Poached Egg Daisy, and several
years after Mueller had helped him trans-
jate a German book on mental health for
publication in English in Melbourne.

To enable Giles to undertake a second
expedition westward from the overland
telegraph, Mueller sought financial sup-
port by offering an eponymic inducement,
For the privilege of being ‘one of 25
Gentlemen’ each subscribing £10, the
donor ‘shall be honored by his name being
given to some new geographic locality’
(Mueller to Mackinnon, 7 Jan. 1873).
Mueller also arranged for William
Tietkens to gain botanical experience
before joining Giles’ second expedition in
1873 (Hardy 1906).

Some features were still named in hon-
our of foreign dignitaries. At Mueller’s

223

Mueller Issue

request Giles ‘bestowed the names of
H.R.H. Prince Alfred (the Duke of
Edinburgh) and of her Imperial Highness
the Princess Marie’ on two mountains he
‘discovered’ about the time of their mar-
riage (Mueller to Bowen, Sept.5, 1874),
Mueller also botanically commemorated
the princess by naming the palm, whose
leaves Giles had collected in the Finke
gorge, Livistona Mariae (Mueller 1878-
81,p.54). This was one of the plants Giles
collected during his first and second expe-
ditions many of which Mueller named in
volume 8 of his Fragmenta (Table 2). One
was another beautiful “desert-lover’ with
purple bell-shaped flowers which Mueller
named to commemorate the explorer:
Mueller (1872-4) named an undocument-
ed Eremophila, which Giles collected in
the MacDonnell Ranges, E. Gilesii. It is
sometimes called Giles’ Desert Fuchsia.
Mueller subsequently named other plants
after Giles and Tietkens.

Mueller used plants collected during
Giles’ first two expeditions to commemo-
rate four Melbourne medical men -
Wilkie, Farrage, Thomson and Lewellin.
Mueller (1872-4) named a mintbush
Prostanthera Wilkieana to honour the
Melbourne physician and politician, David
Wilkie M.D.. Wilkie shared Mueller’s
interest in natural history, and like Mueller
had given time, ideas and money to help
initiate the Philosophical Institute’s expe-
dition, served on the Exploration
Committee, and was very critical of the
Burke and Wills’ expedition (Bonyhady,
passim.). Mueller (1872-4) named an
Hibiscus-like shrub from the MacDonnell
Ranges Hibiscus Farragei after Dr
William Farrage. Its purple flower resem-
bles Sturt’s Desert Rose (Gossypium stur-

tianum), but because its style differs from
that of both Hibiscus and Gossypium, it
has been transferred to the genus Radyera,
but is still known commonly as Bush
Hibiscus. Mueller (1872-4) named a small
pale perennial daisy growing in rocky
crevices in the MacDonnell Ranges after
Dr William Thomson, an energetic advo-
cate of the contagionist doctrine and
Darwinian ideas (Gandevia 1976).
Helichrysum thomsonii is commonly
called Thomson’s Daisy. Dicrastylis
lewellini commemorates John Henry Hill
Lewellin, M.D.. Mueller (1872-4) named
it Chloanthes Lewellini and later trans-
ferred it to the genus Dicrastylis. Mueller
gave Lewellin a copy of Fragmenta
volume 8 which contained his description
of Chloanthes Lewellini and inscribed it to
his ‘friend Henry Lewellin, a most skillful
physician’. This volume is in the library of
Victoria’s National Herbarium (pers.
comm. Helen Cohn, May 1996)

Several other species of Dicrastylis
commemorate people. As well as naming
one after Giles, Mueller (1872-4) named a
yellow woolly flowered one Dicrastyles
Beveridgei after Peter Beveridge of
‘Tyntynder’ on the Murray River (near
Swan Hill), who had donated plants and
seeds to Mueller’s Botanic Garden.

A yellow-flowered herb which Giles
collected near Lake Amadeus commemo-
rates a botanical artist, Fanny Anne
Charsley, who painted local wildflowers
during her decade domiciled in
Melbourne. On her return to England in
1866, thirteen of her water colour paint-
ings, ‘large quarto lithograph (or zinco-
graph) plates of excellent drawings of the
flowers, coloured with perfect accuracy’
were published in a book, The Wildflowers

Table 2. Plants collected during Giles’ expeditions which Mueller named to commemorate

Victorians.

Mueller’s name
Chloanthes Lewellini
Dicrastyles Beveridgei
Hannafordia Bissillii
Helichrysum Thomsoni
Helipterum Charsleyae
Hibiscus Farragei
Phyllota Luehmanni
Prostanthera Wilkieana
Wrixonia prostantheroides

224

Current name [APNI]

Dicrastylis lewellinii (F.Muell.) F.Muell.
Dicrastylis beveridgei F,Muell.

Hannafordia bissillii F.Muell.

Helichrysum thomsonii F.Muell.

Helipterum charsleyae F.Muell.

Radyera farragei (F.Muell.) Fryxell & Hashmi
Phyllota luehmannii F.Muell.

Prostanthera wilkieana F.Muell.

Wrixonia prostantheroides F.Muell.

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

around Melbourne, which she dedicated
to Mueller who had provided taxonomic
details (Cavanagh 19831). It was possibly
the first ‘popular’ illustrated book on the
Victorian flora. In response Mueller
(1872-4) named a daisy which Giles col-
lected near Lake Amadeus - Helipterum
Charsleyae. H. charsleyae is not, as it is
sometimes called, ‘Charles Daisy’. There
is no misspelling in the specific name.

In volume 10 of his Fragmenta Mueller
continued to name plants collected during
Giles’ expeditions between the overland
telegraph and the western coast of
Australia in the mid-1870s (Table 2).
Mueller (1876-7) named Hannafordia
Bissillii after Walter Bissill of ‘Belvoir
Park’ at Ravenswood (between
Castlemaine and Bendigo), who wrote
about local wildflowers and sent seeds and
specimens to Mueller.

A generic name also commemorates a
Victorian. In naming a relative of
Prostanthera collected during Giles’ 1875
westward expedition, Wrixonia prostan-
theroides, Mueller (1876-7) established
the genus Wrixonia and commended
Henry John Wrixon, M.L.A., a barrister
and politician, for his support of science.

1890s

Mueller continued to botanically com-
memorate people into the 1890s. He
wished to honour Melbourne’s Town
Clerk, Edmund Gerald FitzGibbon, who
donated plants to the Botanic Garden and
whose voluminous correspondence with
Mueller related to various aspects of the
Botanic Garden, Mueller had received
several specimens of an everlasting from
other collectors, and on receipt of a speci-
men collected during Tietkens’ 1889
expedition, Mueller (1890a and b) pub-
lished the name and description of
Helipterum Fitzgibboni first in The
Victorian Naturalist and later in the
Transactions and Proceedings of the
Royal Society of South Australia. Mueller
(1890a) explained that:

‘The specific name of this exceeding-
ly pretty ‘Everlasting’ was chosen
already some years ago in honour of
E.G. Fitzgibbon Esq., who through a
third of a century so dignifiedly held

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

the onerous office of Melbourne
town-clerk, and who with genial and
enlightened circumspectness has also
constantly promoted science-research-
es in the greatest of southern cities.’
A common name of Helipterum fitzgib-
bonii is Fitzgibbon’s Daisy.

Long after commemorating his assistant,
George Luehmann, in naming a legume
collected during Giles’ 1875 expedition
Phyllota Luehmanni (Mueller 1876-7), he
named a chenopod collected by Rev.
Schwarz from Hermannsburg Lutheran
Mission on the Finke River, Bassia
Luehmanni, Mueller (1890a) dedicated it
to

‘“G. Luehmann, Esq., F.L.S., First

Assistant in the Phytologic

Department here, who during many

years has zealously aided the

researches of its founder’.
Now included in the genus Maireana, M.
luehmannii still commemorates Mueller’s
assistant.

During the last years of his life Mueller
helped Professor Ralph Tate of the
University of Adelaide, determine plants
collected during the 1891 Elder Scientific
Exploring Expedition and the 1894 Horn
Scientific Expedition (Gillbank and
Maroske, 1996). In 1896, the year of
Mueller’s death, Darwinia Luehmanni
was also dedicated to Luehmann in recog-
nition of his taxonomic help with plants
collected during the Elder expedition
(Mueller and Tate, 1896,p.353).

Eponymous Echoes

Although taxonomic changes have
erased some of Mueller’s plant names,
enough survive for his commemoration of
fellow Victorians to remain etched in the
flora and physiography of the arid interior
of Australia, Many plants still carry the
names of Mueller’s Victorian colleagues
and contributors, and other Victorians
who shared his passionate interest in
plants and exploration. They include
explorers, collectors, doctors, politicians
and a female botanical artist.

Acknowledgements

I wish to thank Sara Maroske of the
Mueller Correspondence Project and

225

Mueller Issue

Helen Cohn at the Library of Victoria’s
National Herbarium, for generous
provision of information and comments.

References
Unpublished correspondence (Courtesy

of the Mueller Correspondance project)

Mueller to George Bowen, Sept.5, 1874. Public
Record Office London, CO309/112, Enclosure to
Despatch No.5 of Sept.8, 1874.

Mueller to William Hooker, April 6, 1857. Royal
Botanic Gardens Kew, Director’s letters, vol
LXXIYV, Australia letters 1851-8, letter no 159.

Mueller to Mackinnon, Jan.7, 1873. La Trobe Library,
Australian Manuscripts Collection, Box 12/6
Mackinnon Papers.

Published sources

APNI - Australian Plant Names Index. Australian
National Botanic Gardens’ Database on the Internet.
Argus 28 May, 1861. p.5.

Baillon, H. (1866). Species Euphorbiacearum.
Euphorbiacees Australiennes. Adansonia 6.

Bentham, G. (1863-78). Flora Australiensis, 7 vols,
(Lovell Reeve and Co,: London)

Bonyhady, T., (1991). Burke and Wills. From
Melbourne to Myth, (Dayid Ell Press: Sydney)
Cavanagh, A.K, (1983). Fanny Anne Charsley and Her
Wildflower Paintings. Victorian Naturalist 100: 21-4.
Cavanagh, T.[A.K.] (1988). The Victorian
Government Printer and Early Scientific Publishing in
Victoria; Ferdinand von Mueller, the Royal Society
and R. Brough Smyth. Riverina Library Review 5:
262-276.

Gandevia, B. (1976). Thomson, William. Australian
Dictionary of Biography 6: 270-2.

Giles, E. (1875), Geographic travels in Central
Australia from 1872 to 1874. Melbourne. Facsimile
edition published in 1993 by Corkwood Press,
Bundaberg, Queensland.

Gillbank, L. and Maroske, S. (1996). Behind the
botany of the Horn Expedition: Ferdinand Mueller’s

226

Meuller’s privately expressed disappointment at not writing Flora
Australiensis is poignantly expressed in a letter to Professor Oliver, Christmas
1863 *...The effect of the existing arrangement has been greatly to disturb my
plan of life, to bend my spirit to proceed on my path, and to render me much
less bouyant to work as I otherwise might have done. Having spent the best
years of youthful vigour, enormous exertion and almost a fortune on a plan
which now, to a certain extent, had been frustrated,...’

documentation of the larapintine flora. Jn “Central
Australia and the 1894 Horn Expedition’. Eds S.R.
Morton and D.J. Mulvaney. (Surrey Beatty & Sons:
Chipping Norton, NSW)

Hardy, A.D. (1906). Excursion to Wilson’s
Promontory. Victorian Naturalist 22: 191-223.
Mueller, F. (1858-9). Fragmenta Phytographiae
Australiae 1.

Mueller, F. (1859). Report on the plants collected dur-
ing Mr, Babbage’s expedition into the north-western
interior of South Australia in 1858. Jn Victoria -
Parliamentary Papers - Votes and Proceedings of the
Legislative Assembly 1859-60 3 (No.1): 1-21,
(Government Printer: Melbourne).

Mueller, F. (1860). On the genus Eremophila. Report
of the Royal Society of Tasmania for 1859 3: 291-297.
Mueller, F. (1860-1). Fragmenta Phytographiae
Australiae 2.

Mueller, F. (1862-3), Fragmenta Phytographiae
Australiae 3.

Mueller, F. (1872-4), Fragmenta Phytographiae
Australiae 8.

Mueller, F, (1876-7). Fragmenta Phytographiae
Australiae 10,

Mueller, F. (1878-81). Fragmenta Phytographiae
Australiae 11.

Mueller, F. (1890a), Descriptions of new Australian
plants, with occasional other annotations. Victorian
Naturalist 7: 38-39; 46-50.

Mueller, F. (1890b). Supplemental notes to the list of
plants collected in central Australia. Transactions and
Berens of the Royal Society of South Australia
13: 170-1.

Mueller, F. and Tate, R. (1896). Phanerogams and vas-
cular cryptograms. Transactions of the Royal Society
of South Australia 16: 333-83.

Willis, J.H. (1962). The botany of the Victoria
Exploring Expedition (September 1860 - June 1861)
and of relief contingents from Victoria (July 1861 -
November 1862). Proceedings of the Royal Society of
Victoria 75: 247-268.

The Victorian Nauturalist 44,134.

The Victorian Naturalist

CE SEPEESSISSSSS

Mueller Issue

The Botanist at Como:
Mueller and the Armytage Family

Carmel McPhee!

Recently, while sifting through
Armytage family papers at the Melbourne
University Archives, attempting to broad-
en our understanding of the Como garden,
a colleague and I came across four brief
letters from Baron Ferdinad von Mueller,
by then in his early seventies, to Armytage
family members at Como.

Written between 20 April 1895 and 27
April 1896, within the last two years of
Mueller’s life, the letters tell us of the
enduring friendship which had existed
between the botanist and this well-to-do
early Melbourne and Western District
family.

“When I receive dear Miss Armytage
kind letters from ladies, which is not
very often, I feel always much
cheered and thus I was particularly
the case when I received your
thoughtful communication...

...For some months I shall be over-

powered with professional work in

my Department, but after that time I

hope to call again on the few friends

which I have...’

(To Ada Armytage, 27 April, 1896)

Such poignant phrases from Mueller in
the last months of his life and twenty three
years after his ignominious departure as
director of the Melbourne Botanic
Gardens, speak of the loneliness he must
have endured until his death later in that
same year.

Two of the letters refer to future outings
with the Armytage women, one to a “festi-
val’ at Como to which he had been invited
and the second, an invitation to Ada
Armytage to accompany him to a “dis-
course with limelight views... in the
Prahran Town Hall by an arctic voyager’ -
a Mr Wilkinson.

Mueller’s long association with Como,
in fact, began before the Armytage friend-
ship, in the days when Como’s second
owners, the Brown family, donated many
plants to the Melbourne Botanic Gardens

! Manager of National Trust Gardens in Victoria.
39 Brackenbury Street, Warrandyte, Victoria 31 13.

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

at the time Mueller was director,

Such plant donations from well-to-do
families across Victoria, usually took the
form of an exchange, with Mueller return-
ing the favour by supplying plants in
return. In this way, wealthier members of
the colony assisted in the establishment of
the Melbourne Botanic Gardens, through
it is not certain whether this was how
Mueller and the Armytages first met.

Perhaps the family approached him ask-
ing for advice on suitable pasture grasses
for their Victorian Western District and
Queensland properties. In two of the let-
ters, Mueller discusses his uncertainty
regarding the successful establishment of
two species of exotic grass which he had
given the family to trial on their North
Queensland station.

‘Allow me dear Madam to mention,
that the enlarged ninth edition of the
Select Plants is now going into print
so that any occurrence with the
Coapin grass (Panicum spectabile) in
your Queensland Station could now
be recorded in the work under your
honoured name.

But the last year has been one of
such dryness, that perhaps the experi-
ments gave no favourable results.
Nevertheless it would be well to per-
severe with the trials...”

(To Caroline Armytage, 20 April,
1895)

In 1857, almost forty years before these
final letters were written to the Armytage
women, Mueller had first voiced his argu-
ments for exotic plant introductions to
Victoria, in his paper ‘On a General
Introduction of Useful Plants into
Victoria’, a forum for the debate of such
issues. About this time, thousands were
leaving the goldfields empty-handed,
swelling unemployment in the young
colony of Victoria. A pressing issue for
the government had become the need to
expand agriculture and industry, so the
evaluation of potentially productive
species was regarded very favourably.

227

Mueller Issue

Later, as an inaugural member of the
Acclimatisation Society of Victoria, estab-
lished in 1861, Mueller went on to sys-
tematically disperse both native and exotic
plants across Australia and internationally.
His intense interest in introducing useful
plants led him to compile a book on the
subject, first published in 1876 under the
title Select Plants readily eligible for
Industrial Culture or Naturalisation in
Victoria, with indications of their Native
Countries and some of their Uses. This
work was re-published several times with
revisions, enlargements or translations. It
is to the 1895 edition that Mueller refers
in his letter above to Caroline Armytage.

Whatever the origins of their relation-
ship, the strong friendship Mueller
obviously felt for the Armytage family,
sheds a little extra light on the final years
and months of this great botanist’s
remarkable life.

Acknowledgments

I would like to thank Sara Maroske for her
invaluable help and advice in the preparation of
this article.

Bibliography

Gillbank, L. (1986). The Origins of the
Acclimatisation Society of Victoria: Practical
Science in the Wake of the Gold Rush. Historical
Records of Australian Science 6,359-374,

Mueller, F, (1876). Select Plants readily eligible for
Industrial Culture or Naturalisation in Victoria.
McCarron, Bird and Co.: Melbourne

Mueller, F. (1895), Select Extra - Tropical Plants
readily eligible for Industrial Culture or
Naturalisation. Ninth edition, revised and enlarged

Mueller, F. (1858) On a General Introduction of
Useful Plants into Victoria. Transactions of the
Philosophical Institute of Victoria, 2 (2), 93-109.

Mueller, F. (1895 - 1896) Four letters to the Armytage
family at Como. Armytage Archive, University of
Melbourne, Victoria.

Laura Armytage and friend in an undeveloped part of Como garden - early 1880's. Photo courtesy
Como Photographic archive.

228

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

Emigrant Eucalypts: Gum Trees as Exotics

by Robert Fyfe Zacharin

Publisher: c Robert Fy yfe Zacharin, ’Khumbila’, RMB 1772, Cape Schanck,
Victoria 3939, RRP $25.00 plus postage

The motivation for this book was hatched
from the author’s first of many visits to
the Fistula Hospital in Addis Ababa in
1967, where his curiosity revealed that the
introduction of eucalypts (notably E. glob-
ulus) was almost the sole factor enabling
the establishment of this city in a land
bereft of vegetation. From that point, he
has used his unique professional opportu-
nities to visit an extraordinary kaleido-
scope of countries and study introduced
eucalypts first hand, together with the
related local literature, much of which
would be difficult to access in Australia.
The result is a book which will fascinate
any who share his great love of this
remarkable genus, roaming across count-
less lands and portraying the innumerable
familiar, and less familiar, personalities
involved.

Club members will enjoy reading the
Foreword by our late Jim Willis, repro-
duced directly in his delightful hand.
Oddly, one of the best-known seed trans-
fers to the Trappist monks of the Tre
Fontane Monastery (Rome) - with its
goulish links to the execution of St Paul -
is the subject of two stories, firstly (page
58-59) attributed to the Howitts (father
and son), and later (page 68), the better-
known story of Mueller and Archbishop

Goold, as recorded in Eucalyptography.
Unfortunately, however, the clarity of
Zacharin’s photographs is often poor and
not sufficient to properly appreciate the
species portrayed.

The rather brief cover of the eastern
Mediterranean, towards the end of the
book, inspires me to add a little that may
well interest readers. For the Syrian crews
manning artillery batteries on the Golan
Heights above Galilee, the summer cli-
mate was undoubtedly torrid. Hence, a
suggestion from an Israeli source to plant
a few Blue Gums around each for shade
was evidently received, and embraced by
Syrian authorities. Subsequently, in the
Six-Day War of 1967, these little clumps
of Blue Gums became ‘sitting ducks’ for
Israeli artillery - and survived better than
most of the fortifications and their crews.

Strangely, the two-page coverage of our
compatriots across the Tasman is some-
what brief, apparently as a result of an
oversight of the substantial tome by Rev
J.H. Simmonds, Eucalypts in New
Zealand. Nonetheless, this book will bring
joy to any lovers of the genus.

Alan Parkin
2 Hazel Drive, Templestowe, Victoria 3107.

The Natural Art of Louisa Atkinson
by Elizabeth Lawson

Publisher: The State Library of

New South Wales Press 1995;

144 pages, 84 colour plates; RRP $39.95 soft cover, $49.95 hard cover.

As Government Botanist of the colony
of Victoria, Ferdinand Mueller welcomed
plant specimens collected within and
beyond the borders of Victoria. Some of
his collectors were women. One was
Louisa Atkinson, who collected in various

Vol. 113 (4) 1996

parts of New South Wales in the 1860s,
and initially forwarded specimens via
William Woolls in Sydney.

Louisa was also an artist. Unlike her
artistic sisters, Helena and Harriet Scott
who illustrated the natural history work of

229

Mueller Issue

others, Louisa's art was an integral part of
her own work as a naturalist. As this book
reveals, Louisa depicted a wide range of
subjects - landscapes, animals and plants.
An impressive Murray River Crayfish
graces the front cover, while inside beetles
and butterflies, parrots and possums,
appear frozen mid-action - courting, eat-
ing, flying . In sketching with precision
and clarity ‘moments of observed natural
life’, her images are of the field not the
studio. Louisa was one of the first
European artists in Australia to capture the
swiftness and agility of the native fauna.

Her botanical art lacks elaborate scien-
tific footnotes, but, as Lawson notes it
‘maintains its primary task of precisely
observed record’. Following the not
uncommon posthumous destruction and
disappearance of her work, the illustra-
tions included in this book represent only
fragments of her life's work. As represen-
tations of the Australian flora and fauna of
over a century ago, her visual and verbal
descriptions provide precious fragments of
the horribly fragmentary record of
Australia’s environmental history.

Louisa Atkinson was born in February
1834 at Oldbury Farm, Sutton Forest, on
the Southern Highlands of New South
Wales. She died only thirty eight years
later. During her short, and sometimes dif-
ficult life, she worked as a botanist, natu-
ralist, taxidermist, journalist, novelist and
artist, employing her diverse skills to
maintain her financial independence. She
collected, drew and wrote about animals
and plants from the vicinity of her several
homes in NSW - in the Southern
Highlands, Blue Mountains, Sydney and
Shoalhaven.

In the 1850s engravings of her drawings
of birds, animals and places, illustrated
her nature notes in the //lustrated Sydney
News. Her long-running nature series “A
Voice from the Country’ was published
concurrently in the Sydney Morning
Herald and the Sydney Mail right through
the 1860s. Her lively descriptions of her
excursions into the bush provided
Sydneysiders with possibly their first pop-
ular, informal but informative descriptions
of the indigenous flora and fauna. She
nurtured a conservation ethic, warning

230

that the native cedar was becoming scarce
and should be planted, that ‘while the
woodman's axe can fell the growth of a
century in an hour, the forest springs up
but slowly’, and that the feral cat should
be ‘determinately destroyed’.

While living at Fernhurst near
Kurrajong Heights in the Blue Mountains,
Louisa’s interest in indigenous ferns
flourished. She observed, collected,
described, drew and planted them. Woolls
named a small rasp fern Doodia
Atkinsoniana in her honour. Nine of her
herbarium specimens of ferns survive in
the Mitchell Atkinson collection, along
with forty fine watercolours. Louisa
intended to publish her illustrations as a
book. Seven of the plates are reproduced
in this book.

In 1869 she married James Calvert, and
moved to his property near Yass. Two
excursions and one baby later Louisa died
suddenly - collapsing on seeing James’
horse returning riderless. She was sur-
vived by her husband and baby daughter,
and yarious plants named in her honour by
Woolls and Mueller - a genus Atkinsonia,
and several species carrying various ver-
sions of her maiden and married name.

I am glad that Elizabeth Lawson has
focussed her creative energy on this book,
that the State Library of New South Wales
has published it, and that I have had the
opportunity to read it. I recommend it to
anyone interested in natural history and
past practitioners. | am also glad that
Lawson’s book prompted me to read an
earlier book - Patricia Clarke’s Pioneer
Writer. The life of Louisa Atkinson: novel-
ist, journalist, naturalist. [Allen & Unwin,
1990]. Clarke’s book provides more
botanical and biographical details, but
only black and white illustrations.

Linden Gillbank
Department of History and Philosophy of Science,
University of Melbourne, Parkville, Victoria 3052

The Victorian Naturalist

Mueller Issue

is house in Arnold Street, South Yarra, December 1894.

Mueller (background) with his staff at h
Photo. courtesy Royal Botanic Gardens.

bourne

The A.S.N. Company's steam ship The Wonga Wonga on which Mueller returned to Mel

from Twofold Bay.

231
Vol. 113 (4) 1996

The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria
Established 1880
In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria

Registered Office: FNCV, 1 Gardenia Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Phone/Fax (03)9877 9860

Patron
His Excellency, The Honourable Richard E. McGarvie, The Governor of Victoria _
Key Office-Bearers June 1995

President: Professor ROBERT WALLIS, School of Aquatic Science and Natural Resources

Management, Deakin University (Rusden), Clayton, 3168. (03)9244 7278, Fax (03)9244 7403.
Hon. Secretary: Mr GEOFFREY PATERSON, 11 Olive Street, South Caulfield, 3162. :

AH (03)9571 6436.
Hon. Treasurer: Mr ARNIS DZEDINS, PO Box 1000, Blind Bight, 3980. (059)987 996.
Subscription-Secretary: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, 3130. (03)9877 9860.
Editors, The Vic. Nat.: ED and PAT GREY, 8 Woona Court, Yallambie, 3085. (03)9435 9019.
Librarian: Mrs SHEILA HOUGHTON, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, 3130.
AH (054)28 4097.
Excursion Secretary: DOROTHY MAHLER. AH (03)9435 8408.
Book Sales: Dr ALAN PARKIN, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, 3130. AH (03)9850 2617.
Programme Secretary/Newsletter Editor: Dr NOEL SCHLEIGER, | Astley Street,
Montmorency, 3094, (03)9435 8408.
Conservation Coordinator: JENNY WILSON, 206 Pascoe Vale Road, Essendon, 3040, AH (9370 6434)
Group Secretaries

Botany: Mr JOHN EICHLER, 18 Bayview Crescent, Black Rock, 3143. (03)9598 9492.
Geology: Mr DOUG HARPER, 33 Victoria Crescent, Mont Albert, 3127. (03)9890 0913.
Fauna Survey: Ms FELICITY GARDE, 18 College Parade, Kew, 3101. (03)9818 4684.
Microscopical: Mr RAY POWER, 36 Schotters Road, Mernda, 3754. (03)9717 3511.

The Victorian Naturalist
All material for publication to: The Editors, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130

MEMBERSHIP ,
Members receive The Victorian Naturalist and the monthly Field Nat News free. The Club organis-
es several imi meetings (free to all) and excursions (transport costs may be charged). Research
work, including both botanical and fauna suryeys, is being done at a number of locations in
Victoria, and all members are encouraged to participate.

SUBSCRIPTIONS RATES for 1996
(Subscription are due on 1 January)

First Member
Metropolitan ........sssccecsssrsesressessnsstestessarencersacrnareersagnaateen casnernenness
Concessional (pensioner/student/unemployed)
Country (more than 50km from GPO) ............+. —
Juror (under 18) ....ccccsssessesessenesesssensnssessesttestensscneeeenancnearsaeneesesrecseastettessncsnananenssarsesaeers

Additional Members

Junior
Institutional.
Australian Institutions .,.......--2.:scsesesrenrssteetene
Overseas Institutions .....

The
Victorian

fi a al
{
i! f na ny

Volume 113 (5) 1996 \ See = Sah 5 V4 October

Published by The aay pa sts Club of Victoria

F VICTORIA

Winner of the 1996 Australian Natural History Medallion

The Club is pleased to announce that the winner of the Australian Natural
History Medallion is Ken Simpson, one of the authors of ‘Field Guide to the
Birds of Australia’ and President of the Bird Observers Club of Australia.
Congratulations to Ken.

New Members
Council of the FNCV extends a warm welcome to the following new members.

Mrs Flora Anderson Wonga Park Mrs Elizabeth McKenzie Hawthom

Mr Scott Anderson Mt Eliza Mr John McKenzie Greensborough

Mrs Emi Baker Greensborough Mr _ Sean Moore Boronia

Ms_ Elaine Bayes and Mr Adam Muir East Hawthorn

Ms_ Sharelle Hart Caulfield S Mr Dave Munro Dunkeld

Dr Tania Bezzobs Clayton Ms Rachel Murphy Killsyth

Mrs Lynette Blom Cowes Ms Danie Ondinea Dulwich Hill, NSW

Mr David Beeby Parkdale Mr Cliff Overton and

Mrs Shirley Boddison Cheltenham Ms_ Donna Smith Tecoma

Ms Marcia Borthwick Blackburn Mr Andrew Paull Healesville

Ms Catherine Caddle _Nottinghill Miss Maggie Pavlou Mitcham

Mr Craig Cleeland Croydon Hills Ms __Ilga Pearce E, Doncaster

Mr Hugh Cockburn Doncaster Mr Alistair Phillips Northcote

Mr Bradley Costin Fairfield Mr Fred Pribac Mt Waverley

Mr Jan Davidson Glenrowan Mr _ Christopher Robbins E. Reservoir

Mr Derek and Ms_ Nicky Rose Scoresby

Mrs Geraldine DeKorte Malvern Ms_ Kirsten Rowe Porepunkah

Ms Daniela Delsante Bulleen Mr _ Bob and

Ms Angela Duffey Carnegie Mrs Jan Rowlands North Balwyn

Mr Geoff Durham Elsternwick Mr_ Erich and

Mr Richard Francis Research Mrs Elspeth Sacco Heathmont

Mr Rob Gration Footscray Mr David Sarah Elsternwick

Mr Ken Green Berridale Mr Peter Scallion Mitcham

Ms_ Libby Jude Bayswater N Mr Glenn Shaw Warburton

Mrs Merrilyn Grey Glen Iris Ms Melinda Shaw Fairfield

Mr Felix and Mr Michael Smith Healesville

Mrs_ Enid Haarhoff Blackburn Ms_ Natalie Smith Viewbank

Mr Kenneth Hamer and Mr Colin Spurgeon Glenrowan

Ms_ Tanya Enright Nunawading Ms _ Elspeth Stewart Croydon

Mrs Helen Handreck Ringwood Mr Phil Stringer Healesville

Mr _ Tony Herwerth Yarrambat Mr Anthony Theunissen Briar Hill

Mr Anthony Hester Fairfield Mr Gregory Thompson Richmond

Ms _ Joshziaha Kelin Greensborough Mrs Dorothy Thorpe Boxhill

Miss Marilyn Kelly N Dandenong Mr Peter Tucker Kew

Mrs Anne Kerr Glen Iris Ms _ Lucille Turner E, Brunswick

Ms Nerilee Kerslake _ Fairfield Ms Phyllis Western L. Templetowe

Mr Damian Magner Doncaster Ms_ Lesley Wheeler Hawthorn

Miss Rachael Mangold Mt Waverley Ms Ann Williamson Box Hill N

Ms Heather Mann Glen Waverley Ms Mara Yuen Clayton N

Dr William McInnes Blackburn Mrs_ Hilda Zapple Blackburn
Acknowledgement

The editors wish to acknowledge and thank Elsie Graham for permission
to use her photograph of the late Dr Jim Willis that appeared on the front
cover of The Victorian Naturalist 113 (2) 1996.

| The
Victorian
Naturalist

Volume 113 (5) 1996 October
Editors: Ed and Pat Grey

Research Reports New Holland Mouse Pseudomys novaehollandiae

in South Gippsland, Part 1, Dy B. QuiN........cccsseseeeseseesseseseesseceees 236

The Consumption of Onion Grass by Purple Swamphens,

Dy S; DiCZ And MO ClIAPKe i ncniescasstase tess tpatrtnssscascstoensdeneseviervese ses 247
Contributions Using Nest Boxes to Survey for the Brush-tailed Phasco-

gale, by T. Soderquist, B. Traill, F. Faris, K. Beasley......-.....+.-- 256

Use of supplementary Nest Hollows by Red-tailed Black

Cockatoos, by W. EMmisOn...ssssecssssserecresseseniesetssesssseesseeseasessneens 262

Australian Native Species in Aquaculture, by G. Kibria,

D. Nugegoda, R. Fairclough, P. LAM... 264
Naturalist Notes Advance of the Honey Fungus, by E. Lyndon..........+..-ss ees 255

Middle Yarra Timelines: Deep Winter, by G. Jameson,

Naturalist in Residence.......cscscssessesssenesesesesnesesenennenenenrereseseesenees 269
Book Reviews The Fauna of Tasmania: Mammals, by R.H. Green,

reviewer R. WarnneKe..c..csssssesssresecerersesteneneeeseaneneessaenensessnsenensnss 267

Uluru, Kata Tjuta and Watarrka, by A. Kerle,

reviewer S. TYAYNOP....ssssssssssssssessestssnveensecntennsscsccnseensannnenaseees sess 272

Never Truly Lost: A Bushwalker’s Life, by P. Palin,

reviewer N. BYPIG.....-sssssesescsscessescnseccnnnecssssensneennnncnanesennnseneeer tees 273

The Handbook of Australian, New Zealand and Antarctic

Birds, by R.A.O.U., reviewer Ed Grey nrvessessescssecsesssenssnesencenaneess ABS

274

Tribute Fred Rogers 1927-1996, by R. ANd G. Ellidt......c0ccceceeeeeeee

ISSN 0042-5184

Cover: The Honey Fungus Armillaria luteobubalina (see page 255), photo courtesy
cts, CSIRO Australia .

Glen Kile, Forestry and Forest Produ

Research Reports

New Holland Mouse Pseudomys novaehollandiae
(Rodentia: Muridae) in South Gippsland, Southern Victoria
Part One - Distribution and Status

Bruce R, Quin'*

Abstract

Results of a survey for New Holland Mouse Pseudomys novaehollandiae populations in areas of
South Gippsland, conducted by the then Department of Conservation and Natural Resources (cur-
rently Department of Natural Resources and Environment) in 1992-1993 are outlined, The survey
employed trapping, hair-tubing and the collection of predator scats to determine the distribution of
this species. Two previously unknown populations of New Holland Mouse totalling 15 individuals
were located in vegetated sand dunes on the Yanakie Isthmus, Wilsons Promontory National Park.
However, populations which were previously known from the Promontory and McLoughlins Beach
(Nooramunga Marine and Coastal Park) are believed to be no longer present. The species was not
detected at two further areas formerly known to support it, Dream/ Hummock Island and
Mullungdung State Forest. Thus, the Wilsons Promontory populations currently represent the only
populations of New Holland Mice known from South Gippsland where the species’ range is in
decline. Management issues for the New Holland Mouse in South Gippsland will be the subject of a
follow-up paper. Distribution and habitat of other small ground mammals are noted. Generally,
these species occurred in habitats similar to those found in previous studies, (The Victorian Naturalist

1996, 113, 236-246).

Introduction

The New Holland Mouse Pseudomys
novaehollandiae (family Muridae) is a
small native rodent with a limited distribu-
tion in south-eastern Australia, occurring
on coastal and hinterland areas of central
eastern New South Wales, central southern
Victoria and north-eastern Tasmania
(Kemper 1995) (Fig. 1).

The New Holland Mouse is classified as
endangered in Victoria (CNR 1995). The
‘species which has been listed under the
Flora and Fauna Guarantee Act 1988 is
rare, in decline and subject to a number of
potentially threatening processes
(Menkhorst 1995; Seebeck et al. in prep.).

Various studies provide descriptions and
analyses of New Holland Mouse habitats
(e.g. Keith and Calaby 1968; Fox and Fox
1978; Cockburn 1980; Wilson 1991).
Typical habitats are coastal heathland or
woodland and open forest with a heathy
understorey on sandy substrate. Species of
the following genera are commonly
recorded at such sites : Acacia, Banksia,
Leptospermum, Dillwynia, Xanthorrhoea,
Epacris, Hibbertia and Allocasuarina; in

‘Current Address

Department of Natural Resources and Environment

Yellingbo State Nature Reserve, Macclesfield Road
Yellingbo, Victoria 3139,

“Department of Natural Resources and Environment
310 Commercial Road, Yarram, Victoria 3971.

236

addition to sedges (Cyperaceae,
Restionaceae). Less typically this rodent
occupies swamp edges (Keith and Calaby
1968) and vegetated sand dunes (Peter
Menkhorst pers. comm.).

The New Holland Mouse prefers a heath
understorey actively regenerating after dis-
turbance from fire, vegetation clearing,
sand-mining or grazing (refer above stud-
ies). This preference appears to relate to
high vegetation cover close to ground level
(Posamentier and Recher 1974; Fox and
Fox 1978; Wilson 1991), high species
diversity in the understorey (Fox and Fox
1978; Cockburn 1980), and a high abun-
dance of Leguminosae species in the
understorey (Keith and Calaby 1968;
Posamentier and Recher 1974; Braithwaite
and Gullan 1978).

Fig, 1, New Holland Mouse Pseudomys novae-
hollandiae

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

The,aims of this study were to establish
the distribution of New Holland Mice in
the South Gippsland District, to determine
habitat indicators, to identify important
management issues and to formulate a
long-term monitoring program.

Study Sites, Materials and Methods
Mullungdung and Won Wron State Forests
New Holland Mice were captured at two
sites in Mullungdung State Forest in 1975
(Gilmore 1977). In the same general vicin-
ity, a survey in 1992 by staff from Deakin
University trapped what was believed to be
one New Holland Mouse. The vegetation
at this latter site was used as a guide for
selecting other sites in Mullungdung.
However, since the survey outlined in this
paper was undertaken, doubts concerning
the identity of the 1992 Deakin specimen
have arisen (Barbara Wilson pers. comm.),
Eighteen sites were chosen after examin-
ing a Land Conservation Council vegeta-
tion map (LCC 1980), corresponding aerial
photographs and ground checking. These
sites were covered in four separate trap-
ping sessions, each session covering four

nights. At each site 14, 15 or 30 Elliott
traps were located, generally in two or
three straight line transects with 20 m
intervals between traps and lines, The total
number of trapnights (number of traps x
number of nights that traps were open) is
shown in Table 1. Locations of sites are
illustrated in Fig, 2(. Bait was a mixture of
peanut butter, honey, rolled oats, vanilla
and/or almond essence. Traps were
checked in the first few hours of daylight
and the animal captures recorded, Animal
captures were individually marked in one
of two ways: with a small nick in one of
the ears, or a non-toxic black pen mark on
one of their hind feet or tail, Traps were
kept closed during the day and re-opened
in the last two hours before sunset.

Small hair tubes comprising a 30 mm
diameter conduit design, modified from
Suckling (1978), were placed at each trap
Station of the first ten sites for eight days
inclusive (dates are shown in Table 2),
Tubes were baited with the same mixture
as used in the Elliott traps. Hairs collected
by this technique were forwarded to
Raelene Warren (Deakin University,

Table 1. Mammal species detected by Elliott trapping at study locations in South Gippsland. _

= No. of Sites; 2=No. of Trapnights; 3 = Sampling Period ; 4 = Species Captured; 5= Total
No. of Captures; TOTAL = Total No. of Captures (No. of individuals). (Note : site specific data is
provided CNR (1993) and Quin (1994). Cage trapping was also employed at Wilsons Promontory
and totalled 38 trapnights).

2 3 4 5 6

Mullungdung 18 1253 19/11/92-04/04/93 Brown Antechinus 43 (35)
State Forest Eastern Pygmy-possum 8 (6)
Bush Rat 26 (13)
Swamp Rat 7 (4)
Black Rat 7 (5)
TOTAL 91 (63)
Won Wron 5 296 19/12/92-23/12/92 Brown Antechinus 13 (8)
State Forest Bush Rat 1 (1)
Black Rat ; Hi

House Mouse
TOTAL 17 (i)
umm, /93 - 27/03/93 Swamp Rat 35 (29)
Dream/H ock 4 190 25/03 Sie 3 ah
pint TOTAL 68 (62)
i : h Rat 23 (15)
Wilsons Promontory 6 562 15/02/93 - 24/04/93 San Bike oy
pect oa House Mouse 44 fe

Holland Mouse
ese TOTAL 74 (45)
237

Vol. 113 (5) 1996

Research Reports

NEW HOLLAND MOUSE SURVEY
IN SOUTH GIPPSLAND

To Gotnandale

LEGEND

Putili, Land Noundary
19% Tapping ties

WON WRON

@)\ CONSERVATION AND
NATURAL RESOURCES
Horwnved i tho Cippstanil Aron Yuerraye

MULLUNGDUNG
STATE FOREST

Fig.2. Location of trap and hair tube sites in Mullungdung and Won Wron State Forests.

Table 2. Mammal species detected by hair-tubing at study locations in South Gippsland.
1 = No. of sites; 2 = No. of Hair Tubes; 3 = Sampling Period; 4 = Species Detected

site-specific data is provided in CNR (1993) and Quin (1994), Two of the four sites hair-

3
21/11/92 to1 7/12/92

Brown Antechinus

(Note :

tubed at Wilsons Promontory were additional to those trapped at that location).
Location iv 2

Mullungdung State Forest 10 148 small tubes

Won Wron State Forest 1 2 small tubes
4 22 small tubes/

Wilsons Promontory
20 large tubes

National Park
(Yanakie Isthmus)

Unidentified Antechinus

Bush Rat

Unidentified Rat
27/11/92 to05/12/92 Unidentified Antechinus
Unidentified Antechinus
Bush Rat
Unidentified Rat
Black Wallaby
Common Wombat
Vombatus ursinus

18/02/93 to28/04/93

Geelong) and Barbara Triggs (‘Dead
Finish’, Genoa) for identification using the
technique developed by Brunner and
Coman (1974).

Small hair tubes were set with the Elliott
traps to establish whether hair tubes would
be suitable for detecting the New Holland
Mouse. However, despite traps and tubes
failing to detect New Holland Mice in
Mullungdung State Forest, both techniques
were employed elsewhere, The hair-tubing
proved to be a useful secondary device for

238

confirmation of trapping results.

New Holland Mice have never been
recorded from Won Wron State Forest,
However, this area occurs within close
proximity to Mullungdung State Forest
and supports large areas of heathland. For
these reasons, five sites were established in
Won Wron State Forest and sampled fol-
lowing principles already outlined (refer
Figure 2; Tables 1 and 2.).

Predator scats were collected during con-
certed searches and opportunistically along

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

Ce:

e CONSERVATION AND
NATURAL RESOURCES
Hrrparest in the (ppsianil Neen Yareem

NEW HOLLAND MOUSE SURVEY
IN SOUTH GIPPSLAND

Fig. 3. Location of trap sites on Dream/Hummock Island, Nooramunga Marine and Coastal Park.

roads and narrow trail-bike tracks at sites.
They were forwarded to Barbara Triggs for
analysis.

Dream/Hummock Island

New Holland Mice were captured at the
south-west point of this island in 1977
(Menkhorst 1995; Peter Menkhorst pers.
comm.). Vegetation recorded at this site
was used as a guide for selecting trapping
locations for the 1992-1993 survey.
General procedures employed in
Mullungdung and Won Wron State Forests
were followed on Dream/Hummock Island
(refer Table 1), however, no hair-tubing
was used. The fourth site (a camp area)
was established on the final night follow-
ing several chance observations of small
rodents the previous night. However, only
five traps were used at this site. No preda-
tor scats were located on the Island. Refer
Figure 3 for trapping locations.

Wilsons Promontory National Park

New Holland Mice had been detected
twice on the Promontory, in 1973 and
1975 (Mammal Survey Group of Victoria
records). In February 1993, a previously
unrecorded population was located on the
Yanakie Isthmus of the Promontory during
a separate trapping program. Some results
of that survey are reproduced here from

Vol. 113 (5) 1996

the corresponding report (refer CNR
1993).

The general design, material and methods
used in the survey at Wilsons Promontory
in February 1993 are provided in Quin
(1994). However, three further sites were
specifically targeted for New Holland
Mice. Two were trapped and one was sam-
pled by hair-tubing and further details are
provided in Tables | - 3. Procedures for
these three sites were similar to those
described for Mullungdung State Forest
and in CNR (1993). Large hair tubes simi-
lar to the design described by Scotts and
Craig (1988) were also employed at the
Promontory,

In April 1993, two sites sampled in the
February survey were re-trapped (Tables |
- 3) including the site where New Holland
Mice were located. The vegetation at the
most recently located site was used as a
guide for selecting two further areas which
were surveyed in April 1993 for New
Holland Mice. Trapping transects were
either straight or bent line, with 10 m spac-
ing between traps (and lines where applic-
able). Other procedures were as outlined
previously. Fig. 4 illustrates sites sampled
for New Holland Mice on the Promontory.

239

Research Reports

Table 3. Mammal species detected by analysis of hair or predator scats collected from study loca-

tions in South Gippsland.

I= No. of Sites; 2 = Sampling Period; 3 = Species Detected.

Location 1 2

Mullungdung State Forest 8

Wilsons Promontory l
National Park
(Yanakielsthmus)

09/12/92 to 21/12/92

24/04/93 to26/04/93

a >

Brown Antechinus

Swamp Rat

Common Ringtail Possum
Unidentified Brushtail Possum
Black Wallaby

Eastern Grey Kangaroo Macropus
giganteus

Cat Felis catus (feral)

Bush Rat

Black Wallaby

Common Wombat

European Cattle Bos taurus (feral)

Animal Handling

A suite of morphological measurements
was taken from captured New Holland
Mice (refer Quin 1994). Additionally, Dr
Barbara Wilson of Deakin University had
requested that scats (dietary analyses) and
hair samples (for genetic studies) from
New Holland Mice be collected, to assist
in formulating management recommenda-
tions for this species in South Gippsland
and across its Victorian range, Scats and
hair samples were collected from all indi-
viduals trapped and have been forwarded
to Deakin University researchers.
Invertebrates taken from the fur of some
individuals were forwarded to the Museum
of Victoria for identification.

Individuals of other species trapped were
handled for identification purposes only,
with the exception of Eastern Pygmy-pos-
sums Cercartetus nanus. This species can
be difficult to detect and captured individ-
uals represent a good opportunity to learn
more about the species. Consequently,
morphometrics were taken from Eastern
Pygmy-possums captured in the present
study.

Vegetation

The overall vegetation form at each site,
in which traps or hair-tubes were set, was
assessed and crudely classified into one of
seven habitat types, largely based on
understorey species composition, but also
structural attributes. The habitats were: wet
heathland, dry heathland, heathy wood-
land, heath-bracken woodland, rehabilitat-
ed gravel scrape vegetation, heathy open

240

forest and coastal sand dune vegetation,
Character species for each habitat are pro-
vided in Table 4. Time did not permit a
more comprehensive analysis of habitat
types at trap sites (with exceptions indicat-
ed below). The crude classification served
to indicate broad habitats in which trap-
ping occurred, and the major habitat type
present at sites.

At Sites 1-3, 14, 16-18 in Mullungdung
State Forest, a list of plants was compiled
and each given a cover value according to
the Braun-Blanquet scale (Mueller-
Dombois and Ellenberg 1974). At Site | in
Wilsons Promontory National Park, a full
list of plant species was produced, howev-
er, cover values were not given. (Note:
these lists are not included in the paper).

Particular note was made of the age of
vegetation after fire when selecting study
sites, due to the preference of New
Holland Mice for an actively regenerating
heath.

However, many sites surveyed did not
support young vegetation for the following
reasons: trapping of sites known to contain
New Holland Mice in the past often meant
trapping in relatively old vegetation; most
of the Mullungdung sites surveyed were
selected on the basis of their similar fire
histories and plant composition to that of
the most recent (unconfirmed) record of
New Holland Mice in that forest (i.e. 11-
year-old heath); much of the heathland
vegetation in Mullungdung is ten years of
age or older; the initial survey at Yanakie
Isthmus (CNR 1993) discovered New
Holland Mice can exist in relatively old

The Victorian Naturalist —

Research Paper

NEW HOLLAND MOUSE SURVEY
IN SOUTH GIPPSLAND

LEGEND

——~-—— Public Land Boundary

1V Trapping Sites

CORNER INLET

ween

WILSONS PROMONTORY
NATIONAL PARK

G/14-222 Kilometres

TIDAL RIVER

ae CONSERVATION AND
NATURAL RESOURCES

Prepared in the Gippsland Area, Yarram

Fig. 4. Location of trap and hair tube sites on Wilsons Promontory

Vol. 113 (5) 1996 241

Research Reports

vegetation growing on sand dunes.
Vegetation ages were obtained from fire
history maps kept in the Yarram Natural
Resources and Environment office. Those
for the Yanakie Isthmus were obtained
from Jim Whelan (pers. comm.), All vege-
tation ages are given in Table 4.

Results
Mullungdung State Forest
Trapping at 18 sites in Mullungdung State
Forest yielded 91 captures of 63 individu-
als (five species) from 1253 trapnights
(7.3%), a low capture rate. The species
most commonly trapped, Brown
Antechinus Antechinus stuartii, occurred
at most sites and habitat types. A notable
species captured was Eastern Pygmy-pos-
sum. Three individuals (one male, two
females) were located at two separate sites
in heathy woodland and rehabilitated grav-
el scrape vegetation (heath). Swamp Rats
Rattus lutreolus were caught only at the
wet heathland site. New Holland Mouse
was not trapped. Refer Table 1 (trapping
data), Table 4 (vegetation). Additional
information is contained in Quin (1994).
Hair-tubing did not detect species addi-
tional to those trapped (at the first 10
sites). For this reason, it was decided not to
hair-tube Sites 11 - 18 and to concentrate
on the trapping (Table 2). Predator scats
analysed for the contents also failed to
detect New Holland Mice. Remains of
Swamp Wallaby Wallabia bicolor and
Common Ringtail Possum Pseudocheirus
peregrinus Were common in predator scats
(Table 3).

Won Wron State Forest

Low capture rates also characterised the
trapping conducted in Won Wron State
Forest; 17 captures of 11 individuals (four
species) from 296 trapnights, a 5.7% suc-
cess rate (Table 1), Brown Antechinus
were captured at three sites (heathy wood-
land and heathy open forest), but not the
two ‘young’ (0.8 years) heathy woodland
sites; a single House Mouse Mus musculus
was caught at one of the latter sites
(Tables | and 4).

Dream/Hummock Island
Trapping rates at Dream/Hummock
Island were relatively high, 35.8%, consti-

242

tuting 68 captures of 62 individuals from
190 trapnights. These trappings comprised
approximately equal numbers of Swamp
Rats and House Mice, when data from four
sites were combined (Table 1), However,
Swamp Rat captures were much higher at
Sites | and 3, and the reverse applied for
Site 2; Site 4 trapnights totalled only five
and six House Mice were caught . All cap-
tured animals were judged as adult status
(Quin 1994), though considerable size
variation occurred with the Swamp Rats,

Wilsons Promontory National Park
Summary - Trapping Results

Trapping at Wilsons Promontory Nation -
al Park detected four small mammal
species, including the New Holland Mouse
(Table 1). The overall trapping rate was
13.2%, comprising 74 captures of 45 indi-
viduals from 562 trapnights. New Holland
Mice comprised the highest number of
captures - 30 captures of 15 individuals
from two sites (Quin 1994).

New Holland Mouse - Trapping Results

New Holland Mice were trapped at Sites
1 and 5 (see Fig. 4). The New Holland
Mouse captures at Site 1 constituted seven
males and three females in the February
1993 survey. The seven males included
two ‘sub-adults’ (both weighing approxi-
mately 13 g); the three females included a
pregnant individual (24 g, the heaviest
individual). In April 1993, six New
Holland Mice (4 males, 2 females) were
captured at this site, comprising four re-
traps from February and two additional
individuals (1 male, 1 female), Thus, the
two surveys captured 12 New Holland
Mice (8 males, 4 females) at Site 1. Only
three male New Holland Mice were caught
at Site 5, including the lightest individual
(15 g) captured in April (sites combined).
Tail lengths ranged from approximately
85-98 mm for adult males, and 83-100 mm
for adult females. Pes (hind foot) length
ranges were similar for the sexes, ranging
from about 16 to 17 mm for adult individu-
als. Refer Quin (1994) for other measure-
ments and details of New Holland Mice
located.

Some limited observations made on New
Holland Mice movements during the cur-
rent survey are noteworthy. Upon release,

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

the majority of New Holland Mice moved
toward the closest dense vegetation to
make their escape. However, some
Jumped on to fallen, dead shrubs and used
horizontal branches as pathways before
leaping into dense ground vegetation.

New Holland Mice were generally re-
trapped in close vicinity to their initial
captive site. However, one individual was
re-trapped the following night approxi-
mately 90 m from where it was first
seized.

Three types of invertebrates were detect-
ed on New Holland Mice fur at Wilsons
Promontory. They were :

1. flea, Pygiopsylla sp. (Family Pygio-
psyllidae, Order Siphonoptera):;

2. mite, Dermanyssus sp. or Liponyssus
sp.(Family Dermanyssidae,Order
Acarina);

3. beetle, Myotyphlus sp. (Family
Staphylinidae, Order Coleoptera).

The mites were observed most common-
ly in fur surrounding the eyes of New
Holland Mice. The fleas and beetles
appeared to inhabit longer body fur on
both dorsal and ventral surfaces of the
mice.

New Holland Mouse - Habitat Descriptions

The habitat at Site 1 (a New Holland
Mouse site) is described in Table 4, CNR
(1993) and Quin (1994). It comprised of a
calcareous dune system. Drooping She-
oak Allocasuarina stricta, Coastal Wattle
Acacia sophorae and Coast Tea-tree
Leptospermum laevigatum formed the
overstorey. Black-anther Flax-lily Dian-
ella revoluta, Spiny-headed Mat-rush
Lomandra longifolia and Honey-pots
Acrotriche serrulata dominated the under-
storey. The understorey cover was high in
places; however, patches of fallen dead
shrubs, litter and bare sand were obvious
too.

New Holland Mice were also located at
Site 5. The dune structure and vegetation
at this site were similar to that at Site |
(Table 4; Quin 1994). The vegetation was
Saw Banksia Banksia serrata/Allocasua-
rina stricta open woodland with a sedge-
dominated understorey. L. /ongifolia dom-
inated the understorey of dunes, though
patches of shrubs - an unidentified
Guinea-flower Hibbertia species and

Vol. 113 (5) 1996

Coast Pomaderris Pomaderris oraria -
were prominent, in particular, on higher
dune points. L. laevigatum and A.
sophorae had invaded the area forming
thickets in places. However, the overall
structure of the vegetation was more open
than at Site 1,

The vegetation at Sites 4, 6 and 7 was
similar in species composition to that at
the New Holland Mouse sites. However,
patches of dense L. /Jaevigatum were more
extensive, giving the sites a more closed
structure, with less open sedge-dominated
or sandy areas. At Site 8, the sand dune
had been extensively invaded by L. laevi-
gatum. The dense thicket/scrub vegetation
had very little understorey vegetation at
ground level (Quin 1994),

Other species - Trapping and Habitat

Three species additional to New Holland
Mouse were trapped at Wilsons
Promontory (Table 1). Bush Rats Rattus

fuscipes (with one exception of an individ-

ual caught in wet heathland adjacent to
heathy woodland at Site 2) and House
Mice were trapped only in sand dune veg-
etation; Swamp Rats were caught only in
the wet heathland Site 2. Bush Rats were
captured at three of the dune systems
where trapping occurred and House Mice
at all dune sites sampled. No small ground
mammals were caught in dry heathland.

Hair Tube Results

Hair-tubing detected four mammal species
from three different sites (Table 2). At Site
1, where New Holland Mice exist, only
Bush Rats were discovered by hair tubes.
At Site 4, three different mammal species
were detected, including an unidentified
species of Antechinus, probably Brown
Antechinus, a species not detected at any
other Wilsons Promontory site. At Site 8,
hair tubes failed to detect any species.

Discussion
New Holland Mouse - Overall Distribution
in South Gippsland

New Holland Mouse is known in South
Gippsland only from Wilsons Promontory
National Park (Quin 1994). Populations
were detected inhabiting sand dune vege-
tation at two previously unknown sites on
the Yanakie Isthmus of the Promontory in

243

Research Reports

Table 4. Vegetation attributes at sites sampled for New Holland Mice in each study area. * = Fire
history taken from written records, but on-site evidence of a much more recent burn apparent.
Key: | = vegetation type; 2 = vegetation age (years); 3 = major character species

1993. This species has since been found to
be more widespread on the Isthmus
(Darren Carman pers. com.). Populations
at Mullungdung State Forest (Gilmore
1977) and Dream/Hummock Island

244

Area/Sites 1 2

Mullungdung State Forest

1-8, 10, 12, heathy woodland 10-11

15, 16

9, 13,17 heath-bracken woodland 6, 9, 11

1 rehabilitated gravel- 6
scrape vegetation (heath)

14 heathy woodland 8

18 wet heathland 1]

Won Wron State Forest

Net heathy woodland 0.8

2 heathy woodland >50,

4,5 heathy open forest >50*

Dream/Hummock Island

1-4 coastal sand dune >50
vegetation

Wilsons Promontory National Park

1,4-8 coastal sand dune 20-30
vegetation
wet heathland 4

3 dry heathland 3

Eucalyptus radiata, Banksia serrata, B. mar-
ginata, Acacia oxycedrus, Leptospermum conti-
nentale, L. myrsinoides, Bossiaea cinerea,
Dillwynia glabberima, Epacris impressa,
Gahnia radula, Hypolaena astigiata, Lomandra
filiformis, L. glauca, Pteridium esculentum

Generally as for heathy woodland but
P. esculentum much more abundant

Eucalyptus obliqua, E. muelleriana, L. conti-
nentale, L. myrsinoides, P. esculentum, Poaceae

spp.

Eucalyptus cephalocarpa, E. radiata, B. mar-
ginata, L. continentale, L. myrsinoides, E.
impressa, Monotoca scoparia, Selaginella ulig-
inosa, Amperea xiphoclada

Eucalyptus spp., Melaleuca squarrosa, L.
continentale, Cyperaceae spp.

Eucalyptus spp., B. serrata, Xanthorrhoea
australis, P. esculentum, Acacia spp.

Eucalyptus nitida, B. serrata, X. australis, L.
continentale, L. myrsinoides, B. cinerea,
Eucalyptus sp., Spyridium parvifolium, B. mar-

ginata, Gonocarpus sp., Gahnia radula

Acacia sophorae, Leptospermum sp.,Myoporum
insulare, Banksia integrifolia, Lepidosperma
sp., Ammophila arenaria, Asteraceae sp.

A. sophorae, Allocasuarina stricta, L.
laevigatum, Dianella revoluta, Lomandra
longifolia, Acrotriche serrulata, Bursaria spin-
osa, Pomaderris oraria

Melaleuca squarrosa, L. continentale, E.
impressa, Allocasuarina paludosa,
Xanthorrhoea sp., Dampiera stricta, S. uligi-
nosa, Restio complanatus, Leptocarpus tenax

B. marginata, Xanthorrhoea sp., A. oxycedrus,
L. continentale, E. impressa, B. cinerea

(Menkhorst 1995) are apparently no longer
present. The New Holland Mouse was not
found at Won Wron State Forest, however,
it has never been recorded from this forest.
It was known from McLoughlins Beach

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

(Cockburn 1980; Menkhorst 1995); how-
ever, recent surveys at McLoughlins Beach
failed to locate it (Fauna Survey Group,
Field Naturalists Club of Victoria and
Deakin University records). It was not
detected at Gellions Run (Lumsden and
Schultz 1985), nor was it found on Sunday
Island (Myroniuk ef a/. 1993).

Possible reasons for the decline of New
Holland Mouse populations in the survey
areas together with future management
prescriptions are discussed in the follow-
up paper (part 2) (Quin and Williamson in
press). The nearest known extant popula-
tions of New Holland Mouse to those of
Wilsons Promontory occur approximately
170 km to the north-east at the Loch Sport
and Providence Ponds areas in South
Gippsland. Individuals were trapped at
Loch Sport in 1990 and 1992, and at
Providence Ponds as recently as April
1994 (Deakin University and Mammal
Survey Group of Victoria records; Seebeck
et al. in prep.).

Other Small Mammal Species - Habitat
and Distribution in South Gippsland

The Brown Antechinus inhabits a wide
range of habitats (Hampton e/ a/. 1982),
including heath communities, as the pre-
sent study found. However, it was not
detected in sand dune vegetation at
Dream/Hummock Island or Wilsons
Promontory, possibly because of a lack of
tree hollows (refuge sites) in this habitat
type (pers. obs.).

Bush Rats likewise occupy a range of
habitats; however, they reach greatest
abundance in habitat with exceptionally
dense understoreys (Lunney 1995). At
sites sampled in Mullungdung and Dream/
Hummock Island, vegetation at the ground
level was in places relatively sparse, espe-
cially where species of either Tea-tree or
Wattle were abundant. This may explain
the low trapping rate of Bush Rats at the
former area and their absence at the Island.
Areas dominated by sedges and lilies on
dunes at Wilsons Promontory provide suit-
able ground cover vegetation for them, _

Swamp Rats were relatively abundant in
sand dunes at Dream/Hummock Island, as
they were in 1977 (Peter Menkhorst pers.
comm.), Otherwise, this species was only
caught in the wetter heaths of

Vol. 113 (5) 1996

Mullungdung and Wilsons Promontory.
This 1s somewhat consistent with the find-
ings of previous studies (Braithwaite and
Gullan 1978; Braithwaite er al, 1978;
Wilson 1991), although the sedge compo-
nent of understoreys, implicated in influ-
encing Swamp Rat distribution, was gener-
ally quite low at sites on both Dream /
Hummock Island and at Mullungdung.

House Mice clearly favour vegetated
sand dunes as habitat at Wilsons
Promontory and Dream/Hummock Island,
suggesting that vegetation on the sampled
dune sites is in a state of disturbance.
Geologically, Oyston (1988) considered
sand dunes on the Yanakie Isthmus have
stabilised since the cessation of grazing
and regular burning by cattle graziers. A
single House Mouse was captured in
recently burnt (0.8 years after fire) heathy
woodland at Won Wron State Forest.

The Eastern Pygmy-possum inhabits a
variety of vegetation forms. from rainfor-
est to coastal heath. It especially favours
habitats with an abundance of hollows for
refuge sites (Turner and Ward 1995),
Consequently, heathy woodlands of
Mullungdung (and probably Won Wron)
would be suitable habitat. However,
Eastern Pygmy-possums were also trapped
at a rehabilitated gravel scrape in
Mullungdung. This scrape was created in
the 1960’s and intermittently used until the
Jate 1970's. Natural regeneration was
occurring, and in the late 1980"s, rehabili-
tation works - top soil spreading and
Eucalypt planting - was conducted
(Graeme Davis pers. comm.). An abun-
dance of potential food shrubs, including
Tea-tree. occurs in the scrape, but not
Banksias. Additionally, the Eastern
Pygmy-possums may be taking advantage
of the fallen logs, left during the initial
scrape creation, as diurnal refuge sites.

Acknowledgments

| thank Barbara Wilson (Deakin University)
for advice given in directing the project. The
study site selection process benefited from dis-
cussions with Barbara, Tim Buttle, Peter
Menkhorst, Jim Whelan. Tony Willet, the Fauna
Survey Group of the Ficld Naturalists Club of
Victoria, and the Mammal Survey Group of
Victoria, Barbara, Peter and the two groups are
also thanked for permitting access to their Sur-
yey records.

245

Research Reports

The following persons provided valuable field
support which is acknowledged: Dale
Antonysen, David Body, Tim Buttle, Steve
Darby, Kath and Andrew Gosden, Darren Heil,
Belinda Kee, Irma Keskinen, Les Leunig, the
Luckock family, Frankie MacLennan, Joan
Quin, Susan Taylor and David Knowles, Jim
Whelan, Ross Williamson and Andy Wise.
Special thanks must go to Neil Scanlon who
assisted with all aspects of field work in
Mullungdung and Won Wron State Forests.
Ross Williamson assisted in supervising the pro-
ject.

Joy Darby’s expertise produced the maps.
Catriona McPhee and Beverley Van Praagh
kindly identified invertebrates. Barbara Triggs
identified hair samples and components of scats.
Raelene Warren also analysed some hair sam-
ples. Ed and Pat Grey, Darren Quin, Susan
Taylor, Sonya Feodoroff and Robyn Watson
provided valuable suggestions to improve the
manuscript. Further constructive comments
were provided by an anonymous referee. Toni
Carroll and Tracey Fuller word processed the
manuscript.

References

Braithwaite, R. W. and Gullan, P, K, (1978). Habitat
selection by small mammals in a Victorian heathland.
Australian Journal of Ecology 3, 109-127,

Brunner, H. and Coman, B. (1974), 'The Identification of
Mammalian Hair’. (Inkata Press :Melbourne).

CNR (1993). 'Results of a fauna survey of specific sites
at Yanakie Isthmus, Wilsons Promontory National
Park, February 1993'. Internal report by Flora, Fauna
and Fisheries Section, Department of Conservation and
Natural Resources, Yarram.

CNR (1995). ‘Threatened Fauna in Victoria - 1995’.
(Department of Conservation and Natural
Resources: Victoria)

Cockburn, A. (1980). The diet of New Holland Mouse
(Pseudomys novaehollandiae) and the House Mouse
(Mus musculus) in Victorian coastal heathland.
Australian Mammalogy 3, 31-34. -

Fox, B. J. and Fox, M. D. (1978). Recolonization of
coastal heath by Pseudomys novaehollandiae
(Muridae) following sand mining. Australian Journal
of Ecology 3, 447-465. :

Gilmore, A, M. (1977) A survey of vertebrate animals in
the Stradbroke area of South Gippsland, Victoria, The
Victorian Naturalist 94, 123-128.

Hampton, J.W.F., Howard, A-E., Poynton, J. and Barnett,
J.L. (1982). Records of the Mammal Survey Group of
Victoria, 1966-80, on the distribution of terrestrial
mammals in Victoria. Australian Wildlife Research 9,
177-201.

Keith, K. and Calaby, J. H. (1968) The New Holland
Mouse, Pseudomys novaehollandiae (Waterhouse), in
the Port Stephens District, New South Wales. CS/RO
Wildlife Research 13, 45-58.

Kemper, C. (1995). New Holland Mouse. Jn ‘The
Mammals of Australia’. Ed. R. Strahan. (The
Australian Museum and Reed Books: New South
Wales).

246

LC C (1980), 'Report on the South Gippsland Study
Area, District 2’, Land Conservation Council, Victoria.
(Government Printer: Melbourne).

Lumsden, L.F. and Schultz, M. (1985), The mammals of
Gellions Run, South Gippsland. The Victorian
Naturalist 102, 4-16.

Lunney, D, (1995). Bush Rat, Jn ‘The Mammals of
Australia’. Ed, R. Strahan. (The Australian Museum
and Reed Books: New South Wales).

Menkhorst, P. W. (Ed.) (1995). "Mammals of Victoria:
Ecology, Conservation and Distribution’. (Oxford
University Press: Melbourne).

Mueller - Dombois, D. and Ellenberg, H. (1974). ‘Aims
and Methods of Vegetational Ecology’. (John Wiley
and Sons Inc: New York).

Myroniuk, P., Grusovin, J. and Thompson, R. (1993).
Mammal survey of Sunday Island, South Gippsland,
Victoria. The Victorian Naturalist 110, 165-170,

Oyster, B. (1988), ‘The Geology and Cainozoic
Evolution of the Yanakie Isthmus, Victoria’, B.Sc.
(Hons) Thesis. (University of Melbourne, Department
of Geology: unpublished).

Posamentier, H. and Recher, H. F. (1974). The status of
Pseudomys novaehollandiae (the New Holland
Mouse). Australian Zoologist 18, 66-71.

Pye, T. (1991). The New Holland Mouse (Pseudomys
novaehollandiae) (Rodentia : Muridae) in Tasmania : a
Field Study. Wildlife Research 18, 521-531,

Quin, B. R. (1994). 'A survey for populations of New
Holland Mouse (Pseudomys novaehollandiae) in the
South Gippsland area of Southern Victoria November
1992 - April 1993". Internal report by Flora, Fauna and
Fisheries Section, Department of Conservation and
Natural Resources, Yarram,

Quin, B. R. and Williamson, R. (in press) New Holland
Mouse Pseudomys novaechollandiae (Rodentia:
Muridae) in South Gippsland, Southern Victoria, Part
Two - Conservation and Management. The Victorian
Naturalist.

Scotts, D. J. and Craig, S. A. (1988), Improved hair-sam-
pling tube for the detection of rare animals. Australian
Wildlife Research 15, 469-472.

Seebeck, J., Menkhorst, P, and Wilson, B. (in prep.).
Action Statement : New Holland Mouse, Pseudomys
novaehollandiae. Department of Natural Resources
and Environment, Victoria.

Suckling, G. C. (1978). A hair sampling tube for the
detection of small mammals in trees. Australian
Wildlife Research 5, 249-252.

Turner, V. and Ward, S.J. (1995). Eastern Pygmy-pos-
sum. Jn ‘The Mammals of Australia’. Ed. R. Strahan.
(The Australian Museum and Reed Books: New South
Wales).

Wilson, B, A. (1991) The ecology of Pseudomys novae-
hollandiae (Waterhouse, 1843) in the Eastern Otway
Ranges, Victoria. Wildlife Research 18, 233-247.

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

The Consumption of Onion Grass *Romulea rosea Corms by
Purple Swamphens Porphyrio porphyrio -

Is there Potential for Native Animals to help Control Weeds?

S. Diez'?and M.F. Clarke!

Abstract

Swamphens fed on the underground corms of the weed Onion Grass *Romulea rosea in autumn and
winter, when the ground was soft and shoots of the weed were present, These Birds fed significantly
more often on the weed in areas where the plants were in high densities and the ground soft. Corm
depth and soil moisture content were unimportant in determining whether a swamphen chose to feed
on Onion Grass at a particular site. Experiments in which the soil at some sites was lightly tilled
demonstrated that swamphens would feed on onion grass corms in such areas, even though they had
not previously grazed on onion grass at these sites. This paper discusses the potential use of a native

species in weed management programs. (The Victorian Naturalist 113, 1996 , 247-255)

Introduction

Native bushland and re-vegetated areas
are often subject to invasion by introduced
plants. Weeds can out-compete native or
desirable species and subsequently lead to
the degradation of areas set aside for con-
servation purposes (e.g. Carr et al. 1992).
Attempts to control such weeds often
involve the use of herbicides whose
residues may persist in the environment.
However, utilising the grazing activities of
herbivorous animals to control weeds may
offer an alternative method with fewer
long-term risks.

Past consideration of such an approach to
weed control has focused on the use of
domestic animals to maintain or enhance
communities and control undesirable plant
species (e.g. Gibson et al. 1987, Bokdam
and Wallis-de-Vries 1992). To date, there

appears to have been very little research on
the possible use of native animals to assist
in restoration processes. When one consid-
ers that the activities of native animals may
have shaped the very ecosystems that are
being restored, this neglect seems a serious
oversight, Part of the reason may be that
the restoration of ecosystems is itself such
_ anew field (Jordan ef al. 1987).

In an attempt to address the effects of
native grazers upon re-generating ecosys-
tems, this study focused on the interaction
between a native grazer, the Purple
Swamphen Porphyrio porphyrio (Fig. 1)

‘School of Zoology, La Trobe University, Bundoora,

Victoria 3083 y
2 Current address: NRE, P. O. Box 401, Bendigo,

Victoria 3550

Vol. 113 (5) 1996

and an introduced weed, Onion Grass
*Romulea rosea (* = introduced plant),

The major components of the swamphen’s
diet consist of pieces of vegetation gleaned
from swamps and pastures (Readers Digest
1977). Creation of areas of open pasture for
cattle has also created ideal habitat for
grazing by swamphens (Fordham 1983). A
high proportion of plant species found in
these pastures are exotic plants, introduced
into Australia. Detailed records of the
dietary habits of the swamphen in the
Gippsland region of Victoria have shown
that a significant proportion of the diet was
composed of introduced plant species
(Norman and Mumford 1985). Species
consumed include exotic plants from the
families Gramineae (grasses), Cyperaceae
(sedges) and Hydrocharitaceae(water
plants). These records highlight the ability
of swamphens to incorporate new foods
into their diet.

Members of the genus Romulea are part
of the Iridaceae family, and were originally

<aerrhy .
rf. 1
Oe ay ts

‘ ‘ ’ : )
a Gay
LW

urple Swamphe Porphyrio porphyrio

247

Research Reports

restricted to parts of Southern Africa
(deVos 1972). *Romulea rosea persists as
an underground corm or food storage
organ during the dry summer months.
Inconspicuous grass-like shoots emerge
after the autumn rains, and pink flowers
appear in the spring. In Victoria, the distri-
bution of *R. rosea (hereafter referred to as
Romulea to include other species within
the Romulea genus) seems to have been
restricted to the area around the Melbourne
Botanical Gardens in the mid 1800’s, but
had dispersed widely and become a serious
problem by the early 1900’s (Ewart 1906,
1909), Early ideas on the control of the
weed in pastures included manuring and
bringing the land under cultivation (Ewart
1907).

In an analysis of the gizzard contents of
swamphens collected in the Gippsland
region, Norman and Mumford (1985)
recorded parts of the corms of Romulea in
many of the birds examined. Although pre-
sent in the crops of many individuals, it
was not a significant proportion of the diet.
How, or where, the corms of this plant
were obtained and consumed was not
addressed in that study. To investigate the
relationship between swamphens and
Romulea, the following questions were
addressed:

i) How does the swamphen forage

upon Romulea?

ii) What are the characteristics of the

soil and plants at sites where

swamphens feed on Romulea?

iii) Using the results of the above

investigation, is it possible to manipu-

late the environment to increase the
likelihood that swamphens will feed
upon Romulea?

Study area and methods

The study site was located within a regen-
erating woodland being managed as a
bushland reserve, within the grounds of La
Trobe University in Bundoora, Victoria,
Australia (37°41' S, 145°3' E). The site was
originally a River Red Gum Eucalyptus
camaldulensis woodland, but had been
cleared and grazed as farmland prior to
acquisition by La Trobe University in
1968. During the last twenty-five years
much of the site has been revegetated with
indigenous flora, The site includes a water

248

treatment system of billabongs and lakes,
which act as catchment for the area north-
east of the University. Wetland flora from
the nearby Plenty and Yarra Rivers have
been used to re-create a complex wetland
system. Waterfowl have arrived as a natur-
al consequence of habitat development .

Romulea abundance

Seasonal changes in Romulea abundance
were determined by counting plants in 12
(90x90 cm) wire plots which were set up at
the study site prior to full emergence of
Romulea in April, 1993. Sub-sampling of
these plots was randomised by choosing
three of a possible nine (30 x 30 cm) sub-
plots within the plot. Counts were carried
out every 2-3 weeks to take into account

the relatively long period of germination of .

Romulea (Eddy and Smith 1975). Small
numbers of *Romulea minutiflora (Small
Onion Grass) are known to exist within the
study site (pers.comm. G. Carr). However,
these were not identified or distinguished
from *R. rosea during this study.

Feeding Behaviour

Observations of the feeding behaviour of
swamphens were carried out from 28 April
to 12 August,1993, to determine whether
swamphens used particular feeding tech-
niques to consume Romulea corms.
Although the swamphens were not individ-
ually marked, detailed observations were
obtained on the foraging behaviour of at
least eight individual birds feeding on
Romulea at the study site between May and
August 1993, and the actual number of dif-
ferent birds observed was probably much
greater, Further observations were carried
out at Towt’s Swamp near Whittlesea (37°
31'S, 145° 07' E). Birds were observed
from a distance of between 5-40 m using
Carl Zeiss 10 x 50 binoculars.
Observations of feeding behaviour were
recorded in note form and photographs
were taken.

In order to determine the conditions that
were most favourable for the consumptien
of Romulea by swamphens, the birds were
observed regularly during the autumn and
winter of 1993, by traversing a fixed tran-
sect of 1.51 km every three days. Five
types of data were collected at all sites
within a 1 m radius of where swamphens

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

were observed:
a) A relative measure of soil hardness
was obtained using a soil penetrometer
(Geotester Pocket Penetrometer).
b) Cylindrical soil cores (of a depth of
10 cm, and a diameter of approximately
8 cm) were removed to obtain an esti-
mate of the number of Romulea corms
and their depths.
c) The soil contained in the cores was
used to determine the relative soil mois-
ture at each foraging site. An estimate
of soil moisture was obtained by weigh-
ing and then heating the soil samples at
105°C for 24 hours in order to remove
moisture (Reynolds 1970). The samples
were then re-weighed and relative soil
moisture for each sample was calculat-
ed using the change in weight as a per-
centage of the pre-dried weight of the
soil.
d) Where swamphens were foraging
and Romulea shoots were observed, a
30 x 30 cm quadrat was placed immedi-
ately adjacent to the foraging area, and
the number of individual Romulea
plants within the quadrat was recorded
e) Swamphens were recorded as having
fed on Romulea if Romulea corm basal
sheaths were found in the foraging area
(Fig. 2)

Disturbance experiment

During habitat usage surveys it became
clear that a significant proportion of birds
feeding on Romulea were observed in
areas in which the soil penetrability read-
ing was low (i.e. soil was soft), and areas
where the soil had been disturbed by
machinery. In order to test the hypothesis

Fig. 2. Basa! sheaths jeft after Swamphens have
eaten the corm

Vol. 113 (5) 1996

that swamphens were attracted to disturbed
areas, soil penetrability was experimentally
manipulated by tilling. :

Ten pairs of control and experimentally-
tilled plots were set up within the bushland
reserve, Some plots were located along
compacted pathways and others close to
known feeding sites. Each plot consisted of
two (90 cm x 90 cm) adjoining areas; in
one the soi] was gently loosened with a
garden fork, whilst the other was left as an
un-tilled contro] plot. Romulea abundance
prior to disturbance was determined by
counting the number of above-ground
shoots in three randomly selected subplots.
each of 30 cm x 30 em within each plot.
An estimate of the foraging intensity of
swamphens at each plot was determined
twice by counting the number of Romulea
corm basal sheaths in each plot 7 days and
14 days after the commencement of the
experiment. After four to five weeks. the
final numbers of Romu/ea plants remaining
in all plots was determined using the same
methods as during the earlier counts.
Parametric statistical tests were used,
unless otherwise indicated. Where neces-
sary, data were log-transformed to achieve
homogeneity of variance. Means of un-
transformed data + one standard error are
presented.

Results

The number of Romulea plants visible
above the ground surface increased steadi-
ly throughout April and June, with abun-
dances fluctuating between July and
August (Fig. 3).

The initial increase was due to both ger-
minating seedlings and the re-emergence
of adult plants after summer dormancy.

Feeding behaviour

Swamphens were first observed consum-
ing Romulea corms on May |. They
removed entire plants either by digging
with the beak to loosen the soil, or by
pulling up the plant by the base of the
shoot. The swamphen would then raise one
foot to its beak, an action often accompa-
nied by a simultaneous lowering of the
head and neck (Fig. 4). The plant was
transferred from the bill to either the left or
right foot, and then held firmly between
iwo of the fore toes. The corm was broken

249

Research Reports

600
=
wo
ww
a

100

Romulea plants per square metre

Dis T T

Date of Census

Fig. 3. Proportion of foraging events involving Komulea

up using the beak, generally whilst the bird
was balancing on one leg. Alternatively the
plant was pinned to the ground and the
corm broken up. Once the internal portion
of the corm was consumed, the characteris-
tic corm basal sheaths and the shoot, with a
small portion of the corm attached, were all
that remained (Fig. 5).

One swamphen was observed carrying a
Romulea plant to a puddle and washing it
prior to consumption. This same behaviour
w?s observed on a separate occasion by

Fig. 4. Swamphen feeding behaviour.

250

pajnuoy SUIA[OAUI S]UaA9 SUISeIOJ Jo UONAOdOIg

ee ad eee
Lie a — He ci.

another observer (B. Malone pers. comm.)
at a nearby location. Because birds were
not individually distinguishable, it was
unclear if this washing behaviour was lim-
ited to one individual.

Features of the foraging sites

When compared statistically, the number
of Romulea plants/m? above the ground
surface was significantly higher in areas
where swamphens were foraging upon
Romulea than in areas where Romulea was
present but not foraged upon (Table 1).
There was also a significantly greater num-
ber of corms per core where swamphens
were foraging on Romulea than in areas
where swamphens refrained from foraging
on Romulea despite the weed being present
(Table 1).

The soil penetrability ranged from —
6.1 kg/m? (very hard) to 0.6 kg/m? (very
soft) during the study. The soil penetrabili-
ty readings at sites where swamphens for-
aged on Romulea were significantly lower
than at the sites where swamphens failed to
forage on Romulea even though the weed
was present (Table 1).

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports aetna

Fig. 5. A - Onion Grass Romulea rosea, whole plant. B.and C. show the remains of Swamphen
foraging, B - corm sheathing leaf bases, C - shoot remains.

Vol. 113 (5) 1996 251

Research Reports

When compared statistically, the soil
moisture at sites where swamphens foraged
on Romulea was not significantly different
to the soil moisture at sites where
swamphens did not forage on Romulea
despite the weed being present (Table 1).
There was a significant correlation
between soil moisture and penetrability (r
= 0.42, df = 99, p = 0.0001, n =101).
However, only 17% of the variation in soil
penetrability could be explained by per-
centage moisture, suggesting that other
factors possibly may be affecting soil pen-
etrability.

The mean depth at which Romulea corms
were located in soil cores ranged from 0.5 -
6.0 cm. These mean depths did not differ
significantly in areas where swamphens
foraged on Romulea and where swamphens
did not forage on Romulea despite the
weed being present (Table 1).

Disturbance plots
Significantly more Romulea corms were

consumed by swamphens in the tilled sites
than in the control plots. This was evident
from the number of corm basal sheaths/m?
on the tilled plots which were significantly
higher than the number found on the con-
trol plots seven days after the disturbance
(Table 2).

After 14 days, the number of corm basal
sheaths counted on the tilled plots indicat-
ed that foraging intensity was increasing
compared to that on undisturbed control
plots (Table 2).

Four weeks after the experiment was ini-
tiated, a count of Romulea plants was car-
ried out to determine if the disturbance had
affected seedling recruitment. The number
of Romulea plants present increased on
both tilled plots and control plots during
the experiment. However, the increase was
smaller in the tilled plots than in the con-
trol plots, although the difference was not
Statistically significant (Table 2).

Table 1. Features of the foraging sites where Romulea was present and either foraged upon, or not
foraged upon by Purple Swamphens

Note that n = the number of samples, SE is the standard error, X = the mean, df = the degrees of
freedom (n-1), t is the test statistic, and P is the probability that the two sets of samples are the same.
For the soil moisture analysis the degrees of freedom were adjusted following the method of Watson
and McGaw (1980) to account for non-homogeneity of variances.

Key: | = Sites where Romulea was foraged upon; 2 Sites where Romulea was present but not for-
aged upon

Variable 1 2 t df p

X + SE n X22 SE =n
Number of Romulea
plants/m* Zia ase ISG PTS ZS 3.95 52 0.0002
Number of Romulea
corms/core 9.4+ 1.2 S65, S09") 13: 4.62 45 0.0001
Soil penetrability 1,340.2 * 35 24+04 18 3.36 51 0.002
£ iil moisture 23.540.8 34 23,.9%%212 18 0.60 20 p>0.2

Yable 2. Mean number of Romulea corm basal sheaths and mean number of Romulea plants found at
sites where the soil had been tilled, and at control plots where the soil had not been tilled.

Variable Tilled plots Control Plots t df p

X+SE n X+SE n
Number of corm basal
sheaths after 7 days 12+4.1 10 0.8+0.4 10 3.53 9 0.0064
Number of corm basal
sheaths after 14 days 34.7+13.3 10 1440.5 10 6.04 9 0.0002
Mean increase in the
number of Romulea
plants after 4 weeks 67.3+13.1 10 79.6+94 10 0142 9 0 188

252 The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

Discussion
Feeding technique and seasonality

Observations of swamphen feeding tech-
niques indicated that the use of their feet
was an important part of Romulea con-
sumption. By manipulating plants with
their feet, swamphens were able to extract
the entire contents of the corm, destroying
it in the process. These observations are
important because the manner in which
swamphens feed on Romulea has obvious
consequences for the individual plant being
consumed, but may also have conse-
quences for the local population of the
weed. Swamphens may be viewed as
‘predators’ (as defined by Thompson 1982)
since grazing results in the death of whole
plants. Because swamphens feed on plants
before they begin seed production (seed
may begin forming from September to
October or November, Ewart 1907), they
have the potential to affect the future abun-
dance of the weed.

The consumption of Romulea by
swamphens is clearly not restricted to cer-
tain localities. Swamphens have been
recorded feeding on Romulea corms in
other parts of Victoria (e.g. at Coolart (38°
24'S, 145° 09' E) (S. Yorke, pers. comm.),
at Whittlesea (37° 31'S, 145° 07'E) (M.
Towt, pers. comm.), and at Gippsland
(Norman and Mumford 1985)).

The method used by swamphens to feed
on Romulea is not restricted to this one
food type. Rowley (1968) has described a
similar technique exhibited by swamphens
feeding on figs, where figs were trans-
ferred from bill to foot, and the foot was
used to pin fruit to the ground. Also,
Holyoak (1970) described washing of food
and extensive use of feet in feeding as a
common characteristic of captive
swamphens.

Bryant (1940a and 1940b) also recorded
the use of feet for feeding, though there
seemed to be some perception at the time
of his publications that the technique was
quite uncommon among swamphens. In
Victoria, swamphens have incorporated
significant amounts of introduced vegeta-
tion into their diets (Norman and Mumford
1985). Extensive modifications to wetlands
and their surrounds (Shaw et al. 1990,
Wood 1990) may have altered the quantity
and/or types of foods available to water-

Vol. 113 (5) 1996

fowl. It is likely that the increased avail-
ability of introduced plants has had an
Important influence on the feeding behav-
lour of swamphens.

Characteristics of the foraging sites

*Romulea rosea was more likely to be
consumed by swamphens at sites where the
soil was soft, and where Romulea numbers
were high. It is likely that Romulea was
easier to extract in areas where the soil was
soft. Furthermore, it is possible that
removal of Romulea plants may lead to
even further softening of the soil, such that
the energy required to obtain additional
plants is less than that required to obtain
the first plants in an area. A benefit such as
this is more likely to occur at sites with
high densities of Romulea.

That corm depth and soil moisture were
not good predictors of where swamphens
would forage on Romulea was a somewhat
surprising result. Swamphens appeared
capable of feeding on Romulea corms at all
depths, provided the soil was soft enough.
Though not highly correlated with soil
penetrability, moisture was expected to
play some role in determining the ease
with which swamphens could remove
corms. It may be that other soil parameters
such as composition and structure are bet-
ter predictors of soil penetrability.

Although both the number of corms pre-
sent and the number of above-ground
shoots were good predictors of the likeli-
hood of swamphens foraging on Romulea
at a site, the number of corms was a better
predictor than number of above-ground
shoots. The number of shoots will differ
from corm number because of corms that
may remain dormant and also because
seedlings do not form corms until the end
of their first growing season (pers. obs.).
Swamphens may be able to discern differ-
ences in the available below-ground food
resource without using the number of
shoots as a cue. There is potential for fur-
ther experimentation to test this hypothesis
by removing Romulea shoots from areas of
soft soil. If swamphens continue to dig for
the corms this might suggest they are
indeed using other cues or memory to
assess the abundance of below-ground

corms.

253

Research Reports

Artificial disturbance experiment

By itself, the correlational evidence that
swamphens foraged more often on Romulea
where the ground was soft, did not prove
conclusively that ground hardness was of
key importance in the foraging behaviour
of swamphens upon this weed. Such a cor-
relation could have been due to corms
being larger, or at a higher density, at sites
with soft soils. The fact that experimental
loosening of the soil attracted swamphens
to feed on these sites more heavily than in
adjacent undisturbed control areas (when
other confounding variable were con-
trolled) provides strong experimental evi-
dence that swamphens preferentially for-
age upon Romulea in areas where the soil
is soft.

Interestingly, as indicated by an increase
in the number of corm basal sheaths over
the two-week study period, the number of
corms in the tilled areas was not totally
depleted by swamphens at their initial dis-
covery. This could be due to individual
birds becoming satiated, and then leaving
the patch of food to possibly return at some
later date, or the discovery of the patch by
successive birds, each of whom forages
until satiated, and then leaves. Similar
habits were also reported for the Long-
billed Corella Cacatua tenuirostris, which
‘habitually returned’ to feed on *R. rosea
in ploughed fields (Temby and Emison
1986). It is also possible to interpret these
habits in the light of Charnov’s (1976)
marginal value theorem, which predicts
that areas of high energy return should be
foraged only as long as no alternative site
offers a better rate of return. If accessibility
of Romulea varies over time (due to rain-
fall or other factors), then this may explain
why the birds might leave one food patch
for another, and also, why they may later
return to feed in the original patch.

The fact that swamphens are easily
attracted to feeding on Romulea if the area
where it is growing has been lightly tilled
may affect the way that this weed is man-
aged near wetlands. Firstly, loosening soil
in small areas may be a useful alternative
to herbicides, an advantage when working
near wetlands, Secondly, particular sites
can be targeted without damaging sur-
rounding areas. Given that corms are con-
sumed prior to seed being set, it is likely

254

ees. rrr

that consumption of Romulea by
swamphens and other birds such as
Sulphur-crested Cockatoos Cacatua galeri-
ta (Ewart 1907); Stubble Quail Coturnix
pectoralis Hyett (1967) and Long-billed
Corella (Temby and Emison 1986)) could
affect the density of plants in an area over
time. A longer-term study is needed to
examine this.

The consumption of Romulea corms by
Swamphens is not likely to reduce plant
numbers permanently. If there are adult
plants setting seed in the vicinity of the
tilled area, Romulea will almost certainly
re-invade. Similarly, other weeds may
invade where there is soil disturbance.
Thus tilling and foraging by swamphens
may be useful as a weed control tool, but
only as part of a combined approach with
other methods such as burning which pre-
vents Romulea from flowering.

However, it is clear that native herbivores
may have a potential role to play in con-
trolling the spread of weed species.

Acknowledgments

We would like to thank the staff of the Wildlife
Reserves, La Trobe University for permission to
conduct our research there and in particular, G.
Paras who drew our attention to the Purple
Swamphen/Romulea interaction. We would also
like to acknowledge assistance from the van
Roosendael Family and M. Towt, who allowed
us to observe Purple Swamphens (and Romulea)
on their properties. We would like to acknowl-
edge G. Carr and N. Scarlett for providing infor-
mation on the life history of Romulea.

References

Bokdam, J. and Wallis-De-Vries, M. F. (1992). Forage
quality as a limiting factor for cattle grazing in isolat-
ed Dutch nature reserves. Conservation Biology 6,
399-408

Bryant, C.E. (1940)a. Photography in the swamps, the
eastern swamp-hen. Emu 39, 288-292.

Bryant, C.E. (1940)b. Stray Feathers. Emu 40, 165-166.

Carr, G.W., Yugovic, J.V. and Robinson, K.E, (1992).
Environmental Weed Invasion in Victoria.
Conservation and Management Implications-
(Department of Conservation and Environment
Victoria, and Ecological Horticulture, Melbourne).

Charnov, E. (1976). Optimal foraging: the marginal
value theorem. Theoretical Population Biology 9,
129-136.

deVos, M.P. (1972). The genus Romulea in South
Africa. Journal of South African Botany,
Supplementary volume number 9.

Eddy, J.L and Smith, D.F. (1975). Seed dispersal and
germination in Romulea rosea (onion grass),
Australian Journal of Experimental Agriculture and
Animal Husbandry 15, 508-512.

Ewart, A.J, (1906). Contribution to the flora of
Australia. Romulea (trichonema) cruciata.

The Victorian Naturalist —

Naturalist Notes

ima of the Royal Society of Victoria 19, 43-

Ewart, A.J. (1907). Guildford grass ot onion grass.
Journal of the Department of Agriculture of Victoria
5, 537-540. ;

Ewart, A.J, (1909). The Weeds, Poison Plants and
Naturalised Aliens of Victoria. (Govt. Printer.
Melbourne).

Fordham, R.A. (1983). Seasonal dispersion and activi-
ty of the Pukeko Porphyrio porphyrio melanotus
(Rallidae) in swamp and pasture. New Zealand
Journal of Zoology 6, 133-142.

Gibson, C.W.D,, Watt, T.A. and Brown, V.K. (1987).
The use of sheep grazing to recreate species rich
grasslands from abandoned arable land.
Conservation Biology 42, 165-183

Holyoak, D.T. (1970), The behaviour of captive purple
gallinules Porphyrio porphyrio. Aviculture
Magazine 76, 98-109,

Hyett, J. (1967). New food record for stubble quail.
Emu 66, 372.

Jordan, W.R., Gilpin, M.E. and Aber, J.D. (1987).
Restoration Ecology, A Synthetic Approach to
Ecological Research. (Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge).

Norman, F.J. and Mumford, L. (1985). Studies on the
Purple Swamphen, Porphyrio porphyrio, in Victoria.
Australian Wildlife Research 12, 263-278.

Readers Digest (1977). Complete Book of Australian
Birds. 1S'edn. (Readers Digest Services, Sydney),
Reynolds, 5.G. (1970). The gravimetric method of soil
moisture determination, Part 1, a study of equipment
and methodological problems. Journal of Hydrology

11, 258-273.

Rowley, I. (1968). Unusual feeding technique of bald
coot, Emu 67, 295-296,

Shaw, J., Beilhartz, M., Hill, R., Polley, V. and
Sullivan, C. (1990). An introduction to the Victorian
wetlands conservation program. /n ‘Wetlands, their
Ecology, Function, Restoration and Management’,
proceedings, (La Trobe University, Melbourne).

Temby, LD. and Emison, W.B. (1986). Foods of the
Long-billed Corella. Australian Wildlife Research
13, 57-63

Thompson, J.N. (1982). ‘Interaction and Coevolution’.
(John Wiley and Sons, New York).

Watson, G, and MeGaw, D. (1980). ‘Statistical
Inquiry’. (John Wiley & Sons, New York).

Wood, K. (1990), Community involvement in wet-
lands- The Victorian Wetlands Trust, /n, ‘Wetlands,
their Ecology, Function, Restoration and
Management’, proceedings. (La Trobe University,
Melbourne).

Advance of the Honey Fungus

The merry month of May has been a dis-
appointing one in our area for mushrooms
and for fungi in general. Only the Honey
Fungus Armillaria luteobubalina prolifer-
ates in the native park opposite my house,
festooning the roots and butts of its vic-
tims with its fruiting bodies, The freely
shed spores whitewash the surrounding
areas. The spores themselves will not
attack a living tree but must establish a
base on a dead stump or similar deadwood
of which, alas, there are plenty. From this
base long rhizomorphs that resemble the
black bootlaces wander out through the
soil until they strike the roots of a living
tree spreading the infection up toward the
trunk and eventually killing it. The fungus
is moving inexorably down the park
claiming eucalypts, angophoras, wattles,
sheoaks and lesser shrubbery. I wish I
knew how to check it, short of digging
deep trenches around the more valued

trees.
On a visit to Perth in the seventies we

Vol. 113 (5) 1996

ae ee EEE EEE eee

noticed the gardeners in Kings Park lifting
their shrubs with great balls of earth, lin-
ing the holes with black plastic and replac-
ing them. On being asked the reason for
this odd behaviour, they cried in distracted
tones ‘We've got the Honey Fungus!’.
However, back in Victoria, 1996, a bonus
for me - also in the park, was a nice
colony of Wood Blewit Lepista nuda
delightful in their tonings of cinnamon
caps and palest mauve gills and stems.
They grew amongst grass and fallen leaves
under a Cherry Ballart/Angophora clump.
They are an excellent culinary mushroom,
very tasty in the pan. Know them by their
pale pink spores. | must admit that I have
tried young and tender specimens of the
Honey Fungus too, first bringing them to
the boil in salted water to dispel any evil
humours. Verdict? They are not bad!.

Ellen Lyndon

7 Steele Street, Leongatha, Victoria 3953

255

Contributions

Using Nest Boxes to Survey for the Brush-tailed Phascogale
Phascogale tapoatafa

T. R. Soderquist', B. J. Traill', F. Faris’, K. Beasley’

Abstract

The Brush-tailed Phascogale Phascogale tapoatafa is an arboreal carnivorous marsupial previously
found in dry forest and woodland throughout much of Australia. The species’ distribution has
declined during the past two centuries, with its current range and status being poorly understood. Of
the several survey methods available for arboreal mammals, the use of nest boxes is the most effi-
cient for locating phascogales. We describe this survey technique as it applies to phascogales, and
propose that nest boxes be established and checked by interested volunteers so as to monitor popula-
tions trends in the long-term. Whether conducted by a concerned individual or a naturalist group,
each survey will contribute to the conservation of this rare species.(The Victorian Naturalist 113.1996,

256-261).

Introduction

The Brush-tailed Phascogale Phascogale
tapoatafa is a medium sized carnivorous
marsupial (family Dasyuridae) found in the
dry sclerophyll forests and woodlands of
mainland Australia (Cuttle 1983)(Fig. 1).
The name Tuan is commonly used for P.
tapoatafa in Victoria. It originally derived
from an Aboriginal name for Sugar Gliders
(Conole 1987). Since the arrival of
Europeans in Australia, the distribution of
the species has declined greatly and the
species is now apparently extinct in South
Australia and rare in the other states, Due
to the relatively extensive fauna surveys
conducted in Victoria (e.g. Menkhorst and
Gilmore 1979; Norris et al. 1983), the
species. decline in this state is particularly
well documented (Atlas of Victorian
Wildlife, Department of Conservation and
Natural Resources). Phascogales were pre-
viously distributed throughout much of
Victoria (Fig. 2) but have become locally
extinct in many regions. The lack of obser-
vations after 1960 in the southern
Gippsland forests and in coastal eucalypt
woodlands indicates that the extinction
process is continuing. Further local extinc-
tions are likely among many of the frag-
mented, remnant forests in central and
western Victoria.

Three aspects of the natural history of P.
tapoatafa (hereafter referred to as phasco-
gales) make it unusually vulnerable to
extinction, especially when small popula-

| Department of Ecology and Evolutionary Biology,
Monash University, Clayton, Victoria 3168

~ Friends of the Tuan, Threatened Species Network,
{0 Parliament Place, East Melbourne, Victoria 3002.

~ Australian Trust for Conservation Volunteers, P. O.
Box 423, Ballarat, Victoria, 3353

256

tions become isolated. Firstly, the lifespan
of phascogales is relatively short, All male
phascogales die after the short annual
breeding season when 11-12 months of age
(Cuttle 1982). Thus, reproduction must be
successful in every year so that sires are
present during the next breeding season.
Females seldom live longer than two years.
Due to the energetic stress of lactation,
they typically succeed in weaning only one
litter (Soderquist 1993a). Secondly, the
density of phascogales is typically very
low. For example, the apparently high
quality habitat in the Chiltern Regional
Park (4,200 ha) only sustains 35-50 breed-
ing females. This sparse density is due, in
part, to the low abundance of their prey

Fig. 1. Brush-tailed Phascogale (or Tuan)

Phascogale tapoatafa.

The Victorian Naturalist

Contributions

Fig. 2. Distribution of P. tapoatafa in Victoria.
The shaded area indicates regions currently
occupied, although populations are highly frag-
mented within these areas, The hatched area
indicates probable historical distribution (see
Menkhorst 1995). In addition, unverified
reports of phascogales have recently come from
Gippsland and the Bellarine Peninsula.

(large insects) which forces females to for-
age over surprisingly large home ranges,
mean 40 ha (Soderquist 1995). Females are
territorially aggressive towards unrelated
females and seldom share a home range
with daughters (Soderquist and Ealey
1994). Hence, few litters can be raised in a
given area. Thirdly, juvenile males tend to
disperse long distances (>3 km) from their
natal home ranges (Soderquist and Lill
1995). This assists genetic interchange in
large, contiguous populations. However, it
means that small populations of phasco-
gales are likely to lose all locally produced
sons. If females are to reproduce they must
be located by males dispersing from other
areas.

The low densities of phascogales make it
difficult to survey for the species. The con-
sequent lack of information on distribution
is hindering efforts to protect phascogales.
Land managers are usually unwilling to
curtail destructive activities without proof
that phascogales (or other rare species)
exist at a site, Surveys and long-term mon-
itoring need to be initiated now to deter-
mine the current distribution and status of
phascogales and to stimulate appropriate
management of their habitat. _

In this paper we briefly review five sur-
vey techniques for phascogales. We then

Vol. 113 (5) 1996

discuss in detail one technique - the use of
nest boxes - which probably offers the
most time-efficient method of surveying
and monitoring phascogale populations. It
is also of use in surveying other hollow-
using mammals that occur in low densities
(Menkhorst 1984),

Survey Techniques for Phascogales
Public response surveys

In areas where phascogales may exist but
no recent records are known, local resi-
dents can be encouraged to report sight-
ings. This documents observations
obtained by chance (e.g. animals killed by
cats) and also increases public interest in
the species. The value of such surveys was
recently demonstrated when a phascogale
distribution map was published in a widely
circulated newsletter (Sharpe 1993), The
map elicited reports of three recent obser-
vations of phascogales near Portland (K.
Aldredge pers. comm.) in an area where no
previous sightings had been recorded.

Predator scat analysis

The scats of mammalian predators and
the pellets of owls may contain hair or
bones from phascogales (Van Dyck and
Gibbons 1980, Erstberg and Braithwaite
1985, Traill 1993). However, phascogales
typically comprise only a very small pro-
portion of any predator’s diet and are
unlikely to be found except in large sam-
ples of scats. Examination of mammal
scats also requires considerable expertise
in distinguishing phascogale hair and bone
from that of other dasyurids.

Spotlighting

This technique is commonly used for
nocturnal species and is efficient for
species that exist in high densities such as
Sugar Gliders Petaurus breviceps.
However, successful spotting of phasco-
gales is difficult due to their low densities.
Traill and Coates (1993) observed an aver-
age of only 4.3 phascogales per 100 hours
of spotlighting in areas known to contain
resident animals.

Trapping .

The low densities and trap shyness of
phascogales makes trapping surveys rela-
tively less efficient for this species than for
many others. Traill and Coates (1993)

257

Contributions

trapped an average of only 4.9 phasco-
gales per 1,000 trap-nights with wire-
mesh traps set in trees. Phascogales can
escape from Elliott traps, and are prone to
damaging themselves while escaping or
attempting to escape from aluminium and
wire-mesh traps. Young animals are also
particularly vulnerable to death from
exposure in traps on cold nights.

Hair tube sampling

The use of hair tubes (Suckling 1978,
Scotts and Craig 1988) is a simple, non-
invasive technique which has great poten-
tial for identifying the presence of rare
mammals. Few surveys have been con-
ducted in phascogale habitat, so that the
efficiency of the technique remains uncer-
tain. Recent surveys in the Box-Ironbark
forests of central Victoria have used hair
tubes to detect phascogales where spot-
lighting was unsuccessful (L. Lumsden
pers comm.) However, the technique
requires specialist identification of hair
which is difficult to distinguish from that
of Antechinus spp. For professional survey
teams with specialist support or training,
hair tubes may provide an efficient alter-
native to other techniques.

Nest boxes

Individual phascogales use 10-40 nest
sites each year. These may be in tree
stumps, hollows in live or dead trees, the
dome-shaped nests of birds or even under
flaking bark. Some are poor-quality sites
offering little protection from weather and
predators. However, lactating females are
more particular in the selection of nursery
nests (in which young are left while the
mother forages). Such nests are typically
large cavities with small entrances
(Soderquist 19935).

Phascogales readily use artificial nest
boxes (Fig. 3), especially in habitats lack-
ing many natural tree-hollows (Lindner
1983, Traill and Coates 1993), In Victoria
and most other parts of southern-eastern
Australia, much of the remaining phasco-
gale habitat has had the larger trees cut
down and few natural tree-hollows remain
(Traill 1991), Even in habitats that have
numerous hollows, nest boxes are occa-
sionally used. Unlike traps, boxes can be
checked by the survey team when conye-

258

nient, and observations of nests or scats
are further indications of the presence
phascogales. This survey technique is only
useful if nest boxes are left out for long
periods of time (>4 months).

Surveying Phascogales using nest boxes

Nest box design and construction is
excellently described in Victoria’s Land
For Wildlife Note Number 14 (available
from the regional offices of the Victorian
Department of Conservation and Natural
Resources). Boxes for phascogales should
be no smaller than 150 X 150 X 300 mm
high. A larger box is preferable, allowing
a female to use more material in building
her nursery nest, and thus improving the
insulation of the litter (Soderquist 1993b).
If the floor space of the box is much
greater than 600 cm2, one third of it
should be partitioned off with a 10 cm
high vertical strip of wood attached to the
floor. This partition serves two purposes:
(1) it provides a brace for the leaf nests of
antechinus and gliders, which otherwise
tend to collapse in larger hollows and (2)
it creates a ‘foyer’ which phascogales use
for a toilet, thus keeping the nest unsoiled.

Rough-sawn timber serves as a better
nest box surface than finished planks or
plyboard as it provides a secure grip for
the phascogales. If smooth timber is used,
shallow saw cuts on the interior beneath
the entrance will provide footholds. The

scarce due to the harvesting of large trees, nest
boxes are readily used by female Brush-tailed
Phascogales for raising young. (photo by L.
Sharpe)

The Victorian Naturalist

Contributions

wood should not be treated with toxic
chemicals, but can be protected with non-
toxic paint. A piece of carpet tacked to the
inner ceiling of the box may discourage
Honeybees Apis mellifera from colonizing
the box by hindering attachment of the
wax comb to the ceiling. However, tests of
this technique have only recently been ini-
tiated and the benefit remains uncertain ([.
Fenselau and R. Trainor pers. comm.). A
round entrance hole of 35 mm diameter
provides the best compromise between
excluding large, common species such as
Ringtail Possums and allowing access by
large male phascogales.

Boxes should be placed at least 4 m off
the ground on trees greater than 25 cm in
diameter. Avoid smooth-barked trees (e.g.
the ‘gum’ types of eucalypts) as phasco-
gales have great difficulty climbing them.
Trees should be selected that lack natural
hollows. Because metal nails in trees may
pose a safety hazard to anyone cutting the
tree years later, the box should not be
nailed directly to the tree. Instead it should
be suspended by a metal strap or wire
which loops around the tree trunk. This
strap must be adjusted as the tree slowly
grows, and care should be taken to ensure
that the loop does not cut through the bark
(e.g. by padding the wire with rubber or
small pieces of wood). Alternatively, if
nails are certain to be removed eventually,
a bracket attached to the nest box can slip
over nails placed in the tree above and
below the box. As the tree grows, the box
is slowly pushed outward without damage.

For an intensive survey we suggest set-
ting boxes about 300 m apart (1 per 9 ha).
Densities less than this are still very useful.
If a box is consistently used by species
other than phascogales (e.g. Sugar
Gliders), a second box can be set about 30
m away as an alternative. Boxes should not
be erected on public land without the
approval of the local land management
agency (e.g. Victorian Department of
Conservation and Natural Resources).
Avoid placing boxes where vandals will
easily find them. :

The best time to schedule box checks is
in April-June (breeding season) and
February-March (juvenile dispersal peri-
od). Boxes are frequently used by phasco-
gales from August-November (nursery
period when young are left in the nest) but

Vol. 113 (5) 1996

great care should be taken not to disturb
resident females during this critical period,
If a large nursery nest is present in a box,
the phascogale will not be visible inside
the domed nest, but fresh scats will be pre-
sent on or in the box. Observation of the
box at dusk can verify the female's pres-
ence as she departs to forage.

Surveys with boxes provide three ways to
confirm that phascogales are present in the
area: a phascogale nest, phascogale scat, or
observation of an animal. Note that it is
illegal to handle any native animals using
nest boxes without a permit to do so from
the appropriate state agency. If public edu-
cation and involvement is intended as one
of the benefits of the survey project, inter-
ested observers can return at dusk to gain a
rewarding and non-intrusive view of ani-
mals occupying the boxes.

During the nursery period, the nest is usu-
ally a very large ball of nesting material
commonly filling nearly all of the box.
Nests made at other times of the year vary
in size from a few scraps of nesting materi-
al, to well formed bowls. Occasionally no
attempt is made to make a nest. Nests are
made primarily from bark. If available. the
bark of ‘stringybark' eucalypts is strongly
preferred, and is stripped and interwoven
to form the nest: However, exfoliating bark
strips from wattles and smooth-barked
eucalyptus trees are also used (Lindner
1983, Soderquist 1993b) as well as feath-
ers and fur if available. Phascogale nests
will sometimes contain leaves, but these
are from the remains of nests constructed
by other species.

Phascogales commonly defecate in their
nest box and on top of it. If the box is used
repeatedly, the scat builds up in one corner
and becomes a solid mass. An individual
scat of an adult is roughly 4-6 mm in
diameter and, if unbroken, over 15 mm
long. It is usually black and comprised of
numerous insect pieces, many of which are
2-3 mm in width.

The nests and scats of other hollow-using
animals can also be found in nest boxes.
Details of those likely to be found in
Victorian phascogale habitat are as fol-
lows:- ' :

Ringtail Possums Psuedocheirus peregri-
nus. Nests can be similar to those of
phascogales, but usually will include twigs
and branchlets as well as bark. Only imma-

259

Contributions

ture ringtails can squeeze through entrance
holes smaller than 35 mm. No scats are left
in the nest.

Sugar and Squirrel Gliders Petaurus bre-
viceps and P. norfolcensis. Fresh green
eucalypt leaves are shaped into a rough
bowl or dome. No scats are left in the nest.

Yellow-footed and Brown Antechinus
Antechinus flavipes and A. stuartii. Old
dried eucalypt leaves are used, often built
into a dome. Many scats are usually found
in and near the nest. The scat of Antechinus
species that use nest boxes is smaller than 3
mm in diameter and seldom contains large,
whole insect parts as they chew prey more
finely. Unfortunately, the scat of juvenile
phascogales can be confused with that of
Antechinus spp.

Bats (various species). No nest is made.
Numerous small scats may be left in the
box, but these are smaller than 4Antechinus
scats and have very fine insect fragments.

Brown and White-throated Treecreepers
Climacteris picumnus and C. leucophaea.
Nests are made with layers of very finely
shredded bark and/or fur forming a shallow
bowl. The scats of birds may look similar
to those of small mammals, but have a blob
of white uric acid attached to the scat (as do
those of frogs and reptiles).

Australian Owlet-Nightjar Aegotheles
cristatus. 1f breeding in the nest box, there
will be a lining of green eucalypt leaves.
This species also roosts in nest-boxes with
no nest,

Parrots (various species). No new nesting
material is added. Any existing material
may be finely chewed. Eggs are laid direct-
ly onto the base of the nest box.

Adding phascogale scats or nest material
to newly erected boxes as an attractant can
cause confusion in the survey, If desired,
exotic nest materials (e.g. wood shavings,
raw wool or cloth) can be used to improve
insulation. Once a phascogale builds and
then abandons a nest, it can be pushed flat
or the pieces pushed to one side. Any sub-
sequent occupant will reform the inner
chamber or build a new nest on top of the
old. Scat should be removed or crushed so
that any new additions are detectable.

Pest species such as the Common Starling
Sturnus vulgaris, Common Myna
Acridotheres tristis and Honeybees should
be removed from boxes, At some sites feral
bees are a major problem in nest-boxes. For

260

example, during one year, bees occupied 8
of 14 large nest boxes at Chiltern Regional
Park and 7 of 18 nest boxes at Whipstick
State Park. One method for removing bees
is to push a 4 cm? piece of an insecticide
pest strip (e.g. Shelltox or Sureguard
brands) through the entrance into the comb
(Land For Wildlife Note 14). Using a long
pole, insert the strip at night or in the early
morning when low temperatures will help
keep the bees quiet. The hive will be killed
within several days, after which the toxic
strip and honeycomb should be removed.
Note that this method is not one of the uses
recommended by the manufacturers of pest
strips. As such, an individual choosing to
eliminate hives in this manner must ensure
safe handling of the strip and disposal of
the hive contents. Furthermore, a warning
message should be posted below the box
during the several days between poisoning
and hive removal. Alternatively, hives can
be physically destroyed or removed by api-
arists, The ease of locating and destroying
hives in artificial boxes makes this survey
method a useful means of controlling feral
bees which would otherwise occupy natural
hollows.

Record Keeping

Although surveys with nest boxes benefit
conservation by identifying sites where
phascogales exist, long-term monitoring of
phascogale populations is even more
important. As phascogales typically occur
at low densities, only repeated surveys over
many years can accurately identify trends
in the status of a population, or verify local
extinction. We strongly encourage anyone
using nest boxes or other survey techniques
to maintain long-term records that note sur-
vey dates and the number of animals, nests
and scats observed. Victoria, New South
Wales and the Northern Territory maintain
wildlife databases to which records of
phascogales should be submitted.
Alternatively, a volunteer state coordinator
can be selected to maintain such files and
distribute information to those interested in
conducting surveys (e.g. the ‘Friends of the
Tuan’ in Victoria).

Results from a Survey of Rushworth
State Forest

To test the efficiency of nest boxes for
broad scale surveys we conducted a trial

The Victorian Naturalist

Contributions

survey in the Rushworth State Forest in
central Victoria. The Rushworth Forest
has approximately 31,000 ha. of habitat
that is apparently suitable for phascogales.
Prior to this study, there were no con-
firmed records of phascogales from this
forest in the Atlas of Victorian Wildlife
and only three records from adjacent
areas.

Ninety-two boxes were constructed by
volunteers with the Australian Trust for
Conservation Volunteers (ATCV). These
were placed at 23 sites in the Rushworth
Forest. Four boxes were placed at each
site, approximately 100 m apart. Sites
were at least 1 km apart. Ten ATCV
workers placed the boxes during two days
in early December 1992. A single, experi-
enced worker can check about 60 boxes
per day without difficulty.

Boxes were checked by the authors and
ATCV volunteers in late April 1993. No
phascogales were actually observed in the
boxes, but phascogale nests and scats were
found in four boxes at three sites. In addi-
tion Sugar Gliders or their nests were
observed in 30 boxes, and Yellow-footed
Antechinus or their nests were observed in
three boxes, During the most recent check
in early 1996, members of the Field
Naturalists Club of Victoria Fauna Survey
Group found one phascogale, and 12
phascogale nests (R. Gibson pers. comm.).
The Group has erected additional boxes
and intends to monitor trends in phasco-
gale populations at Rushworth and other
sites for several decades. When combined
with long-term survey results from other
naturalist groups and individuals, this
information will provide a valuable foun-
dation for conserving this rare species.

Acknowledgements

Our special thanks to the workers from the
Australian Trust for Conservation Volunteers
who made and erected the nest boxes for the
Rushworth survey. That study was made poss!-
ble by a grant from Telecom to cover the
expenses for transporting volunteers and the
material costs of making the nest boxes. We
also thank Ed and Pat Grey, Lyndall Rowley
and a reviewer for comments on the manu-
script. Field work was carried out under
Victorian Department of Conservation and
Natural Resources Permit Number 93-109.

References Mase.
Conole, L. E. (1987). The identity of the tuan. The

Vol. 113 (5) 1996

( Victorian Naturalist 14, 105-107.

Cuttle, P. (1982). Life history strategy of the dasyurid
marsupial Phaseogale iapoutaja, In ‘Carnivorous
Marsupials . Ed. M, Archer. Pg. 13-22, (Royal

Z Zodlogizal Society of New South Wales: Mossman)
uttle, PL) 983). Brush-tailed Phascogale Phuseogale
tapoatafa, In ‘The Complete Book of Australian
Mammals’. Ed. R, Strahan. Pe. 34-35. (Angus and
Robertsom: Sydney). , ‘

Erstberg, J. A. and R. W. Braithwaite. (1985), The diet
of the Rufous Owl (Nitex rufa) near Cooinda in the
Northern Territory. Emu 85, 202-205.

Lindner, J. (1983). Artificial hollows at Whipstick
Whirakee 4, 3-|2.

Menkhorst, P. W. (1984). The application of nest
boxes in research and management of possums and
gliders, Jn “Possums and Gliders’. Eds A. P. Smith
and D. Hume. Pg, 517-525. (Australian Mammal
Society: Sydney).

Menkhorst, P. W. (1995). ‘Mammals of Victoria®
(Oxford University Press: Melbourne).

Menkhorst. P. W, and A. M. Gilmore. (1979).
Mammals and reptiles of north central Victoria.
Memoirs of the National Museum of Victoria No. 40.

Nortis, K. C., Mansergh, 1. M., Ahern, L, D., Belcher,
Cc. A., Temby, I. D,, and N. G. Walsh. (1983).
Vertebrate fauna of the Gippsland lakes catchment
Victoria, Victorian Department of Misheries and
Wildlife Occasional Papers Series No. |.

Scotts, D. J. and S. A. Craig.(1988). Improved hair-
sampling tube for the detection of small mammals.
Australian Wildlife Research 15, 469-472.

Sharpe, L. L. (1993). Managing wildlife. Healesville
Sanctuary Tracks 7. 2.

Soderquist, T. R, (1993a). Maternal strategies of
Phascogale tapoaiafa (Marsupialia: Dasyuridae). I.
Breeding seasonality and maternal investment.
Australian Journal of Zoology 41, 549-566.

Soderquist. T. R. (1993h). Maternal strategies of
Phascogale tapoatafa (Marsupialia: Dasvuridae), II.
Juvenile thermoregulation and maternal attendance.
Australian Journal of Zoology 41, 567-576.

Soderquist, T. R. (1995). Spatial organization of the
arboreal carnivorous marsupial Phaycogale
tapoatafa, Journal of Zoology, London 237, 385-
398.

Soderquist, T. R. and Ealey, L. (1994). Social interac-
tions and mating strategies of a solitary carnivorous
marsupial, Phascogale tapoatafa, in the wild,
Wildlife Research 21, 527-542.

Soderquist, T. and Lill, A. (1995). Natal dispersal and
philopatry in the carnivorous marsupial Phascogale
tapoatafa (Dasyuridae). Ethology 99, 297-312.

Suckling, G. C, (1978). A hair sampling tube for the
detection of small mammals in trees. Australian
Wildlife Research 5, 249-252

Traill. B. J. (1991). Box-lronbark forests: tree hollows,
wildlife and management. /n ‘Conservation of
Australia’s Forest Fauna’, Ed. D. Lunney. Pp. 119-
124, (Royal Zoological Society of New South
Wales: Mossman). :

Trail. B. J. (1993) The diet and movements of a pair
of Powerful Owls Ninox sirenua in dry forest.
Australian Raptor Studies 93, | 55-159.

Traill, B. J. and T. D. Coates. (1993). Field observa-
tions on the Brush-tailed Phascogale Phascogale
fapoatafa (Marsupialia: Dasyuridae). Australian
Mammalogy 16, 61-65. /

Van Dvke. S. and D. Gibbons. (1980). Tuan predation
by Powerful Owls. The Victorian Naturalist 97, 58-
63.

261

Contributions

Use of Supplementary Nest Hollows by an Endangered
Subspecies of Red-tailed Black-Cockatoo

William B. Emison'”

A study, conducted from 1988 to 1994 in
south-eastern Australia, on the endangered
subspecies of Red-tailed Black-Cockatoo
Calyptorhynchus banksii graptogyne indi-
cated that: -

1) it Is restricted to south-western
Victoria and adjacent parts of the south-
east of South Australia;

2) its numbers are low, probably
not more than 1000 individuals remain;

3) its diet is specialised, consisting
mainly of seeds of Brown Stringybarks
Eucalyptus baxteri and Bulokes
Allocasuarina luehmannii;

4) breeding, which seems to
involve only a small proportion of the pop-
ulation (10% or less), has only been
recorded within the northern half of the
birds’ range;

5) nesting occurs in hollows of

large, often dead, trees in farmland;

6) its habitats are fragmented and
threatened (Joseph ef a/, 1991; Emison and
Joseph 1992),

Although considerable effort was directed
towards finding nesting birds, only a few
pairs were found each breeding season, the
highest number being 16 in 1992-93 and
the lowest being 3 in 1991-92 (Fig. 1). The
majority of nests (85%) were in hollows in
dead, usually ring-barked, River Red Gums
E. camaldulensis while the rest (15%) were
in live River Red Gums or Yellow Gums
E. leucoxylon. More than 98% of all nests
found were on private property and over
90% were in three traditional nesting areas.

During the course of our study, we began
to suspect that an important reason for the
small number of nests was because suitable
nest hollows were limited in the traditional
Red-tailed Black-Cockatoo nesting areas.
Over the years, losses of nest hollows have
resulted from the old dead trees being cut
down for firewood, while others have been
pushed over simply to tidy up a property or

1 Department of Natural Resources and Environment,
.O. Box 41, East Melbourne, Vic. 3001
Present address: Invertebrate Zoology, Museum of
Victoria, P.O. Box 666E, Melbourne, Vic. 3001

262

20)

16
13
| 42 |
| li |
|
10)
| 7
|
|
i :
E |
\

88-89 89-90 90-91 91-92 92-93 93-94
Breeding Season

CSSD MoOmmwwZ md sackez
w

Fig. 1. Number of pairs of Red-tailed Black-
Cockatoos found nesting in south-eastern
Australia, 1988-1994, The number of active
nests found in the 1992-93 season totalled 23,
but 7 of these were considered to be re-nestings
(Emison et al. 1995) so the number of pairs
involved in nesting was only 16.

have fallen from natural decay.

To determine if a lack of nest hollows
was limiting breeding, we placed four sup-
plementary nest hollows (made from natur-
al hollows cut from fallen trees) in dead
trees without suitable natural hollows, in a
traditional nesting area after the 1991-92
breeding season. One of these supplemen-
tary nest hollows was used by a pair of
Red-tailed Black-Cockatoos in 1992-93
and a young one was successfully reared.

After the success of the first supplemen-
tary hollow in the 1992-93 breeding sea-
son, we placed an additional 6 supplemen-
tary hollows in dead trees in traditional
nesting areas. Additionally, because there
were so few dead trees in which to place
the hollows, we obtained 6 disused wooden
electricity poles, put them into place in the
areas and attached a supplementary nest
hollow to the top portion of each one (Fig.
2). Therefore, at the start of the 1993-94
breeding season, we had in place 16 sup-
plementary nest hollows (10 supported by
dead trees and 6 on electricity poles) in tra-

The Victorian Naturalist

Contributions

Fig. 2. Supplementary nest hollow on an elec-
tricity pole. Photo by W.B. Emison.

ditional Red-tailed Black-Cockatoo nesting
areas. Of these 16 supplementary hollows,
5 (3 in dead trees and 2 on electricity
poles) were used by nesting Red-tailed
Black-Cockatoos in 1993-94. These 5
nests represented 45% of the total Red-
tailed Black-Cockatoo nests found in
1993-94. We also recorded Yellow-tailed
Black-Cockatoos Calyptorhynchus
funereus, Long-billed Corellas Cacatua
tenuirostris, Australian Wood Ducks
Chenonetta jubata, owls and feral
Honeybees Apis mellifera using the sup-
plementary nest hollows. Continuing occu-
pancy by Honeybees would prevent future
use of hollows by either Red-tailed Black-
Cockatoos or other birds.

The results of this study indicate that sup-
plementary nest hollows are quickly
utilised by a variety of animals and of the
supplementaty hollows available (4 in
1992-93 and 16 in 1993-94) at least 30%
were used by Red-tailed Black-Cockatoos.
In view of the endangered status of this
subspecies of Red-tailed Black-Cockatoo,
the provision of more supplementary nest
hollows in traditional and potential nesting

Vol. 113 (5) 1996

areas is recommended. However, an on-
going monitoring program should also be
established to; (1) detect any illegal human
activities such as the taking of eggs or
young; (2) determine if the Red-tailed
Black-Cockatoos continue to use the hol-
lows on a long-term basis: (3) determine
whether birds using the supplementary hol-
lows are new breeders (thus increasing the
number of breeding pairs) or are estab-
lished breeders which have simply moved
from less suitable natural hollows; and (4)
determine the long-term impact of feral
Honeybees on the availability of the sup-
plementary nest hollows.

Support for this study was from the
Department of Natural Resources and
Environment (Victoria), the London-based
World Parrot Trust and the Department of
Environment and Natural Resources
(South Australia). Other details of this
breeding/nest hollow study appear in
Emison ef al. (1994) and Emison and
Caldow (1994).

References

Emison, B. and Caldow, W, (1994). Supplementary
nest hollows for Red-tailed Black Cockatoos, Land
Jor Wildlife News 2, 13.

Emison, W.B., Caldow, W.D. and Forshaw, J.M.
(1994). Red-tailed Black-Cockatoo project.
PsittaScene 6, 4-5.

Emison, W.B. and Joseph, L. (1992). Threats to a pop-
ulation of Red-tailed Black-Cockatoos in south-west-
ern Victoria. Australian Ranger 25, 33-34.

Emison, W.B., White, C.M. and Caldow, W.D. (1995).
Presumptive re-nesting of Red-tailed Black-
Cockatoos in south-eastern Australia. Amu 95, 141-
144.

Joseph, L., Emison, W.B. and Bren, W.M, (1991).
Critical assessment of the conservation status of Red-
tailed Black-Cockatoos in south-eastern Australia
with special reference to nesting requirements. Emu
91, 46-50.

263

Contributions

Australian Native Species in Aquaculture

G. Kibria', D. Nugegoda', R. Fairclough' and P. Lam?

Abstract

Australian native freshwater fish and crayfish possess good food, recreational and commercial val-
ues. Although aquaculture is an infant industry, expanding rapidly due to recent local and overseas
(Asian)demands for native species, This article gives a glimpse of the status of native freshwater
aquaculture in Australia. (The Victorian Naturalist 113, 1996, 264-267)

Introduction

Australian native fish and crayfish form
the main freshwater aquaculture industry
of the country. Australia has few freshwa-
ter fish (180-190 species) (Merrick and
Schmida 1984), most of which are native
to Australia. Among them only four native
fish possess potential for aquaculture,
Silver Perch Bidvanus bidyanus) Golden
Perch Macquaria ambigua, Murray Cod
Maccullochella peeli and Freshwater
Catfish Tandanus tandanus (Hume and
Barlow 1993)

Silver Perch

Silver Perch farming is booming in the
country and there is an interest in cultivat-
ing the species in countries like China, and
Taiwan. The farms are spread over the
warmer parts of New South Wales,
Queensland and Victoria. New South
Wales has the highest number of Silver
Perch farms followed by Victoria and
Queensland. Factors contributing to the
expansion of the Silver Perch industry
include good growth rates, their accep-
tance of low-protein diets (Barlow 1986;
Rowland and Barlow 1991), the ease of
culture in earthen ponds (Rowland ef al.
1994) and their omnivorous feeding habits
(Rowland and Barlow 1991). The demand
for Silver Perch farming is so great that at
this stage three commercial feed compa-
nies (Kinta, Janos, Barstock) are manufac-
turing Silver Perch feeds. Further stimulus
for Silver Perch arose with the huge recent
shipment of fry and fingerlings to China.
It is believed that the Chinese are interest-
ed in rearing Silver Perch in their tradition-
al ponds since it is an ideal species for
Chinese pond polyculture systems. At the

‘Victoria University of Technology, PO Box 14428,
Melbourne 8001, Australia

* City University of Hong Kong, Kowloon , Hong
Kong

264

recent international conference held in
Beiing (Fourth Asian Fisheries Forum,
16-20 October 1995), a number of enquires
were made regarding Silver Perch (Fig. 1).

Fig. 1 Silver Perch fingerlings are in great
demand both in Australia and in overseas (e.g.
China) to stock in ponds and dams.

Above all, freshwater fish production is
increasing in Australia mainly due to an
increasing interest and investment in grow-
ing Silver Perch (Table 1).

Table 1. Native Aquaculture Production
(value $000).
Source : O’Sullivan( 1994)

Year Native Native
Fish Crayfish
1989-90) 2.888 1,599
1990-91 2,913 2,339
1991-92 4,355 2,235

Golden Perch

Golden Perch farming has not been so
popular although it is more attractive to
consumers than Silver Perch. Trials are
being conducted by the government
research institutes to develop Golden Perch
diets (Arumugam and Geddes 1987). Once
commercial Golden Perch feeds become
available in the market, then Golden Perch
farming would become a popular aquacul-

The Victorian Naturalist

Contributions

ture industry since consumer demand for
Golden Perch is high and can therefore
fetch higher market prices. Some private
companies are conducting research to
develop Golden Perch feed from sewage-
grown zooplankton (Zootech News 1994).

Freshwater Crayfish

Australia has the most diverse collection
of freshwater crayfish in the southern
hemisphere, three of which used in aqua-
culture. These are, Yabby Cherax destruc-
tor, Marron Cherax tenuimanus and
Redclaw Cherax quadricarinatus. Yabby
farms are located in South Australia,
Victoria and New South Wales (Kailola et
al. 1993). Marron have been commercially
cultured in Western Australia for the last
20 years (Kailola ef al. 1993). Redclaw
requires more tropical conditions and is
cultured mainly in Queensland. The natur-
al distribution of freshwater species can be
seen in Fig. 2. There is a big domestic mar-
ket for crayfish but both live and frozen
crayfish are also being exported to nearby
Asian countries. A summary of biological
information on native Aquaculture species
is given in Table 2.

Conclusion

The demands for freshwater and marine
foods in Australia are increasing as a result
of population increase, Asian migration

and health consciousness. It is predicted
that Australian native aquaculture industry
would become a lucrative primary industry
in food production (Gooley and Rowland
1993),

However, it should be noted that effluents
from aquaculture industry may cause water
pollution as nutrients discharged may
cause eutrophications to water bodies
(Foy and Rosell 1991; Ketola et al, 1991),
An increase in water turbidity and oxygen
demand in natural systems may come from
the solid wastes of aquaculture. Therefore
it is essential to monitor the level of nutn-
ent discharged from aquaculture industry
to the natural system in order to prevent
any environmental disasters.

Since natural populations of Australian
native freshwater species are either threat-
ened or in decline due to physical, chemi-
cal and biological reasons (Cadwallader
1978; Scott 1989), the demands of
Australian aquaculture for large numbers
of fingerlings, to supply the overseas mar-
ket and to stock dams and ponds in
Australia, could also offer the opportunity
to restock natural Australian freshwater
systems and reduce the necessity of fishing
them. Thus, this programme would also
offer the opportunity to help reverse the
decline in natural populations.

NATURAL DISTRIBUTION

INATIVE FISH NATURAL DISTRIBUTION NATIVE CRAYFISH
& } IW fe
eS G Dy Gz
eae x) PN 3
i) ?
Silver Perch. Autvanus hidvenus = Yabby, Cheray destructor
a) ‘ |
Golden Perch. \acquaria amhigua
cy Marron, Cherex fenuimanus x) 4

Murray Cod. \aceullochella peli 2

Freshwater Catfish. Pandanis tandartis

a SS
Fig. 2. Natural distribution of native Austr:

Vol. 113 (5) 1996

alian species under aquaculture

265

Contributions

Table 2. Summary of biological information on native species.

Legend: C=Celsius; CL=Carapace length; F.W= Freshwater; WT=Water temperature; T= temperature

A= Breeding season; B= Age and size at maturity;CC= Breeding stimulus; D= Temperature tolerance;

E= Optimum growth temperature; F= Fecundity; G= Feeding habits

Figures in parenthesis denotes source

Sources: |.Lake (1967a); 2. Merrick (1980); 3.Lake(1967b); 4. Rowland( 1992a);5.Whiteley(1960):6, Backhouse et
al.(1991a); 7.Lake(1967c);8, Cadwallader(1977); 9,Lake(1967d);10. Backhouse et al,(1991b);11.Kailola et
al.(1993); 12.Llewellyn and Macdonald(1980); 13.Cadwallader(1978); 14.Rowland(1988); 15. Mosig(1982); 16.
Rowland(1992b); 17. Llewellyn and Pollard(1980); 1&.Davis(1977); 19.Macleans(1975); 20.Johnson(1988);

21.Merrick and Lambert(1990); 22.0°Sullivan((1992); 23.Mitchell and collins( 1989); 24. Jones(1990).

Silver Perch

Golden Perch

Murray Cod
30,000-50,000
for 1-2kg fish(16)
F.W Catfish
18,000(1.25kg)-
26,000(2.27kg(3)
Yabby
1000(arge
female)(11)
Redclaw
300-1000(24)
Marron
40-2400(21)

50,000 (1.8-2.0 kg)(5) omnivore-consists of zooplankton(ostracods),shrimps,small aquatic insects,molluses,earth
worms & plant material(6,7);larvae feed on both phyto & zooplankton(7)

500,000(2,2-2.4kg)(3) carnivore-mainly crustaceans(yabbies) aquatic insects,molluscs and fish(10). Young
golden feed on zooplankton on recently inundated floodplains(11)

carntvore-adults feed on crustaceans,molluses,fish, occasionally amphibians
and reptiles(11,14), larval feed consists of copepods,cladocerans( 16),

adults are omnivorous, young eat zooplankton & worms(19),adults carnivores & bottom
feeders feed on molluses & crustaceans(1)

juvenile - filter feeder, adult feeds on detritus,plant material and small invertebrates(23)

larvae diet includes zooplankton & detritus and adult diet mainly detritus(24)

opportunistic scavenger-detritus,plant and animal material & aquatic insects(11)

SPECIES A B cc D E q
Silver Perch Oct-Dee(1) — M-2 yrs;F-3 yrs(2) T >23.3 C + increase 2-37 C(4) 23-28 C(4)
in water level(3
Golden Perch Oct.-Mar(8) 2-3 years(3), T23.5C 4- 38 C(4) 23-28 C(4)
& flooding(9,1)
Murray Cod Oct.-Dec(12) 4 years(13,1) T>21C, water level 2-33 C(15) 20 C(4)
rise not essential (3,14)
F.W Catfish Oct.-Dec(1) few at 2 years T 24C (18) 1-38 C(15) 19-25(1)
most by 5 years(17)
Yabby Oct.-Mar(11) 0,2-0.3 year T>15 C (20) 1-38 C(21) 20-23 C (22)
(30-50mmCL)(11) increase in daylength 28 C (23)
Redclaw All year(11) 1.0 year(11) WT above 20C & 5-42 C(24) 24-30 C(23)
increment in day length(11)
Marron Sep,-Oct(11) 1-3 years, rise in water temp.(11) 5-32 C(21) 24-30 C(22),
(25-30mmCL)(11) 24 C(11)
FE G |

References

Arumugam, P.T. and Geddes, M.C. (1987). Feeding

and growth of Golden Perch larvae and fry Macquaria

ambigua Richardson. Transactions of the Royal Society

of South Australia 111, 59-65,

Backhouse, G., Cadwallader, P. and Raadik,T, (199 1a).
‘Freshwater fish of Victoria - Silver Perch’.
Department of Conservation and Environment,
Victoria, Infosheet-69

Backhouse, G,, Cadwallader, P. and Raadik, T,
(1991b). Freshwater fish of Victoria - Golden Perch.
Depariment of Conservation and Environment,
Victoria, Infosheet-51

Barlow, C.G. (1986). Fish in farm dams and implica-
tions for extensive aquaculture. pages. 33-34. Jn
‘Proceedings of the First Freshwater Aquaculture
Workshop’. Ed. L.F.Reynolds. (Narrendera, NSW
Agriculture and Fisheries: Sydney, Australia).

266

Cadwallader, P.L. (1978). Some causes of the decline
in range and abundance of native fish in the Murray-
Darling River system. Proceeding Royal Society of
Victoria 90, 211-224,

Cadwallader, P.L. (1977). 1.0.Langrey’s 1949-50,
Murray River Investigations. Fish. Wild. Pap,
Victoria. No, 13,

Davis, T.L.O, (1977), Reproductive biology of the
Freshwater Catfish, Tandanus tandanus Mitchell, in
the Gwyd River, Australia, and effects associated
with impoundment of this river by the Copeton Dam.
Australian Journal of Marine and Freshwater
Research 28, 455-485,

Foy, R.H. and Rosell, R. (1991). Fractionation of phos-
phorus and nitrogen loadings from a Northern Ireland
fish farm, Aquaculture 96, 31-42,

Gooley, G. and Rowland, S. (1993). Murray-Darling
Finfish: Current developments and commercial

The Victorian Naturalist

Book Reviews

potential. Austasia Aquaculture 7(3), 35-36.

Hume, D, and Barlow, C. (1993). ‘Bibliography of four
Australian native fish that have potential for aquacul-
ture: Freshwater Catfish, Golden Perch, Murray Cod
and Silver Perch’. (Department of Primary Industry:
Queensland Government).

Johnston, HLT, (1988). Crayfish farming, Jn ‘Crayfish
Farming’. Ed G. Ryder. (NSW, Department of
Agriculture and Fisheries: Sydney).

Jones, C.M. (1990). ‘The biology and aquaculture
potential of the tropical freshwater crayfish, Cheray
quadricarinatus’, (Queensland Government).

Kailola, P.J., Williams, M.J. and Stewart ,P.C.,
Reichelt, R.E., McNee, A. and Grieve, C. (1993).
‘Australian Fisheries Resources’, (Commonwealth of
Australia, Bureau of Resource Sciences and the
Fisheries Research development Corporation).

Ketola, H.G., Westers, H., Houghton W,, and Pecor, C.
1991. Effect of diet on growth and survival of Coho
Salmon and on phosphorus discharges from a fish
hatchery. American Fisheries Society Symposium 10,
402-409,

Lake, J.S. (1967a). Freshwater fishes of the Murray-
Darling River system. /n “Australian inland waters
and their fauna’, Ed A.H.Weatherley. (Australian
National University Press:Canberra).

Lake ,J.S, (1967b). Rearing experiments with five
species of Australian freshwater fishes. [. Inducement
to spawning. Australian Journal of Marine and
Freshwater Research 18, 137-153.

Lake, J.S. (1967c). Rearing experiments with five
species of Australian freshwater fishes, II.

Morphogenesis and Ontogeny. Australian Journal of

Marine and Freshwater Research 18, 155-173.

Lake, J.S. (1967d). Freshwater fishes of the Murray-
Darling River system. Chief Secretary's Department,
NSW State Fisheries Research Bulletin 7.

Llewellyn, L.C. and Macdonald,M.C. (1980). Family
Percichthyidae, Australian Freshwater Basses and
Cods. [nm ‘Freshwater Fishes of South-Eastern
Australia’. Ed R.M, McDowall. (Reed:Sydney).

Llewellyn, L.C. and Pollard,D.A. (1980). Family
Plotosidae, Elletailed Catfishes. Jn “Freshwater
Fishes of South-Eastern Australia’. Ed R.M.
McDowall, (Reed:Sydney). :

Macleans, J. (1975). The potential for aquaculture in
Australia, Australia Fisheries Paper No. 21.
(Australian Fisheries Service; C: anberra).

Merrick, J,R. (1980). Family Teraponidae. Freshwater
Grunters of Perches, /n ‘Freshwater Fishes of South-
Eastern Australia’. Ed R.M, McDowall.
(Reed:Sydney).

Merrick, J.R. and Lambert, C.N. 1990. ‘The yabby,
marron and redclaw - production and marketing’.
(John R. Merrick Publications, NSW: Australia).

Merrick, J,R. and Schmida, G.E. (1984), “Australian
freshwater fishes - biology and management’.
(Griffin Press Ltd.: South Australia),

Mitchell ,B.D. and Collins. R. 1989. Developments of
field-scale intensive culture techniques for the com-
mercial production of the yabby (Cherax destructor).
Centre for Aquatic Sciences, Warnmbool Institute of
Advanced Education, Unpublished report.

Mosig, J. 1982. Native fish for farm dams. Trees and
Victoria's resources 24, 3-4.

O'Sullivan, D. (1994). Production and value continue
to climb. Austasia Aquaculture 8 (4), 2.

O'Sullivan, D, (1992), Freshwater crayfish farms - site
selection. Aystasia Aquaculture, 6 (5), 16-18.

Rowland, S. (1988). ‘Murray Cod’. (NSW Agriculture
and Fisheries, Agfacts F3.2.4).

Rowland, S. (1992a), ‘Water quality in freshwater
aquaculture’, (Fish Facts: NSW Fisheries).

Rowland, S. (1992b). Diet and feeding of Murray Cod
(Maccullochella peeli) larvae. Proceedings of the
Linnean Society of NSW 113(3), 193-201,

Rowland, S.. Allan, G., Hollis .M. and Pontifex, T.
(1994). Production of the Australian freshwater
Silver Perch, Bidyanus bidyanus (Mitchell), at two
densities in earthen ponds. Aquaculture 30, 317-328.

Rowland ,S. and Barlow ,C.G. (1991). Fish biology-
the right prerequisite, a case study with freshwater
Silver Perch(Bidvanus bidyanus), Austasia
Aquaculture 5 (5), 27-30.

Rowland ,S. and Kearnery, R.E. (1992). The prospects
for the commercial Aquaculture of Silver Perch,
Bidvanus bidyanus. A Research Project arising from
a review of

freshwater aquaculture, NSW Fisheries, Sydney,

Scott ,D. (1989). ‘State of the Environment report 1988
- Victoria’s Inland Waters’, (Office of the
Commissoner for the Environment).

Whitely ,G.P. (1960). ‘Native Freshwater Fishes of
Australia’. (Jacaranda Press: Brisbane).

Zootech News. 1994. ‘Zootech Newsletter | (May)’.
(Melbourne; Australia).

The Fauna of Tasmania: Mammals
by R.H. Green

Publisher: Potoroo Publishing, Launceston, [1994].
Paperback, 15 x 22 cm, viii + 5 6 pp. and 64 coloured plates. RRP $14.95

This attractively presented little book is
printed on good quality paper and its cover
features a colour photograph of a
Tasmanian endemic, the Long-tailed
Mouse, Pseudomys higginsi. The
Introduction confirms what the title sug-
gests, that this is the first of a series; the
second is on birds, and subsequent vol-
umes on reptiles, frogs and freshwater fish-
es are intended. The contents are tallied

Vol. 113 (5) 1996

most succinctly on the rear cover; ‘2

monotremes, 20 marsupials, 38 eutherians,
including 13 marine mammals [of about 32
known from local waters], and 10 intro-
duced mammals. Giving information on
evolution, relationship[s], identification,
distribution, habitat, abundance, food,
behaviour and breeding. Illustrated with 64
photographs [mainly by the author].”
Introductory sections entitled “A special

267

Book Reviews

island’ and ‘The mammal fauna’ provide
an essential historical, geographical, evolu-
tionary and biogeographical background to
the main offering of the work - brief dis-
cursive essays on each natural mammalian
group and on each species known in the
state. These essays are full of information
and throughout are enhanced by personal
anecdotes and field observations made by
the author during his distinguished career
over a period of 30 years as the Curator of
Zoology at the Queen Victoria Museum
and Art Gallery in Launceston, The text Is
written in a simple and economical style
and because the author has drawn directly
on his own extensive experience it has an
intimacy and verve that is generally lack-
ing from similar works. Technical terms
have been kept to a minimum.

As is to be expected, the discussion of
aspects of biology and ecology in the
species accounts is authoritative, but some
of the comments on factors possibly caus-
ing or exacerbating population crashes
(e.g. of the Thylacine) and recoveries (e.g.
of the Tasmanian Devil), while intriguing,
are based on uncertain and largely circum-
stantial evidence. Many mammalogists
would also be uncomfortable with the
broad generalisation that ‘... much of the
[Tasmanian mammal] fauna is today as
abundant or even more so than it was prior
to European colonisation.’, although some
species, e.g. Brushtail Possum and Red-
bellied Pademelon, have clearly benefited
from changes wrought by agricultural
development in many parts of the island.
Nevertheless, the author draws on a life-
time of experience and research and his
assessments merit careful consideration,

This book is not, nor is it intended to be,
a formal identification guide, although the
photographs and brief descriptions should
enable an inexperienced observer encoun-
tering any of the larger and more distinc-
tive terrestrial species to put a name to
them. Some of the bats, rodents and the
superficially mouse-like marsupials could
not be so confidently identified, however,
the author has very helpfully mentioned
several other relevant references and field
guides, Of the 32 or so marine mammals
recorded in Tasmania waters, the author
has included the five seals and eight
cetaceans which are local or are frequent

268

visitors, and of these, only the Australian
Fur Seal and the Southern Right Whale are
illustrated,

Errors are few and generally of little con-
sequence, e.g. the Eastern Barred
Bandicoot survives on the mainland in
three not two small colonies; the Brushtail
Possum is stated to be arboreal yet most of
its described activities occur on the
ground; the Little Pygmy Possum has an
extra pair, not set, of cheek teeth; open sea
whaling in the Australian region during the
19th century did not involve Japanese
ships, but did involve French, as well as
British and American ships; the scientific
species name given for the Long-finned
Pilot Whale is the obsolete me/aena [now
melas] and is misspelled melanea; the two
local species of dolphins, Bottlenose and
Common, are said to strand rarely in
groups, yet in Tasmania group strandings
are relatively common, in contrast to the
mainland states, and their young are said to
become independent at 12 months as well
as being suckled for 18 months [age at
weaning is actually highly variable, from 5
to 19 months]; the Southern Right Whale
is said to be entirely black, which most are,
but some have white belly flashes of vary-
ing size and shape, while others are pale
grey with black mottling; and the species
name of the Brown Rat, Rattus norvegicus,
is misspelled.

An index is provided, which is merely a
compilation of all the species names men-
tioned in the text, and includes scientific
binomials, generally accepted common
names and a few Tasmanian colloquial
names. Considering the appropriate
emphasis given throughout the text to
Tasmanian endemic species and sub-
species it is a pity that the latter, of which
there are nine, are not in each case identi-
fied by their full scientific trinomials, e.g.
Tachyglossus aculeatus setosus, for the
Tasmanian Echidna.

This little book is recommended to natu-
ralists and students seeking an informative
overview of Tasmania’s mammal fauna,
including its unique features and its recent
history, in comparison to the status of
those species which also once or still occur
on the Australian mainland.

Robert M. Warneke

Blackwood Lodge, RSD 273 Mount Hicks Road.
Yolla, Tasmania 7325

The Victorian Naturalist

Naturalist Notes

From our Naturalist in Residence, Glen Jameson

Middle Yarra Timelines

Here the coldest weather of the year after the solstice does not slow down the fauna

Most of the residents are involved in breedin

g activities to gain an advantage over

the Spring/Summer migrants. Th i i
EBB Bk al ce g e Flora begins to awaken with flowering process-

Deep Winter

As the early dawn light separates shapes in
the riparian forest, a female Powerful Owl
sweeps low on the Yarra River to bathe in the
icy cool waters. After a night on the nest con-
taining two eggs laid in the first week of
June, it is a welcome relief from the tight con-
fines of the nest hollow. The male Powerful
Ow! watches from a nearby roost tree within
view of the nest tree - a huge River Red over-
hanging the water.

A male Brush-tailed Phascogale, dazed and
exhausted after the frenzy of the breeding
period, is easy prey for the Black Kite who
picks him off for breakfast as the light of day
defines the forest floor, Nearby lies another
breeding frenzy fatality, a dead male Brown
Antechinus, not yet snapped up by the roving
carnivores.

Along the river, Common Reed has dried
out completely and thickly fringes the waters
edge with a pale, brown, dried sheath. Small-
leaf Clematis cascades from a Silver wattle in

Vol. 113 (5) 1996

a bower of white flowers. It is a quiet season
for the aquatic invertebrates, their life cycles
are restricted by the cold and turbid waters.
However, the Yarra Crayfish spawns on the
muddy river bottom.

When heavy rain falls during the early
morning, the rest of the day will remain
enclosed in heavy grey clouds, some touching
the forest tops in faint wisps. The ambience
tends gloomy and introspective, the colours
are dulled with a sombre stillness pervading
the day. Some Deep Winter days are con-
sumed by Gondwanan mists, others are so
bleakly freezing that they suggest other cli-
mates with their Artic generated winds, honed
and sharpened and so cold that they can cut
out the fat from your kidneys and not leave a
mark. Occasionally, for days on end, neither
the Moon, Sun nor Stars are visible. If the
weather stabilises for a few days, frosts are
followed by clear sunny days.

The reflected glow of Silver Wattles’ golden

269

Naturalist Notes

flowers on the brown rising river water, is a
seasonal event that has enchanted everyone
who has cared to look - Artists, Naturalists
and lovers of beauty. The prodigious bloom-
ing marks the returning Sun from the
Northern hemisphere. The mournful trill of
the Fan-tailed Cuckoo heralds the blooming
of the Wattles as spoken of by Barak of the
Wurundjeri, when he told of the timing of his
father’s death and the timeline for his own
passing. Silver Wattles wreath the river in a
yellow timelonic celebration of the passing of
the Elders. There seems to be changes to the
human body that correspond to the Sun’s
return, a wrenching, twisting feeling of bio-
magnetic calibration.

Downstream on the sodden riparian flood-
plains of Yarra Flats, flocks of Australian
White and Straw-necked Ibis probe the soft
earth for food flushed to the surface by rising
water table levels, Cattle Egret mobs similar-
ly work Birrarrung Park where later they will
roost for the night on the Billabong island
there or at Petty’s Lake. The generally soli-
tary White-faced Heron, is now found in
flocks and individuals work together to find
food sources in the wet pastures whilst a lone
Pacific Heron stalks the swale drain of
Westerfolds. A Royal Spoonbill sweeps the
edge of a wetland where nightly small cho-
ruses of Southern Brown Tree Frogs,
Common Froglets and the Whistling Tree
Frog are heard on all but the very cold, frosty
nights.

Wetlands haye slowed down, productivity
levels are reduced as many of the aquatic
plants such as River Club-rush, Marsh Club-
rush and especially the introduced Bullrush
die off after the cool winter weather stops
growth. Pairs of Wood Ducks perch on
entrances to breeding hollows, clucking away
to each other about the coming brood.

In the corridor along Gold Memorial Gully,
a flock of Silvereyes disturb the foraging of a
pair of Pink Robins who have migrated from
Tasmania for the Winter. Another uncommon
species using the local bushland corridors is
the locally-nomadie winter migrant, the Olive
Whistler. In a colourful display, an Eastern
Spinebill collects nectar from a pink flowered
Common Heath, Working his way up the
Mullum Mullum Creek corridor, a male juve-
nile Koala is killed on the Warrandyte-
Heidelberg Road as he discovers the fatal

270

breaks in the faunal corridors.

A few days before the Winter solstice a
female Wedge-tailed Eagle sits in a huge
Candlebark in the River Paddock of
Longridge Park. A Little Raven tries a few
harassing sweeps and is then joined by sever-
al Sulphur-crested Cockatoos for ariel harass-
ment. This all stops with the arrival of the
male Wedge-tail Eagle landing in the
Candlebark near the female. Gently, the big
Eagles move together to touch and then com-
plete the ritual and cycle of thousands of
years by copulating.

European Rabbits are in top breeding gear,
providing plenty of food for the breeding
Wedge-tail Eagle and Barking Owls. What
will provide the food when they are gone?

Pleasant wailing whistles of the Yellow-
tailed Bl»ck Cockatoos are heard long before
they are seen. When they finally sweep into
view, it is breathtaking as a flock of forty or
so pass low overhead in slow mannered
flight. They resemble lumbering galleons as
they head for a stand of Silver Wattles to
search for Wood-moth lavae (family
Cossidae) that bore their way through the
trunks and branches. Usually there are only
five to six Yellow-tailed Black Cockatoos
resident all year round in the Yarra Valley
Parklands. This annual visitation by the mob
during Deep Winter may be part of the
Yellow-tailed Black Cockatoo songline jour-
ney to visit parts of their greater territory
range, perhaps acquainting young birds with
the terrain. Their happy chorus is such a
thrilling challenge to the cold winter weather
that their presence in flocks is an awaited
Timelonic pleasure.

In the grassy woodlands on the valleys and
slopes, Magpies and Australian Ravens are
adding the finishing touches to nests, as is a
Brown Thornbill whose nest is tucked amidst
a stand of Bracken. Flocks of Red-rumped
Parrots, or Yellow-rumped Thornbills and
mixed flocks of Red-browed Firetail are still
found together. Superb Fairy-wrens, males in
breeding plumage flock with White-browed
Scrub Wrens. Standing out in brilliant golden
blooms are the pest plants Cootamundra
Wattle and Early Black Wattle, Also in prolif-
ic flower is the Yellow Box an important
component of many vegetation communities
and supplier of winter nectar. On the ground
are the fungi Cordyceps sp. which parasitise

The Victorian Naturalist

Naturalist Notes

various' insect larvae in order to complete
their life cycle. Leaves of many orchids and
herbaceous plants have sprouted and begin to
grow vigorously.

On a rocky escarpment, a small group of
Echidnas are found together in breeding
mode. They have been digging up nests of
Meat Ants to exploit the energy-rich food
source of the virgin queens whose nests are
located closer to the surface during this sea-
son. Once the Echidna mating is completed,
the female will retire to her nursery burrow
with an egg in the pouch. Occasionally two or
more Echidnas may share a shelter site,
which may be a hollowed tree trunk base. On
a fence is a Scarlet Robin as welcome as win-
ter sunshine. The first flowers of Early
Nancy, Common Beard-heath and Spreading
Wattle are out and Tiny Greenhood, Nodding
Greenhood and Trim Greenhood flowers can
be found and fruits have formed on Cranberry
Heath.

On a hilltop a flock of Varied Sittellas and
Striated Pardalotes glean insects from a Red
Box, under which Spreading Wattle begins to

flower. Gang Gangs, although often found
eating the ripe red berries of the introduced
Hawthorn, also eat the seed from Long-
leaved Box. Here the Maroonhood is in
flower in addition to the Tiny, Nodding and
Trim Greenhoods. ‘
Just prior to darkness falling, into the
gloaming night, a female Powerful Owl
emerges from the nest hollow for a stretch
and a feed from her partner. The male had
gently hooted to the female to encourage her
out and passes to her a headless Ringtail
Possum as both birds sit on a dead branch,
The female then goes to a feeding roost to eat,
preen and finally returns to the nest as the
stars Achenar, Bootes, Spica, Antares and
Regulus begin their domination of the Deep
Winter night skies. Above all, it is the return
of the Aquila constellation, the Eagle of the
ancient Greeks and the Bunjil of the
Wurundjeri, that marks the return of the Sun
from the northern hemisphere, the creative
life force of the Earth.
Glen Jameson
PO Box 568, Templestowe, Victoria 3106

Species list. Key: * = introduced species

Animals

Antechinus, Brown - Antechinus stuartii

Echidna, Short-beaked - Tachyglossus aculeatus
Koala - Phascolarctos cinereus

Phascogale, Brush-tailed - Phascogale tapoalafa
Possum, Common Ringtail - Pseudochirus peregrinus
*Rabbit, European - Oryctolagus cuniculus

Thornbill, Yellow-rumped - Acanthiza chrysorrhoa
Whistler, Olive - Pachycephala olivacea

Froglet, Common - Crinia signifera
Tree Frog, Southern Brown - Litorta ewingi
Tree Frog, Whistling - Liforia verreauxi

Crayfish, Yarra - Euastacus varraensis

Black-Cockatoo, Yellow-tailed - Calyptorhynchus

Ant, Meat - [ridomymex sp.
funereus

Cockatoo, Gang-gang - Callocephalon fimbriatum
Cockatoo, Sulphur-crested - Cactua galerita
Cuckoo, Fan-tailed - Cuculus flabelliformis
Duck, Wood - Chenonetta jubata

Eagle, Wedge-tailed - Aquila audux

Egret, Cattle - Ardea ibis

Fairy-wren, Superb - Malurus cyaneus

Finch, Red-browed - Neochmia temporalis
Heron, Pacific - Ardea pacifica

Heron, White-faced - Ardea novaehollandiae
Ibis, Australian White - Threskiornis molucca
Ibis, Straw-necked - Threskiornis spinocollis
Kite, Black - Milvus migrans

Magpie, Australian - Gymnorhina tibicen

Owl, Powerfull - Ninox strenua

Pardalote, Striated - Pardalotus striatus

Parrot, Red-rumped - Psephotos haematonotus
Raven, Australian - Corvus coronoides

Raven, Little - Corvus mellori

Robin, Pink - Petroica rodinogaster

Robin, Scarlet - Petroica multicolor ;
Scrubwren, white-browed - Sericornis [rontalis
Silvereye - Zosterops lateralis

Sittella, Varied - Daphoensitta chrysophera
Spinebill, Eastern - Acanthorhyynchus tenuirostris
Spoonbill, Royal - Platalea regia
Thorbill, Brown - Acanthiza pusila

Plants

Austral Bracken - Preridium esculentum
Beard-heath, Common- Leucopogon virgatus
Club-rush, Marsh - Bolbaschoenus medianus
Club-rush, River - Schoenoplectus validus
Cranberry Heath- Astroloma humifusum
Box, Long-leaved - Eucalyptus goniocalyx
Box, Red - Eucalyptus polvanthemos

Box, Yellow - Eucalyptus melliodora
Candlebark - Exicalyptus rubida

Clematis, Small-leaved - Clematis microplivlla
Early Nancy ~ Wurmbea dioica

Greenhood, Tiny - Pterostylis parviflora
Greenhood, Trim - P.concinna

Greenhood, Nodding - P. nufans

Gum, River Red - Eucalyptus camaldulensis
*Hawthorn - Crataegus monogyna

Heath, Common - Epacris impressa
Maroon-hood ~ Pterostylts pedunculata
Reed, Common - Phragmites australis _
Bullrush (Reedmace. Great) - Typha latifolia
Wattle, Cootamundra - Acacia baileyana
Wattle, Early Black - Acacia decurrens
Wattle, Silver - Acacia dealbata

Wattle, Spreading - Acacia genistifolia

Vol. 113 (5) 1996

271

Book Reviews

National Parks Field Guides

Uluru, Kata Tjuta And Watarrka
by Anne Kerle

Publisher: University of New South Wales Press 1995;
202 pages, 10 maps, over 200 colour illustrations; RRP $24.95

Uluru (Ayers Rock) and nearby Kata
Tjuta (the Olgas) are Australian icons.
Over 300 000 people visit Uluru National
Park every year making it one of our pre-
mier tourist attractions. Neighbouring
Watarrka (Kings Canyon) National Park is
newer and one of our best kept national
secrets. The current level of visitation to
the Rock is a far cry from 1958 when the
year’s total was only 2 296. Pioneer tour
operator Len Tuit is credited with opening
up this unique part of Australia to the
world. After a tour in 1950 with a party
from Sydney’s Knox Grammar School, he
recognised the tourist potential of Ayers
Rock and began to offer regular tours. The
millions of government dollars that now
flow into the national park each year
would surely bring a smile of satisfaction
to Len’s lips were he still alive today. At
the time the Administrator of the Northern
Territory believed there was “no future for
tourism in the Territory” and southern
travel agents were not convinced they
could market “ a lump of rock”. How
wrong they were, says author Anne Kerle
in her newly released field guide for the
region.

Anne Kerle spent 14 years living in the
centre of Australia. This book is a window
to the vast repository of knowledge she
built up over that time. Her thoroughly
researched text, with over 200 colour pho-
tographs and illustrations, unlocks the door
to the region’s history, geology and land-
forms, its plants and animals, and how they
live. She writes not only form the perspec-
tive of a keen naturalist, and sometime
professional nature guide, but also with the
expertise of a zoologist highly regarded by
her peers.

Most of the excellent colour photographs
that illustrate the text were taken by the
author. These are complemented by some
remarkable wildlife scenes by Mike

272

Gillam. Gillam is undoubtedly one of
Australia’s most outstanding photogra-
phers. His insect’s eye view inside a hon-
eyant’s nest on page 128 is one of the
book’s gems. Another is his image of the
rarely-sighted Marsupial Mole dragging its
body across the red sand dunes. These are
the kinds of things field naturalists dream
about!

The book begins with a rundown on the
landforms of Uluru, Kata Tjuta and
Watarrka. Aboriginal perspectives of the
landscape are included as well as geologi-
cal explanations. To help the botanically-
bent traveller, plant information is present-
ed in a habitat format, from sand dunes to
rocky ranges. The region’s abundant but
elusive animal life is introduced and con-
servation issues highlighted.

The book concludes with a very useful
section detailing points of interest along
the highways and roads to the parks as
well as information concerning walking
tracks. This is the kind of stuff keenly
sought by travelling field nats. It’s a
shame the editors have chosen to hide it at
the end of the book instead of featuring it
more prominently upfront.

The book is sturdily bound and will fit
easily into a car glove box of a walker’s
daypack. On the down side, however, is
the annoyingly small print. It’s difficult to
read by the dim light of a motel bedroom
or while travelling along in a car. Bigger
and better page headings are also needed to
make the book more user friendly.

Nonetheless, it’s worth the $24.95 it sells
for and will be a good help to travellers
who want more from their Rock visit than
the usual postcard sunset scenes.

Stuart Traynor
Parks and Wildlife Commission
PO Box 1046, Alice Springs, NT 0871

The Victorian Naturalist

Book Reviews

Never Truly Lost: A Bushwalker’s Life
(Reprint)
by Paddy Pallin

Publisher: University of New South Wales Press, 1996:
Paperback, 224 pages; RRP $19.95,

_We read of many pioneers who met the
rigours of the high country and the
Australian bush to eke out an existence in
the early days of European settlement.
However, all too rarely we read the per-
sonal accounts of other ‘pioneers’ who
also met the challenges of travel and recre-
ation in the Australian bush we have all
come to love and appreciate.

Paddy Pallin was an explorer, not in
search of new gold seams and pastures, but
of the pleasures to be had by the slow
movement through the endless variety that
awaits the careful observer in the different
environments of Australia. Paddy Pallin
was an artist who could capture the
essence of a place and describe it in words
that easily evoke the atmosphere of the
moment, as when canoeing on the
Shoalhaven River:

“as the sun rays slanted into the valley
the mist gradually dispersed and the
diaphanous scarves of cloud rose from the
valley, clinging to the tree tops as though
reluctant to leave this beautiful spot.”
Modern-day visitors to the Australian bush
would shudder at Paddy’s methods of
camping and his apparent lack of any mini-
mal impact practices. Techniques of the
1930’s, such as building beds two-foot
deep of Richea scoparia to escape the
water-sodden ground in south-west
Tasmania but “which rival an inner-spring
mattress for springiness”, cutting “tent
poles and pegs and lots of brush for the
tents”, building large, roaring fires that
lasted all night, and an unhealthy reliance
on the comforts of huts have, thankfully,
all but faded into memories, But our new-
found ethics owe much to Paddy Pallin
who, as Australia’s firs outdoor equipment
manufacturer, we responsible for much of
the innovation and development that lead
to the bushwalking equipment that enables
us nowadays to be more environmentally
friendly in our bush travels.

Vol. 113 (5) 1996

An immigrant and self-taught bushman,
Paddy Pallin developed a prodigious and
accurate knowledge of bushwalking areas
in New South Wales. Alas, his comments
on bushwalking and ski touring in
Victoria’s high country are, at times, a lit-
tle inaccurate and outdated. Never-the-less
in his book, Paddy Pallin uses his skills of
observation and memory to relate many
fine alpine adventures in great detail.

As if to help us realise we are never too
old to try something new and challenging,
Paddy Pallin describes his arduous trip to
(the then unspoiled) Lake Pedder and
Federation Peak at aged 58, and taking up
cross-country skiing at 54 years of age.

Not content with merely walking in beau-
tiful natural area, Paddy Pallin also con-
tributed to the protection of such areas
through his involvement in enterprises
such as buying back the lease on the
threatened Blue Gum Forest in the Blue
Mountains, and in introducing others
(including a young Rover Scout named
Dick Smith) to the joys of the bush they
later went on to help protect.

This book gives us glimpses of the life of
a bushwalker, equipment manufacturer,
cross-country skier, and conservationist. It
traces the life of one of the icons of bush-
walking in Australia and helps us under-
stand the role this gentle man played in
helping all of us to visit and appreciate the
nature we now all love.

“ we looked down on a world asleep under
a woolly blanket of cloud. The high ridges
stood out like fingers, sharp and clear in
the morning sun, but every valley was
filled in. We stood and watched a while,
and even as we stood the warmth of the
sun began to unroll the blankets from the
surrounding valleys.”
Neville Byrne
Chairman, Bushwalking & Mountaincraft Training

Advisory Board Program Co-ordinator, Australian Alps
National Parks program.

273

tititititititititiwiwdeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee

Tribute

Fred J.C. Rogers 1927 - 1996

Victoria and Australia lost a top quality
naturalist who was a very caring, influen-
tial and important person earlier this year.

Fred Rogers was born on 17 December
1927 in the Victorian Wimmera. He was
always a Wimmera boy at heart and later in
life he returned with his wife June to
Vectis South.

When 17 years old, Fred was too young to
be accepted at Teachers College, so he was
sent to teach in small country schools
where he was the only teacher, Eventually
he was able to enroll at Ballarat Teachers’
College, where he met his future wife June.
They were married in 1952 at Horsham and
then lived initially at Ballarat. It was as a
teacher that Fred went on to be an inspira-
tional leader and friend to so many during
his very full and active life.

In 1954 the Rogers moved to Ringwood
and it was from this time that Fred*s influ-
ence in the area of natural history had a
major impact, through a variety of activi-
ties with a wide range of people, from the
youngest of children to the elderly. He was
renowned as a friendly and inspirational
person who could be involved in a conver-
sation at any level.

In 1959 Fred was elected to membership
of The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria
and was a foundation member of the
Ringwood Field Naturalists Club. He was
also a foundation member of the Society
for Growing Australian Plants, which was
initiated in March 1957 and he became
involved in the Society at a local, state and
Federal level. From 1963 to 1986 Fred was
Victorian State President of S.G.A.P. and it
was during these years that there was a
very dramatic upsurge of interest in our
Australian flora, Fred initiated the forma-
tion of S.G.A.P. Maroondah Region and
was the foundation leader of the group,
with early meetings in the Rogers’ home.
During this period he was very active in
the Ringwood Field Naturalists Club.

In 1967 Fred approached Ringwood coun-
cil regarding the preservation and develop-
ment of some native bushland adjacent to
the railway line at Heathmont. Fred donat-
ed plants for the area and, with helpers

274

from 8.G.A.P. Maroondah, spent many
hours in planting and maintenance of the
site. In 1973 Ringwood Council officially
named the area The F. J. C. Rogers
Reserve.

In 1976 Fred and June returned to
Horsham and a year later moved to Vectis
South. In true Fred Rogers fashion, an
Australian Plant group was formed soon
after his arrival in the district.

At the Federal $.G,A.P. conference in
Canberra in 1988, Fred delivered the
keynote address. He was awarded
Honorary Life Membership of S.G.A.P.
Maroondah and S.G.A.P. Victoria. In 1995
Fred was honoured once again for his con-
tribution to the activities of S.G.A.P. with
the Australian Plants Award at the National
Conference at Ballarat.

It was as a lecturer that Fred made a
tremendous impact. He was always willing
to talk to groups and during his lifetime he
presented over 2000 lectures.

He was an author of note and his
Victorian Wattles book, with the marvel-
lous illustrations by John Truscott became
the standard text for those who were eager
to gain a greater knowledge of the often-
confusing Victorian species of the Acacia
genus. Other books by Fred included
Growing Australian Plants (1971),
Growing More Australian Plants (1975)
and A Guide to the Plants in the Little
Desert and Mt Arapiles Area.

Fred also wrote for Your Garden maga-
zine in the 1960s and early 1970s. While a
teacher he assisted with numerous publica-
tions by the Gould League and the series
entitled Nature Notes, which were distrib-
uted through Victorian primary schools,
provided much information and inspiration
for teachers and students alike.

Fred was foundation president of the
Friends of the Mallee Fowl and, after retir-
ing, he often led groups of Australian and
overseas visitors on tours of the Little
Desert. He willingly shared his intimate
knowledge and love of that wonderful
region.

In 1991 Fred was judged to have made a
meritorious contribution to the understand- |

The Victorian Naturalist

Tribute

ing of Australian natural history and was
awarded by the FNCV, the prestigious
Australian Natural History Medallion for
his contribution to Botany (popularisation
and conservation).

Fred was a keen propagator of Australian
plants and over the years gave away literal-
ly 1000s of plants, now growing in home
gardens as well as in regeneration areas on
roadsides and farms. The Rogers’ gardens
and planting at Ringwood and Vectis
South were regularly visited by people
keen to understand more about Australian
plants, There was always an open invita-
tion to friends who were passing by. Fred
was ever-keen and willing to provide a
guided tour and in a true educator’s role
would supply food for thought as the
plants and accompanying birds were
enjoyed.

Fred’s primary school teaching career
spanned four decades and during this time
he was a teacher and headmaster at Yarra
Park, Clifton Hill, Mooroolbark, North
Ringwood, Knox Park, Donvale and
Horsham West. His influence and inspira-
tion for his pupils is legendary as was evi-
dent at his funeral service at Horsham and
at the Tribute Afternoon held in Ringwood
on May 19 this year.

Fred was a meticulous gatherer of infor-
mation which he tried to keep at the fore-
front of his brain or very close to his fin-
gertips. He also developed an extensive
herbarium of plant specimens, had a mar-
vellous photographic collection and his
large library was one that was in constant
use as he sought to gain that extra bit of
knowledge which would be useful, not
only to himself but to pass onto to some-
one else.

Fred’s other activities included weaving
and woodwork, and he was also a highly
talented sportsman with particular exper-
tise in cricket, baseball and tennis. He was
presented with the Victorian Provincial
Baseball League’s Special Services
Award.

Fred Rogers was an Australian of truly
exceptional ability who would never shirk
the responsibility of making sure that peo-
ple had the opportunity of gaining a better
understanding of the natural world.

We are certainly richer for Fred’s mentor-
ship and acknowledge with deep apprecia-
tion his life of unstinting service to the
country he loved so dearly.

Rodger and Gwen Elliot
S.G,A.P. Maroondah, Victoria

The Handbook of Australian, New Zealand and
Antarctic Birds
Produced by the Royal Australasian Ornithologists Union
Publisher: Oxford University Press

The Handbook of Australian, New Zealand and Antarctic Birds (HANZAB), to be produced in five
volumes, is one of the most significant projects in Australasian ornithology today. It continues the
tradition of authoritative and exciting publications that began with Gould’s Handbook of the Birds of
Australia (1865), F j

The on nie by HANZAB includes Australia, New Zealand and Antarctica, the Antarctic and
subantarctic islands, the Cocos-Keeling, Christmas, Lord Howe, Norfolk, Kermadoc and Chatham
Islands and the islands and reefs of the Coral Sea. ie 4,

Within this region about 900 species of birds have been recorded. Species descriptions are eS
into: Field Identification, Habitat, Distribution and Population, ASE Food, oe
Organisation, Social Behaviour (illustrations of behavioural postures and plumage), Voice te ui ee
sonograms of calls and songs), Breeding (maps showing breeding and non-breeding ranges p ys ia-
grams of cycles of breeding and moulting) and Plumages and related matters. Each account con-

ith a full list of references. ( p
Bail species except those extinct in historical times, those not recorded since 1900 ae i ht for
which records are doubtful, are illustrated in spectacular colour plates, painted especially
.N. Davies. F ‘ F
Bees published to date are: Volume 1, in two parts: Part A, Ratites to Ee eae ea,
Pelican to Ducks, RRP $395.00, Volume 2, RRP $325.00. Volume 3, Snipe to Pigeons, 3
Ed Grey

275
Vol. 113 (5) 1996

ee
The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria

Established 1880
In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria

Registered Office: FNCV, | Gardenia Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130. Phone/Fax (03)9877 9860

Patron
His Excellency, The Honourable Richard E. McGarvie, The Governor of Victoria

Key Office-Bearers June 1995
President: Professor ROBERT WALLIS, School of Aquatic Science and Natural Resources
Management, Deakin University (Rusden), Clayton, 3168. (03)9244 7278, Fax (03)9244 7403,
Hon. Secretary: Mr GEOFFREY PATERSON, 11 Olive Street, South Caulfield, 3162.
AH (03)9571 6436,
Hon. Treasurer: Mr ARNIS DZEDINS, PO Box 1000, Blind Bight, 3980. (059)987 996,
Subscription-Secretary: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, 3130. (03)9877 9860.
Editors, The Vic. Nat.: ED and PAT GREY, 8 Woona Court, Yallambie, 3085. (03)9435 9019,
Librarian: Mrs SHEILA HOUGHTON, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, 3130.
AH (054)28 4097.
Excursion Secretary: DOROTHY MAHLER. AH (03)9435 8408.
Book Sales: Dr ALAN PARKIN, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, 3130, AH (03)9850 2617.
Programme Secretary/Newsletter Editor: Dr NOEL SC HLEIGER, | Astley Street,
Montmorency, 3094, (03)9435 8408,
Conservation Coordinator: JENNY WILSON, 206 Pascoe Vale Road, Essendon, 3040, AH (9370
6434)

Group Secretaries

Botany: Mr JOHN EICHLER, 18 Bayview Crescent, Black Rock, 3143, (03)9598 9492,
Geology: Mr DOUG HARPER, 33 Victoria Crescent, Mont Albert, 3127. (03)9890 0913.
Fauna Survey: Ms FELICITY GARDE, 18 College Parade, Kew, 3101. eens 4684,
Microscopical: Mr RAY POWER, 36 Schotters oad, Mernda, 3754, (03)9717 3511.

The Victorian Naturalist
All material for publication to: The Editors, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130

MEMBERSHIP

Members receive The Victorian Naturalist and the monthly Field Nat News free. The Club organises
several monthly meetings (free to all) and excursions (transport costs may be charged), Research
work, including both botanical and fauna surveys, is being done at a number of locations in Victoria,
and all members are encouraged to participate.

SUBSCRIPTIONS RATES for 1996
(Subscription are due on 1 January)

First Member

MEM ORGUBN so sara rciceriscasiatraps ctu Breccia ete te esssar a RRR eenten et tree ene $40
Concessional (pensioner/student/unemployed) ... 530
Country (more than 50km from GPO) .0........0...-. «$30
BY h Cah tau tizeli pl ko eerie ner yper avs nae IC ee $15
Additional Members

BNL aah ey cenac nce EMU re HEE SS paweavrany, ARNE eee leet $15
Junior e

Institutional

Australian Institutions .....c.c.cccccccccecescseseseeeeeees Locphas miaye nstseny bFare Sua ase tet ta: pant oT $55
Overseas Institutions ..... -AUD$65
DOUGOLS STUBS oes. trcamzece. ates Jeter Tint Will, lee rar eng er alee eee a Lua $35

Printed by Brown Prior Andereson, 5 Evans Street, Burwood, Victoria 3125

The
Victorian
Naturalist

Volume 113 (6) 1996 Decemb
er

iii

R Published since 1884 by
The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Inc.

F.N.CV.

From the Editors

The Victorian Naturalist would not be successful without the enormous amount
of time and effort voluntarily given by a large number of people who work
behind the scenes.

The Editors would like to say thank you to those who refereed papers pub-
lished in 1996:

Helen Aston Patrick Fricker Andrew McMahon
Malcolm Calder Louise Gilfedder Peter Menkhorst
Helen Cohn Christopher Hill Kim Robinson
Leon Costermans Rod Horne Jon Sago

Mike Coupar John Hunter Martin Schulz
Tom Darragh Patrick lang Ken Simpson

Nik Dow Ian Lunt Andrew Straken
Sophie Ducker Ian Mansergh Rob Wallis

Arnis Dzedins Neville Marchant Barbara Wilson
Ron Fletcher Clive Marks

We also have a team of dedicated proof-readers who help with the readability
and expression of our articles:

Max Bartley Linden Gillbank Tom May

Tania Bennell Ken Green Mandy Naylor
Arnis Dzedins Murray Haby Michelle Smith
Gill Earl Steve Hill Kathie Strickland
Ian Endersby John Hunter Rob Wallis
Jennie Epstein Patrick Lang Rosemary Ward
Todd Gardner Ian Mansergh

and our editorial team who continue to advise and assist:
Gill Earl, Ian Endersby, Ian Lunt, Ian Mansergh and Tom May.

As always we particularly thank our authors and book reviewers who provide
us with excellent material for publication.

On the production side, a thank you to the printers, Brown Prior Anderson
Pty.Ltd and especially to Steve Kitto at Abb Type who spent a lot of time teach-
ing us how to use Quark Xpress.

The Victorian Naturalist

All material for publication to:
The Editors, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130

Volume 113 (6) 1996

Honours

The
Victorian
Naturalist

Editors: Ed and Pat Grey

Australian Natural History Medallion 1996 - Ken Simpson,

DYSEUCTRMCOULGCH arin? tele terete ee cred tpn nant:

1996 Mueller medal awarded to Dr Sophie Ducker

DVS CT SOV MI Ree Ot eRe ee a Nae A ec; te ee

1996 Honorary Membership of the FNCV awarded to

Best asHOM eHow cae tec tecaehaerti eed bien Weide rschechcbesnsercdtnny csepd
BECOME SCO MAREN FOR cies genes Eicon, sae dete tse dekonkanscheserenkeye scr ae=-H

Research Reports New Holland Mouse Pseudomys novaehollandiae

Contributions

Memorial

in South Gippsland, Part 2, by B. QUIN. ........ccccsceecsseetssestes ten enees

Results of Surveys of the Herpetofauna of Several Areas in

North-western Victoria, by A.J. COVeNtry ...cccscccscsesseeseseressteeee

Diet of Red Foxes and Cats: Their Impact on Fauna Living in

Parks near Melbourne, by R. Wallis, H. Brunner, J. Seebeck ....

The Distribution and Abundance of Fur Seals and Bottlenose
Dolphins in Western Port, Victoria, by P. Dann, R. Jessop , M. Healy

Book Reviews Geelong’s Birdlife. In Retrospect, by T. Pescott,

reviewer L. CONOLe w.scsssssssesesssseesessecseeseseeessenseneseenseneaentescanensens

ISSN 0042-5184

Cover: Ken Simpson, winner of the 1996 A
, photo by Zoe Wilson.
Inside Back Cover: 1996 Mueller
Victoria, photo courtesy Media U

cle p. 280)

nit, University of Melbourne.

December

Observation of the White-footed Dunnart Smithopsis leucopus...
Dy S. Hutchings ......ssceccesessesesssrsseeseneneesensnnencennececennnesgnsasressnesess 31]

Naturalist Notes Middle Yarra Timelines: Early Spring, by G. Jameson ............
Dr Jim Willis Reserve, Brighton ..........ccsesesssseseesesssseeseenenenens

ustralian Natural History Medallion (see arti-

Medal winner, Dr Sophie Ducker, with the Premier of

Honours

Australian Natural History Medallion 1996

Kenneth Nigel Graham Simpson

Birds have been a lifelong passion for Ken
Simpson, and his career as a naturalist, scien-
tist, teacher and author reflects this completely.

From University High School, Ken worked
as an interested junior assistant at the School
of Geology at the University of Melbourne
for several years. From 1962 to 1964 he was
a technical assistant for Dr Mervyn Griffiths
at the CSIRO’s Division of Wildlife
Research, helping with marsupial nutrition
and physiology studies. Bird and bat banding
and general ornithology were spare time
occupations. His time from 1963-1966 in the
Antarctic Division included two periods on
Macquarie island, where penguins became a
personal focus which still continues. His book
‘Birds of Bass Strait’ published in 1972 by A.
H. & A.W. Reed for BHP reflects his fascina-
tion with seabirds,

From 1967-70, work as a Field Officer for
the National Museum involved him in the
Chowilla Project with its emphasis on all
aspects of anthropology and fossil material,
plus general ornithology. This interest in
palaeontology continued through his work
from 1970-1976 at Monash University as a
research technician under Prof. Jim Warren,
with field and laboratory work on vertebrate
fossils.

In 1974 he was awarded the second only
M.Sc. Honoris causa from Monash
University.

From 1973-1979 he lectured for the
Victorian Council of Adult Education, taking
evening classes and summer schools.

Ken was editor of ‘The Australian Bird
Watcher’ for five years from 1977-1981.

From 1976 to 1992 he was a lecturer in pri-
mary science at Victoria College/Deakin
University, Burwood and Toorak Campuses,
specialising in earth sciences, photography,
environmental sciences, ornithology research
and publication techniques. Out-of-hours, he
led many staff and student groups on recre-
ational birdwatching.

Ken’s name is best known to birdwatchers
throughout Australia as the editor and author
of Simpson and Day’s ‘Birds of Australia’,
first published in 1984 by Lloyd O'Neil,
South Yarra, Victoria, The fifth edition of this

280

very popular volume now entitled ‘Field
Guide to the Birds of Australia’ was pub-
lished in 1996 by Viking O'Neil (Penguin).
Each edition has been rewritten and expanded
to reflect growing knowledge of bird taxono-
my, behaviour and habitat. It is the first
Australian bird book to have been published
as a CD-Rom. This multi-media interactive
disc contains data for identification by illus-
tration and by the use of 480 bird calls, with
additional habitat data.

A monumental effort by Ken resulted in
‘The Bird-Book Book CD-Rom, A
Bibliography of Bird Books’, published in
1995 by Natural Learning NSW, with over
4,000 entries in the Ist edition of which some
1,200 are extremely detailed. It became
BOCA Report no. 5 in a series.

For ten years he has been, and continues to
be, a member of the Evaluation Panel for
Victoria of the Australian Heritage
Commission, Natural Environment
Documentation Project. He is a member of
many natural history societies and organisa-
tions, and is currently the President of the
Bird Observers Club of Australia, of which
he has been a member for 45 years.

Ken’s published articles and papers reflect
his range of scientific interest, and encourage
the wider community to be aware of, and
interested in, the world of birds.

It is appropriate that the Bird Observers
Club of Australia nominated him for this hon-
our, as his boyhood interest in birds began
through club meetings and outings. His early
interest in a survey on the migratory swifts
encouraged birdwatchers all over Australia to
become involved in collecting data.

He now leads many early morning commu-
nity birdwalks; he gives many well-
researched lectures; he conducts many excur-
sions, tours and study weeks; he is a friend to
all who have questions about birds or want
some help. His contribution has been excep-
tional as through his knowledge and teaching
skills he brings birds to people and people to

birds.
Ellen M. McCulloch

6 Bullen Avenue, Mitcham, Victoria 3132

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

; New Holland Mouse Pseudomys novaehollandiae
(Rodentia: Muridae) in South Gippsland, Southern Victoria.
Part Two - Conservation and Management

Bruce R Quin '*and Ross C Williamson '

Abstract

A survey for New Holland Mouse Pseudomys novaehollandiae populations i

Gippsland, conducted by the then Department of Conservation aa Natural Besnistioes: cuneaty
Department of Natural Resources and Environment) located two previously unknown populations
of New Holland Mouse numbering15 individuals on the Yanakie Isthmus, Wilsons Promontory
National Park. However, populations which were known from the Promontory and McLoughlins
Beach (on Ninety Mile Beach) are believed to be no longer present. The species was not detected at
two further areas formerly known to support it, Dream/Hummock Island and Mullungdung State
Forest; however, further surveying at both areas is recommended. At Wilsons Promontory, New
Holland Mice were. found in vegetated sand dune systems which had not been burnt for 20-30
years. This finding indicated that New Holland Mice inhabiting such habitat were not necessarily
reliant on an actively regenerating understorey as they are in other habitats (c.g. coastal heath).
Their habitat at Wilsons Promontory appears to be under threat from Coast Tea-tree Leptospermum
laevigatum and Coastal Wattle Acacia sophorae invasion. Recommendations for appropriate man-

agement of the New Holland Mouse populations and their habitat are provided. Restoration of the
native grassland - open woodland vegetation types in the vicinity of the populations will assist via-
bility of the species in the long-term, Dunes systems in other areas of South Gippsland similar to
those inhabited by New Holland Mice at Wilsons Promontory should be surveyed for this species.
The Wilsons Promontory populations currently represent the only populations of New Holland
Mice known from South Gippsland. (The Victorian Naturalist 1996, 113, 281-288)

Introduction

The New Holland Mouse Pseudomys
novaehollandiae (family Muridae) has a
patchy distribution on coastal and hinter-
land areas of central eastern New South
Wales, central southern Victoria and north-
eastern Tasmania (Kemper 1995). Habitats
utilized by New Holland Mice include
coastal heathland, woodland and open for-
est with a heathy understorey, swamp
edges and vegetated sand dunes. Habitats
with heathy understoreys that are actively
regenerating provide particularly
favourable habitat (e.g. Keith and Calaby
1968; Posamentier and Recher 1974;
Cockburn 1980; Wilson 1991; Menkhorst
1995: Quin 1996). In Victoria the New
Holland Mouse is classified as endangered
and a number of processes threaten popu-
lations (CNR 1995; Menkhorst 1995;
Seebeck et al. in prep.). A survey in South
Gippsland, central southern Victoria dur-
ing 1992-93 determined the species was in
‘Department of Natural Resources and Environment
310 Commercial Road, Yarram, Victoria 3971.

*Current Address ;
Department of Natural Resources and Environment
Yellingbo State Nature Reserve, Macclesfield Road,

Yellingbo, Victoria 3139.

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

decline, being located only at Wilsons
Promontory (Quin 1996). This paper out-
lines management recommendations for
New Holland Mouse at the Promontory
and other sites where it has been recorded
in South Gippsland.

Study Sites, Materials and Methods

The location of study sites and a full
description of materials and methods uti-
lized in determining the distribution of
New Holland Mouse occur in part 1 of this
series (Quin 1996). Three sites which for-
merly supported New Holland Mice,
Mullungdung State Forest, Dream/
Hummock Island and Wilsons Promontory
National Park (Yanakie Isthmus) were
trapped. Trapping also occurred at Won
Wron State Forest (for which no New
Holland Mice records exist) which is adja-
cent to Mullungdung State Forest.
Additionally, hair-tubes were set and
predator scats collected at Mullungdung
and Wilsons Promontory; hair-tubes were
also set at Won Wron. Sites chosen were
based on those of past records provided by
Gilmore (1977) and Barbara Wilson (pers.

281

Research Reports

Table 1. Mammal species detected by Elliott trapping at study locations in South Gippsland; provid-
ed from Quin (1996).

1 =No. of Sites; 2= No. of Trapnights; 3 = Sampling Period ; 4 = Species Captured; 5 = Total No.
of Captures; 6= No, of individuals (in brackets). (Note : site specific data is provided CNR (1993)
and Quin (1994). Cage trapping was also employed at Wilsons Promontory and totalled 38 trap-

nights).

Location 1 2 3

4 & 6

Mullungdung 18
State Forest

Won Wron 5
State Forest

Dream/Hummock 4
Island

Wilsons Promontory 6
National Park
(Yanakie Isthmus)

1253 19/11/92-04/04/93

296 19/12/92-23/12/92

190 25/03/93-27/03/93

562 15/02/93-24/04/93

Brown Antechinus 43 (35)
Eastern Pygmy-possum 8 (6)
Bush Rat 26 (13)
Swamp Rat 7 (4)
Black Rat i) (5)

TOTAL 91 (63)
Brown Antechinus 13 (8)
Bush Rat 1 (1)
Black Rat 2 (1)
House Mouse 1 qd)

TOTAL 17 (11)
Swamp Rat 35 (29)
House Mouse 33 (33)

TOTAL 68 (62)
Bush Rat 23 (15)
Swamp Rat 10 (4)
House Mouse 11 (11)
New Holland Mouse 30 (15)

TOTAL

comm.) for Mullungdung; Peter Menkhorst
(pers. comm.) for Dream/Hummock
Island; CNR (1993) for Wilsons
Promontory. Additional sites at the
Promontory and those of Won Wron were
chosen because of their diverse, heathy
understorey, an attribute typical of New
Holland Mouse habitat (see references in
‘Introduction’ ). The survey- was conducted
from between November 1992 to April
1993.

Results

Tables 1-3 (mammal species found) and
Table 4 (vegetation at trapping locations)
of Quin (1996) summarise results of the
survey; Table 1 is re-produced in this
paper. New Holland Mice were located
only on the Yanakie Isthmus of Wilsons
Promontory, and only via trapping, not
hair-tubing or predator scats. They were
found in vegetation on sand dunes which
had not been burnt for 20-30 years. Saw
Banksia Banksia serrata and Drooping
She-oak Allocasuarina stricta formed the

282

overstorey. Spiny-headed Mat-rush
Lomandra longifolia, Black-anther Flax-
lily Dianella revoluta, and several shrub
species comprised the understorey. Coastal
Wattle Acacia sophorae and Coast Tea-
tree Leptospermum laevigatum had invad-
ed parts of the dunes forming dense thick-
ets with little understorey.

Eight male and four female New Holland
Mice were trapped at one site, while three
males were found at another site.
Morphometric data and other details taken
from the mice are presented in Quin
(1996). New Holland Mice may no longer
exist at Mullungdung State Forest,
Dream/Hummock Island, or parts of
Wilsons Promontory where they once
occurred.

Discussion and Recommendations
Mullungdung State Forest

The sites in Mullungdung State Forest
where New Holland Mice have been
recorded appear to no longer support this
species (Quin 1994; 1996). The heathy
woodland vegetation communities at these

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

sites (and many other areas of
Mullungdung) were over ten years of age,
possibly a post-fire succession stage
beyond that favoured by this species,
Gilmore (1977) described the ‘low heath’
habitat where he trapped New Holland
Mice and suggested a burning regime
which maintained its regenerating nature.
He compared this habitat to heath sites in
Mullungdung where New Holland Mice
were not trapped, and the latter were
apparently at a similar stage of succession
to many of the sites sampled in 1992-1993.
Additionally, studies elsewhere have
demonstrated this species prefers heath
actively regenerating after fire or other dis-
turbances (e.g. Keith and Calaby 1968;
Posamentier and Recher 1974; Braithwaite
and Gullan 1978; Fox and Fox 1978;
Wilson 1991).

The aforementioned studies indicate that
various factors associated with vegetation-
al succession may influence New Holland
Mice numbers. It was not possible to iso-
late the factors responsible for the decline
in populations in Mullungdung. Some
areas, including one former New Holland
Mouse site, had an abundance of Austral
Bracken Preridium esculentum in the
understorey. Long-term monitoring would
have been needed to assess the effect of
this plant species on other understorey
species. However, its abundance may have
reduced the vigor of certain key plant
species, for example legume species,
which are important food sources
(Cockburn 1980). Additionally, structural
features may have altered which adversely
affected New Holland Mouse populations.

Overall, the heathy woodlands of
Mullungdung could potentially provide
habitat for New Holland Mice. A burning
regime which provides the habitat suitable
for this species needs to be formulated. A
mosaic of variously-aged heaths over small
areas would provide short-term and long-
term habitat (see Pye 1991; Wilson 1991).
If New Holland Mice are still present in
the heathy woodlands of Mullungdung, the
populations are likely to be small and habi-
tat manipulation of this kind will undoubt-
edly be required to avoid population loss.
However, it appears that the New Holland
Mouse is absent in this State Forest and the
establishment of this burning regime

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

would produce habitat suitable for the re-
introduction of the species. Re-introduc-
tion would also require genetic studies to
establish a ‘donor’ population most similar
to those that possibly still exist at
Mullungdung. Feral predator control
would also be necessary. Small scale trial
burns should be conducted in the near
future.

Recommendations for
Mullungdung State Forest

1. Develop and implement a burning
regime in the heathy woodlands of
Mullungdung which is appropriate
for the New Holland Mouse; small
scale fires implemented at intervals
which produce a mosaic of habitats
with differing ages are indicated in
this regard.

2. Conduct further surveys of suitable
habitat at Mullungdung State Forest
to locate extant populations or
demonstrate that the species is locally
absent.

3. Investigate the potential of Mullung-
dung to provide suitable New
Holland Mouse re-introduction sites,

as a long-term aim.

Won Wron State Forest

New Holland Mice were not captured at
the five sites sampled in Won Wron State
Forest (Quin 1994; 1996), This species had
never been recorded from Won Wron.
Gilmore (1977) trapped at two heathland
sites in this forest but regarded the vegeta-
tion as too old for New Holland Mice.
During the present study the heathy wood-
land sites trapped were perhaps too young
(0.8 years after fire) or too old (>5S0 years);
refer Braithwaite and Gullan (1978);
Wilson (1991). The heathy open forest
sites of at least 50 years post-fire age were
also possibly too old to support New
Holland Mice. However, evidence of a
much more recent burn at these sites was
apparent and the low and diverse heath
understorey of the open forest sites did
appear suitable for New Holland Mice. It

283

Research Reports

may still be worthwhile searching on a
larger scale for New Holland Mice in Won
Wron State Forest.

Recommendations for
Won Wron State Forest

1. Further survey for New Holland
Mouse populations in Won Wron
State Forest; priority areas to be the
young, actively regenerating heathy
woodland areas where long-term
monitoring sites should be established.

2. Following on from (1), further deter-
mine the suitability of the heathy
woodland and open forest of Won
Wron State Forest as habitat for New
Holland Mice.

Dream/Hummock Island

New Holland Mice were captured on veg-
etated dunes at the south-west point of this
island in 1977 (Menkhorst 1995; Peter
Menkhorst pers. comm.). Some of the

dunes appeared to have eroded since 1977,
and adjacent vegetated dunes were unsuit-
able habitat for New Holland Mice.
Trapping at three sites further along the
seaward coastline of the island, which sup-
ported similar vegetation to that of the
1977 site, failed to detect this species
(Quin 1994; 1996). Trapping at four sites
(of different habitat) on the north-east sec-
tion of the island also did not detect New
Holland Mice (Fauna Survey Group, Field
Naturalists Club of Victoria unpubl.). New
Holland Mice may no longer occur on
Dream/Hummock Island.

The survey detected House Mice at a
trapping success rate of 17% (cf. 4%
recorded by Peter Menkhorst in 1977).
Although the available evidence on inter-
actions between New Holland Mice and
House Mice living in sympatry tends to
suggest the former out-competes the latter
(Cockburn 1980; Wilson 1991), the
reverse Outcome perhaps cannot be ruled
out for island populations. The New
Holland Mice detected on Dream/
Hummock Island in 1977 probably com-

284

prised descendants of populations present
when the island was connected to
McLoughlins Beach some 30 years ago
(Tim Buttle pers. comm.).

Recommendations for
Dream/Hummock Island

1. The primary dune and swale vegeta-

tion along the southern coastline of
Dream/Hummock Island should
further be assessed with the aim of
determining its suitability for New
Holland Mice.

Wilsons Promontory National Park
Distribution and Habitat

This survey and others (by the Fauna
Survey Group, Field Naturalists Club of
Victoria and Deakin University unpubl.)
have indicated New Holland Mice no
longer occur in heathland communities of
Wilsons Promontory National Park (Quin
1994; 1996). Much of the heathlands
remained unburnt for extended periods
prior to the 1970's, and probably reached
succession stages unsuitable to New
Holland Mice (refer for example Wilson
1991).

In February-April 1993, two populations
of New Holland Mice were discovered in
sand dune vegetation on the Yanakie
Isthmus of the National Park (CNR 1993;
Quin 1994; 1996). A follow-up survey dur-
ing 1994 found further populations com-
prising at least 59 individuals existed in
similar sand dune habitat on the Isthmus
(Darren Carman pers. comm.) (Figs 1, 2,
3). Generally, this vegetation had not been
burnt for 20 - 30 years (Jim Whelan pers.
comm.). The habitat was, to a degree, com-
parable with sites on Dream/Hummock
Island, although the Yanakie sites were not
primary dunes. The floristic composition
of New Holland Mice habitat at Wilsons
Promontory appeared similar to that
described for north-east Tasmanian popu-
lations (Pye 1991). Sand dune habitat may
be more important for New Holland
Mouse populations than previously
thought.

The dune systems where New Holland
Mice occur are calcareous in composition,

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

quite steep in parts, and, unlike many of
the smaller dunes present on the Isthmus,
have not been extensively invaded by
Coast Tea-tree and Coastal Wattle. The
reasons for this require investigation.
Coast Tea-tree in the swales around the
dunes containing the New Holland Mouse
populations has been slashed as part of a
program initiated by the then Department
of Conservation and Environment in 1991
to restore Kangaroo Grass Themeda trian-
dra native grassland-open woodland vege-
tation over selected areas of the Yanakie
Isthmus. The decline of these grasslands
and grassy woodlands has been ascribed to
factors associated with European settle-
ment, including inappropriate fire regimes,
and the activities of cattle and rabbits
(DCE 1992). This program should con-
serve the habitat of New Holland Mice by
reducing Tea-tree encroachment onto the
dunes they occupy. This is imperative
because trapping in Tea-tree infested dune
vegetation did not locate any small mam-
mal species at all, probably due to the lack
of ground vegetation (CNR 1993; Quin
1994). Furthermore, New Holland Mice
are believed to be extinct at the Red Hill
Track site where they were captured in
1973 because of invasion by Coast Tea-
tree (pers. obs.).

The restoration work includes a proposed
1080 baiting program for the slashed areas
which aims to reduce rabbit numbers. This
is required to enhance grassland establish-
ment. The grassy areas are to be burnt peri-
odically to maintain their diversity and
prevent re-invasion by Coast Tea-tree
(DCE 1992). The bait will be placed in
slashed swales along a small ploughed
groove. However, the program will need
modification at sites from which New
Holland Mouse is now known. It is not
known whether New Holland Mice would
take 1080 bait as food. Trapping records
indicate New Holland Mice may at least
occasionally traverse swales between
dunes. In one instance, a swale approxi-
mately 20 m wide was crossed; it is not
known whether scattered shrubs at one end
of the swale were used as cover during the
crossing. Another New Holland Mouse
crossed a vehicular track bisecting dune
vegetation. Consequently it is inadvisable
to bait until the susceptibility of New

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

Holland Mice on the Yanakie Isthmus to
the Proposed 1080 baiting program is
eeraeas Some suggestions for deter-

Ing their susceptibility are provided in
CNR (1993). In the interim, Couet Tea-tree
Tegeneration surrounding the dunes should
be systematically slashed. There is also a
need to ascertain the extent of distribution
and association of New Holland Mice with
the dune systems described before the bait-
ing program is conducted.

Changes in vegetation on the Yanakie
Isthmus over the last 150 years or so raises
the question, ‘What habitat(s) did New
Holland Mice occupy on the Isthmus
before the present?’ It is probable that this
species occupied sand dunes which would
have supported a similar plant species
composition to that at the New Holland
Mouse sites described in this paper (DCE
1992). The possibility of New Holland
Mice also inhabiting grassland areas can-
not be ignored. New Holland Mice, which
existed at McLoughlins Beach in coastal
vegetation, had quite a high proportion of
grain in their diet, though invertebrates
were also taken (Cockburn 1980). This
type of diet would be available in diverse
grasslands. Additionally, structural attrib-
utes of grassland areas would, apparently,
not be grossly different from some of the
sedge-lily dominated areas of dunes where
New Holland Mice were trapped in 1993.
Whether or not the Kangaroo Grass
Themeda triandra grasslands are habitat of
New Holland Mice will only be known
when the restoration process is well pro-
gressed. The New Holland Mouse popula-
tions at Wilsons Promontory provide an
ideal opportunity to learn more about this
species, especially in what is to a degree
atypical habitat.

Densities

The number of New Holland Mice at Site
1 was encouragingly high (12). The trap-
ping arrangement at this site during the
February 1993 survey covered an area of
approximately 0.8 hectares. Thus, a crude
density estimate of New Holland Mice was
approximately 12.5 individuals/hectare.
However, approximately one third of traps
were located in open swales which failed
to trap any New Holland Mice. Hence this
figure may have under-estimated the densi-

285

Research Reports

Fig. 1. New Holland Mouse habitat, site 1 on
Yanakie Isthmus. Slashed area in foreground,
calcareous dune in mid picture.

Fig. 2. Close-up of dune habitat at site 1,
Yanakie Isthmus.

Yanakie Isthmus.

ty of mice on the vegetated dunes.
Furthermore, on these dunes New Holland
Mice apparently selected sites with a spe-
cific micro-habitat; Coast Tea-tree thickets
with little ground vegetation were avoided.
Kemper (1995) noted that New Holland
Mice living in optimum habitat can reach
densities of 17 individuals/hectare. At Site
5 of the Wilsons Promontory survey, three
New Holland Mice were caught over an
area of 0.4 hectares (i.e. 7.5 individuals/
hectare).

286

Weights of New Holland Mice at Wilsons
Promontory were generally less than those
at Otway Ranges (Wilson 1991) and north-
east Tasmania (Pye 1991; Kemper 1995),
but fell within the weight range of speci-
mens from the central coast of New South
Wales (Keith and Calaby 1968). New
Holland Mice at the Promontory possessed
tail and hindfoot lengths that were within
ranges provided by Keith and Calaby
(1968) and Pye (1991). The capture of a
pregnant female and ‘sub-adults’ (of
approximately 13.0 g) in late February
conformed to the spring-summer breeding
season determined by Kemper (1995) and
Wilson (1991) elsewhere. However, it also
suggested breeding could extend into
autumn as it does in Tasmanian popula-
tions of New Holland Mice (Pye 1991).

Movements

The presence of fallen, dead shrubs on
dunes appeared important for short dis-
tance movements of at least some of the
New Holland Mice. Additionally, the dead
shrubs may provide for the mice some
cover and protection from predators.
Consequently, dead shrubs are seen as
important components of New Holland
Mice habitat. However, a greater under-
standing of vegetational succession on the
dunes is needed for the management of
New Holland Mice.

The 90 m movement of an individual
New Holland Mouse in a 24-hour period
seemed a considerable distance for an ani-
mal of its size. However, Pye (1991),
working in Tasmania, recorded a 400 m
movement of a New Holland Mouse in a
48-hour period.

Invertebrates - ectoparasites

The three genera of invertebrates collect-
ed from New Holland Mice include two
ectoparasites: Pygiopsylla Sp.3
Dermanyssus sp. or Liponyssus sp. The life
mode of the third genus taken, Myotyphlus,
requires re-assessing (see below).
Pygiopsylla contains species which occur
on a number of native rodents (including
Rattus spp.) and marsupials (CSIRO
1970). Mites of the family Dermanyssidae
are known parasites of mammals, and also
birds and reptiles. They feed on the blood
of their hosts and are capable of transmit-

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

: Recommendations for
Wilsons Promontory National Park

1. Monitor known populations of New
Holland Mice in Wilsons Promontory
National Park at least once per year.

2. Gather further base-line data on the
ecology of New Holland Mice at the
Promontory, including data on popula-
tion dynamics and composition, mortali-
ty, home range, breeding biology, dis-
persal patterns, diet and the degree of
genetic isolation of the populations. The
collection of scats and hair samples for
analysis by Deakin University scientists
should continue.

3. Describe fully the habitat of New
Holland Mice at Wilsons Promontory;
study vegetational succession on the
dunes in order to implement more pre-
cisely, management requirements of
New Holland Mice.

4. Search similar dune systems of

ther populations of New Holland Mice.

5. In the short-term, continue some
slashing of the swales surrounding the
dunes occupied by New Holland Mice at
the Promontory to reduce the extent of
Coast Tea-tree Leptospermum laeviga-
tum and Coastal Wattle Acacia sophorae
invasion on to the dunes; meanwhile,
investigate the susceptibility of New
Holland Mice to the proposed 1080 bait-
ing program. In the long-term, the New
Holland Mouse sites should be incorpo-
rated into the entire native grassland -
open woodland restoration program, as
this should conserve and enhance their
habitats and ensure the species survival.

ting diseases (Krantz 1978). Whether or
not the Dermanyssidae mites found on
New Holland Mice at Wilsons Promontory
transmit disease to their hosts is not

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

known, but may be worthy of investiga-
tion. Myotyphlus sp. is included in the tribe
Amblyopinini. Members of this tribe
occur in the Neotropics as well as
Australia, and until recently, were thought
to be obligate ectoparasites on small mam-
mals. However, two species of a central
and southern American genus Amblyo-
pinus, are known to be highly specialized
predators on ectoparasites of the mammals
(Ashe and Timm 1987a,b). Myotyphlus sp.
has been previously collected from the fur
of Rattus spp. in both Victoria and
Tasmania. In addition, it has been detected
free-living in the guano of bats in
Victorian and New South Wales caves
(Hamilton-Smith and Adams 1966).

With this evidence it is highly likely that
Myotyphlus sp. specimens on New Holland
Mice at Wilsons Promontory were using
the ectoparasites (Pygiopsylla sp.;
Dermanyssus or Liponyssus sp.) as prey
items. Clearly, the relationship between
Myotyphlus sp. and New Holland Mice
could be mutualistic and not parasitic, and
deserves investigation.

The management recommendations given
for New Holland Mouse are not expected
to adversely affect other small ground
mammal species. In fact, the long-term
viability of these other species would ben-
efit by an increased knowledge of their
requirements (if further monitoring pro-
ceeds), greater understanding of their habi-
tats, and habitat enhancement through
restoration and appropriate management.

Acknowledgments

A complete set of acknowledgments for this
research report was given in the associated
paper of Quin (1996); those persons and groups
are thanked again. Additionally, Darren Carmen
provided results of follow-up work on New
Holland Mice at Wilsons Promontory. We are
grateful for the comments given by an anony-
mous referee.

References :

Ashe, J .S. and Timm, R, M. (1987a). Predation by and
activity patterns of ‘parasitic’ beetles of the genus
Amblyopinus (Coleoptera - Staphylinidae). Journal of
Zoology, London 21 429-437.

Ashe, J. § and Timm, R. M. (1987b). Probable mutual-
istic association between Staphylinid beetles
(Amblyopinus) and their rodent hosts. Journal of
Tropical Ecology 3, 177-181. (

Braithwaite, R. W. and Gullan, P. K, (1978). Habitat
selection by small mammals in a Victorian heathland.
Australian Journal of Ecology 3, 109-127. at

CNR (1993). ‘Results of a fauna survey of specific

287

Research Reports

sites at Yanakie Isthmus, Wilsons Promontory
National Park, February 1993’, Internal report by
Flora, Fauna and Fisheries Section, Department of
Conservation and Natural Resources, Yarram.

CNR (1995). ‘Threatened Fauna in Victoria - 1995’,
(Department of Conservation and Natural Resources:
Victoria).

Cockburn, A. (1980). The diet of New Holland Mouse
(Pseudomys novaehollandiae) and the House Mouse
(Mus musculus) in Victorian coastal heathland.
Australian Mammalogy 3, 31-34.

CSIRO (1970), “The Insects Of Australia’. (Melbourne
University Press: Melbourne),

DCE (1992). ‘Slashing to maintain native grasslands’.
(Department of Conservation and Environment:
Victoria)

Fox, B. J. and Fox, M. D. (1978). Recolonization of
coastal heath by Pseudomys novaehollandiae
(Muridae) following sand mining. Australian Journal
of Ecology 3, 447-465,

Gilmore, A. M. (1977). A survey of vertebrate animals
in the Stradbroke area of South Gippsland, Victoria.
The Victorian Naturalist 94, 123-128.

Hamiliton-Smith, E. and Adams, D. J. H. (1966). The
alleged obligate ectoparasitism of Myoryphlus jan-
soni (Matthews) (Coleoptera - Staphylinidae).
Journal of the Entomological Society of Queensland
5, 44-45.

Keith, K, and Calaby, J. H. (1968). The New Holland
Mouse. Pseudomys novaehollandiae (Waterhouse),
in the Port Stephens District, New South Wales.
CSIRO Wildlife Research 13, 45-58.

Kemper, C, (1995). New Holland Mouse, In ‘The
Mammals of Australia’. Ed. R. Strahan. pp. 611-612.

in Victoria’s flora.

New Edition of ‘The Census’

“A Census of Vascular Plants of Victoria’
5th Edition
by J.H. Ross

Publisher: National Herbarium of Victoria 1996;
230 pages; paperback; RRP $23.00 (posted within Australia $30.00

This new edition, which incorporates the latest changes to names and classifications,
including those published in The Victorian Natuarlist, is available from the Royal
Botanic Gardens Bookshop. FNCV members will receive a 10% discount on presenta-
tion of a libraray card or The Victorian Naturalist address slip.

The ‘Census’ is a prime reference for plant names for authors and everyone interested

(The Australian Museum and Reed Books: New
South Wales).

Krantz, G. W. (1978). ‘A Manual of Acarology’.
Second Edition. (Oregon State University Book
Stores, Inc.: Corvallis).

Menkhorst, P.W, (Ed.) (1995). ‘Mammals of Victoria:
Ecology, Conservation and Distribution’. (Oxford
University Press: Melbourne).

Posamentier, H. and Recher, H. F. (1974). The status of
Pseudomys novaehollandiae (the New Holland
Mouse). Australian Zoologist 18, 66-71.

Pye, T. (1991). The New Holland Mouse (Pseudomys
novaehollandiae) (Rodentia: Muridae) in Tasmania:
a field study. Wildlife Research 18, 521-531.

Quin, B. R. (1994). ‘A survey for populations of New
Holland Mouse (Pseudomys novaehollandiae) in the
South Gippsland area of Southern Victoria
November 1992 - April 1993". Internal report by
Flora, Fauna and Fisheries Section, Department of
Conservation and Natural Resources, Yarram.

Quin, B, R. (1996). New Holland Mouse Pseudomys
novaehollandiae (Rodentia: Muridae) in South
Gippsland, Southern Victoria. Part One - Distribution
and Status. The Victorian Naturalist 113 , 236-246.

Seebeck, J., Menkhorst, P. and Wilson, B. (in prep.).
New Holland Mouse. Draft Action Statement, Flora
and Fauna Guarantee. Department of Natural
Resources and Environment, Victoria.

Wilson, B. A. (1991). The ecology of Pseudomys
novaehollandiae (Waterhouse, 1843) in the Eastern
Otway Ranges, Victoria. Wildlife Research 18, 233-247.

The Editors would also like to remind authors of the references to be used for

articles in The Victorian Naturalist:

‘Mammals of Victoria’ (1995), ed Peter Menkhorst, Oxford University Press;

‘Reptiles and Amphibians of Australia’ (1992), by Harold Cogger, Reed Books;

‘The Taxonomy and Species of Birds of Australia and its Territories’ (1994), by
Leslie Christidis and Walter Boles, RAOU;

‘The Insects of Australia’ (1991), CSIRO;

‘A Census of Vascular Plants of Victoria’ (1996), 5th Edition, by J.H. Ross, National

Herbarium of Victoria.

288

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

Results of Surveys of the Herpetofauna of Several Areas
in North-western Victoria

A.J.Coventry!

Abstract

This paper reports the results of several surveys of the herpetofauna in
Victoria. Included are brief descriptions of the soite and flora of each acho wpeaes
diversity and zoogeography. In addition a list, arranged in families and including both scientific
and, where appropriate, common names of species known to occur in the Victorian mallee is
included (Appendix 1). Comments are made under the results on distribution patterns and zoogeog-

raphy. (The Victorian Naturalist 1996, 113, 289-299)

Introduction

The herpetofauna of various areas of the
Victorian mallee have been reported on by
Coventry (in press) Mather (1979)
Menkorst (1982) Robertson et.al. (1989)
and Woinarski (1989). In addition,
Rawlinson (1966) listed the reptiles and
Littlejohn (1966) the amphibians of the
Victorian mallee. Baverstock (1979) has
reported on the Billiatt Conservation Park,
South Australia, which is close to the west-
ern border of the northern Victorian
Mallee. This current paper, by reporting on
previously poorly known areas, adds to our
knowledge of these fauna within north-
western Victoria.

Method

Data was obtained from four areas, and
the results are expressed below in tabular
form. Fauna was surveyed by means of pit-
fall trapping, traps being checked early
each morning, and in extremely warm con-
ditions during the day and/or early
evening. Each site consisted of a single
drift fence 50 m in length, 13 cm high,
with approximately 2 cm buried in the soil,
and contained ten pit fall traps approxi-
mately 5.5 m apart along the drift fence.
Traps were 30 litre buckets 39 cm deep
and with an opening diameter of 29 cm.
Sites were selected because of their diverse
topographical and floral characteristics.
Co-ordinates were obtained using a Sony
Pyxis GPS. Zoological nomenclature,
together with common names of reptiles
follow Cogger, 1992, while Phyllodactylus
marmoratus follows Cogger, 1986 and
common names of frogs follow Hero,
Littlejohn and Marantelli (1991).

' Herpetology Department, Museum of Victoria,
71 Victoria heen Abbotsford, Victoria 3067.

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

Localities sampled (Fig. 1)

Sampling commenced in October 1984,
at six sites in the Round Swamp (35°42'S
141°43'E) to Arnolds Springs (35°40'S
141°42'E) area, in the north-eastern region
of the Big Desert, and concluded in
February 1986. The sites, starting from the
swamp, followed the track northwards for
7 km, the last site being near Arnolds
Springs.

Between November 1985 and March
1987, five trips were undertaken at 12 sites
from the east of Milmed (35°40'S
141°40'E) to the Pigeon Springs (35°37'S
141°32'E) area. These sites were spread
along the Milmed Rock track from a point
2.9 km E. to 18.7 km W. of Milmed Rock,

ee a Island

. . Mildura

Kilometers _

@ Sunset Tank
@ Ouyen

@ Murrayville

Round Swamp
on bad
Milmed Rock

¢@ Rainbow

Fig. 1. Map showing localities where sampling
was done.

289

Research Reports

(= 1.3 km W. of Pigeon Springs).

Fauna was surveyed along Sunset Track,
to the west of Sunset Tank (34°56'41"S
141°30'21"E) at 18 sites, with a total of
three trips, from October, 1987 to
February, 1988. One trip from 26 October
gave over four full weeks of continuous
survey. The Sunset Tank sites began 1.3
km W. of Sunset Tank and followed the
track to a point 25.1 km W. of the Tank.

Finally, twelve sites were established on
Wallpolla Island, from Horseshoe Lagoon
(34°09'S 141°52'E) westwards, an area
formed by Wallpolla Creek and the
Murray River, west of Mildura, with four
trips between September and December
1988.

Round Swamp Sites

1. 300 m S.E. of the well in 35°42'36"S
141°43'00"E, was at the bottom of a con-
solidated sand dune. Soils were deep, dark
friable sands. The upper stratum consisted
of Callitrix preisii with a mid layer of
Eucalyptus porosa. Ground layer consisted
of ephemeral grasses dominated by Stipa
falcata.

2. 300 m N.E. of the well in 35°42'33"S

141°42'37"E, and in the swamp proper,
was an area of “crab holes” in clayish,
saline soils. The upper stratum consisted of
Eucalyptus behriana, Eucalyptus calycog-
ona, E. porosa and Acacia bivenosa with a
lower layer of Chenopodium desertorum.
Ground layer was Carpobrotus modestus
interspersed with ephemeral grasses.

3. 5.4 km N. of the well in 35°40'13"S
141°42'47"E, and running down the
northerly aspect of a large sand dune
which had been devastated by the 1981
fires. Regenerating Eucalyptus incrassata
together with Melaleuca uncinata were the
most common plants with some Grevillea
pterosterum, Hibbertia spp. and sparse
grasses.

4. 6.1 km N. of the well in 35°39'S4"S
141°42'50"E, and on the southerly aspect
of a large dune some 200 metres in from
the edge of the 1981 fires. The upper layer
comprised E. incrassata with a fairly dense
mid-layer dominated by M. uncinata with
some Baeckea behrii. There was very little
ground layer and litter was virtually
absent.

5. 6.7 km N. of the well in 35°39'38"S
141°42'44"E, and in an area of whipstick

Table 1 Number of specimens recorded, from 120 pitfall trap day/nights per site, at each of the

Round Swamp sites.

SPECIES
Gekkonidae
Diplodactylus intermedius
Diplodactylus vittatus
Lucasium damaeum
Phyllodactylus marmoratus
Pygopodidae
Aprasia inaurita
Delma australis
Agamidae
Amphibolurus nobbi coggeri
Ctenophorus fordi
Ctenophorus pictus
Scincidae
Ctenotus brooksi iridis
Ctenotus robustus
Ctenotus uber orientalis
Egernia inornata
Lerista bougainvillii
Menetia greyti
Tiliqua occipitalis
Typhlopidae
Ramphotyphlops australis
Ramphotyphlops bituberculatus

-oco Load

oorcocoo ooo oo

TOTALS

a OOO id

> NO coccocoo ooo

Site Number
5 6 TOTALS

0 1 0 0 1
0 0 1 1 3
4 =) 0 2 9
0 0 0 0 1

1 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0) }
0 1 0 0 1

i 0 0 0 1
8 2 0 3 13
1 0 0 0 1
3 0 0 0 5
0 0) 1 1 2
0 1 0 0 l
0 1 0 1 3
1 0 0 0 1
0 1 0 0 ]
0 0 1 0 2
0 0 0 0 5
19 10 3 8 50

290

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

mallee on compacted red soils. The upper
Stratum consisted chiefly of E. calycogona
and M. uncinata. There was very little
ground cover or litter.

6. 7 km N. of the well in 35°39'22"S
141°42'42"E, was on the end of a low
ridge containing red sandstone. The area
had been lightly burnt in the 1981 fires and
consisted of regenerating E. calycogona,
Eucalyptus dumosa and M. uncinata
between fairly large areas of open ground
with sparse ephemeral grasses.

The results of this work are listed in Table 1.

Milmed Sites (Fig. 2)

1. 2.9 km E. of Milmed Rock in
35°39'09"S 141°38'45"E, and in a sandy
swale. The upper story was dominated by
E. behriana and Eucalyptus foecunda with
a mid story consisting of Hakea mueller-
ana, Acacia hakoides and Callitris verru-
cosa. Old Triodia irritans constituted the
ground layer. Some litter was present. This
site appeared not to have been affected by
fire for a considerable number of years.

2. 1.2 km E.N.E. of Milmed Rock in
35°38'58"S 141°36'23"E, and in an area of

Fig. 2. Desert heath, Big Desert

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

open woodland, on compacted black soils,
and shallow “crab holes”. There was a
Sparse upper layer of E. calycogona, with a
mid layer of Atriplex nummularia and
Zygophyllum glaucum. Ground cover con-
sisted of Carpobratus modestus and some
ephemeral grasses, with a little ground lit-
ter.

3. 0.2 km N. of Milmed Rock in
35°39'15"S 141°36'04"E, was on a sand
plain with a vein of sandstone running
approximately north - south. The area had
been totally destroyed in the 1981 fires,
and consisted chiefly of regenerating E.
foecunda, T. irritans and Grevillea iliciflo-
ra, with H. muellerana, C. verrucosa, M.
uncinata and some grasses.

4, 2.2 km W. of Milmed Rock in 35°38'39"S;
141°34'57"E, was on the edge of a low sand
dune. The upper story was dominated by
E. foecunda and E. incrassata, with C. ver-
rucosa and Lepidospermum coriaceum
common in the midstory. Old T. irritans
formed the major ground cover.

5. 7.6 km W. of Milmed Rock (s. of track)
in 35°36'24"S; 141°31'47"E was on a low
dune. The upper canopy was dominated by

291

Research Reports

E. incrassata with a sparse lower canopy
dominated by L. coriaceum. Grasses,
including sparse T. irritans provided the
ground cover.

6. 7.6 km W. of Milmed Rock (n. of track)
in 35°37'26"S; 141°31'48"E, was on a low
inter-dune plain. The low upper canopy
was dominated by L. coriaceum,
Leptospermum myrsinoides and Banksia
ornata, with a lower canopy where
Casuarina pusilla was dominant over T.
irritans.

7. 9.3 km W. of Milmed Rock in
35°37'13"S 141°30'45"E, was on the top of
a low dune dominated by dense B. ornata
and L. coriaceum. C. pusilla provided the
lower canopy. There was very little litter
or ground cover. T. irritans was absent.

8. 10.3 km W. of Milmed Rock in
35°37'08"S 141°29'59"E, The upper
canopy was dominated by E. incrassata,
with Calytrix tetragona, mid canopy by L.
coriaceum, B. behrii, Baeckea crassifolia
and H. muellerana. Grasses, including
sparse 7. irritans were present.

9. 12.7 km W. of Milmed Rock in
35°36'03"S 141°28'22"E, The upper story
consisted of C. verrucosa, C. tetragona
and E. incrassata, with a mid-story of L.
coreaceum, B. behrii, B. crassifolia and H.
muellerana. The lower story was dominat-
ed by C. pusilla.

10. 14.6 km W. of Milmed Rock in
35°36'25"S 141°27'18"E, and running
from the top to the bottom of a small dune
which had very sparse regenerating E. foe-
cunda and E. incrassata and fairly dense
B. ornata and C. pusilla following burning
in the 1981 fires. Ground cover consisted
of very sparse grasses including regenerat-
ing T. irritans.

11. 17.4 km W. of Milmed Rock in
35°36'32"S 141°26'03"E, and lying on the
top and side of a large dune. The upper
story was dominated by Eucalyptus
baxteri, with L. coriaceum. The mid layer
included B. crassifolia and the lower layer
C. meullerana. Ground cover contained
some grasses and litter. T. irritans was
absent,

Table 2. Number of specimens recorded, from 180 pitfall trap day/nights per site, at each of the

Milmed sites.

Site no

SPECIES ht Oe Ass) 86s Ses OenIOu al lS Totals
Gekkonidae

Diplodactylus intermedius Oe UE Nii ero I Ye} ah 10

Diplodactylus vittatus Ty 0S BO tea eee Che 20) ee 5

Lucasium damaeum OO TO i 0 oe ORG 11
Pygopodidae

Aprasia inaurita ie IN elton all Avie EO tr Sa ie Sie Kil 1

Delma australis Ui ters ON Kir tte Ter ere a Tt Wu he a) 1
Agamidae

Amphibolurus norrisi cet ale a oe ee IE ane oe YE: 20

Ctenophorus fordi De Uy 5 3) 2 0G ie Sen) 35

Ctenophorus pictus Ee 45 it Be Fs, 3- ieee ae) 39

Pogona vitticeps OF De 00) 2 SR. eT Oe Th 15
Scincidae

Ctenotus brooksi iridis 28 SL OS Oh OnE Re a 14

Ctenotus robustus QW yO> c= aS” Fae Ge Oy ether e 58

Ctenotus uber orientalis 1D se Oy POs 1s ROL 0: cn vee 17

Lerista bougainvillii EERO ree a SAE Try BP me ae i Ati aos) 16

Menetia greyii Oo HOF FO" Os) ee AROS Gani: oth meth 2

Morethia obscura Oo Ot Di EO aoa 1 co ear) 9
Typhlopidae

Ramphotyphlops australis ee EA OO LP AL ih) sth 5

Ramphotyphlops bituberculaus 1 1 0 0100 000 0 0 3
Elapidae

Drysdalia mastersii DAS OE ys) Oe 07 On wae 1

Suta nigriceps OPO OF GS ea meen 1) eee) 2

Suta spectabilis AP iG TURK TON ie ey Fim da Yt 1
TOTALS 14 3 20 16 30 31 15 35 14 24 46 16 265
292 The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

12. 18.7 km W. of Milmed Rock in
35°35'46"S 141°25'06"E, on a large inter-
dune plain. The upper canopy was domi-
nated by E. baxteri with sparse E. foecun-
da and E. incrassata. The fairly dense
lower canopy comprised young C. verru-
cosa. Some H. muellerana and T. irritans
were also present.

The results of this work are listed in Table 2.

Sunset Tank Sites (Fig. 3.)

1. 1.3 km W. of Sunset Tank in
34°56'50"S. 141°29'27" E. was on a plain
dominated by Casuarina cristata and
mixed low shrubs and grasses, approxi-
mately 50 metres in from track and parallel
to track.

2. 4.35 km W. of Sunset Tank in
34°57'13"S. 141°27'44" E. was on a plain
in an open area with A. nummularia on
soils containing much limestone.

3. 6.3 km W. of Sunset Tank in
34°57'07"S. 141°26'25" E. was on a sand
dune with mixed mallee and Triodia.

4. 7.7 km W. of Sunset Tank in
34°57'05"S. 141°25'33"E. was on a small
plain of compacted soils in mixed mallee
and sparse Triodia.

5. 8.7 km W. of Sunset Tank in

eos a a aed We
Fig. 3. Open mallee, Sunset Country

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

34°58'12"S. 141°17'59" E. was on com-

pacted soils in open mallee.

6. 9.5 km W. of Sunset Tank in
34°56'53"S. 141°24'21" BE. was in mixed
mallee on compacted soils with little
undergrowth.

7. 10.5 km W. of Sunset Tank in
34°56'56"S. 141°23'52" E. was on com-
pacted sands in an open area of grassland
with C. verrucosa and C. cristata.

8. 12.7 km W. of Sunset Tank in
34°57'41"S, 141°22'35" E, and adjacent to
a medium sized sand dune, with C. verru-
cosa some Melaleuca, mixed mallee, and
Triodia. (Fig. 4)

9. 13.15 km W. of Sunset Tank in
34°57'49"S. 141°22'15"E. was in mixed
mallee and Triodia.

10. 14.4 km W. of Sunset Tank in
34°57'54"S. 141°21'27" E. was on friable
soils, with fairly dense mixed mallee and
sparse Triodia.

11. 16.05 km W. of Sunset Tank in
34°58'06"S. 141°20'26" E. was on a low
sand dune in Melaleuca and scattered
mallee.

12. 16.6 km W. of Sunset Tank in
34°57'53"S. 141°19'51" E. was in medium
dense mallee.

13. 20.6 km W. of Sunset Tank on S. in

293

Research Reports

pacted red sands with fairly dense “whip-
stick” mallee and little to no undergrowth.

14, 21.3 km W. of Sunset Tank in
34°58'16"S. 141°17'03" E. was on sandy
soils with mixed mallee and some Triodia.
15. 21.7 km W. of Sunset Tank in
34°58'07"S. 141°17'52" E. and in a mixed
community of mallee, pine and Triodia on
friable sand.

16. 23.0 km W. of Sunset Tank in
34°58'10"S. 141°16'08" E. was in an area
of mixed sands and darker soils with ‘crab-
holes’. This area had been burnt some two
years earlier and had regenerating mallee
and Triodia.

17, 24.1 km W. of Sunset Tank in
34°58'06"S. 141°15'06" E. was situated on
the side of a dune in an area burnt some
two years earlier. Some C. verrucosa and
regenerating mallee, with ephemeral grasses.
18. 25.1 km W. of Sunset Tank in
34°57'33"S. 141°15'23" E. This site ran
from the top of a large dune, which had
been burnt some two years previously.
Some regenerating mallee,

The results of this work are listed in Table 3.

Wallpolla Island Sites
1. Horseshoe Lagoon in 34°08'07"S.
141°50'19"E was on black soils with

294

Eucalyptus largiflorans and some
Muehlenbeckia cunninghamii.

2..6.4 km S.W. of Lilly Pond in
34°08'30"S. 141°45'49"E was a fenced
regeneration area situated on a sandy dune
with some ephemeral grasses and C. verru-
cosa, E. largiflorans and E. camaldulensis
in adjacent areas.

3. 5.6 km S.W. of Lilly Pond in
34°08'44"S. 141°46'18"E it was on black
soils dominated by young E. largiflorans
with some shrubs and ephemeral grasses.
4. 3.1 km S.W. of Lilly Pond in
34°08'01"S. 141°47'08"E was on a black
soil plain, with ephemeral grasses and
sparse M. cunninghamii.

5. 1.6 km S.W. of Lilly Pond in
34°07'2328. 141°47'54"E was on black soil
with dense M. cunninghamii and sparse
E. largiflorans.

6. Dedman Creek in 34°07'12"S.
141°42'52?E was on black soils in dense
M. cunninghami, with E. largiflorans and
E. camaldulensis.

7. 1.6 km E. of Dedman Creek in
34°07'12"S. 141°43'55"E on black soil
plain with ephemeral grasses and very
sparse E. largiflorans.

8. 2.2 km E. of Dedman Creek in
34°07'04"S. 141°44'09"E on black soil

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

plain with Carpobrotys modestus.

9. 4.7 km E. of Dedman Creek in
34°06'58"S. 141°45'30"E with a fairly
dense upper canopy of E. largiflorans and
lower canopy of M. cunningham.

10. 4.0 km W.N.W. of Lilly Pond in
33°06'50"S. 141°46'18" on black soil with
moderately dense upper canopy of E.
camaldulensis with ephemeral grasses.

11. 4.5 km W.N.W. of Lilly Pond in
33°06'35"S. 141°46'20"E on black soil
with scattered E. camaldulensis and
ephemeral grasses.

12. Lilly pond in 34°07'23"S. 141°47'54"E
and adjacent to a small lagoon at the east-
ern end of the pond, consisted of scattered
E. camaldulensis.

The results of this work are listed in Table 4.

Results

Interestingly the results shown in the
tables is related to some of the distribution-
al data. For example, Amphibolurus nobbi
coggeri, appears to replace Amphibolurus
norrisi in the north east of the Big Desert
and in the Sunset Country, while Ctenotus
robustus, a common species in the Big
Desert, was only recorded once from the
Sunset Country, where it appears to be
replaced by Ctenotus brachyonyx. Among
the elapid snakes, Drysdalia mastersii,
while fairly common on the Big Desert,
was not recorded from the Sunset Country,
while species such as Demansia psam-
mophis and Pseudonaja nuchalis, while
recorded on the Sunset Country were not
located in the Big Desert. Still further
north where the influence of the Murray
River impacts on the environment, species
such as Rhynchoedura ornata, Pseudechis
porphyriacus, Notechis scutatus, and Suta
suta occur. It seems strange that
Diplodactylus tessellatus, a species inhab-
iting cracking black soils of riverine and
lake habitats, and recorded from Kewell
further to the south during the last century
(Museum of Victoria records) should now
apparently be restricted to the Murray
River region. Spencer (1896) proposed
three zoogeographic regions for Australia:-
the Torresian, to include tropical north-
eastern Australia, the Bassian for south-
eastern Australia, and the Eyrean for the
remaining areas, including the arid interior.
Rawlinson (1971) expanded on Spencer's

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

concept, subdividing the Victoria Bassian
region into subregions:- warm temperate
Bassian, cool temperate bassian and cold
temperate bassian. The rest of Victoria he
regarded as Eyrean. Rawlinson (1966) list-
ed all the then recognised reptile species
from the mallee, and in 1971 he allocated
them into his various zoogeographic
regions. This study would indicate that the
semi-arid regions of north-western
Victoria, rather than being true Eyrean, fall
within a transition zone between the warm
temperate Bassian of Rawlinson and the
Eyrean regions of Spencer.

Discussion

The semi-arid mallee regions of north-
west Victoria supports a rich and diverse
herpetofauna, with representatives of all of
the five Australian lizard families, the
Pygopodids or legless lizards, Gekkonids
or geckoes, Agamids or dragons, Varanids
or goannas and Scincids or skinks, three of
the four families of Australian terrestrial
snakes, Typhlopids or blind snakes, Boids
or pythons, Elapids or front fanged ven-
omous snakes, and two of the four families
of the indigenous Australian amphibians,
the Hylids or tree frogs, and the Myo-
batrachids or ground frogs. The numerous
micro-environments in the semi-arid
regions of north-western Victoria, ranging
from salt lakes, grass plains, sand dunes,
and whipstick scrub through to desert
heaths, provide ample opportunity for
species specialisation, and this is utilised
by the reptile fauna. Skinks are the most
diverse family, with 21 species, one
species complex of which, the Morethia
boulengeri group, is represented within the
mallee by three species, M. boulengeri
being found in open grassland or farmland
type habitats, Morethia obscura in mallee
heath habitats, and Morethia adelaidensis
in association with saline soils. Snakes on
the other hand were poorly represented,
with the 69% of those recorded being noc-
turnal and of these nocturnal species,
66.6% were burrowers. Apart from the
Death Adder, Fierce Snake, Red-bellied
Black Snake and Tiger Snake, which either
probably no longer exist in the mallee, or
whose presence there is dependent on the
Murray River, only four species of diurnal
elapids, are present (Fig 5). This is possi-

295

Research Reports

Table 3 Reptiles and amphibians recorded, from 410 pitfall trap day/nights per site, at Sunset Tank localities,

SPECIES 1
Gekkonidae
Diplodactylus damaeus
Diplodactylus intermedius
Diplodactylus vittatus
Heteronotia binoei
Underwoodisaurus milii
Pygopodidae Aprasia inaurita
Delma australis
Delma nasuta
Liasis burtonis
Pygopus lepidopodus
Varanidae
Varanus gouldii
Agamidae
Amphibolurus nobbi coggeri
Ctenophorus fordi
Ctenophorus pictus
Pogona vitticeps
Scincidae
Ctenotus brachyonyx
Ctenotus regius
Ctenotus robustus
Ctenotus uber orientalis
Egernia inornata
Lerista bougainvillii
Lerista punctatovittata
Menetia greyi
Morethia boulengeri
Morethia obscura
Tiliqua occipitalis
Typhlopidae
Ramphotyphlops australis
Ramphotyphlops bituberculatus
Elapidae
Demansia psammophis
Pseudonaja nuchalis
Pseudonaja textilis
Simoselaps australis
Suta nigriceps
Vermicella annulata
Myobatrachidae
Neobatrachus pictus 0

=) CSCCOCCOONOW

oucwWwW

—

—S Sore qgeoooHn

ooo oo

TOTALS

bly due to the presence of both varanid
lizards and raptors, which could prey upon
them. This theory would be supported by
the fact that only large brown snakes, over
1 metre in length, and yellow-faced whip
snakes were observed either basking or
moving. Juveniles of both species of
Brown snakes were recorded immediately
adjacent to large clumps of Triodia.

296

Site No

So SeCoOoOCOoFONHS
CHUWE SOR WE Ww
a Ok
ON
ScoococoonCSO uw
a

i=)

ROR yp SD CORWORFCANW
x)

arose Oo SOOCONKFOCOFWA sl

NNw WH
oO WW
Si me

CrsoosoSo SSO SOWSCSSOOR OSS Oso
SFKUNomwoor
NO CH ONHHooOUH
—-S SCOeMH=HoONSSS
WN COP ROOK SCOO
ie)

re oOofhooco oo ooornoororero

CNNOSSD coo

Co cOoMoCoSo
HOROHO
Soncoo

=}
So
S
oO

g °
3
uw
=]

37 112 111

Unfortunately the results obtained during
the surveys at Round Swamp and Milmed
were probably affected by the 1981 fires,
where Coventry, (in press) has demonstrat-
ed that elapids are slow to re-establish.

Acknowledgements.

For help, encouragement and company in the
field, thanks are due to L. Ahern, J.Calwell, A.,
J., P., and P. Coventry, K.C.Norris, the late

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

Table 3° cont.

Site No.
8

wo
_
—]
="
=
-_
N
-—
we

So
oo

Omkre Ke NOOO =
mee KE NK OODNN
FP OONNOCOA CH
EE Ne
ON ee)

SCOONUOCOOKFwWH

= 3
°o
i=)
oO

or
WN
~
a
~

ABBR SO
mee
NO
Awn an

cl ie
N

to
So

SCCONCOCOKOH
ooofhwoocjnocnan
COFPREP ROCCO OW
NOE NWORCOCH
SoOorowoonooe

he
=
=o

SS coh oos. cc
SS oe SONS. SO
mRrRoOooCoCO

io) ooooccoe on COOFWONK OCOD
So oOoUNrF Oe

P.Rawlinson, P.Robertson, D.Webster, S.Wild,
A. and P.Yen.-P.Johnson and a team of Raleigh
students installed the trap lines along Sunset
Track, and the Friends of the Museum of
Victoria very ably assisted in installing the trap
lines at Milmed. John Wainer offered valuable
and constructive advice on the manuscript.

References
Baverstock, P.R. (1979). A three year study of the
mammals and lizards of Billiatt Conservation Park in

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

=
oS
_
wm
_
i
-_
|
_
oo

TOTALS

-
is
So

S CONOYASCSCONON

So eoCcONCDOOAOH

SOoOoOHPHOoOHNnon

So ScCooOSCoOSoONGQ
md

re Y
BS
SEs
Ww oot WwW
ord
NN CO
[oe]
mn nN
i)
roy —
Bas

—
_

SS.Ou5, ato oS oS

SONSDCOOHCOCS

SoOOOFNOHOCOW

COOK HOCCOOON

ScOoOSCCOH COSCON
a

Ss
oo
Oo
=
aR

ooocoo
NK COCO
=O O'S
ooococoeo
w
YAKS ew

oO
—
i=)
So
—

the Murray mallee, South Australia. South Australian
Naturalist 53, 52- 58.
Cogger, H.G. (1992). ‘Reptiles and Amphibians of
Australia’. (A.H. and A.W. Reed: Frenchs Forest).
Cogger, H.G. 1986. ‘Reptiles and Amphibians of
Australia’. (A.H. and A.W. Reed: Frenchs Forest).
Coventry, A.J., in press, The Herpetofauna of the
Chinaman Well area of the Big Desert, Victoria.
Hero, J., Littlejohn, M. and Marantelli, G. (1991).
‘Frogwatch Field Guide to Victorian Frogs’. (Dept.
of Conservation & Environment: Melbourne).
Mather, P.B. (1979). An examination of the Reptile

297

Research Reports

Table 4 Species collected, from 410 pitfall trap day/nights per site, at each site at Wallpolla Island.

SPECIES 1
Chelidae
Chelodina longicollis 0
Gekkonidae
Diplodactylus tessellatus 1
Gehyra variegata 1
Lucaseum damaeum 0
1
1

co Ww

Phyllodactylus marmoratus
Rhynchoedura ornata
Scincidae
Cryptoblepharus carnabyi
Eulamprus quoyit
Lerista punctatovittata
Morethia boulengeri
Morethia obscura
Typhlopidae
Ramphotyphlops bituberculatus
Elapidae
Furina diadema
Suta suta
Myobatrachidae
Crinia parinsignifera 0
Limnodynastes d. dumerilii 0
Limnodynastes fletcheri 0
0
0

SC SOproso coco

ooco oo o pa tee CoOonro oO N
one

woo

Limnodynastes tasmaniensis
Hylidae
Litoria peronii

o
i=)

TOTALS

Fig. 5. Bandy-Bandy Vermicella annulata,
photo by E.R. Rotherham

Fig. 6. Rosenberg’s Goanna Varanius rosenber-
gi, photo by P. Robertson.

298

=—wNococe Sooocoow o +

—

ey we Pe me ab Totals
UC ne EU IE ee | 2
0) de or “Ga -U 21
OS 1S 0 30S FS aS a) 3
UP e0r Or TOS Or: 00 2
Os OF OS On 4) 2
Oo <0 “O% “OS OO" oD 60 1
OUR TCG 10s shies =}
Oe ple OP POV aes axle ael 1
Or Os 05 he ee 0 2
eS EN 0D ATO) Jig tb 26
cele UO ae A eel 8
OS 0 s8 0.9 060 ete 00) 1
COT NOL KO REC ee a0 2
Oe he 50 el Oe Os 2
eae AOE Man tn Ble Tak ee 6
UL UD GT atl =k RE a if
Vet OR MOR. OM RUF We ht ey, 2
OPO Oe Os ae ala SS 9
UG UE AS Pe oe Au ees 8 | 1
7, OS TAP Ee 2) re S14 97

Fauna of Wyperfeld National Park using Pitfall
Trapping. The Victorian Naturalist 96, 98-101.

Menkorst, P.W., (1982). Pitfall trapping for reptiles in
the Big Desert, Victoria, The Victorian Naturalist,
99, 66-70.

Rawlinson, P.A. (1966). Reptiles of the Victorian
Mallee. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria,
79 , 605-619.

Rawlinson, P,A., (1971). Reptiles of Victoria. In
‘Reptiles and Amphibians of Victoria’, Victorian
Year Book No.85, 16-19

Robertson, P., Bennett, A.F., Lumsden, L.F., Silveira,
C.E. Johnson, P.G., Yen, A.L., Milledge, G.A.,
Lillywhite, P.K. and Pribble, H.J. (1989). Fauna of
the Mallee study area north-western Victoria. Arthur
Rylah Institute for Environmental Research
Technical Report Series No. 87.

Spencer, W.B. (1896). In ‘Report on The Work of the
Horn Scientific Expedition to Central Australia, 1’,
Ed. W.B. Spencer. (Dulau and Co.: London.
Melville, Mullen and Slade: Melbourne).

Woinarski, J.C.Z., (1989). The vertebrate fauna of
broombush Melaleuca uncinata vegetation in north-
western Victoria, with reference to effects of broom-
bush harvesting. Australian Wildlife
Research, 16 (2), 217-238.

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

Appendix 1. Amphibians and Re
of Victoria collections).

ptiles recorded from the Victorian Mallee, (based on the Museum

* denotes possibly no longer found in the mallee. (Coventry and Robertson 1991)

Amphibians
Hylidae

Litoria peroni Peron’s Tree Frog
_Litoria raniformis Growling Grass Frog

Myobatrachidae

Limnodynastes dumerilii Pobblebonk
Limnodynastes fletcheri Barking Marsh Frog
Limnodynastes tasmaniensis Spotted Marsh Frog
Neobatrachus pictus Mallee Spadefoot Toad
Neobatrachus sudelli Common Spadefoot Toad
Crinia parinsignifera Plains Froglet

Crinia signifera Common Froglet

Reptiles

Chelidae (tortoises)

Chelodina longicollis Long-necked Tortoise
Emydura macquarii Murray Turtle

Gekkonidae (geckos)

Diplodactylus intermedius Eastem Spiny-tailed Gecko
Diplodactylus tessellatus Tessellated Gecko
Diplodactylus vittatus Wood Gecko

Gehyra variegata Tree Dtella

Heteronotia binoei Bynoe’s Gecko

Lucasium damaeum Beaded Gecko
Phyllodactylus marmoratus Marbled Gecko
Rhynchoedura ornatus Beaked Gecko
Underwoodisaurus milii Thick-tailed Gecko

Pygopodidae (legless lizards)

Aprasia aurita

Aprasia inaurita

Aprasia striolata

Delma australis

Delma butleri

Delma impar

Delma inornata

Delma nasuta Spinifex Snake-lizard
Lialis burtonis Burton’s Snake Lizard
Pygopus lepidopodus Common Scaly-foot
Pygopus nigriceps Hooded Scaly-foot

Agamidae (dragon lizards)
Amphibolurus nobbi coggeri
Amphibolurus norrisi

Ctenophorus fordi Mallee Dragon
Cenophorus pictus Painted Dragon
Pogona barbata Bearded Dragon
Pogona vitticeps
Tympanocryptis |. lineata

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

Varanidae (goannas)
Varanus gouldii Gould’s Goanna
Varanus rosenbergi Rosenberg’s Goanna
Varanus varius Lace Monitor

Scincidae (skinks)

Cryptoblepharus carnabyi

Ctenotus brachyonyx

Ctenotus brooksi iridis

Ctenotus regius

Ctenotus robustus

Ctenotus uber orientalis

Egernia inornata Desert Skink
Egernia multiscutata

Egernia striolata Tree Skink

Egernia quoyii Eastern Water Skink
Hemiergis millewae

Lerista bougainvillii

Lerista muelleri

Lerista punctatovitta

Menetia greyii

Morethia adelaidensis

Morethia boulengeri

Morethia obscura

Tiliqua occipitalis Western Blue-Tongued Lizard
Trachydosaurus rugosus Shingle-back

Typhlopidae (blind snakes)
Ramphotyphlops australis
Ramphotyphlops bituberculatus
Ramphotyphlops nigrescens
Ramphotyphlops proximus

Boidae (pythons)
Morelia spilota variegata Carpet Python

Elapidae (front-fanged snakes)
*Acanthophis antarcticus Common Death Adder
Demansia psammophis Yellow-Faced Whip Snake
Drysdalia mastersii Masters’ Snake
Echiopsis curta Bardick
Furina diadema Red-naped Snake
Notechis scutatus Eastern Tiger Snake
*Oxyuranus microlepidotus Fierce Snake
Pseudechis porphyriacus Red-bellied Black Snake
Pseudonaja nuchalis Western Brown Snake
Pseudonaja textilis Eastern Brown Snake
Simoselaps australis Coral Snake
Suta nigriceps
Suta spectabilis
Suta suta Curl Snake

Vermicella annulata Bandy-Bandy

299

Research Reports

Diet of Red Foxes and Cats:
Their Impact on Fauna Living in Parks Near Melbourne
R. L. Wallis! , H. Brunner! and J. H. Seebeck2

Introduction

Red Foxes Vulpes vulpes and Cats Felis
catus (subsequently referred to as ‘fox’
and ‘cat’) have had significant impacts on
native fauna in many parts of Australia.
They are introduced predators which are
considered highly efficient hunters and
which have adapted to a wide range of
habitats in Australia. Dietary studies of
foxes and cats have indicated that both
species are highly opportunistic, but that
mammals form the major component of
the food intake in both species (Coman and
Brunner 1972; Seebeck 1978; Triggs et al.
1984; Brown and Triggs 1990; Seebeck et
al. 1991). There have, however, been few
published dietary studies of sympatric pop-
ulations of foxes and cats in urban or semi-
urban environments. Furthermore, there
has been debate on whether these predators
can Cause extirpation of populations of
native vertebrates (Barratt 1995), although
Paton (1993) considers that cats may
account for 80% of the annual productivity
of birds in an area, effectively killing most
of the “standing crop’ each year.

Most previous studies on the comparative
diets of foxes and cats have been based in
non-urban or undisturbed habitats (Bayly
1978; Triggs et al. 1984; Brown and
Triggs 1990). Brunner er al. (1991) have
previously reported on the diets of foxes,
dogs and cats in an urban park in
Melbourne and showed that in parkland
along Dandenong Creek, mammals were
found in most scats of the three predators,
while birds occurred more frequently in
fox scats than in those of the other two
species. Although the actual mammalian
prey taken by the three predators were sim-
ilar, cats tended to consume a higher per-
centage of smaller prey species, such as
small possums and rodents, in contrast to
prey taken by dogs and foxes. A higher
‘School of Aquatic Science & Natural Resources
Management, Deakin University - Rusden Campus,
Clayton, Victoria 3168.

*Flora and Fauna Branch, Department of Natural

Resources & Environment, 4/250 Victoria Pde., East
Melbourne, Victoria 3002.

300

percentage of dog remains and garbage
were found in fox scats than in scats from
cats. They also speculated on the likely
impact of continued predation on native
species such as Sugar Gliders Petaurus
breviceps and many waterbirds, particu-
larly because of the fragmented and linear
nature of the Park.

Dowling et al. (1994) analysed the causes
of admission to wildlife shelters in
Victoria of wildlife and found that cats
posed a significant threat to possums, par-
ticularly Common Ringtail Possums
Pseudocheirus peregrinus and Sugar
Gliders, in addition to preying upon a large
suite of other species.

In this report we present further data on
the comparative diets of foxes and cats liv-
ing in eight parks near Melbourne, includ-
ing the parks which formerly constituted
the Dandenong Valley Metropolitan Park
reported in Brunner et al. (1991). As well,
we discuss the possible impact that preda-
tion by these introduced carnivores may
have on native vertebrates which are now
often reduced to low numbers in confined
patches of remnant bushland surrounded
by housing, roads or agriculture. We
examine whether such predation can con-
tribute to the reduction of the diversity of
native vertebrates which live in the Greater
Melbourne Area.

Methods

The location of the eight parks is present-
ed in Fig. 1 and Table 1 lists the sizes and
distances from central Melbourne (GPO)
of each of the sites, as well as the nature of
the surrounding land use.

As part of a survey of mammals in the
study sites, scats were randomly collected
throughout the year and identified as fox,
cat and dog scats using smell, size and
shape characteristics (Triggs 1984; Triggs
et al. 1984; Lunney ef al. 1990) and placed
in small manilla envelopes on which were
recorded details of the predator, site and
collection date. Cat scats which did not
have obvious hair, feathers or bones (and

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

One Tree Hill Reserve Z

» Currawong
Bush Park

Dandenon
Valley
Park

s
DANDENONG

« Royal Park
MELBOURNE mo

Dandenong
Ranges N.P.

Seaford
Foreshore
Reserve

Kilometres

Fig. 1. Map showing the locations of the eight
survey sites.

which were presumed to contain the
remains of processed pet food) were not
collected. The scats were sterilized at
100°C for at least 24 hours to destroy par-
asites. They were then washed through a
fine sieve into a large white tray. Presence
of various food categories was recorded,
Mammals were identified using skeletal
remains and hair. Bones and teeth found in
the scats were compared with reference
material held at Deakin University. Hair
was microscopically analysed using the
keys in Brunner and Coman (1974). Scats
were generally collected from all seasons
in each of the sites. Data from scats which
could not be positively identified as fox or
cat have not been included in this report.
Only low numbers of dog scats containing
hair or evidence of other ‘naturally occur-
ring’ food items were collected and these
were not included in our analyses.

Results

Mammalian remains occurred in 727% of
fox and 75% of cat scats respectively over-
all in the eight parks. Bird remains were
detected in 18% of fox scats in contrast to
27% of cat scats, and insects were found in

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

40% of fox scats and 24% of cat scats. The
percentage occurrences of bird and insect
remains are each significantly different for
fox scats and cat scats (p<0.05 for bird
remains, p<0.01 for insect remains).

The percentage occurrence of species of
mammals which occurred in the 1992 fox
scats and 273 cat scats which contained
mammalian remains are listed in the
Appendix. Figure 2 presents the percent-
age occurrences of the more common
dietary items for the two predators. It can
be seen that the percentage occurrences for

each prey species are very similar for the
two predators.

Discussion

Our studies support previous findings on
diets of foxes and cats for Victoria. Both
species are carnivorous, taking mainly
mammals and birds which are available
and accessible.

Cats

Coman and Brunner (1972) found mam-
mals to constitute 88% (by volume) of
cats’ diets in samples taken across Victoria
from primary (forest) and secondary (agri-
cultural) habitat. Mammals occurred in
79% of cat scats we analysed. Coman and
Brunner (1972) also noted the opportunis-
tic nature of cat feeding habits, in that 44%
of the diet of cats in primary habitat com-
prised native mammalian prey species,
while in secondary habitat no native mam-
mals were recorded. Jones and Coman
(1981) reported similar findings; in their
mallee study sites native mammals com-
prised 2% (by volume) of the diet and
introduced species (mainly rabbits) 85%.
In the Eastern Highlands, however, the
percentages were 40% and 45% respec-
tively.

Our data support the opportunistic habits
of cats as well. For instance, at ‘The
Briars’ on Mornington Peninsula, rabbits
are reasonably common and of the 71 cat
scats collected from the property, 56%
contained the remains of rabbits. Similarly,
in Currawong Reserve, rabbits were found
in 56% of cat scats. However, where rab-
bits are much less common, they were less
likely to appear in cat scats (e.g. Royal
Park West, Mount Martha Park).

The Department of Natural Resources
and Environment periodically receives

301

Research Reports

Table 1. Comparison of size, distance from Melbourne and surrounding land use for each of the
eight sites. Key: 1 = size of reserve in ha; 2 = distance from Melbourne in km; 3 = surrounding land

use; 4 = source.

Reserve : i 2s 4

Royal Park West 3 3 Housing, parkland Wallis et al. 1993

Currawong Reserve 50 20 Housing, riparian Adams et al. 1994

(Currawong Bush Park) vegetation, recreation reserve

Dandenong Valley 736 21 Market gardens, grazing, quarry, Brunner et al. 1991

Metropolitan Park (now golf course, housing, refuse

named by the constituent transfer station, woodland

park titles)

One Tree Hill Reserve, 143 37 ‘Forest Unpublished data

Christmas Hills

Sherbrooke Forest Park 802 37 Housing in forest setting Brunner et al. 1975;

(component of Dandenong unpublished data

Ranges National Park)

Seaford Foreshore Reserve 50 38 Highway, housing, beach Brunner and Wallis

1993

Mount Martha 50 50 Housing, grazing, woodland/ Brunner et al. 1992a
forest

The Bnars 225 51 Grazing Brunner et al. 1992b

specimens from the public that have been
attacked by cats. Seebeck et al. (1991)
reported 24 species of mammals, 18
species of bird and three reptile species
that had been taken by cats (number of cat
victims = 172, period 1960-1990). They
also reported on high numbers of Sugar
Gliders taken by cats in the outer suburbs.
The same authors reported data collected
by a single wildlife shelter in Melbourne.
In seventeen months (1990-1991) 364 prey
specimens were received by the shelter. Of
these, 272 were mammals and 92 were
birds. Of the mammals, 242 were Common
Ringtail Possums.

Dowling et al. (1994) found that cats
were responsible for 75% of attacks on
wildlife by introduced predators. Cat
attack was the third largest cause of injury
of animals admitted to shelters or veteri-
narians (11%, compared with 20% by
impact with vehicle and 15% by human
interference). Mammals comprised 61% of
animals attacked by cats and birds 38%.

Overall, we found the Common Ringtail
Possum was the most frequently detected
prey species in cat scats, being an especial-
ly important dietary component at

302

Dandenong Valley Metropolitan Park
(41% occurrence in cat scats containing
mammal remains), Mount Martha Park
(88%), Seaford Foreshore Reserve (67%),
One Tree Hill Reserve (36%) and
Currawong Reserve (24%). Dowling et al.
(1994) reported that of nearly 7000 mam-
mals presented to wildlife carers, 84%
were possums. Most (63%) were Common
Ringtail Possum. Victims of cat attack
were mostly possums (93% of total) and
again, most were Common Ringtail
Possum (77%). Juveniles were most at
risk.

Data collected by Barratt (1995) in the
Canberra Nature Park produced quite dif-
ferent data. He found that cats preyed
mainly on introduced mammals (House
Mouse and Black Rat) and only 1% of
prey items were native mammals. Barratt
(1995) suggested that his results probably
reflected the relative abundance of the var-
ious potential prey species. He also found
that 23% of prey items taken by Canberra
cats were birds.

Foxes

Foxes have been found to be opportunis-

tic predators, with small mammals com-

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

prising the bulk of the diet (Brown and
Triggs 1990). Birds, carrion, rubbish, fruit
and insects are also taken when available
(Brunner et al. 1991). A ten-year dietary
survey of foxes in Dandenong Ranges
National Park reported 20 species of mam-
mal taken, and that possums, rats, antechi-
nuses and rabbits were the species most
frequently preyed on (Wallis and Brunner
1987).

Sympatric populations of foxes and cats

Previous studies of foxes and cats living
together have suggested remains of birds
and lizards occur more frequently in scats
of cats than in those of foxes (Bayly 1978;
Triggs et al. 1984). Triggs et al (1984)
found that remains of mammal species
occurred in similar percentages of scats
from the two predators.

Our data from eight parks ranging from
1-51 km from Melbourne support these
other studies in that foxes and cats con-
sume a similar range of prey opportunisti-
cally. We found that mammals form the
bulk of the diets of both predators,
although the frequency of occurrence of
bird and insect remains were different for
foxes and cats; bird remains were slightly
more common in cat scats than in fox
scats. This agrees with studies by Bayly
(1978) and Triggs et al. (1984).
Furthermore, we found that remains of
each species of mammalian prey occurred
in similar percentages of scats from foxes
and cats (Fig. 2).

Possible impact of foxes and cats on
wildlife

Elsewhere in Australia foxes and cats
have been thought to have had a major
impact on native prey species. especially
small to medium-sized species (Burbidge
and McKenzie 1989). Foxes and cats have
had a significant role in thwarting re-estab-
lishment programs of locally extinct popu-
lations of mammals and birds (Gibson ef
al. 1995; Christensen and Burrows 1995;
Short er al. 1995).

In urban envifonments cats are thought to
exert significant predation pressure on
wildlife. In Melbourne, for instance,
Dowling ef al. (1994 p. 12) believe the
major impact is on ‘the mid-sized, colo-
nial-nesting Common Ringtail Possum and
the Sugar Glider. Not only are the adults
taken, but there is high mortality among

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

young or sub-adults. On several occasions,
cats were reported to bring a series of ani-
mals of the one species to the observer's
attention over a short period of time. Those
events indicate that the cats in question had
found a nest and were systematically prey-
ing on the whole colony. Local extinction
may be hastened by such predation effi-
ciency’,

In urban environments much of the local
fauna is typically confined to remnant
habitat patches. Intense predation by cats
can thus add to other processes such as
habitat loss, change and isolation and con-
tribute to local extinctions (Barratt 1996).
Many of the cats whose diets have been
reported in this study are likely to be
domestic pets. Paton (1993) has suggested
that an average domestic cat kills at least
32 vertebrate animals per year (8 birds, 16
mammals and 8 reptiles). Furthermore, a
study by George (1974) suggests that only
50% of prey captured by domestic cats is
actually brought home. Paton’s estimate is
thus likely to be conservative. There have
been numerous studies which have detailed
the contribution of cat predation to extirpa-
tion of native species (e.g. King 1984;
Delroy et al. 1986; Dickman 1993).

Urban parks can be considered ecologi-
cally as ‘islands’ of suitable habitat (bush-

40
O Fox
@ cat

Percentage of fox and cat scate containing various mammals

Fig 2. Percentage of fox scats (n = 1992) and
cat scats (n = 273) containing eight mammalian
prey species. 1 = European Rabbit Oryctolagus
cuniculus, 2 = Common Ringtail Possum
Pseudocheirus peregrinus, 3 = Common
Brushtail Possum Trichosurus vulpecula,
4 = Bush Rat Rattus fuscipes, 5 = Brown
Antechinus Antechinus stuartii , 6 = Black Rat
Rattus rattus, 7 = House Mouse Mus musculus,
8 = Swamp Rat Rattus lutreolus.

303

Research Reports

land) in a ‘sea’ of unsuitable habitat (urban
buildings, pasture grasses, ‘formal’ urban
parkland and roadways, including those
with well-vegetated median strips). We
maintain that foxes and cats may well be
having significant impact on the reduction
of biodiversity of native vertebrates which
live in the Greater Melbourne Area.

References

Adams, R., Simmons, D, and Wallis, R. (1994). ‘Fauna
and flora survey of Currawong Reserve, East
Doncaster’ (Applied Australian Ecological Research
Unit, Deakin University - Rusden Campus, Clayton.)

Barratt, D.G, (1995), Predation and movement by
house-based domestic cats Felis catus (L.) in subur-
ban and rural habitats - preliminary findings. /n
‘People and Nature Conservation’. Eds A. Bennett,
G. Backhouse and T. Clark. (Transactions of the
Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales,
Surrey Beatty & Sons:Chipping Norton, Sydney).

Barratt, D. (1996), The good, the bad and the uncertain.
Ecological effects of predation by domestic house
cats. Wildlife Australia 33 (4), 3-3.

Bayly, C.P. (1978). A comparison of the diets of the
red fox and the feral cat in an arid environment.
South Australian Naturalist 53, 20-28.

Brown, G.E. and Triggs, B.E. (1990), Diets of wild
canids and foxes in East Gippsland 1983-1987, using
predator scat analysis. Australian Mammalogy 13, 209-213.

Brunner, H, and Wallis, R. L. (1986), Roles of predator
scat analysis in Australian mammal research. The
Victorian Naturalist 103, 79-87.

Brunner, H., Lloyd, J.W. and Coman, B.J, (1975), Fox
scat analysis in a forest park in south-eastern
Australia. Australian Wildlife Research 2, 147-154.

Brunner, H., Moro, D., Wallis, R. and Andrasek, A.
(1991), Comparison of the diets of foxes, dogs and
cats in an urban park. The Victorian Naturalist 108, 34-37.

Brunner, H., Wallis, R-L., and Brown, P.R. (1992a).
‘The vertebrate fauna of Mount Martha Park, Mount
Martha, Victoria’. (Applied Australian Ecological
Research Unit, Deakin University - Rusden Campus:
Clayton).

Brunner, H_, Wallis, R.L., and Brown, P.R. (1992b),
‘The vertebrate fauna of “The Briars”, Mornington,
Victoria’, (Applied Australian Ecological Research
Unit, Deakin University - Rusden Campus: Clayton),

Brunner, H. and Wallis, R.L. (1993). “The vertebrate
fauna of the Seaford Foreshore Reserve’. (Applied
Australian Ecological Research Unit, Deakin
University - Rusden Campus: Clayton),

Burbidge. A.A, and McKenzie, N_L. (1989), Patterns in
the modern decline of Western Australia’s vertebrate
fauna: causes and conservation implications.
Bivlogical Conservation 50, 143-198.

Christensen, P, and Burrows, N. (1995), Project desert
dreaming: experimental reintroduction of mammals
to the Gibson Desert, Western Australia. Jn
‘Reintroduction Biology of Australian and New
Zealand Fauna.’ Ed. M. Serena. (Surrey Beatty &
Sons: Chipping Norton, Sydney.)

Coman, B.J. and Brunner, H. (1972). Food habits of the
feral house cat in Victoria. Journal of Wildlife
Managenient. 36, 848-53.

Delroy, L.B.. Earl, J., Radbone, I., Robinson, A.C. and
Hewett, M, (1986). The breeding and re-establish-
ment of Brush-tailed Bettongs Bettongia penicillara
in South Australia. Jn ‘Reintroduction Biology of
Australian and New Zealand Fauna’. Ed. M. Serena.
(Surrey Beatty & Sons; Chipping Norton, Sydney.)

304

Dickman, C.R. (1993), Raiders of the last ark: cats in inland
Australia. Australian Natural History 2A(5), 44-52.

Dowling, B,, Seebeck, J.H. and Lowe, K.W. (1994).
‘Cats and wildlife; results of a survey of wildlife
admitted for care to shelters and animal welfare
agencies in Victoria’, Arthur Rylah Institute for
Environmental Research Technical Report Series No.
134, (Department of Conservation and Natural
Resources: Melbourne.)

George, W,G, (1974). Domestic cats as predators and
factors in winter shortages of raptor prey. The Wilson
Bulletin 86, 384-96,

Gibson, D.F., Johnson, K.A., Langford, D.G., Cole,
J.R., Clarke, D.E, and Willowra Community (1995).
The Rufous Hare-wallaby Lagorchestes hirsutus : a
history of experimental reintroduction in the Tanami
Desert, Northern Territory. Jn ‘Reintroduction
Biology of Australian and New Zealand Fauna’, Ed,
M. Serena. (Surrey Beatty & Sons: Chipping Norton,
Sydney.)

Jones, E. and Coman, B.J, (1981). Ecology of the feral
cat Felts catus (L) in south-eastern Australia. 1. Diet.
Australian Wildlife Research 8, 537-547.

King, C. (1984). ‘Immigrant Killers. Introduced
Predators and the Conservation of Birds in New
Zealand’, (Oxford University Press: Auckland.)

Lunney, D., Triggs, B., Eby, P. and Ashby, E. (1990),
Analysis of scats of dogs Canis fumiliaris and foxes
Vulpes vulpes (Canidae: Carnivora) in coastal forests
near Bega, New South Wales. Australian Wildlife
Research 17, 61-68.

Paton, D.C. (1993). Impact of domestic and feral cats
on wildlife. /n ‘Cat Management Workshop
Proceedings 1993". Eds G. Siepens and C. Owens,
(Queensland Department of Environment and
Heritage: Brisbane,)

Seebeck, J.H, (1978). Diet of the fox Vulpes vulpes in a
western Victorian forest. Australian Journal of
Ecolagy 3, 105-108.

Seebeck, J, , Greenwood, L. and Ward, D. (1991), Cats
in Victoria. /n ‘The Impact of Cats on Native
Wildlife’. Ed. C. Potter. (Australian National Parks
and Wildlife Service: Canberra),

Short, J., Turner, B., Parker, 8, and Twiss, J. (1995).
Reintroduction of endangered mammals to mainland
Shark Bay, /n ‘Reintroduction Biology of Australian
and New Zealand Fauna’. Ed. M. Serena(Surrey
Beatty & Sons: Chipping Norton, Sydney.)

Strahan, R.(Ed.) (199%), ‘The Mammals of Australia’.
(Australian Museum/Reed Books: Chatswood,
Sydney.)

Triggs, B. (1984). ‘Mammal Tracks and Signs: A Field
Guide for South-eastern Australia’, (Oxford
University Press: Melbourne.)

Triggs, B., Brunner, H. and Cullen, J.M. (1984), The
food of fox, dog and cat in Croajingalong National
Park, south-eastern Victoria. Australian Wildlife
Research 11, 491-499,

Wallis, R.L. and Brunner, H. (1987). Changes in mam-
malian prey of foxes, Vulpes vulpes (Carnivora:
Canidae) over 12 years in a forest park near Melbourne,
Victoria. Australian Mammalogy 10, 43-44.

Wallis, R.L., Hochuli, D., Kellett, C, and Brunner, H.
(1993), ‘The fauna of Royal Park West, City of
Melbourne’, (Applied Australian Ecological Research
Unit, Deakin University - Rusden Campus: Clayton.)

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

ee OE eee |
fe) €0 0 0 i) i) te) 0 (e) eae) (e) 0 0 ie) 0 0 0 ) yeop
0 so ) 80 0 80 0) 0) 0 L0> f°) 0 0 v 0) 0 0 ) uewnH
@ L € Zz 0) 80 0) Zz f°) route) 0 0 iL 6 0 (o} 0) f°) ameo
20 80 € 80 0) 80 0 Zz 0) v0 0 (o} 0 v 0 60 f°) 0 desus
0 2Z 0 Z 0 8 0 Zz 0 80 0) 9 0) 6 0 Z ) eh xo4
8 roate) € 0 re 80 eh 0) 8 eae) 0 0 Lh t vi 60 SL 0) 70)
v0 @ 0 0) (0) v 0) Zz 0 ie) 0) 0) Zz vl 0) ) 0 S 6oq
bt Ss 9 v (0) 80 8 I OL v 0) 0) se 02 S ) os el esno| asnoH
[§ é 0 {¢} (6) 0 0 9 € (0) ie) 0 0 ie} 0 ie) 0 yey payjoo}-peoig
€ 6 0 0) 0 0 ) 0) Zt et 0 (e) ) 0 0 0 0 0 yey usng
€ Zz 6 S € Z (o} 0) 0 Zz fe) 0 0) 0 0) 0) 0 0 yey dwems
0 v 0 ) (0) (e) (o} 0 0) 9 ) 0 0 0) 0 0 0 0 yei paynuepluy
0) zo f°) 80 (o} I 0 Zz 0 0 0 0 0 te) 0 0) 0) (0) yey umolg
6 S 0) 0) el OL Se vi 0 € 0 0) ee SI 0 v ) © yey ye 1g
0 10> (0) 0 0 10) (0) ie) 0) 0 0 0 (e) 90 0 ie} (e) 0 ase} UMO1G
8c 8¢ Lg sg 0 é 8 ras SI Zé 0S bo v 9 79 82 0 ie} yqqey ueedoing
SNVIHSHLNA
0 5 0 0 0 0 fo) 0 0 é (0) 0 0 0 0 ie} 0 0 sjooolpue gq
i € 9) ) ) ) 0) 0) 9 v ) ) 0) 0) 0 0) 0 0) ‘ds snuiysajuy
fo) v (0) (6) 0 (e} 0 0 0 9 0 0 (0) (6) (0) (0) 0 (e} snuiyoajuy Aysng
v 8 0 0 0 (4 0 0 ce ck 0 4 te) (e) 10) 0 0 ie) snuiyoe}uy UMO1g
0) 80 0) 0 0) 80 0) ) ) ae) 0) cl 0) 0) 0 60 0) f°) Agee durems
(0) LO fe) 0 (e) te) 0 0 0 me) te) 0 0 ie) 0 fe) (0) 0 _ JOP Jayea1H
(0) xe) 0 0 (e) 0 0 ) 0 rae) 0 (e) (e) 0 0 (0) (0) (e) wnssod AWB6id
v0 €0 (e) 0 te) 0 0 ie) 0 20 ie) © @ 0 0 0 ie} 0 yequioN UOWWOD
0 LO> 0 80 (0) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 {0} ejeoy
70 I {0} 0 ie} (0) 0 0 @ é 0 0 0 0 0 ie) 0 le} wnssod paljuepluy
€ 60 Ss. @ € 80 0 0 v 60 6 é é ie} 0 (4 0 0 Jepy seins
Z, LL bk 6 G bk 8 € v Ol S Ol z 6 OL S 0 el wnssoq |/e}YySn4g UOWUWOD
ve st 6 8 88 99 29 v9 8 bE 9 Ze Lv €b ve oh 0 0 lunssogd |!e}Guly UOWWUOD
SWIdNSHVW
) L 0 Zz 0) v 0) 0) 0 Z0 0 8 0) ) 0 ) 0 0 eupiyoy peyeeq-yoys
SSWSYLONOW
(%) selseds jeuWueW
lwo XO4d IVO XOd LVO xOd LVvO xO4 1vo XxOd IVDO XOd~ LVO XO4 LVO X64 1VO X0d
% "sey e10ysejo4 ied |BUOHEN
WNVH3AO sieug ey, eyyey jUNOW puojees sebuey Buou,q IIH 8@4, eUD Kee, Buou,g sey Buomeung “M448 1eAOY

Te A0 ee an

305

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

Research Reports

The Distribution and Abundance of Australian Fur Seals
Arctocephalus pusillus and Bottlenose Dolphins Tursiops trun-
catus in Western Port, Victoria.

P Dann’, R Jessop' and M. Healy’

Abstract

The distributions and seasonal occurrences of Australian Fur Seals and Bottlenose Dolphins in
Western Port were examined at monthly intervals between 1991 and 1994 along an 81 km route at
sea, Fifty-seven seals were seen on 27 surveys (79%) with a maximum number of six in any month-
ly count. Most seals were recorded in the western and northern arms of the bay, particularly at the
western entrance near the breeding colony. Generally single and relatively small individuals were
seen and these were presumed to be juveniles or small adult females. Forty-six dolphins were seen
in the bay on eleven occasions (32% trips) but no seasonal pattern was obvious. Usually the dol-
phins were recorded in small pods near the two entrances of the bay and the maximum number
recorded was ten (The Victorian Naturalist 1996, 113 306-310).

Introduction

Twenty-four species of marine mammals
have been reported in Victoria (Wakefield
1967; Menkhorst 1995) but with the
exception of a few species, notably
Australian Fur Seals Arctocephalus pusil-
lus (Warneke 1975, 1982; Warneke and
Shaughnessy 1985), there is little pub-
lished information on their local distribu-
tions or life histories. Australian Fur Seals
range widely in south-eastern Australian
waters but appear to be restricted to the
seas on and near the continental shelf. The
total population is estimated to be between
35,000 and 60,000 (Kirkwood et al. 1992),
of which more than two thirds are concen-
trated at three sites in Bass Strait:
Judgement Rocks, Seal Rocks and Lady
Julia Percy Island (Warneke 1982). Ten to
twelve thousand seals breed at Seal Rocks,
four kilometres south-west of the western
entrance of Western Port (Warneke and
Shaughnessy 1985), but very few are
reported feeding in bays, estuaries or along
the coast although they are thought to pose a
problem to mesh-net fisheries in Port Phillip
Bay and Western Port (Warneke 1982).

The Bottlenose Dolphin Tursiops trunca-
tus is widely distributed around the
Australian coast and throughout the world
(except in polar seas). It is commonly
encountered along the Victorian coast and
in the larger bays and estuaries. Little is
known of the life history and status of the
Bottlenose Dolphin in Victorian waters
(LCC 1993) but recent studies of the

' Penguin Reserve Committee of Management,
PO Box 97, Cowes, Phillip Island, Victoria 3922.

306

species in Port Phillip Bay suggest that one
or more pods are resident there (Jeff Weir
pers. comm.).

Western Port lies on the southern coast of
Victoria, east of Melbourne, and includes
680 km? of tidal mudflats. It has a 263 km
coastline, 107 km of which are mangrove-
lined (Shapiro 1975). One large island
(Phillip Island) lies across the southern
edge and a larger island (French Island)
occupies the centre of the Bay (Fig.3). In
recent years there have been a number of
publications on the distribution and abun-
dance of birds in Western Port (Loyn et al.
1994; Dann et al. 1994; Dann and Jessop
in prep.) but no systematic study of the
distribution and abundance of the marine
mammals has been carried out.

In this paper we present information on
the distribution and seasonal occurrence of
Australian Fur Seals and Bottlenose
Dolphins in Western Port between 199]
and 1994 based on monthly boat surveys
along a 81 km route. This information was
collected as part of a study of the marine birds
in Western Port (Dann and Jessop in prep).

Methods

Thirty-four monthly surveys were com-
pleted in the 40 months between May 1991
and August 1994. We aimed to space the
counts at four-weekly intervals but boat
engine failure and inclement weather
caused five counts to be abandoned or
postponed. Marine mammals were counted
along an 81 km series of transects (Fig.3)
from a boat travelling at c.35 km/h (Table 1).

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

The transects were perpendicular to the
main channels to cover the entire range of
sub-tidal water depths in each section of
the bay and thus avoided any biases associ-
ated with potential depth preferences of
either species. Intertidal areas were not tra-
versed and subtidal areas less than two
metres deep at high tide were also not
counted, with the exception of those areas
in the eastern part of the Bay (Fig.3). The
northern part of the western arm could not
be traversed due to the dangerous condi-
tions for boats caused by a combination of
shallow water and substantial waves.
However, no seals or dolphins were locat-
ed in surveys of this area in autumn and
spring during calm weather.

Usually two observers were stationed on
either side of a seven-metre boat (eye
height c.4 m) and counted all pinnipeds
and cetaceans in the right-angled sector
from the bow to starboard or port.
Sightings of each seal or dolphin were
made up to 500 m from the boat and
recorded on a tape cassette. The observa-
tion included the time, transect, number of
individuals and behaviour at the time.
Difficulties of visibility caused by weather
(Tasker ef al. 1984) were reduced by only
counting on days with wind speeds of less
than 10 knots. The transect runs usually
took five hours and were carried out
around the middle of the day and, when
possible, within a few hours of high tide.
Identifications were made using 8 x 40
binoculars.

Results
Australian Fur Seals

A total of 57 seals was recorded during
the survey period (this figure includes
seven seals seen between Cowes and the
start of the survey route at the western
entrance to Western Port), giving a mean
number of 1.7 per trip. Seals were seen on
27 surveys (79%) and the maximum num-
ber observed in any monthly count was six
(in July 1993, Fig.1). The seasonal pattern
of abundance in Western Port was more
clearly illustrated by the monthly means of
all counts (Fig.2.). Slightly higher numbers
of seals were found in March and July but
there did not appear to be any marked sea-
sonal pattern.

Seals were seen in all parts of the bay and
on all transects except two of the shorter
runs at the top of the north arm (Fig.3).
Most were recorded in the western and
northern arms of the bay, particularly at
the western entrance near the breeding
colony (Fig.3). Relatively few were seen in
the shallower eastern arm and none over
intertidal areas.

Generally single (mean group size, 1.08 +
0.23, n= 51, rangel-2) and relatively
small individuals were seen and these were
presumed to be juveniles or small adult
females. Only one adult male was recorded
(February 1992), Almost all were ‘sailing’
when seen (i.e. resting with one flipper
held vertically out of the water) and only
one was observed feeding (on a Southern
Fiddler Trygonorhina guanerius).

Table 1, The numbers of seals and dolphins seen each month in Western Port, June 1991 to August

1994. N.=nocount.

1991 1992
Seals Dolphins Seals Dolphins
Jan 4 0
Feb 1 0
Mar 2. 4
Apr 2 0
May 2 0
Jun 1 0 2 5
Jul 2 0 3 10
Aug 0 0 N N
Sep N N 0 0
Oct 1 0 0 0
Nov 0 8 2 0
Dec | 0 3 5

By
B
wm
o
N
-_

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

1993 1994

Seals Dolphins Seals Dolphins
1 6 1 0
1 0 0 0
1 0 4 0
0 0 3 0
2 4 0 0

N N 3 0
6 2 N N
2 0 4 0
1 0
1 0
1 2

N N

_
a
—
>

Research Reports

10 +

1991 1992

9+
8+
7+
6+
54
at
3+

TOTAL NUMBERS

O SEALS

MDOLPHINS

Fig. 1. The total numbers of seals and dolphins counted each month in Western Port between April
1991 and August 1994. N denotes missing counts.

Bottlenose Dolphins

A total of 46 dolphins was recorded dur-
ing the survey period, giving a mean num-
ber of 1.4 per trip. Dolphins were seen in
the bay on I1 occasions (32% trips) and
the maximum number recorded was 10
(July 1992). Monthly means of all counts
showed slightly higher numbers of dol-
phins in July and November but no obvi-
ous seasonal pattern was apparent (Fig.2).

Most of the dolphins were recorded in the
western and eastern arms of the bay usual-
ly in the vicinity of the two entrances
(Fig.3). None was seen in the northern
parts of the bay or over intertidal areas.
Dolphins were generally recorded in small
pods (mean group size, 4.6 + 2.84, n= 10,
range 1-10),

Discussion

Our surveys suggest that Western Port is
not important for pinnipeds and cetaceans;
the only two species recorded, Australian
Fur Seal and Bottlenose Dolphin, being
uncommon and sporadic in their occur-
rence in the bay during the survey period.

OSEALs
BDOLPHINS

MONTHLY MEAN

O |

o
w
a

Fig. 2. The mean numbers of seals and dolphins
counted each month in Western Port between
April 1991 and August 1994.

308

Australian Fur Seals

Fur Seals were more frequently encoun-
tered at the western entrance near their
breeding colony than in other parts of
Western Port: all but one individual were
judged to be juveniles. Juveniles are rela-
tively sedentary with the natal colony
being the focus of their activities (Warneke
1975). There have been 67 recoveries of
juveniles tagged at Seal Rocks and report-
ed dead in the western arm and central
Western Port and adjacent coasts
(Warneke 1975). Proportionally these rep-
resented a small part (13%) of the 514
recoveries of tagged juveniles to that time.
It could be argued that many of the recov-
ered carcasses found on the west coast of
Phillip Island were a result of the prevail-
ing southwesterly swells, i.e. were carried
there from Seal Rocks rather than repre-
senting seal activity along that portion of
coast (Warneke pers. comm.). A relatively
large area on the western side of the west-
erm arm was not surveyed regularly (Fig.3)
and may have been used by a few seals.
However, Warneke’s (1975) opinion that
Western Port was not an important area for
seals is supported by the low numbers
reported during the course of this study.
The bay seems to serve as a relatively
small part of the range of juvenile seals
and to be unimportant as a foraging area
for the adult population. Western Port's
influence on the colony, if any, would
seem to be through indirect mechanisms,
such as its role in determining the water
quality around Seal Rocks or possibly

The Victorian Naturalist

Research Reports

\
\,

(Bae

Seal Rocks =>”

Bass Strait

D ae

Hastings e( \— a

Fig. 3. The distribution of Australian Fur Seal sightings, and the distribution of B i

‘ig. i i f ottlenose Dol
sightings in Western Port. The series of transects are shown as black lines and the Hiphied sia ie
those less than two metres deep at high tide and include all intertidal areas and some shallow subti-

dal areas.

through effects on inshore productivity in
the region.

Bottlenose Dolphins

Dolphins were more likely to be recorded
in the vicinity of the eastern and western
entrances and, unlike those in Port Phillip
Bay (Jeff Weir pers. comm.), may not be
resident. Their occurrence in Western Port
appeared transitory and individuals seen in
this survey may have been part of the
groups commonly frequenting Port Phillip
Bay or Bass Strait. There appears to be no
published data on the occurrence of dol-
phins in Western Port in the past which
would shed some light on any changes in
their use of the bay.

Bottlenose Dolphins are thought to con-
sist of inshore and offshore forms, and the
inshore form is occasionally reported in
freshwater rivers, but these reports are
most likely to be of vagrants or temporary
visitors (Klinowska 1991). Excursions
upstream have been reported in Western
Port also. For example, two individuals
were recorded in the Bass River four kilo-
metres upstream from the bay on the
20 October 1980, one an aged lactating
female which died and the other a young,
possibly adult, male which was taken to

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

Taronga Zoo for rehabilitation (Atlas of
Victorian Wildlife, Department of
Conservation and Natural Resources; R.
Warneke pers. comm.).

The mean size of groups frequenting
Western Port was typical of group sizes in
Victoria and elsewhere in the world.
Locally, they are commonly seen in herds
of about five to 20 inshore and occasional-
ly in larger aggregations further out to sea
(Menkhorst 1995). Leatherwood and
Reeves (1982) reviewed group sizes in this
species and gave mean values of between
two and 18. There is some degree of segre-
gation within nearshore populations based
on sex and age (Klinowska 1991) and this
may also influence group size. McBrearty
et al. (1986) give the most common group
size for Bottlenose Dolphins in Europe as
two to five individuals and the second most
common sighting is of solitary animals.

This study has found that Australian Fur
Seals and Bottlenose Dolphins appear to
make little regular use of Western Port and
has highlighted the lack of published infor-
mation on the foraging areas, movements
and seasonal patterns of occurrence of
these two species in Victorian waters.

309

Research Reports

Acknowledgements

This project was funded by Esso, BHP
Petroleum, BHP Community Chest and the
Penguin Reserve Committee of Management
and we would like to express our gratitude to
these organisations for all their support. We are
indebted to Darrell Bray and Ian Huther for their
capable boat handling and Wendy D’amore and
Leanne Renwick who provided considerable
assistance in the field sometimes under difficult
conditions. Additional help with data collation
and figure preparation was generously given by
Marion Wood, Maria Belvedere and Wetgens
Dimmlich. Bob Warneke, Ian Norman and Mike
Cullen kindly provided comments on drafts of
this paper.

References

Dann, P. and Jessop, R.. (in prep.). The distribution and
abundance of Little Penguins in Western Port, south-
eastern Australia.

Dann, P., Loyn, R. L. and Bingham, P. (1994). Ten
years of waterbird counts in Western Port,
1974-84. IL: Waders, gulls and terns. Australian
Birdwatcher 15, 351-365,

Kirkwood, R. Pemberton, D. and Copson, G, (1992),
‘The Conservation and Management of Seals in
Tasmania’. (Department of Parks, Wildlife and
Heritage, Hobart).

Klinowska, M. (1991). ‘Dolphins, porpoises and
whales of the world: The IUCN red data book’.
(IUCN: Gland).

LCC, (1993). ‘Marine and coastal special investigation
descriptive report’. (Land Conservation Council:
Melbourne)

Leatherwood, S. and Reeves, R. (1982) Bottlenose
Dolphin Tursiops truncatus and other toothed
cetaceans. Jn ‘Wild mammals of North America.
Biology, Management and Economics’, Eds. J. A.
Chapman and G, A. Feldhamer. (Johns Hopkins

dent.
Knowledgeable

Willing to take part

310

Dan Mc Innes - 90 Years Young!
We congratulate Dan on reaching this milestone.

Dan is the oldest, active member of the FNCV, and, throughout a distin-
guished time with the Club, he has held a large number of the possible offi-
cial positions. His interests range over a wide spectrum from geology and
the computer to atomic physics, but his special love is the microscopical life
in Melbourne’s ponds - still under the scrutiny of Dan’s beady eye. As well,
Dan finds time to attend and help at the Melbourne Junior Field Naturalists
Club (ex Hawthorn Juniors) meetings, where he was once a long-time presi-

Dan epitomises what an FNCV member is all about:

Keen to pass on that knowledge

It is a privilege to know him.

University Press: Baltimore).

Loyn, R. L., Dann, P. and Bingham, P, (1994). Ten
years of waterbird counts in Western Port, 1974-84.
I; Waterfowl and large wading birds, Australian
Birdwatcher 15, 333-350.

Menkhorst, P. W. (1995). ed. ‘Mammals of Victoria:
distribution, ecology and conservation’. (Oxford
University Press; Melbourne),

McBrearty, D, A., Message, M. A. and King, G. A.
(1986). Observations on small cetaceans in the north-
west Atlantic Ocean and the Mediterranean Sea:
1978-1982. In ‘Research on dolphins’, Eds. M. M.
Bryden and R. J. Harrison. (Oxford University Press:
Oxford).

Shapiro, M. A. (1975). ‘Westernport Bay
Environmental Study, 1973-74". (Ministry for
Conservation; Melbourne).

Tasker, M. L., Hope-Jones, P., Dixon, T and Blake, B.
F. (1984). Counting seabirds at sea from ships: a
review of methods employed and a suggestion for a
standardized approach. Auk 101, 567-577.

Wakefield, N. A. (1967). Whales and dolphins record-
ed for Victoria, The Victorian Naturalist 84,273 - 281.
Warneke, R. M. (1975). Dispersal and mortality of
juvenile fur seals Arctocephalus pusillus doriferus in
Bass Strait, southeastern Australia, Rapports et
Proces -Verbaux des Reunions. Conseil International

pour Exploration de la Mer 169, 296 - 302.

Warneke, R. M. (1982). The distribution and abun-
dance of seals in the Australasian Region, with sum-
maries of biology and current research. Pp. 431-75.
Jn ‘Mammals in the Seas. FAO Fisheries Series No.
5, Vol IV’. (Food and Agricultural Organization of
the United Nations: Rome),

Warneke, R. M. and Shaughnessy, P. D. (1985).
Arctocephalus pusillus, the South African and
Australian Fur Seal: taxonomy, evolution, biography,
and life history. Jn ‘Studies of sea mammals in south
latitudes’. Eds. J. K. Ling and M. M. Bryden. (South
Australian Museum; Adelaide).

The Victorian Naturalist

Contributions

Observations of White-footed Dunnart Sminthopsis leucopus:
Behaviour and Nest-site Locations on the Anglesea Heathlands,
Victoria.

S. D. Hutchings'

Introduction

Various activities of the White-footed
Dunnart Sminthopsis leucopus were observed
during a study of the home range and habitat
utilisation conducted during 1993 on the Bald
Hills heathlands of Anglesea, Victoria
(BT507466). Prior to this study, information
regarding S. leucopus was limited to data
obtained via trapping studies (Cheetam and
Wallis 1981; Lunney et al. 1989) and no
knowledge of the behaviour of this species
beyond trap sites was available. However,
during the winter months of 1993, dunnarts
captured during trapping sessions were fitted
with radio collars and radio tracked. This
enabled individual dunnarts to be followed
between trap sites and beyond trapping grids
and subsequently dunnart behaviour was
observed.

Study Area

The Bald Hills heathlands are located within
the ALCOA lease area of the Anglesea heath-
lands approximately 100 km southwest of
Melboume. These heathlands are dominated
by a midstorey of shrubs, mainly
Leptospermum myrsinoides, Xanthorrhoea
australis, Leptospermum continentale,
Monotoca scoparia, Dillwynia glaberrima,
Epacris impressa, with a sparse overstorey of
Eucalyptus willisii (Land Conservation
Council 1987).

Methods
Trapping ;

Trapping was conducted for three nights
before and after each radio tracking session.
One hundred Elliot traps, baited with a mix-
ture of rolled oats, peanut butter and honey,
were placed 15 m apart in a 10 x 10 grid con-
figuration. Traps were checked each morning
and all species captured were numbered,
weighed and body measurements were taken.
Radio Tracking

A small number of S. leucopus captured dur-
ing trapping sessions were fitted with a radio
collar. Each collar carried a single stage radio

‘Department of Biological and Chemical Sciences,
Deakin University, Geelong, Victoria 3217.

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

transmitter that emitted a unique frequency
output. This enabled a number of dunnarts to
be radio tracked at the one time. The range of
each collar was approximately 200 m and bat-
tery life extended for eight days.

Individual dunnarts fitted with radio collars
were released into the field and radio tracked
using a portable receiver and a three element
Yagi hand held antenna. Radio tracking was
conducted on consecutive nights between 6:00
pm and 1:00 am for a maximum of eight
nights. The position of each dunnart was noted
every half hour either by sight or when esti-
mated to be within 5 m of the observer. When
an individual was sighted some time was
devoted to observing its behaviour. To remove
the radio collars at the end of the radio track-
ing session, dunnarts were retrapped, the col-
lars were cut off and the animals were
released.

Results
Dunnart Captures

Five dunnarts that were trapped during the
study period were selected for radio tracking.
Three individuals, one female and two males,
were radio tracked for sessions consisting of a
period of eight nights. A further two individu-
als, one male and one female, were radio
tracked on two separate occasions, both ses-
sions consisting of eight night periods.
Response to Radio Collars

Although it was common for S. leucopus
individuals fitted with radio collars to move
away from the capture site immediately upon
release, not all did so. Observations of these
dunnarts found that they displayed a variety of
immediate responses to the attachment of a
radio collar, A number of dunnarts scratched
at the collar as if it were an irritation before
moving away. A male dunnart vigorously
groomed his face and head and then com-
menced a series of somersaults as if trying to
rid himself of the collar. A female dunnart
clung to a stick with her feet and jaws and pro-
ceeded to hiss and roll around on the ground
for two to three minutes. When these dunnarts
were observed later in the radio tracking ses-

311

Contributions

sion they rarely appeared to pay any attention
to the collar except for an occasional scratch.
However, collars attached too loosely can
wear at the skin around the dunnarts’ necks
and some may also get their front legs trapped
under the collar whilst trying to remove it.
Response to Telemetry Operators

Although the dunnarts moved away from the
operators during daylight hours, at night they
appeared to be quite unconcerned. This was
especially the case for dunnarts that had been
handled regularly during trapping sessions
conducted prior to radio tracking.
Alternatively, dunnarts that were infrequently
handled during trapping never allowed close
approach by the operators. However, on many
occasions dunnarts would pass within cen-
timetres of the operators, apparently ignoring
their presence, even while the operators were
talking. Most dunnarts also remained unre-
sponsive to any direct approach by the opera-
tors and subsequent close observation of their
behaviour was possible.

Hunting and Feeding Behaviour

Two instances of S. leucopus hunting behav-
iour were observed during radio tracking. In
the first instance a dunnart climbed the leaves
of a Austral Grass Tree Xanthorrhoea aus-
tralis to capture a frog clinging to the leaves.
The dunnart then disappeared under the skirt
of the plant to eat. When the skirt of the
Xanthorrhoea was parted, the dunnart was
observed feeding on the captured frog.
Feeding began with the back legs of the frog
and continued towards the head while the frog
was still alive. This same dunnart was later
observed climbing the stalk of a Thatch Saw
Sedge Gahnia radula to capture a moth which
had alighted at the top of the plant.

General observations of feeding behaviour
found that S. leucopus sat up on their hind legs
to feed, grasped their prey with their front feet,
and chewed upon the prey using the side of
the mouth. Afterwards the dunnarts thorough-
ly groomed their front feet, face and head
before moving on. Most prey items appeared
to be insects, such as moths, millipedes and
grasshoppers but, as mentioned above, small
vertebrates were also preyed upon.

Nests

Five dunnart nests were found in a variety of
places. Three nesting sites appeared to be
holes in the ground but whether the dunnarts
dug the holes themselves or were utilising
holes abandoned by other animals was

312

unclear. When a dunnart was in the nest the
opening was obvious and clear of debris.
However, when the dunnart left the nest, the
opening was covered over with moss and
leaves.

Another observed dunnart nest was located
in a hollowed out burnt stump of a
Xanthorrhoea. The bottom of the hollow was
covered with moss and leaves. An uncollared,
presumably female, dunnart was in this nest
and the male dunnart being radio tracked at
the time was often observed in the immediate
vicinity.

A third nest, found during daylight hours in
ground level vegetation, appeared to be simi-
lar to a small bird’s nest. It was made of dried
grass and moss and protected above by
Xanthorrhoea leaves. It was unknown
whether the nest was made by the dunnart or
whether it was the abandoned nest of a bird,

Conclusion

Generally dunnarts appeared to be relatively
solitary animals. Sometimes two radio tracked
individuals would be found within a few
metres of each other, but most of their time
appeared to be spent hunting alone.

The two dunnarts that were frequently han-
dled during trapping sessions appeared to
become de-sensitised to human presence. This
particular observation of S. leucopus behay-
iour has lead to the presumption that dunnart
movement and behaviour in some cases was
not biased by the operator, whilst in other
cases movement by the dunnarts appeared to
be an attempt to avoid the operator.

Acknowledgments

T would like to thank in particular Wes Prosser and
Graeme Castleman for consistently accompanying
me on those long, cold, wet winter nights down to
Anglesea. Not only were they great company during
what can often become tedious field work, but they
were also a great help, taking over when my anten-
na arm got tired.

References

Cheetam, R, J. and Wallis, R. L. (1981). Field notes on the
White-footed Dunnart, Sminthopsis leucopus Gray
ae : Dasyuridae). The Victorian Naturalist 98,

Land Conservation Council (1987). Melbourne Area:
District 1 Review. Final Recommendations. (Land
Conservation Council; Victoria).

Lunney, D.; O’Connell, M. and Sanders, J. (1989). Habitat
of the White-footed Dunnart, Sminthopsis leucopus Gray
(Marsupialia : Dasyuridae) in a logged, burnt forest near
Bega, New South Wales. Australian Journal of Ecology
14, 335-44.

The Victorian Naturalist

Naturalist Notes

From our Naturalist in Residence, Glen Jameson

Middle Yarra Timelines

Most of the resident Bird

population activities are dominated by the strategies of

breeding, the landscape is ablaze with Wa

, the ttle and the i
pats with the sensuous brush of Spring. A SEAN 4 a tsa
all in the bushlands are swept up in a surge of the powers of production. ‘

‘e

Early Spring

An Early Spring dawn is a soundscape
filled with an explosion of birdsong pro-
claiming the joys and power of parent-
hood. It is a tumultuous time, loud with ,
territorial trumpeting , a feathered fanfare
of clucks, whistles, trills, caws, twitters
and pipings from all points of the compass.
Weebills to Wedge-tailed Eagles are either
on the nest, feeding young, or telling the
world about it.

Along the Yarra River the Pallid
Cuckoo, with an ear out for those who are
proclaiming nest sites, joins in the chorus
from a Silver Wattle whose blooms have
faded.

The River is in high flow with constant
rain, the water is highly turbid, cold and
productive levels are still low. The
upstream migration from the sea of

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

Common Galaxias, Broad-finned Galaxias
and the Spotted Galaxias begins. On the
Riverbanks, bowers of Small-leaved
Clematis flowers cascade from Burgan
catching morning streams of sunlight.
Dusty Miller, Prickly Moses and Shrubby
Tree Violets flower in the Riparian forest
and, on the ground, Kidney Weed is in
bloom with its minute flowers. A fledgling
Powerful Owl, just out from the hollow,
finds a precarious perch on Burgan while
the parents keep watchful vigilance from
above on the boughs of a tall Manna Gum.
A fox idles below the Burgan hoping for a
mishap.

The seasonal change came one morning
in early August when a waft of warm wind
filled with magical fragrances enveloped
the day with the promise and energy of

313

Naturalist Notes

Spring. Young Eastern Grey Kangaroos
venture out of the pouch and stretch youth-
ful legs by bounding exuberantly over
everything, real and imagined, in fact, the
whole mob moves with real spring in their
long leaps. * Early Spring fever’ even
touches the normally reserved, cagey
behaviour of four Little Ravens who
uncharacteristically involve themselves in
joyous ariel displays over Longridge Park,

Dramatic weather changes are a feature
of early Spring and occur frequently within
hours, sometimes going from cloudy
showers, to warm, bright sunny periods to
cloud, hail and arctic winds. All six sea-
sons in one day. The warming weather
transforms the days with the restless ener-
gy of an awakened changeling. The power
of the Sun surges through the productive
forces stirring up the food chains to ener-
getic generation of new life. Everything is
caught up in the excitement of the new
biotic rhythm.

Downstream, on the Wetlands of the
Peninsula Paddock at Yarra Flats (reputed
to be the site of Streeton’s Still Glides the
Stream) a dozen Pelicans herd fish by
moving in formation with a circular
manoeuvre. In a slow motion watery bal-
let, they close the circle around the herded
fish, then with avian elegance simultane-
ously dip underwater to feed. Cattle
Egrets follow the slow pace of agisting cat-
tle. The ponds begin to warm, and aquatic
plants begin to show new shoots while on
the waters edge, there is the frothy bubble
of Froggy metamorphlings slowly forming
new arms and legs. Flotillas of baby duck-
lings follow their parents in the hunt for a
feed in the Wetlands of Yarra Flats. A
Chestnut Teal pair have successfully bred
this year in the ephemeral pond north of
the Picnic Shelter and they join the Wood
Ducks and Pacific Black Ducks in raising
families.

Across the landscape is splashed the paint
of Wattle. The diversity of form and adapt-
able ecology of the Wattle Family, insures
that wherever you look, Wattle blossom
dominates the vista capturing your focus as
they worship the Sun’s return in a celebra-
tion of its golden tones. The fragrance of
their pollen ladens the air with a heavy,
sweet scent; a Bush incense marking the
ritual arrival of Early Spring. The planting
of non-indigenous Wattles in Gardens,

314

some of which have escaped into
Bushlands, such as the Cootamundra and
early Black Wattles, add further to the
domination by this genus.

In the Grassy Woodlands on the slopes
and valleys, Blackwoods, Kangaroo Thorn,
Hop Wattle and Juniper Wattle lead an
awesome floral array. Colonies of
Greenhood Orchids - Nodding, Blunt,
Trim and Tall patch the forest floor. Whilst
Blue Bonnet, Common Beard Heath, Early
Nancy, Love Creeper, Pink Bells, Yam
Daisy, Scented Sundew, Spur Vellia,
Small Swamp Daisy and Native Violets
amongst others, daub the bushlands in a
riotous profusion of colour. Wonga Vine is
in flower as it hangs from a Yellow Box in
a moist gully where a Horsefield Cuckoo
awaits a moment when it can find an
unguarded nest.

Spur-winged Plovers nesting in open
country are in dispute with all who venture
near their nesting sites, in fact, they seem
to be in a constant state of agitation.
Magpies with hatching young , swoop
across their territory in search for the
unwary who may venture on to their terri-
tory and leave a skull unguarded.
Sometimes they are heard carolling during
the night, perhaps warning of the Powerful
Owl’ s presence or commenting on hatch-
lings.

The Australian Painted Lady Butterfly,
one of the first to emerge are spiralling in
two’s and three’s above the grasses. The
diurnally active Magpie Moths are in flight
above their host plant, Cotton Fireweed.

The first of the migrants, Fairy Martins,
arrive with time to spend on the neat mud
nests that they place under bridges and in
tall culverts. Olive-backed Orioles, Rufous
Whistlers and Satin Flycatchers arrive
soon after.

Exotic Grasses such as Yorkshire Fog,
Sweet Vernal and Cocksfoot grow prodi-
giously during this season outcompeting
the Native Grasses. They have the biologi-
cal advantage of evolving in a colder cli-
mate and are therefore able to grow faster
during cooler weather. The Native Grasses,
have thrown up flowering culms, but need
the extra warmth of True Spring to get into
growth motion.

On the Hilltops out in the Bend of Isles at
Kangaroo Ground, Red Ironbarks are in
prodigious flower, feeding a range of

The Victorian Naturalist

Naturalist Notes

Parrots and Honeyeaters during the day
and Sugar Gliders and Brush-tailed
Phascogales during the night. The Golden
Wattle, Myrtle-leaf Wattle and Thin-leaf
Wattle lead the flowering show across the
hills. Climbing up on a Spreading Wattle is
a Purple Coral Pea and the mix of the yel-
low and purple colours is superb, and the
vivid red of running Postman contrasts
with the creamy tops of Candlesticks; the
Bush has a storehouse of pleasurable
items.

On Fourth Hill of Warrandyte State Park
there is perhaps the most spectacular dis-
play of the floral year. Just before the
Spring equinox, the northern slope is cov-
ered with the Golden Bush-pea in flower,
The golden colours are a show in them-
selves but when contrasted with the fire
blackened trunks of the Red Box, Red
Stringybark and Long-leafed Box, they are
sensational. Fire is essential in regenerat-
ing the Golden Pea-bush and the pre-
scribed burn in 1991, has resulted in a reju-
venated garden of delight.

Amongst the native grasses and leaf litter
of Fourth hill are Leopard Orchids, a few
Waxlips and Green-comb Spider Orchids.
However, a little later in True Spring will

be the time to see Orchids there,

In the late afternoon sun, a Fan-tailed
Cuckoo gulps down a fat caterpillar, the
Juices of which spray golden splinters into
the air above its head. It is a haughty cele-
bration of a successful breeding campaign
whereby the food caught is its alone, not
needing to share it with mate or brood.
Wood White Butterflies are blown along
on the breezes as they search for partners
in between bursts of inclement weather
and Golden Whistlers are heard calling
vigorously.

The night skies dominated by the stars
Altair, Canopus, Achernar, Vega and Spica
rebound with the amplified swamp
orchestra of the Southern Brown Tree
Frog, Common Froglet and the Whistling
Tree Frog. The sound levels emanating
from the mist shrouded Glynns wetlands,
part of Laughing Waters Park, generated
by the Frogs, are in counterpoint with the
soundscape of the Birds at dawn, a eupho-
nious celebration of the Early Spring
euphoria.

Glen Jameson
PO Box 568, Templestowe, Victoria 3106.

* denotes an introduced species

Animals

Glider, Sugar - Petaurus breviceps

Australian Kangaroos, Eastern Grey
- Macropus giganteus

Phascogale, Brush-tailed -

Phascogale tapoatafa

Cuckoo, Fan-tailed - Cacomantis
flabelliformis

Cuckoos, Horsefield’s Bornze -

Chrysococcyx basalis

Cuckoos, Pallid - Cucullus pallidus

Duck, Pacific Black - Anas supercil-
tosa

Duck, Australian Wood -
Chenonetta jubata

Egrets, Cattle - Ardea ibis

Magpie, Australian - Gymnorhina
tibicen

Martins, Fairy - Hirundo ariel

Oriole,Olive-backed - Oriolus sagit-

tatus
Owl, Powerful - Ninox strenua
Raven, Little - Corvus mellori
Pelican Australian - Pelecanus con-
spicillatus
Teal, Chestnut - Anas castanea |
Weebill- Smicrornis brevirostris
Wedge-tailed - Aquila audax
Whistler, Golden - Pachycephala
pectoralis

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

Species List.

Whistler, Rufous - Pachycephala
rufiventris

Froglet, Cpommon - Ranidella sig-
nifera

Tree Frog, Southern Brown - Litoria
ewingi

Tree Frog, Whistling - L. verreauxi

Galaxias, Broad-finned - Galaxias
brevipinnis

Galaxias, Common - G. maculatus

Galaxias, Spotted - G. truttaceus

Painted Lady Butterfly Vanessa ker-
Shawi
Moth, Magpie - Nyclemera amica

Plants
Beard Heath, Common -
Leucopogon virgatus
Bells, Pink - Tetratheca ciliata
Blackwood - Acacia melanoxylon
Bonnet, Blue - Hovea linearis
Burgan - Kunzea ericoides a
Bush-pea, Goldern - Pultenea gunnit
Clematis, Small-leaved - Clematis
microphylla
*Cocksfoot - Dactylis glomerata
Daisy, Small Swamp - Brachyscome
uliginosa :
Daisy, Yam - Microseris lanceolata
Dusty Miller - Spyridium panvifoli-

um
Early Nancy - Wurmbea dioica

Fireweed, Cotton - Senecio quadri-
dentatus
Greenhood, Blunt - Pterosylis curta
Greenhood, Nodding - P. nutans
Greenhood, Tall - P. longifolia
Greenhood, Trim - P. pedunculata
Gum, Manna - Eucalyptus viminalis
Kangaroo Thorn - Acacia paradoxa
Love Creeper - Comesperma volu-
bile
Prickly Moses - Acacia verticillata
Scented Sundew - Drosera whittak-

eri
Spur Vellia - Velleia paradoxa
*Sweet Vernal - Anthoxanthum
odoratus
Red Ironbark - Eucalyptus tricarpa
Violets, Native - Viola hederacea
Violet, Shrubby Tree -
Hymenanthera dentata
* Wattle, Cootamundra - Acacia
baileyana
*Wattle, Early Black -- A.decurrens
Wattle, Golden - A. pycnantha
Wattle, Hop - A. stricta
Wattle, Juniper - A. ulicifolia
Wattle, Myrtle-leaf - A. myrtifolia
*Wattle,Sallow - A. longifolia
Wattle, Silver -A.dealbata
Wattle, Thin-leaf - A. aculeatissima
Weed, Kidney -Dichondra repens
*Yorkshire Fog - Holcus lanatus

315

Memorial

Reserve Named in Honour of the Late Dr Jim Willis

The following letter was sent by the Bayside City Council to Mrs M.
Willis and we acknowledge their kind permission to reproduce it here:-

Dear Mrs Willis

Council at its meeting on 26th August, 1996 resolved that a letter under the
seal of BAYSIDE CITY COUNCIL be presented to you, as a mark of
respect for your late husband, Dr Jim Willis AM.

It is well known that Dr Willis was a notable Australian Botanist and
author of numerous publications. As a resident of Brighton since 1937, local
flora and the preservation of the foreshore were of special interest to him.
His professional advice was freely given to local environmental and horti-
cultural groups.

Dr Willis’s research and writings added significantly to our knowledge of
Australian plant species. He was a distinguished Brighton and Australian
citizen.

Accordingly, BAYSIDE CITY COUNCIL has honoured his memory by
naming the area of Bayside foreshore between the Brighton Lifesaving club
and Green Point as “Dr Jim Willis Reserve” in acknowledgement of his
contribution to our community.

The Common Seal of BAYSIDE CITY COUNCIL was hereunto affixed on
the 26th Day of August, 1996 in the presence of

the Chief Commissioner,
Commissioner and
Chief Executive Officer.

Sheila Houghton
1996 Honorary Member of the FNCV

In recognition of outstanding service to the Club, Sheila has been awarded
honorary membership.

Some highlights of her long and productive association with the FNCV are:
1972 - joined the FNCV; 1981- elected as Councillor; 1982 - elected as
Secretary, a position held until 1985; 1985 - elected as Librarian and still holds
this position. During the period 1986-1990 and from 1993 to the present, has
held the postion of Secretary to the Australian Natural History Medallion
Award Committee.

As Librarian, Sheila was responsible for moving the library from the
Herbarium to our Blackburn Hall and for the design of the new library. In 1994
she organised the sale of ‘rare books’, which were not utilized by the Club, and
raised $42,000 by this effort.

Our congratulations to Sheila for a well-deserved Honorary Membership.

316 The Victorian Naturalist

Book Review

Geelong’s Birdlife. In Retrospect

A Selection of Geelong Advertiser Articles by P.J.W. 1945-1958
by Trevor Pescott

Publisher: Yaugher Print, Belmont 1996;
176 pages, 16 pages of illustrations (black & white, colour); RRP $20.00

For this book, Trevor Pescott has edited a
selection of the articles about birds written
for Geelong’s daily newspaper, The
Geelong Advertiser, between 1945 and
1958 by P.J.W. (Percival John Wood).
Pescott is Wood's successor, and has writ-
ten a natural history column in the Geelong
Advertiser since 1960. To provide some
modern context, and to clarify some of
Wood’s idiosyncratic writing, Pescott has
provided commentary on the current status
of some of the birds, and modern nomen-
clature.

Wood was born in Geelong in 1878 and
pursued amateur ornithology as his
employment allowed, but after retirement
he spent a great deal of this time watching,
writing about, painting and sketching
birds. His particular interest in Corio Bay
and its birds was fostered by his activities
as a shipping provedore, when he travelled
on the bay to meet incoming ships.

Wood’s somewhat formal style is remi-
niscent of natural history writing of the late
nineteenth century. He had a keen eye, and
his observations are both careful and well
written. His illustrations were of a style
perhaps most generously described as
naive - at times bordering on the bizarre!

His written work is, however, an important
document of the status of birds in the
GEelong area in the post-war era, and
pescott has done us all a service by making
some of Wood’s writings more readily
available. His columns are particularly
interesting because they allow us to see the
changes that have taken place in local bird
populations since the war. Whilst birds
such as Little Egrets, Galahs, Pied
Oystercatchers and Black-shouldered Kites
are more abundant now than then, others
have fared less well, and for example the
Bush Stone-curlew, Grey-crowned Babbler
and Australian Bustard are now locally
extinct.

This book would no doubt be of greatest
interest to readers from the Geelong dis-
trict, but is probably of general interest to
any fans of historical natural history writ-
ing. The recommended retail price is
$20.00 and readers from outside the
Geelong area can order it directly from the
publisher Yaugher Print, 4 Victorian
Terrace, Belmont, Victoria 3216, phone
(052) 43 4368, fax (052) 41 3227.

Lawrie Conole
2/45 Virginia Street, Newtown, Victoria 3220

Trevor Pescott
1996 Honorary Member of the FNCV

Trevor Pescott was awarded honorary membership of the FNCV at the

December general meeting after 40 years membership. ®L,
Trevor, who won the Australian Natural History Medallion in 1983, has

made an outstanding contribution to natural history study and the conserva-
tion of wildlife and its habitat, particularly in the Geelong region. He was
President of the Geelong Field Naturalists Club from 1961-1964, and is a
well known author, both of a column, in The Geelong Advertiser, and a num-

ber of books.

We extend our congratulations to Trevor

Vol. 113 (6) 1996

317

Honours

1996 Mueller Medal
Awarded to
Dr Sophie Ducker

The 1996 Mueller Medal was present-
ed to Dr. Sophie Ducker by the Premier
of Victoria, Hon. J. G. Kennett, M.P., at
a reception in Queen’s Hall, Parliament
House during the Royal Botanic
Gardens 1996 Commemorative
Conferences. ANZAAS presents the
award to a scientist who is author of
important contributions to anthropology,
botany, geology or zoology, preferably
with special reference to Australia, and
Dr. Ducker is eminently qualified to be a
recipient.

The nomination was based on Dr.
Ducker’s contributions to marine botany
in Australia; her researches into the his-
tory of botanical exploration and collect-
ing in Australia and the Pacific; excel-
lence in teaching and involvement in the
wider community.

Dr. Sophie Ducker (nee von
Klemperer) was born in Berlin in 1909
and was educated both in Germany and
England. In 1929 she entered the
University of Geneva and later the
Technische Hochschule in Stuttgart
where she studied the natural sciences
until her marriage in 1931. Forced to
leave Nazi Germany in 1938 she arrived
in Australia in 1941 and was appointed
as a laboratory technician at the School
of Botany at the University of
Melbourne in 1944. While curating the
department’s collection of soil moulds
she undertook part time studies in sci-
ence and graduated with a bachelor of
science degree in 1953, and a master of
science in 1956 for her research on soil

318

fungi. In 1978 Dr. Ducker was awarded
a D.Sc. degree for the originality of her
research on the reproductive biology of
Australian seagrasses and, in 1993, an
honorary degree of Doctor of Laws in
recognition of her contribution to the
community at large.

Dr. Ducker’s interest in the algae was
stimulated by Professor R. Chodat dur-
ing her studies in Geneva in 1930 but
the opportunity to pursue this interest
did not arise until 1961 when she stud-
ied with the phycologist Dr. Peter Dixon
in Liverpool, England. She returned to
Melbourne in 1962 and founded a
course in Marine Botany which was the
first of its kind in Victoria. In 1995 Dr.
Ducker achieved fifty years of continued
contribution to research and teaching at
the University of Melbourne. She has
published over 100 academic papers and
is the author of two books.

Upon receiving the medal Dr. Ducker
commented on the similarities between
the life of Ferdinand Mueller and her
own: they both had migrated from
Germany to Australia and had spent
their lives in botanical studies. Her
father had been born in Schleswig-
Holstein, Mueller’s birth place also. She
could have added that Mueller’s first
botanical collection in Australia was a
seaweed, collected from the side of the
ship just before he disembarked.

Tan Endersby
56 Looker Road, Montmorency, Victoria 3

The Victorian Naturalist

Sophie Ducker talks to the Premier of Victoria, the Honourable Jeffrey a “eg after
he presented her with the Mueller Medal. Photo courtesy Media Unit, University 0
Melbourne.

The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Inc.

Established 1880
In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria,

Registered Office: FNCV, | Gardenia Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130.
Postal Address: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackbum,3130. Phone/Fax (03)9877 9860

Patron
His Excellency, The Honourable Richard E. McGarvie, The Governor of Victoria

Key Office-Bearers 1996/97
President: Professor ROBERT WALLIS, School of Aquatic Science and Natural Resources
Management, Deakin University (Rusden), Clayton, 3168. (03) 9244 7278, Fax (03) 9244 7403.
Hon. Secretary. Mr GEOFFREY PATERSON, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, 3130.
Phone/Fax (03) 9877 9860
Hon. Treasurer: Mr ARNIS DZEDINS, PO Box 1000, Blind Bight, 3980. (03) 59 987996.
Subscription-Secretary: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, 3130. (03) 9877 9860.
Editors, The Vic. Nat.: ED and PAT GREY, 8 Woona Court, Yallambie, 3085. (03) 9435 9019.
Librarian: Mrs SHEILA HOUGHTON, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, 3130.AH (03) 54 284097.
Excursion Secretary; DOROTHY MAHLER. AH (03) 9435 8408.
Book Sales: Dt ALAN PARKIN, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, 3130. AH (03) 9850 2617.
Programme Secretary/Newsletter Editor: Dr NOEL SCHLEIGER, | Astley Street, Montmorency, 3094,
03) 9435 8408.
Ccanetudetn Caanhnaee JENNY WILSON, 206 Pascoe Vale Road, Essendon, 3040,
AH (03) 9370 6434)

Group Secretaries
Botany; Mr JOHN EICHLER, 18 Bayview Crescent, Black Rock, 3143. (03) 9598 9492.
Day Group: Dr NOEL SCHLEIGER, | Astley Street, Montmorency, 3094. (03) 9435 8408.
Geology: Mr DOUG HARPER, 33 Victoria Crescent, Mont Albert, 3127. (03) 9890 0913.
Fauna Survey: Ms FELICITY GARDE, 18 College Parade, Kew, 3101. (03) 9818 4684.
Marine Research: Mr MICHAEL LYONS. 39 Lennox St., Hawthorn, 3122. (03) 9818 0696.
Microscopical: Mr RAY POWER, 36 Schotters Road, Mernda, 3754. (03) 9717 3511.

MEMBERSHIP
Members receive The Victorian Naturalist and the monthly Field Nat News free. The Club organis-
es several monthly meetings and excursions. Research work, including both botanical and fauna
surveys, is being done at a number of locations in Victoria, and all members are encouraged
to participate.

—
SUBSCRIPTIONS RATES for 1997
(Subscription are due on | January)
First Member
Metropolitan ....ssescssssessessseesssesssestenteessesnssersnenarecresenssnsaeeanegnncnstsatenteegs

Concessional (pensioner/student/unemployed)
Country (more than 5Okm from (C) Ji pete eevee
Fumior (Onder 18) .ssscsseccsseasssescssssousesonccnnesonarecesesenseocnneassasteanessnanernercnvecgrassngueccnnarcerrenrsanettery

Institutional

Australian Institutions .....sss.sscsescsssscessseecsncorsensacsstsosvernecenecenacrastoatecanensssereucnasaptegtesesces assess $55
Overseas Institutions ..... . .AUD$65
SCHOOLS/CIUDS sceccsssnscsresecsvessssnstsrsessecsenssnvervonnesscsserensegseessesongnnsesernentzsepenscasnssensnrensenseneasnsecs $35

Printed by Brown Prior Andereson, 5 Evans Street, Burwood, Victoria 3125.

The Victorian
Naturalist

Index to
Volume 112, 1995

Compiled by K.N. Bell

Amphibians

Amphibians and Reptiles, Melbourne
area, 160

Baw Baw Frog, reassessment of, 190

Philoria frosti, reassessment of, 190

Australian Natural History Medallion
Medallist, R. Elliot, 188

Medallist honoured, 108

Trust fund, 108

Authors

Alexander, J., Mansergh, I. and Schulz,
M., 219

Allan, R. and Elgar, M., 180 (book
review)

Ashby, M. and Gadsden, G., 116

Baverstock ,G.A. and Conole, L.E., 208

Beasley, A.W., 126

Belcher, C., Turner, L., Jelinek, A. and
Cameron, D., 112

Bell, K.N., 228

Bell, K.N., Neil, J.V. and Burn, R., 72

Bender, R. and Irvine, R., 212

Burn, R., Bell, K.N. and Neil, J.V., 72

Butcher, R. and Doeg, T.J., 15

Calder, J., 104 (book review)

Calder, M., 264 (book review)

Cameron, D., Belcher, C., Turner, L. and
Jelinek, A., 112

Clunie, P. and Reed, J. 32

Conole, L.E. and Baverstock, G.A., 208

Costermans, L., 137 (book review)

Coy, R., 6

Crichton, G.A., 255

Doeg, T.J. and Butcher, R., 15

Douglas, J., 136

Dufty, A.C., 79

Dzedins, A., 221

Editors (The Victorian Naturalist), 70
(book review)

Eichler, J., 182

Elgar, M. and Allan, R., 180 (book
review)

Emison, W.B. and Hurley, V.G., 100

Endersby, I. 67

Entwisle, T.J., 139

Falkingham, C., 102, 134, 178, 222, 258

Farnworth, A., 207 (book review)

Field, R.P., 43

Fletcher, R.J., 129,250

Gadsden, G. and Ashby, M., 116

Hollis, G.J., 190

Horne, P.A., 56

Houghton, S., 183 (obituary for W.
Perry), 188

Hurley, V.G. and Emison, W.B., 100

Irvine, R. and Bender, R., 212

James, E. 122

Jameson, G., 174

Jelinek, A., 47

Jelinek, A., Cameron, D., Belcher, C. and
Turner, L., 112

Kelly, P. 266 (book review)

Kutt, A.S., 86

Larwill, S.A., 160

Lunt, I.D., 239

MacQueen, M., 101

McInnes, D.E., 256, 267 (obituary for M.
Allender)

McKinnon, L. and Shepheard, N., 93

Main, B.Y., 202

Mansergh, I., Schulz, M. and Alexander,
J., 219

Martin, A., 177

Meehan, C., 60

Morgan, J., 138 (book review)

Morgan, J.W. and Rollason, T.S., 148

Neil, J.V., Burn, R. and Bell, K.N., 72

New, T.R., 29,40,66 (book review)

New, T.R. and Yen, A.L., 4,36,54

Norman, M.D. and Sant, G.J., 20

O'Hara, T., 50,261

Ralph, C., 106 (letter)

Reed, J. and Clunie, P., 36

Rennick, S., 172

Rollason, T.S. and Morgan, J.W., 148

Sago, J., 234

Sant, G.J. and Norman, M.D., 20

Schleiger, N., 105

Schulz, M., Alexander, J. and
Mansergh, I., 219

Shepheard, N. and McKinnon, L., 93

Turner, L., Jelinek, A., Cameron, D. and
Belcher, C., 112

Vaughan, P., 63

Walsh, N., 262 (book review)

Willis, J.H., 217 (book review)

Yen, A.L., 58

Yen, A.L. and New, T.R., 4,36,54

Birds

Corcorax melanorhampos, and bird
behaviour, 258

Helmeted Honeyeater, habitat revegeta-
tion, 116

Mountain ducks, tragedy of instinct, 255

Peregrine Falcon eyries, Melbourne, 100

Searching for the rare white bird, 174

Tadorna tadornoides, tragedy of instinct,
255

White-winged Choughs and bird behav-
iour, 258

Book Reviews

‘Australian Beetles’, J.F. Lawrence and
E.B. Britton. (P. Kelly), 266

“Australian Natural History Series’. (Eds,
The Victorian Naturalist), 70 ,

‘Flora of Victoria’, Vol.1, eds
D.B. Foreman and N.G. Walsh, Vol.2,
eds. N.G. Walsh and T.J. Entwisle.
(J.H. Willis), 217

“Hidden Rainforests, Subtropical rain-
forests and their invertebrate biodi-ver-
sity.’ G. Williams. (T.R. New), 66

‘Identification Handbook for Native
Grasses.’ M. Mitchell. (J. Morgan), 138

‘Orchids of Victoria’. G. Backhouse and
J. Jeanes, (M. Calder), 264

‘Peninsula Plants: A field guide to indige-
nous plants of the Mornington
Peninsula.’ K. and P. Strickland.
(L. Costermans), 137

‘The Bush. (A guide to the vegetated
landscapes of Australia)’ 2nd Edition.
I.G. Reed. (N. Walsh), 262

‘The Wonders of the Weather.’
B. Crowder. (A. Farnworth), 207

‘The Silken Web: A natural history of
Australian Spiders.’ B. Simon-Brunet,
(M. Elgar and R. Allan), 180

‘Trees of Victoria and adjoining areas.’
L. Costermans. (J. Calder), 104

Botany

Astelia australiana, (Liliaceae), an
overview, 122

Carnivorous plants-carnivorous bugs, 222

Clover Glycine, cleistogamous form,
Arthur’s Seat N.P., 172

Cryptogams at Royal Park,234

Galls, 178 *

Grassland remnant, baseline monitoring,
Sunbury, 148

Mistletoe plants, 134

Remnant grassy forests, woodlands,
European management, 239

Vascular plants, census update 4.4, 139

Victorian alps, 250
Whipstick nature trail, 129

Conservation

Agricultural environments, threatened
ecosystems, 56

tae regions, vulnerable ecosystems,

Butterfly houses, life beyond, 58
Collecting, a threatening process?, 36
Conservation of butterflies, 43
Conservation of freshwater invertebrates,

Conservation status of terrestrial inverte-
brates, 6

Conservation strategy for a threatened
butterfly community, 47

Conservation of marine invertebrates, 20

Conservation of marine invertebrates, San
Remo, 50

Education, improving invertebrate image,
60

Fauna-flora guarantee protection, 32

Focussing on species for conservation, 29

How community and naturalists can con-
tribute to conservation, 63

Management plan for species, 40

Revegetation of habitat, Helmeted hon-
eyeater, 116

Why conserve invertebrates?, 4

Erratum
Omission to Index, vol. 111, 1994.
Jameson, G, 145., 186

FNCV
Annual report (insert in part 2)
Honorary membership, 146

Fish

Fish kill, Broken Creek, factors contribut-
ing to, 93

Oriental Weather Loach, Murray
River, 101

Geology
Foraminiferal, Ostracodal and Molluscan

changes, Corner Inlet, 72
Western MacDonnell Ranges,popular
places, 126

How to be a Naturalist
Botany, 182
Entomology, 67

Geology, 136
Mammal survey, 221
Pond hunting, 256
Shell collecting, 105

Insects

Carnivorous plants-carnivorous bugs, 222
Wasp and the spider, 177

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "The victorian naturalist"

See other formats